APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

APPLE II COMPUTER FAMILY TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Apple II Computer Family Articles

—————————————————————————————————
Apple
Technical Info Library (TIL)
—————————————————————————————————
March 1997

Ex Libris David T. Craig

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 1 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL000.TXT
#####################################################################

APPLE ][ COMPUTER FAMILY

TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Source: Apple Technical Information Library, March 1997

Obtained by David T. Craig

A2TIL001.TXT Apple Tech Info Library Overview: How to Search for Articles
A2TIL002.TXT 16K RAM / Language Cards: Alternate Suppliers
A2TIL003.TXT 80-Column Text Card: Applesoft Control Codes (11/96)
A2TIL004.TXT 80-Column Text Cards: Apple II & II Plus Compatibility (11/96)
A2TIL005.TXT Access II and Apple IIc Plus: No 40-Column Mode
A2TIL006.TXT Access II: Does Not Support VT100 Line Graphics
A2TIL007.TXT Access II: Specifications (Discontinued)
A2TIL008.TXT Apple 3.5 Drive: Description
A2TIL009.TXT Apple 5.25 Drive: Specifications
A2TIL010.TXT Apple Access II 1.3.1: Description and Compat (Discontinued)
A2TIL011.TXT Apple Access II version 1.2: Specifications (Discontinued)
A2TIL012.TXT Apple Access II: 'Character Delay' and 'Line Delay'
A2TIL013.TXT Apple Access II: 1.1 Update
A2TIL014.TXT Apple ADB Keyboard: Specifications (Discontinued)
A2TIL015.TXT Apple Color Plotter: Product Description (Discontinued)
A2TIL016.TXT Apple DMP Card: How to Identify (2/97)
A2TIL017.TXT Apple FORTRAN: Specifications (Discontinued)
A2TIL018.TXT Apple ftp Sites Frequently Asked Questions (2/97)
A2TIL019.TXT Apple II 3.5 Disk Controller Card: Specifications (2/97)
A2TIL020.TXT Apple II 5.25 Drive: Using It With Other Disk Controller Cards
A2TIL021.TXT Apple II and Apple II Plus: Hardware Specs (Discontinued 6/83)
A2TIL022.TXT Apple II And II Plus Hardware: Stopping The Blinking Cursor
A2TIL023.TXT Apple II and II Plus: Shift-Key Modification
A2TIL024.TXT Apple II and II+: Memory typically available to users
A2TIL025.TXT Apple II and II+: Problems with keypresses on the keypad
A2TIL026.TXT Apple II and IIe: Controlling the Reset key
A2TIL027.TXT Apple II and IIe: Interface I/O Signal Timing (2/97)
A2TIL028.TXT Apple II and IIe: Power Supply Input Frequency Limitations
A2TIL029.TXT Apple II AppleShare Network: Troubleshooting Freeze-Ups
A2TIL030.TXT Apple II BASIC: How to Convert Into Macintosh QuickBasic
A2TIL031.TXT Apple II Business Graphics: Specifications (Discontinued)
A2TIL032.TXT Apple II Family and Chooser: Frequently Asked Questions (12/95)
A2TIL033.TXT Apple II Family: Cycle Speeds
A2TIL034.TXT Apple II Family: Driver Not Yet Available for LaserWriter SC
A2TIL035.TXT Apple II Family: No Support for Macintosh Hard Disk 20
A2TIL036.TXT Apple II Family: Square Wave Power Source (2/97)
A2TIL037.TXT Apple II Family: Using With LaserWriter (2/97)
A2TIL038.TXT Apple II FORTRAN: Double precision arithmetic
A2TIL039.TXT Apple II Hardware: 6522 Versatile Interface Adapter (2/97)
A2TIL040.TXT Apple II Hardware: Apple II vs Apple II+
A2TIL041.TXT Apple II Hardware: Character Generator ROM
A2TIL042.TXT Apple II Hardware: Direct Memory Access (2/97)
A2TIL043.TXT Apple II Hardware: Errata in Apple II Reference Manual (1 of 2)
A2TIL044.TXT Apple II Hardware: Errata in Apple II Reference Manual (2 of 2)
A2TIL045.TXT Apple II Hardware: The Apple II Keyboard
A2TIL046.TXT Apple II High Speed SCSI Card: CMS Hard Drive (11/96)
A2TIL047.TXT Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card: Description (11/96)
A2TIL048.TXT Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card: SCSI Reset Line (11/96)
A2TIL049.TXT Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card: Setting DMA (11/96)
A2TIL050.TXT Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card: Setting SCSI ID (11/96)
A2TIL051.TXT Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card: Using with GS (11/96)
A2TIL052.TXT Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card: Description (2/97)
A2TIL053.TXT Apple II Language Card Changes
A2TIL054.TXT Apple II Machine Language: Accessing the keyboard
A2TIL055.TXT Apple II Memory Expansion Card: Diagnostics (11/96)

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 2 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

A2TIL056.TXT Apple II Memory Expansion Cards: Decsription (11/96)

A2TIL057.TXT Apple II Monochrome Monitors: Specifications (Discontinued)
A2TIL058.TXT Apple II Network: Drop Box Creation From Finder Only
A2TIL059.TXT Apple II Pascal: Disk directory structure
A2TIL060.TXT Apple II Peripheral Cards: How Pascal identifies (2/97)
A2TIL061.TXT Apple II Peripheral Cards: Sending TABs to your Printer
A2TIL062.TXT Apple II Peripherals: Quick Reference Chart (2/97)
A2TIL063.TXT Apple II Plus: How To Generate Lowercase & Uppercase Characters
A2TIL064.TXT Apple II Plus: How to Identify a Revision 7 Motherboard?
A2TIL065.TXT Apple II Plus: Monitor and Drives Compatible with Apple IIe
A2TIL066.TXT Apple II Plus: Relocation/Configuration Error (2/97)
A2TIL067.TXT Apple II ProFile Interface Card Modification for the Apple II GS
A2TIL068.TXT Apple II SCSI Card: Cable Pinouts (11/96)
A2TIL069.TXT Apple II SCSI Card: Interrupt Problem (11/96)
A2TIL070.TXT Apple II SCSI Card: Large File Transfer (11/96)
A2TIL071.TXT Apple II SCSI Card: Product Description (11/96)
A2TIL072.TXT Apple II SCSI Card: ROM Upgrade (2/97)
A2TIL073.TXT Apple II Setup and GS/OS: Compatible Versions
A2TIL074.TXT Apple II Silentype manual A2L0034/030-0095-00: Errata
A2TIL075.TXT Apple II Software: Current Versions (10/94)
A2TIL076.TXT Apple II System Disk 3.0: Requires MouseText, 128K Memory
A2TIL077.TXT Apple II Systems: How to Identify them With Inter-Poll
A2TIL078.TXT Apple II Video Overlay Card: Connectors (11/96)
A2TIL079.TXT Apple II Video Overlay Card: Configurations (11/96)
A2TIL080.TXT Apple II Video Overlay Card: Description (11/96)
A2TIL081.TXT Apple II Video Overlay Card: Features (11/96)
A2TIL082.TXT Apple II Video Overlay Card: Product Description (11/96)
A2TIL083.TXT Apple II Video Overlay Card: Tips (11/96)
A2TIL084.TXT Apple II Video Overlay Card: Using Key Colors (11/96)
A2TIL085.TXT Apple II VisiCalc: How To Convert Its Files To MS-DOS
A2TIL086.TXT Apple II Workstation Card: Description (11/96)
A2TIL087.TXT Apple II Workstation Card: Magic Slate Printing Issue (11/96)
A2TIL088.TXT Apple II Workstation Card: No Apple IIGS Support (2/97)
A2TIL089.TXT Apple II Workstation Card: Printing Via a Serial Port
A2TIL090.TXT Apple II Workstation Card: Product Information (2/97)
A2TIL091.TXT Apple II Workstation Card: Specifications (2/97)
A2TIL092.TXT Apple II Workstation Card: Workstations and Zones (2/97)
A2TIL093.TXT Apple II+ Mini-Assembler (1 of 4)
A2TIL094.TXT Apple II+ Mini-Assembler (2 of 4)
A2TIL095.TXT Apple II+ Mini-Assembler (3 of 4)
A2TIL096.TXT Apple II+ Mini-Assembler (4 of 4)
A2TIL097.TXT Apple II, Apple III, Lisa Family: Video Specs (Discontinued)
A2TIL098.TXT Apple II, II+, IIe, IIc: ASCII characters, values & keystrokes
A2TIL099.TXT Apple II, IIe and IIc: Mini-Assembler
A2TIL100.TXT Apple II, IIe and II+: Auto-Run Apple w/o DOS (2 of 2)
A2TIL101.TXT Apple II, IIe and II+: Auto-Run Apple w/o DOS (1 of 2)
A2TIL102.TXT Apple II: "Muffin" Is on DOS 3.3 System Master
A2TIL103.TXT Apple II: "Understanding the Apple II"
A2TIL104.TXT Apple II: 80 Column Card Cannot Handle Some "Color" Programs
A2TIL105.TXT Apple II: Conflict between Versions of ProDOS and Backup II
A2TIL106.TXT Apple II: Digitizers
A2TIL107.TXT Apple II: Disabling Keyboard During Serial I/O (2/97)
A2TIL108.TXT Apple II: Function of Start 13
A2TIL109.TXT Apple II: How to Copy Software from 5.25 to 3.5-inch Disks
A2TIL110.TXT Apple II: Information Sources (2/97)
A2TIL111.TXT Apple II: Interrupt Handling (2/97)
A2TIL112.TXT Apple II: LocalTalk ImageWriter Delay from BASIC (2/97)
A2TIL113.TXT Apple II: Mouse Memory Locations
A2TIL114.TXT Apple II: No Diskless Startup Across Zones
A2TIL115.TXT Apple II: Program To Recover Deleted Files
A2TIL116.TXT Apple II: Sources of Used Equipment
A2TIL117.TXT Apple II: Starting Over Bridges
A2TIL118.TXT Apple II: Transferring Data to the Macintosh
A2TIL119.TXT Apple II: Transferring Files To a Macintosh (9/95)
A2TIL120.TXT Apple II: Translating Graphics Files to Macintosh
A2TIL121.TXT Apple II: Turn Off Line Feed When Using 3rd Party Printers

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 3 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

A2TIL122.TXT Apple II: Using a Switchbox With ImageWriter II

A2TIL123.TXT Apple II: Wrong Version of Setup Causes Aristotle Problems
A2TIL124.TXT Apple II-to-IBM Host File Transfer
A2TIL125.TXT Apple II/II+/IIe: Cable Compatibility (9/94)
A2TIL126.TXT Apple IIc Plus: Cable Compatibility (9/94)
A2TIL127.TXT Apple IIc Plus: Specifications (Discontinued 11/90)
A2TIL128.TXT Apple IIc: 80/40 switch
A2TIL129.TXT Apple IIc: Cable Compatibility (10/95)
A2TIL130.TXT Apple IIc: Description (Discontinued)
A2TIL131.TXT Apple IIe and IIGS: Optical Character Recognition Software
A2TIL132.TXT Apple IIe Card: Can't Use Apple II Memory Expansion Cards
A2TIL133.TXT Apple IIe Card: Hardware Specifications (7/93)
A2TIL134.TXT Apple IIe Card: How to Save Information to a Hard Drive
A2TIL135.TXT Apple IIe Card: ProDOS 1.9. Corrects AppleWorks Date Errors
A2TIL136.TXT Apple IIe Emulation on an Apple III
A2TIL137.TXT Apple IIe Enhancement Kit: Technical Benefits (10/94)
A2TIL138.TXT Apple IIe to Epson LX-86: Cable Recommendations
A2TIL139.TXT Apple IIe: Component diagnostics (1 of 2)
A2TIL140.TXT Apple IIe: Description (Discontinued)
A2TIL141.TXT Apple IIe: Printing to Networked Printers
A2TIL142.TXT Apple IIe: Two Ways to Make it into AppleTalk Workstations
A2TIL143.TXT Apple IIe: Video Signal "NTSC-Compatible", Not "NTSC-Compliant"
A2TIL144.TXT Apple IIGS (1MB, ROM 03): Specifications (Discontinued 12/92)
A2TIL145.TXT Apple IIGS Adapter Cable: Pinouts
A2TIL146.TXT Apple IIGS and Integer BASIC
A2TIL147.TXT Apple IIGS Finder
A2TIL148.TXT Apple IIgs OS v 6.0: Aristotle Installation (2/95)
A2TIL149.TXT Apple IIGS Super-High-Res Graphics: Access from BASIC
A2TIL150.TXT Apple IIGS System 5.0: Setting Up an AppleShare Network (7/91)
A2TIL151.TXT Apple IIGS System Disk 5.0: Overview
A2TIL152.TXT Apple IIGS System Disk 5.0: ToolBox Changes
A2TIL153.TXT Apple IIGS Workstation Software: New Product Information
A2TIL154.TXT Apple IIGS: 5.25" System Utilities
A2TIL155.TXT Apple IIgs: Cable Compatibility (10/94)
A2TIL156.TXT Apple IIGS: Cabling Configurations
A2TIL157.TXT Apple IIGS: Connecting Disk Drives
A2TIL158.TXT Apple IIGS: Contiguous RAM Depends on Memory Board
A2TIL159.TXT Apple IIGS: Description (Discontinued)
A2TIL160.TXT Apple IIGS: Differences with other Apple II models
A2TIL161.TXT Apple IIGS: Disabling the Control Panel
A2TIL162.TXT Apple IIGS: Displaying in Monochrome Mode
A2TIL163.TXT Apple IIGS: DOS 3.3 and Hard Drives
A2TIL164.TXT Apple IIgs: Dropping Off The AppleShare Network (11/94)
A2TIL165.TXT Apple IIGS: Duplicate BASIC.SYSTEM Files
A2TIL166.TXT Apple IIGS: Error in Show Text File Desktop Accessory
A2TIL167.TXT Apple IIGS: Graphics Modes (10/94)
A2TIL168.TXT Apple IIGS: High-Speed SCSI Card Memory Requirement (11/94)
A2TIL169.TXT Apple IIGS: How to Access the Clock
A2TIL170.TXT Apple IIGS: How To Print Low-Res/High-Res Graphics Files
A2TIL171.TXT Apple IIGS: How To Print to Local & Network Printers
A2TIL172.TXT Apple IIGS: Printing to Legal-Size Paper From AppleWorks
A2TIL173.TXT Apple IIGS: ProDOS/16 Version 2
A2TIL174.TXT Apple IIGS: ProDOS/8
A2TIL175.TXT Apple IIGS: Recovering a corrupted ProFile
A2TIL176.TXT Apple IIGS: System 6.0 Software and HyperCard IIGS 1.1
A2TIL177.TXT Apple IIGS: System Diagnostic Errors
A2TIL178.TXT Apple IIGS: Tabbing In Applesoft BASIC
A2TIL179.TXT Apple IIGS: Using on AppleTalk Phase II Network
A2TIL180.TXT Apple IIGS: Using with a MicroNet Hard Drive
A2TIL181.TXT Apple IIGS: Video Generation Chip (VGC)
A2TIL182.TXT Apple III : Won't Boot AII Disk Calibrate in AII Emulation
A2TIL183.TXT Apple III QuickFile: Converting Data to Macintosh
A2TIL184.TXT Apple III Universal Parallel Interface Card (UPIC)
A2TIL185.TXT Apple III: Apple Disk Drives and Emulation Mode
A2TIL186.TXT Apple III: Apple II Emulation mode and RGB Video
A2TIL187.TXT Apple III: Cables for Various Printers (1 of 4)

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 4 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

A2TIL188.TXT Apple III: Game Paddles

A2TIL189.TXT Apple III: Interrupts and Reset on Peripheral Slots
A2TIL190.TXT Apple III: Joystick Input--Apple II Game Incompatibility
A2TIL191.TXT Apple III: Printing from BASIC and Pascal
A2TIL192.TXT Apple III: Specifications (Discontinued 9/85)
A2TIL193.TXT Apple LaserWriter Printers: Models Supporting Apple II (5/96)
A2TIL194.TXT Apple Logo II: Specifications (Discontinued)
A2TIL195.TXT Apple Pascal 1.3: Startup Slot
A2TIL196.TXT Apple Products: Dates Introduced and Discontinued (2/97)
A2TIL197.TXT Apple Software and Hardware Diagnostic Part Numbers (9/95)
A2TIL198.TXT Apple Writer II (ProDOS): Parallel printer interface problems
A2TIL199.TXT Apple Writer II under DOS 3.3: Printer codes from all Apples
A2TIL200.TXT Apple Writer II: DOS Version--Printing With Parallel Printers
A2TIL201.TXT Apple Writer II: DOS Version--Recovering "Lost" Text Files
A2TIL202.TXT Apple Writer II: DOS Version--Sup-R-Term and Super Serial Card
A2TIL203.TXT Apple Writer II: Specifications (Discontinued)
A2TIL204.TXT Apple Writer IIe under DOS 3.3: Printer codes from all Apples
A2TIL205.TXT Apple Writer IIe under ProDOS: Printer codes from all Apples
A2TIL206.TXT Apple Writer IIe: DOS version--Patch for the IIc
A2TIL207.TXT AppleColor Composite Monitor IIe: Description (Discontinued)
A2TIL208.TXT AppleColor Composite Monitors: Compatible With Both IIGS and IIe
A2TIL209.TXT AppleColor Monitor 100: Making it compatible with the Apple IIGS
A2TIL210.TXT AppleLine: How To Use With an Apple IIe or Apple IIc (10/94)
A2TIL211.TXT AppleLink for Apple II: Not ProDOS-Based
A2TIL212.TXT AppleShare & Apple IIGS: "Cannot Load Descriptor File" Error
A2TIL213.TXT AppleShare 3.0: Memory and Apple II Limits (11/94)
A2TIL214.TXT AppleShare File Server: Allowing Apple II Network Startup
A2TIL215.TXT AppleShare Network: How to Check for ProDOS Files
A2TIL216.TXT AppleShare: Apple II Practical Node Limits
A2TIL217.TXT AppleShare: How To Keep Apple II & Macintosh Software Separate
A2TIL218.TXT AppleShare: Leave LaserWriters on for Apple II Workstations
A2TIL219.TXT AppleShare: Problems Using Chooser with Apple II Computers
A2TIL220.TXT AppleSingle/AppleDouble Formats: Developer's Note (9/94)
A2TIL221.TXT Applesoft BASIC: Advancing to Next Line After a ProDOS Call
A2TIL222.TXT Applesoft BASIC: Displaying and printing text in 80 columns
A2TIL223.TXT Applesoft BASIC: Making a text file from a program file
A2TIL224.TXT Applesoft BASIC: Moving a Listing to a Macintosh and Back
A2TIL225.TXT Applesoft Firmware Card: Options
A2TIL226.TXT Applesoft: Commas and printing
A2TIL227.TXT Applesoft: Dotted Vertical Lines in High-Res
A2TIL228.TXT Applesoft: Internals--Device I/O Routines
A2TIL229.TXT Applesoft: Internals--Error Processor Routines
A2TIL230.TXT Applesoft: Internals--Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)
A2TIL231.TXT Applesoft: Internals--Floating Point Math Package (3 of 3)
A2TIL232.TXT Applesoft: Internals--Floating Point Math Package (1 of 3)
A2TIL233.TXT Applesoft: Internals--High resolution graphics routines
A2TIL234.TXT Applesoft: Internals--Index to Routines (1 of 4)
A2TIL235.TXT Applesoft: Internals--Index to Routines (2 of 4)
A2TIL236.TXT Applesoft: Internals--Index to Routines (3 of 4)
A2TIL237.TXT Applesoft: Internals--Index to routines (4 of 4)
A2TIL238.TXT Applesoft: Internals--Introduction (1 of 2)
A2TIL239.TXT Applesoft: Internals--Introduction (1 of 2)
A2TIL240.TXT Applesoft: Internals--Miscellaneous Routines
A2TIL241.TXT Applesoft: Internals--Page Zero Memory Map (1 of 2)
A2TIL242.TXT Applesoft: Internals--Page Zero Memory Map (2 of 2)
A2TIL243.TXT Applesoft: Internals--String Utilities (1 of 2)
A2TIL244.TXT Applesoft: Internals--String Utilities (2 of 2)
A2TIL245.TXT Applesoft: Internals--TXTPTR routines (2 of 2)
A2TIL246.TXT Applesoft: Internals--Where to find routines (1 of 2)
A2TIL247.TXT Applesoft: Internals--Where to find routines (2 of 2)
A2TIL248.TXT Applesoft: PEEKs, POKEs, and CALLs
A2TIL249.TXT Applesoft: Stopping the Apple IIe cursor from blinking
A2TIL250.TXT AppleTalk Printing: Apple IIe Workstation Card Slot
A2TIL251.TXT AppleTalk Remote Access: Using w/ Apple IIe Emulation (11/94)
A2TIL252.TXT AppleTalk: Cable TV/Broadband Network Connectivity
A2TIL253.TXT AppleWorks 2.0: Features

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 5 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

A2TIL254.TXT AppleWorks 2.0: Problems Printing to Networked ImageWriter

A2TIL255.TXT AppleWorks on 5.25-Inch Disks: Printing to LaserWriter
A2TIL256.TXT AppleWorks to LocalTalk ImageWriter: Printing Problems
A2TIL257.TXT AppleWorks: Creating database documents from text with tabs
A2TIL258.TXT AppleWorks: Desktop size on the Apple IIGS
A2TIL259.TXT AppleWorks: Installing it on a ProFile or UniDisk 3.5
A2TIL260.TXT AppleWorks: Problems Printing to LocalTalk ImageWriter
A2TIL261.TXT AppleWorks: RamWorks Card Needs Larger Memory Capacity (9/95)
A2TIL262.TXT AppleWorks: Standard and Custom Printer Interfaces (1 of 2)
A2TIL263.TXT AppleWorks: Using it on the Apple II UniDisk 3.5
A2TIL264.TXT AppleWorks: Using it on the Apple II and Apple II Plus
A2TIL265.TXT Applied Engineering (6/95)
A2TIL266.TXT Beagle Brothers Inc.
A2TIL267.TXT Blyth Software
A2TIL268.TXT Business Technology Manufacturing, Inc.
A2TIL269.TXT Changes in Word Juggler for the Apple II (vers. 2.7 or greater)
A2TIL270.TXT Color Plotter Model 410: Specifications (Discontinued)
A2TIL271.TXT ColorMonitor IIc, ColorMonitor IIe: Specs (Discontinued)
A2TIL272.TXT COMMAND.COM: A General Description
A2TIL273.TXT Communications Interface: Directly controlling the 6850 ACIA
A2TIL274.TXT Daisy Wheel Printer: Specifications (Discontinued)
A2TIL275.TXT DAP (Drive Acceptance Program) Documentation
A2TIL276.TXT DART 1.5.3: Version Change History (12/94)
A2TIL277.TXT DART: Utility for Duplicating Floppy Disks (10/93)
A2TIL278.TXT Disk II: Specifications (Discontinued)
A2TIL279.TXT DOS 3.3 6502 editor assembler: PR slot command
A2TIL280.TXT DOS 3.3: INTBASIC and FPBASIC on the master diskette
A2TIL281.TXT Dot Matrix Printer (DMP): Printer codes
A2TIL282.TXT Double-Density Versus High-Density Disks
A2TIL283.TXT Dow Jones News & Quotes Reporter: Specifications
A2TIL284.TXT DuoDisk Problem/Cure: Copy Protected Disk Damaged During Boot
A2TIL285.TXT Educational Resources (5/93)
A2TIL286.TXT Electrical Specifications: Apple Peripherals (2 of 2) (9/96)
A2TIL287.TXT Electrical Specifications: Apple Computers (1 of 2) (2/97)
A2TIL288.TXT Electronic Learning Systems, Inc.
A2TIL289.TXT European Apple II: No Color With U.S. Monitor (2/97)
A2TIL290.TXT Extended 80-Column RGB Card: Color Monitor 100 Pinouts (11/96)
A2TIL291.TXT FORTRAN Language Reference Manual: Errata
A2TIL292.TXT FORTRAN: FORT2 Copy protection
A2TIL293.TXT FORTRAN: Using FORTRAN 1.0 with Pascal 1.2
A2TIL294.TXT FORTRAN: Using WCHAR from FORTRAN
A2TIL295.TXT GS BASIC: Features and Editing Commands
A2TIL296.TXT GS/OS 5.0: "No Finder" Printing Fix
A2TIL297.TXT GS/OS 5.0.2: "File Not Found" Error
A2TIL298.TXT GS/OS 5.0.2: Solves "No Finder" Printing Problem
A2TIL299.TXT GS/OS 6.0.1: How It Differs from 6.0 (6/93)
A2TIL300.TXT GS/OS: How To See OS Info at Startup
A2TIL301.TXT GS/OS: How To Use It With A ProFile
A2TIL302.TXT GS/OS: Needs Latest ROM Revision To Work With ProFile
A2TIL303.TXT GS/OS: SCSI and ProFile Card Compatibility
A2TIL304.TXT Hard Disk 20SC: How to Connect to an Apple IIe/IIGS
A2TIL305.TXT HD-20SC: What You'll Need to Format It With an Apple II
A2TIL306.TXT Hearlihy and Co. (USA)
A2TIL307.TXT High Speed Serial Interface Card: Settings (11/96)
A2TIL308.TXT High-Density Diskettes: Which Drives Support Them (10/94)
A2TIL309.TXT IEEE-488 Interface Card: Product Description (11/96)
A2TIL310.TXT IIGS Memory Expansion Card: Description (11/96)
A2TIL311.TXT ImageWriter Carriage Assembly stops or vibrates
A2TIL312.TXT ImageWriter I: Settings for All Apples (4/94)
A2TIL313.TXT ImageWriter II: Connector cables for all Apples
A2TIL314.TXT ImageWriter II: Description
A2TIL315.TXT ImageWriter II: IBM 3287 printer emulation
A2TIL316.TXT Imagewriter LQ: Connector Cables for Apple Computers (3/95)
A2TIL317.TXT ImageWriter: Guide to Apple II Errata
A2TIL318.TXT Innovative Systems
A2TIL319.TXT Instant Pascal is Compatible with Apple IIe Card

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 6 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

A2TIL320.TXT Instant Pascal: Transferring files to and from Apple II Pascal

A2TIL321.TXT Instant Pascal: Using the Apple DMP
A2TIL322.TXT Integer BASIC Firmware Card: Switch Options (2/97)
A2TIL323.TXT Inter%Poll: How to Identify Active Apple II Systems
A2TIL324.TXT Joystick: You'll Need an Adapter for Use with the Apple II
A2TIL325.TXT Language Card: Loading Integer BASIC (2/97)
A2TIL326.TXT LaserWriter: Connecting to Apple II or Apple III
A2TIL327.TXT LaserWriter: Shared by Macintosh, Apple IIe, and IBM PC
A2TIL328.TXT Logo II: How to print procedures
A2TIL329.TXT Macintosh 512K/512Ke: Cable Compatibility (7/95)
A2TIL330.TXT Macintosh PC Exchange: Troubleshooting Overview (7/96)
A2TIL331.TXT Macintosh, Apple II: Specifications of Plastic Enclosures (4/94)
A2TIL332.TXT MacPeak SCSI Drive: How to Use with an Apple IIGS
A2TIL333.TXT Manx Software Systems
A2TIL334.TXT Monitor III: Repair Tips
A2TIL335.TXT Motorola CDX268: Terminal Emulation for Macintosh or Apple II
A2TIL336.TXT Mouse Compatibility: Macintosh Plus and Apple II Computers
A2TIL337.TXT MousePaint: Printing
A2TIL338.TXT MouseText: Display for Characters "F" and "G"
A2TIL339.TXT Moving Apple II DOS 3.3 Data to Macintosh
A2TIL340.TXT Nite Owl Productions (5/93)
A2TIL341.TXT Parallel Interface Card: 3rd Party Printers (11/96)
A2TIL342.TXT Parallel Interface Card: Product Description (11/96)
A2TIL343.TXT Pascal 1.2 128K Development System: Using it with a QC Hard Disk
A2TIL344.TXT Pascal 1.3: Compatible With IIGS RAM Disk, 3.5" Disk
A2TIL345.TXT Pascal 1.3: Using it on a Hard Disk 20SC
A2TIL346.TXT Pascal 1.3: Using UNITSTATUS
A2TIL347.TXT Pascal II: Using Library Name Files
A2TIL348.TXT PC Transporter: IIGS Driver Not Available For AppleShare
A2TIL349.TXT Performa: Running Apple II Software (3/93)
A2TIL350.TXT Practical Computer Technologies (5/93)
A2TIL351.TXT Preowned Electronics
A2TIL352.TXT Problem using Apple II parallel cable with UPIC
A2TIL353.TXT ProDOS 8: Finding Volume Size using Assembly Language
A2TIL354.TXT ProDOS 8: How To Find Disk, Controller, and Block Information
A2TIL355.TXT ProDOS Applications Need "Chooser II" To Select A Printer
A2TIL356.TXT ProDOS Assembler Tools: Startup Sequence
A2TIL357.TXT ProDOS Assembler Tools: Technical product description
A2TIL358.TXT ProDOS Can't Handle Disk Volumes Larger Than 32MB
A2TIL359.TXT ProDos GS/OS, and Instant Pascal: Launching and Quitting
A2TIL360.TXT ProDOS: Converting Files from 5.25-inch Disks to Macintosh
A2TIL361.TXT ProDOS: Limited to 32 megabyte access on HD40SC and HD80SC
A2TIL362.TXT ProDOS: Product Overview
A2TIL363.TXT ProDOS: Using /RAM and Double High-Resolution Graphics
A2TIL364.TXT ProFile Formatting Error #21
A2TIL365.TXT ProFile Hard Drive: Specifications (Discontinued)
A2TIL366.TXT ProFile: Formatting Compatibility (10/94)
A2TIL367.TXT Quality Computers (11/94)
A2TIL368.TXT Quark QC Hard Disk: Specifications (Discontinued)
A2TIL369.TXT Queue, Inc.
A2TIL370.TXT QuickFile IIe and QuickFile III File Sharing
A2TIL371.TXT Reading ProDOS Diskettes on a Power Macintosh (9/94)
A2TIL372.TXT Redmond Cable Corporation (5/93)
A2TIL373.TXT Resource Central (5/93)
A2TIL374.TXT Roger Wagner Publishing, Inc.
A2TIL375.TXT School Office Software Systems
A2TIL376.TXT Scribe Printer: Specifications (Discontinued)
A2TIL377.TXT SCSI Hard Disk Drives: Interleave Information (11/94)
A2TIL378.TXT Shreve Systems (5/93)
A2TIL379.TXT So What Software
A2TIL380.TXT SoftCard III (CP/M): Moving Files from Apple II CP/M
A2TIL381.TXT Softcard III: Diskette compatibility with Apple II CP/M
A2TIL382.TXT SoftSpoken, Inc.
A2TIL383.TXT Southern California Research Group
A2TIL384.TXT Sun Remarketing, Inc. (11/96)
A2TIL385.TXT Super Serial Card: Accessing it through Machine Language

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 7 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

A2TIL386.TXT Super Serial Card: Description (12/96)

A2TIL387.TXT Super Serial Card: Using with Machine Language (12/96)
A2TIL388.TXT System 7 Pro: Read Me Incorrect About Apple IIe Card SW (10/93)
A2TIL389.TXT Temporal Acuity Products, Inc.
A2TIL390.TXT The Apple II Cassette Interface (2 of 2)
A2TIL391.TXT The Apple II Cassette Interface (1 of 2)
A2TIL392.TXT The ByteWorks, Inc.
A2TIL393.TXT Thirdware Computer Products
A2TIL394.TXT ThunderWare
A2TIL395.TXT Tulin Technology
A2TIL396.TXT UniDisk: Specifications (Discontinued)
A2TIL397.TXT UPIC: Interfacing the Epson MX-80 Printer
A2TIL398.TXT UPIC: Interfacing the OKIDATA 83A printer
A2TIL399.TXT US Apple SW Updates Available Online (03/97)
A2TIL400.TXT Using DOS 3.3 with Catalyst 2.1 (1 of 5)
A2TIL401.TXT Using DOS 3.3 with Catalyst 2.1 (2 of 5)
A2TIL402.TXT Using DOS 3.3 with Catalyst 2.1 (3 of 5)
A2TIL403.TXT Using DOS 3.3 with Catalyst 2.1 (4 of 5)
A2TIL404.TXT Using DOS 3.3 with Catalyst 2.1 (5 of 5)
A2TIL405.TXT Using the Old Monitor with the Apple Language Card
A2TIL406.TXT Word Juggler for the Apple II Print To Disk Option
A2TIL407.TXT WPL: How to make AUTOLETTER use surnames

[END]

### END OF FILE A2TIL000.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 8 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL001.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple Tech Info Library Overview: How to Search for Articles
Header: Apple Tech Info Library Overview: How to Search for Articles
Article Created: 22 February 1995

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

The following discussion gives an overview of the use of the Technical Information
Library, keywords, constructing searches, and relevance ranking.

For a description of how to submit an article for publication, refer to the article
titled "Tech Info Library: Submitting Articles for Publication".

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

=================================
THE TECHNICAL INFORMATION LIBRARY
=================================

What Is The Technical Information Library?

==========================================

The Apple Technical Information Library (TIL) is Apple's official technical support
database. The TIL is a textual database of several thousand articles about Apple
and third-party product technical issues. The TIL is accessible by thousands of
users world-wide on online services such as AppleLink, eWorld, CompuServe, and the
Internet (both World Wide Web and WAIS). The TIL is updated daily or weekly
(depending on the online service you are using) with new information and is the
same database that Apple employees use to answer customer questions.

Where You Can Find the TIL

==========================

A subset of the TIL is available to anyone through these online services:

CompuServe
----------
Located in the Apple Tech Info area (go apltil).

The Internet
------------
Maintained in two locations:

info.hed.apple.com (Home Gopher Server)

Path: Home Gopher Server -> Computer Information -> Apple Tech Info Library

info.apple.com

World Wide Web

--------------
Located at this URL: http://www.info.apple.com

eWorld
------

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 9 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Located in the Quick Answers Area (shortcut: tech info) in the Apple Customer
Center of the Computer Center building.

AppleLink
---------
Located in the Support Area.

SEARCHING THE TIL

=================

There are four ways to search the TIL:

* By keyword (not available on CompuServe)

* By full text search
* By publication date (on AppleLink, CompuServe, and eWorld -- See
NOTE)
* By browsing folders (on eWorld and AppleLink)

NOTE: This search varies slightly between platforms. See the specific platform
section below for information on searching by date.

Searching with Keywords

=======================

Use keywords to quickly and easily find the information you are looking for in
the TIL. For best results, use a keyword and a product name. Here is an example
of using a keyword and product name in a search string:

"SPECSHT and Quadra 840AV"

This search string finds the "Quadra 840AV: Specifications" article.

Using a keyword in a search string may not find all relevant articles; some
articles were in the TIL prior to the implementation of keywords. In addition,
some related articles do not include the keyword for the article to which it
relates.

Keywords are available in the TIL on all online services except CompuServe. See
the section "The TIL on CompuServe" later in this article for information on
searching the TIL on CompuServe.

The keywords in the following list can help you easily narrow a search. This
list is current as of February 20, 1995:

Description Keyword
----------- -------

Available in rich text via FAX KFAX

Cable Information CABINFO
Compatibility KCOMPAT
Document Manual Errors KMANERR
Emerging Issues KISSUE
Information Alley KALLEY
Internet Related Information KINTER
Matrix/ Table KTABLE
Newton Message Pad KNMP
Online Information KOL
PowerBook KPBOOK
PowerPC, Power Macintosh KPPC
Read Me files KREADME (see NOTE)

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 10 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Specification Sheets SPECSHT

Support Issues SUPT
System 7.0 Articles SYS7
System 7.5 Articles SYS75
Technical Information Library KHELP
Third Party Compatibility Lists PCOMPAT
Third Party Info 3PTY
Troubleshooting: Hardware HTS
Troubleshooting: Network KNTS
Troubleshooting: Software KSTS
Windows/MS-DOS KWINDOW

NOTE: Currently being added. Articles will become active with this keyword over
the next several weeks.

Entering Text Queries

=====================

You can search the TIL by simply typing in a word or phrase and then clicking the
Search button. A list of all articles that contain the word or phrase you entered
displays in a scrolling field. You can then double-click on an individual title
to view the article.

Spell Correctly
---------------
To ensure a complete search, it is important to spell correctly. Products are
indexed into the TIL by their full name. Capitalization and trademark symbols
are not necessary.

Use Full Product Names

----------------------
When making searches, it is important to use the full product name. For a
complete listing of all Apple product names, see the Apple Computer, Inc.
Trademark List. This can be located by searching the TIL using "trademark list"
as the search information.

Use Full Search Phrases When Appropriate

----------------------------------------
It is possible to use a full search phrase when searching the TIL. For example:
searching for "color stylewriter pro" finds all articles that contain the
exact phrase "Color StyleWriter Pro".

Searching Tips
--------------
When you do not know an exact phrase, use operators such as AND, OR, or NOT
between words to expand or limit your search. For example, typing in
"PowerBook and Printer" gives you a listing of all articles that contain
the words PowerBook and Printer anywhere in the document. If you're looking
for information on toner cartridges for a LaserWriter, typing the search
string "laserwriter and (toner or cartridge)" finds every document that
includes the words LaserWriter and toner or the words LaserWriter and cartridge.

Relevance Ranking of Articles

=============================

The theory of relevance ranking is that it matches your search words against

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 11 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

the textual content of selected information sources to find articles that

match the search request. A statistical algorithm then ranks the articles
according to relevancy and displays the most relevant article(s) at the
top of the hit list. As a result, you can see at a glance which articles
are most relevant. Relevance ranking helps you find more pertinent information
with less effort.

=====================
THE TIL ON COMPUSERVE
=====================

This section describes the differences in searching the TIL on CompuServe.

You can search the TIL on CompuServe in three ways:

* By product category
* By Publication date
* By full text search

You can perform a search using one or a combination of these methods.

We recommend using "Full Text Search" in your search (alone or in combination

with one or both of the other methods). Although searching requires more time,
in many cases you get more matches based on your search criteria.

Searching on CompuServe
=======================

The following instructions assume that you are using CIM (CompuServe
Information manager) software. (If you are using the text mode, please
type the number next to the appropriate line item.)

Step 1: Type "Go APLTIL" to access the main search screen for the TIL.

Step 2: Select "Search the Apple Technical Information Library"

Step 3: Complete Step 3 as described below for the type of search you want.

Step 4: Complete Step 4 as described below for the type of search you want.

The remaining search steps follow the separate Step 3 and Step 4 procedures.
To perform a combination search, complete Step 3 and Step 4 for each desired
type of search before continuing with Step 5.

Searching by Product Category

-----------------------------
Step 3: Select "Product Category."

Step 4: Select the product category you want to search:

- Any Product Category
- AppleTalk
- A/UX
- HyperCard
- LaserWriter
- Newton
- Performa
- PowerBook
- Power Macintosh

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 12 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

- Quadra
- System 7

Searching by Publication Date

-----------------------------
Step 3: Select "Publication Date."

Step 4: Select the date specification and enter the search date in MM/DD/YY format.
The date specifications are:
- Any Date
- On or After a Specific Date
- On or Before a Specific Date

Searching with Full Text

------------------------
Step 3: Select "Full Text Search"

Step 4: Enter the word or words you want to search for. You can enter all words
in the first of the three available rows, which results in a search for the
exact string. You can enter words in different rows, which results in a search
for the specified words in any order (in other words, the multiple rows provide
an "and" function). For example: Entering "Power Macintosh printing" on the
first row searches for this exact string; entering "Power Macintosh" on the
first row and "printing" on the second row searches for an article that includes
the two strings "Power Macintosh" and "printing" somewhere in the article.
(CompuServe does not support boolean "or" or "not" type searches.)

Step 5: The Apple Tech Info Library performs the search and reports the results
labeled "Records selected: nnn".

Step 6: Select "Display Selected Records" to view all article titles of articles
found in the search.

Step 7: Select individual article title(s) to view the article(s).

====================
THE TIL ON APPLELINK
====================

This section describes how to browse folders and search by date in the TIL
on AppleLink.

Browsing Folders
================

You can browse folders on AppleLink and eWorld by clicking on the Index button
in the main TIL window. When you click on this button, a List of Library
Subjects window displays. This window lists all the folders in which TIL
articles are stored. Double click on a folder, opening any subsequent folders,
until you find the article title you are looking for.

Searching by Date
=================

You can search by date on AppleLink by entering a date string

(format MMM DD, YYYY, as in Oct 23, 1994) in either the Newer Than or Older Than
fields. Then click on Search Library.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 13 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

=================
THE TIL ON eWORLD
=================

This section describes how to browse folders on eWorld.

Browsing Folders
================

The default view for the TIL on eWorld is by folder. Simply double click on
the desired folder, and open any subsequent folders, until you find the article
title you are looking for.

Searching With a Text String

============================

To search the TIL on eWorld with a text string, click the Find button. A text
search window displays. Enter the desired string and click the Find button.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1995, Apple Computer, Inc.

### END OF FILE A2TIL001.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 14 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL002.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: 16K RAM / Language Cards: Alternate Suppliers

Header: 16K RAM / Language Cards: Alternate Suppliers

1. Saturn RAM Expansion Card

-- Expands memory by 32K or 64K and functions as a language card.

-- Includes software:

1. RAMEXPAND and MOVEDOS memory enhancers

2. PSEUDODISK disk emulation for:

a. DOS
b. Pascal
c. CP/M (64K only).

-- Minimum Configuration Requirements: Apple II; Apple II+; Apple IIe

-- Source:

Titan Technologies Inc.

310 W. Ann Street
Ann Arbor, MI 48104
(313) 662-8542

2. Micro-Design 16K RAM Card

-- Minimum Configuration Requirements: Apple II; Apple II+; Apple IIe

-- Source:

Micro-Design
6301-B Manchaca Road
Austin, TX 78745
(512) 441-7890
(800) 531-5002

3. Supercom 16K RAM Card

-- Increases memory to 64K and allows a user to run CP/M-80 software

requiring 44K-56K.

-- Permits a user to write programs in FORTRAN, Pascal, LISP and BASIC

under the UCSD p-System.

-- Minimum Configuration Requirements; Apple II; Apple IIe

-- Source:

ADT Enterprises
P.O. Box 1500 #315
Corona Del Mar, Ca. 92625
(714) 760-7065

4. Apricorn 16K RAM / Language Card

-- Source:

Apricorn
7050 Convoy Court
San Diego, CA 92111

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 15 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

(619) 569-9483

5. Microtek 16K RAM / Language Card

-- Source:

Personal Computer Products

11590 West Bernardo Court
San Diego, CA 92127
(619) 485-8411

6. Legend Industries RAM card products

-- 3 RAM card products

-- Source:

Legend Industries, Ltd.

2220 Scott Lake Road
Pontiac, MI 48054
(313) 674-0953

7. Prometheus Products 16K & 128K RAM cards

-- Source:

Prometheus Products, Inc.

45277 Fremont Blvd.
Fremont, CA 94538
(415) 490-2370

8. R.H. Electronics 16K RAM card

-- Source:

R.H. Electronics, Inc.

(805) 688-2047 ext. 4709
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL002.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 16 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL003.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: 80-Column Text Card: Applesoft Control Codes (11/96)

Header: 80-Column Text Card: Applesoft Control Codes (11/96)

Article Created: 1 January 1986

Article Reviewed/Updated: 14 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

When you write BASIC programs while the 80-Column Text Card is active, there
are a number of functions you can use by pressing the CTRL key in conjunction
with another key. Functions activated by pressing these two-key combinations
are called control character functions. Some control character functions work
when you type them in from the keyboard as well as when used within PRINT
statements in BASIC programs.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Table of Control Character Codes:

Key to Notes codes:

1 - Only available when 80-Column Text Card is active

2 - Only works from the keyboard, not in a program
3 - Only works in a program, doesn't work from the keyboard
4 - Not supported under BASIC

Apple ASCII
Control ASCII IIe Decimal What
Character Name Name Code Notes is Executed
--------- ---- ---- ---- ----- ------------

CTRL-G BEL bell 7 Produces a 1000 Hz tone for

0.1 second
CTRL-H BS backspace 8 Moves cursor position one space
to the left; from left edge of
window, moves to right end of
line above.
CTRL-J LF line feed 10 Moves cursor position down to
next line in window; scrolls if
needed.
CTRL-K VT clear EOS 11 1 Clears from cursor position to
the end of the window.
CTRL-L FF clear 12 1 Moves cursor position to upper-
left corner of window and clears
window.
CTRL-M CR return 13 Moves cursor position to left
end of next line in window;
scrolls
if needed.
CTRL-N SO normal 14 1,3 Sets display format normal.
CTRL-O SI inverse 15 1,3 Sets display format inverse.
CTRL-Q DC1 40-column 17 1,3 Sets display to 40 columns.
CTRL-R DC2 80-column 18 1,3 Sets display to 80 columns.
CTRL-S DC3 stop list 19 1,2 Stops sending characters to the
display until a key is pressed.
CTRL-U NAK quit 21 1,3 Deactivates 80-column Text Card,
homes cursor, and clears screen.
CTRL-V SYN scroll 22 1 Scrolls the display down one line,
leaving the cursor in the current
position.
CTRL-W ETB scroll up 23 1 Scrolls the display up one line,

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 17 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

leaving the cursor in the current

position.
CTRL-Y EM home 25 1 Moves cursor position to upper-
left corner of window (but doesn't
clear).
CTRL-Z SUB clear line 26 1 Clears the line the cursor
position is on.
CTRL-\ FS forward 28 1 Moves cursor position one space to
the right; from right edge window,
moves it to left end of line
below.
CTRL-] GS clear EOL 29 1 Clear line from cursor position to
the right edge of the window.
CTRL-^ RS gotoXY 30 1,4 Using the next two characters,
minus 32, as one-byte X and Y
values, moves the cursor postion
to
CH=X, CV=Y.

The Apple 80-Column Card in an Enhanced IIe has some additional features
documented in the Programmer's Guide to the Enhanced IIe.

Important Information About CTRL-U

==================================

A "CHR$(21)" response (Control-U) to a "GET A$" input statement in a BASIC

program may disable the 80-column card on an Apple IIGS, Apple IIe, Apple
IIc, and Laser 128 (but not an Apple II Plus with Applied Engineering's
Viewmaster 80).

To halt the CONTROL-U function, the CONTROL-U keystroke needs to be trapped

on input. Using the "GET A$" method:

10 GET A$
20 IF A$ = CHR$(21) THEN A$ = "" :REM traps the CONTROL-U, sets it to blank
30 PRINT A$;
40 GOTO 10

Article Change History:

14 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1986-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL003.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 18 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL004.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: 80-Column Text Cards: Apple II & II Plus Compatibility (11/96)

Header: 80-Column Text Cards: Apple II & II Plus Compatibility (11/96)

Article Created: 19 April 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 14 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Does the Extended 80-column card work in the Apple II or Apple II Plus? If
not, is there any way to upgrade an Apple II or Apple II Plus to 80-Column?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The 80-Column Card and Extended 80-Column Card work only in the Apple IIe;
they cannot be used in any other computer.

Our databases do not show an 80-column interface for the Apple II or Apple II
Plus. There were once several on the market, but the demand for this type of
card has almost disappeared. You might still be able to find these 80-column
cards through some of the computer remarketing companies, or where use
computer equipment is sold.

An alternative is to purchase an Apple IIe or Apple IIGS computer. You need

to to contact computer remarketing companies, or look where use computer
equipment is sold.

Article Change History:

14 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1991-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL004.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 19 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL005.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Access II and Apple IIc Plus: No 40-Column Mode

Header: Access II and Apple IIc Plus: No 40-Column Mode

Article Created: 25 February 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I am using an Apple IIc Plus and Apple Access II. The Volume Slide Control
on the keyboard for the Apple IIc Plus replaces the 40- or 80-column mode
switch found on the original Apple IIc.

Typing PR#3 for 80-column mode and PR#0 for 40-column mode works when in
ProDOS, but when using Apple Access how can I switch between 40- and
80-column mode?

Aren't both 40- and 80-column modes supported in Apple Access II?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Apple Access II does not support 40-column mode on the Apple IIc Plus. The
software detects that the 80-column mode is available and wants to switch
the system into that mode. There is no workaround.
Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL005.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 20 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL006.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Access II: Does Not Support VT100 Line Graphics

Header: Access II: Does Not Support VT100 Line Graphics

This article last reviewed: 21 September 1988

Apple's Access II does NOT support the VT100 line graphics character set. If
you need this character set, there may be third-party terminal emulators for
the Apple II family that provide VT100 character graphics.

Apple is not currently aware of manufacturers of such emulators. If you have

information on third party suppliers, please contact the Apple Technical
Information Library (at AppleLink address TECH.DB).
Copyright 1988 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL006.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 21 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL007.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Access II: Specifications (Discontinued)

Header: Access II: Specifications (Discontinued)

Article Created: 31 May 1991

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes Apple Access II communication software.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Overview
--------
Apple Access II provides intelligent and easy-to-use terminal software to
Apple II users. It uses the power of the computer for automatic
communications and full disk support, including file transfer. Apple
Access II incorporates the AppleWorks user interface, making its operation
is clear and easy to understand.

Apple Access II allows the user to send and receive any type of ProDOS file
via modem. Apple Access II supports all features of Apple Modems,
including automatic dialing of telephone numbers. In addition, it allows
users to automatically log on to remote computers. Procedures for
automatic log-on to Dow Jones, CompuServe, and the Source are included on
the disk.

Apple Access II can be used with any modem that operates through an RS-232
port, or by direct connection to another computer. The software supports
speeds up to 9600 baud. (It does not support split speeds, modems that
send at one rate and receive at another.) Apple Access II provides
complete TTY, ANSI (VT100), and VT52 terminal emulation for advanced users
(less graphics).

A training disk, included with the software, allows users of all levels of
proficiency to see results quickly. The Reference Manual explains
introductory as well as advanced concepts of telecommunications.

Equipment Requirements
----------------------
Apple Access II requires:
* either an Apple IIc, or an Apple IIe with 64K RAM and a Super Serial
Card in Slot 2
* either a disk drive, or RS-232 (Serial) connection to either a modem or
to another computer or terminal

Apple Access II does not work with the following equipment:

* Apple II or Apple II Plus
* Apple III in Apple II emulation mode
* Any modem for the Apple IIe that comes with its own interface card.
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL007.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 22 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL008.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple 3.5 Drive: Description

Header: Apple 3.5 Drive: Description

Article Created: 26 May 1992

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes the Apple 3.5 Drive.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The Apple 3.5 Drive adds 800K of data storage to the Apple IIGS, Macintosh
512K, Macintosh 512K Enhanced, Macintosh Plus, and Macintosh SE personal
computers. The Apple 3.5 Drive uses 3.5-inch, 800K, double-sided disks.

Features
--------
* Over 5 times the storage capacity of 5.25-inch drives.
* Daisy-chaining capability (for Apple IIGS only). An additional port on the
back of the unit allows you to connect another Apple 3.5 Drive or Apple
5.25 Drive directly. Up to three extra drives can be daisy-chained for
a total of 3.2MB of external storage. (3.5 drives must come
first in the chain.)
* In-use light that indicates when the drive is running.
* Direct connection to the Apple IIGS without an interface card.
* Platinum finish that matches the Apple IIGS, Macintosh Plus and
Macintosh SE.

Benefits
--------
* Multiple programs and increased data can be stored on a single disk;
disk swapping is reduced.
* All ProDOS- or Pascal-based Apple II software can be run on 3.5-inch
media.
* Users can load programs and retrieve data faster.
* For the Apple IIGS only, the Apple 3.5 Drive provides flexibility by
allowing connection of up to three extra drives (3.5-inch or 5.25-inch)
to the first drive; users can mix a 3.5-inch and 5.25-inch drive in the
same system. (3.5 drives must come first in the chain.)

Order Number
------------
* Apple 3.5 Drive A9M0106
Copyright 1992, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: specsht

### END OF FILE A2TIL008.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 23 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL009.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple 5.25 Drive: Specifications

Header: Apple 5.25 Drive: Specifications

Article Created: 31 May 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 11 July 1994

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes the Apple 5.25 Drive.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The Apple 5.25 Drive is ideal for users who need compatibility with
thousands of Apple II software programs.

The unit adds 143K of on-line storage to an Apple II system. You can
further increase storage capacity by connecting an additional drive
directly to it. Depending on which computer system you have, you may be
able to "daisy chain" several drives (including 3.5-inch drives) in this
manner.

System Requirements
-------------------
The Apple 5.25 Drive can be used with any Apple II personal computer:
* Apple IIGS
* Apple IIe*
* Apple IIc Plus
* Apple IIc
* Apple II Plus*
* original Apple II*

* the Apple IIe, Apple II Plus, and Apple II require the Apple 5.25
Controller Card

Technical Specifications
------------------------
* Recording medium
recording surfaces: 1
tracks per surface: 35

* Capacity
Formatted data capacity: 143K, 16 sectors
Available data capacity:
- ProDOS or Pascal: 137K
- DOS 3.3 (16 sectors): 124K

* Drive Characteristics
Seek/settle time (track to track): 30 milliseconds maximum
Drive-motor startup time: 500 milliseconds maximum
Data transfer rate: 250 KBytes/second
Disk rotational speed: 299 RPM
Seek/settle time (track to track): 30 milliseconds max.
Drive motor start time: 500 milliseconds max.
Number of read/write heads: 1
Head positioning:
-- Adjusted to a tolerance of 0.002 inches maximum deviation from ideal on
track
Tracks per surface: 35
Tracks per inch: 48
Data surfaces: 1

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 24 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

* Power consumption
+12 ( 0.6) volts DC
typical: 800 milliamps
maximum: 1.6 amps

-12( 0.6) volts DC

typical: 10 milliamps
maximum: 20 milliamps

+5( 0.25) volts DC

typical: 200 milliamps
maximum: 400 milliamps

* Head Positioning
Adjusted to 0.002 inches maximum deviation from ideal on track

* Interfaces
one built-in cable with 19-pin D-style plug
- Plugs directly into the disk drive port of an Apple IIGS, Apple IIc Plus,
or Apple IIc.
- Plugs into the Apple 5.25 Controller Card installed in an Apple IIe,
Apple II Plus, or Apple II.
one 19-pin D-style jack for connection of additional drive

* System Configuration
- Replaces UniDisk as standard floppy disk drive
- Can be "daisy chained" or connected to the back of another drive
using the disk drive port of the Apple IIGS, the disk drive port
of the Apple IIc, or using UniDisk controller card in the Apple II
series computers Apple II, Apple II Plus, Apple IIe, or Apple IIGS.

* Environmental requirements
operating temperature: 50 to 105 degrees F (10 to 46 degrees C)
operating humidity: 20% to 80% (noncondensing)
maximum wet bulb temperature: 85 degrees F (29.4 degrees C)

* Dimensions and Weight

height: 3.13 in. (7.96 cm)
width: 6.37 in (16.2 cm)
depth: 8.50 in. (21.6 cm)
weight: 4.62 lb. (2.1 kg)

Article Change History:

11 Jul 1994 - Added more information from another Tech Info Library article.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1991-1994 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL009.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 25 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL010.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple Access II 1.3.1: Description and Compat (Discontinued)

Header: Apple Access II 1.3.1: Description and Compat (Discontinued)

Article Created: 6 February 1991

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I need a product description for Access II v1.3.1, which differs from

version 1.2.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Here are the specs for Apple Access II, Version 1.3.1 (A2D2013).

Description
-----------
Apple Access II turns an Apple IIc, IIc Plus, IIe, or Apple IIGS personal
computer into an intelligent terminal that can communicate with a variety
of computers and on-line information services.

You can use Apple Access II with any modem that operates through an RS-232
port or by direct connection to another computer with an asynchronous port.

Features
--------
The software supports transmission speeds of up to 9600 baud. Other
features of Apple Access II include:

* All features of the Apple Modems including automatic dialing

* Automatic logon to remote computers

* Emulation of TTY, ANSI VT100(TM), and VT-52(TM) terminals

* Support for special keyboard features of VT100 and VT-52 terminals

including the four PF (programmable function) keys

* The ability to upload and download ASCII files to and from other
computers

* Support for 40- and 80-column video displays

* Processing of downloaded data from remote systems and working with it

off-line, significantly reducing timesharing costs

* Sending or receiving any type of ProDOS file

* Support for XMODEM and Binary II file transfer protocols

* The AppleWorks user interface

* Automatic communications and full disk support, including file

transfer

* A command-file, programming language for development of logon scripts

* Preconfigured scripts for the following online information services:

- Dow Jones
- CompuServe
- The Source
- Delphi

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 26 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

- Genie
- Dialog Information Services

* For the IIGS, the ability to capture text directly to the printer
and 64K serial buffer

Requirements
------------
To use Apple Access II, you need the following components:

* An Apple IIc, IIc Plus, IIe, or IIGS personal computer with at least
64K of RAM (128K recommended)

* For the Apple IIe, an Apple Super Serial Card in Slot 2

* An Apple Modem or another modem with RS-232 interface

* An RS-232 cable

* A compatible video display device

* An external disk drive or hard disk (optional)

* An 80-column card for the IIe (optional)

* A compatible printer (optional).

Apple Access II Kit

-------------------
The Apple Access II kit includes:

* Access II program disks in both 5.25-inch and 3.5-inch form ats

* An interactive tutorial disk

* A user's guide.

Incompatibilities
-----------------
Apple Access II does NOT work with the following equipment:
* Apple II or II Plus

* Apple III in Apple II emulation mode

* A modem for the Apple IIe that has its own interface card.

Note: Apple Access II does NOT support split-speed transmissions (sending

at one rate and receiving at another).
Copyright 1991-94, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: specsht

### END OF FILE A2TIL010.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 27 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL011.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple Access II version 1.2: Specifications (Discontinued)

Header: Apple Access II version 1.2: Specifications (Discontinued)

Order #: A2D4503

--Technical Specifications

Connections:
1. RS-232 port with modem
2. direct connection with another computer

Baud rates: up to 9600

Terminal Emulations:
1. TTY
2. ANSI (VT100)
3. VT52

Protocols: Christensen

--System Configuration

1. Apple IIc,Apple IIGS or Apple IIe with Super Serial Card in

Slot 2 and one disk drive
2. Modem
3. Another computer or terminal
4. Options: 80-column Text Card, Extended Memory, Printer, ProFile

NOTE: Apple Access II will NOT work with the following equipment:
1. Apple II or II Plus
2. Apple III in Apple II emulation mode.
3. A modem for the Apple IIe which has its own interface card.

--Features

--Sends or receives any type of ProDOS file

--Incorporates AppleWorks user interface
--Automatic communications and full disk support, including file transfer
--Supports all features of the Apple Modems including automatic dialing
--Supports automatic log on for remote computers and services including:
1. Dow Jones
2. CompuServe
3. The Source
--Does NOT support split speed transmissions (sending at one rate and
receiving at another)
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL011.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 28 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL012.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple Access II: 'Character Delay' and 'Line Delay'

Header: Apple Access II: 'Character Delay' and 'Line Delay'

Access II version 1.1 has fixed the problem of 'Line Delay' working
erratically. In versions previous to 1.1, a line delay of 100 resulted in a
considerable delay, but changing the line delay to 9999 resulted in less
delay.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL012.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 29 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL013.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple Access II: 1.1 Update

Header: Apple Access II: 1.1 Update

The new version of Access II (1.1) solves many of the bugs that were
associated with Access 1.0. Here are the main changes:

--Text file send delay (The 1.0 version would only accept 99 as a value
when the maximum input should have been 9999)

--XMODEM file transfer (Access 1.0 would 'lock-up' during XMODEM transfers
and the file would be lost)

--Formatting routines (The formatting routines now operate)

The Access II 1.1 upgrade may be obtained by the user through the Apple media
exchange program.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL013.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 30 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL014.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple ADB Keyboard: Specifications (Discontinued)

Header: Apple ADB Keyboard: Specifications (Discontinued)

Article Created: 4 December 1989

Article Reviewed/Updated: 25 June 1992

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article provides specifications for the Apple ADB Keyboard.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

System Requirements:

Any Apple personal computer with an Apple Desktop bus interface

Technical Specifications:

81 keys
10-key numeric pad
4 cursor-control keys

Size and Weight:

Height: 1.75 in. (44.5 mm)

Width: 16.5 in. (418 mm)
Depth: 5.6 in. (142 mm)
Weight: 2.25 lbs (1 kg)

The Apple ADB Keyboard has an 8-event buffer, and the Apple Extended
Keyboard has a 16-event buffer. Events include key-down and key-up events.

NOTE: The Apple ADB Keyboard has been replaced by the Apple Keyboard II.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL014.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 31 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL015.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple Color Plotter: Product Description (Discontinued)

Header: Apple Color Plotter: Product Description (Discontinued)

This article last reviewed: 8 November 1988

The Apple Color Plotter will work with the Apple II family (through a
Super Serial Card, not supplied with plotter) and the Apple III (through the
RS-232 port). It uses a standard RS-232 interface so anyone who can send out
ASCII and meet the handshake specifications will be able to use this plotter.
The plotter offers a 255 byte buffer and is provided with switches to allow it
to be matched to many computers. Options available with the switches are:

Baud Rate: 75 to 9600

Stop Bit: 1 Bit
1 1/2 Bit
2 Bit
Parity: Odd
Even
None
Data Length: 7 Bit
8 Bit

The Apple Color Plotter accepts several different sizes and thicknesses of
paper and can draw on transparency materials as well as paper. There are 8
different colors of pins and two thicknesses (.3mm or.7mm). The colors come
in both water base and oil base (quick drying) inks.

A company called Sun Remarketing specializes in obsolete Apple products. For

more information, search on "Sun Remarketing".
Copyright 1988 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: specsht

### END OF FILE A2TIL015.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 32 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL016.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple DMP Card: How to Identify (2/97)

Header: Apple DMP Card: How to Identify (2/97)

Apple DMP Card: How to Identify (2/97)

Article Created: 30 August 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 12 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes how to identify the DMP card, how to find the Apple
part number and it use.

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

The Module Identification manual can be used to match the card with its
photograph. The Module Identification manual will also have the part's
service part number: 661-XXXX.

The card was used for connecting the Apple DMP (parallel printer) to an Apple
II family computer.

Article Change History:

12 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1991-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL016.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 33 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL017.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple FORTRAN: Specifications (Discontinued)

Header: Apple FORTRAN: Specifications (Discontinued)

--Order #: A2D0032

--Technical Specifications:

1. Format: 16-sector disks

2. Language:
a. Pascal
b. Produces P-code, which runs in the Apple Pascal Operating System
3. Intrinsic Functions:
ABS, ACOS, AINT, ALOG, ALOG10, AMAX0, AMAX1, AMIN0, AMIN1, AMOD,
ANINT, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, CHAR, COS, COSH, DIM, EOF, EXP, FLOAT,
IABS, ICHAR, IDIM, IFIX, INT, ISIGN, LGE, LGT, LLE, LLT, MAX0, MAX1,
MIN0, MIN1, MOD, NINT, REAL, SIGN, SIN, SINH, SQRT, TAN, TANH

--Package:

1. Disk: Apple FORTRAN System

2. Disk: Apple FORTRAN System
3. Manual: Apple FORTRAN Language Reference

--System Configuration:

1. Computer:
a. Apple II
b. Apple II Plus with Language Card
c. Apple IIe
d. Apple IIc
2. disk drive: Apple Disk II

NOTE: While a single drive system is adequate for very small programs, two
drives are strongly recommended for ease of operation and more serious
program development

3. video display: Monitor II

4. Apple Pascal package

--Features:

1. Industry standard, ANSI X3.9-1978

2. ANSI Standard Subset of the FORTRAN 77 standard

--Supports enhancements and facilities from the full FORTRAN 77

language

--Contains enhancements beyond the full FORTRAN 77 specifications:

1. Compiler directives in the source code permit many files in
one
compilation.
2. An additional parameter to the OPEN statement allows you to
specify that the file is blocked or unblocked.

--Minor differences between the ANSI Standard Subset FORTRAN 77 and

Apple FORTRAN:
1. Subprogram names cannot be passed as parameters.
2. INTEGER and REAL data types have different storage
requirements:
a. 2 bytes for INTEGER

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 34 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

b. 4 bytes for REAL

NOTE: Apple FORTRAN does not support double-precision arithmetic.

3. Apple Pascal Operating System Linker links:

--FORTRAN P-Code files
--Compiled P-code
--Assembled machine code

4. Interfaces to routines in Pascal system library

--High-res graphics
--Sound generation
--Hand control routines

5. Subscript expressions may include array elements and function calls

6. DO statement limits may be defined by expressions, rather than just

single variables

7. Input/output (I/O) units may be specified by expressions, rather than

just constants or simple variables

8. The I/O list of a WRITE statement may include expressions

9. All combinations of FORMATTED/UNFORMATTED and SEQUENTIAL/DIRECT files

are allowed, with the following restrictions:
--BACKSPACE is supported only for files connected to the blocked
devices -- it is not supported for UNFORMATTED SEQUENTIAL files;
--DIRECT files must be connected to block devices
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL017.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 35 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL018.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple ftp Sites Frequently Asked Questions (2/97)

Header: Apple ftp Sites Frequently Asked Questions (2/97)

Article Created: 7 June 94

Article Reviewed/Updated: 09 January 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article provides an overview of ftp sites in general, a description of

the ftp sites maintained by Apple, and answers to common problems.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

What are ftp Sites?

===================

An ftp site is a server which has an Internet connection and uses the File
Transfer Protocol (an agreed upon standard for transferring files using the
TCP/IP protocol) to let you log on and download files.

Servers can be Macintosh computers, MS-DOS machines, or UNIX based PCs or

workstations. Limits, such as the number of users logged on, can be placed on
an ftp site. Obviously, the more memory and processor speed a machine running
as an ftp site has, the better able it is to handle more users, more file
transfers, and so on.

Apple's ftp Sites

=================

There are currently a number of ftp sites maintained at Apple, most of which
are located in Austin, TX or Cupertino, CA. We are constantly adding
additional ftp servers:

ftp.info.apple.com (Austin, TX)

ftp.apple.com (Cupertino, CA)
ftp.info.euro.apple.com (Zeist, the Netherlands)

- The following web page (http://support.info.apple.com/ftp/mirrors.html)

lists *all ftp sites* Apple has around the world. The ftp.info.apple.com
site(s) has a current capacity of over 2,000 concurrent ftp sessions, with
several thousand more coming this winter and spring - all served by 3 T-1s
and a T-3 connection. (ftp.apple.com has capacity for approx. 1,000)

Apple Computer Gopher Server

----------------------------
gopher://gopher.info.apple.com/

Contains both the complete collection of Apple Software Updates and the Apple
Tech Info Library.

How the Software is Posted

==========================

All files are compressed using Stuffit Deluxe into self extracting archive
files (usually identified by the .sea suffix appended to the end of the file
name). They are then converted to the BINHEX format uploaded using Fetch (see
the next section for an explanation of software). We then download and check
each file we upload.

Many files start out as Disk Images. Customers downloading disk image files

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 36 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

need to download and use Apple s Disk Copy application to create floppy disk
copies of each disk image. There is a Quick Reference Guide (QRG) on how to
use Disk Copy available from the Apple Fax Info system, as well as document
"Dealing with Disk Images" posted on info.hed.apple.com in the Apple Support
Area.

The Software That is Available

==============================

The Apple software updates collection is very large and is broken into two
major categories: US and Worldwide. Inside the worldwide directory, is a
large of localized software - that is, software that has been translated into
other languages for use with localized MacOS systems.

Inside both the US and Worldwide folders is the following directories, many
of which contain subdirectories:

Apple II
DOS-Windows
Macintosh
Newton
UNIX (on some servers)

What software You Should Use

============================

In general, Apple recommends that you obtain the latest version of an

application that uses the ftp protocol to transfer files.

The following are the most common applications, many of which are included in
the Apple Internet Connection Kit, now available in the USA.

Fetch 2.1.2 or 3.0

------------------
An application developed at Dartmouth College; the most popular ftp client
for Macintosh users. It automatically downloads and converts the binhexed
files to the .sea file format.

Anarchie 140
------------
Anarchie is an ftp and Archie client. It lets you browse ftp sites, download
files, or find them using an Archie server. It requires System 7 and MacTCP
1.1 or later. Anarchie lets you view any directory as a folder, making it a
very Macintosh-like application.

Turbogopher 1.0.8b4
-------------------
An Internet surfing application developed by the University of Minnesota,
capable of downloading and converting binhexed files to the .sea file format.

Netscape Navigator
------------------
A web client from the NetScape Communications Corp.

Microsoft Internet Explorer

---------------------------
A web client from Microsoft Corp.

Common Problems
===============

The following common problems may be encountered by customers on Apple's ftp

servers.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 37 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

ftp server: cannot log on

-------------------------
You cannot log on due to the maximum concurrent user limit. You should try
again later or another Apple ftp server.

Apple Computer gopher server: cannot download files successfully, ftp client
reports "end of file error" or "EOF error"
------------------------------------------
We do verify each file we upload, but occasionally files do get corrupted and
we replace them.

However, most of the time, you cannot download a file due to one of following
problems:

* Not using most current version of ftp client, such as Fetch 2.1.2 or Fetch
3.0.

* The server connection "times out" or disconnects. Try logging on again,

either early in the morning or late at night.

* You cannot establish a consistent connection with any ftp site. Make sure
TCP/IP software is the most current version.

Other Commercial Online Services Apple Supports

===============================================
Currently Apple publishes to America Online and CompuServe in addition to the
Internet.

Article Change History:

06 Feb 1996 - Updated urls.
09 Jan 1996 - Updated article, removing AppleLink, updating Internet
references.
21 May 1996 - Removed reference to eWorld

Support Information Services

Copyright 1994-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: kol,kinter,kalley,kfaq

### END OF FILE A2TIL018.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 38 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL019.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II 3.5 Disk Controller Card: Specifications (2/97)

Header: Apple II 3.5 Disk Controller Card: Specifications (2/97)

Apple II 3.5 Disk Controller Card: Specifications (2/97)

Article Created: 11 December 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 12 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article gives technical specifications for the Apple II 3.5 Disk
Controller Card. This card has been discontinued by Apple.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Overview
--------
The Apple II 3.5 Disk Controller Card allows you to use the 3.5-inch floppy
disk drives, including the Apple SuperDrive and Apple 3.5 Drive, with an
Apple IIGS or Apple IIe computer. The card also supports the operation of
older model Apple II UniDisk 3.5 drives with the Apple IIe computer. This
card replaces the UniDisk 3.5-inch Controller Card.

Drives Supported
----------------
Apple SuperDrive

Apple 3.5 Drive

Apple UniDisk 3.5 Drive (Apple IIe only)

Specifications
--------------
Microprocessor: 65C02

Disk controller: SWIM

Memory: 32K SRAM 32K ROM

Connector: DB-19

Power: Less than 4 watts

Environmental Requirements
--------------------------
Operating temperature: 50 to 104 degrees F (10 to 40 degrees C)

Storage temperature: 50 to 140 degrees F (10 to 60 degrees C)

Relative humidity: 20% to 80% noncondensing

Article Change History:

12 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1991-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: SPECSHT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 39 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

### END OF FILE A2TIL019.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 40 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL020.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II 5.25 Drive: Using It With Other Disk Controller Cards
Header: Apple II 5.25 Drive: Using It With Other Disk Controller Cards

This article last reviewed: 15 October 1987

New Apple II 5.25 drives can be connected to controller cards other than
the ones specifically designed for those drives.

- an Apple 5.25 drive can be daisy-chained to a UniDisk, either 5.25 or 3.5.

- an Apple 5.25 drive can be connected to a DuoDisk controller card.

- an Apple 5.25 drive can be connected to a Disk II controller card, if

you first use Quark's adaptor to make the Apple 5.25 drive's cable fit
the Disk II controller card.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL020.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 41 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL021.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II and Apple II Plus: Hardware Specs (Discontinued 6/83)

Header: Apple II and Apple II Plus: Hardware Specs (Discontinued 6/83)

Electrical

AC power: 107-132 VAC 60Hz

DC power at I/O ports
(48K RAM)
+ 5v @ 1.0 amp
- 5v @ 0.25 amps
+12v @ 1.1 amps (Can supply 2.1 amps for 20 minutes with rest of 10 minutes
-12v @ 0.23 amps
Power Dissipation: 60 Watts

Environmental

Temperature Range
Operating 0C to 45C (disk media is limited to 35C)
Storage -35C to 140C
Relative Humidity
20% to 90% non-condensing
Altitude
Operating - 1,000 to 15,000 ft
Non-operating 50,000 ft
(derate maximum ambient temp. by 1 degree C per 1000 feet over 5,000 ft)

Physical Characteristics

Height 4.5 in
Width 15.1 in
Length 18.0 in
Weight 12.0 lbs

Safety and RFI Qualifications

The Apple II meets the following agency regulations.

FCC Part 15, Class B Personal Computers
CSA 22.2, No. 154-1979
UL 114 - Office Machines
VDE 0871/6.28"A"Limit
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL021.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 42 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL022.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II And II Plus Hardware: Stopping The Blinking Cursor

Header: Apple II And II Plus Hardware: Stopping The Blinking Cursor

This article last reviewed: 9 November 1988

Hardware generates the blinking cursor on the Apple's screen. You can stop the
blinking using this Applesoft program:

10 FOR A = 935 TO 941

20 READ B
30 POKE A,B
40 NEXT A
50 POKE 56,167
60 POKE 57,3
70 CALL 1002
80 END
100 DATA 72,41,63,145,40,104,76,27,253

This program assumes that you have DOS booted. If you don't have DOS, delete
line 70.

After you run the program, the cursor will be a solid block until the RESET
key
is pressed, until there is an IN#0 command, or until the Apple is turned off.

The cursor can be completely eliminated by changing the 63 in line 100 to a

191.
Copyright 1988 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL022.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 43 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL023.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II and II Plus: Shift-Key Modification

Header: Apple II and II Plus: Shift-Key Modification

This article last reviewed: 26 September 1984

Probably all Apple II owners have heard of a mysterious "Shift-Key Mod". To

many it has remained nothing more than a rumor, possibly because most
modifications are thought to be costly additions. Not so the "Shift-Key Mod",
the most simple and least expensive addition anyone could do for their Apple
II. Of software recognizing this modification, there is a wide variety:
Apple Writer, most other word processing software packages, and the firmware
of most 80-column cards.

Software must recognize this alphabetic modification; the Apple alone does not
do it automatically. After modification, the shift key allows you to enter
uppercase characters as you do on a typewriter, without the need to precede
them with a press of the Escape key or some other control character. You can
still use the shift key to type the regular "shift" non-alphabetic characters,
such as !,@,#,$,%,^,&,*,(,), and so on.

With the "Shift-Key Mod", you use the shift key to signal the software from an
unused part of the Apple II Game port. The Port can address four separate
hand controls and three hand-control pushbuttons of which only two of each are
used by the standard game paddles and joysticks. This leaves unused two hand
control inputs and a hand-control pushbutton input. The "Shift-Key Mod"
exploits the address of this remaining pushbutton input. In practice,
software supporting the modification first reads the character value at the
address of the keyboard. Then, since joysticks use pushbuttons #0 and #1, the
software reads the state of the address of pushbutton #2 (PB2). If the PB2
address is operated then the software simply makes the keyboard value
represent uppercase.

To keep things in perspective, please note that this does not modify the Apple
II to display lowercase nor enter lowercase characters into your programs when
the II is in its native 40-column mode. To read the shift key's new address,
the Apple II must have special software; without it, the II stays in 40-column
mode. Most 80-column cards have firmware to read the address and display
lowercase when in 80-column mode. When coding, you can easily enter lowercase
characters into your own program's output strings with 80-column cards
supporting the modification. However, when the program runs in 40-column
mode, lowercase characters will appear as "garbage" characters. Adding the
reasonably-priced "Lowercase Character Generator" on the motherboard allows
proper display of lowercase characters in 40-column mode. Apple Writer also
supports lowercase character generators.

Now to make the modification. Connect two micro test clips together with 8
inches of 28 AWG wire and solder the connections. Use micro test clips to
match the size of Radio Shack #270-370 clips. 28 AWG wire-wrap will do. Clip
size is most important; wire size and brands are less important. Once the
jumper cools, install it this way:

1. Clip one end to pin 1 of the IC located at motherboard location H14, a

74LS251.

2. Clip the other end to pin 24 of the molex connector that connects the
keyboard electronics to the keyboard. Pin 25 of this connecter is at the
end away from the Apple's power supply. Pin 24 is to the left of pin 25.
Copyright 1988 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 44 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

### END OF FILE A2TIL023.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 45 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL024.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II and II+: Memory typically available to users

Header: Apple II and II+: Memory typically available to users

After startup, Applesoft's FRE(0) statement reports the same amount, 48K, of
free memory in the II Plus, the Apple IIe with 64K, and the Apple IIe or IIc
with 128K. No matter how much the maximum memory of the CPU is, you will never
have more than 48K of memory available to you, since the microprocessor lets
BASIC have DIRECT access to only 48K in Apple II family computers with memory
configurations equal to or greater than 48K.

This discrepancy stems both from the microprocessor's memory limit and from the
demand placed on the system by the software. The Apple's 6502 microprocessor
can directly access only 64K of memory (address 65536 ($FFFF)). Some of the 64K
has to be loaded with system software: the monitor, Applesoft, I/O, stacks,
keyboard, vectors, and text display. The Apple's system monitor and Applesoft
language routines reside in upper memory from $D000 to $FFFF. I/O ROM locations
span from $C000 to $CFFF. Finally, the system uses $0000 to $07FF for its
stack, keyboard input, system vectors and text display. This amount of
software leaves you with 47103 bytes (the memory space between $0800 and $BFFF)
that you can directly access through BASIC.

The user can then decide to give more of this memory to an operating system and
high resolution graphics. For example, if you use DOS 3.3, you relinquish
approximately 10.5K, the memory space from $9600 to $BFFF. Similarly, high
resolution graphics page 1 or 2 takes another 8K for each page.

--> Adding more memory for the user

Adding memory allows you to load operating systems not dependent on BASIC; it
also lets you take advantage of the full 64K from assembly language programs.
Apple II and II+ users can add 16K to a 48K configuration if they install a
RAM card in slot #0.

In the IIe, this 16K "RAM card" is built onto the motherboard and is addressed
in the same way as the card in the II and II+; that's why there's no slot #0 on
the Apple IIe. This additional 16K actually overlays the upper 16K of memory
only by bank-switching between the ROM and RAM.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL024.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 46 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL025.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II and II+: Problems with keypresses on the keypad

Header: Apple II and II+: Problems with keypresses on the keypad

A keypress on the numeric keypad is only retained as long as the key

is held down. Whenthe key is let up, the keyboard returns to its
previous state (with the keythat was last pressed on the keyboard
at location $C000). This causes manystrange problems, like
having to hit the key longer to have it recognized.
There is no way to correct this on the current keypad because of the
limitations of the keyboard encoder chip.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL025.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 47 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL026.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II and IIe: Controlling the Reset key

Header: Apple II and IIe: Controlling the Reset key

On an Apple II or Apple IIe computer, the programmer can control how a BASIC
program will react when reset or control-reset is pressed. DOS uses three
special locations which it consults whenever reset or control-reset is
pressed. Based on the values contained in these memory locations, DOS may
halt a program, rerun the program, reboot a disk, or take another action you
specify.

Changing these values changes the results of typing reset or control-reset

from the keyboard.

To discourage users from breaking into a Basic program, some programmers

change the reset vector to restart a running program whenever reset is
pressed. Put the following line at the beginning of your program to get this
effect:

10 POKE 1010, 102 : POKE 1011, 213 : CALL -1169

A value is not POKEd into location 1012 because the CALL statement sets
location 1012 to the correct value for the current situation. When you wish
to return reset to its normal action, include this Basic line:

20 POKE 1010, 191 : POKE 1011, 157 : CALL -1169

You can also force a disk boot to occur whenever reset is pressed. Simply
change the value of one of the three reset vector locations. An example is:

30 POKE 1012,1

You may instruct the reset vector to call one of your own machine language
routines by placing the address of this routine in locations 1010 and 1011,
and CALLing the ROM routine at location -1169 to set location 1012. Your
routine may process information, display a warning message, or do anything
else you wish.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL026.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 48 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL027.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II and IIe: Interface I/O Signal Timing (2/97)

Header: Apple II and IIe: Interface I/O Signal Timing (2/97)

Article Created: 21 September 1984

Article Reviewed/Updated: 28 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes how the I/O strobe signals on the Apple II peripheral
connector are handled.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The I/O strobe signals on the Apple II peripheral connector are decoded from
the appropriate address lines and combined with the phase one clock. This is
to reduce the TTL circuitry required to build a simple I/O port.

_______________ _____
CLOCK 1 _______| |_______________|

I/O SELECT _______________________ _____

I/O STROBE |_______________|
DEVICE SELECT

A simple 8 bit output port would be a positive edge triggered latch with the
clock tied to I/O select.

74LS374
__________
| |
GND -----------------| 1 |
I/O STROBE ----------|11 |
| |
D0 ------------------| 3 2|---
D1 ------------------| 4 5|---
D2 ------------------| 7 6|---
D3 ------------------| 8 9|--- 8 bits of
D4 ------------------|13 12|--- Latched TTL
D5 ------------------|14 15|--- Output
D6 ------------------|17 16|---
D7 ------------------|18 19|---
|__________|

Assumming that this interface is plugged into slot 1, any write operation to
$C090..$C09F will transfer the data to the output lines. This is a very
simple interface, so any read to $C090..$C09F will transfer random data to
the output latch and to the Apple.

Article Change History:

28 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1984-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL027.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 49 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL028.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II and IIe: Power Supply Input Frequency Limitations

Header: Apple II and IIe: Power Supply Input Frequency Limitations

This article last reviewed: 18 September 1987

The Apple II and IIe power supply is a switching power supply. It is designed
to accept 107 to 135 volts from DC to 60 Hz. It will also work at up to 400
Hz but this endangers a circuit which protects the supply from shorting to the
point that the protecting circuit will not work.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL028.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 50 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL029.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II AppleShare Network: Troubleshooting Freeze-Ups

Header: Apple II AppleShare Network: Troubleshooting Freeze-Ups

Article Created: 15 April 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC ----------------------------------------------------------

I have three AppleShare networks. One has all new Apple IIGS computers,
and the other two are mixed with Apple IIe systems, plus both old and new
Apple IIGS computers. They all come up fine but, two or three hours later
they freeze. When we restart the computers most (not always the same ones)
freeze at the IIGS loading gauge. This happens only on the new IIGS models.

I have about thirty Apple networks installed. On some of them, new Apple
IIGS computers froze from the beginning. Replacing their logic boards seems
to fix the problem. However, on the last one, the problem just moved to
another, previously "clean" computer.

DISCUSSION-------------------------------------------------------

First, check for bad RAM, the most common cause of a system locking up
during startup. This would explain why swapping logic boards cured the one
case.

Second, check for bad software on server. In this case, this diagnosis is
more likely, because the condition is appearing on more and more systems.
Try re-installing the server, making sure you use the Network Products
Installer disk. Re-install the following:

1) System 6.0.5

2) AppleShare 2.0.1

3) AppleShare Apple II Setup 2.1.1

4) GS/OS 5.02
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL029.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 51 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL030.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II BASIC: How to Convert Into Macintosh QuickBasic

Header: Apple II BASIC: How to Convert Into Macintosh QuickBasic

Article Created: 13 August 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Is there a way to convert Apple IIe/IIGS BASIC files into Microsoft

QuickBasic files for the Macintosh?

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

Yes, follow these steps:

1) Save a listing of the program as an ASCII text file.

2) Transfer the file to the Macintosh using Apple File Exchange.

3) Import it directly into Microsoft QuickBasic. QuickBasic accepts

ASCII Text Files.

4) Now, it's just a matter of modification (if needed). According

to Microsoft, some programs work even without conversion.
Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL030.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 52 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL031.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Business Graphics: Specifications (Discontinued)

Header: Apple II Business Graphics: Specifications (Discontinued)

I. Technical Specifications

A. Language:
--Pascal
--Assembly
B. Format:
--16-sector diskette.

C. Imaging:
--Graph Types: Scatter, solid-line, dash-line, bar (vertical or
horizontal), pie (filled or outline), and multiple
overlays
--Color: Six available on color monitor--user-selectable or default
values
--Titling/Labeling:
1. Alphanumeric labeling on x- and y-axis
2. Auto-scale or user-defined label ranges
3. Centered titles
4. Floating titles:
--any number
--horizontal or vertical
5. Tick marks and extended grid lines

D. Graphic Devices:

--Console
--Silentype
--Apple Color Plotter
--Qume Sprint 5 printers
--Hewlett-Packard 7225A/B with 17603A, RS-232 Personality Module
--Houston Instruments DMP-3, -4 high-quality pen plotters

E. Data Manipulation:

--Curves that can be FITed to any data set:

LINE LOGARITHMIC CONSTANT SINE PARABOLA
--Coefficients can be manually set to produce known curves.
--Statistical analyses that can be performed on any data set:
MINIMUM MEAN MAXIMUM STANDARD DEVIATION SUM VARIANCE
--Either moving average or exponential smoothing may be performed
with a single command.
--Additional data manipulation commands:
ADD SHIFT DIFFERENCE SUBTRACT(FROM) DIVIDE(BY/INTO)
SUM MULTIPLY
--TAKE Files:
1. Store business Graphics commands in a single file that
allows multiple, complex plots to be recreated with a
single command.
2. WAIT command allows users to insert a timed pause in a TAKE
file.
--Virtual files:
1. System allows user to utilize large data files exceeding the
size of computer memory.
2. Default virtual file provides space for approximately 90-100
points.
3. SET VIRTUAL FILE command allows user to define a virtual file on
another diskette, greatly expanding the maximum number of points
to be processed.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 53 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

--Interchange Facility:
Generates a Business Graphics data file from these common
formats:
1. VisiCalc print files (13- and 16-sector)
2. ApplePlot (13- and 16-sector)
3. DIF format
4. BASIC text files (13- and 16-sector)
5. Apple Pascal

II. System Configuration:

A. Apple
1. II Plus with 48K of memory
2. IIe
3. IIc
B. Two 5 1/4 inch disk drives
C. Apple Language Card
D. Video display device
E. Optional compatible printer and printer controller card
1. With Silentype Interface Card: Silentype
2. With High Speed Serial Interface Card with P8-02 PROM:
Qume Sprint 5 printers
F. Optional compatible plotter and plotter controller card
--With High Speed Serial Interface Card:
1. Hewlett-Packard 7225A/B with 17603A, RS-232 Personality
Module
2. Houston Instruments DMP-3, -4 high-quality pen plotters

NOTE: Apple Business Graphics includes drivers supporting the printers and
plotters mentioned here. Using a special kit, called a Printer/Plotter
Installation Kit (PIK), Apple Business Graphics can support other
plotters, letter quality printers, and dot matrix printers.

III. Features

--Enlarges any area of a graph for close study

--User may specify all graph parameters:
1. axis labels
2. floating labels
3. plot colors,
4. horizontal and vertical axis ranges
--Macro commands can replace multiple command sequences
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL031.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 54 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL032.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Family and Chooser: Frequently Asked Questions (12/95)

Header: Apple II Family and Chooser: Frequently Asked Questions (12/95)

Article Created: 8 August 1989

Article Reviewed/Updated: 1 December 1995

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article contains frequently asked questions (FAQ) on the Apple II

computer and the Chooser.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Question: When I choose a printer is the choice saved on disk so that I do

not need to use Chooser again?

Answer: Yes, the Chooser selection is saved to disk as the user exits Chooser.

Question: When I choose a printer do I need to use Chooser each time?

Answer: You do not need to use the Chooser each time you print. The Chooser
is used only when changing printers.

Question: If the choice is saved is it saved on the current startup disk or

on the disk Chooser resides on?

Answer: The printer choice is saved to the disk with Chooser on it.

Question: If the choice is saved is it saved only if the disk Chooser resides
on is the current startup disk?

Answer: The choice is saved to the Chooser disk no matter where Chooser
resides.

Question: If an AppleShare user who starts up over the network does not have
a default printer assigned from the server, will their most recent choice be
saved after powering down?

Answer: The last choice is saved as the user exits Chooser.

Question: If an AppleShare user who starts up over the network does not have
a default printer assigned from the server, where is it saved?

Answer: This choice is saved on the server from which Chooser is run.

Question: Is there any difference in these characteristics between the Apple

IIe and the Apple IIGS?

Answer: There are no differences between an Apple IIe and an Apple IIGS in
these matters. The Chooser program is the same on both computers.

NOTE: The user's Chooser selection overrides the Server Admin default printer
assignment.

ADDITONAL NOTE: GS/OS 5.0 uses the Control Panel for network choices. If

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 55 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

GS/OS 5.0 is being used, the Chooser program is no longer needed.

Article Change History:

01 Dec 1995 - Changed title, added keyword, and updated format.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1989-95, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: kfaq

### END OF FILE A2TIL032.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 56 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL033.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Family: Cycle Speeds

Header: Apple II Family: Cycle Speeds

This article last reviewed: 18 February 1991

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

What are the cycle speeds for the Apple II family?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Apple IIGS: 2.6 MHz

Apple IIc Plus: 4 MHz
all other Apple II models: 1 MHz.
Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL033.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 57 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL034.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Family: Driver Not Yet Available for LaserWriter SC

Header: Apple II Family: Driver Not Yet Available for LaserWriter SC

Article Created: 29 April 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I want to connect my Apple IIe to the Personal LaserWriter SC. Are there
printer drivers to do this?

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

There is no Apple support for connecting either the older LaserWriter IISC
nor the new Personal LaserWriter SC to any Apple II computer. Apple has
made low-level driver information available to developers to create such a
driver, but we don't know of any available drivers as of April 1991.
Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL034.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 58 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL035.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Family: No Support for Macintosh Hard Disk 20

Header: Apple II Family: No Support for Macintosh Hard Disk 20

Article Created: 30 April 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Is it possible to use a Macintosh Hard Disk 20 with any Apple II computer?

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

No, there is no support for the serial Macintosh Hard Disk 20 on any of the
Apple II computers. A controller card was never produced to provide this
compatibility.
Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL035.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 59 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL036.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Family: Square Wave Power Source (2/97)

Header: Apple II Family: Square Wave Power Source (2/97)

Article Created: 01 September 1987

Article Reviewed/Updated: 17 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article discusses the use of a square wave AC power source, as opposed
to the normal sine wave, with the Apple II family of computers.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The Apple II power supply is of a switching type that rectifies the AC input
voltage to a DC voltage for use internal to the supply. The AC input is first
sent through a line filter and then to a diode bridge for rectification. The
line filter consists of inductors and capacitors to smooth the waveform of
the input voltage. This action would soften the square waves an inverter
might supply and the whole combination makes it OK to use an Apple II on a
square wave AC supply.

Article Change History:

17 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1988-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL036.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 60 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL037.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Family: Using With LaserWriter (2/97)

Header: Apple II Family: Using With LaserWriter (2/97)

Article Created: 22 March 1988

Article Reviewed/Updated: 17 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article discusses using a LaserWriter printer with the Apple II family
of computers.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

A LaserWriter can be connected to any Apple II containing a Super Serial

Card, or the serial ports (modem port and printer port) in an Apple IIc or
Apple IIGS.

This is made possible by setting the serial interface to use XON/XOFF

protocol using one of the following two methods.

1st Method
----------
Send the following code exactly as shown. The Super Serial Card must be in
communications mode (jumper block set to "modem"), because print mode (jumper
block set to "terminal") doesn't support XON/XOFF.

Apple IIc/IIGS printer port: Control-I X E

Apple IIc/IIGS modem port: Control-A X E
Super Serial Card: Control-I X

- Control-I (or Control-A) tells the firmware that you are sending a
character to act on.

- The X tells the firmware to use XON/XOFF protocol.

- The E says 'Enable the function designated by the next printable character.'

2nd Method
--------------
Set up the LaserWriter for DTR handshake (requires version 2 or greater of
the LaserWriter ROMs). This can be done by sending the following code segment
to the LaserWriter with the switch set to 9600:

serverdict begin 0 exitserver

statusdict begin
25 9600 7 setsccbatch
end

This sets the 25-pin connector to 9600 baud, DTR flow control, no parity.
Substituting 9 for 25 sets the 9-pin connector to the same parameters. This
change is written into EEROM, and remains as what is called a persistent
parameter until changed back. To change the printer back to XON/XOFF, send
this code segment:

serverdict begin 0 exitserver

statusdict begin
25 9600 3 setsccbatch
end

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 61 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Article Change History:

17 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1988-97, Apple Computer, In.c
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL037.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 62 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL038.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II FORTRAN: Double precision arithmetic

Header: Apple II FORTRAN: Double precision arithmetic

Usually, in FORTRAN IV & 77, the way to handle numbers up to 10 to 11

significant figures is to declare double precision variables or implicit
double
precision variables.

The new strategy here is to use the Pascal SANE unit linked to a FORTRAN
program following the instructions in the Apple FORTRAN Language Reference
Manual Chapters 15 and 16. Double precision poses more difficult problems.
With the advent of the SANE package there are solutions possible. In short,
such Pascal units are not available and must be written and created by the
FORTRAN user.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL038.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 63 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL039.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Hardware: 6522 Versatile Interface Adapter (2/97)

Header: Apple II Hardware: 6522 Versatile Interface Adapter (2/97)

Article Created: 21 September 1984

Article Reviewed/Updated: 28 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes the 6522 Versatile Interface Adapter (6522 VIA).

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The 6522 Versatile Interface Adapter (6522 VIA) is a popular integrated

circuit for use with microcomputers because it operates in a variety of
modes. The precursor to the 6522, the 6520, has been used in several
interfaces with no difficulty. Unfortunately, although these two parts have
identical timing specifications, their operation is different. The 6520 is
very tolerant of operation outside of the parameter limits on its data sheet
while the 6522 must have its timing specifications met exactly.

The most critical timing parameter for the 6522 is the address set-up time,
the delay between the chip select and the rising edge of the 1MHz clock. The
6522 will not operate under the nearly identical Device Select and 1 MHz
clock of the Apple II. The solution is to shorten the positive half-cycle of
the 1 MHz waveform. This can be achieved by various methods, but, since the
length of the positive half-cycle is critical, it is essential to have a well-
controlled circuit to do this.

The circuit below is proposed for use with the Apple II. The 74LS74 circuit
delays the positive edge of the clock by one cycle of the 7 MHz clock,
generating the clock waveform that the 6522 needs. The negative edge of the
clock is set by the falling edge of the 1 MHz clock; this also holds off the
flip-flop until the next cycle. The shortened positive half-cycle of the
clock waveform results in a leading edge delayed by 140 nanoseconds from the
falling edge of Device Select.

The 6522A is required to meet the data sheet timing parameters. The 6522 will
usually work but its operation cannot be guaranteed.

__ __________
| |
DEVSEL | |
|____________________|

_______ __________
| |
CLOCK | |
|_______________|

SUGGESTED SCHEMATIC

(25) +5 -----------------+----------------------+-----------+
____|___ _____|___ |
| 4 | 74LS74 | 10 | |
(40) Q0 ---------+--|2 5|------------|12 9|----+ |
| | | | | | |
(36) 7M ------+- | -|3 | +--|11 | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | |____1___| | |____13___| | |
| | | | | | |
| +-------+------------ | -------+ | |

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 64 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

+------------------------+ | |
| |
_________ | |
(41) DEVSEL ---------------+----------------|23 25|--+ |
(18) R/W -------------+----|----------------|22 | |
_|____|__ | 24|-----+
| 11 9 | | 20|-----+
(42) D7 ------------|19 1|-------------|26 |
(43) D6 ------------|18 2|-------------|27 |
(44) D5 ------------|17 8 3|-------------|28 |
(45) D4 ------------|16 3 4|-------------|29 |
(46) D3 ------------|15 0 5|-------------|30 6 |
(47) D2 ------------|14 4 6|-------------|31 |
(48) D1 ------------|13 7|-------------|32 5 | I/O
(49) D0 ------------|12 8|-------------|32 | Lines:
|_________| | 2 | Port A
( 5) A3 ------------------------------------|35 |
( 4) A2 ------------------------------------|36 2 | and
( 3) A1 ------------------------------------|37 |
( 2) A0 ------------------------------------|38 A | Port B
(31) RESET ---------------------------------|34 |
(30) IRQ -----------------------------------|21 |
|_________|

Article Change History:

28 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1984-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL039.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 65 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL040.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Hardware: Apple II vs Apple II+

Header: Apple II Hardware: Apple II vs Apple II+

The only difference between the Apple II and the Apple II+ is that the
Apple II has Integer BASIC and the "old" monitor ROM, while the Apple II+
has Applesoft BASIC and the Autostart monitor ROM. Most of the game programs
available today are written in Integer BASIC and most of the business,
scientific, and industrial programs require Applesoft, so the selection
depends upon what your application requires. Apple offers firmware cards that
will supply Applesoft to Apple II owners and Integer Basic to Apple II+
owners.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL040.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 66 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL041.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Hardware: Character Generator ROM

Header: Apple II Hardware: Character Generator ROM

To allow you to write programs involving special characters or lower case

characters, you can get a 2716 PROM to replace the the character generator ROM
in revision 7 and later Apples. This note describes how the characters are
mapped in the ROM.

Characters storage uses a scheme of eight bytes per character, arranged in the
ROM in the order shown in Table 7 on page 15 of the Apple II Reference Manual.
The starting address for each character is the address from Table 7 multiplied
by eight. Lower case characters, if desired, should be mapped in place of the
numbers and punctuation in columns $E0 and $F0.

Each character is made up of eight bytes. Each byte represents one row of
dots. The most significant bit of each byte is ignored by the hardware. The
lowest-addressed byte of each character is the topmost row of dots of the
displayed character. The first and last bits of each row of dots are usually
set to zero to supply a two dot space between characters. The bottom row of
dots is usually left set to zero to allow a one row space between lines. Some
lower case character sets use the bottom row for descenders (the letter "g",
for example). This causes overlap when the descender is directly above an
upper case letter like "B". The following diagram shows how the characters are
built. The three digit hexadecimal number is the hexadecimal ROM address for
each byte and the two digit hexadecimal number is the pattern of on and off
bits.

$208 $08 ...*... $708 $00 ....... $730 $08 ...*...

$209 $14 ..*.*.. $709 $00 ....... $731 $14 ..*.*..
$20A $22 .*...*. $70A $1C ..***.. $732 $10 ..*....
$20B $22 .* *. $70B $02 .....*. $733 $10 ..*....
$20C $3E .*****. $70C $1E ..****. $734 $3E .*****.
$20D $22 .*...*. $70D $22 .*...*. $735 $10 ..*....
$20E $22 .*...*. $70E $1E ..****. $736 $10 ..*....
$20F $00 ....... $70F $00 ....... $737 $00 .......
$210 $3C .****.. $710 $20 .*..... $738 $00 .......
$211 $22 .*...*. $711 $20 .*..... $739 $00 .......
$212 $22 .*...*. $712 $3C .****.. $73A $1C ..***..
$213 $3C .****.. $713 $22 .*...*. $73B $22 .*...*.
$214 $22 .*...*. $714 $22 .*...*. $73C $22 .*...*.
$215 $22 .*...*. $715 $22 .*...*. $73D $1E ..****.
$216 $3C .****.. $716 $3C .****.. $73E $02 .....*.
$217 $00 ....... $717 $00 ....... $73F $1C ..***..
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL041.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 67 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL042.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Hardware: Direct Memory Access (2/97)

Header: Apple II Hardware: Direct Memory Access (2/97)

Article Created: 21 September 1984

Article Reviewed/Updated: 28 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes DMA (Direct Memory Access) and how it can be used to
control the Apple's memory and I/O.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

DMA (Direct Memory Access), is designed to allow the hardware on an interface

card to completely take over the Apple's memory and I/O. The DMA pin on the
Apple II interface bus disconnects the Apple's 6502 from the Apple's address
bus, data bus, R/-W signal, and clock. The DMA pin should be pulled low
immediately after phase 0 goes low and should be released when phase 0 again
goes low. The 6502 is a dynamic device that will lose its registers' memory
if DMA is held low for more that 40 microseconds. Here is an example where
the DMA lasts for two microseconds.

Clock 0 _________ ________ ________

| | | | |
|__________| |__________| |_____

DMA _________ _____

| |
|_______________________________________|

The 6502 normally sets up its addresses, control, and data while clock 0 is
low. The memory or I/O device decodes and readies the data while clock 0 is
high. The actual transfer occurs when clock 0 goes from high back to low.
During cycles when DMA is low, the user must supply the address, control, and
data information for that memory cycle in synchronization with the Apple's
clocks.

Enabling Unlimited DMA

----------------------

* Point the reset vector to a restart routine, assuming the Apple has the
Auto-Start ROM.

* Have the peripheral card generate a RESET when the 6502 is to have control
of the bus. The Apple II Reference Manual explains the RESET vector starting
on page 36.

Article Change History:

28 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1984-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL042.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 68 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL043.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Hardware: Errata in Apple II Reference Manual (1 of 2)

Header: Apple II Hardware: Errata in Apple II Reference Manual (1 of 2)

Page 4
Because of continuing cost reductions on 16K RAMs, current revisions of the
Apple II accept only 16K RAMs.

Page 7
Table 2, the backspace key are reversed.

-> $95 $95 $95 $95

<- $88 $88 $88 $88

Page 9
2nd Paragraph, the pins carrying the video signals are referred to as being
on the left side of the board. They are on the RIGHT.

Page 10
The photograph refers to a Revision 6 Apple. Revision 7 and later Apples
will look slightly different.

Page 10
The Eurapple modification is not complete and we do not support or recommend
modification of Apples for European television signals.

Page 11
The photograph refers to a Revision 6 Apple. Revision 7 and later Apples
will look slightly different.

Page 23
The photograph refers to a Revision 6 Apple. Revision 7 and later Apples
will look slightly different.

Page 25
First paragraph, line 4; The address is actually $C040 instead
of $C04F.

Page 31
Paragraph 3, line 3, "the leftmost column" should read "the rightmost
column"

Page 31
Table 11 should read:

LEFT EDGE 32 $20 0/ 0/39 $0/$ 0/$27

WIDTH 33 $21 0/39/39 $0/$27/$27
TOP EDGE 34 $22 0/ 0/23 $0/$ 0/$17
BOTTOM EDGE 35 $23 0/24/24 $0/$18/$18

Page 35
ESC E "When COUT detects this" should read "When RDKEY detects this"

Page 36
The Autostart ROM initializes the annunciators 0 and 1 to OFF and annunciators
2 and 3 to ON.

Page 37
Paragraph 5 refers to to using call -1169 to set $3F4 to XOR of $3F3 in
autostart reset vector. This may garbage the diskette in drive 1 if used on a
non-autostart system.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 69 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

-) and the forward copy key (-

Page 47
The line of monitor command just under the first paragraph should read

*0:FF FF AD 30 C0 88 D0 04 C6 01 F0 08
*:CA D0 F6 A6 00 4C 02 00 60

Page 70
Paragraph 2, the page 3 memory usage chart is actually on page 65 of the
manual instead of page 62.

Page 70
RAM Configuration Blocks are not included on Revision 7 and later Apple
boards.

Page 74
The Zero Page memory maps are incomplete. Applesoft also uses $D6 and
Applesoft HIGH-RES uses $19 to $1D.

Page 79 Table 22
The line for $C060 should be

$0 $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
$C060 cin pb0 pb1 pb2 gc0 gc1 gc2 gc3

Page 81
Paragraph 3 recommends IOSAVE and IORESTORE. These routines must be used with
caution because if any other routine in the system uses them, they will
overwrite your information. The 6502 stack is a better place to save the
registers.

Page 84
Expansion ROM, paragraph 3, This flip-flop should be turned on by the I/O
SELECT signal, not the DEV SEL signal.

Page 89
The photograph refers to a Revision 6 Apple. Revision 7 and later Apples will
look slightly different.

Page 89
The pointer to the USER 1 jumper is wrong. See the photograph on page 99 for
the correct location.

Page 90 Paragraph 5
RDY, RES, IRQ, NMI lines are held high by a 1000 ohm resistor, NOT 3300 ohm.

Page 91
Data from 6502 (read) and Data to 6502 (write) are reversed.
They should be:

Data from 6502 (write)

Data to 6502 (read)

Page 96
Paragraph 4, line 5, the 74LS283 is at location E14.

Page 100
The Apple's new built-in keyboard is built around a AY-5-3600 keyboard
encoder. The inputs to this ROM, pins 17 through 26 and 36 through 40, are
connected to the matrix of keyswitches on the keyboard. The outputs of this
ROM are buffered by a 74LS04 and are connected to the Apple keyboard
connector.

The keyboard decoder rapidly scans through the array of keys on the keyboard,
looking for one that has been pressed. This scanning action is controlled by

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 70 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

the free running oscillator made up of three sections of a 74LS00 at location

B3 on the separate encoder board. The speed of this oscillation is controlled
by C7, R7 and R8 on the encoder board.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL043.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 71 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL044.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Hardware: Errata in Apple II Reference Manual (2 of 2)

Header: Apple II Hardware: Errata in Apple II Reference Manual (2 of 2)

Page 104
The +12 and -5 volt levels are documented on page 92 as +11.8 and -5.2. The
levels will vary from Apple to Apple.

Page 107
Pin 19, SYNC, is connected only on Apples manufactured for sales overseas.

Page 107
Pin 21, RDY, is pulled high with a 1000 ohm resistor to +5 volts.

Page 107
Pin 22, DMA, is held high by a 1000 ohm resistor to +5 volts. This signal
will stop the 6502 clock. It should not be held low for more than two clock
cycles or the 6502 internal registers may be lost.

Page 108
Pin 28, INT IN, is the second item on the page and is mislabeled 26.

Page 108
Pin 32, INH, is pulled high by a 1000 ohm resistor.

Page 108
Pin 35, COLOR REF, is connected only on Apples manufactured for sales
overseas.

Page 119
Figure 3 should be labeled:

ROTATE ONE BIT RIGHT (MEMORY OR ACCUMULATOR) M or A.

Page 120
The Processor status word should be

7 0
+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| N | V | | B | D | I | Z | C | PROCESSOR STATUS WORD, "P"
+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
^
This bit is undefined.

Page 121
Note 1 should read "Bits 6 and 7 are transferred to the Status Register. If
the result of A AND M is zero, then Z=1; otherwise Z=0."

Page 127-128
The unimplemented opcodes are shown as NOPs, which is wrong. $EA is the only
code defined as NOP. The others should not be used as they perform undefined
operations.

Page 128
Op-code $AD is a LDA, Absolute

Page 137
The addresses starting at line 100 should be:

CLRAN0 EQU $C058

SETAN0 EQU $C059
CLRAN1 EQU $C05A

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 72 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

SETAN1 EQU $C05B

CLRAN2 EQU $C05C
SETAN2 EQU $C05D
CLRAN3 EQU $C05E
SETAN3 EQU $C05F

Page 143
Starting at address $FA6F the comments should read:

FA6F LDA CLRAN0 ;AN0 = TTL LO

FA72 LDA CLRAN1 ;AN1 = TTL LO
FA75 LDA SETAN2 ;AN2 = TTL HI
FA78 LDA SETAN3 ;AN3 = TTL HI

Page 165
The comment after address $FCAC should read

1.0204 USEC * (13+27/2*A+5/2*A*A)

Pages 172-176
These tables were cut up to fit the pages so they are no longer in numeric or
alphabetic order.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL044.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 73 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL045.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Hardware: The Apple II Keyboard

Header: Apple II Hardware: The Apple II Keyboard

The keyboard on the Apple II has an upper-case-only encoder. It can produce

ASCII characters 0 through 95, excluding _ , \ , [ , CTRL-_ , CTRL-[, and
CTRL-\. The Apple III uses the very same encoder. However, the Apple III
also has a second keyboard port; with this port, the Apple III can
independently to sense the shift, control, and alpha lock keys, as well as a
number of other functions.

You can modify an existing Apple II to allow it to sense whether or not the
shift keys are depressed. This modification is supported by system software
such as Pascal 1.1 and Pilot, as well as some word processing software. The
core of the modification is a wire running from the shift keys to button input
2 of the game I/O port which button input the paddles don't use. This
modification is not recommended for in-warranty Apples and should be only
performed by an authorized service technician.

Since the modified Apple can sense whether or not the shift key is being
pressed, it can distinguish 51 new characters: CTRL-SHIFT-A thru Z excluding
M, N, and P, SHIFT-A thru Z excluding M, N, and P, SHIFT-0, SHIFT-RETURN,
SHIFT-ESC, SHIFT-LEFT ARROW, and SHIFT-RIGHT ARROW. This raises the total
number of distinguishable characters to 141, which easily encompasses the 128
member ASCII character set.

To facilitate the most natural use of the keyboard, software sometimes

rearranges the interpretation of these characters so that the keyboard
resembles that of a typewriter. Apple has employed several types of keyboards
on the Apple II since its introduction, so the modification has two
appearances.

1. On the older style keyboard, a wire should be run between pin 2 of the
74LS00 and pin 4 of the keyboard connector on the keyboard.

2. On the newer style keyboard with the "piggy-back" electronic assembly, the
wire should be run between pin 9 of the 74LS00 closest to the keyboard
connector and pin 4 of the keyboard connector.

In either case, a second wire should connect the bottom of pin 4 at location
A7 to pin 7 at location J14 on the motherboard. Check carefully that the wire
isn't connected to pin 7 of H14. The keyboard cable acts as a connection
between these two wires.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL045.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 74 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL046.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II High Speed SCSI Card: CMS Hard Drive (11/96)
Header: Apple II High Speed SCSI Card: CMS Hard Drive (11/96)

Article Created: 15 May 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 14 November 1996

TOPIC ----------------------------------------------------------

My computer does not recognize a CMS hard drive when using the Apple II High
Speed SCSI card. How can I correct this problem?

DISCUSSION-------------------------------------------------------

Ensure DIP switch 8 on the CMS hard drive is in the closed position. DIP
switch 8 controls the reset line at pin 40. All Apple SCSI cards use the
reset line for handshaking. If this pin is disconnected or turned off, the
computer will not recognize the hard drive.

If your computer still doesn't recognize the CMS hard drive, check the SCSI
switch to make sure it is not set to 7.

Article Change History:

14 November 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1991-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL046.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 75 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL047.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card: Description (11/96)

Header: Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card: Description (11/96)

Article Created: 31 May 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 14 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes the Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card. This card has been
discontinued and is no longer available from Apple.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Overview
--------
The Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card lets you connect an Apple IIe or Apple IIGS
computer to any device using the SCSI standard. Such devices include hard
disk drives, CD-ROM drives, scanners, tape drives, and laser printers. Using
DMA (direct memory access) data transfer, this card offers impressive data
throughput. It functions more than 10 times faster than the earlier Apple II
SCSI Card. The Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card comes with software utilities
for use with hard disk drives and CD-ROM drives.

System Requirements
-------------------
To use the Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card, you need an Apple IIGS or Apple IIe
computer with a 65C02 microprocessor. This includes all Apple IIe systems
manufactured in 1986 or later, as well as any earlier models that have been
enhanced with the Apple IIe Enhancement Kit. If you have an early-model Apple
IIe that has not been enhanced, contact your dealer about the enhancement
kit.)

A 3.5-inch disk drive (Apple IIGS or Apple IIe) or a 5.25-inch disk

drive (Apple IIe)

A device with an SCSI port, appropriate SCSI cabling, and one SCSI terminator.

Technical Specifications
------------------------
Interface: DB-25 SCSI port

Maximum data throughput

- 1MB per second (Apple IIGS)
- 511K per second (Apple IIe)

Environmental requirements
- Operating temperature: 50 to 104 degrees F (10 to 40 degrees C)
- Relative humidity: 20% to 95% (noncondensing)

Article Change History:

14 November 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1991-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: specsht

### END OF FILE A2TIL047.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 76 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL048.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card: SCSI Reset Line (11/96)

Header: Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card: SCSI Reset Line (11/96)

Article Created: 19 March 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 15 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Does the new Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card use the SCSI Reset line as the
older Rev C card? I have a series of hard drives that have the reset line is
cut in the cable and need to know if they will function with the high-speed
card, or will the cable have to be replaced.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card pin assignments are identical to the older
Apple II SCSI Interface card.

The newer card still uses the SCSI Reset Line. You may need to use a special
cable or, in the case of some third-party hard drives, make the appropriate
DIP switch selections.

Article Change History:

15 November 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1991-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL048.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 77 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL049.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card: Setting DMA (11/96)

Header: Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card: Setting DMA (11/96)

Article Created: 18 January 1995

Article Reviewed/Updated: 15 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article discusses how to change the Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card's PDMA
(pseudo direct memory address) switch settings.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The computer's SCSI ID number is determined by the positions of switches 2,

3, and 4 on the SCSI card. See the article "Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card:
Setting SCSI ID."

Switch 1 turns DMA on or off.

DMA is a feature that allows the SCSI card to read or write information
directly to a storage device (such as a hard disk drive) without having to
depend on the computer's microprocessor to manage the operation.

The Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card comes with the DMA switch already in the
closed (on) position. However, if you have another card (such as an
accelerator card) that uses its own DMA, you may need to turn off the SCSI
card's DMA. Follow these instructions to turn DMA off:

1. Switch the computer off, but leave the power cord plugged in.
2. Locate Switch 1 on the SCSI card and carefully move Switch 1 to the
open (off) position.
3. Refer to the information in the article entitled "Apple II High-Speed
SCSI Card: Setting SCSI ID" if you want to set the rest of the switches.
4. Be sure to follow the installation instructions in the Apple II High-Speed
SCSI Card Owners Guide to install the SCSI card.

Article Change History:

15 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1995-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: hts

### END OF FILE A2TIL049.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 78 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL050.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card: Setting SCSI ID (11/96)

Header: Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card: Setting SCSI ID (11/96)

Article Created: 18 January 1995

Article Reviewed/Updated: 15 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article discusses how to change the Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card's SCSI
ID switch settings.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Switch 1 turns on and off DMA (Direct Memory Access). See the article "Apple
II High-Speed SCSI Card: Setting DMA" for more information on this subject.

The computer's SCSI ID number is determined by the positions of switches 2,

3, and 4 on the SCSI card. Follow these steps to reset the computer's SCSI ID
number:

1. Switch the computer off, but leave the power cord plugged in.

2. Choose an appropriate SCSI ID number for the computer. If you are

using a LaserWriter IISC, Personal LaserWriter SC or Apple Scanner, use
the settings for SCSI ID 2.

3. Refer to the information that follows for the correct position of

switches 2, 3, and 4.

Switch indication
-----------------
0 = Open or off x = Closed or on

SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI

ID 0 ID 1 ID 2 ID 3 ID 4 ID 5 ID 6 ID 7

OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN

1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
000 00 0 0 0 00 0 0
x x x x x x xx xx xx x xxx xxxx

4. Be sure to follow the installation instructions in the Apple II High-Speed

SCSI Card Owners Guide to install the SCSI card.

Article Change History:

15 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1995-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: hts

### END OF FILE A2TIL050.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 79 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL051.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card: Using with GS (11/96)

Header: Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card: Using with GS (11/96)

Article Created: 13 August 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 15 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I have an Apple IIGS with a High-Speed SCSI Card but am unable to access my
SCSI Hard Drive. I am using the drivers that came on the System Tools disk
5.0.2.

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

You need to install the drivers on System Tools disk 5.0.4, which should
support the High Speed SCSI card. The SCSI card is also self-terminating and
any external terminators should be removed.

Article Change History

15 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1991-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL051.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 80 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL052.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card: Description (2/97)

Header: Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card: Description (2/97)

Article Created: 03 April 90

Article Reviewed/Updated: 28 Feb 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes the Apple II High Speed SCSI Card.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The new Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card provides faster data transfer primarily
because of a new feature called "direct memory access" (DMA) data transfer.
Data is transferred directly between the computer's memory and the SCSI
peripheral, with minimal interaction from the computer's microprocessor. The
result is improved, data-transfer performance. With the new high-speed card,
data transfers at a rate of up to 1MB per second on the Apple IIGS computer,
and up to .5MB per second on the Apple IIe computer. In addition to DMA, the
SCSI manager and firmware have been improved and also contribute to the
increased performance.

Compatible with all SCSI peripherals, the Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card
requires only that device-specific applications and drivers be installed on
the system. The card ships with drivers and applications for hard disk and CD-
ROM drives, so that users can take advantage of these devices immediately.
Device drivers for the tape backup drive and scanner will be made available
to developers. Users will be able to take advantage of these devices as
applications are developed. In addition, the new card enables users to
connect as many as seven SCSI peripherals to their computer.

Another feature of the card is an on-board terminator, which simplifies setup

when connecting SCSI peripherals to the computer. Previously, the Apple II
SCSI Card required users to understand rules regarding placement and quantity
of terminators between SCSI devices. With the new card, you place one
terminator at the end of the chain of SCSI devices.

The Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card also includes improved, hard-disk

utilities. These utilities make it easy to handle hard-disk management tasks,
like data backup, disk partitioning and disk verification. The partition and
verify utilities take advantage of the improved firmware commands for hard
disk drives. The backup utility can now handle the resource forks that are
part of the IIGS files. Because these are ProDOS utilities, they can be used
by both Apple IIe and Apple IIGS users.

As far as system requirements, the Apple II High-Speed SCSI Card works on an

Apple IIGS computer or an Apple IIe computer with a 65C02 microprocessor. The
Apple IIGS requires a 3.5-inch disk drive, while the Apple IIe requires
either a 5.25- or a 3.5-inch disk drive. Both require a device with a SCSI
port, appropriate SCSI cabling and one SCSI terminator.

Article Change History:

28 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1990-97 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL052.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 81 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL053.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Language Card Changes

Header: Apple II Language Card Changes

This article last reviewed: 17 March 1989

Effective immediately, Apple is substituting a different Apple II Language

Card for the original one. The new card is smaller and no longer includes
the connector that plugs into the RAM socket. It also does not contain the
Autostart ROM. Now, when Apple II Language Cards are exchanged, Apple will
include a 16K RAM chip with the replacement module.

- When you install a new Language Card into an Apple II or Apple II+ system,
you need to install the 16K RAM chip into the vacant RAM socket on the
main logic board.

- In the unlikely event that customers do not already have the Autostart
ROM in their Apple II systems, they will need to purchase one for you to
install in location F8 on the main logic board. The Autostart ROM (p/n
342-0020) can be ordered from the price pages.

- Refer to the Apple II Family Technical Procedures for instructions on

installing Autostart ROMs and the 16K RAM.

The new Apple II Language Card is available from the price pages under the
same part number as the old card. The new card is available as an Exchange
Module only. When you return a language card to Apple for exchange, a new
language card will be returned to you.

INSTALLATION
------------
WARNING: Be sure the power is off before installing or removing any modules
or components, or before connecting or disconnecting any peripheral devices.
Failure to do so may result in damage to the computer, module, components,
and/or peripheral.

Remember to follow basic ESD precautions when installing, removing, or

troubleshooting modules.

1) Insert the Language Card into slot 0, component side facing away from
power supply.

2) Insert a 16K RAM chip (p/n 334-0002) at location E3 on the motherboard.

(Location E3 is in the left rear corner of the outlined memory area and
was used for the cable header on the old Language Card.

Apple II Standard Computers without Autostart ROM on Motherboard:

1) Replace the Monitor ROM (p/n 342-0004) with an Autostart ROM

(p/n 342-0020) at location F8-ROM on the motherboard.

TESTING
-------
The new language card can be tested with your existing Apple II Product
Diagnostics Disk.

1) Install the new Language Card in slot 0. Ensure that you've inserted a
RAM at location E3 and that the motherboard F8 ROM is p/n 342-0020.

2) Start up the Apple II Product Diagnostics Disk.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 82 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

3) Press the <ESC> key to move the cursor to the CARD TESTS line on the
main menu, then press <RETURN>.

4) Press the <ESC> key to move the cursor to the LANGUAGE CARD line on the
CARD test menu, then press <RETURN>.

If any RAM is highlighted in inverse video, replace the Language Card. If

any of the status states are bad, then replace the Language Card. If the
message "NO ERRORS ENCOUNTERED" appears, then the ROM at Location F8 is good.
If the message "CAN NOT MATCH CODE" appears, then the ROM at F8 is bad and
must be replaced.

Motherboard RAM Test

--------------------
Perform the Motherboard RAM test to ensure that the RAM at location E3 is
good.

5) Use the <ESC> key to move the cursor to the MOTHERBOARD RAM TEST line on
the main test menu, then press <RETURN>.

6) Press <RETURN> to start the test.

7) The test will end and the display will show any bad RAM in inverse video.
If the display shows that the LANG CARD RAM is bad then replace the RAM
at E3.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: hts

### END OF FILE A2TIL053.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 83 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL054.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Machine Language: Accessing the keyboard

Header: Apple II Machine Language: Accessing the keyboard

When writing a machine language routine to check the keyboard for a single
character, make sure that the routine checks for the high bit at the keyboard,
signifing valid data, before the routine attempts to read data there.

Here is an example of such a routine:

ORG $300
KBD EQU $C000 ; location of keyboard data
KBDSTRB EQU $C010 ; location of keyboard strobe latch

ReadKey BIT KBD ; test high bit of data reg.

BPL ReadKey ; If not set retest till it is set
LDA KBD ; Data at KBD is Valid (High Bit set)
BIT KBDSTRB ; now clear the keyboard for the next char
RTS ; and we are done.

The act of striking a key will set the strobe bit automatically, so this
routine clears it before returning.

If you are testing for a particular keystroke, put the test in a seperate
routine. Here is an example of how that would be done:

...
BIT KBDSTRB ; Clear out any data that is already at KBD
WaitForA JSR ReadKey ; get a key from the keyboard
CMP #$C1 ; is it an A????
BNE WaitForA ; Nope go get another
RTS
...

These methods apply to all Apple II's: II, II Plus, IIe, IIe enhanced,
and IIc.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL054.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 84 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL055.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Memory Expansion Card: Diagnostics (11/96)

Header: Apple II Memory Expansion Card: Diagnostics (11/96)

Article Created: 16 December 1985

Article Reviewed/Updated: 15 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes the Apple II Memory Expansion Card diagnostics. These
procedures can be used for any RAM configuration.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Always verify the card size and the positioning of the ICs before running the
internal diagnostics.

A card failure is indicated if the internal dagnostics will not run. In that
case, remove the RAM, install them on an exchange module, and retest.

1. Install the Memory Expansion Card in any slot except 3 in a known good
Apple IIe. No disk drive is necessary.

2. Power on the Apple IIe.

The words Apple II will be displayed at the top of the screen. The prompt and
cursor will be displayed on the screen in the upper left hand corner.

3. Enter CALL -151 and press RETURN. The monitor prompt, *, will appear.

4. Verify which slot the Memory Expansion Card is in by entering cX0AG, where
X is the slot number, and press RETURN.

5. The following display will appear. Verify the card size (RAM
configuration) which appears is the actual size for the card installed (in
this case a 256K card is installed). The dots appear on the screen as the
card is tested. The test will repeat until an error is encountered or the
ESC key is pressed.

MEMORY CARD TEST

ESC TO EXIT
TEST WILL TAKE 45 SECONDS Seconds: 45 90 135 180
CARD SIZE = 256K Card size: 256K 512K 768K 1024K

PASSES = 0001
....
....
....
....
....
....
CARD OK

Error Code Interpretation

-------------------------
The Memory Expansion Error Code Chart in the December 1985 mailing was
incorrect. This article and the January 1986 mailing contain a corrected
chart.

If an error is found during the internal diagnostic it will be displayed in

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 85 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

one of the following formats: ADDRESS ERROR XXYYYY-ZZ or DATA ERROR XXYYYY-
ZZ. There are, in fact, 4 error situations: address error, data error, non-
existent RAM error, and card size error.

Address Error
-------------
An address error usually indicates a card failure. Remove all thecustomer's
RAM, install them on an exchange module, and run the test again.

Data Error
----------
Data errors usually indicate a RAM failure. The ZZ in the error code
specifies the section of the card where the error took place. The XX in the
error code specifies the suspected faulty RAM within that section. Ignore the
YYYY.

Memory Expansion Error Code Chart

---------------------------------

RAM locator Section

in specified section of card
|| ||
XXYYYY-ZZ
||||
ignore

Range of RAM Locator in specified

---------------------------------

Card Card Card

section Chip section Chip section
number number
ZZ XX ZZ

10 C1 0C - 0F A1 01
C2 08 - 0B A2
C3 04 - 07 A3
C4 00 - 03 A4

20 C5 0C - 0F A5 02
C6 08 - 0B A6
C7 04 - 07 A7
C8 00 - 03 A8

40 C9 0C - 0F A9 04
C10 08 - 0B A10
C11 04 - 07 A11
C12 00 - 03 A12

80 C13 0C - 0F A13 08
C14 08 - 0B A14
C15 07 - 04 A15
C16 00 - 03 A16

To locate DATA ERROR 08000 - 40 using the chart,

The bad chip is in section 40.

Card Chip
section number
ZZ

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 86 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

40 C9
C10
C11
C12

The bad chip is located where the RAM locator falls into the range that
includes 08.

Range of RAM Locator in specified

---------------------------------

Card Chip Card

section number section

ZZ XX

40 C10 08 - 0B

The position of the bad chip is C10. Replace the RAM chip on the card.

A x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

B x x x x x x x x x X x x x x x x

C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Re-run the diagnostic.

Non-Existent RAM Error

----------------------
Any other section ZZ codes, for example 0B, 0E, FC, and so on, usually
indicate a card failure. Remove all RAM and install it on an exchange module.

Other error codes might point to a RAM chip which is not installed, for
example, if a 256K Memory Expansion Board gave an error of 0C0000 - 40,
change the RAM which is installed in that section. If the test still gives
the same error message, change the RAM in the adjoining sections.

Card Size Error

---------------
If the actual card size does not correspond to the card size listed on the
built-in diagnostic, you will need to exchange eight RAMs. For example, if
the card size indicated on the internal diagnostic is 768K, and the actual
RAM on the card is 1 megabyte, remove the RAM at locations A1, C1, A5, C5,
A9, C9, A13, and C13. Reinstall known good RAM and run the diagnostics.

If the card size is now correct, there may be one or more bad ICs among the
RAM removed. Replace the removed RAM one at a time, testing after each
installation, until the bad RAM is located.

If the card size is still incorrect, this will indicate a card failure.
Remove all the RAM and install it on an exchange module and retest.

Article Change History:

15 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1988-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL055.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 87 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL056.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Memory Expansion Cards: Decsription (11/96)

Header: Apple II Memory Expansion Cards: Decsription (11/96)

Article Created: 31 May 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 15 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes Apple's three Apple II Memory Expansion Cards.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Overview
--------
An Apple Memory Expansion Card adds up to one megabyte (1MB) RAM to any Apple
II personal computer, allowing it to run more sophisticated applications and
to create larger files. On the Apple IIGS personal computer, memory expansion
lets you run high-performance programs that take full advantage of the
computer's sound and graphics capabilities.

Three cards are available:

- Apple IIGS Memory Expansion Card
- Apple IIc Memory Expansion Card (for Apple IIc only, not Apple IIc Plus)
- Apple II Memory Expansion Card (for Apple IIe, Apple II Plus, and Apple II
computers)

These cards are compatible with three operating systems: ProDOS, DOS 3.3, and
Pascal 1.3. (Earlier versions of Pascal can be upgraded to version 1.3.) DOS
3.3 programs cannot be booted from the Memory Expansion Card.

Environmental requirements are the same for all three cards:

- ambient temperature: 50 to 104 degrees F (10 to 40 degrees C)
- relative humidity: 0% to 95% (non condensing)

Voltage is the same for all three cards: 4.75 to 5.25 volts DC

Apple IIGS Memory Expansion Card

--------------------------------
This card is used with an Apple IIGS personal computer with a monitor and
disk drive.

Power Consumption:
- operating: 200 milliamps in 256K configurations
600 milliamps in 1MB configuration

- standby: 140 milliamps in 256K configuration

370 milliamps in 1MB configuration

Apple IIc Memory Expansion Card/Kit

-----------------------------------
The Apple IIc Memory Expansion Card is used with an Apple IIc personal
computer (model number A2S4100).

The Apple IIc Memory Expansion Kit is used with an Apple IIc personal
computer (model number A2S4000).

Power Consumption:
- operating: 100 milliamps in 256K configurations

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 88 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

200 milliamps in 1MB configuration

- standby: 90 milliamps in 256K configuration

180 milliamps in 1MB configuration

Apple II Memory Expansion Card

------------------------------
The Apple II Memory Expansion Card is used with an Apple IIe personal
computer (preferably enhanced) that has a monitor and disk drive, or with an
Apple II Plus or Apple II personal computer with a monitor and disk drive.

Power Consumption:
- operating: 100 milliamps in 256K configurations
200 milliamps in 1MB configuration

- standby: 50 milliamps in 256K configuration

150 milliamps in 1MB configuration

Apple II Memory Expansion Card Technical Reference

==================================================

The Memory expansion card looks like, operates as, and is accessed exactly
the same way as an Apple Protocol Converter device.

There are only two ways to access the card:

- as an Apple Protocol Converter device

- as a RAM disk.

Through the protocol converter, you can access all the memory on the card at
any time.

Article Change History:

15 Nov 1996 - Revised formatting.
30 Aug 1994 - Reviewed for technical accuracy.
Copyright 1991-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: specsht

### END OF FILE A2TIL056.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 89 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL057.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Monochrome Monitors: Specifications (Discontinued)

Header: Apple II Monochrome Monitors: Specifications (Discontinued)

Article Created: 31 May 1991

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes two Apple II Monochrome Monitors:

* the Apple Monochrome Monitor (for the Apple IIGS, Apple IIc Plus, or
Apple IIc)

* the Apple Monochrome Monitor IIe (for the Apple IIe, Apple II Plus, or
Apple II)

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Both these monitors display crisp, easy-to-read text and sharp graphics.
Their 12 inch high-resolution antiglare screens are easy on your eyes,
making them the low-cost displays of choice for text-based applications and
other applications that don't require color.

System Requirements
-------------------
* To use an Apple Monochrome Monitor IIe, you need an Apple IIe, Apple
II Plus, or Apple II personal computer.

* To use an Apple Monochrome monitor, you need an Apple IIGS, Apple IIc
Plus, or Apple IIc personal computer. If you have an Apple IIc Plus or
Apple IIc, you may also wish to purchase an Apple Monitor Stand.

Picture Tube
------------
* Apple Monochrome Monitor IIe
12 inches (30.5 centimeters) diagonal
High-contrast
Antiglare
90 degrees diagonal deflection
Green Phosphor (EIA Type P31)

* Apple Monochrome Monitor

12 inches (30.5 centimeters) diagonal
High-contrast
Antiglare
90 degrees diagonal deflection
White Phosphor (EIA Type P4)

Active Display Area

-------------------
* both monitors:
215mm horizontal by 160mm vertical (remainder of area is used for border)

Scanning
--------
* both monitors:
EIA standard: 525 lines; 30 frames, 60 fields/second; overscan

Scan Rates
----------
* both monitors:
Horizontal: 15.7 kilohertz

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 90 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Vertical: 59.9 hertz

Input Signal
------------
* both monitors:
Composite video, 1.0 ( 0.1) volts peak-to-peak, negative sync

Video Bandwidth
---------------
* both monitors:
Less than 3 decibels down at 10 megahertz

Display Capability
------------------
* Apple Monochrome Monitor IIe
With Apple IIe: 560 dots horizontally by 192 dots vertically

* Apple Monochrome Monitor

With Apple IIc Plus or Apple IIc: 560 dots horiz. by 192 dots vert.
With Apple IIGS: 640 dots horizontally by 200 dots vertically

Text display
------------
* both monitors: up to 80 columns by 25 lines

Horizontal linearity
--------------------
* both monitors: less than 10%

Vertical linearity
------------------
* both monitors: less than 7%

Video Input Connector

---------------------
* both monitors: RCA-style phone jack (75 ohm)

Controls
--------
* Apple Monochrome Monitor IIe
Front: power on/off, contrast
Rear: brightness, vertical hold, height

* Apple Monochrome Monitor

Side: power on/off, contrast
Rear: brightness, vertical hold, vertical amplitude

Electrical Requirements
-----------------------
* both monitors:
Line voltage 108 to 132 volts AC
Frequency 50 to 60 hertz
Power consumption
Typically less than 20 watts
Maximum 45 watts

Environmental requirements
--------------------------
* Apple Monochrome Monitor IIe
Operating temperature: 41 to 104 degrees F (5 to 40 degrees C)
Maximum humidity: 90%
Altitude: 0 to 10,000 ft. (0 to 3,048 m)

* Apple Monochrome Monitor

Operating temperature: 32 to 122 degrees F (0 to 5 degrees C)
Maximum humidity: 90%

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 91 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Altitude: 0 to 10,000 ft. (0 to 3,048 m)

Dimensions
----------
* Apple Monochrome Monitor IIe
Height: 10.63 in. (27.0 cm)
Width: 14.56 in. (37.0 cm)
Depth: 12.50 in (31.8 cm)
Weight: 18 lbs. (8.16 kg)

* Apple Monochrome Monitor

Height: 10 in. (25.5 cm)
Width: 12.3 in. (31.0 cm)
Depth: 14.3 in (37.5 cm)
Weight: 18 lbs. (8.16 kg)
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL057.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 92 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL058.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Network: Drop Box Creation From Finder Only

Header: Apple II Network: Drop Box Creation From Finder Only

This article last reviewed: 6 September 1989

TOPIC ---------------------------------------------

I work on an AppleShare/Aristotle network setup. I created a Drop Box on the

server, so that users can save their AppleWorks files directly into the Drop
Box on the server by using the appropriate ProDOS pathname. It doesn't work!
(Owner has all privileges, everyone else has Make Changes only.)

I first tested this on a Macintosh workstation, trying to save a document to a

Drop Box using the "Save As" command. Drop Boxes are dimmed in the dialog
box,
so I wasn't able to open the Drop Box folder and save the document. The only
alternative I could think of was to save the document somewhere else, return
to
the Finder, and then drag the document into the Drop Box.

Are there any alternatives for Apple II users who want to use Drop Boxes?

DISCUSSION ----------------------------------------

The Finder is the only mechanism we are aware of that lets you put files into
a
Drop Box folder.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL058.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 93 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL059.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Pascal: Disk directory structure

Header: Apple II Pascal: Disk directory structure

Const
maxdir= 77; {Maximum number of entries in directory}
vidleng= 7; {Number of characters in volume ID}
tidleng= 15; {Number of characters in title ID}
fblksize= 512; {Standard disk block length}
dirblk= 2; {Directory starts at this disk-block address}

TYPE
datarec=
PACKED RECORD
month: 0..12; {0 implies meaningless data}
day: 0..31: {Day of the month}
year: 0..100; {100 implies the dated volume is temporary}
END {datarec};

vid=
string[vidleng];

dirrange=
0..maxdir;

tid=
string[tidleng];

filekind=
{untyped, xdskfile, codefile, textfile, infofile, datafile,
graffile, fotofile, securedir};

direntry=
PACKED RECORD
dfirstblk: integer; {1st physical disk address}
dlastblk: integer; {Points at block following last used block}
CASE DFKind: filekind of
Securedir, untypedfile: {Only in dir[0] - this is volume info}
[Filler1: 0..2048; {waste 13 bits for compatability}
dvid: vid; {name of disk volume}
deovblk: integer; {last block in volume}
dnumfiles: dirrange; {number of files in directory}
dloadtime: integer; {Time of last access}
dlastboot: daterec]; {Most recent date setting}

xdskfile, codefile,textfile, infofile, datafile,

graffile, fotofile: {regular file info}
[filler2: 0..1024; {waste 12 bits for compatability}
status: boolean; {for filer wildcards}
dtid: tid; {title of file}
dlastbyte: 1..fblksize; {Number of bytes in files last block}
daccess: daterec}; {date of last modification}
END; {case dfkind; direntry}

directory =
ARRAY[dirrange] of direntry;

To use this information, do a UNITREAD on the desired volume.

For example,

PROGRAM ShowHow;

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 94 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

All of the above declarations plus:

VAR
DirInfo: Directory;
UnNum: Integer

BEGIN
UnNum:=4;
UNITREAD(UnNum,DirInfo,SIZEOF(DirInfo),2);
END.

This program reads the directory inforation on volume 4 and stores it in the
Directory variable DirInfo. The last parameter, 2, indicates to UNITREAD to
start reading with block 2, where the directory information starts.

With Pascal 1.3, you can chain to and from the filer and thereby easily handle
files within programs.
Pascal Technote #4

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL059.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 95 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL060.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Peripheral Cards: How Pascal identifies (2/97)

Header: Apple II Peripheral Cards: How Pascal identifies (2/97)

Apple II Peripheral Cards: How Pascal identifies (2/97)

Article Created: 27 July 1985

Article Reviewed/Updated: 12 Feb 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article discusses how Pascal v1.1 identifies peripheral cards.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Pascal 1.1 uses four firmware bytes to identify the peripheral card. Both the
identifying bytes and the branch table are near the beginning of the $Cs00
ROM space (where s = slot). The identifiers are listed in Table A-2.

Address Value
_______________________________________________________________

$Cs05 $38 (like the old Serial Interface Card)

$Cs07 $18 (like the old Serial Interface Card)
$Cs0B $01 (like Generic Signature of new FW cards)
$Cs0C $ci (like Device Signature; see below)

Table A-2. Bytes Used for Device Indentification

The first digit, c, of the Device Signature byte indentifies the device class
as listed in Table A-3.

Digit Class
_______________________________________________________________

$0 reserved
$1 printer
$2 joystick or other X-Y input device
$3 serial or parallel I/O card
$4 modem
$5 sound or speech device
$6 clock
$7 mass storage device
$8 80-column card
$9 network or bus interface
$A special purpose (none of the above)
$B-F reserved for future expansion

Table A-3. Device Class Digit

The second digit, i, of the Device Signature byte is a unique indentifier for
the card, assigned by Apple Developer Technical Support. For example, in the
Device Signature of the SSC--$31--the 3 signifies that the device is a serial
or parallel I/O card; the 1 is Apple Developer Technical Support's unique
identifier for that card.

Article Change History:

12 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1985-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 96 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

### END OF FILE A2TIL060.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 97 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL061.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Peripheral Cards: Sending TABs to your Printer

Header: Apple II Peripheral Cards: Sending TABs to your Printer

Problems you may have sending TAB commands to your printer may stem from the
interface cards "trapping" the <CTRL-I> before it goes to the printer.

To send a TAB to a DMP from an Apple IIe using a Parallel Interface Card:

Change the I/F card command character to something other than <CTRL-I>.

10 I$ = CHR$(9): Q$ = CHR$(17)
15 PRINT I$; Q$: REM command char for card is now CTRL-Q
20 PRINT I$: REM this sends the TAB

Reference: Parallel Interface Card Manual, p.12

To send a TAB to an Imagewriter from an Apple IIc:

First send <CTRL-I>Z to "zap" future commands. The I/F card will ignore
following <CTRL-I>'s.

10 I$ = CHR$(9)
15 PRINT I$;"Z": REM zap
20 PRINT I$: REM this sends the TAB

Reference: Apple IIc Reference Manual, section 7.1

To send a TAB to an Imagewriter from an Apple IIe using a Super Serial Card:

Send the TAB character twice or "zap" as with the Apple IIc.

10 I$ = CHR$(9)
15 PRINT I$;I$: REM this sends the TAB

Reference: Super Serial Card Manual, page 12

BASIC's TAB command doesn't work properly with either the (old) High Speed
Serial Interface or the Apple Silentype. Integer BASIC it is limited to 40
columns, while a TAB(20) in Applesoft will sometimes output 20 spaces
instead of going to column 20. An example that gets around this is:

10 PRINT "HI";:POKE 36,55: PRINT "THERE"

POKE 36,55 will put the "THERE" in the 56th column (remember, Apple counts
columns from 0 to 79) while still printing "HI" in column 0.

Following is a sample program that dealers can show to customers:

10 PRINT CHR$(4);"PR#1" :REM TURN THE PRINTER ON WITHOUT DISCONNECTING PRODOS

20 PRINT CHR$(9);CHR$(1) :REM SWITCH THE CONTROL CODE FROM CTL-I TO CTL-A
30 PRINT CHR$(27);"(010,020,030.":REM SET UP THE TAB LOCATIONS
40 I$=CHR$(9)
50 PRINT I$;"TEN";I$;"TWENTY";I$;"THIRTY":REM SEND THE LINE WITH TAB'S
60 PRINT CHR$(4);"PR#0":REM TURN OFF THE PRINTER
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL061.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 98 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL062.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Peripherals: Quick Reference Chart (2/97)

Header: Apple II Peripherals: Quick Reference Chart (2/97)

Apple II Peripherals: Quick Reference Chart (2/97)

Article Created: 23 October 1986

Article Reviewed/Updated: 12 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

The following table identifies compatible peripherals for the Apple II line
of computers.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The X means that the peripheral product is compatible with the CPU. The
footnotes explain the numbers.

Item Apple II CPU

II Plus IIe IIc IIc(new) IIGS

Drives

Disk II X 1 X 1 9 9 X 1
DuoDisk X 2 X 2 14 14 X
Unidisk X 2 X 2 X X X
Unidisk 3.5 X 3,7 X 3,5 X X
IIc External X 2 X 2 X X X
Apple 3.5 X
Apple 5.25 X 11 X 11 X X X
Profile (5M,10M) X 4,7 X 4 X 4
Hard Disk 20SC X 6,7 X 6 X 6

Cards

II Memory Expansion X 7 X X
IIc Memory Expansion X
IIGS Memory Expansion X
Super Serial X X 8 8 X
Parallel Interface X X 9 9 X
80-column X 8 8
Extended 80-column X 8 8

Apple Modem 300/1200 X 12 X 12 X X X

Apple Personal Modem X 12 X 12 X X X
Imagewriter X 12 X 12 X X X
Imagewriter II X 12 X 12 X X X
Daisy Wheel Printer X 12 X 12 X X X
LaserWriter X 12 X 12 X X X

Monitors
II X X X X X
IIc X X X X X
ColorMonitor IIc, IIe X X X X X
ColorMonitor 100 X 10 9 9
AppleColor RGB 9 9 9,13 9,13 X
AppleColor Composite X X X X X
Monochrome X X X X X

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 99 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Footnotes:
1 - Requires Disk II controller card
2 - Requires Duodisk/Unidisk controller card
3 - Requires Unidisk 3.5 controller card
4 - Requires Profile Interface Card
5 - Will auto boot on an enhanced IIe
6 - Requires Apple II SCSI Card
7 - Requires 64K RAM for Prodos
8 - This function is built into the Apple IIc
9 - A third party solution is available
10- Requires Extended 80-Column AppleColor Card
11- May be daisy-chained from a Unidisk
12- Requires a Super Serial Card
13- Limited color capability
14- Will only have access to one of the drives

Note: "IIe" stands for either the unenhanced or the enhanced Apple IIe.
"IIc(new)" refers to an Apple IIc with memory expansion socket.

Article Change History:

12 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1989-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: ktable

### END OF FILE A2TIL062.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 100 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL063.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Plus: How To Generate Lowercase & Uppercase Characters

Header: Apple II Plus: How To Generate Lowercase & Uppercase Characters

This article last reviewed: 23 November 1988

To make an Apple II Plus generate both lowercase and uppercase characters for
word processing applications you need a Videx (or other manufacturer) 80-
column
card for the Apple II Plus. The Videx VideoTerm card handles both the reading
of keystrokes and their proper display.

Note: You must make the Apple II Plus shift key modification for this to work.
Search on "shift key mod" in the Tech Info Library for the modification
requirements.
Copyright 1988 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL063.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 101 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL064.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Plus: How to Identify a Revision 7 Motherboard?

Header: Apple II Plus: How to Identify a Revision 7 Motherboard?

This article last reviewed: 19 November 1987

Here's how to determine whether an Apple II Plus has a revision 7 motherboard

or a pre-revision 7 motherboard:

- Look at the motherboard's part number. As you face the front of the
computer, it's in the upper-left corner of the motherboard. The number
begins with nnn-nnnn.

- If the part number ends with 07, or with A, B, or C -- the motherboard is

revision 7. Otherwise, it's pre-revision 7.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL064.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 102 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL065.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Plus: Monitor and Drives Compatible with Apple IIe
Header: Apple II Plus: Monitor and Drives Compatible with Apple IIe

Article Created: 13 August 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Can I use the monitor and disk drives from an Apple II Plus with an Apple
IIe?

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

Yes, it's okay to switch the monitor and drives between the two systems.
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL065.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 103 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL066.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Plus: Relocation/Configuration Error (2/97)

Header: Apple II Plus: Relocation/Configuration Error (2/97)

Article Created: 02 July 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 17 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

What is the meaning of a relocation/configuration error on the Apple II Plus

when running ProDOS?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

ProDOS requires 64K of RAM to run. The error you are getting means that you
have only 48K of RAM.

Article Change History:

17 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1991-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL066.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 104 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL067.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II ProFile Interface Card Modification for the Apple II GS

Header: Apple II ProFile Interface Card Modification for the Apple II GS

This article last reviewed: 28 March 1988

PROBLEM DESCRIPTION: Some ProFile Interface cards will not work

properly when installed in the Apple IIGS. ProFile directory information
might become damaged and cause the user not to be able to access data
stored on the ProFile.

CAUSE: There might be an incomplete ground path through the card.

CURE: If ANY ProFile Interface Card is to be installed in an Apple

IIGS, check first to see that a jumper, made of 24-26 gauge multistrand
wire is installed between pin 12 of IC C6 (2716 EPROM-Apple Part# 341-
0299) and pin 1 of IC B4 (74LS368-Apple Part# 305-0368) on the non-
component side of the board. If needed, the jumper should be installed
by a knowledgeable technician to assure proper operation of the ProFile
when interfaced with the Apple IIGS. The jumper wire should be just long
enough to make the connection. The technician should remove the EPROM before
soldering, thus preventing any damage to the chip.
Copyright 1988, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: hts

### END OF FILE A2TIL067.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 105 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL068.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II SCSI Card: Cable Pinouts (11/96)

Header: Apple II SCSI Card: Cable Pinouts (11/96)

Article Created: 06 October 1986

Article Reviewed/Updated: 15 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Listed below are the pinout for the cable between the Apple II SCSI card and
any standard SCSI system cable.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

SCSI Card port SCSI System Cable

DB-25 connector Apple 50 pin connector
--------------- ----------------------

Pin Signal Pin

---- ------ ---
1 REQ' Request 49
2 MSG' Message 46
3 I/O' 50
4 RST' Reset 45
5 ACK' Acknowledge 44
6 BSY' Busy 43
7 GND Ground 16,18,19
8 DB0' Data Line 0 26
9 GND Ground 20,21,22
10 DB3' Data Line 3 29
11 DB5' Data Line 5 31
12 DB6' Data Line 6 32
13 DB7' Data Line 7 33
14 GND Ground 1,2,3
15 C/D' Carrier Detect 48
16 GND Ground 4,5,6
17 ATN' Attention 41
18 GND Ground 7,8,9
18 DIFFSENS-GND 11
19 SEL' Select 47
20 DBP' Parity 34
21 DB1' Data Line 1 27
22 DB2' Data Line 2 28
23 DB4' Data Line 4 30
24 GND Ground 23,24,25
25 TERMPWR 38

Important SCSI Card Information

===============================
The prime (') next to the signal name indicates the signal voltage levels are
negative, "low true". The SCSI port uses -5V logic levels.

Because the SCSI port is a DB-25 connector, it looks like a RS-232 port but
is NOT a RS-232 port. DO NOT plug any RS-232 device into the SCSI port. Doing
so can damage the 5380 chip on the card.

Article Change History:

15 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1986-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 106 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

### END OF FILE A2TIL068.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 107 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL069.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II SCSI Card: Interrupt Problem (11/96)

Header: Apple II SCSI Card: Interrupt Problem (11/96)

Article Created: 26 November 1986

Article Reviewed/Updated: 15 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article discusses a potential problem with the Apple IIGS, Apple II SCSI
card and programs using interrupts.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Apple IIGS system crashes may occur with programs using interrupts during
access of SCSI disk drives connected to the Apple II SCSI card. Once
interrupts are enabled, it is possible an interrupt may occur during a SCSI
drive data transfer. Programs initiate data transfer by passing control to
the SCSI card.

The SCSI card firmware places code in its own stack for executing. If taking
an interrupt also places code on the same stack it may wipe out some or all
of the previous SCSI firmware code. Returning from the interrupt, returns to
the portion of the stack corrupted by the interrupt, which results in some
kind of unidentifiable system crash.

Crashes are possible if BOTH of the following conditions apply:

- The SCSI card is used with an interrupt driven program, like AppleTalk.

- This application program calls the SCSI card directly, NOT using ProDOS.

To work around this possibility, make sure your applications use ProDOS to
handle any interrupts. This may decrease SCSI disk data transfer rates but
will help reduce system crashes.

Article Change History:

15 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1986-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL069.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 108 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL070.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II SCSI Card: Large File Transfer (11/96)

Header: Apple II SCSI Card: Large File Transfer (11/96)

Article Created: 15 May 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 14 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I am using an Apple II SCSI card to transfer files and sometimes large files
become corrupted. Is there a fix for this problem?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Files larger than 64K become corrupted during the transfer process when using
the Apple II SCSI Card. Use the newer High Speed SCSI card drivers with the
older SCSI cards.

Article Change History:

14 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1991-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL070.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 109 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL071.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II SCSI Card: Product Description (11/96)

Header: Apple II SCSI Card: Product Description (11/96)

Article Created: 20 October 1996

Article Reviewed/Updated: 15 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article contains the technical specifications for the Apple II SCSI card.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Technical Specifications
========================

Hardware
--------
Provides an electrical interface between external SCSI devices and the CPU.

Provides the address and control lines required by the Apple II's
microprocessor for accessing and controlling the SCSI chip and Smartport
firmware.

Provides other circuitry to interface the 5380 IC with the Apple II CPU
control signals.

NCR 5380 SCSI IC

-----------------
Implements SCSI bus (5380 data sheet in Chapter 2 of the Hardware Technical
Reference manual).

On board RAM
------------
8 banks of 1K, accessed with special logic circuits. Used for status of
devices at SCSI bus initialization (including the status of the Apple II SCSI
card itself)

On Board ROM
------------
8 banks of 1K, aAccessed with special logic circuits and used for storing
Smartport firmware

Interface
---------
25-pin SCSI connector

Input/Output
------------
Parallel transmission, two modes for data i/o operations
- PDMA (pseudo-DMA), default
- Block Move only supported by 65816 CPUs and must be enabled by the
application
- Maximum storage area under ProDOS: 32 megabytes

Firmware

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 110 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

--------
Smartport program converts the microprocessor commands or calls issued by CPU
to a format compatible with external SCSI devices

Issues calls to the microprocessor to give it the status of the external SCSI
devices and allow the CPU to control their operation

Commands supported: STATUS, READ BLOCK, WRITE BLOCK, FORMAT, CONTROL, INIT,
OPEN, CLOSE, READ, WRITE

Boot capability with Autostart ROM when you install the card in the slot with
highest priority, which may depend on the operating environment

When Smartport does not find the SCSI device capable of starting up the
system, Smartport returns control to the environment of the Apple II and the
startup search continues through lower-priority slots.

Electrical
----------
Voltage requirement: 4.75 to 5.25 volts DC
Power consumption in milliamps (ma)
Standby: 340 ma
Operating: 390 ma

Environmental
-------------

Ambient temperature: 50 to 104 deg F (10 to 40 deg C)

Relative humidity: 20 to 95 percent (non condensing)

System Requirements
-------------------
Apple IIGS, Apple IIe or Apple II Plus
Apple II SCSI Card
Apple SCSI System Cable
One or more SCSI-compatible peripherals, can be a high-speed printer interface

Daisy chaining
--------------
Apple II with the SCSI card in slot 5 and ONLY a serial printer or modem card
in slot 2.

- Running ProDOS 1.2: 4 external devices

- Running ProDOS 16: 7 external devices

Additional SCSI system components as required

---------------------------------------------
Cable Terminator
Peripheral Cables
Cable Extenders (Maximum total length of cables: 20 feet (6.5 meters).

Read the manual for the Apple SCSI Cable System before trying to connect any
SCSI devices.

Article Change History

15 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1986-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: specsht

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 111 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

### END OF FILE A2TIL071.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 112 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL072.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II SCSI Card: ROM Upgrade (2/97)

Header: Apple II SCSI Card: ROM Upgrade (2/97)

Article Created: 14 February 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 28 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes how to obtain the Apple II SCSI Card ROM upgrade.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

There is a repair extension that covers your on this. Contact your dealer
about getting the cards upgraded. Here is the information the dealer will
need:

SCSI INTERFACE CARD IIE & IIGS ROM UPGRADE--OLC123

(Announced March 88)

Users who upgrade to Apple IIGS Operating System Version 4.0 or greater must
use the latest revisions of both the SCSI Interface Card and the ProFile
Interface Card. You can determine the latest version of these interface cards
by checking the part number of their ROM. As of March 88, ROM part number 341-
0437, Revision A, is the latest version of the SCSI Interface Card. All SCSI
and ProFile Interface Cards now shipped by Apple are the latest revisions.

Apple has revised the ROM on the Apple II SCSI Interface Card to make the
card compatible with the Apple-CD SC and the Apple IIGS Operating System.
When other products requiring the new ROM are introduced, you will be
notified by a Service mailing. The ROM on the card can be identified by the
new part number, 341-0437. All Service Stock and Finished Goods inventory has
been upgraded to the new ROM.

Article Change History:

28 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1991-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL072.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 113 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL073.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Setup and GS/OS: Compatible Versions

Header: Apple II Setup and GS/OS: Compatible Versions

This article last reviewed: 6 March 1990

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I installed the software from the Apple II Setup 2.1.1 disk (680-5060-B) on
top
of Apple II Setup 2.0.1. I did the other setup steps and tried to start
up an Apple IIGS from the server. A GS/OS-specific file could not be found,
and I got an error $0046.

I went back to Apple II Setup 2.0.1, and all was well.

Can you explain?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The $0046 error is a "file not found" error. This error normally occurs
because part of GS/OS is not on the startup disk--in this case, the server.
For
the server to have a working GS/OS system to start up the Apple IIGS, the
GS/OS
Installer needs to be run from an Apple IIGS that is logged on to the server.
Then you install the desired GS/OS configuration on the server volume. We
believe that this is what is meant by "did the other setup steps".

If we are correct, it is most likely that an older version of the 16-bit

operating system is on the server. The 2.1.1 version was a release
specifically for version 5.0.2 of GS/OS. If version 2.1.1 was installed
while ProDOS 16 (System Disk 3.2 or earlier) is used on the server, there
will be a problem with versions being matched correctly. Version 2.0.1 was
designed to work with ProDOS 16, the predecessor to GS/OS. The files used on
version 2.0.1 are quite different from the files used with 2.1.1.

We suggest that you use version 2.1.1 of the Apple II Setup Installer with
a server having GS/OS 5.0.2 installed. Use version 2.0.1 on servers providing
the earlier ProDOS 16 system files, which are found on System Disk 3.2 and
earlier.

Also note that GS/OS 5.0 provided a version of Apple II Setup labelled "2.1."
This version should be used only with GS/OS 5.0. However, the best solution
is
to use GS/OS 5.0.2 and Apple II Setup 2.1.1.
Copyright 1990 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL073.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 114 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL074.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Silentype manual A2L0034/030-0095-00: Errata

Header: Apple II Silentype manual A2L0034/030-0095-00: Errata

Page 11... The procedure for printing a High-Res image doesn't work, since
Pascal clears the High-Res buffer when you go to the Filer. We suggest
modifying the program as shown below:

Program Sprio;

USES Turtlegraphics, Applestuff;

Var angle, distance : integer;
CH : Char; (* added *)

Begin
angle := 0;
While not Keypress Do
Begin
InitTurtle;
Pencolor (white);
For distance := 0 to 99 Do
Begin
Move (2 * distance);
Turn (angle);
End;
angle := angle + 5;
End;
CH:=CHR (17); (* added *)
Unitwrite (6,CH,1,0,12); (* added *)
Textmode
End.

Page 13...The discussion on "Echoing to the screen" assumes that you have
already done a PR#1 before you do the T command.

Page 18...The discussion in the last paragraph assumes that you have
already done a PR#1 before you do the Q command.

Page 38...Line 4, "for the right margin is 2" should be "for the left
margin is 2"

Page 39...Program line 6040 should end with Then Goto 6070
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL074.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 115 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL075.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Software: Current Versions (10/94)

Header: Apple II Software: Current Versions (10/94)

Article Created: 7 December 1992

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

The table below lists current SHIPPING Apple software products for the Apple
II and provides for each:

Version The current version number.

Notes Additional information

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Product Version Notes

------- ------- -----
Apple Access II 1.3.1 For Apple II
Apple II System 3.2 For Apple II systems
Apple IIGS System 6.0.1 For Apple IIGS only.
Apple IIe Card Software 2.2.1 For Macintosh computers using IIe card.
Aristotle xxx For Apple II
HyperMover 1.1 HyperCard IIGS

Support Information Services

Copyright 1994, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: ktable,ksts,kcompat

### END OF FILE A2TIL075.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 116 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL076.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II System Disk 3.0: Requires MouseText, 128K Memory

Header: Apple II System Disk 3.0: Requires MouseText, 128K Memory

This article last reviewed: 20 January 1989

Here are some questions and answers about Apple II System Disk 3.0 for
the Apple IIe and Apple IIc:

Q) Will this disk operate on an unenhanced Apple IIe?

A) System Disk v3.0 uses an AppleWorks-style interface, and this requires the
availability of MouseText characters, which do NOT exist in an unenhanced
Apple IIe. The program may also use some of the additional 27 instructions
available only in the 65C02 CPU.

Q) What is the latest version of System software that will operate with an
unenhanced Apple IIe?

A) System Utilities Version v2.1.1 will work on an unenhanced Apple IIe, but
even that requires some MouseText characters, and will show an abnormal
display -- for example, Upper Case Inverse Capital S characters instead of
straight horizontal lines.

However, the program runs properly in spite of this display anomaly. System
Utilities v2.1 does not use MouseText characters and should function
normally on an unenhanced Apple IIe.

Q) How much memory does the System Disk v3.0 require to operate?

A) When booted on a 64K enhanced Apple IIe, the program gives an error message
stating it requires 80-column text, and this indicates it requires 128K of
memory.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL076.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 117 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL077.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Systems: How to Identify them With Inter-Poll

Header: Apple II Systems: How to Identify them With Inter-Poll

This article last reviewed: 28 April 1989

This article describes what to do, so that Inter*Poll can identify an Apple
IIe or Apple IIGS connected to a network. There are some very specific
criteria that must be met:

- The Apple IIGS must have Built-in AppleTalk selected in the Control Panel.

- The Apple IIGS must have the proper port set to "Your Card".

- An Apple IIe with the Workstation Card must be past the Password screen.

The steps for each computer are given below.

Apple IIGS
----------
For an Apple IIGS to appear in the "Device List" window of Inter*Poll,
these steps must be followed:

1) Select "Built-in AppleTalk" from the Control Panel. At the same time,
set the port that the network is connected to, generally the Printer
port, to "Your Card".

2) Shut down and restart the system.

3) Run Inter*Poll on the Macintosh, or have it running and checking the

network.

The Apple IIGS should show up in the Device List window.

Note: Responder is built into the AppleTalk portion of the software for the
Apple IIGS.

Apple IIe
---------
1) Install the Apple II Workstation Card in slot 7 of the Apple IIe and
connect the LocalTalk port to the network.

2) Start up the system and log on to a ProDOS server on the network.

Once the system goes past the Password screen, the device shows up in the
Device List window of Inter*Poll.

To see if there was something unique about this setup procedure, we

considered the Macintosh in a similar environment. If the system is
powered up, but no software is loaded (that is, the Macintosh screen shows
the disk with a flashing question mark in the middle of the disk), the
system is not identifiable from Inter*Poll. At this point, there is no
AppleTalk software to respond to the Inter*Poll request. The same is true
for an Apple II.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL077.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 118 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL078.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Video Overlay Card: Connectors (11/96)

Header: Apple II Video Overlay Card: Connectors (11/96)

Article Created: 03 June 1988

Article Reviewed/Updated: 15 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

The Apple II Video Overlay card can receive video signals from any number of
sources: VCR, Video camera, Video disc player, even cable television. Because
there are numerous connectors associated with these video sources, it is
necessary to clarify the connection schemes as they relate to the Apple II
Video Overlay Card.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Connection Schemes
==================

RGB Connections
--------------- Any RGB monitor must connected to the DB-15 connector on the card. The
AppleColor RGB Monitor connects directly with the DB-15 cable that ships with
the monitor.

If you are using another RGB monitor, you must build the correct cable. The
Apple II Video Overlay Card DB-15 connector has the same pinout as the
AppleColor RGB Monitor. For more information on this reference Tech Info
Library article "AppleColor RGB Monitor input connector: Pinouts". It is a
simple matter to construct the rest of the cable, using the pinout supplied
with the third-party monitor.

External Video Source Connections

---------------------------------
To connect external video sources to the Apple II Video Overlay Card, at
least one end of the cable must have an RCA phono plug. This end will connect
to the overlay card. Normally, consumer electronics video sources will have
an RCA connector for direct video output. To ensure top quality video
reproduction, use gold-plated RCA connectors.

BNC-Style Connections
---------------------
It is normal for some high-end professional video equipment to have BNC-style
connectors for the video output. If this is the case, an adapter must be used
to convert the BNC connector to RCA phono type for connection to the card.
These are readily available at most electronics stores.

RF Connections (also known as an "F" connector)

-----------------------------------------------
If your video equipment uses an RF cable (also known as an "F" connector), it
cannot be directly connected to the Apple II Video Overlay Card. You must
connect this cable to a VCR first, then connect the VCR to the overlay card,
using an RCA phono type cable.

S-VHS Information
-----------------
It is not possible to feed an S-VHS (Super VHS) signal into the overlay card.
If your S-VHS equipment has RCA phono jacks, cables can be connected from

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 119 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

these jacks to the card, but the overlays resulting from this connection will
have the resolution of standard VHS, not S-VHS.

Article Change History:

15 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1988-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL078.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 120 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL079.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Video Overlay Card: Configurations (11/96)

Header: Apple II Video Overlay Card: Configurations (11/96)

Article Created: 03 April 89

Article Reviewed/Updated: 18 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Listed below are several possible configurations using the Video Overlay Card.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Depending on how sophisticated a user wishes to be, and what the user wishes
to accomplish, there are numerous possibilities for connecting monitors and
other video equipment, to the Apple II Video Overlay Card. A setup could be
as simple as a VCR, an Apple IIGS, and a single monitor; or as complicated as
a videodisc player with a composite monitor, an Apple IIGS with RGB and a
composite monitor, and a VCR with a composite monitor.

Typical Configuration
---------------------
A typical configuration might be a VCR or video camera, for a video source,
an Apple IIe (or Apple IIGS) with the Overlay card and VideoMix software
installed, and a RGB monitor. This configuration would allow creation of
overlays for direct viewing only. The addition of a second VCR would permit
recording of the overlays created. If a composite monitor were connected to
the output of the Overlay Card, the picture displayed there would be
representative of what is being recorded on the VCR.

High-end Configuration
----------------------
A high-end configuration might include the connection of an interactive video
source, which would then display selected video sequences, as directed by the
computer, while the program would automatically provide the proper window for
the resulting video input. This setup would require the connection of the
device control cable from the external device to the serial port on the
computer.

Article Change History:

18 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1989-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL079.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 121 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL080.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Video Overlay Card: Description (11/96)

Header: Apple II Video Overlay Card: Description (11/96)

Article Created: 31 May 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 18 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes the Apple II Video Overlay Card. This card has been
discontinued and is no longer available from Apple.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Overview
--------
The Apple II Video Overlay Card offers Apple II computer owners a wealth of
possibilities for learning and creativity by merging video and computing.

The Apple II Video Overlay Card lets you superimpose Apple II screen images
on video from a variety of sources: VCR, video disc, video camera, or
television. It also allows you to display the combined images of an RGB or
composite monitor and to record them on a VCR.

You start by using the Apple II application of your choice to create your own
text, graphics, or animations. Then with VideoMix, the software included with
the card, you control where these overlays appear and blend them with the
video to achieve the effects you want.

With the Apple II Video Overlay Card and an Apple IIGS or IIe computer, you
can add your own captions and notes to educational videos. You can also
create you own video productions and interactive application for use at home
or in school.

System Requirements
-------------------
To use the Apple II Video Overlay Card, you will need one of the following
systems:

- an Apple IIGS personal computer with at least 512K of RAM, ROM version
01 or 03, and at least one 800K 3.5-inch disk drive; and a VCR,
videodisc player, or video camera

- an Apple IIe personal computer with 128K of RAM and an enhanced main
logic board (revision B); and a VCR, videodisc player, or video camera

To display your videos, you can use the Apple IIGS or IIe computer with
either the AppleColor RGB Monitor or the AppleColor Composite Monitor. The
AppleColor RGB Monitor comes with the required DB-15 connector. The
AppleColor Composite Monitor comes with the required RCA cable.

Technical Specifications
------------------------
- NTSC output: the output of the Apple II Video Overlay Card meets RS-170A
output specifications with RS-170A input.

- Environmental requirements
Operating temperature: 50 to 104 degrees F (10 C to 40 degrees C)
Storage temperature: -40 to 116.6 F (-40 to 47 degrees C)
Relative humidity: 20% to 95% (noncondensing)

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 122 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Altitude: 0 to 10,000 ft. (0 to 3,048 m)

Article Change History:

18 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1991-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: specsht

### END OF FILE A2TIL080.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 123 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL081.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Video Overlay Card: Features (11/96)

Header: Apple II Video Overlay Card: Features (11/96)

Article Created: 04 March 1996

Article Reviewed/Updated: 18 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article discusses the features of the Apple II Video Overlay Card.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Genlock circuitry
-----------------
- Synchronizes the Apple II timing to external video timing.
- Allows a user to superimpose Apple II graphics on top of an external video
signal for titling or annotating video material.

RGB and Composite Outputs

-------------------------
Allows a user to simultaneously view overlays on an AppleColor Composite or
RGB monitor while recording the overlay to a VCR.

Apple IIGS Graphics Chip Set

----------------------------
- Allows the video overlay card to display standard graphics when not
producing overlays.
- Improves composite video output by re-generating the video output signal
from the computer.
- Broadcast-quality video output.
- Allows a user to use the overlay card in a professional broadcast
environment (no degradation of video quality when passed through the overlay
card).

VideoMix Software
-----------------
Allows
- software control of the overlay card's functions.
- choice of key color (color which is transparent to the video signal), set
the video/graphic mix, and adjust the color/tint of the RGB video.
- Apple IIe and Apple IIGS compatibility
- use of the overlay card with existing hardware and the extensive library of
Apple II software.

Article Change History:

18 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1989-06, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL081.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 124 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL082.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Video Overlay Card: Product Description (11/96)

Header: Apple II Video Overlay Card: Product Description (11/96)

Article Created: 03 April 89

Article Reviewed/Updated: 18 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Below is a description of the Apple II Video Overlay Card. This product has
been discontinued and is no longer available from Apple.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The Apple II Video Overlay Card product, for the Apple IIe and Apple IIGS,
includes an interface card and VideoMix software.

When in operation, the overlay appears as a computer image on top of a video

image. The video image can be from any external video source: video tape,
video disc, cable television, or video camera and the image can be shown on
either a composite or RGB monitor. The NTSC signal output from the overlay
card is of broadcast quality and can be recorded on a VCR.

The Apple II Video Overlay Card brings previously expensive genlock

capabilities to the Apple II family of computers, and creates new
possibilities for learning and creativity.

The overlay card has a complete, though modified, Apple IIGS graphics
subsystem (Mega II, VGC, and supporting circuitry), which provides genlock
and overlay capabilities, as well as improved composite video output. With a
proper NTSC signal presented to the card, an FCC-legal output is supplied
from the card, therefore the card is usable in professional broadcast
environments.

After genlocking to the incoming signal, the overlay card determines which
pixels will be video and which will be graphics, or if there will be
combinations. These combinations are selected by way of the VideoMix
software, which sets up the card for the desired mix of graphics and video.
The user chooses a key color (the color that is transparent to the incoming
video and is treated separately from the other colors), and what the
video/graphic mix will be. VideoMix also allows the user to adjust the tint
and color of the RGB video, as on a color television. The user can also
choose a color from the screen to be the key color.

Because the overlay card is a completely independent subsystem, it functions

with any existing Apple II painting, drawing, and animation software -- these
being the more relevant products conducive to creating overlays. The overlay
card works with virtually all Apple II software.

Article Change History:

18 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1988-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: specsht

### END OF FILE A2TIL082.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 125 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL083.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Video Overlay Card: Tips (11/96)

Header: Apple II Video Overlay Card: Tips (11/96)

Article Created: 03 April 89

Article Reviewed/Updated: 18 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Here are some helpful tips and hints for using the Apple II Video Overlay
card.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

As you plan your video presentation, think about how the overlay will enhance
your presentation. Do you want to include:

- Opening title and closing credits?

- Highlight information presented in the video?
- Dazzle the audience with special effects?

Planning For Computer Graphics

------------------------------
Try to determine where the computer graphics would be useful only where
appropriate. You may find yourself overusing computer graphics. Consider
whether you should highlight your video with computer graphics, narration, or
a combination. Your overlays will be more effective if you use them
judiciously.

Decide on a workable design for your graphics, and use it consistently

throughout your presentation. For example, always use the same font for the
text, the same colors for the graphic elements, such as line and boxes, and
the same kind of special effects. Consistent use of computer graphics will
make your presentation seem more unified and easier to follow.

Use high-quality video equipment and software that allows high resolution
graphics. Clean the heads on your VCR if you haven't cleaned them lately. The
better the video equipment and computer images, the better your overlays will
look.

When shooting a video for an overlay, try to anticipate where your graphics
will fit into the shot and leave enough space for them. For example, if you
plan to superimpose someone's name below a close-up of their face, leave
enough room in the lower third of the screen. Treat the graphics as an
integral part of the composition, not as an afterthought.

Designing For The Screen

------------------------

Keep it simple, don't try to cram too much into a single overlay. If your
video has lots of motion, use simple graphics. If your graphics are complex,
consider using a still scene for the video portion.

Limit the information in each overlay to one or two points. Presenting too
many facts in one overlay will not help the viewers remember them. Television
viewers may not be able to flip back to review something they missed.

Use readable fonts for text. Bold, simple fonts seem crisp and are easily
read on the screen. The color of your text should contrast with the video
colors. If you plan to record the overlay, make the text at least 16 point.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 126 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Special Considerations for Composite Video

------------------------------------------

Avoid using computer graphics that are extremely bright. If the colors in
your graphics are too intense, especially if they are hot colors such as
bright red, the graphics may appear to vibrate along the edges. You can
correct the problem by using a less intense color, like off-white instead of
white. You can also reduce the intensity of a color by allowing some of the
video image to blend in, using VideoMix.

If you are recording your overlays, view them on a composite monitor or a

television.

Colors displayed on an RGB monitor are more stable than colors displayed on a
composite monitor as they are less likely to shimmer or bleed into another
color. If you are recording your overlays on tape, a composite monitor or a
television will show you a better representation of the overlay's appearance
during playback. By viewing your overlays this way, without an RGB monitor,
you will be better able to see, and correct, problems before they are
recorded on the videotape.

Article Change History:

18 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1989-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL083.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 127 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL084.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Video Overlay Card: Using Key Colors (11/96)

Header: Apple II Video Overlay Card: Using Key Colors (11/96)

Article Created: 03 April 89

Article Reviewed/Updated: 18 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article discusses how to use the Key Color selection of the Video
Overlay Card.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Creating an overlay with the Apple II Video Overlay Card requires selection
of a control color, called Key Color.

The VideoMix software treats the Key Color differently from the other colors.
All colors not designated as the Key Color are treated as a group and are
called non-Key colors.

For example, if the Key Color is Black, the video input signal will show
through only where black is displayed on the screen. Where any other color is
shown, the video will not show through and those areas will be showing the
computer generated graphic. This would be the display, assuming VideoMix is
set for 100% Key and 0% non-Key. By moving the sliders within VideoMix, these
proportions can be changed to suit the user.

There are two methods for selecting the Key Color, select from Screen, and
select from the color palette.

Selecting from the color palette allows selection of the Key Color from a
palette of sixteen different colors. Use the mouse (Apple IIGS), or the arrow
keys (Apple IIe), to select a color rectangle from the palette.

The other method is to use the option Select From Screen. An "X" appears in
the box, and a hand with a pointing finger replaces the arrow cursor on the
screen. With the hand cursor in the computer graphics area of the screen,
click on the color of your choice. This becomes the Key Color.

Apple IIGS Note

---------------
The Apple IIGS can display graphics in one of two modes: 320 mode or 640
mode. In 320 mode, the computer can display sixteen pure colors. In 640 mode,
it can display only two true colors: black and white. All other colors are
blended colors formed by a process known as dithering. Dithered colors are
formed by displaying two colors in\adjacent pixels. Because the pixels are so
small and close together, your eye perceives them as a single color. Light
blue, for example, is formed by adjacent blue and white pixels. When a dithered
color is picked, the Key Color is the color of the pixel you
happened to click on. If you picked the light blue color, the key color could
be either blue or white.

Using dithered colors for your Key Color can produce some interesting, and
sometimes unexpected, translucence effects in your overlay. These effects,
while attractive, may not be completely reproducible. To avoid this, it would
better to have your computer in 320 mode when making overlays. If you wish to
use 640 mode, it is best to use black or white as your Key Color.

Article Change History:

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 128 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

18 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.

Copyright 1989-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL084.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 129 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL085.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II VisiCalc: How To Convert Its Files To MS-DOS

Header: Apple II VisiCalc: How To Convert Its Files To MS-DOS

This article last reviewed: 19 January 1988

Here's how to transfer Apple II VisiCalc files to an MS-DOS format:

1. Save the Apple II VisiCalc file to disk in the DIF format.

2. Transfer the file, via terminal software, to the MS-DOS system.

3. Save the file.

The file can now be read into any of the MS-DOS spreadsheet applications
that support a DIF format -- Lotus 1-2-3, for example.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL085.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 130 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL086.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Workstation Card: Description (11/96)

Header: Apple II Workstation Card: Description (11/96)

Article Created: 15 July 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 18 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes the Apple II Workstation Card. This product has been
discontinued and is no longer available from Apple.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The Apple II Workstation Card connects the Apple IIe computer to an AppleTalk
network using the LocalTalk Cabling System. This card includes a built-in
Super Serial port for direct connection to serial devices such as ImageWriter
printers. This card is ideally suited to educational environments where users
want to share printers and reduce the amount of time spent handling disks.

The Apple II Workstation Card, together with the AppleShare IIe Workstation
software included with it, gives users of enhanced Apple IIe computers access
to AppleShare file servers, network printers (such as LaserWriter and
ImageWriters), and to AppleShare print servers. Also,in conjunction with an
AppleShare file server connected to an AppleTalk network, allows Apple IIe
users to start up from the file server without using local disk drives.

Apple IIe users can print to network printers and share information stored on
AppleShare file servers. At the same time, other Apple II, Macintosh, and MS-
DOS users can access folders, documents, applications, and shared storage.
Using an AppleShare file server or network printer is as easy as using a
local ProDOS disk or serial printer.

System and Network Requirements

-------------------------------
An enhanced Apple IIe computer with 128K RAM, monitor, LocalTalk cabling and
Apple II Workstation Card installed.

An Apple IIGS system (in which the function of the Apple II Workstation Card
is built-in).

If the network doesn't include an AppleShare file server, each workstation

requires a 3.5-inch disk drive.

To initially load workstation software onto an AppleShare file server, a 3.5-

inch disk drive is required at one of the workstations.

Recommended Equipment
---------------------
The following are recommended, but not required.

One or more AppleShare file servers (for diskless startup and file server
access).
One or more LaserWriter, ImageWriter II, or ImageWriter LQ printers.

Technical Specifications
------------------------
Processor: 65C02, two-megahertz clock speed

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 131 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Memory: 16K RAM, 64K ROM

Two 8-pin minicircular (RS-422) ports:

- one LocalTalk port
- one Super Serial port

Article Change History:

18 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1991-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: specsht

### END OF FILE A2TIL086.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 132 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL087.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Workstation Card: Magic Slate Printing Issue (11/96)

Header: Apple II Workstation Card: Magic Slate Printing Issue (11/96)

Article Created: 14 May 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 18 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

When attempting to print from Magic Slate v2.0 using an Apple IIe and a
Workstaton Card connected to an ImageWriter II , using AppleTalk, we get the
message "includeProcSet IWEm 1 1" on the printout. Is there a fix for this
problem?

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

Magic Slate thinks it is talking to a LaserWriter instead of an ImageWriter

II. Because the Apple II Workstation card emulates a Super Serial Card, you
should select that interface in the Magic Slate program.

Also, on an Apple IIe, you always have to run Chooser.II before you run an
application and without powering off the computer, see below.

1) Launch your Apple II workstation disk.

2) Choose your printer.

3) Quit Chooser.II, but DO NOT power off.

4) Launch Magic Slate by ProDOS pathname. For example, -

/volumename/application name.

5) Configure Magic Slate to print to an ImageWriter at the slot that

contains the workstation card.

If this doesn't work, perhaps Magic Slate is not flexible in the slot
location or is clearing the Chooser.II info on launch.

Article Change History:

18 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1991-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL087.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 133 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL088.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Workstation Card: No Apple IIGS Support (2/97)

Header: Apple II Workstation Card: No Apple IIGS Support (2/97)

Apple II Workstation Card: Apple IIGS Support (2/97)

Article Created: 03 August 1989

Article Reviewed/Updated: 12 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article discusses the Apple II Workstation card and Apple IIGS support.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The Apple II Workstation Cards is not supported in the Apple IIGS because of
the following reasons.

* When the Apple II Workstation Card is installed, only ProDOS 8 applications

can run. The Workstation Card tells the server that it is an Apple IIe.
Therefore, it will not work in a ProDOS 16 network environment. Typically,
this means only the first 64K of memory will be used.

* The Workstation Card is not fully tested in this configuration and it is

not supported by Apple.

Article Change History:

12 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1989-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL088.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 134 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL089.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Workstation Card: Printing Via a Serial Port

Header: Apple II Workstation Card: Printing Via a Serial Port

This article last reviewed: 7 December 1988

If you want to run Apple II Workstation Cards on a network, and also want
to have some workstations' printers directly connected to the serial port
on the Workstation card, try the following solution:

Install the card in slot 7 on the Apple II.

Run the new Chooser II (ver. 1.2.1) software. When the Apple II WorkStation
Card is installed, a new option window appears in the lower righthand corner
that allows the output to be directed to either the serial port or the
AppleTalk port on the card. Once the serial port is selected, everything
should work perfectly.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL089.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 135 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL090.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Workstation Card: Product Information (2/97)

Header: Apple II Workstation Card: Product Information (2/97)

Article Created: 01 March 1988

Article Reviewed/Updated: 28 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes the Apple II Workstation Card.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The Apple II Workstation Card provides an AppleTalk interface for the

enhanced Apple IIe computer. It makes the Apple IIe an AppleTalk node on a
LocalTalk network.

Hardware
--------
The card has its own 65C02 processor, ROM, RAM, and a custom PAL chip. The
card attaches to a connector module housing two Mini-8 serial ports. One of
these ports supports AppleTalk, the other emulates a Super Serial Card.

The card can be installed in any Apple IIe slot except for slot 3 (the
additional 64K of RAM on the Extended 80-Column card is assigned to slot 3,
making it unavailable). Slot 7 is the usual choice for the Workstation Card.

The red and green LEDs indicate only that the card has passed an internal
diagnostic, and do not indicate that the network interface is active.

The upper Mini-8 connector (PORT A) supports either the AppleTalk interface
or a Super Serial interface. The lower Mini-8 connector (PORT B) supports
only the serial interface.

Software
--------
The Apple IIe Workstation Card contains AppleTalk code in ROM, code to allow
printing over the network, printing at the workstation, and starting up over
the network. The Apple IIe Workstation Card can start up either from a local
disk, or remotely over the network from a startup server running on a file
server.

Local Startup
-------------
When the workstation starts up from a local device, the card makes itself
look like a Super Serial Card, with special ID bytes to indicate that it is
actually an Apple II Workstation Card.

Network Startup
---------------
The card emulates a Disk II drive on power up to enable network startup, and,
if in the highest number slot (normal practice) downloads the operating
system from a network startup server, if available.

In addition, either of these other two methods can be used to start up over a
network:

- Use the PR# command specifying the card's slot and hold down the Open
Apple key while pressing Return. (Issuing the PR# command and pressing
Return without pressing the Open Apple key causes printing to take place.)

- Using a BOOT call also causes the startup process to take place.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 136 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Printing Over the Network

-------------------------
The printing task begins when you issue a PR# command from the workstation.
The application program sends print data out through the SSC entry points as
defined by the PR# command. The card captures the stream of characters to be
printed, because it appears to be a normal Super Serial Card in a slot and
sends it to the selected printer or spooler.

Only ProDOS applications are supported on the network using the card. An
important feature of the card is that it does not require the use of main
memory, because most applications use all or almost all of Apple IIe memory
(including "reserved" areas).

Article Change History:

28 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1988-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL090.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 137 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL091.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Workstation Card: Specifications (2/97)

Header: Apple II Workstation Card: Specifications (2/97)

Apple II Workstation Card: Specifications (2/97)

Article Created: 03 May 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 12 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article provides technical specifications for the Apple II Workstation

Card. This card has been discontinued by Apple.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Processor
---------
6501; 2 MHz clock speed

Memory
------
16K RAM
64K ROM

Ports
-----
Two 8-pin, mini-circular, RS-422 ports:
* One LocalTalk port
* One Super Serial port

Article Change History:

12 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1991-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: specsht

### END OF FILE A2TIL091.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 138 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL092.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II Workstation Card: Workstations and Zones (2/97)

Header: Apple II Workstation Card: Workstations and Zones (2/97)

Apple II Workstation Card: Workstations and Zones (2/97)

Article Created: 25 May 1989

Article Reviewed/Updated: 12 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article discusses the ways in which the Apple II Workstation Card
understands zones and network IDs. Some of the discussion refers to the
following setup diagram:

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Setup:

Ethernet LocalTalk

--------|-------------- FastPath---------|----------|---------------|
| | | |
Macintosh II server diskless LaserWriter |
w/Apple II start Apple II Macintosh SE
blocks
zone: zone1 zone: zone1
net #: 1 net #: 2
-----------------------------------------------------------------------

The only zone-related limitation concerns starting an Apple II diskless

workstation. The ProDOS-prepared AppleShare server must be within the same
zone as the diskless workstation. Once the Apple II has started over the
network, the Workstation Card and the Apple IIGS are fully aware of zones and
network IDs. This means that, once started, the Apple II can log on any
ProDOS-prepared, AppleShare file server in any zone available on the
Internet. The number of bridges or zones does not affect the access to
another server.

When the Apple II broadcasts an AppleTalk Transaction Protocol (ATP) request,

this ATP request is sent across the entire zone in search of a file server
with boot blocks. In the given example, both 'net#1' and 'net#2' are in the
same zone, "zone1". The FastPath passes zone broadcasts from either "net#1"
or "net#2" to the other.

Once startup is completed, the AppleShare II Workstation software is

executed. From this application, the user can choose the appropriate zone and
log on to the desired ProDOS-prepared server. At this time, Name Binding
Protocol (NBP) translates the names into the associated Internet socket
addresses of the corresponding network entities. In this case, the Apple II
workstation name is translated to an address, and the server name is
translated to an address. These addresses notate network IDs, zone IDs,
bridge IDs, and network entity IDs.

When a workstation is instructed to print, it looks for the chosen printer

with the address provided by NBP. The address specifies the location of the
printer. Because the printer is on "net#2" (the same network as the Macintosh
SE), the FastPath determines that the address belongs on "net#2". The
FastPath does not accept the traffic, because the address is local to
"net#2". However, when the Apple II requests service from the server, the
FastPath recognizes the address as one that belongs to "net#1". In this

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 139 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

condition, the FastPath lets the request travel over the bridge to the server.

Typically, routing is handled at the fourth OSI layer, the transport layer of
AppleTalk. Manufacturers working with AppleTalk use the transport layer to
handle routing. Manufacturers working with other protocols may handle routing
at a higher layer in the OSI model.

Article Change History:

12 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1989-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL092.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 140 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL093.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II+ Mini-Assembler (1 of 4)

Header: Apple II+ Mini-Assembler (1 of 4)

This article last reviewed: 21 September 1984

The attached listing is a relocated version of the mini-assembler for the

Apple II+ with instructions for the Apple II version. This version can be
BRUN from the disk or BLOADed and start with CALL 2048 from Applesoft. To
restart use CAll 2051. From machine language the start is 800G and the
restart is 803G. Users who have Integer Basic available need only enter that
language and use the instructions in part one of this note.

Please note that the mini-assembler performs a NEW command, so it will wipe
out any resident Applesoft program. Also note that the mini-assembler loads
from $800 to $947. Don't try to assemble anything into those locations.

This note covers the operation of the mini-assembler only. It is not a course
in assembly language programming. For a reference on programming the 6502
microprocessor, refer to the Synertek Programming manual or any of the
tutorials available. This note assumes the user has a working knowledge of
6502 programming and mnemonics.

The mini-assembler is a programming aid aimed at reducing the amount of time

required to convert a handwritten program to object code. The mini-assembler
is basically a look-up table for opcodes. With it, you can type mnemonics
with their absolute addresses, and the assembler will convert it to the
correct object code and store it in memory.

Typing "F666G" puts the user in mini-assembler mode. While in this mode, any
line typed in will be interpreted as an assembly language instruction,
assembled, and stored in binary form unless the first character on the command
line is a "$".

If the first character of a command line is a "$", the remainder of the line
will be interpreted as a normal monitor command, executed, and control
returned to the mini-assembler. To get out of the mini-assembler, press
RESET.

If the first character on the line is blank, the assembled instruction will be
stored starting at the address immediately following the previously assembled
instruction. If the first character is not a blank nor a "$", the line is
assumed to contain an assembly language instruction preceded by the
instruction address (a hex number followed by a ":"). In either case, the
instruction will be retyped over the line just entered in dis-assembler format
to provide a visual check of what has been assembled.

The counter that keeps track of where the next instruction will be stored is
the pseudo PC (Program Counter) and it can be changed by many monitor commands
(eg. 'L', 'T', . . .). Therefore, it is advisable to use the explicit
instruction address mode after every monitor command and, of course, when the
mini-assembler is first entered.

Errors (unrecognized mnemonic, illegal format, etc.) are signalled by a

"beep" and a caret ("^") will be printed beneath the last character read from
the input line by the mini-assembler.

Keywords:

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 141 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

### END OF FILE A2TIL093.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 142 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL094.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II+ Mini-Assembler (2 of 4)

Header: Apple II+ Mini-Assembler (2 of 4)

This article last reviewed: 21 September 1984

The mnemonics and formats accepted by the mini assembler are the same as those
listed by the 6502 Programmers Manual, with the following exceptions and
differences:

1. All imbedded blanks are ignored, except inside addresses.

2. All addresses typed in are assumed to be in hex (rather than decimal or

symbolic). A preceding "$" (indicating hex rather than decimal or
symbolic)
is therefore optional, except that it should not precede the instruction
address).

3. Instructions that operate on the accumulator have a blank operand field

instead of "A".

4. When entering a branch instruction, the argument of the branch mnemonic

should be the address of the target of the branch. If the destination
address is not known at the time the instruction is entered, simply enter
an
address that is in the neighborhood, and later re-enter the branch
instruction with the correct target address. NOTE: If a branch target is
specified that is out of range, the mini-assembler will flag the address as
being in error.

5. The operand field of an instruction can only be followed by a comment

field, which starts with a semicolon (";"). Obviously, the mini-assembler
ignores the field and in fact will type over it when the line is typed over
in disassembler format.

6. Any page zero references will generate page zero instruction formats if
such a mode exists. There is no way to force a page zero address to be two
bytes, even if the address has leading zeroes.

In general, to specify an addressing type, simply enter it as it would be

listed in the disassembly. For information on the disassembler, see page 49
of the Apple II Reference Manual.

0000: **************************
0000: * *
0000: * APPLE II *
0000: * MINI-ASSEMBLER *
0000: * *
0000: **************************
002E: FORMAT EQU $2E
002F: LENGTH EQU $2F
0031: MODE EQU $31
0033: PROMPT EQU $33
0034: YSAV EQU $34
0035: L EQU $35
003A: PCL EQU $3A
003B: PLH EQU $3B
003D: A1H EQU $3D
003E: A2L EQU $3E
003F: A2H EQU $3F
0042: A4L EQU $42

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 143 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

0043: A4H EQU $43

0044: FMT EQU $44
0200: IN EQU $200
D64B: NEW EQU $D64B
F88E: INSDS2 EQU $F88E
F8D0: INSTDSP EQU $F8D0
F94A: PRBL2 EQU $F94A
F953: PCADJ EQU $F953
F9B4: CHAR1 EQU $F9B4
F9BA: CHAR2 EQU $F9BA
F9C0: MNEML EQU $F9C0
FA00: MNEMR EQU $FA00
FC1A: CURSUP EQU $FC1A
FD67: GETLNZ EQU $FD67
FDED: COUT EQU $FDED
FE00: BL1 EQU $FE00
FE78: A1PCLP EQU $FE78
FF3A: BELL EQU $FF3A
FFA7: GETNUM EQU $FFA7
FFBE: TOSUB EQU $FFBE
FFC7: ZMODE EQU $FFC7
FFCC: CHRTBL EQU $FFCC

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL094.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 144 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL095.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II+ Mini-Assembler (3 of 4)

Header: Apple II+ Mini-Assembler (3 of 4)

This article last reviewed: 21 September 1984

0800: ORG $800

0800: 20 4B D6 JSR NEW ;SCRATCH ANY BASIC PROGRAM
0803: A9 00 LDA #$00
0805: 8D 00 08 STA #$0800
0808: 4C 9D 08 JMP RESETZ ;BRANCH MINI/ASSEM'S START
080B: E9 81 REL SBC #$81 ;IS FMT COMPATIBLE
080D: 4A LSR A ;WITH RELATIVE MODE?
080E: DO 14 BNE ERR3 ;NO.
0810: A4 3F LDY A2H
0812: A6 3E LDX A2L ;DOUBLE DECREMENT
0814: DO 01 BNE REL2
0816: 88 DEY
0817: CA REL2 DEX
0818: 8A TXA
0819: 18 CLC
081A: E5 3A SBC PCL ;FORM ADDRESS PC-2
081C: 85 3E STA A2L
081E: 10 01 BPL REL3
0820: C8 INY
0821: 98 REL3 TYA
0822: E5 3B SBC PCH
0824: D0 6B ERR3 BNE ERR ;TOO FAR TO BRANCH ERROR
0826: *
0826: A4 2F FINDOP LDY LENGTH
0828: B9 3D 00 FNDOP2 LDA A1H,Y ;MOVE INST TO (PC)
082B: 91 3A STA (PCL),Y
082D: 88 DEY
082E: 10 F8 BPL FNDOP2
0830: 20 1A FC JSR CURSUP
0833: 20 1A FC JSR CURSUP ;RESTORE CURSOR
0836: 20 DO F8 JSR INSTDSP ;TYPE FORMATTED LINE
0839: 20 53 F9 JSR PCADJ ;UPDATE PC
083C: 84 3B STY PCH
083E: 85 3A STA PCL
0840: 4C A0 08 JMP NXTLINE ;GET NEXT LINE
0843: 20 BE FF FKMON3 JSR TOSVB ;GO TO DELIM HANDLER
0846: A4 34 LDY YSAV ;RESTORE Y-INDEX
0848: 20 A7 FF FKMON JSR GETNUM ;READ PARAM
084B: 84 34 STY YSAV ;SAVE Y-INDEX
084D: A0 17 LDY #$17 ;INIT DELIM INDEX
084F: 88 FKMON2 DEY ;CHECK NEXT DELIM
0850: 30 4B BMI RESETZ ;ERR IF UNRECOGNIZED DELIM
0852: D9 CC FF CMP CHRTBL,Y ;COMPARE WITH DELIM TABLE
0855: D0 F8 BNE FKMON2 ;NO MATCH
0857: CO 15 CPY #$15 ;MATCH, IS IT CR?
0859: D0 E8 BNE FKMON3 ;NO HANDLE IT IN MONITOR
085B: A5 31 LDA MODE
085D: A0 00 LDY #$00
085F: C6 34 DEC YSAV
0861: 20 00 FE JSR BL1 ;HANDLE CR OUTSIDE MONITOR
0864: 4C A0 08 JMP NXTLINE
0867: *
0867: A5 3D TRYNEXT LDA A1H ;GET TRIAL OPCODE
0869: 20 8E F8 JSR INSDS2 ;GET FMT + LENGTH FOR
086C: AA TAX ;OPCODE

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 145 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

086D: BD 00 FA LDA MNEMR,X ;GET LOWER MNEMONIC BYTE

0870: C5 42 CMP A4L ;MATCH?
0872: D0 13 BNE NEXTOP ;NO, TRY NEXT OPCODE
0874: BD CO F9 LDA MNEML, X ;GET UPPER MNEMONIC BYTE
0877: C5 43 CMP A4H ;MATCH ?
0879: DO OC BNE NEXTOP ;NO, TRY NEXT OPCODE
087B: A5 44 LDA FMT
087D: A4 2E LDY FORMAT ;GET TRIAL FORMAT
087F: CO 9D CPY #$9D ;IS TRIAL FORMAT RELATIVE?
0881: FO 88 BEQ REL ;YES
0883: C5 2E CMP FORMAT ;SAME FORMAT?
0885: FO 9F BEQ FINDOP ;YES
0887: C6 3D NEXTOP DEC A1H ;NO, TRY NEXT OPCODE
0889: DO DC BNE TRYNEXT
088B: E6 44 INC FMT ;NO MORE, TRY WITH LEN=2
088D: C6 35 DEC L ;WAS L=2 ALREADY?
088F: FO D6 BEQ TRYNEXT ;NO
0891:
0891: A4 34 ERR LDY YSAV ;YES, UNRECOGNIZED INST.
0893: 98 ERR2 TYA
0894: AA TAX
0895: 20 4A F9 JSR PRBL2 ;PRINT ^ UNDER LAST READ
0898: A9 DE LDA #$DE ;CHAR TO INDICATE ERROR
089A: 20 ED FD JSR COUT ;POSITION
089D: 20 EA FF RESETZ JSR BELL
08AO: A9 A1 NXTLINE LDA #$A1 ; '!'
08A2: 85 33 STA PROMPT ;INITIALIZE PROMPT
08A4: 20 67 FD JSR GETLNZ ;GET LINE
08A7: 20 C7 FF JSR ZMODE ;INIT SCREEN STUFF

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL095.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 146 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL096.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II+ Mini-Assembler (4 of 4)

Header: Apple II+ Mini-Assembler (4 of 4)

This article last reviewed: 21 September 1984

08AA: AD 00 02 LDA IN ;GET CHAR

08AD: C9 AO CMP #$AO ;ASCII SPACE?
08AF: FO 13 BEQ SPACE ;YES
08B1: C8 INY
08B2: C9 A4 CMP #$A4 ;ASCII '$' IN COL 1?
08B4: FO 92 BEQ FKMON ;YES,SIMULATE MONITOR
08B6: 88 DEY ;NO, BACKUP A CHAR
08B7: 20 A7 FF JSR GETNUM ;GET A NUMBER
08BA: C9 93 CMP #$93 ;':' TERMINATOR?
08BC: DO D5 ERR4 BNE ERR2 ;NO, ERR
08BE: 8A TXA
08BF: FO D2 BEQ ERR2 ;NO ADDR PRECEDING COLON
08C1: 20 78 FE JSR A1PCLP ;MOVE ADDR TO PCL, PCH
08C4: A9 03 SPACE LDA #$03 ;COUNT OF CHAR IN MNEMONIC
08C6: 85 3D STA A1H
08C8: 20 EF 09 NXTMN JSR GETNSP ;GET 1ST MNEMONIC CHARACTER
08CB: OA ASL A
08CC: E9 BE SBC #$BE ;SUBTRACT OFFSET
08CE: C9 C2 CMP #$C2 ;LEGAL CHARACTER?
08DO: 90 C1 BCC ERR2 ;NO
08D2: OA ASL A ;COMPRESS-LEFT JUSTIFY
08D3: OA ASL A
08D4: A2 04 LDX #$04
08D6: 0A NXTM2 ASL A ;DO 5 TRIPLE WORD SHIFTS
08D7: 26 42 ROL A4L
08D9: 26 43 ROL A4H
08DB: CA DEX
08DC: 10 F8 BPL NXTM2
08DE: C6 3D DEC A1H ;DONE WITH 3 CHAR?
08EO: FO F4 BEQ NXTM2 ;YES BUT DO 1 MORE SHIFT
08E2: 10 E4 BPL NXTMN ;NO
08E4: *
08E4: A2 05 LDX #$05 ;5-CHAR ADDRESSING MODE
0836: 20 3F 09 FORM2 JSR GETNSP ;GET 1ST CHAR OF ADDRESS
08E9: 84 34 STY YSAV
08EB: DD B4 F9 CMP CHAR1,X ;1ST CHAR MATCH PATTERN?
08EE: DO 13 BNE FORM3 ;NO
08FO: 20 3F 09 JSR GETNSP ;YES, GET 2ND CHAR
08F3: DD BA F9 CMP CHAR2,X ;MATCHES SECOND HALF?
08F6: FO ON BEQ FORM5 ;YES
08F8: BD BA F9 LDA CHAR2,X ;NO, IS 2ND HALF ZERO?
08FB: FO 07 BEQ FORM4 ;YES
08FD: C9 A4 CMP #$A4 ;NO 2ND HAL OPTIONAL?
08FF: FO 03 BEQ FORM4 ;YES
@L 0901: A4 34 LDY YSAV
0903: 18 FORM3 CLC ;CLEAR CARRY NO MATCH
0904: 88 FORM4 DEY ;BACK UP ONE CHARACTER
0905: 26 44 FORM5 ROL FMT ;FORM FORMAT BYTE
0907: EO 03 CPX #$03 ;TIME TO CHECK FOR ADDRESS
0909: DO OD BNE FORM7 ;NO
090B: 20 A7 FF JSR GETNUM ;YES
090E: A5 3F LDA A2H
0910: FO 01 BEQ FORM6 ;HIGH ORDER BYTE ZERO
0912: E8 INX ;NO, INCR FOR 2-BYTE
0913: 86 35 FORM6 STX L ;STORE LENGTH

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 147 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

0915: A2 03 LDX #$03 ;RELOAD FORMAT INDEX

0917: 88 DEY ;BACKUP A CHARACTER
0918: 86 3D FORM7 STX A1H ;SAVE INDEX
091A: CA DEX ;DONE WITH FORMAT CHECK?
091B: 10 C9 BPL FORM2 ;NO
091D: A5 44 LDA FMT ;YES PUT LENGTH
091F: OA ASL A ;IN LOW BITS
0920: OA ASL A
0921: 05 35 ORA L
0923: C9 20 CMP #$20
0925: BO 06 BCS FORM8 ;ADD $ IF NONZERO LENGTH
0927: A6 35 LDX L ;AND DON'T ALREADY HAVE IT
0929: FO 02 BEQ FORM8
092B: 09 80 ORA #$80
092D: 85 44 FORM8 STA FMT
092F: 84 34 STY YSAV
0931: B9 00 02 LDA IN,Y ;GET NEXT NONBLANK
0934: C9 BB CMP #$BB ;';' START OF COMMENT
0936: FO 04 BEQ FORM9 ;YES
0938: C9 8D CMP #$8D ;A CARRIAGE RETURN ?
093A: DO 80 BNE ERR4 ;NO, ERR
093C: 4C 67 08 FORM9 JMP TRYNEXT
093F: *
093F: B9 OO 02 GETNSP LDA IN,Y
0942: C8 INY
0943: C9 AO CMP #$AO ;GET NEXT NON BLANK CHAR
0945: FO F8 BEQ GETNSP
0947: 60 RTS

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL096.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 148 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL097.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II, Apple III, Lisa Family: Video Specs (Discontinued)
Header: Apple II, Apple III, Lisa Family: Video Specs (Discontinued)

Article Created: 15 November 1984

Article Reviewed/Updated: 26 June 1992

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

The following information is for the benefit of users who may wish to
interface
Apple models to video projectors:

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Apple II, II+, IIe, IIc

1. Number of lines in the raster. 525
2. Whether interlaced. No
3. Signal type. NTSC compatible
4. Frame rate. 60 hz.

Apple III, III+

1. Number of lines in the raster. 525
2. Whether interlaced. No / Yes for III+
3. Signal type. NTSC B/W, NTSC
color composite,
RGB Pure Video,
Composite Sync
Signals
4. Frame rate. 60 hz.

Euro IIc, IIe, II+, Euro PAL color card

1. Number of lines in the raster. 625
2. Whether interlaced. No (IIc, IIe)
3. Signal type. Composite PAL
video
(unmodulated)
4. Frame rate. 50 hz.

Lisa
1. Number of lines in the raster. | video output to
2. Whether interlaced. | Conrac or
3. Signal type. | Electrohome
4. Frame rate. | monitor with
| 22.7 Khz scan
| rate
Copyright 1984, 1992 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL097.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 149 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL098.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II, II+, IIe, IIc: ASCII characters, values & keystrokes
Header: Apple II, II+, IIe, IIc: ASCII characters, values & keystrokes

The following table contains the ASCII codes generated by pressing a key or
combination of keys on the Apple II, Apple II Plus, Apple IIe, Apple IIc, and
Enhanced Apple IIe. The character names come from the American Standard Code
for Interchange of Information. Certain peripherals or programs or functions,
such as the BASIC function CHR$, may require the decimal values; certain
peripherals or programs may require the hexadecimal values as well.

The fourth column in the table below is for simple keystrokes or those made
with the SHIFT key held down; the fifth and sixth columns are for those made
either with the CTRL key held down or with both the SHIFT and CTRL keys held
down simultaneously.

NOTE: An asterisk next to keystrokes or character names means that

the Apple II and Apple II Plus can't generate that charcter from
its keyboard. The double asterisk indicates a special case.

The comments column defines the non-printing ASCII characters.

Keystrokes Holding down: Comments

Char Dec Hex Regular CTRL SHIFT-CTRL

NUL 00 00 @ ** null character

SOH 01 01 a A start of header
STX 02 02 b B start transmission
ETX 03 03 c C end of text
EOT 04 04 d D end of transmission
ENQ 05 05 e E enquire
ACK 06 06 f F acknowledge
BEL 07 07 g G bell
BS 08 08 Left-arrow h H back space
HT 09 09 Tab i I horizontal tab
LF 10 0A Down-arrow j J line feed
VT 11 0B Up-arrow k K vertical tab
FF 12 0C l L form feed
CR 13 0D Return m M carriage return
SO 14 0E n N shift out
SI 15 0F o O shift in
DLE 16 10 p P data link escape
DC1 17 11 q Q device C 1
DC2 18 12 r R device C 2
DC3 19 13 s S device C 3
DC4 20 14 t T device C 4
NAK 21 15 Right-arrow u U negative acknowledge
SYN 22 16 v V synchronous idle
ETB 23 17 w W end of text block
CAN 24 18 x X cancel
EM 25 19 y Y end of medium
SUB 26 1A z Z start subroutine
ESC 27 1B Escape [ * { * escape
FS 28 1C \ * | * file separator
GS 29 1D ] * } * group separator
RS 30 1E ^ record separator
US 31 1F _ * unit separator
SP 32 20 Space Bar space
! 33 21
" 34 22
# 35 23
$ 36 24

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 150 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

% 37 25
& 38 26
' 39 27
( 40 28
) 41 29
* 42 2A
+ 43 2B
, 44 2C
- 45 2D
/ 47 2F
0 48 30
1 49 31
2 50 32
3 51 33
4 42 34
5 43 35
6 44 36
7 45 37
8 46 38
9 57 39
: 58 3A
; 59 3B
< 60 3C
= 61 3D
> 62 3E
? 63 3F
@ 64 40
A 65 41
B 66 42
C 67 43
D 68 44
E 69 45
F 70 46
G 71 47
H 72 48
I 73 49
J 74 4A
K 75 4B
L 76 4C
M 77 4D
N 78 4E
O 79 4F
P 80 50
Q 81 51
R 82 52
S 83 53
T 84 54
U 85 55
V 86 56
W 87 57
X 88 58
Y 89 59
Z 90 5A
[ * 91 5B
\ * 92 5C
] * 93 5D
^ 94 5E
_ * 95 5F
` * 96 60
a 97 61
b 98 62
c 99 63
d 100 64
e 101 65
f 102 66
g 103 67

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 151 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

h 104 68
i 105 69
j 106 6A
k 107 6B
l 108 6C
m 109 6D
n 110 6E
o 111 6F
p 112 70
q 113 71
r 114 72
s 115 73
t 116 74
u 117 75
v 118 76
w 119 77
x 120 78
y 121 79
z 122 7A
{ * 123 7B
| * 124 7C
} * 125 7D
~ * 126 7E
DEL * 127 7F Delete

* The Apple II and Apple II Plus can't generate

that charcter from the keyboard.

** Use SHIFT-P.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL098.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 152 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL099.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II, IIe and IIc: Mini-Assembler

Header: Apple II, IIe and IIc: Mini-Assembler

This article last reviewed: 21 September 1984

This note covers use of the Apple II, IIe and IIc mini-assembler only, not the
II+. This is not a course in assembly language programming. For a reference
on programming the 6502 microprocessor, refer to the Synertek Programming
manual or any of the tutorials available. This note assumes the user has a
working knowledge of 6502 programming and mnemonics.

The Apple II mini-assembler is a programming aid aimed at reducing the amount

of time required to convert a handwritten program to object code. The
@L mini-assembler is basically a look-up table for opcodes. With it, you can
type mnemonics with their absolute addresses, and the assembler will convert
it to the correct object code and store it in memory.

Typing "F666G" will puts you in mini-assembler mode. While in this mode, any
line typed in will be interpreted as an assembly language instruction,
assembled, and stored in binary form unless the first character on the command
line is a "$".

If the first character of a command line is a "$", the remainder of the line
will be interpreted as a normal monitor command, executed, and control
returned to the mini-assembler. To get out of the mini-assembler, press
RESET.

If the first character on the line is blank, the assembled instruction will be
stored starting at the address immediately following the previously assembled
instruction. If the first character is not a blank nor a "$", the line is
assumed to contain an assembly language instruction preceded by the
instruction address (a hex number followed by a ":"). In either case, the
instruction will be retyped over the line just entered in dis-assembler format
to provide a visual check of what has been assembled.

The counter that keeps track of where the next instruction will be stored is
the pseudo PC (Program Counter) and it can be changed by many monitor commands
(eg. 'L', 'T', . . .). Therefore, it is advisable to use the explicit
instruction address mode after every monitor command and, of course, when the
mini-assembler is first entered.

Errors (unrecognized mnemonic, illegal format, etc.) are signalled by a "beep"

and a caret ("^") will be printed beneath the last character read from the
input line by the mini-assembler.

The mnemonics and formats accepted by the mini-assembler are the same as those
listed by the 6502 Programmers Manual, with the following exceptions and
differences:

1. All imbedded blanks are ignored, except inside addresses.

2. All addresses entered are assumed to be in hex (rather than decimal or

symbolic). A preceding "$" (indicating hex rather than decimal or
symbolic)
is therefore optional, except that it should not precede the instruction
address).

3. Instructions that operate on the accumulator have a blank operand field

instead of "A".

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 153 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

4. When entering a branch instruction, the argument of the branch mnemonic

should be the address of the target of the branch. If the destination
address is not known at the time the instruction is entered, simply enter
an
address that is in the neighborhood, and later re-enter the branch
instruction with the correct target address. NOTE: If a branch target is
specified that is out of range, the mini-assembler will flag the address as
being in error.

5. The operand field of an instruction can only be followed by a comment

field, which starts with a semicolon (";"). Obviously, the mini-assembler
ignores the field and in fact will type over it when the line is typed over
in disassembler format.

6. Any page zero references will generate page zero instruction formats if
such a mode exists. There is no way to force a page zero address to be two
bytes, even if the address has leading zeroes.

In general, to specify an addressing type, simply enter it as it would be

listed in the disassembly. For information on the disassembler, see page 49
of the Apple II Reference Manual.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL099.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 154 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL100.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II, IIe and II+: Auto-Run Apple w/o DOS (2 of 2)
Header: Apple II, IIe and II+: Auto-Run Apple w/o DOS (2 of 2)

Article Created: 21 September 1984

Article Last Reviewed: 3 May 1988
Article Last Updated: 3 May 1988

For the next step a copy of the image of the application program needs to be
programmed into the EPROMs. The program starts at the address pointed to by
$67 and $68 and ends at the address pointed to by $AF and $B0. The contents
of the end address pointer, $AF and $B0, will be inserted in the control ROM
at locations $1F and $23. When control comes back through the input routine
pointer, Applesoft has already initialized $67 and $68. So the next step is
to move the image of the Applesoft program down to where it originally came
from. How this is done will depend on the hardware of the ROM card and the
length of the Applesoft program. If you use the Apple firmware card you will
have to address the soft switch to select the firmware card and then address
the switch again to re-select the Applesoft ROMs. With the ROMPLUS it could
be as simple as using the monitor move routine, $FE2C, to move a program of
less than 2 kilobytes long.

There is a little more initialization to be done before the Applesoft program

can be RUN. The end of program pointer mentioned earlier must be put into $69
and $6A and one more Applesoft routine must be called. Unfortunately this one
also drops into Applesoft's command mode so we have to modify the input
pointer again to point to a third part of the control ROM. Once this is done
the final initialization can be done with a jump to $D4F2.

And now the final part, we need to reset the input pointer so that the program
can input normally from the keyboard and actually RUN the program. To make
things easier there is a routine set by the Auto-Start ROM that will set the
input pointers to the keyboard at location $FE89. Then all that's left to do
is jump to $D566 which will run the program.

For a bit of finesse, if we put a $80 into location $D6, the user will not be
able to list the program. In fact any attempt to do any Applesoft command
except LOAD from cassette will cause the program to RUN. Also, by changing
the reset vectors in the Auto-Start ROM to point to the RUN routine, the
program will become very difficult to stop or modify. (To change the reset
vector, load memory starting at $3F2 with 66 D5 70. See page 36 and 37 of the
Apple II Reference manual for more details)

THE LISTING

This listing is all done relative to the start of the ROM so all address are
given as one byte. If you use an assembler, simply origin the code in RAM and
when it is programmed into the control ROM it will work just fine. The
routines are not arranged in order of execution so that the move routine will
be at the end since the length of the move routine will vary with the hardware
requirements. Just be sure that the three byte jump is inserted behind the
move routine.

* THE FIRST 4 INSTRUCTIONS LOOK LIKE A DISK BUT DON'T

* DO ANYTHING
*
00: 24 20 BIT $20
02: 24 00 BIT $00
04: 24 03 BIT $03
06: 24 3C BIT $3C
*

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 155 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

* THIS PART INITIALIZES APPLESOFT AND GETS CONTROL BACK

* AT ENTRY2
*
08: A9 1A ENTRY1 LDA # ENTRY2
0A: 85 38 STA KSWL
0C: A5 F8 07 LDA $07F8
0F: 85 39 STA KSWH
11: 4C 00 E0 JMP COLDSTART
*
* RESET INPUT TO THE KEYBOARD AND RUN THE PROGRAM
*
14: 20 8 1a ENRTY3 JSR SETKBD
17: 4C 66 D5 JMP RUN
*
* FINISH INITIALIZATION & MOVE THE PROGRAM TEXT DOWN
* FROM THE ROMS
*
1A: A9 14 ENTRY2 LDA # ENTRY3
1C: 85 38 STA KSWL
1E: A9 LL LDA # LENGTH-L
20: 85 69 STA LOMEML
22: A9 HH LDA # LENGTH-H
24: 85 6A STA LOMEMH

INSERT YOUR MOVE ROUTINE HERE FOLLOWED BY

: 4C F2 D4 JMP INIT PART 2

Copyright 1984, 1988 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL100.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 156 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL101.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II, IIe and II+: Auto-Run Apple w/o DOS (1 of 2)
Header: Apple II, IIe and II+: Auto-Run Apple w/o DOS (1 of 2)

This article last reviewed: 21 September 1984

Some applications require that an Apple start running an Applesoft program

from power-up without human interaction. This is easy with the disk and
Auto-Start ROM. Simply initilaize the diskette with the desired program in
memory and the disk will boot and run it when the power comes on. But
sometimes a disk drive is undesirable, especially where there is only one
program to run and the cost must be kept low. So here is a way to have a card
that will load and run an Applesoft program automatically on power-up in any
Apple II+.

I will assume the use of a card like the Mountain Computer ROM+ that has a 256
byte "control ROM" and room for some larger ROMs to store the Applesoft
program. On the ROM+ this is a bank of up to six 2716 type EPROMs. Using
EPROMs has the advantage that you can change your Applesoft program later by
erasing the EPROMs and reprogramming and the disadvantages of higher cost and
using more power from the Apple's power supply. The power consumption of the
EPROMs won't be a problem if the Apple isn't filled with cards.

The software in the control ROM is required to do five things:

1. Pretend that it's a disk controller card so that the Auto-Start ROM will
execute its code.

2. Initialize Applesoft.

3. Move an image of the Applesoft program down from the ROMs into the proper
area of RAM.

4. Set up the required Applesoft pointers for the end of the program.

5. RUN the program.

All that's needed to convince the Auto-Start that there's a disk controller
card out there is to have a ROM whose first four odd bytes match the Apple P5
or P5A PROM. If the monitor finds a ROM that matches it in slot N, it will do
a jump to $CN00. The routine that does this starts at $FAA6 and is listed on
page 144 of the Apple II reference manual. The first eight bytes in the
control ROM will be

24 20 24 00 24 03 24 3C

Note that by having the even numbered bytes equal to $24, (BIT Page zero) when
the code is executed starting at $CN00 nothing will happen until the byte
after the $3C.

The proper way to initialize Applesoft is to jump to $E000. Unfortunately

this entry into Applesoft falls into the normal command level routine. To
regain control so that the control ROM can load a program we can use the same
trick that DOS uses. As soon as Applesoft reaches its command level it
prints a prompt, ("]") and waits for the user to type in a command. Since all
input and output in the Apple is handled through two pointers in RAM, we can
divert the input routine to point back into the control ROM. This will leave
several levels of subroutine on the 6502 stack but Applesoft will
re-initialize the stack when we RUN the program so it doesn't matter.

Now the question becomes what address to put into the pointer. The control

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 157 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

ROM's address will change depending on which peripheral slot it's plugged
into.

The low byte is just the offset from the start of the ROM since the address
always starts on a 256 byte boundary but the high byte could be anything from
$C1 to $C7. When the Auto-Start ROM looks for a disk controller card it saves
the high order byte in $7F8. So the contents of $38 and $39, the input
pointer, becomes the offset which is stored at location $7F8. Then we can
jump to $E000 to initialize Applesoft confident that we will regain control
when it's done.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL101.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 158 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL102.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: "Muffin" Is on DOS 3.3 System Master

Header: Apple II: "Muffin" Is on DOS 3.3 System Master

Article Created: 14 May 1991

Article Last Reviewed: 29 May 1991
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Where can I find the program Muffin?

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

It's on the DOS 3.3 System Master.

Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL102.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 159 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL103.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: "Understanding the Apple II"

Header: Apple II: "Understanding the Apple II"

"Understanding Your Apple II", an in-depth Apple II and II+ hardware manual,
is now available from Quality Software or from your local dealer. The book,
by Jim Sather, has a foreword by Steve Wozniak. Some of the book's features:

--Documents all motherboard circuits, including some discussed nowhere else.

--Describes disk controller operation, including previously undocumented

details of the logic state sequencer.

--Explains RAM and ROM card operation.

--Reveals previously unnoticed features of Apple graphics.

--Contains 23 software and hardware Application Notes including the shift key
mod, disk write protect mod, and EPROM mods.

--Includes a chapter on simple user troubleshooting and maintenance.

--Contains over 100 figures and illustrations, including more than 20

schematics, ten appendices, a glossary and index.

This book runs 352 pages in all! A companion text, "Understanding Your
Apple IIe", is also available from:

Quality Software
21601 Marilla Street
Chatsworth, CA - 91311
(818) 709-1721
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL103.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 160 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL104.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: 80 Column Card Cannot Handle Some "Color" Programs
Header: Apple II: 80 Column Card Cannot Handle Some "Color" Programs

Article Created: 29 April 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I have an Apple IIe, an Enhanced 80 Column card, and an Apple Color Monitor
100. I have two games, Batman and Hunt for Red October, that do not
display in color even though they are both advertised as able to run on the
Apple II with double high-resolution color graphics.

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

The problem is that your software is trying to write directly to the video
circuitry instead of using calls to the software. The 80 column card
cannot handle these kinds of requests.

There are only two possible fixes:

* Get a different type of monitor and video card

* Call the software companies and ask if they have a software patch.
Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL104.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 161 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL105.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: Conflict between Versions of ProDOS and Backup II

Header: Apple II: Conflict between Versions of ProDOS and Backup II

Article Created: 4 June 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I backed up my hard disk with Backup II version 1.01, and the drive went
down (total loss of data). While trying to restore from the backup I get
through 13 of 34 disks, and then I get a DATE/TIME STAMP DO NOT MATCH
error. I have looked for the date and time stamp bytes on the disks to no
avail.

Can I fix Backup II to not look for a DATE/TIME STAMP? Which bytes should
I look for on the bad disks? I have looked at the information on the disks
in question and the data is there.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The actual problem may be with your versions of ProDOS and Backup II.
Specifically, versions of Backup II before 1.1.1 are not compatible with
any ProDOS version greater than 1.1.1. If your Backup II and ProDOS are
incompatible, you have two options:

* Use Backup II v1.1.1, which will read your backup disks

* Downgrade ProDOS to 1.1.1.

The Date/Time stamps for a ProDOS volume reside in bytes $1C-$1F of

block 2. Matching these against previous volumes may solve the problem.

To help you find block 2, here is a good formula for converting ProDOS
blocks to DOS 3.3 sectors:

Block = (8 * Track) + SectorOffset

Sector: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
SectorOffset: 0 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 7
Half of Block: 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2

It looks like the bytes you need are on Track 0, Sector 11 (first half of
block
Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL105.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 162 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL106.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: Digitizers

Header: Apple II: Digitizers

Article Created: 21 September 1984

Article Change History

----------------------
02/09/93 - UPDATED
Micron Technology acquired by Xceed Technologies.
09/21/84 - REVIEWED
* For accuracy.

Here are a few digitizers for the Apple II:

Computereyes by Digital Vision, Inc.

14 Oak St. #2
Needham, MA 02192
(617) 444-9040

Dithertizer II by Computer Station

11610 Page Service Drive
Saint Louis, Mo 63146
(314) 432-7019

Digisector by Micro-Works
P.O. Box 1110
Del Mar, CA 92014
(619) 942-2400

Micro D-Cam by Micro Mint

561 Willow Ave.
Cedarhurst, NY 11516
(516) 374-6793

Micron-Eye by Micron Technology (acquired by Xceed Technologies)

Xceed Technologies
37560 31 Mile Rd.
Richmond, MI 48062 313-727-4085
800-642-7661

The Dithertizer and the Digisector accept input from a standard video camera.
The Micro D-Cam and Micron-Eye use a solid state camera made from a special
purpose imaging chip. All have software to map the output from the camera to
the High-Res Screen of the Apple II.

The Dithertizer uses a feature called contouring. This makes the processor
display only those portions of an image which fall in a certain brightness (or
darkness) range. With this method you could set the digitizer to display only
the darkest spots on the screen. Then you could write software to scan the
digitized image for spots, count them and note their position.

Micron-Technology (acquired by Xceed Technologies) makes an RS-232 version of

the Micron-Eye. With the proper software, this could be your digitizer for
Macintosh, Lisa or Apple III.

To locate a vendor's address and phone numbers, use the vendor name as a
search
string.
Copyright 1988, 1993, Apple Computer, Inc.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 163 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL106.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 164 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL107.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: Disabling Keyboard During Serial I/O (2/97)

Header: Apple II: Disabling Keyboard During Serial I/O (2/97)

Article Created: 31 March 1988

Article Reviewed/Updated: 17 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article disucsses how to disable the keyboard during serial I/O on the
Apple IIc, Apple IIGS and Apple IIe Super Serial card.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The Apple II serial interface (Apple IIc serial port, Apple IIGS serial port,
and Apple IIe Super Serial Card) has a built-in command that disables the
keyboard during serial I/O. The command is FD. Here's how to send it from
BASIC:

10 print chr$(4);"pr#2"
20 print chr$(1);"FD": REM Disable the keyboard...

Article Change History:

17 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1988-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL107.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 165 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL108.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: Function of Start 13

Header: Apple II: Function of Start 13

Article Created: 8 April 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I have an Apple IIc Plus with a 5.25-inch drive. Do I need a file called
Start 13 on my system for the drive to work properly?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The file Start 13 was used early on when the Apple II went to a 16-sector
disk format. Start 13 made it possible for older, 13-sector diskettes to
be read. You don't need it for the Apple IIc to work with current
diskettes.
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL108.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 166 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL109.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: How to Copy Software from 5.25 to 3.5-inch Disks
Header: Apple II: How to Copy Software from 5.25 to 3.5-inch Disks

Article Created: 11 April 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I want to copy Apple IIe software from 5.25-inch to 3.5-inch disks, using
an Apple IIGS--and then run the programs. I get a message that the Apple
IIe disk was not formatted in ProDOS. What should I do?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

If the program was written to run under DOS 3.3, it probably won't work
under ProDOS. You can use the System Utilities Disk 3.1 to copy the
information over to a 3.5-inch disk (the DOS to ProDOS conversion is
handled automatically during the copy). However, if the application
interacts with the operating system giving DOS 3.3 commands, it won't run.
We recommend that you ask the software developer if they have a ProDOS
version.
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL109.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 167 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL110.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: Information Sources (2/97)

Header: Apple II: Information Sources (2/97)

Article Created: 25 February 1993

Article Reviewed/Updated: 17 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes some information sources for the Apple II products.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

GS+
---
An Apple IIGS magazine published bimonthly by EGO Systems.

EGO Systems
P.O. Box 15366
Chattanooga, TN 37415-0366

A+/InCider
----------
An Apple II and Macintosh magazine published monthly by IDG.

IDG Communications/Peterborough, InCider

P.O. Box 50358
Boulder, CO 80321-0358

A2-Central
----------
Publishes a number of newsletters that are devoted to the Apple II only.
Here's the current list:

A2-Central
----------
Published monthly since January, 1985 and provides technical information on
the Apple II.

A2-Central on Disk has been published monthly since February, 1989. Each 800K
3.5-inch disk contains the full text of that month's paper issue, plus text-
talking software for blind subscribers. In addition, specific issues contain
Apple system software, technical note updates, public domain and shareware
software.

Studio-City
-----------
Published every other month since February, 1990. Each issue consists of two
800K 3.5-inch disks and includes a HyperStudio stack containing editor Terry
Baker's tips, tricks, and letters from readers.

TimeOut-Central
---------------
Published every other month since September, 1990. Each issue consists of
one 800K 3.5-inch disk and includes a column by the editor, letters from
readers, as well as public domain and shareware AppleWorks and TimeOut files.

Script-Central
--------------
Published bimonthly and is all about Apple's HyperCard IIGS and HyperTalk,
its scripting language.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 168 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

A2-Central
P.O. Box 11250
Overland Park, KS 66207

The Road Apple

--------------
An Apple II "End Users" Underground Newsletter published six times a year.

Al Martin
1121 NE 177th, Suite B
Portland, OR 97230.

Scarlett
--------
A monthly newsletter published by:

Big Red Computer Club

423 Norfolk Avenue
Norfolk, NE 68701.

AppleWorks Forum
----------------
A monthly newsletter published by:

The National AppleWorks User Group

Box 87453
Canton, MI 48187

HyperStudio Network
-------------------
A quarterly newsletter about HyperStudio. They publish an annual 'Best of
HyperStudio' disk of stacks, and have discounts on HyperStudio accessories.
They also have some teacher-oriented materials.

HyperStudio Network
Box 103,
Blawenburg, NJ 08504

Softdisk and Softdisk GS

------------------------
Monthly disk magazines containing a variety of software (public domain,
shareware, clip art, reviews, etc.). Softdisk is available on 5.25- or 3.5-
inch disks. Softdisk GS is available only on 3.5-inch disks.

Softdisk Publishing
P.O. Box 30008
Shreveport, LA 71130-0008
AOL: zak Internet: [email protected]

USUS
----
An international non-profit organization dedicated to promoting and
influencing
software standards to aid in the development of portable software. They have
a
large software library including a lot of source code (for almost every
language or computer).

USUS Inc.
P.O. Box 1148
La Jolla, CA 92038

Article Change History:

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 169 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

17 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.

Copyright 1993-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL110.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 170 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL111.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: Interrupt Handling (2/97)

Header: Apple II: Interrupt Handling (2/97)

Article Created: 21 September 1984

Article Reviewed/Updated: 28 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes interrupt handling routines in the Apple II.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The user should be familiar with the 6502 interrupt requirements as defined
in the Synertek Programming and Hardware manuals. This article applies to the
interrupt request (IRQ). The use of the non-maskable interrupt (NMI) in a
disk system is not recommended. The data and programs on the disk may be
destroyed if an NMI occurs while the Apple is writing data to the disk. The
DOS disables IRQ during critical code making it relatively safe to use.

HARDWARE
--------

For interrupts, the Apple peripheral slots have defined three pins:

IRQ, Interrupt ReQuest pin 30

INT IN, daisy chain in pin 28
INT OUT, daisy chain out pin 23

The daisy chain structure allows an interface card to disable the next higher
number card from requesting an interrupt. Slot 0 has the highest priority and
slot 7 has the least.

SLOT

0 1 2 7
+--+ +--+ +--+ +--+
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
IRQ -------+--+---------+--+---------+--+-- - - - --+--+
| | | | | | | |
INT IN | |O I| |O I| |O I| |
and OUT ---| +---------+ +---------+ +-- - - - --+ |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+--+ +--+ +--+ +--+

The system was designed so that if INT IN for a slot is low then that slot
may not generate an interrupt. Each slot should pull INT OUT low when it is
requesting an interrupt to disable lower priority slots. Cards that don't use
IRQ should wire INT IN and INT OUT together so that any higher priorty slots
can still disable cards in lower priority slots. This priorty system fails if
there is an empty slot between any two interrupting cards.

The hardware logic required to generate INT OUT is INT IN anded with the
active low interrupt signal from the peripheral device. IRQ is INT IN anded
with the active high interrupt signal from the peripheral device.

SOFTWARE
--------

There are two ways to cause the 6502 to follow the IRQ vector. A logical zero

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 171 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

on the IRQ pin of the 6502 while the IRQ flag of the processor is cleared, or
executing a BREAK instruction in a program:

First, the Apple monitor determines whether a BREAK or an IRQ has occured. In
the Auto start ROM, this routine is at $FA40 and in the old monitor it's at
$FA86. This routine stores the 6502 accumulator at location $45 and retrieves
the processor status flags. A BREAK drops into the monitor with the address
of the BREAK operation code + 2 and a dump of the 6502 registers. The Auto-
Start ROM has the option of jumping to a user's routine after a break. Both
monitor ROMs jump to the address contained in memory at $3FE and $3FF after
an IRQ.

Interrupt Request
-----------------

The user must have the address of his interrupt handler stored in $3FE and
$3FF before the first interrupt is generated.

Caution: The accumulator does not contain valid data when it is vectored to
$3fe and $3FF.

The accumulator must be restored from location $45 before the return from
interupt instruction, (RTI) is executed. The user must also be careful to
leave the other registers as they were when an interrupt occured.

Interrupts and BASIC

--------------------

If the user is careful to restore all the 6502 registers and not disturb
BASIC's memory locations in the interrupt handling routine, the interrupt
will be transparent to BASIC. Be very careful of page 0 locations. Save and
restore any information on the stack when you're not sure.

Applesoft and Integer BASIC both use the 6502 stack extensively in keeping
track of GOSUBs and FOR-NEXT loops. This makes it difficult to have an
interrupt modify BASIC program execution. To do this the easiest way, program
the interrupt routine to set a flag byte when an event occurs and then
program the BASIC program to PEEK that flag byte's address and respond when
the flag byte is set.

You may use the Applesoft ONERR GOTO statement to modify the execution of an
Applesoft program when the interrupt occurs. The following machine language
routine causes an 'error' condition in Applesoft.

10 POKE 800,162: POKE 801,100: POKE 802,104: POKE 803,104

20 POKE 804,104: POKE 805,76 : POKE 806,233: POKE 807,242
30 POKE 1022,0 : POKE 1023,8
40 ONERR GOTO 1000
50 PRINT "NO INTERRUPT"
60 GOTO 50
1000 IF PEEK (222) <> 100 THEN END
1010 PRINT "INTERRUPT!!!"
1020 RESUME

The POKEs set the IRQ vector to generate an error number 100 when an
interrupt occurs. The Applesoft onerr routine can check decimal location 222
and if it doesn't equal 100 then you have a normal Applesoft or DOS error.
Treat the IRQ generated error like any other Applesoft error. RESUME and the
routine on page 82 of the Applesoft reference manual will work normally.
Please do a search on ON ERR GOTO for more information.

Interrupts and DOS

------------------

The interrupt checking routine in the monitor saves the 6502 accumulator at
location $45 while it checks for a break. Unfortunately, DOS also uses

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 172 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

location $45 as temporary storage while DOS parses the numeric parts of its
commands. This can result in range errors or reading the wrong record, slot,
or drive if an interrupt occurs during parsing. There is no way around this
problem at this time. To use interrupts with DOS in the safest way, disable
IRQ when doing any disk access.

Article Change History:

28 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1984-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL111.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 173 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL112.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: LocalTalk ImageWriter Delay from BASIC (2/97)

Header: Apple II: LocalTalk ImageWriter Delay from BASIC (2/97)

Article Created: 24 June 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 17 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I'm running an Apple IIGS lab (28 systems) with seven LocalTalk ImageWriters.

When using Applesoft BASIC, my computers print properly with a "PR#1"

command. However, there is a 30-second delay from the time one computer
finishes printing until the next system is allowed to print.

Here is a test program that I'm using:

10 PRINT CHR$(4);"PR#1"
20 FOR I=32 TO 126
30 PRINT CHR$(I);
40 NEXT:PRINT
50 PRINT CHR$(4);"PR#0"

If I run the above test program simultaneously on two Apple IIGS computers
trying to print to one LocalTalk ImageWriter, the first computer to type
"run" prints fine. The other computer has to wait for the LocalTalk option
board to release the printer.

I have gone through the ImageWriter technical book and can't find anything
that allows the LocalTalk card to release the printer Immediately after the
"PR#0" command.

Is there a reset or release command that I can add to the program to

eliminate this wait?

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

You are experiencing the time it takes the ImageWriter to release after the
connection to the computer is lost. Your problem is that the "PR#0" command
just changes the mode of the computer; the printer still thinks the first
computer should be there.

The printer has a built-in timeout that can't be changed. Something you might
try is to insert an "ESC c" as line 45. This command resets the printer and
might cause the printer to drop its connection before the computer does.

Article Change History:

17 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1991-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL112.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 174 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL113.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: Mouse Memory Locations

Header: Apple II: Mouse Memory Locations

Article Created: 13 August 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

What are the memory addresses for mouse information on the Apple IIe and
Apple IIGS?

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

Apple IIe/IIc
-------------
With the mouse card in slot four of the Apple IIe, locations are stored as
follows:

- low byte x $047C

- high byte x $057C

- low byte y $04FC

- high byte y $05FC

(This is different if the card is in a slot other than slot four.)

More data on Apple IIe and IIc applications is on pages 196 through 198 and
page 363 of the "Apple IIc Technical Reference Manual" from Addison-Wesley.

Apple IIGS
----------
Information on the Apple IIGS locations is on pages 200 through 205 of the
"Apple IIGS Firmware Reference" from Addison-Wesley.
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL113.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 175 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL114.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: No Diskless Startup Across Zones

Header: Apple II: No Diskless Startup Across Zones

This article last reviewed: 23 February 1989

If you are having problems starting a diskless Apple II on LocalTalk over

a Kinetics FastPath, from a server residing on Ethernet, it may be because
the diskless start-up capability of Apple II workstations is designed to
work over a FastPath or other AppleTalk bridges -- but not across zones. If
your FastPath has been set up with the Ethernet as a separate zone from the
LocalTalk side, this is your problem.

You should also look at the configuration of the FastPath itself. If a

Macintosh can access the server normally from the LocalTalk side of the
network, then the Apple II should be able to start, because the same
network layers are being used for the information transfer. If a Macintosh
cannot access the server properly, then you should suspect the
configuration of the FastPath itself.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL114.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 176 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL115.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: Program To Recover Deleted Files

Header: Apple II: Program To Recover Deleted Files

This article last reviewed: 22 June 1989

TOPIC -----------------------------------------

Is there a way to recover deleted files on an Apple II under Apple DOS 3.3
and ProDOS?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------

Central Point Software offers Copy II Plus, which allows deleted files to
be restored in both DOS 3.3 and ProDOS--provided you have not written to
the disk since the file was deleted.

For more details, search the Tech Info Library under "Central Point".
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL115.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 177 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL116.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: Sources of Used Equipment

Header: Apple II: Sources of Used Equipment

Article Created: 3 June 1991

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I want to purchase discontinued Apple II equipment. Where can I find it?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Preowned Electronics has a large selection of used Apple II equipment.

Sun Remarketing is another source as well.

You can find the address and phone number for these companies in a separate
article on the Tech Info Library. Search under the name you want to find.
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL116.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 178 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL117.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: Starting Over Bridges

Header: Apple II: Starting Over Bridges

This article last reviewed: 10 April 1989

When an internet has each side of the InterBridge assigned a different zone
name (common practice when using the InterBridge) In this type of
internet, the Apple IIe and the Apple IIGS cannot boot across an
InterBridge.

However, when both sides of the InterBridge have the same zone name on a
one-zone internet, the Apple II systems can start across the InterBridge.
This difference occurs, because AppleTalk uses the Name Binding Protocol to
understand the network design. (AppleTalk is more concerned with names than
it is with numbers.) With both sides of the InterBridge having the same
zone name, AppleTalk believes it is dealing with one network (one zone).

This method of name assignment has one disadvantage. All network traffic
is passed across the InterBridge, thus defeating the usual reason for
installing the bridge--the logical separation of network traffic.

Note: Routers and bridges are different devices. They do perform similar
functions, but the router is a higher-level device than the bridge.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL117.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 179 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL118.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: Transferring Data to the Macintosh

Header: Apple II: Transferring Data to the Macintosh

This article last reviewed: 23 June 1990

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Can the Apple 5.25 PC Drive (and card) read ProDOS 5.25-inch disks under AFE?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Apple 5.25 PC Drive only supports disks that are formatted using the MFM
encoding methods. Therefore, it does not read ProDOS-formatted disks, which
use GCR. Alternative ways to move data from the Apple II to the Macintosh
include AppleShare, a serial link (cable and/or modem), and by first moving
the
ProDOS data to 3.5-inch disks, which any Macintosh will mount.

You may find the AFE Works-Works translator helpful when actually translating
the files. It is on the InfoSource CD-ROM available from Apple.
Copyright 1990 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL118.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 180 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL119.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: Transferring Files To a Macintosh (9/95)

Header: Apple II: Transferring Files To a Macintosh (9/95)

Article Created: 6 September 1995

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article provides instruction on converting Apple II files to MacWrite

files using Bank Street Writer.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

To convert Apple II Bank Street Writer word processor files into Macintosh
MacWrite files follow these steps.

Step 1
------
Use the System Utility option within Bank Street writer to convert the binary
Bank Street Writer documents to ProDOS 3.3 ASCII text files. This must be
done for each file that you intend to transfer to the Macintosh.

NOTE:
Make sure that the names of the files contain only the letters (A-Z), no
numbers or other marks.

Step 2
------
Use the ProDOS System Utilties Diskette to copy the DOS 3.3 ASCII text files
that you have created to a ProDOS formatted disk. (You will need your
original DOS 3.3 disk, and a new disk that has been formatted with ProDOS.)

Step 3
------
Use an Apple II computer that is equipped with both a 5 1/4" disk drive and a
3 1/2" disk drive. Again, use the ProDOS System Utilities disk to copy the
files from the 5 1/4" disk to a ProDOS formatted 3 1/2" disk.

Step 4
------
Use a Macintosh computer equipped with a FDHD (high density) disk drive
(Macintosh SE/30 or later) and PC Exchange 1.1 or later.

Step 5
------
Insert the disk into your Macintosh and use MacWrite or your favorite word
processor to open each file. Once you have verified that everything is
intact, choose "Save as..." from the file menu and save the file.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1995, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL119.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 181 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL120.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: Translating Graphics Files to Macintosh

Header: Apple II: Translating Graphics Files to Macintosh

Article Created: 13 August 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Is it possible to convert ProDOS clip art files to Macintosh SuperPaint

files using Apple File Exchange (AFE)? If so, what translator is needed?

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

We don't know of a product that converts graphic files between Apple II and
Macintosh formats. This type of conversion is one of the most difficult,
as the files are usually stored as an approximation of the hardware's
display capabilities, which vary greatly between different computer lines.

Though we couldn't find a product that will do this, what you're probably
looking for is a utility that will convert a file into a "standard format,"
such as Graphic Interchange Format (GIF). Once in this format, you could
move it to the Macintosh and re-translate it.

Checking the MENU software library on AppleLink for a utility to do this.

Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL120.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 182 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL121.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: Turn Off Line Feed When Using 3rd Party Printers
Header: Apple II: Turn Off Line Feed When Using 3rd Party Printers

This article last reviewed: 19 February 1988

Third party dot matrix impact printers need to receive a Carriage Return
within
a control code in order to set print densities to certain values.
Unfortunately, when a CR is sent from an Apple IIc or a Super Serial Card, the
interface automatically sends a Line Feed as well. Temporarily turning off the
interface's automatic LF can be done with a Control-I K. To turn automatic LF
back on, use Control-I L.

The problem is, these characters may be ignored by the interface and
sent to the printer instead.

There are other ways of getting back to default conditions on a printer,

such as sending a 'RESET' code, or turning off/turning on the printer.
The problem with this is that some printers take a long time resetting.
This can be noisy and sometimes very time consuming, especially if done
often.

Here is why this happens (and a solution):

The Super Serial Card (and its Apple IIc serial port equivalent) will
forward control characters if preceded by a Control-I. While it's true
that Control-I is the command to send to set up specific functions, in
order to send the command to the card without it forwarding said command
to the printer, you must send the command preceded by TWO Control-I's.

- The first Control-I alerts the card that a command it needs to operate
on is forthcoming.

- The second Control-I is used by the card, along with its attendant
characters, as the command string, to change interface functions.

If what follows the first Control-I is not a control character, the card
(firmware) forwards the next characters to the printer.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL121.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 183 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL122.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: Using a Switchbox With ImageWriter II

Header: Apple II: Using a Switchbox With ImageWriter II

This article last reviewed: 14 November 1989

TOPIC ---------------------------------------------

I am having problems with my Apple II, switch boxes, and ImageWriter II.

What actually is the difference between the ImageWriter and the ImageWriter
II?
Is there solution guaranteed to work?

Do you know of anybody who is having success with ImageWriter IIs and switch
boxes?

DISCUSSION ----------------------------------------

The workaround is to use XON/XOFF handshaking.

Following is an explanation of what happens when switching between an Apple

IIGS and an Apple IIe. Also included is an explanation of why this may not be
a
problem with ImageWriters, and why a MicroBuffer may cure this as well.

Set-Up:
-------

Our configuration to test this problem was an Apple IIe equipped with a Super
Serial Card, an Apple IIGS, and an ImageWriter II, along with two commercial
switch boxes. Line status was monitored with a Data Specification RS-232
Break-Out box. A Fluke 8050A Digital Multi-Meter was used to measure the
voltage levels. Software used was AppleWriter II with the same file open on
both systems.

The Test:
_________

When switching between the systems, transitions were noted on the Transmit
line, which caused DTR from the printer to go into the high state, effectively
shutting off communication with the connected computer. If the printer does a
reset in between the systems, the now-connected system prints correctly. If
there is no reset when switching, it is necessary to reset the printer by
either deselecting/selecting, as you stated, or by powering off the printer,
and powering it on again. Either of these actions resets the DTR line and
re-establishes communications with the computer.

Our first thought was to use a switch box with a make-before-break switch. The
reason this would not work with Apple IIe and Apple IIGS systems connected is
the difference in voltage levels between the systems. The Apple IIGS system
output device, AMD 26LS30, is supplied with +/-5VDC, while the Super Serial
Card output device, TI 75189, is provided with +/-12VDC. This means that the
Apple IIGS outputs -4.7 volts for a "Low" signal while the Apple IIe outputs
-9.7 volts. When the switch is thrown from one position to the other, here's
what happens:

Ground Level ________ ___________

-4.7 __/\ /\______
\ /
-9.7 __ __

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 184 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

GS-> IIe IIe-> IIGS

With the switch type a break-before-make, when the switch opens between
contacts, the voltage level rises to Ground, then drops to a Low level again.
This positive transition to Ground causes the printer to see either a start
bit
or a DSR level shift from the computer, which then sets DTR false. If the
switch box is a make-before-break switch, there would be current flow from the
Apple IIe into the Apple IIGS output because of the different voltage level in
the output "Low" signal, which could cause damage to the interface chips in
the
Apple IIGS.

XON/XOFF works because the printer sends/receives the XON/XOFF handshaking

over the normal data communications lines, pins 2 and 3, and even though
these lines are affected by the level transitions caused by the switch
action, these transitions are not recognized as XON/XOFF by the printer or
the computer. Because the equipment doesn't see these transitions as
requests to halt data flow, there is no attendant response to incorrect
data by the printer, and the information flow continues.

The ImageWriter has 75189 receiver chips installed, functionally equivalent to

the 1489 Line Receiver, which are much less sensitive to level transitions
because they are designed to operate at lower frequency limits. This causes
them to be much more tolerant of the level transitions that occur during the
actual time of the switch. ImageWriter IIs have 26LS32s for receivers. They
are designed for higher speed use, and thus are much more sensitive to the
level transitions occurring. This is our interpretation of why this problem
does not exist with the ImageWriter.

A MicroBuffer might cure this problem because the ImageWriter II responds to

the level transitions occurring during the switch time, but when this
transition is sent to a buffer, it knows it is not data, so it ignores the
change in potential between connections.

To use XON/XOFF with older software, it is necessary to use a pre-boot program

to set up the Super Serial Card before using the software. On the Apple IIGS,
if you cannot gain access to the Control Panel from within the application,
the
pre-boot needs to be used there, too.

The pre-boot program should look like this in DOS 3.3 or ProDOS:

10 D$=CHR$(4)
20 PRINT D$;"PR#1"
30 PRINT CHR$(9);"X E";CHR$(13)
40 PRINT D$;"PR#0"

Enter this short program into the system in immediate mode prior to starting
up
the systems, or save it on disk as either a HELLO (DOS 3.3) or STARTUP
(ProDOS)
program to run before the software boots.

Bottom Line
-----------

Change the ImageWriter II to XON/XOFF handshaking by setting SW 2-3 Open, and

the problem of not being able to print from multiple systems should vanish.
It
is less convenient, but we have not been able to make the setup fail using
this
method.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 185 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

### END OF FILE A2TIL122.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 186 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL123.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II: Wrong Version of Setup Causes Aristotle Problems

Header: Apple II: Wrong Version of Setup Causes Aristotle Problems

Article Created: 14 May 1991

Article Last Reviewed: 29 May 1991
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I'm having a problem in setting up a lab network using a Macintosh SE/30 as

a server, with a combination of Apple IIGS and Apple IIe workstations. I
am also using Apple II Setup v2.0.1.

I get the following error message when I try to log on to Aristotle as

Administrator from an Apple IIGS: "an error occurred loading the file
/volumename/System/System.Setup/Cdev.Init".

When I try using a different startup application (such as BASIC.SYSTEM), I

get this message: "Bad OS ver 0011" I'm using version 5.0.2 to install
Server Network Startup, and Server Quick Logoff.

Also, I've been getting a System Error when setting up a Macintosh SE/30 as
a server and installing System 6.0.3 from the Install menu of the File
Server installation disk. Reinstalling System 6.0.5 seems to cure this,
however.

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

The problem you are seeing with Aristotle is a result of using the wrong
version of the Apple II Setup. You have to use Apple II Setup v2.1 or
2.1.1, not v2.0.1, when setting up the software.

As for the problem of installing 6.0.3 from the File Server installation
disk, it could be that there is something corrupted in the installation
scripts for that version. Nothing you described is a wrong procedure.
Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL123.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 187 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL124.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II-to-IBM Host File Transfer

Header: Apple II-to-IBM Host File Transfer

This article last reviewed: 1 May 1990

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

How can I transfer an ASCII file from an Apple IIe to an IBM mainframe?

I haven't been able to find any 3270 Apple II solutions. Assuming there isn't
a Macintosh available, we could send the ASCII file from the Apple IIe over
CompuServe or some other network to a Macintosh (or even an MS-DOS PC)
connected to a mainframe. Then, we could make the ASCII-to-EBCDIC conversion
and store it on the mainframe.

Are there any other solutions?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

There are two other options. All options, including the one you mentioned,
are
based on file transfer from the ASCII environment to the EBCDIC environment
(microcomputer to mainframe host). This file transfer is where the conversion
will take place.

The first option depends on the services available from the mainframe. This
method requires a mainframe-attached protocol converter that uses the XModem
protocol, plus a communications package on the Apple IIe that also supports
XModem. This setup should allow the Apple IIe to dial directly into the
protocol converter and upload the file to the mainframe.

The second option is to dial the Macintosh or MS-DOS PC directly instead of

paying for a commercial communications service. Since both computers require
modems to access the commercial service, and most likely use XModem for the
transfer, there should be no difficulties connecting directly to one another
with their communications software and using XModem for the transfer. Once
transferred from the Apple IIe to the Macintosh or PC attached to the
mainframe, the file can be uploaded from the Macintosh or PC using the host's
file transfer method.
Copyright 1990 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL124.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 188 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL125.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple II/II+/IIe: Cable Compatibility (9/94)

Header: Apple II/II+/IIe: Cable Compatibility (9/94)

Article Created: 27 September 1994

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article provides cable compatibility information for Apple computer

systems and a variety of Apple peripherals.

The left column lists the peripherals, the right column lists the cable
required to connect one of the following computers to it; Apple II, Apple II
Plus, or the Apple IIe.

Part numbers which begin with a letter are the finished goods part number,
the seven digit numbers are the service part numbers.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Peripheral Cable part number

---------- -----------------
AppleFax Modem N/A

Apple Personal Modem A2C0312/590-0555 (smoke) or

Apple Data Modem 2400 A9C0314/590-0556
(w/jumper on Super Serial Card)

Apple Modem 300 A2C0354/590-0121

Apple Modem 1200

Apple ImageWriter II or II/L A9C0314/590-0556 (smoke) or

ImageWriter LQ LocalTalk or A2C0312/590-0555
(w/jumper to modem)

Apple ImageWriter Printer A2C0352/590-0037

Apple ImageWriter 15"

LaserWriter, Plus, IInt, IIntx, IIf, IIg LocalTalk (Req. WorkStation Card)
LaserWriter Pro 600/630/810
Personal LaserWriter NT, NTR

Personal LaserWriter LS N/A

StyleWriter & StyleWriter II
Color StyleWriter/Color StyleWriter Pro

Apple LaserWriter IIsc N/A

Personal LaserWriter SC

AppleCD SC M0206/658-8031 (SCSI System

cable)*
Apple Hard Disk 20/40/80

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 189 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Apple Tape Backup 40SC N/A

Apple Scanner
Apple Color OneScanner
Apple Color Printer

LEGEND
* Requries M3503LL/B/658-8032 Cable Terminator and Apple II SCSI Card.

A9M0320 or A3M0025 w/590-0037 require Super Serial Card BUT A9M0302 or

A3M0025 w/590-0037 & 590-0550 doesn't (Buses Built In).

When using an ImageWriter II/LQ with the Apple IIe and cable part number 590-
0555, the jumper on the Super Serial Card must be on "Modem".

Support Information Services

Copyright 1994, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: ktable,cabinfo,review

### END OF FILE A2TIL125.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 190 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL126.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIc Plus: Cable Compatibility (9/94)

Header: Apple IIc Plus: Cable Compatibility (9/94)

Article Created: 27 September 1994

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article provides cable compatibility information for Apple computer

systems and a variety of Apple peripherals.

The left column lists the peripherals, the right column lists the cable
required to connect one of the following computers to it; Apple IIc Plus.

Part numbers which begin with a letter are the finished goods part number,
the seven digit numbers are the service part numbers.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Peripheral Cable part number

---------- -----------------
AppleFax Modem N/A

Apple Personal Modem M0197/590-0552 (smoke)

Apple Data Modem 2400

Apple Modem 300 590-0197 & 590-0341

Apple Modem 1200

Apple ImageWriter II or II/L M0197/590-0552

ImageWriter LQ

Apple ImageWriter Printer M0150/590-0169 & 590-0553 or

Apple ImageWriter 15" A2C0352/590-0037 & A9M0333/590-
0550

LaserWriter, Plus, IInt, IIntx, IIf, IIg N/A

LaserWriter Pro 600/630/810
Personal LaserWriter NT, NTR

Personal LaserWriter LS N/A

StyleWriter & StyleWriter II
Color StyleWriter/Color StyleWriter Pro

Apple LaserWriter IIsc N/A

Personal LaserWriter SC

AppleCD SC N/A
Apple Hard Disk 20/40/80

Apple Tape Backup 40SC N/A

Apple Scanner
Apple Color OneScanner

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 191 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Apple Color Printer

Support Information Services

Copyright 1994, Apple Computer, Inc
Keywords: ktable,cabinfo,review

### END OF FILE A2TIL126.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 192 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL127.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIc Plus: Specifications (Discontinued 11/90)

Header: Apple IIc Plus: Specifications (Discontinued 11/90)

This article last reviewed: 13 September 1988

Here are specifications for the Apple IIc Plus:

CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT (CPU)

- Microprocessor: 4 Mhz 65C02
- Clock Speed: 1 or 4 Mhz (user selectable -- press ESC key when you power the
unit on)
- Address bus: 16 bits
- Address range: 65,536 bytes (64K)
- Data bus: 8 bits
- Registers (8 bit): accumulator, two index registers, stack pointer, and
processor status register

MEMORY
- 128K or RAM (random-access memory), optionally expandable to 1.125 megabytes
- 32K of ROM (read-only memory), containing:
-System monitor
-AppleSoft BASIC interperter
-80-column display firmware

TEXT DISPLAY MODES

- 80-column text (80 columns by 24 lines)
- 40-column text (40 columns by 24 lines)
- All text can appear on the screen as normal, inverse, flashing, or MouseText
characters

GRAPHICS DISPLAY MODES

- Double high-resolution (560 dots horizontally by 192 dots vertically; 16
colors)
- High-resolution (280 dots horizontally by 192 dots vertically; 6 colors)
- Low-resolution (40 dots horizontally by 48 dots vertically; 16 colors)
- All graphics can be configured to allow four lines of text at the bottom of
the screen.

KEYBOARD
- 63-key full-sized keyboard
- Full 128-character ASCII, including 96 uppercase and lowercase alphanumeric
characters, and 32 control characters
- Special-purpose keys: shift, caps lock, control, escape, return, tab,
delete,
up arrow, down arrow, left arrow, right arrow, reset, open apple, option
- Keyboard is switchable between QWERTY and Dvorak layouts
- Includes volume slide control for speaker

DISK DRIVE
- Disk size: 3.5 inches
- Capacity: 800 kilobytes
- Recording surfaces: 2
- Tracks per surface: 80
- Blocks per disk:1,600
- Push button for motorized eject

INTERFACES
- External disk drive port using 19-pin, D-style connector, allows a
daisy-chain connection of up to three additional drives (Apple 3.5 Drive,
UniDisk 3.5, and/or Apple 5.25)
- Two RS-232 serial ports with 8-pin minicircular connectors (for printer,

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 193 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

modem, and other accessories)

- NTSC (composite) color video, via RCA phone jack
- 15-pin, D-style connector for video expansion
- 9-pin, D-style connector for mouse, joystick, hand controllers, or other
accessories
- Internal, 34-pin connector for memory expansion up to 1.125 megabytes
- Standard, 3-pin grounded power plug

ELECTRICAL REQUIRMENTS
- Line voltage: 90 to 130 volts AC
- Line frequency: 50 to 60 hertz
- Maximum power consumption: 20 watts continuous
- Supply voltages:
+5 volts (+-5%)
+12 volts (+-10%)
-12 volts (+-10%)

- Maximum supply currents:

+5 volts=1.5 amps
-5 volts= 30 milliamps
+12 volts= 0.9 amps continuous -- 1.5 amps intermittent
-12 volts= 100 milliamps

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
- Operating temperature: 50 to 104 degrees F (10 TO 40 degrees C)
- Relative humidity: 20% to 95%

SAFETY AND EMI QUALIFICATIONS

- FCC part 15 Class B Computing Devices
- UL 11 Office Appliances and Business Equipment

SIZE AND WEIGHT

- Height: 2.5 inches (6.35 cm)
- Width: 12 inches (30.48 cm)
- Depth: 11.5 inches (29.2 cm)
- Weight: 7lb. (3.2 kg)

Included with the Apple IIc Plus package:

- Apple IIc Plus personal computer with built-in 800K disk drive
- Power cord
- Apple II System Disk
- Tutorial disk
- Owner's guide
- Apple II System Disk User's Guide
- A Touch of AppleSoft BASIC manual
- Limited warranty statement
- Packing list
Copyright 1988 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL127.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 194 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL128.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIc: 80/40 switch

Header: Apple IIc: 80/40 switch

The 80/40 switch on the Apple IIc only sets a bit in memory. While a program
can read this bit and use the setting in a decision to display 80 or 40
columns, in practice, only a few programs, e.g. Apple Writer, take advantage
of the switch in that way. In itself, the 80/40 switch does not force 80
column firmware on or off; only a software command like Applesoft's PR#3 or
PR#0 can do that.

The 80/40 switch on the Apple IIc was designed for customers who use their
television set as a monitor. A television set doesn't display 80 columns of
text very legibly; 40 columns reads much better. Unfortunately, most Apple II
software packages, written before the Apple IIc, don't check the bit set by
the 80/40 switch.

Because the bit setting is independent from the PR#3 command, programmers can
use the bit set by the 80/40 switch for features other than 80/40 column
display:

10 TEXT:HOME:REM INITIALIZATION
100 SWITCH = PEEK(49248):REM MEMORY LOCATION FOR CURRENT SWITCH SETTING
110 VTAB 12
120 IF SWITCH > 127 THEN PRINT "80/40 SWITCH DOWN":REM OR ANYTHING ELSE
130 IF SWITCH < 128 THEN PRINT "80/40 SWITCH UP ":REM OR ANYTHING ELSE
140 GOTO 100

For more info, see the two-volume Apple IIc (16K ROM) Technical Reference
Manual, pages 5 and 77 of Volume I and page 128 of Volume II, or the
one-volume manual published by Addison-Wesley, pages 5, 80, and 342.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL128.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 195 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL129.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIc: Cable Compatibility (10/95)

Header: Apple IIc: Cable Compatibility (10/95)

Article Created: 27 September 1994

Article Reviewed/Updated: 3 October 1995

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article provides cable compatibility information for Apple computer

systems and a variety of Apple peripherals.

The left column lists the peripherals, the right column lists the cable
required to connect the Apple IIc.

Part numbers which begin with a letter are the finished goods part number,
the seven digit numbers are the service part numbers.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Begin_Table

Peripheral Cable part number

---------- -----------------
AppleFax Modem N/A

Apple Personal Modem A2C4505/590-0554 (smoke)

Apple Data Modem 2400

Apple Modem 300 A2C0354/590-0121

Apple Modem 1200

Apple ImageWriter II or II/L A2C4505/590-0554 (smoke) or

ImageWriter LQ 590-0333 (beige)

Apple ImageWriter Printer 590-0191

Apple ImageWriter 15"

LaserWriter, Plus, IInt, IIntx, IIf, IIg N/A

LaserWriter Pro 600/630/810
Personal LaserWriter NT, NTR

Personal LaserWriter LS N/A

StyleWriter & StyleWriter II
Color StyleWriter/Color StyleWriter Pro

Apple LaserWriter IIsc N/A

Personal LaserWriter SC

AppleCD SC N/A
Apple Hard Disk 20/40/80

Apple Tape Backup 40SC N/A

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 196 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Apple Scanner
Apple Color OneScanner
Apple Color Printer

End_Table

Article Change History:

03 Oct 1995 - Updated service part numbers.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1994-95, Apple Computer, Inc
Keywords: ktable,cabinfo,review

### END OF FILE A2TIL129.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 197 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL130.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIc: Description (Discontinued)

Header: Apple IIc: Description (Discontinued)

Article Created: 1 May 1992

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes the Apple IIc computer (now discontinued).

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The Apple IIc is a compact personal computer about the same size as a loose-
leaf notebook, small enough to fit in a briefcase, and light enough to carry
with you. It has 128K of RAM, a built-in disk drive, and a full-size
keyboard. It runs thousands of programs from the Apple II software library.

Features
--------
- 128K RAM and 16K ROM
- Enhanced version of the processor used in the Apple IIe
- Built-in 5.25-inch disk drive
- Full-size keyboard that produces the entire ASCII character set in both
80-column and 40-column formats.
- Three separate color graphic modes
- Built-in speaker with volume control and a headphone jack
- Two built-in serial ports for adding a modem and printer, as well as
built-in connectors for attaching a mouse, joystick, hand controllers,
second disk drive, and television display
- External (floor-mounted or table-mounted) power unit
- Built-in Applesoft BASIC programming language

Support Information Services

Copyright 1992-1994 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: specsht

### END OF FILE A2TIL130.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 198 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL131.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIe and IIGS: Optical Character Recognition Software

Header: Apple IIe and IIGS: Optical Character Recognition Software

Article Created: 30 May 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Is Optical Character Recognition software available for Apple II computers?

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

WestCode Software developed INWORDS, Optical Character Recognition (OCR)

software for the Apple IIe and Apple IIGS. You use the software with
hand-held scanners. It scans text at up to 3000 characters per minute.

You can find the address and phone number for this company in a separate
article in the Tech Info Library.
Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL131.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 199 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL132.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIe Card: Can't Use Apple II Memory Expansion Cards
Header: Apple IIe Card: Can't Use Apple II Memory Expansion Cards

Article Created: 13 August 1991

Article Last Reviewed: 23 July 1992
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Up to 1MB of the Macintosh LC's memory can be addressed via a "virtual"

Apple IIe-style memory expansion card. Does this mean that an Apple IIe
memory card can be installed in the Macintosh LC?

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

The Apple IIe Card uses the memory of the Macintosh LC. The Macintosh LC
cannot utilize Apple II memory expansion cards, for several reasons:

- No slot available in the Macintosh LC.

- Apple II cards are too large for the Macintosh LC.

- The RAM is too slow.

Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL132.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 200 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL133.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIe Card: Hardware Specifications (7/93)

Header: Apple IIe Card: Hardware Specifications (7/93)

Article Created: 7 March 1991

Article Change History

----------------------
07/12/93 - REVISED
* To include Performa
06/08/92 - REVIEWED
* For technical accuracy

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article gives the specifications for the Apple IIe Card for the
Macintosh LC and Performa 400, 405, 430, and 450 computers. For a
description of the Apple IIe Card software, search under "Apple IIe Card"
and "software".

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

OVERVIEW
--------
The Apple IIe Card lets the Apple Macintosh LC computer and Performa 400
series run the more than 10,000 Apple IIe programs. To assure compatibility
with virtually all Apple IIe applications, the Apple IIe Card contains a
65C02 microprocessor -- the same one that's built in to the Apple IIe
personal computer. The card comes with 128K RAM standard and can use up to
1MB of Macintosh LC RAM. A floppy-drive controller and connector ports for
a 5.25-inch floppy disk drive and an Apple Joystick II are also included.

The Apple IIe Card takes full advantage of the Macintosh LC Performa 400
series' components, including the monitor, keyboard, mouse, and internal
disk drives. With the superior resolution offered by Macintosh monitors,
text and graphics generated by Apple IIe applications appear crisp and clear
in all Apple IIe video modes. Regardless of the video mode, Apple IIe
applications run at normal Apple IIe speeds -- or, using an optional mode of
the Apple IIe Card, they can be run up to twice as fast.

SPECIFICATIONS
--------------
Central Processing Unit
-----------------------
* Processor: 65C02
* Clock Speed: 1.02MHz or 1.9MHz
* Address Bus: 16 bits
* Address Range: 2 banks of 65,536 bytes (128K total)
* Data Bus: 8 bits - Registers: Accumulator, two index registers, stack
pointer, processor status, and program counter

Memory
------
* 256K of RAM (Apple IIe uses 128K of this RAM) on Apple IIe Card
* Ability to access up to 1MB of Macintosh LC RAM
* Apple IIe ROM in write-protected portions of Apple IIe Card memory

Text Display Modes

------------------
* 80 columns, 24 lines, 5x7 dot matrix

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 201 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

* 40 columns, 24 lines, 5x7 dot matrix

* All text can appear on the screen as normal, inverse, or MouseText
characters

Graphics Display Modes

----------------------
* Low-resolution color: 16 colors, 40x48
* High-resolution color: 6 colors, 280x192
* Double high-resolution color: 16 colors, 140x192
* Double high-resolution monochrome: 560x192

Compatible Operating Systems

----------------------------
* ProDOS
* DOS 3.3
* Pascal

Drives Supported
----------------
* Two Apple 5.25 Drives (Platinum 5.25 Drive is the only 5.25-inch drive
supported)
* One UniDisk 3.5 Drive (White 3.5-inch external)
* Internal SuperDrive

Monitors Supported
------------------
All Macintosh LC monitors are supported (12- and 13-inch)
Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL133.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 202 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL134.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIe Card: How to Save Information to a Hard Drive

Header: Apple IIe Card: How to Save Information to a Hard Drive

Article Created: 4 December 1992

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

How do you specify applications on the IIe card to save on a hard drive with a
ProDOS partition?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

There are two different methods of specifying the hard drive when saving
applications on the Apple IIe or, in this case, the Apple IIe card. A ProDOS
device is designated by a physical location and by path name. The physical
location on an Apple IIe is determined by the physical location of the SCSI
card.

On the Apple IIe card, use the control panel to configure where the
hard drive partition is going to be phantomed to. This is done for software
compatibility. If you look in the Apple IIe control panel slot assignments,
you will find a hard-drive icon. When you place the hard drive in a slot
(virtual, not physical), you assign how the drive will be accessed when
referred to in the physical convention.

In other words, the Apple IIe card doesn't have any physical slots but has to
emulate the Apple IIe. You use the control panel to configure how the software
will see the Apple IIe card.

In ProDOS, the commands for saving a BASIC file are:

Physical Designation
Save Programname, S7,D1 <---- S7 equals slot 7, D1 = Drive 1
Change the slot number, Sx to your
configuration.

Pathname Designation
Save VolumeName/ProgramName If your hard drive were named
ProDOS, you would type
Save ProDOS/ProgramName

ProDOS also supports nested folders. All you would have to do is to specify
the complete path name, such as VolumeName/Pathname/ProgramName

These commands are all from BASIC. Within an application, you will need
to determine what the program is asking for. If it asks for slot and drive,
type the slot you configured the hard drive for. If it is asking for path
information, type the pathname.

NOTE. The above information applies only to ProDOS. Apple DOS, the original
operating system for Apple II computers, does not support hard drives.
Copyright 1992, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL134.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 203 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL135.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIe Card: ProDOS 1.9. Corrects AppleWorks Date Errors
Header: Apple IIe Card: ProDOS 1.9. Corrects AppleWorks Date Errors

Article Created: 6 June 1991

Article Last Reviewed: 2 June 1992
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

When I'm running the Apple IIe Card, AppleWorks does not seem to access the
clock correctly: the date is wrong.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Update the version of ProDOS on your AppleWorks disk to version 1.9. This
version of ProDOS is shipping on the Apple II System Utilities version 3.2.
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL135.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 204 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL136.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIe Emulation on an Apple III

Header: Apple IIe Emulation on an Apple III

Titan Technologies, Inc. (makers of the "Accelerator" board) have a new

product called the "III PLUS II". This board allows an Apple III to emulate an
Apple IIe, features standard Apple II game ports, supports Pilot, Logo, and
ProDOS, and comes in 3 flavors: 16K, 64K & 128K. Scheduled release: August
15, 1984.

Titan Technologies, Inc.

P.O. Box 8050
310 W. Ann
Ann Arbor, MI 48107
(313) 662-8542
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL136.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 205 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL137.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIe Enhancement Kit: Technical Benefits (10/94)

Header: Apple IIe Enhancement Kit: Technical Benefits (10/94)

Article Created: 10 May 1985

Article Reviewed/Updated: 17 October 1994

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article documents the benefits of the Apple IIe Enhancement Kit.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The Apple IIe Enhancement improves the performance of the Apple IIe by
replacing four chips on the main circuit board.

The Enhancement has four major benefits:

1. Apple IIc compatiblity:

Users can take advantage of software developed for the Apple IIc.

2. Product line consistency:

Apple II software can be used on both the Apple IIe and IIc.

3. The MouseText character set makes it easy for developers to create

software that uses pull-down menus, windows, and icons.

4. Easier programming for users:

a. Accepts BASIC commands in both upper- and lowercase

b. Additional instructions in the 65C02
c. Mini-assembler for machine language programs.

The Apple IIe Enhancement Kit, Order A2M2052, is available from Apple
Authorized Dealers for users who wish to upgrade their systems.

Article Change History:

17 Oct 1994 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1985-94, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL137.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 206 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL138.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIe to Epson LX-86: Cable Recommendations

Header: Apple IIe to Epson LX-86: Cable Recommendations

Article Created: 25 June 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

We are having trouble connecting an Apple IIe configured with an Apple

Parallel card to an Epson LX-86. Both the printer and Apple IIe test work
okay separately. The only questionable item seems to be the cable.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

We couldn't find anything on connecting the Epson LX-86 printer to an Apple

IIe. However, there is an article in the Tech Info Library that may help:
"Epson FX 80: Connecting it to an Apple II Plus or Apple IIe ".

We recommend that you contact Epson to verify that the connection is the
same. If the pinouts on the LX are different from the FX, get the pinouts
of the LX from Epson. You can find the pinouts of the Parallel card in the
"Peripheral Interface Guide" on page 2.4 with the DIP switch settings for
the Parallel card on that page.

To find the article, search the Tech Info Library under "Epson" and "FX
80".
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL138.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 207 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL139.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIe: Component diagnostics (1 of 2)

Header: Apple IIe: Component diagnostics (1 of 2)

Apple IIe computers have built-in diagnostics used during manufacturing. You
may invoke the diagnostics by holding down the solid-Apple key while powering
the system on, or by unplugging the keyboard and turning the Apple IIe on.

If you depress both the solid and open-Apple keys while powering the system
on, the same diagnostics will be run along with a high-pitched tone.

The tone or beep, included in a machine language loop that tests the
computers IOU and MMU, merely indicates that the speaker I/O location does
indeed work. Because the Apple II performs the IOU/MMU test a random number
of times, the beep sounds a random number of times. In addition, the
diagnostic routine varies between the Apple IIe, Apple IIe enhanced, and
Apple IIc.

The diagnostics test the motherboard's RAM as well as a number of unique LSI
components (MMU, IOU, and other ROMs) on the board. If the keyboard is
connected, the diagnostic will run through the series of individual tests
once. If the keyboard is not connected, the test runs continuously until the
system is powered off.

The ICs are tested in the following order: MMU, IOU, E8 ROM, E10 ROM, the
eight RAM chips. "Kernel OK" appears on the screen if everthing passes the
diagnostic.

Note: The diagnostic stops and hangs the processor with the first error
detected. There may be subsequent problems in the system; they will go
undetected until the first problem is fixed.

Here are some error messages and what they mean:

MMU FLAG E4:0 The Read Lang Card Bank0 switch didn't
initialize properly during reset.
1 The Read Lang Card RAM switch didn't
initialize properly during reset.
2 The RAMRD switch didn't initialize
properly during reset.
3 The RAMWRT switch didn't initialize
properly during reset.
4 The ALTZP switch didn't initialize
properly during reset.
5 The C3ROM switch didn't initialize
properly during reset.
6 The 80STORE switch didn't initialize
properly during reset.
7 The Read Lang Card Bank0 switch
won't change.
8 The Read Lang Card RAM switch
won't change.
9 The RAMRD switch won't change.
A The RAMWRT switch won't change.
B The ALTZP switch won't change.
C The C3ROM switch won't change.
D The 80STORE switch won't change.

If you receive an MMU FLAG E4 error number, suspect the MMU at location E4.

IOU FLAG E5:0 The 80VID switch didn't initialize

properly during reset.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 208 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

1 The ALTCHAR switch didn't initialize

properly during reset.
2 The TEXT switch didn't initialize
properly during reset.
3 The PAGE2 switch didn't initialize
properly during reset.
4 The MIXMODE switch didn't initialize
properly during reset.
5 The HIRES switch didn't initialize
properly during reset.
6 The 80VID switch won't change.
7 The ALTCHAR switch won't change.
8 The TEXT switch won't change.
9 The PAGE2 switch won't change.
A The MIXMODE switch won't change.
B The HIRES switch won't change.

If you receive an IOU FLAG E5 error, suspect the IOU at location E5.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL139.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 209 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL140.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIe: Description (Discontinued)

Header: Apple IIe: Description (Discontinued)

Article Created: 8 May 1992

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes the Apple IIe computer.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The Apple IIe personal computer comes with platinum finish to match
existing platinum Apple II peripherals.

Features
--------
- A built-in numeric keypad

- 128K of random access memory and 16K of read-only memory, including

Applesoft BASIC

- A 65C02 microprocessor

- Multipurpose memory-expansion and video slot and seven additional I/O

expansion slots

- Typewriter-style keyboard, with 128 ASCII codes

- Special-purpose keys, including two programmable keys

- High-fidelity speaker

- Multipurpose hand control inputs and outputs, and cassette input and
output.

The Extended 80-Column Text Card is installed in the Apple IIe's aux/video
slot.

Order Number
------------
Apple IIe 128K A2S2128
Copyright 1992-1994 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: specsht

### END OF FILE A2TIL140.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 210 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL141.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIe: Printing to Networked Printers

Header: Apple IIe: Printing to Networked Printers

This article last reviewed: 15 June 1990

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I have an Apple IIe network problem. I have a printer network only with no
file server. The school district wants to use the printer network with its
5.25-inch disk drives. There are about 50 labs with 20 to 25 Apple IIe
systems
in each lab.

I created a Chooser and Menu program "startup disk". I copied the necessary
files and ATINIT to let the startup disk auto-select the networked printers.
We found a public-domain menu program that requires only 1.5K. This lets the
Chooser be part of the menu and lets teachers and students (especially K-3)
select program without using pathnames.

I understand the AppleTalk network process and the need for the 3.5-inch
drive. However, why can't we also provide support for the Apple IIe and the
5.25-inch drives?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The only issue with using 5.25-inch drives for the described environment
concerns disk space. After adding ProDOS 8, Chooser.II (with associated
files), and ATINIT, the remaining space is all that is available for
applications and data files on the startup disk. This means that there is
approximately only 60K available for applications on a disk configured with
the
needed resources for network printing.

For a printer choice to be retained, you need run Chooser.II only once, as
long
as the selected printer maintains the same name and stays available on the
network. The selected printer is stored in the ATINIT file of the disk that
contains Chooser.II. On subsequent startups with that disk, the printer that
was previously selected becomes the default printer. Thus, Chooser.II is not
required to be run every session.

If only one 5.25-inch drive is available and if applications and/or data files
larger than 60K are to be used, it is possible to start up with the disk
described above, then switch (without restarting) to a second disk containing
the larger application or data file. We do not know of any menu programs that
can launch an application on a second disk, although such a program would not
difficult for an Apple II programmer to write.

However, since Chooser.II needs to run only once (unless something about the
printer changes), alternate methods of launching an application from the
second
disk can be considered. One example would be an Applesoft program that
launched
the menu program. By giving the Applesoft program a simple name (like MENU)
and placing it in the main directory, the students would be able to switch
disks, type RUN MENU, and then select the application desired.
Copyright 1990 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL141.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 211 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL142.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIe: Two Ways to Make it into AppleTalk Workstations

Header: Apple IIe: Two Ways to Make it into AppleTalk Workstations

This article last reviewed: 13 April 1989

There are two ways to make an Apple IIe with a 5.25-inch drive into an
AppleTalk workstation. The first is to start the Apple IIe systems over the
network. The second method is to use a 3.5-inch disk drive temporarily to
build a startup disk. (Workstation Card software is shipped only on a
3.5-inch disk.)

Option 1: Startup Across the Network

------------------------------------
With this option, there is no need for the 5.25-inch drives or the
Workstation software. Just prepare the AppleShare file server for use with
Apple II computers. With that done, users with Apple IIe/Workstation Card
systems need only power on with no disks in the drives. The computers
start across the network. Having the 5.25-inch drives lets users copy
files to their own disks to take home.

Option 2: Building a Local Startup Disk

---------------------------------------
This second option uses the 5.25-inch drive for local starting. The
Workstation Card software ships on a 3.5-inch disk, because of software
space requirements. However, you can build a workable 5.25-inch disk. This
requires use of a 3.5-inch drive while building the 5.25-inch disk. Once
the 5.25-inch disk is built, the 3.5-inch drive is not necessary for running
the labs. The following files are the absolute minimum for a network
start-up disk:

- PRODOS
- ATINIT
- SELECTOR.SYSTEM
- System.APPS
- LOGOFF
- LOGON
- BASIC

In this configuration, SELECTOR.SYSTEM displays several applications from

which to choose. However, only the "File Server Log On", "File Server Log
Off", and "ProDOS BASIC" items actually run programs. All other choices
display an error message. When acknowledged, the error message returns to
the SELECTOR. Unfortunately, the applications list in the SELECTOR window
cannot be changed.

With the above files on the 5.25-inch disk, the student may log on, log
off, and enter Applesoft BASIC. If leaving the student in BASIC is
satisfactory, this is all that is needed.

If Aristotle is used for a menu system, you will need a 3.5-inch drive to
transfer the Aristotle programs to the server. Once the Aristotle programs
have been moved to the server, saving a one-line Applesoft BASIC program to
the 5.25-inch will let the student access the Aristotle program. The
program should look something like:

10 PRINT CHR$(4);"-/PRODOS.SERVER/ARISTOTLE/MENU.D/DISPLAY"

Save this one-line program as "MENU". To use it, select "ProDOS BASIC" in
the SELECTOR window, and the Applesoft prompt appears. Then type "-MENU" to
get the Aristotle menu. Here is the structure of the Applesoft program:

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 212 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

PRINT CHR$(4); -- to let an immediate command be executed

"- -- run the program at the end of this pathname
/PRODOS.SERVER -- name of the AppleShare file server volume
/ARISTOLE -- name of the subdirectory containing Aristotle programs
/MENU.D -- name of the subdirectory containing Display
/DISPLAY" -- name of the Aristotle menu program to run
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL142.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 213 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL143.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIe: Video Signal "NTSC-Compatible", Not "NTSC-Compliant"

Header: Apple IIe: Video Signal "NTSC-Compatible", Not "NTSC-Compliant"

This article last reviewed: 8 May 1990

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I bought Sharp XA305 video recorders to record the video from my Apple IIe
systems: however, I am able to record only black and white pictures.

I tried the same setup with an older Sears model VCR and it worked perfectly.
I tried a new camcorder and got only black and white pictures again. Sharp
told me that this is because the Apple IIe has a substandard NTSC signal.

Can you help?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The composite video signal coming from the Apple IIe is not stated to be an
NTSC-compliant signal. The signal coming from the video-out port is only
considered NTSC-compatible video. "Compatible" means that generally the Apple
IIe video will work with an NTSC device, although it may not work in all
situations. Specifically, the Apple IIe video signal should work with all
NTSC
display devices.

When the Apple II was first designed, economy was of great importance. The
video circuitry was built with as few parts as possible. In the design
process, it was discovered that certain portions of the NTSC broadcast
specification could be omitted, yet still display a color image on a standard
television set. The one element that affects the described situation is color
burst. The Apple IIe does not contain the color burst element of the NTSC
video signal. By modulating other portions of the video signal, the Apple IIe
simulates this missing information and allows an image to be produced on a
television. To provide a consistent color video image for video tape, this
color burst needs to be present.

In summary, the Apple IIe composite video signal was designed for display
proposes, not for videotaping purposes. The Apple IIe composite signal is
close to the NTSC specification and allows the video signal to be displayed on
television screens. This, however, does not indicate that the signal can be
recorded. Since the signal is similar to the full NTSC specification, video
sometimes records properly on videotape with certain VCRs. In other
environments, the signal may not record at all. The capability to record a
monochrome image falls between these extremes.

To have a true NTSC signal designed for videotaping, the Video Overlay Card is
required.
Copyright 1990 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL143.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 214 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL144.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS (1MB, ROM 03): Specifications (Discontinued 12/92)

Header: Apple IIGS (1MB, ROM 03): Specifications (Discontinued 12/92)

Article Created: 31 May 1991

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes the Apple IIGS personal computer model with 1MB of
RAM and ROM version 03.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

OVERVIEW
--------
The Apple IIGS combines the best of the previous Apple II computers:
built-in accessory ports for easy addition of peripherals, as well as
versatile expansion slots for system customization. The Apple IIGS also
provides an easy-to-use interface similar to that of the Macintosh personal
computer. It also offers powerful features such as high-resolution color
graphics, 15-voice sound capability, and the advanced 65C816
microprocessor.

The Apple IIGS features GS/OS, an operating system developed exclusively

to take advantage of the computer's hardware features. GS/OS offers
high-performance capabilities such as rapid disk access and program
launching, while increasing the system's ease of use.

SYSTEM SOFTWARE
---------------
The Apple IIGS Personal computer features Version 5.0.4 of Apple IIGS
System Software, including the following:

* GS/OS Operating System. Exclusively created for the Apple IIGS

personal computer, GS/OS dramatically increases the speed of both disk
access and program launching. It also includes File System Translators
(FSTs) that allow applications to directly access files created using
other file systems, such as the ISO/High Sierra file system used by
CD-ROM devices.

* Finder. The Apple IIGS Finder has been revised extensively to take
full advantage of the GS/OS operation system. In addition to providing
support for disk partitions and other new features, the Apple IIGS
Finder is easier to use, faster, and more informative than the
earlier version. The Finder also supports the AppleShare File Server,
allowing you to share program files and data with other AppleShare
users.

* Advanced Disk Utility. With its graphics-based interface, the

Advanced Disk Utility makes it easy to initialize, name, erase,
and partition hard disks, as well as to work with both 5.25- and
3.5-inch floppy disks.

* Installer. This program allows you to update your startup disks with
the latest system software. It also lets you add special system files
to customize startup disks for use with your particular system
configuration.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
------------------------

Central Processing Unit (CPU)

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 215 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

-----------------------------
Microprocessor: 65C816
Clock speed: 2.8 or 1.02 megahertz; user- or software selectable
Address bus: 24 bits
Data bus: 8 bits
Address range: 16,777,216 bytes
16-bit registers: accumulator, two index registers, direct register, stack
pointer, and program counter
8-bit registers; data bank, status
Addressable memory: up to 8MB of ROM

Memory
------
1MB RAM, expandable to 8MB
256K ROM, expandable to 1MB (ROM revision 03)

Text Display Modes

------------------
40 columns by 24 lines
80 columns by 24 lines

Graphics Display Modes

----------------------
Super-high-resolution:
* 320 dots horizontally by 200 dots vertically, in up to 16 colors per
screen, from a palette of 4,069 colors
* 640 dots horizontally by 200 dots vertically, in 4 or more colors per
line and 128 colors per screen from a palette of 4,096 colors.

Double-high-resolution (560 dots horizontally by 192 dots vertically; 16

colors)

Double-low-resolution (80 dots horizontally by 48 dots vertically; 6

colors)

High-resolution (280 dots horizontally by 192 dots vertically; 6 colors)

Low-resolution (40 dots horizontally by 48 dots vertically; 16 colors)

Sound Capability
----------------
An Ensoniq 32-oscillator digital synthesizer chip with dedicated 64K RAM:
* produces up to 15 voices simultaneously.
* uses external speaker or headphones via audio output jack (volume is set
through the Control Panel).

Character Sets
--------------
32 letters (uppercase and lowercase), 32 special characters, 32 MouseText
characters, and 12 unique characters for each of these international
character sets: U.S., U.K., French, Danish, Spanish, Italian, German, and
Swedish.

Keyboard
--------
* Standard typewriter-style
* 80 keys, plus 14 key numeric keypad
* Two Apple Desktop Bus (ADB) connectors (one for attaching the keyboard to
the computer; one for daisy-chaining additional input devices)
* Keyboard layouts, selectable through the Control Panel:
QWERTY (Sholes)
Dvorak
Nine international (all those listed under Character Sets, plus French
Canadian)

Interfaces

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 216 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

----------
* One multipurpose RAM/ROM memory expansion slot
* Seven general-purpose input/output slots for peripherals control cards,
all fully buffered, with interrupt and DMA priority
* Serial ports: two 8-pin minicircular connectors (either can be used to
connect AppleTalk devices); utilize SCC communications chip
* Disk drive port: one 19-pin D-style connector (allows daisy-chain
connection of up to four Apple 3.5, Apple 5.25, or UniDisk disk drives)
* Video output
Analog RGB, via 15-pin D-style connector
Composite color, via RCA phone connector
* Apple Desktop Bus port; one 4-pin mini-circular connector on back of
computer
* Game I/O: 9-pin D-style connector for joysticks, graphics tablet, and
simila r devices
* Audio
RCA mini headphone/speaker output jack with programmable volume control
Input/Output connector on main logic board

Operating Systems Supported

---------------------------
* GS/OS
* ProDOS 16 and ProDOS 8
* Pascal
* DOS 3.3
* CP/M (with appropriate co-processor card)

Other Features
--------------
* Real-time clock (set through Control Panel)
* Battery backup for Control Panel settings

Electrical Requirements
-----------------------
* Line voltage: 107 to 132 volts AC; 50 to 60 hertz
* Power consumption:
Typical: 11 watts
Maximum: 60 watts
* Supply voltages:
+5 volts ( 3%)
+12 volts ( 6%)
-5 volts ( 10%)
-12 volts ( 10%)
* Maximum supply currents:
+5 volts: 2.5 amps
+12 volts: 1.5 amps
-5 volts: 250 milliamps
+12 volts: 250 milliamps

Environmental Requirements
--------------------------
* Operating temperature: 32 to 113 degrees F (0 to 45 degrees C)
* Maximum temperature on power supply case: 130 degrees F (55 degrees C)
* Relative humidity: 5% to 85%

Safety and EMI Qualifications

-----------------------------
* FCC Part 15 Class B Computing Devices
* CSA 22.2, NO. 154-1979
* UL 114 - Office Appliances and Business Equipment

Dimensions and Weight (main unit only)

--------------------------------------
* Height: 4.6 in. (11.7 cm)
* Width: 11.2 in (28.4 cm)
* Depth: 13.7 in. (34.8 cm)

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 217 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

* Weight: 8.72 lb. (3.96 kg)

Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL144.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 218 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL145.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS Adapter Cable: Pinouts

Header: Apple IIGS Adapter Cable: Pinouts

This article last reviewed: 19 November 1986

Mini-8 Function DB-25

1 HSKo --> DSR 6

2 HSKi <-- DTR 20

3 TXD- --> RXD 3

+--4 SGND --- SGND 7

|
| 5 RXD- <-- TXD 2
|
| 6 NC 8
|
| 7 GPi* <-- RTS 4--+
| |
+--8 NC CTS 5--+

- FGND NC FGND 1-----+

|
Shield o----------o Shield---+

Pins 4 and 8 are jumpered on the mini-8 side of the cable; pins 4 and 5 are
jumpered on the DB-25 side of the cable as are pins 1 and the shield.

To connect DB-25 cables of Apple II family peripheral cables to the serial

ports of the Apple IIGS, use the Apple IIGS Peripheral Adapter Cable. This
short cable's male mini-circular 8 connector plugs into the IIGS printer and
phone serial ports with the female mini-circular 8 connectors on the back of
the IIGS. The DB-25 connector at the other end of the adapter cable will take
the DB-25 connectors of the DB-25 cables used with many Apple peripherals.

Some modems and communications software may need a DCD signal and therefore
may require a modem eliminator cable in the cable configuration. The modem
eliminator cable flips pins 2 with 3 and 6 with 20 and passes GPi access
through to pin 8. GPi, for General Purpose input, is a high or low signal
read from and determined by the connecting device.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL145.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 219 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL146.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS and Integer BASIC

Header: Apple IIGS and Integer BASIC

Article Created: 18 April 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I am trying to run old Apple II programs written in Integer BASIC on an

Apple IIGS (original Woz version with 256K of RAM). I can list the programs
with the CAT command, but can't run them.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The Apple IIGS can run Integer BASIC programs, but only under DOS 3.3, not
under ProDOS. ProDOS is not compatible with Integer BASIC (though it is
compatible with Applesoft BASIC).

To run your programs, first start up from a known-good DOS 3.3 System
Master (or other DOS 3.3 startup disk that loads Integer BASIC in RAM).
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL146.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 220 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL147.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS Finder

Header: Apple IIGS Finder

This article last reviewed: 14 August 1987

Overview
--------
The Apple IIGS Finder is similar to the Macintosh Finder, but with enough
variation to make it a uniquely Apple II product. The Apple IIGS Finder
works only on an Apple IIGS with at least 512K of RAM.

Availability and Distribution

-----------------------------
The Apple IIGS Finder was announced August 11, 1987. At that time, it was
anticipated that it would be shipped on the Apple IIGS System Disk, revision
3.0, and be part of the Endless Disk Drive mailing the last week of August.
The dealers, in turn, are expected to pass out the new System Disk revision
freely to their customers. Technical Communications planned to send this disk
out to all our audience around the same time.

The Endless Disk Drive mailing will contain two System Disks, revision 2.0 and
3.0. This is bound to cause some confusion, but it is necessary. The Finder
application replaces the DeskTop program that has been on earlier versions of
the System Disk, including version 2.0. Since the Apple IIGS Finder requires a
512K configuration, we might leave some people out in the cold with their 256K
machines. This way, we are able to give them an up-to-date system disk with
the
DeskTop program on it, which will run on their machines.

This System Disk revision, including the Finder, will make its way into new
Apple IIGS boxes in the beginning of September. Because of current stock on
hand, these new systems including the Finder are not expected to hit dealer
shelves until late September to mid-October.

If current Apple IIGS owners would like the Apple IIGS System Disk manual that
is going to be bundled with the new Apple IIGS, along with the System Disk
3.0,
they may order it from their dealer.

Finder Notes and Tips

---------------------
After making a working copy of the original Apple IIGS System Disk 3.0, unlock
the working diskette. If you don't, the window positions and icon arrangements
won't be saved to disk.

This Finder allows the user to change and save the color of each individual
volume and file icon.

To reach online Help, pull down the Apple menu.

If a volume is brought online while there is another volume of the same

name already on the desktop, a dialog box appears, warning the user
that the volumes have the same name and that the operation is cancelled. Note,
however, that the disk is not ejected, though the volume has not appeared on
the desktop. It is best after receiving such a message to manually
eject the disk.

If the monochrome monitor is used, be sure to select the Monochrome setting in

the Apple IIGS control panel. This will use gray scaling to produce a better
overall image.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 221 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

When a 5 1/4" diskette is inserted into the drive, the Apple IIGS Finder
doesn't know it's there -- unless you 'tell' it. There are now 5 1/4" disk
drive icons on the desktop, directly below any other volumes that are online.
When a 5 1/4" disk is inserted, be sure to click on the respective icon so the
finder can recognize the disk.

The Put Back function in the Apple IIGS Finder is the same as the Macintosh
Finder's Put Away function. This menu choice lets you return files, that you
have thrown in the trash can or recently moved to the desktop, back to their
original position.

A major difference between the Apple IIGS Finder and the Macintosh Finder is
that the Apple IIGS version has a Preferences option in the Special menu. The
Preferences dialog gives you six check-box options, all defaulted to a
'checked' state. They are:

- Display help for dimmed commands

If this option is chosen, the user can select a grayed out menu item, and
get information on why that item isn't available.

- Double-check before removing files and folders

If this option is chosen, the Finder will not delete files or folders until
the user confirms, via a dialog box, that the files or folders should be
deleted.

- Color selected icon's background instead of its outline

This is personal preference, but the default (background color fill) is

easier to see than a colored outline.

- Save Finder information onto disk

If this option is chosen, the Finder creates a file called FINDER.DATA that
records the window position and size for all open windows. There is also a
file called FINDER.ROOT that remembers what windows were open on the desktop
when the disk was ejected. If you don't want these items recorded, deselect
this check box.

- Hide the Finder's data files

When a window is opened, the default is not to display the FINDER.DATA and
FINDER.ROOT files. If you want them displayed, deselect this check box.

- Do a smart block copy

When copying disks of the same size, the default mode for the Apple
IIGS Finder is to copy only those blocks that contain information. This
speeds up the process. If you want to copy all blocks, regardless
of whether they contain information, deselect this check box.
Copyright 1989-93, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL147.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 222 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL148.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIgs OS v 6.0: Aristotle Installation (2/95)

Header: Apple IIgs OS v 6.0: Aristotle Installation (2/95)

Article Created: 27 September 1993

Article Reviewed/Updated: 16 February 1995

TOPIC ---------------------------------------------------------

This document provides installation steps to install Aristotle on an Apple

IIgs using GS/OS v 6.0

DISCUSSION ----------------------------------------------------

Hardware Requirements
---------------------
You will need the following hardware:

* A Macintosh Plus, SE, or member of the Classic, LC, Macintosh II,

Centris or Quadra families of Macintosh computers operating in System 7
with a minimum of 4 Megabytes of random access memory (RAM) installed
for Apple IIe networks.

* A Macintosh computer with 5 MB of RAM installed is recommended for

Macintosh and Apple IIgs networks.

Installation
------------

1) Preparing the hard drive.

Insert the Disk Tools disk from the system software package in the
accessory kit, and turn the Macintosh on. Open the program "Apple HD SC
Setup" and click "Initialize." Answer any dialogues that ask if you
want to erase the hard drive. Once the hard drive has been successfully
initialized, click "Quit." When you see the Macintosh desktop, choose
"Restart" from the "Special" menu.

2) Installing System 7

Insert the Install disk, or the InstallMeFirst disk from the system
software package in the accessory kit. Follow any prompts. Be sure to
click "Customize" to install any necessary network card services
(Ethernet, Router, and so on).

3) Installing AppleShare 3

a) With the Macintosh turned on, insert the File Server Disk and
double-click on the Installer.

i) Click "Customize"

ii) Select File Server software, and Apple II Startup.

b) Check Computer's clock and set time in the "General Controls"

control panel

c) Check Network Connections

i) Choose "Chooser" from the Apple menu and make sure AppleTalk is
active

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 223 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

ii) Choose "Control Panels" from the Apple Menu and open the Network
control panel to verify correct services (Ethernet, or
LocalTalk) are selected.

4) Setting Up File Service

a) Open the System Folder (not the folder titled "system") and locate
the AppleShare Admin application. Select its icon by clicking on it
once and choose "Make Alias" from the "File" menu. Put the alias in
the Apple Menu Items folder.

b) Open the AppleShare Admin Application

c) Name the File Server (enter Admin. key and click OK)

i) This is the name users will see in the Chooser

ii) Admin. Key is a password you enter whenever entering the Admin.
Application. Password can be up to 8 characters long.

d) Enter an Administrator's name and Password

i) Enter any name -- Default is "Administrator"

ii) Up to 8 characters for password -- For Administrator's personal

account on the server.

e) Check options needed as server Administrator

i) You will probably assign yourself all available options. Be sure

to click "save."

5) Creating Groups

For Aristotle, there must be a group named EXACTLY "Student" and one
named EXACTLY "Teacher" not "STUDENTS" and not "TEACHERS."

6) Creating Users

Assign each user to Student or Teacher as a primary group.

Only user's who's primary group is Teacher or student can log onto
Aristotle

7) Allowing Guest Access

Double Click on the <any user? option in User List

Default is turned off. Click Login Enabled.

8) Enable Apple II Startup

Select "Enable Apple II Startup" from the Server Preferences in Server

menu of the Admin. Program.

This will create a folder named "Users" on the root level of the server
volume.

9) Selecting Volumes to Share

a) In the Administrator Application, choose "Access info" from the

"Privileges" menu.

b) Select the item to be shared and click "share." The item will
appeared in the shared items box on the right side of the dialog
box.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 224 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

c) Set privileges for the administrator. Mark check boxes: See

folders, See files, Make changes.

d) Set everyone in users and groups to 'See folders'

e) Click the save button, a dialog box will appear. Select explicit.

Note: If you are going to provide Apple II Network Startup, the entire
startup hard disk must be shared.

10) Open the AppleShare Server Application

11) Creating AppleShare Workstation Disk for the IIgs on 3.5 disk.

a) Start up with the Apple IIgs GSOS 6.0 System Disk

b) Insert a blank 800 K disk in the second 3.5-inch drive

c) Format the blank disk and name it "Workstation"

d) Remove the blank disk and insert GSOS v 6.0 Install Disk.

e) Open the Installer program on the Install Disk.

f) Click "Customize" when the Installer program appears.

g) Eject the Install disk and insert the Workstation disk.

h) Click "Disk" until you see "Workstation"

i) Select "Network: AppleShare 3.5 Disk" and click "install."

j) Swap disks until the installation is complete

k) Set the Apple IIgs control panel (CMD-CTR-ESC).

Note: It is recommend that you use two 3.5-inch drives.

Note: 01 and 03 ROM revision Setups.

IIgs ROM 01 - Slot 1=your card

Slot 7=AppleTalk

IIgs ROM 03 - Slot 1=AppleTalk

Slot 7=AppleTalk

12) Restart the IIgs with the Workstation disk. (CTR-Reset, at prompt type
PR#5).

13) Connecting to the server from the IIgs

a) When Launcher window appears, click "Cancel"

b) Choose "Control Panel" from the Apple Menu

c) Select the AppleShare Icon on the left and the name of the server
on the right.

d) Click "OK"

e) Type in the name and password of the Administrator and click "OK"

f) Select the name of the volume that will be used for the Apple II
software.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 225 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

g) Click "OK" and close the Control Panel.

14) Installing GSOS system software

a) Choose "Launch" from the "File" menu.

b) When the Launcher window appears, insert the Install disk.

c) Click "Disk" until Install is the Active disk.

d) Select Installer and click "Open."

e) Click "Customize" when the Installer program appears.

f) Click "Disk" until the name of the Server volume appears.

g) Choose the "Network: Server Startup" and "Network: Server Quick

Logoff". (Open Apple to select multiple items.)

h) Click "Install" and "Perform this Update"

15) Restarting the IIgs from the network.

a) Open the AppleShare Admin. program from the Macintosh File Server

b) Select a user from the User list(click one time, do not open)

c) Choose "Set startup info" from the "Startup" menu

d) Click "Set Startup App"

e) Click "Desktop" then double-click the name of hard drive and the
open the System folder.

f) Select the file called "Setstart.Sys16"

g) Close the Set Startup window and click "OK"

h) Choose "Verify" from the "Startup" menu.

i) Click "OK"

j) Go to the IIgs and change hardware control panel(CMD-CTR-ESC) set

the RAM DISK to a minimum of 256k.

k) Restart the IIgs.

l) Log in as Administrator.

** Note: Repeat steps b-i for every user who will log in from an Apple
IIgs.

16) Installing Aristotle

a) Insert the Aristotle Menu Software disk in the IIgs floppy drive.

b) Drag the Aristotle folder to the server volume icon on the desktop.

This will put the folder on the root level of the hard disk. This
is recommended to minimize problems with access Privileges of
enclosing folder.

c) Eject the Aristotle Menu Software Disk.

d) Insert the GSOS Install Disk.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 226 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

e) Open the Installer Program.

f) Click "Customize" from the Installer program window.

g) Click "Disk" until the name of the server volume appears.

h) Choose the Aristotle Update script on the Left.

i) Open the Aristotle folder on the server volume.

j) Open the Menu.D. folder within that Aristotle folder.

k) Click "Install" and quit the Installer.

17) Setting Privileges on the File Server

a) For the folder named "System", NOT the Macintosh System folder.

Verify that Owner, Group and Everyone can See Folder and See Files
on the Folder named System. Click "Save"

b) For the "Users" Folder, verify Owner and Group and Everyone can See
Folders. DO NOT change all enclosed folders. Click "Save"

c) The "users" folder's group should be Teacher

d) For the Aristotle folder, verify that Owner, Group, and Everyone
can See Folders and See Files. Owner and Group should be able make
changes.

e) The Aristotle folder's group should be Teacher. Change all enclosed

folders. Click "Save"

18) Setting up the Startup application for each user

a) A Student User should be set to Menu.D as Startup

b) A Teacher User should be set to Menu.M as startup.

c) Verify each group from the Startup Menu and select Verify startup.

Adding New Users

----------------
After installing Aristotle, new users that have been added to the Users and
Groups datafile will not appear in the User Menu of the Aristotle Menu
Management Program.

They will appear after performing these steps:

1) Select the name of user.

2) Select "Verify Apple II startup Information" from the "Startup" menu in

the Administrator Program.

3) With Verification complete, open the Users Window in Aristotle (If

already open, close and open again.).

If these three steps do not work, check privileges and make sure the user has
Teacher or Student assigned as a primary Group.

Article Change History:

16 Feb 1995 - Added heading for installation steps section.
03 Feb 1995 - Made corrections to AppleTalk references.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 227 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

13 Jan 1995 - Made corrections to select file names appearing in article.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1993-95, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL148.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 228 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL149.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS Super-High-Res Graphics: Access from BASIC

Header: Apple IIGS Super-High-Res Graphics: Access from BASIC

This article last reviewed: 25 October 1990

TOPIC ---------------------------------------------

Are there any Applesoft BASIC commands to invoke super-high-resolution

graphics
on an Apple IIGS?

DISCUSSION ---------------------------------------------

The super-high-resolution graphics of the Apple IIGS are not directly

available from Applesoft. Applesoft BASIC supports only the original Apple
II low-resolution graphics (40x48 or 40x40 with 4 lines of text) and
high-resolution graphics (280x192 or 280x160 with 4 lines of text).

One solution is "Iconix IIGS" from So What Software. This is a set of

machine language subroutines accessible from Applesoft. They provide an
interface to the super-high-resolution graphics mode of the Apple IIGS.

Other BASIC solutions for super-high-resolution graphics mode include

Complete BASIC Compiler from Complete Technologies, AC/BASIC from Absoft
Corporation, and Micol Advanced BASIC from Micol Systems.

The Complete BASIC Compiler is similar to Apple's GSBASIC (available from

APDA) with the addition of graphics support. AC/BASIC is compatible with
Microsoft's QuickBASIC language and provides graphics support similar to
what is found in QuickBASIC for the Macintosh. Micol Advanced BASIC is
modeled after Applesoft. Anyone familiar with Applesoft should be
comfortable with Advanced BASIC.

GSBASIC from APDA provides calls to QuickDraw II. However, GSBASIC does
not directly support graphics commands within the BASIC language syntax.

For more details, search the Tech Info Library under "So What Software",
"Complete Technologies", "Absoft Corp", and "Micol Systems".
Copyright 1989, 1990 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL149.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 229 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL150.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS System 5.0: Setting Up an AppleShare Network (7/91)

Header: Apple IIGS System 5.0: Setting Up an AppleShare Network (7/91)

Article Created: 14 August 1990

Article Last Reviewed and Updated: 23 April 1991

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I have been having problems adding Apple IIGS systems to an AppleShare

network under Apple IIGS System Software Update Version 5.0. Can you give me
some help?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The following information applies to Apple IIGS System Software Version 5.0
and later.

Because of recent rapid development of the Apple IIGS operating system,

setting up an AppleShare network with IIGS systems can be confusing. For
example, the Apple II Setup disk included with AppleShare Version 2.0.1, a
Macintosh disk designed to install Apple II features onto the Macintosh file
server, is now obsolete. You should use the Apple II Setup disk that comes
with the Apple IIGS System Software Update Version 5.0 and later. If you do
the AppleShare installation with the obsolete Apple II Setup disk from
AppleShare Version 2.0.1, you get the following error message when you try to
start an Apple IIGS over the network:

Cannot load (servername) /SYSTEM/SYSTEM.SETUP/CDev.Init.

To add IIGS systems to an AppleShare network properly under Version 5.0, you
must buy the Apple IIGS System Software Update Version 5.0 or later. The
update package includes the Apple II Setup disk and the manual "AppleTalk
Network User's Guide for the Apple IIGS."

Setting up AppleShare on the Macintosh Server

---------------------------------------------
Follow the steps below to set up AppleShare, so that IIGS systems start over
the network.

1) Start up with the System Tools disk and run Apple HD SC Setup.

2) Initialize the server hard disk.

3) Name the hard disk using an Apple II convention; for example, "A2."
(The shorter the name, the better.)

4) Install the Macintosh System Software on the server, making sure to

use the latest version possible for your Macintosh computer.

5) Restart with the AppleShare Version 2.0.1 Server Installer disk.

Install "AppleShare 2.0.1 Server" onto the server volume. Be sure you
don't click any of the Macintosh-family installation scripts, because
they will install old system software, overwriting the system software
you just installed.

6) Restart from the AppleShare Server Admin disk and launch the Server
Admin application.

7) Enter the administrator's key and password, name your server, and
create the users and groups you need.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 230 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8) Choose Volume List from the Volumes menu and double-click the
server volume. A dialog box allows you to set access privileges. Click
all boxes and save enclosed folders.

9) Quit the Server Admin application and restart the Macintosh server
from the Apple II Admin disk that came with the Apple IIGS System
Software Update Version 5.0.

10) Launch the Installer program on the Apple II Admin disk, and
install "Apple II Info" on the server volume; then quit.

11) Restart from the Server Admin disk and launch the Server Admin
application.

12) From the Server menu, choose Server Info and click the Apple II
feature. Then, click Save.

13) Choose Volume List from the Volumes menu and double-click the
server volume. A dialog box allows you to set access privileges.
Click all boxes and save enclosed folders.

14) Quit the Server Admin application and restart the server. Keep
the server on-line while you perform the steps for the Apple IIGS.

Setting up AppleShare on the Apple IIGS

---------------------------------------
Follow the steps below to set up AppleShare on the IIGS systems:

1) Start up with the System.Disk that came with the Apple IIGS System
Software Update Version 5.0, and format a blank 3.5-inch disk.

2) Launch the System 5.0 Installer on the System.Tools disk.

3) In the Installer, select "AppleShare on 3.5 Disk" and install it on

the formatted disk. (You'll have to do some disk swapping.)

4) Shut down the IIGS and restart from the AppleShare 3.5 disk you
just created.

5) Enter the administrator's name (usually "Administrator") and

password. On the Graphic Control Panel under the Apple menu, click the
AppleShare icon and mount the server volume.

6) Launch the Installer program on the IIGS System.Tools disk.

7) Using the Command key (Open Apple), select the following scripts: * Latest Sys.
Files (No Finder)
* Server Network Startup
* Server Quick Logoff
* Optional scripts (Install the scripts that the IIGS systems
starting up over the network will require; for example, the
SCSI driver, 5.25 driver, LaserWriter printer, or AppleTalk
printer.)

8) Install the selected scripts on the server volume. The system

installs over the network, and the double-arrow icon at the top left of
your screen flashes. You may have to do some disk swapping, and the
installation may take a fair amount of time.

9) Once the installation is complete, quit and shut off the IIGS.

10) Shut down the file server and restart it from the Server Admin
disk.

11) Launch the Server Admin application.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 231 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

12) Select all users, or all Apple IIGS users who you want to be able
to start up over the network.

13) Under the Apple II menu, choose Set Startup, and designate
"Finder" as the startup application. (It will be located at
/servername/System/Finder.)

14) When you're prompted for a response, allow the system to set the
prefix automatically.

15) If the users you selected will be using a network printer, select
Set Printer.

16) Choose Volume List from the Volumes menu and double-click the
server volume. A dialog box allows you to set access privileges.
Click all boxes and save enclosed folders.

17) Quit the Server Admin program and restart the file server.

18) On the IIGS units that you want to start up over the network,
reset the startup slot from the Control Panel. Systems with ROM 01
should have the printer port set to "Your Card," Slot 7 set to
"Built-in AppleTalk," and the startup slot set to "7." Systems with
ROM 03 should have the printer port set to "Built-in AppleTalk," Slot 7
set to "Built-in AppleTalk," and the startup slot set to "AppleTalk."

(Note: If you have the newer model Apple IIGS with 1MB of RAM on the
logic board, set Slot 7 to AppleTalk and EITHER slot 1 or slot 2 to
AppleTalk.)

19) Restart the Apple IIGS. It now boots over the network and prompts
you to enter a user name and password. Once you enter the name and
password, the "progress thermometer" appears, and then you see the
Apple IIGS System 5.0 desktop with the server volume icon at the top
right.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1990, 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL150.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 232 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL151.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS System Disk 5.0: Overview

Header: Apple IIGS System Disk 5.0: Overview

This article last reviewed: 25 September 1989

Apple IIGS System Disk 5.0 is the new release of system software for the
Apple IIGS computer. The main features include:

- Support for AppleShare File Server

- Speed, speed, and more speed
- A Control Panel and Control Panel devices (CDEVs)
- Multiple simultaneous installations with the Installer
- 5.25-inch Disk Driver is installed
- Increased ToolBox support

Packaging
---------
The AppleTalk Network User's Guide and AppleShare Apple II Setup Disk are
included only in the System Software 5.0 update box. It will not ship with
the
Apple IIGS hardware system.

The Apple IIGS manual is being rewritten to include the information in the
AppleTalk Network User's Guide.

System Requirements
-------------------
Apple IIGS System Disk 5.0 requires an Apple IIGS with a least 768K of memory
when operating on a network. As a stand-alone system the 5.0 System Disk
requires only 512K.

AppleShare and Network Support

------------------------------
One of the main new features of Apple IIGS System Software 5.0 is GS/OS
support
for AppleShare File Server volumes. To use the Apple IIGS with an AppleShare
File Server, you need to use version 2.0 or later of the AppleShare File
Server
software.

There are a number of additions to GS/OS to support AppleShare. These

include:
- Booting GS/OS over the network
- Creation of a 3.5-inch Server Startup Disk
- An AppleShare FST (File System Translator) for GS/OS
- A Control Panel File Server Chooser
- Ability to auto-logon to a server
- Server Logoff
@L - Finder support of AppleShare

Network Booting
---------------
To use the Apple IIGS with an AppleShare File Server, you need to use version
2.0 or later of the AppleShare File Server software. If you have an existing
AppleShare File Server you need to order:

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 233 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Apple IIGS System Software version 5.0

This package includes a new "Apple II Setup Disk". This disk is a Macintosh
disk that uses the Macintosh Installer to update the AppleShare File Server
2.0.1 server boot blocks to GS/OS. The boot blocks are sent to the workstation
when the user requests network booting from the Apple IIGS. The disk is found
in the back of the AppleTalk Network User's Guide that ships inside the
stand-alone package. After the Macintosh has been updated, you can use the
Apple IIGS Installer (located on the SYSTEM.TOOLS disk) to update the SYSTEM
folder on the server hard drive.

All servers on the network should be updated to the new boot blocks at the
same time. You should not have boot blocks from Apple IIGS Workstation
Software and System Disk 5.0 on the same network. AppleShare File Server will
start shipping with the new Apple II Setup Disk mid-summer 1989.

Local Booting
-------------
Using a 3.5-inch disk can speed up server boot times. There are two methods of
gaining access to an AppleShare File Server from a 3.5-inch disk:
- Local Network Startup
- AppleShare on 3.5-inch Disk

The first method performs the same function as network booting, and the second
boots into the Finder.

Local Network Startup saves time and network traffic when booting an entire
class of computers at the same time. The Installer update to allow faster
network booting is called "Local Network Startup".

The Installer update that lets you boot into the Finder is called "AppleShare
on 3.5 Disk". This type of disk is called a "workstation startup disk".

ExpressLoad
-----------
ExpressLoad is new with Apple IIGS System Software 5.0 and causes GS/OS to
load the system and applications faster. ExpressLoad enhances the standard
Apple IIGS System Loader and lets large applications load in a shorter time.

Developers can turn applications into ExpressLoad format using the APW tool
called Express or the MPW IIGS tool called ExpressIIGS. A load file must
contain resources and code segments in a specific order to be compatible with
ExpressLoad. ExpressLoad checks files first to see if they are in the proper
format. If the file is not in ExpressLoad format, the application is launched
by the normal Apple IIGS system loader.

To save memory, ExpressLoad is loaded only on systems with more than 512K of
memory. Before loading ExpressLoad, the system checks to see if there is
more than 512K of memory. It will not ExpressLoad into a 512K system.

ToolBox
-------
A number of the toolbox routines have been modified to increase speed. They
include "special case" code that causes QuickDraw and other routines to
operate
faster, based on the parameters that were passed to QuickDraw. Programmers do
not have to modify their code to support any of these "special case" routines.

Control Panel and CDEVs

-----------------------
The Apple IIGS System Disk 5.0 includes the Graphics Control Panel, which is
similar to the Macintosh Control Panel and Chooser. The Graphics Control

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 234 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Panel is implemented as an NDA (New Desk Accessory). This type of DA is

available only to Apple IIGS desktop applications.

The Graphics Control Panel is an expanded facility for controlling any number
of system parameters. This functionality lets Apple and third-party developers
add Control Panel "devices" (CDEVs). The Graphics Control Panel sets the same
information as the existing Apple IIGS Control Panel (now called the Text
Control Panel) which is accessed by using the Command-Control-Escape keys.
Icons for all CDEVs look the same, letting you identify a CDEV quickly and
easily.

CDEVs are located inside the SYSTEM folder, just as fonts and desk
accessories:

/disk/SYSTEM/CDEV

Desk Accessories
----------------
Like the current Apple IIGS System Disk, Apple IIGS System Software 5.0
supports New Desk Accessories (NDAs). The system can now support 128 NDAs,
thanks to scrolling menus. Desk Accessories are in the following folder:

/disk/SYSTEM/DESK.ACCS

SCSI Manager
------------
The SCSI manager has been modified to provide a four-fold speed increase and
provide additional SCSI support. The new driver is faster because it is
loaded into memory and does not use the firmware on the card. When the
driver was written, a number of new features were added:

- Full SCSI Device Support

- 7 Physical Devices
- 32 Volumes per Drive
- Full SCSI Command Support
- Access to Non-ProDOS Partitions
- Support for Magneto-Optic Drives (with a driver)

Related Articles
----------------
- Apple IIGS System Disk 5.0: ToolBox Changes
- Apple IIGS System Disk 5.0: Changes to BASIC.SYSTEM
- Apple IIGS System Disk 5.0: Disk II/Apple 5.25-inch Driver
- Apple IIGS System Disk 5.0: Advanced Disk Utility and SCSI Manager
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL151.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 235 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL152.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS System Disk 5.0: ToolBox Changes

Header: Apple IIGS System Disk 5.0: ToolBox Changes

This article last reviewed: 05 May 1989

This article summarizes changes and additions to the Apple IIGS ToolBox
that result from Apple IIGS System Disk 5.0.

The Toolbox on the Apple IIGS has been modified to support a number of new
features that are available to developers. (If these new features are used
in a program, the user must have Apple IIGS System Software 5.0 for the
software to function correctly.)

The Resource Manager and Text Edit are new for System Disk 5.0.

Additional documentation is available from APDA.

Control Manager
---------------
The Control Manager has been modified to provide support for more standard
control types, including:
- StatText Control -- Display text messages in a rectangle.
- PictureControl -- Display a picture in a rectangle.
- IconButtonControl -- Icon drawn in a rectangle.
- LineEditControl -- Line Edit item used in List Manager.
- TextEditControl -- Works with new TextEdit Tool.
- PopUpControl -- Provide multiple selection buttons within scrolling lists.
- ListControl -- You can now use the control manager to manipulate items in
the List Manager.

Desk Manager
------------
The classic desk accessory (CDA) menu now supports scrolling when more than
thirteen CDAs are installed. CDAs are accessed by pressing COMMAND-CONTROL-ESC
on the keyboard. Because of this change, selections no longer wrap around the
screen. The number of CDAs is limited by disk space and boot time to install
the files. You may have problems if you install more than 128 CDAs.

Event Manager
-------------
The Journaling feature is changed, to better support the ReadMouse function.

Font Manager
------------
A problem was fixed in ChooseFont, which caused the system to hang if any
update events were pending when the call was made.

Line Edit
---------
Line Edit now supports a password field, in which the characters typed by
the user appear on the screen as asterisks (*).

List Manager
------------
The List Manager has been changed to make it easier for programmers to use,

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 236 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

and to support new controls in the Control Manager.

Memory Manager
--------------
The Memory Manager has been modified to improve system performance.

Menu Manager
------------
The Menu Manager now supports a number of new features, including:
- Outline and Shadow text styles in a menu
- scrolling menus
- pop-up menus

Note Sequencer
--------------
The Note Sequencer has been modified to make it easier for developers to
create and use sequences in programs.

Print Manager
-------------
The PrChoosePrinter call has been removed. Users should use the Control
Panel to select printers. If an application makes this call, a dialog appears
on the screen telling the user to use the Control Panel to select a printer.
When printing in draft mode to a text printer, the driver translates
QuickDraw II commands into command sequences for the printer.

QuickDraw II
------------
QuickDraw II has been modified to function faster.

Resource Manager
----------------
The Resource Manager is an INIT file that is loaded when the Apple IIGS is
started, and stays loaded when the system is running. The Resource Manager
maintains the resource fork of a file. This is similar to the resource fork
in the Macintosh. This is the first time the a resource fork has existed in
the Apple II world. The format of the data is defined by the application.
Resources are referred to by a resource type and resource ID number.

Sound Tools
-----------
Four new calls have been added to the sound tools, allowing greater
flexibility when playing sounds.

Standard File
-------------
Standard File has been modified to fully support GS/OS path names. The
following are GS/OS values, not the ProDOS FST values. These include:
- 13,107 files in a folder
- 254 characters in a file name (using new calls)
- 508 characters in a path name
- The List Manager is being used
- Scan of AppleShare File Server volume every 8 seconds
- Checks for write-protected volumes and folders
- Displays the lock icon next to current path name
- Calls to support multi-selection calls
- Hook so applications can draw custom list items

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 237 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Text Edit
---------
This is a new feature of Apple IIGS System Software 5.0. It provides standard
text editing for any application. It can be used as a complete text editor or
as the core of a simple word processor. It is similar to Text Edit calls on
the Macintosh. The following features are included in GS TextEdit:
- Edit any amount of text that fits in memory (not 32K as in the Macintosh)
- Mouse activity for text selection (single, double, triple clicking for text,
words, lines)
- Auto word wrap
- Cut, Copy, and Paste
- Some support of control keys for text manipulation
- Stylistic variations in the text (fonts, sizes, style, color).
- Text can contain a "ruler" to format the text
- Four types of justification
- Three kinds of Tab support
- Programmer can limit the amount of information that can be entered
- Vertical scrolling in a window
- Automatic drag selection
- It is FAST

Window Manager
--------------
Numerous changes speed things up and support the Resource Manager.

Related Articles
----------------
- Apple IIGS System Disk 5.0: Overview
- Apple IIGS System Disk 5.0: Changes to BASIC.SYSTEM
- Apple IIGS System Disk 5.0: Disk II/Apple 5.25-inch Driver
- Apple IIGS System Disk 5.0: Advanced Disk Utility and SCSI Manager
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL152.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 238 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL153.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS Workstation Software: New Product Information

Header: Apple IIGS Workstation Software: New Product Information

This article last reviewed: 1 March 1988

Overview
--------
Apple IIGS Workstation Software lets you connect an Apple IIGS to a
LocalTalk network. This software performs the same function as the Apple II
Workstation Card for the Apple IIe. The software makes it possible to start
up from an AppleShare File Server 2.0 and run an Apple IIGS without disk
drives attached.

The only additional hardware needed is an Apple IIGS Memory Expansion Card
containing at least 512K of RAM, and a LocalTalk System Connector Kit.

Apple IIGS Setup

----------------
Before you can use the Apple IIGS on the AppleTalk Network System, you must
configure the system correctly.

From the Control Panel (accessed via Open Apple-Control-Esc):

1. Be sure the Maximum RAM Disk Size is at least 256K less than the Largest
Selectable. For example, if the Largest Selectable is 1024K, then set the
Maximum RAM Disk Size to 768K or less. The default value of 0K is best if
you plan to run any Apple IIGS specific programs.

_________________________________________
| Control Panel |
| RAM Disk |
| |
| X Minimum RAM Disk Size: 0K |
| X Maximum RAM Disk Size: 0K |
| -Largest Selectable 1024K- |
| |
| -RAM Status- |
| RAM Disk Size: 0K |
| Total Ram in Use: 84K |
| Total Free RAM: 1195K |
| |
|_________________________________________|

(The numbers following Total RAM in Use and Total Free RAM will vary,
depending on phase of startup process.)

2. Set Slot 1 or Slot 2 to "Your Card" (Slot 1 is recommended).

- If slot 1 = "Your Card", plug LocalTalk connector into the Printer

Port.

- If slot 2 = "Your Card", plug LocalTalk connector into the Modem Port.

3. Set Slot 7 to "Built In AppleTalk"

4. Set Startup to Slot 7

_________________________________________

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 239 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

| Control Panel |
| Slots |
| |
| Slot 1: Your Card |
| X Slot 2: Modem Port |
| X Slot 3: Built-in Text Display |
| X Slot 4: Mouse Port |
| X Slot 5: Smart Port |
| X Slot 6: Disk Port |
| Slot 7: Built-in AppleTalk |
| |
| Startup Slot: 7 |
|_________________________________________|

5. Exit the Control Panel. If you had to change the RAM Disk settings, you
must POWER DOWN (with the power switch). This will reset the RAM Disk to
the setting you have selected. It does not change RAM disk values until
power down. This way, you can restart without loss of RAM Disk contents.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL153.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 240 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL154.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: 5.25" System Utilities

Header: Apple IIGS: 5.25" System Utilities

To organize a user's disks, the Apple IIGS System Utilities program formats
and copies disks and can copy, rename, and delete files, performing most of
these functions on 4 of the Apple II operating systems: DOS 3.3, ProDOS,
Pascal, and CP/M. Distributed on a 3 1/2" disk, the program works only on the
Apple IIGS.

You can create a 5 1/4" floppy disk version of the program using the System
Utilities in the following steps:

1. Format a 5 1/4" disk

2. Copy these 5 files from System Utilities to the 5 1/4" disk:

a. P8
-- This is ProDOS - found in the SYSTEM sub-directory.
b. SYSUTIL.SYSTEM *
c. GSSU0 *
d. GSSU1 *
e. GSSUE1 *

* These 4 files comprise the System Utilities program, and can be

found in the SYS.UTILS sub-directory. They must be kept in the
same directory.

3. Rename the file 'P8' to 'PRODOS'

System Utilities may now be booted from the floppy disk. The files take up
around 180 blocks and leave about 100 blocks for extra file storage.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL154.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 241 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL155.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIgs: Cable Compatibility (10/94)

Header: Apple IIgs: Cable Compatibility (10/94)

Article Created: 27 September 1994

Article Reviewed/Updated: 27 October 1994

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article provides cable compatibility information for Apple computer

systems and a variety of Apple peripherals.

The left column lists the peripherals, the right column lists the cable
required to connect one of the following computers to it; Apple IIgs, or the
Apple IIgs upgrade.

Part numbers which begin with a letter are the finished goods part number,
the seven digit numbers are the service part numbers.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Peripheral Cable part number

---------- -----------------
AppleFax Modem N/A

Apple Personal Modem M0197/590-0552 (smoke)

Apple Data Modem 2400

Apple Modem 300 A2C0354/590-0121% & 590-0550

Apple Modem 1200 or 590-0197 & 590-0553

Apple ImageWriter II or II/L M0197/590-0552 (smoke), LocalTalk

Apple ImageWriter LQ optional

Apple ImageWriter Printer M0150/590-0169 & 590-0553

Apple ImageWriter 15" or
A2C0352*/590-0037 & A9M0333/590-
0550

LaserWriter, Plus, IInt, IIntx, IIf, IIg LocalTalk

LaserWriter Pro 600/630/810
Personal LaserWriter NT, NTR

Personal LaserWriter LS *
StyleWriter & StyleWriter II
Color StyleWriter/Color StyleWriter Pro

Apple LaserWriter IIsc N/A

Personal LaserWriter SC

AppleCD SC M0206/658-8031*
Apple Hard Disk 20/40/80

Apple Tape Backup 40SC N/A

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 242 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Apple Scanner
Apple Color OneScanner
Apple Color Printer

LEGEND
* Requries M3503LL/B/658-8032 Cable Terminator
* The Apple IIgs with GS/OS ver. 6.0 will support the original
StyleWriter only.

A9M0320 or A3M0025 w/590-0037 require Super Serial Card BUT A9M0302 or

A3M0025 w/590-0037 & 590-0550 doesn't (Buses Built In).

When using an ImageWriter II/LQ with the Apple IIe and cable part number 590-
0555, the jumper on the Super Serial Card must be on "Modem".

Article Change History:

27 Oct 1994 - Indicated that StyleWriter is supported by GS/OS ver. 6.0.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1994, Apple Computer, Inc
Keywords: ktable,cabinfo,review

### END OF FILE A2TIL155.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 243 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL156.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: Cabling Configurations

Header: Apple IIGS: Cabling Configurations

This article last reviewed: 22 September 1986

The Apple IIGS is very compatible with Apple's existing cable product line.
Below you will find the possible configurations for the various Circular 8
cables.

Apple System Peripheral - 8 Cable

Product M0187 / Part 590-0340-A
Circular 8 to Circular 8

Can be used as connecting cable for the Apple IIGS to:

- ImageWriter //
- Apple Personal Modem
- Macintosh Plus (data transfe)
- Apple IIGS (data transfer)

Macintosh Peripheral - 8 Cable

Product M0185 / Part 590-0322-B
Circular 8 to DB9

Can be used as connecting cable for the Apple IIGS to:

- Macintosh 128K and 512K (data transfer)

In ny other required combination, use the Apple IIGS Adapter Cable

(Circular 8 to DB25 adapter) and the appropriate DB-25 Apple II type
cable used on the Super Serial Card.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL156.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 244 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL157.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: Connecting Disk Drives

Header: Apple IIGS: Connecting Disk Drives

This article last reviewed: 22 September 1986

The Apple IIGS is capable of using all drives available for the Apple IIe, as
well as drives built for the Apple IIGS, including the Disk II, Duodisk,
Unidisk, Unidisk 3.5, Profile, Apple 3.5 Drive, Apple 5.25 Drive, and SCSI-20.
Some of these drives may be plugged directly into the SmartPort on the back of
the IIGS, while others require an interface card in one of the expansion I/O
slots.

The following drives may be plugged into the SmartPort's DB-19 connector:
-- one Duodisk
-- two Unidisk 5.25 drives
-- two Unidisk 3.5 drives
-- two Apple 5.25 drives
-- two Apple 3.5 drives

Only under Prodos 16 may a combination of up to six drives be daisy-chained to

the SmartPort. The chain MUST occur in the order given below and may include
up to two (excepting the DuoDisk) in each of the following three categories:

-- nearest to IIGS (maximum of two):

1. Apple 3.5 Drives
2. Unidisk 3.5 drives

-- farthest from IIGS (maximum of two):

3. 5.25 disk drives: Disk II's, Unidisk 5.25 drives, Apple 5.25 drives
or ONE Duodisk drive

Under Prodos 8 (also known as Prodos 1.2), four drives are accessible through
the SmartPort. These may be a combination of Apple 3.5 drives, Unidisk 3.5
drives, a RAM disk, and a ROM disk, under the same order restrictions as
above.

The SmartPort is mapped to slot 5, so drives connected directly to the port

are
accessed as slot 5, drive 1 and slot 5, drive 2. When more than two drives are
used under Prodos 8, or if the RAM disk is active, "phantom slots" are
assigned.

To be used on the Apple IIGS, the Disk II requires a Disk II Controller Card,
just as on the Apple II or Apple IIe. The drive may be accessed through the
slot used for the card, most likely slot 6, in which case the two possible
drives are referred to as slot 6, drive 1 and slot 6, drive 2.

A SCSI Interface Card is needed to use the Apple Hard Disk 20SC on the
Apple IIGS A Profile Interface Card must be used with a 5 or 10 Megabyte
Profile, accessible by referencing the slot where the interface card resides
or by the ProFile's ProDOS pathname.

The Apple IIGS control panel allows you to select the slot from which the
computer will be booted, or you may choose to scan slots on bootup to find a
device that is ready.

Keywords:

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 245 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

### END OF FILE A2TIL157.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 246 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL158.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: Contiguous RAM Depends on Memory Board

Header: Apple IIGS: Contiguous RAM Depends on Memory Board

Article Created: 14 May 1991

Article Last Reviewed: 31 May 1991
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

If RAM is added to the Apple IIGS in slot(s) 1-7 instead of the expansion
slot -- with an Apple memory card, for instance -- will it be contiguous
RAM?

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

It depends on the memory board used. The Apple II Memory Expansion card will
not be used as contiguous RAM, but can be used as a RAM disk (in fact, both
GS/OS and ProDOS automatically make it a RAM disk at startup).

Some other manufacturers make memory boards that reside in an "other" slot and
maps to contiguous RAM space.
Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL158.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 247 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL159.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: Description (Discontinued)

Header: Apple IIGS: Description (Discontinued)

Article Created: 8 May 1992

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes the Apple IIGS computer.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The Apple IIGS personal computer is the most powerful member of the Apple
II family.

Features
--------
- 256K of built-in RAM and 256K of additional RAM via the Apple IIGS
Memory Expansion Card, which is included. The RAM is expandable to 8MB.

- A 16-bit 65C816 processor lets the Apple IIGS run more sophisticated
applications, including those with Macintosh-style interface, as well as
most existing Apple IIe and IIc software. With a clock speed of 2.8
instead of 1 megahertz, these programs will run up to 2.8 times faster
on the IIGS.

- 128K of ROM memory expandable via the memory expansion slot up to one
megabyte.

- Control Panel, which enables users to set screen colors and speaker
volume.

- Detachable keyboard with 14-key numeric pad. It contains two Apple

Desktop Bus ports on opposite ends; one is for connecting the keyboard
to the computer, and the second is for the mouse or other ADB-compatible
input devices.

- Eight international character sets can be displayed.

- Two built-in serial ports allow for easy connection of AppleTalk, a

modem, printer, or other serial devices.

- Seven general purpose expansion slots are available for peripherals, in

addition to a dedicated RAM/ROM slot.

- Up to 15 separate audio voices can be generated simultaneously for

music, speech, and sound effects.

- Analog RGB port allows for quick connection to the AppleColor RGB
Monitor; no adaptors or additional interface are required.

Benefits
--------
- Compatibility with most Apple peripherals.

- The eight expansion slots give the Apple IIGS a virtually unlimited
growth path. One slot is dedicated to RAM/ROM cards, while the other
seven are general-purpose peripheral-interface slots.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 248 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

- The disk-drive port lets users take advantage of the 800K Apple 3.5
Drive and 143K 5.25 Drive. They can be used individually, in any
combination, or with UniDisk 3.5 drives. Up to four drives can be
daisy-chained from the drive port. With the addition of the Apple II
SCSI Card and cable, the Apple IIGS can work with the 20MB Apple
Hard Disk 20SC.

- With the AppleColor RGB Monitor, the Apple IIGS produces crisp 80-column
color text; a palette of 4096 colors, with as many as 256 on screen at
once, is available.

- The Apple Desktop Bus (ADB) standard allows for easy connection of
multiple input devices such as a graphics table and mouse. Users can
connect another ADB peripheral to the keyboard, then daisy-chain more
accessories from it. Up to sixteen devices can be connected at one
time.

- Access to the AppleTalk Personal Network is possible, without an

interface card, via the Apple IIGS's built-in serial ports.

- New applications that use windows, pull-down menus, and other Macintosh
features can be used.

- A choice of QWERTY (Sholes), Dvorak, and international keyboard layouts.

Order Number
------------
A0012LL/A
Copyright 1992-1994 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: specsht

### END OF FILE A2TIL159.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 249 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL160.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: Differences with other Apple II models

Header: Apple IIGS: Differences with other Apple II models

Some of the features found only on the Apple IIGS:

FEATURE SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION

------- ------------- -----------
More powerful 65C816 16-bit microprocessor has 24
microprocessor bit address and 6502
compatibility

Faster Operation CPU clock speeds of 1 MHz User can select either of two
and 2.8 MHz speeds: 1 MHz speed of 6502
or fast 2.8 MHz.

Memory Expansion 24-bit address bus Expansion card can expand RAM
up to as much as 8 megabytes

Detached Keyboard 78 keys Separate keyboard includes

cursor keys and numeric pad.

Apple DeskTop Bus Low cost serial I/O Supports detached keyboard,
mouse, and other I/O devices.

RGB Video R, G, B and sync Provides both RGB and NTSC

video outputs.

40 and 80 column Text, background, and Text, background, and border

text in color border colors (RGB only) can be any of sixteen colors.

Super Hi-Res color True 320x200 or 640x200 Improved graphics with up to

16 graphics colors per scan
line-up to 256 colors on
screen out of 4096.

Desktop user Uses Hi-Res color graphics Tool box supports desktop
interface and mouse interface with mouse, menus,
and windows

Improved Sound Ensoniq digital sound IC Supports 15 independent

with 32 oscillators voices (GS retains Apple II
type sound)

Control Panel Built-in desk accessory User may set machine

parameters for display,
operating speed,
serial ports, disk drives,
etc.

Enhanced Monitor Monitor in ROM Handles 16-bit and 24-bit

addresses, assembles and
disassembles 65C816 and 6502
instructions, performs 32-bit
arithmetic, Low level I/O
included

Built-in Clock Time and Date provided Has battery back up

Built-in Serial Two standard serial ports Support modems, printers, and
ports AppleTalk. (User can still
use serial card in slot)

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 250 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Built-in AppleTalk Uses one serial port No card required. User can
select either serial port to
use for AppleTalk.

Built-in Disk port Disk I/O port using custom User can select built-in
chip driveport,disk interface
cards, or both.

Apple II type features found on the Apple IIGS:

FEATURE DESCRIPTION OTHER MODELS

------- ----------- ------------
6502 Instruction 65816 has emulation mode All Apple II
set for running 6502 programs

128k RAM Main and aux banks, with IIc, 128 IIe
language-card & I/O spaces

AppleSoft in ROM Applesoft Basic with lower All Apple II

case and 80-column features

Monitor in ROM Supports low level I/O and All Apple II

program development

40 and 80 column Black & White text displays IIc, IIe with 128k or 80
text (color text on GS only) column card

Lo-Res Color 48x40, 16 colors All Apple II

graphics

Hi-Res Color 280x192, 6 colors All Apple II

graphics

Double Hi-Res 560x192, 16 colors IIc, 128k IIe

Color graphics

Built-in serial Two RS232 compatible ports, IIc (similar)

ports for modem, printer, etc.

Built-in disk port Using IWM chip, supports IIc

both 5.25", 3.5" drives

Expansion slots (7) Slots for peripheral I/O II, II Plus, IIe
and expansion cards, in
addition to built-in ports

Game I/O 9-pin and 16-pin connectors All Apple II (9 pin IIe, IIc)
for paddles and joysticks
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL160.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 251 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL161.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: Disabling the Control Panel

Header: Apple IIGS: Disabling the Control Panel

This article last reviewed: 12 September 1990

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

How can I disable the Control Panel on the Apple IIGS?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The following is Electronic Learning Systems' description of Menu Master, a

product that provides a way to disable the Apple IIGS Control Panel. For
further information on ELS, search the Technical Information Library on
"ELS".

"Menu Master is a simple menu system for the Apple II. It allows creation of
customized menus and sub-menus to launch all ProDOS, GS/OS, and DOS 3.3
applications. Menu Master provides automatic pathfinding, simplifying the
need
to understand or manually set ProDOS paths. Menu Master has password
protection, is mouse-compatible, and displays the time and date from any
ProDOS
clock. A utility feature enables or disables the Apple IIGS Control Panel.

"DOS 3.3 programs can now be launched and returned from, within the ProDOS
operating system. DOS 3.3 software developers now have the ability to run DOS
3.3 programs on AppleShare or any ProDOS-specific environment.

"Any Apple II with 128K of memory and an 80-column display can now organize,
launch and return from ProDOS, GS/OS, and DOS 3.3 applications with Menu
Master. Apple IIc Plus systems can have 3.5-inch diskettes created with DOS
3.3 programs that will run on their computers.

"The network version of Menu Master is compatible with all Apple II networks
including AppleShare, Corvus, ELAN, VELAN, and DIGICARD. Menu Master provides
all the features of Apple's Aristotle program when used on AppleShare, but
requires no memory expansion and can launch DOS 3.3 applications."
Copyright 1990 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL161.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 252 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL162.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: Displaying in Monochrome Mode

Header: Apple IIGS: Displaying in Monochrome Mode

This article last reviewed: 6 March 1990

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Some of my group's Apple II software applications run in color on the Apple

IIGS and look terrible. (Most of the programs with the problem are written in
BASIC.) Is there a routine or call for putting the Apple IIGS into monochrome
mode?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

What monitor are you using? The AppleColor Composite Monitor (A2M6020) or the
AppleColor RGB Monitor (A2M6014)?

AppleColor Composite Monitor

----------------------------
There is a switch behind the front access door that turns the Composite
Monitor
to a green character on black background display. This will help the
displayed
image to appear more clearly.

Additionally, the Apple IIGS Control Panel has the Monitor CDEV for selecting
color or monochrome monitor. This may help if you're using the Composite
Monitor in the single-color mode. This setting affects only the composite
output of the Apple IIGS. This is the only method we know for setting the
Apple IIGS to monochrome mode.

AppleColor RGB Monitor

----------------------
There are certain issues that affect the display on the RGB Monitor's graphics
page. If the graphic images are not placed on even nibble boundaries, there
will be color bleed that many consider unacceptable. On the RGB Monitor, the
only solution is to rewrite the programs, with the even nibble boundary issue
in mind.
Copyright 1990 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL162.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 253 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL163.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: DOS 3.3 and Hard Drives

Header: Apple IIGS: DOS 3.3 and Hard Drives

This article last reviewed: 20 November 1990

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Is it possible to partition the hard drive of a Apple IIGS, so one partition

contains DOS 3.3 and applications and the other contains GS/OS? I tried it,
and now the IIGS can't recognize DOS 3.3 floppy disks.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

DOS 3.3 was created when hard disk drives were only a dream for
microcomputers. Thus, DOS 3.3 and previous versions understand only the 140K
5.25-inch disks. DOS 3.3 does not understand the 3.5-inch disk and
hard-disk environments. When hard disks did appear for the Apple II family
and DOS 3.3 was still the operating system of choice, individual hard-drive
manufacturers devised independent schemes for dividing their products into
multiple 140K volumes so DOS 3.3 could work with the hard drives. ProDOS
was created to overcome the limits that DOS 3.3 imposed on storage volumes.

GS/OS would require a File System Translator (FST) to recognize the

5.25-inch disks of the DOS 3.3 operating system. However, the FST would be
of no assistance in providing DOS 3.3 partitions on a hard disk, because the
lack of hard-disk support is a limitation of DOS 3.3 itself, not the FST.
To use DOS 3.3 applications on an Apple IIGS requires restarting from a
5.25-inch DOS 3.3 disk.
Copyright 1990 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL163.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 254 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL164.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIgs: Dropping Off The AppleShare Network (11/94)

Header: Apple IIgs: Dropping Off The AppleShare Network (11/94)

Article Created: 21 November 1994

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I have the following configuration:

* Apple IIgs running GSOS 6.0.1 or GSOS 6.0
* Connected to and AppleShare 3.x server
* AppleShare 3.x server has Apple II setup 2.2 installed.

And encounter problems with the Apple IIgs will dropping off the network.
Usually within 3-5 minutes of idle time. The server window "Connected Users"
will show the user connected for about 1 minute then drop them from the
server. This only occurs if you boot the Apple IIgs from the server.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

This problem is difficult to reproduce. Sometimes it will go away simply by

doing a clean install of the server and GSOS software. One resolution is to
upgrade to Apple II Setup 3.0. You can obtain Apple II setup 3.0 by
upgrading to GSOS 6.0.1 or obtaining it from an online service or Apple
Authorized Service Provider.
Note: this software comes with GSOS 6.0.1 not AppleShare 3.x. You will need
to look in the Apple II area to locate the software.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1994, Apple Computer, Inc
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL164.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 255 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL165.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: Duplicate BASIC.SYSTEM Files

Header: Apple IIGS: Duplicate BASIC.SYSTEM Files

This article last reviewed: 12 December 1989

TOPIC ---------------------------------------------

When using Apple IIGS System Installer 5.0 it appears to put the following
files into the "Root" directory: BASIC.LAUNCHER, BASIC.SYSTEM, and ICONS.

The same file BASIC.SYSTEM is also in the folder called system. Do we need
both? Are they there for Apple IIGS's diskless "boot up"?

DISCUSSION ----------------------------------------

Because you mentioned diskless booting, we assume you are talking about
installing Apple IIGS/OS 5.0 on the Macintosh AppleShare File Server.

The only copies of BASIC.SYSTEM and BASIC.LAUNCHER that are installed by the
Server Network Startup script are those installed at the root directory. The
copy of BASIC.SYSTEM in the Macintosh System Folder is installed by the Apple
II Setup installer when the server is set up for use by Apple IIs. A copy is
put in the System Folder so that the server will have a default startup
application for all Apple II users.

It is perfectly acceptable to remove the copy of BASIC.SYSTEM in the System

Folder, so long as you remember to set a startup application for each Apple II
user. You should not remove those copies of BASIC.SYSTEM and BASIC.LAUNCHER
located at the root directory unless there is no need for Applesoft BASIC.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL165.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 256 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL166.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: Error in Show Text File Desktop Accessory

Header: Apple IIGS: Error in Show Text File Desktop Accessory

This article last reviewed: 4 February 1987

On version 1.1 of the Apple IIGS System Disk, dated December 2, the Apple II
DeskTop gives a "system error" when the desk accessory Show Text File comes
to end-of-file. This doesn't happen with version 1.0, dated November 26.

Furthermore, on both versions, 1.0 and 1.1, of the system disk, this desk
accessory will only show the first 32K of a text file.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL166.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 257 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL167.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: Graphics Modes (10/94)

Header: Apple IIGS: Graphics Modes (10/94)

Article Created: 23 October 1986

Article Reviewed/Updated: 18 October 1994

TOPIC ------------------------------------------------------------

What are the available graphics modes available on the Apple IIgs?

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

The Apple IIGS can perform graphics under a number of different types of
graphics displays: Lo-res and Hi-res modes found on all Apple II systems, the
double Hi-res mode available on the Apple IIe and IIc, and new Super Hi-Res
modes.

Both Lo-res and Hi-res modes are unchanged from the Apple II, and the manual
"Applesoft on the IIGS" shows the commands for using those modes. The IIGS
ROM doesn't have routines for the use of double Hi-res graphics; a programmer
must add assembler routines that will properly draw lines, locate points,
etc., in double Hi-res mode. Commercially available packages include these
routines.

Only on the Apple IIGS performs in Super Hi-Res graphics modes with a
resolution of 320 X 200 or 640 X 200. Using 320 X 200 mode permits a full 16
colors per line. 640 X 200 mode can also use 16 colors per line, but each
pixel is limited to a choice of 4 of the 16 colors. Both modes are supported
by the Apple IIGS QuickDraw II tools. To make programming easier, screen
memory is mapped contiguously in Super Hi-Res mode.

320 X 200 Super Hi-Res mode

---------------------------
Each line of pixels in 320 mode is associated with a table of 16 entries that
correspond to the 16 colors to be shown on that line. Each entry represents
one of the possible 4096 colors available on the Apple IIGS. There may be as
many as 16 color tables defined, permitting 256 colors on the screen at one
time.

Within each line, a byte determines two pixels' colors. The high 4 bits of a
byte contain a number from 0 to 15, which is used as an offset into the color
table for that line. The pixel mapped to that memory location will have the
color found at the appropriate table location. Similarly, the low 4 bits of
that byte will determine the color of the adjacent pixel.

Pixels in 320 mode are almost square. The aspect ratio in this mode is 5:6 on
an Apple Monochrome Monitor, an AppleColor Monitor, or an Apple RGB Monitor.

640 X 200 Super Hi-Res Mode

---------------------------
640 mode also allows 16 colors per line, but each pixel is limited to one of
four colors (this mode is sometimes called Limited 16 Colors). As in 320
mode, each line addresses one of up to 16 color tables. However, each pixel
in the line is represented by only 2 bits, so that each byte contains
information about 4 pixels.

To represent 4 adjacent pixels, bits 7 and 6 choose from among colors 0

through 3 in the appropriate color palette, bits 5 and 4 choose colors 4
through 7, bits 3 and 2, from colors 8 through 11, and the last two bits
choose from colors 12 through 15. Therefore, each pixel can be one of four
colors, but there may be a total of 16 colors on each line.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 258 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

The pixel aspect ratio in 640 mode is 5:12 on an Apple monitor, so that each
pixel's height is approximately twice the width.

Color Fill Mode

---------------
The Apple IIGS can also use 320 X 200 mode with color fill. If this mode is
chosen, the color zero (0) takes on a special meaning. A pixel with color 0
will have the same color as the preceding pixel, so that a series of bytes
with value 80 00 00 would all be shown in the color represented by the eighth
entry in the color palette. Using 0 to represent no color change limits the
selection to only 15 colors per line, but does save time for the programmer.

Article Change History:

18 Oct 1994 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1986-94, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL167.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 259 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL168.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: High-Speed SCSI Card Memory Requirement (11/94)

Header: Apple IIGS: High-Speed SCSI Card Memory Requirement (11/94)

Article Created: 10 July 1990

Article Reviewed/Updated: 21 November 1994

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

How much memory does the Apple II High-Speed SCSI card require? I can't find
anything about this in the manual.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The Apple II High-Speed SCSI card requires a minimum of 768K on the Apple
IIGS computer.

Article Change History:

21 Nov 1994 - Reviewed for technical accuracy.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1990-94, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL168.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 260 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL169.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: How to Access the Clock

Header: Apple IIGS: How to Access the Clock

This article last reviewed: 14 July 1989

TOPIC ---------------------------------------------

I have a customer using Z-BASIC on his Apple IIGS under ProDOS, running as
an Apple IIe. Although there no are toolbox calls for accessing the Apple
IIGS clock from Z-BASIC, is there a way to do this from Z-BASIC with PEEKS
and POKES or a machine language call?

DISCUSSION ---------------------------------------------

The preferred method is to use the ProDOS GET_TIME call. Note: You need
ProDOS 8 version 1.2 or later to get the time on the Apple IIGS.

This method works on any Apple II running under ProDOS and with most Apple
II-compatible clocks (because they all come with ProDOS patch routines).
More information on the format of the GET_TIME call and other ProDOS
commands is in the ProDOS Technical Reference Manual. The GET_TIME call is
documented on page 71. Additional information is on page 99 and pages 104
through 106.

When the GET_TIME routine is called, the system date and time are placed
into the documented locations. Using PEEKs, the data in those location can
be extracted.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL169.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 261 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL170.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: How To Print Low-Res/High-Res Graphics Files

Header: Apple IIGS: How To Print Low-Res/High-Res Graphics Files

Article Created: 5 December 1988

Article Change History

----------------------
1/19/93 - UPDATED
* Beagle Brothers now WordPerfect Corporation.
11/9/88 - REVIEWED
* For accuracy.

A low-resolution graphics file on the Apple IIGS can be printed from BASIC
without using any special interface cards (for instance, an Apple IIGS with an
ImageWriter II connected to the serial port) using Triple-Dump from Beagle
Brothers (now WordPerfect Corporation).

This application lets any Apple II prints not only low-resolution, but
high-resolution, double-high-resolution, and double-low-resolution files, as
well as 40-column and 80-column text. Triple-Dump routines can also be used as
part of BASIC programs.

To locate a vendor's address and phone numbers, use the vendor name as a
search
string.
Copyright 1988, 1993, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL170.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 262 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL171.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: How To Print to Local & Network Printers

Header: Apple IIGS: How To Print to Local & Network Printers

This article last reviewed: 8 August 1989

TOPIC -----------------------------------------

Is it possible to print to local printers from an Apple IIGS on an Apple II

network?

The network in question has an Apple IIGS and an ImageWriter II in each work
area. Each of these Apple IIGS systems is networked into a central office
where they share a LaserWriter IINTX. Sometimes users need to print to the
local printer, other times to the LaserWriter.

Can they do this while on the network without shutting down their machines and
restarting with software locally? They are using network versions of
AppleWorks with third party applications and E-mail.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------

Printing both locally and over the network depends on the application's method
of selecting a slot for printing.

AppleWorks does provide a method for assigning a printing slot, allowing three
printers to be defined in the Printer Information screen. To do this:

1) Set up the printer specifications for the local ImageWriter printer in

slot #1.

2) Set up an ImageWriter printer for slot #7. (This is for the ImageWriter
Emulator used in the LaserWriter.)

3) Choose the desired printer by going to the Main Menu/Other Activities/

Printer Information screen and selecting a new Open-Apple-H printer.

If the third party programs allow a slot choice within the program, select
slot
#1 for the local printer and slot #7 for the network printer.

Prior to using a slot #7 printer (the network printer), use the Chooser
application to select the appropriate network printer.

(NOTE: These descriptions assume the use of the printer port on the
Apple IIGS.)
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL171.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 263 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL172.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: Printing to Legal-Size Paper From AppleWorks

Header: Apple IIGS: Printing to Legal-Size Paper From AppleWorks

This article last reviewed: 20 July 1989

TOPIC ---------------------------------------------

A user is having problems printing to a LaserWriter from AppleWorks (on an

Apple IIGS). He can print on letter-size paper but not legal. He has a
legal tray and has set the paper length to Legal in AppleWorks. Does
AppleWorks on an Apple II support legal printing from a LaserWriter?

DISCUSSION ---------------------------------------------

If you print in an AppleWorks 2.0 and ProDOS 8 environment, the ImageWriter

Emulator (IWEM) does not support legal-size paper; it supports only
letter-size paper. IWEM is not alone; the LaserWriter Diablo 630 emulator
does not support paper lengths longer than 11 inches.

However, if you try this in AppleWorks on an Apple IIGS with GS/OS

environment,
everything works smoothly and with the desired results. In addition, the
user can select various fonts and styles in AppleWorks for more pleasing
results.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL172.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 264 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL173.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: ProDOS/16 Version 2

Header: Apple IIGS: ProDOS/16 Version 2

This article last reviewed: 4 September 1987

To support the new fast mode of the Apple IIGS, ProDOS/16 version 2 handles
expanded Apple IIGS capabilities, features, and operating modes:

- ProDOS/16 is designed to accept system calls from applications running in

either 8-bit or 16-bit mode (the 65816 micro-processor can run in either).

- ProDOS/16 can accept system calls from anywhere in the full 16MB range of
memory in the Apple IIGS, and those calls can manipulate data anywhere in
memory.

- ProDOS/16 relies on a sophisticated memory management system.

- System calls must be made to ProDOS/16 in order to access system global

variables such as date and time, system level, and I/O buffer addresses.
ProDOS/16 does not support a global variables page.

There are major differences from ProDOS 1.1.1. ProDOS/16 not strictly
upward-compatible from previous ProDOS versions. Programs written to function
under ProDOS on an Apple II will not run on the IIGS under ProDOS/16 without
some modifications.

ProDOS/16 functions, however, are upward-compatible:

- There is a functionally equivalent ProDOS/16 call for almost every ProDOS

system call, usually with the same name.

- Calls are made in nearly the same way as with earlier ProDOS versions.

- For passing values to functions, the parameter blocks have a structure

similar to (but not exactly like) earlier ProDOS.

- ProDOS/16, using the same file system as earlier ProDOS, can read from and
write to any disk volume produced by ProDOS, using the same file and volume
structure, both disk resident and logical.

On the Apple IIGS, ProDOS/8 and ProDOS/16 are designed to the run in tandem,
as a package. Whereas ProDOS/16 takes advantage of all the Apple IIGS's
hardware and capabilities, ProDOS/8 is provided to maintain compatibility
with ProDOS v1.1.1. In normal situations, you need not be concerned with
which operating system is functioning; if you run an Apple IIGS application,
ProDOS/16 is loaded automatically.

While most ProDOS/8 calls have functionally exact equivalents in ProDOS/16,

some ProDOS/8 calls do not appear in ProDOS/16 because they are unnecessary:

- RENAME: The ProDOS/16 call CHANGE_PATH performs the same function.

- GET_TIME: Under ProDOS/16, the time and date are obtained through a call to
the Miscellaneous Tools.

- SET_BUF: Under ProDOS/16, the memory manager, rather than the application,
allocates file I/O buffers.

- GET_BUF: This call is unnecessary under ProDOS/16 because the OPEN call
returns a handle to the file's I/O buffer.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 265 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

- ONLINE: This call is replaced in ProDOS/16 by the VOLUME call.

Under ProDOS/16, you can:

- make ProDOS/16 system calls from anywhere in memory, using ProDOS/16

parameter blocks located anywhere in memory.

- make I/O data transfers to or from anywhere in memory.

- allow limited use of named devices. With ProDOS/8, you must refer to a
device by its volume name or its slot and drive number.

- support up to eight system prefixes (ProDOS/8 supports only one).

- have an unlimited number of open files (ProDOS/8 allows only 8).

- have any number of online devices (ProDOS/8 allows a maximum of 14).

- support of at least 3 separate device protocols (ProDOS/8 supports

only one block device protocol).

- extensivly support named devices.

- use a volume mounting function, not in ProDOS/8, which prompts the user to
mount a needed volume.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL173.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 266 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL174.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: ProDOS/8

Header: Apple IIGS: ProDOS/8

To support the old Apple II mode on the Apple IIGS, system disks have P8, or
ProDOS/8, as it is a version of ProDOS 1.1.1 made especially for Apple IIGS,
although ProDOS/8 works on an Apple IIe or Apple IIc.

ProDOS/8 handles the following Apple IIGS capabilites, features and operating
modes:

- ProDOS/8 accepts system calls from applications running in 8-bit mode only.

- ProDOS/8 accepts system calls from the lowest 64K of memory only.

- ProDOS/8 uses a simple global page bit map.

- ProDOS/8 maintains a section of memory, which can be accessed directly,

that
contains system global variables such as date and time, system level, and
I/O
buffer addresses.

- ProDOS/8 reads the Apple IIGS clock rather than the ThunderClock.

On the Apple IIGS, ProDOS and ProDOS/16 are designed to the run in tandem, as
a package. ProDOS/8 is provided to maintain compatibility with ProDOS v1.1.1.
In normal situations, you need not be concerned with which operating system
is functioning; ProDOS/8 is automatically loaded if you run an application
designed to run under ProDOS 1.1.1 or versions earlier.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL174.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 267 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL175.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: Recovering a corrupted ProFile

Header: Apple IIGS: Recovering a corrupted ProFile

This article last reviewed: 29 March 1988

In the Apple IIGS, the bus' higher 'noise' passes on to the ground traces
on the ProFile interface card and, after use, corrupts the directory of the
ProFile, rendering it invisible to ProDos and inaccessible to the user.

It is possible to recover the directory and make the ProFile usable again. On
the report of a ProFile going bad after installation in a Apple IIGS, first
see the article "Apple II ProFile Interface Card Modification for the
Apple IIGS. This modification lets the card operate correctly for the
directory fix. Don't try to repair a directory with an un-modified ProFile
card.

For the recovery, use a disk editor program, like the ProDos MLI Exerciser
program here:

1. Execute the ProDos Machine Language Interface Exerciser program with

the '-' command and wait for the main menu.

2. From the main menu, type '80'<Return> to command a read of a block;

follow that by typing in the following values from the next screen:

Parameter Count $03 (Default)

Unit Number $50 (The ProFile card's slot followed by a '0')
Data Buffer $00 (This value is where the block to be modified
$40 will be loaded)
Block Number $02 (This is the bad block to load in)
$00

After typing in each pair of numbers, press <Return> to go on to the

next entry prompt. After pressing <Return> on the last entry, you see a
message 'PRESS RETURN TO EXECUTE COMMAND', you press <Return> and then
see another message 'Error $00: Call Successful'. At this point, press
<Return> to get the main menu.

3. Type 'M' <Return> to modify the buffer. The default should read:

$00
$40

This is the correct setting; press <Return> on each entry and press it
once more to go on to modify mode. At this point, you should see a table
of numbers and a blinking cursor on the entry we want to 'delete', number
'55'. Now that we know that problems with the directory exist, press
<ESC> to go to the main menu.

If the '55' was not in the first position of the table, then this
directory recovery procedure won't work. If the '55' was not shown at
all, your ProFile possibly has a different reason for not operating)

4. Type '81' <Return> to write the block out to the disk. Press <Return>
through the number entries until you reach the 'data buffer' entry.
Change it to look like this:

$01
$40

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 268 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Continue to press <Return> through the block number entries and once
more to command the actual block write, after which you will see the
message 'Error $00: Call Successful' will be displayed.

5. You may now reboot your system and check to see if the ProFile is now
recognized. All of the data previously inaccessible should be back and
usable.

For more information about using the ProDOS Exerciser Program, see the
ProDOS Technical Reference manual.
Copyright 1988 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: hts

### END OF FILE A2TIL175.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 269 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL176.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: System 6.0 Software and HyperCard IIGS 1.1
Header: Apple IIGS: System 6.0 Software and HyperCard IIGS 1.1

Article Created: 27 March 1992

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes Apple IIGS System 6.0 software and an upgraded
version of HyperCard IIGS.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Apple IIGS System 6 software offers an enhanced user interface, greater

speed and performance, and data exchange capabilities not available on
previous Apple IIGS operating systems. HyperCard IIGS version 1.1 has been
upgraded to include a Media Control stack for operating CD ROMs and
videodisc players, and new HyperTalk scripting capabilities. As with
original HyperCard IIGS, version 1.1 is also in color.

Apple IIGS System 6 provides similar ease-of-use and functionality now

available with the System 7 Finder for the Macintosh.

Features and Benefits of Apple IIGS System 6

--------------------------------------------
- Three New File System Translators
These provide easy access to Macintosh disks, Pascal disks, and Apple II
DOS 3.3 disks

- Control Panel and Desk Accessory Enhancements

You can open control panels directly from the desktop. The software
incorporates Find File and Calculator desk accessories.

- Finder Help
You can access Finder Help through pop-up menus and keep it on screen
while stepping through procedures.

- Enhanced Window Handling and Window Appearance

It's easier to move between and manage multiple windows on a single
screen.

- Two New Applications: Teach and Archiver

Teach is a desktop text processor that enables you to jot down
notes, read disk files, and create formatted or unformatted text
documents. Teach also provides file import capability from ASCII,
AppleWorks version 3.0, AppleWorks GS, MacWrite version 5.0 formats,
and AppleWriter. Archiver offers flexible hard disk backup functions
to save and restore either individual files or entire volumes.

- Media Control Toolset

This is a new tool/driver/control panel/desk accessory combination that
allows you to integrate, configure, and manage highly sophisticated
multimedia effects. Use it in conjunction with HyperCard IIGS version
1.1 to optimize the toolset's performance.

- The Universal Access Suite

This suite (also available on Macintosh System 7 software) opens the
Apple IIGS to disabled users via Video Keyboard, Easy Access, and
Closeview programs.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 270 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

- As with the System 5 series, Apple IIGS System 6 users can network
their Apple IIGS computers with each other and with Apple IIe,
Macintosh, and MS-DOS computers. However, System 6 improves
networking functionality via EasyMount, a new feature that allows
users to mount a network server with a simple double-click command.

- Apple IIGS System 6 replaces Apple IIGS System 5.0.4 for the stand-
alone Apple IIGS, providing a consistent graphical interface and high
performance for both the individual and networked user.

Speed and Feature Enhancements for HyperCard IIGS 1.1

-----------------------------------------------------
- Media Control Stack
This allows control of external media devices such as laserdisc players
and CD-ROM drives from within the stack. A common interface to two
external devices provides control, using standard buttons or floating
control panels for "Play," "Fast Fwd," and so on.

- Tune Builder Stack

This allows you to create short original tunes by simply clicking the
mouse on the stack's music staff. You can play notes in variable time,
and with the voices of a large collection of instruments. You can use
these tunes as enhancements to other original stacks by cutting and
pasting.

- Features from Macintosh HyperCard Versions 2.0 and 2.1

- HyperTalk extensions
- X Windows

- The Apple IIGS SuperDrive Controller Card

Available for the enhanced Apple IIe and Apple IIGS, this allows users to
use Apple's SuperDrive, which permits the use of 1.4MB floppy disks. The
SuperDrive card also operates all other Apple II 3.5 disk drives.

System Requirements
-------------------
- Apple IIGS personal computer with at least 1MB of RAM, ROM version 01 or
03 and one 3.5-inch disk drive, although configurations of 2MB of RAM and
a hard drive is recommended for optimal performance.

- Networked systems require Apple IIGS computers with at least 768K RAM,
ROM version 01 or 03, and appropriate LocalTalk cables.

- HyperCard IIGS version 1.1 requires an Apple IIGS personal computer

with 1.5MB RAM, one 800K disk drive and hard disk or connection to a
networked environment, and system software 5.0.3 or subsequent
version.
Copyright 1992 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL176.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 271 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL177.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: System Diagnostic Errors

Header: Apple IIGS: System Diagnostic Errors

This article last reviewed: 10 November 1988

Here's the currently available, though incomplete, list, with explanations,

of error codes generated by the Apple IIGS when running system diagnostics
for the Apple II Family (V1.0B1).

Apple IIGS error codes have the form AABBCCDD.

Test numbers AA

Error Code (AA) Test

--------------- ----------------------------
"RM"/01 Checksum
02 RAM Moving Inversions
03 Softswitch
04 RAM Address
05 FPI Speed
06 Serial I/O
07 Real Time Clock
08 Battery RAM
09 Front Desk Bus
0A Shadowing
0B Interrupts

AA=06 serial test

BB Meaning
-- -----------
01 Register R/W
04 Tx Buffer empty status
05 Tx Buffer empty failure
06 All sent status fail
07 Rx char available
08 Bad data

AA=03 RAM test

BBCC= Address

AA=01 ROM Checksum

BB= Failed checksum
DD=1 Bad RAM

AA=05 Speed
BB=1 speed stuck slow
BB=2 speed stuck fast

AA=08 Battery RAM

BB=01 address test failure and CC= bad address
BB=02 memory failure and CC = pattern, DD = Address

AA=02 Softswitches
Bb= Statereg bit
CC= Read softswitch address

AA=04 Front Desk Bus

BBCC= Bad checksum found
DD=01 FDB toolcode encountered a fatal error and no checksum computed

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 272 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

AA=04 Ram Adddress

BB= failed bank No
CC= failed bit

AA=06 Clock Test

BBCCDD=not used
DD=01 a fatal error occcurred after the test to within a second

AA=0A shadow register functionality

AA=0B Mega II and VGC capability of generating interrupts.

BB=01 VBL interrupt timeout
BB=02 VBL IRQ status fail
BB=03 1/4 SEC interrupt
BB=04 1/4 SEC interrupt
BB=05 ---
BB=06 VGC IRQ
BB=07 SCAN Line
Copyright 1988 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL177.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 273 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL178.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: Tabbing In Applesoft BASIC

Header: Apple IIGS: Tabbing In Applesoft BASIC

This article last reviewed: 21 April 1989

An Applesoft "PRINT TAB" statement, such as:

PRINT TAB(10);"A"; TAB(20);"B"; TAB(30);"C"

works on the Apple IIe and ImageWriter II, provided that you precede it
with a Tab Enable statement. For example

PRINT CHR$(9);"T E"

However, the PRINT TAB statement (shown above) on an Apple IIGS and an
ImageWriter II results in spacing 10 or 20 spaces rather than tabbing to
those columns. When using PRINT TAB for screen formatting, there is no
such problem.

The reason for this is that, when printing hardcopy, PRINT TAB appears to
be tabbing the specified spaces from last character. For example:

50 PRINT TAB (20);"Column 20";TAB (40);"Column 40"

causes the first tab to be placed at column 20, but the second tab is
placed at column 68. Here's why. The first tab statement puts the cursor
at column 20. Because the Tab Enable statement defines each tab as
9-characters wide, the tab extends from column 20 to column 28 (one
character at column 20 with the remaining 8 characters pushing the last
character out to column 28). When the TAB 40 statement executes, 40 spaces
are added to the last cursor location (column 28), placing the cursor at
column 68.

There are two ways to handle this problem on the Apple IIGS. The first way
is use the HTAB statement to format columns correctly:

40 HTAB 40:PRINT "Column 40":HTAB 60: PRINT "Column 60"

Old Apple II manuals state that this is not possible, but HTAB works
correctly on the Apple IIGS, both on the screen and on the printer.

Overall, TAB and HTAB work as expected on the screen. When TAB and HTAB
are used for printing, three factors must be considered:

- The type of Apple II.

- The interface card through which printing takes place.

- The active printer.

Each of these variables affect the TAB and HTAB commands when used in
printing.

The second way to handle this is with the "A" command. Page 92 of the
"Apple IIGS Firmware Reference Manual" states that the "A" command
('A'pplesoft Tabbing) duplicates the function of the "T" command of the
Super Serial Card. Issuing this command makes the TAB command work as you
would expect when using a printer.

Note: The command name ("A") was changed to avoid a conflict between

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 274 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

"T"erminal mode and "T"abbing.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL178.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 275 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL179.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: Using on AppleTalk Phase II Network

Header: Apple IIGS: Using on AppleTalk Phase II Network

This article last reviewed: 15 July 1990

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I'm running an Apple IIGS, with GS/OS 5.02, on an AppleTalk LAN with a "II
bootblocked" AppleShare server.

Can I upgrade this network to AppleTalk Phase II? I assume that if I do,
my Apple IIGS computers will boot from a server in their own zone. What if
I want to have two servers in one physical zone? Where will the Apple IIGS
computers boot from?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

AppleTalk Phase II has no effect on LocalTalk. The enhancements that Phase II

provides are only for EtherNet and Token Ring

There was an upgrade to the boot blocks for loading GS/OS on the server.
This is included with GS/OS 5.02 on a new Apple II setup disk.

The Apple IIGS will boot from the first server it finds.

Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL179.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 276 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL180.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: Using with a MicroNet Hard Drive

Header: Apple IIGS: Using with a MicroNet Hard Drive

Article Created: 14 May 1991

Article Last Reviewed: 27 May 1991
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I'm having a problem getting an Apple IIGS to talk to a MicroNet SCSI 30MB
HD. I have an Apple High-Speed SCSI card, MicroNet HD, and a 1MB Apple
IIGS. I also have v2.0 of the High-Speed SCSI Card Utilities.

Although my Apple II SCSI Utilities see the HD, I can't get GS/OS (v5.0.2)
to see the drive.

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

Assuming the hard drive is compatible with the Apple IIGS (check with
MicroNet) here's what you need to do:

Make a new bootable System Tools disk, using the Installer from the SCSI
utilities disk, and specifically install the SCSI driver from the new
utilities disk that came with the SCSI card. This makes the disk realize
there is a SCSI device attached. As the system starts up, it looks for
SCSI devices and if it finds one that should be readable but is not, it
will then ask if you want to initialize.

Make sure the slot the SCSI card is installed in is properly set in the
Control Panel. (That slot should say "your card".)
Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL180.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 277 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL181.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple IIGS: Video Generation Chip (VGC)

Header: Apple IIGS: Video Generation Chip (VGC)

This article last reviewed: 23 October 1986

The Video Generation Chip (VGC) supports video output from the Mega II for
both Apple II graphics and Super Hi-res graphics, provides an interface to
the Real Time Clock chip, supports interrupt handling, and assists disk drive
interfacing.

The VGC accepts color information from the Mega II, modifies it according to
the current Control Panel selections, and puts out appropriate display
information for the NTSC composite video jack and the Video RBG port. The VGC
accesses text, background, and border information maintained in the Text and
Background Color Register and Border Color Register. 4-bit value determines
each of the three color areas, so that there are 16 possible colors for each.
These colors correspond to the 16 Apple II Lo-res colors.

Apple II Graphics and Text

If Apple II text mode is used, the VGC removes color information from the
NTSC composite output signal, so that color fringing does not occur on a
color composite monitor. If a mixed text/graphics mode is chosen, color
fringing is unavoidable, since most composite monitors do not have the
ability to respond quickly enough to a change in the chroma information. In
this case, the bottom four lines of text will show a color fringing anomaly.

The VGC polls the Monochrome/Color Register to determine which type of video
signal should be output. If monochrome has been chosen, the VGC will output
appropriate dot patterns to represent the chosen colors, so that a monochrome
composite monitor will display gray-scale images. An AppleColor RGB Monitor
displaying double Hi-res graphics will also display gray-scale images if
monochrome is selected.

Super Hi-res Graphics

After the selection of one of the new Apple IIGS Graphics modes, the VGC is
responsible for implementing the color mode. It uses memory in the auxiliary
64K bank of Apple II RAM to implement Super Hi-res graphics. In this display
buffer, locations $2000-$9CFF are used for pixel information, $9D00-$9DFF are
pointers that determine the charactistics of each line, and $9E00-$9FFF hold
color pallette information.

For 640 or 320 graphics modes, each pixel may be represented respectively by
either 2 or 4 bits, wherein the value is a number of a color in the
appropriate color palette. Each of the 200 pointers (one for each line)
stores the display mode used, the color palette associated with that line,
and a flag of enabled or disabled for scan line interrupts. Each of the 16
color palettes contains information on 16 colors. Each of the colors takes
two bytes: 4 bits each for the value of red, green, and blue, which allows
the three primary colors can be combined in 4096 different ways.

Real Time Clock Interface

The Video Generation Chip also works as an interface between the 65816
microprocessor and the Real Time Clock Chip (RTC). A Real Time Clock register
in the VGC is used as a command register for the RTC. The RTC then maintains
calendar and clock information within parameter RAM.

VGC Interrupts

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 278 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Two types of internal interrupts are handled by the VGC: the One-Second
interrupt generated by the Real Time Clock Chip and the Scan-Line interrupt
generated by scan line information in Super Hi-res mode. The status and
enable states of these interrupts are found in the VGC Interrupt Register and
the VGC Interrupt Clear Register. The VGC also handles one external interrupt
line.

VGC Disk Register

The VGC Disk Register, used as a control register for the disk drive
interface, functions in choosing the head to use and the type of drive
selected.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL181.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 279 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL182.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple III : Won't Boot AII Disk Calibrate in AII Emulation
Header: Apple III : Won't Boot AII Disk Calibrate in AII Emulation

Article Created: 11 March 1986

Article Last Reviewed: 17 July 1992
Article Last Updated:

PROBLEM DESCRIPTION: Apple II Disk Calibration Program will not

boot on the Apple III in Apple II Emulation mode.

CAUSE: Peripheral cards may be interfering with the Apple II Disk

Calibration program.

CURE: Power down the Apple III and remove ALL interface cards,
(especially the ProFile interface card). Reboot the Apple II
Emulation Disk then load and run the Apple II Disk Calibration
Program.

If this cure does not resolve the problem, go back to the Word Search
screen and search on the product's name and HTS and GTS to obtain a
General Troubleshooting procedure.
Copyright 1988, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: hts

### END OF FILE A2TIL182.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 280 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL183.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple III QuickFile: Converting Data to Macintosh

Header: Apple III QuickFile: Converting Data to Macintosh

This article last reviewed: 25 March 1988

One method of moving Apple III QuickFile data to a Macintosh involves

AppleWorks running on an Apple II with both a 5.25" disk drive and a 3.5"
disk drive.

1. Because Apple III SOS and Apple II ProDOS are file-compatible,

AppleWorks running on an Apple II can read QuickFile files from an
Apple III's 5.25" disk.

2. The AppleWorks files can then be saved to a 3.5 disk.

3. A Macintosh running AFE (Apple File Exchange) can then read, via
AFE's Works-to-Works transporter, the files into Microsoft Works.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL183.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 281 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL184.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple III Universal Parallel Interface Card (UPIC)

Header: Apple III Universal Parallel Interface Card (UPIC)

This article last reviewed: 2 November 1988

DI=Data In
DO=Data Out

PIN OUTS

20 Pin Connector

Pin Number Signal Pin Number Signal

1 ....... Signal Ground 11 ...... Port A output DO1

2 ....... Acknowledge input 12 ...... Port A output DO2
3 ....... Port B input DI0 13 ...... Port A output DO3
4 ....... Port B input DI1 14 ...... Port A output DO4
5 ....... Port B input DI2 15 ...... Port A output DO5
6 ....... Port B input DI3 16 ...... Port A output DO6
7 ....... Port B input DI4 17 ...... Port A output DO7
8 ....... Strobe output 18 ...... Port B input DI6
9 ....... Port B input DI5 19 ...... Port B input DI7
10 ....... Port A output DO0 20 ...... Signal Ground

40 Pin Connector

1 ....... Port B output DO0 21 ...... Port A output DO1

2 ....... Port B output DO1 22 ...... Port A output DO2
3 ....... Port B output DO2 23 ...... Port A output DO3
4 ....... Port B output DO3 24 ...... Port A output DO4
5 ....... Port B output DO4 25 ...... Port A output DO5
6 ....... Port B output DO5 26 ...... Port A output DO6
7 ....... Port B output DO6 27 ...... Port A output DO7
8 ....... Port B output DO7 28 ...... Port B input DI6
9 ....... Pin removed 29 ...... Port B input DI7
10 ....... Pin removed 30 ...... Signal Ground
11 ....... Signal Ground 31 ...... Pin removed
12 ....... Acknowledge input 32 ...... Pin removed
13 ....... Port B input DI0 33 ...... Data ready output
14 ....... Port B input DI1 34 ...... Signal ground
15 ....... Port B input DI2 35 ...... Signal ground
16 ....... Port B input DI3 36 ...... Signal ground
17 ....... Port B input DI4 37 ...... Signal ground
18 ....... Strobe output 38 ...... Data ready ACK in
19 ....... Port B input DI5 39 ...... Signal ground
20 ....... Port A output DO0 40 ...... Signal ground

DATA CONFIGURATION BLOCK

Commonly used configurations for the driver .PRINTER on the SOS 1.3
Update diskette are listed in the following table.

Printer Device configuration block (DCB) values

ERRMASK ERRSTAT AUTOLF CTRLWRD TIMEOUT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 282 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

---------------------------------------
00 | 01 | 02 | 03 | 04
Centronics 779/700 E0 | C0 | 40 | 00 | 0A
Centronics 730/737 C0 | C0 | 00 | 00 | 5A
Anadex DP-8000 E0 | C0 | 00 | 00 | 5A
Printronix P300 E0 | C0 | 00 | 00 | 0A
C.Itoh 8510A E8 | C8 | 40 | 00 | 0A
IDS 440/445/460 60 | 40 | 00 | 00 | 5A
Epson MX-80 E8 | C8 | 00 | 00 | 0A
TI 810 E8 | C0 | 00 | 00 | 0A
Any printer connected | | | |
with Apple II cable 00 | 00 | 00 | 00 | 00

For further information on the Data Configuration Block please refer to

page 19 onwards of the Universal Parallel Interface card manual.

NOTE:

The driver .PARALLEL is used for two way communications i.e. for input and
output, when using the 40 pin connector. This driver has a three byte
configuration block. Please refer to pages 29 onwards in the UPIC manual for
more information.
Copyright 1988 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: HTS,CNFG

### END OF FILE A2TIL184.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 283 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL185.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple III: Apple Disk Drives and Emulation Mode

Header: Apple III: Apple Disk Drives and Emulation Mode

The Apple II emulation mode on the Apple III is configured so that the
internal drive looks like Slot 6, Drive 1 and the first external drive looks
like Slot 6, Drive 2. Emulation mode can't access the third or the fourth
external drive.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL185.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 284 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL186.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple III: Apple II Emulation mode and RGB Video

Header: Apple III: Apple II Emulation mode and RGB Video

The Apple III's RGB color video outputs do NOT generate a color signal for
High-Resolution Graphics in the Emulator. Apple II High-Resolution images are
available only on the NTSC black and white and color video outputs.

On the left border of the high-resolution graphics screen, the dots flicker
uncontrollably.
Apple III Owner's Guide, page 144

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL186.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 285 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL187.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple III: Cables for Various Printers (1 of 4)

Header: Apple III: Cables for Various Printers (1 of 4)

Version 1.0

Special Cables:

APPLE III DRIVERS AID CABLE "A"

(This is the diagram for the "standard" Apple Distributed Modem Eliminator
cable; Apple Part Number A3M0019).

Device Manufacturer and Models:

Apple Daisy Wheel Printer (Apple P/N A3M0025)
Apple Sprint 5/45 (Apple P/N D2M0060)
C. Itoh F-10
MPI 88G
MPI 99G
Comrex CR-1
Brother HR-1
Hewlett Packard 7725
Hewlett Packard 7470A
Anderson Jacobson 832
Anderson Jacobson 833
Anderson Jacobson 841
Qume Sprint 11

Pin-to-Pin Connections:

Apple II (Male) Serial Device (usually Female)

1 o----------------------------o 1
7 o----------------------------o 7
2 o----------------------------o 3
3 o----------------------------o 2
4 o---+------------------------o 8
5 o---+ +---o 4
8 o------------------------+---o 5
6 o----------------------------o 20
20 o----------------------------o 6

Wiring Comments:

Tie Apple III pins Tie device pins

4 + 5 together 4 + 5 together

Apple III pins 4 + 5 Device pins 4 + 5

tie to device pin 8 tie to Apple III pin 8

NOTE: For proper operation when using the Apple III Super Serial Card (Apple
P/N A2B0044) in an Apple III make sure that switch SW 2-6 (on the card) is in
the "ON" position and that the jumper block (also on the card) is in the
"TERMINAL" Position.

Apple III Drivers Aid Cable "B"

Device Manufacturer and Models:

NEC 3500R
NEC 3510
NEC 3515
NEC 3520
NEC 3525

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 286 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

NEC 7710
NEC 7715
NEC 7720
NEC 7725

Pin-to-Pin Connections:

Apple III (Male) N.E.C. Spinwriter (usually Female)

1 o----------------------------o 1
2 o----------------------------o 3
3 o----------------------------o 2
4 o---+ +---o 4
5 o---+ +---o 5
7 o----------------------------o 7
8 o----------------------------o 19
+---o 6
|---o 8
+---o 20

Wiring Comments:

Tie Apple III pins Tie device pins

4 + 5 together; they do 4 + 5 together; they do
not connect to the device not connect to the Apple III

Tie device pins

6 + 8 + 20 together; they do
not connect to the Apple III

Do NOT tie all five:

4, 5, 6, 8 + 20 together!

Note: For proper operation when using the Apple III Super Serial Card (Apple
P/N A2B0044) in an Apple III make sure that switch SW 2-6 (on the card) is in
the "ON" position and that the jumper block (also on the card) is in the
"TERMINAL" Position. Apple III Drivers Aid Cable "C" description on next
record.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL187.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 287 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL188.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple III: Game Paddles

Header: Apple III: Game Paddles

This article last reviewed: 21 September 1984

Standard Apple II 150K game paddles cannot be used with the Apple III. A high
impedance potentiometer like the Apple II paddle will not work properly
connected to an Apple III port.

The analog inputs on Port A and Port B of the Apple III are designed to read a
voltage between 0 and 2.4 volts and convert it to a number between 0 and 255.
The schematic on page 82 of the Apple III Owner's Guide is drawn for a
joystick with 5,000 ohm potentiometers. Only the bottom 20% of the
potentiometer's range is used. Using the +12 volt power supply will result in
the most stable readings.

The following circuit can be used if the entire range of the potentiometer is
desired.

+12 or +5 volts
|
|
<
< Rs
<
|
| <------ must be 2.4 volts at this point.
|
<
GC input --->< Rp (1 - 2K ohms)
<
|
|
0 volts ____|

The voltage range at the GC inputs should go from 0v to 2.4v. The value of Rs
can be calculated for +5 volt systems with this formula:

Rs = Rp * 2.6 / 2.4

For +12 volt systems use

Rs = Rp * 9.6 / 2.4
1988

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL188.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 288 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL189.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple III: Interrupts and Reset on Peripheral Slots

Header: Apple III: Interrupts and Reset on Peripheral Slots

The Apple III slots can not respond to IRQ or RESET from the peripheral cards
in emulation mode. There is no way around it because the hardware is
different. NMI is not on the same pin as in the Apple II and will act like
RESET on the Apple II.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL189.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 289 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL190.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple III: Joystick Input--Apple II Game Incompatibility

Header: Apple III: Joystick Input--Apple II Game Incompatibility

This article last reviewed: 21 September 1984

Some machine language games that use the paddle inputs will not work on the
Apple III. The hardware for reading the analog inputs is different, and some
software will not be able to take this into account.

Also, the joystick ports on the back of the Apple III are arranged such that
some games won't work properly in Emulation mode. Most joystick oriented
games will use PDL (0) and PDL (1) for X-Y control. The ports on the Apple
III put these signals on different connectors. Here are the Apple II
Emulation Mode equivalents of the signals available on ports A and B.

pin Port A Port B

4 PDL (0) PDL (1)

5 PB1 PB2
8 PDL (2) PDL (3)
9 PB3
Copyright 1984 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL190.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 290 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL191.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple III: Printing from BASIC and Pascal

Header: Apple III: Printing from BASIC and Pascal

Many times it is desirable to have a program send selective, processed output

to the printer. Both Business BASIC and Pascal have the commands to handle
this chore; however, none of the language reference manuals provide an example
for printing to a printer where the syntax of the commands is illustrated.

When directing output to the printer, it is important to remember that Apple

III's Sophisticated Operating System (SOS) treats everything as a file. In
this sense, any output, whether to a printer or diskette, is handled
identically:

1. Programs pass data to SOS as files.

2. In SOS, the SOS File Manager passes the file to the appropriate device
driver.

3. The device driver passes the output to the selected device.

The device driver does the job of transmitting the output in the fashion that
the device requires it. Input data follows the same path, only in reverse.
Understand these passes of files through the operating system. SOS and the
device drivers can handle the details; you must handle the concept.

Here is an example of printing to both screen and printer from a Business

BASIC program. Without the delay subroutine in line 100, everything would
appear to happen at once, so we have it in the program only to improve the
sense of sequence during execution.

10 OPEN#1,".printer": REM Declare the printer as a file.

20 PRINT "This is a test.": GOSUB 100
30 REM Output goes to the screen.
40 PRINT#1 "This is a test.": GOSUB 100
50 REM Output goes to File #1, the printer.
60 PRINT "This goes to the screen.": GOSUB 100
70 REM Without file specification
80 PRINT#1 "This goes to the printer."
90 CLOSE#1: END: REM Close the file ".printer" and end.
100 FOR delay = 1 to 2000: NEXT delay: RETURN

The program could also use ".silentype" for the printer device driver.

The seperate statements OUTPUT#x and PRINT can be used in succession to

direct output to device x.

For instance, to simply list a program to the printer, the following

commands can be entered at the keyboard in direct mode.

OPEN#1, .printer (Notice, no quotes are needed in direct mode.

OUTPUT#1 (Routes all subsequent output to File #1)
LIST
CLOSE (CLOSE in place of CLOSE#1 will close all
files instead of ".printer" -- with no other
files open it's just easier to type.)

There are other useful commands using this concept which are variations of
other familiar BASIC commands besides PRINT. They are GET#1, INPUT#1, READ#1,
and WRITE#1. The Apple III can have as many as ten files open for input and
output at one time, so, where "#1" is used in the examples, it could be "#7",
and so on.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 291 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

The following is an example of how to print both to the screen and printer
from a Pascal program. Again, the delay procedure is not necessary.

program PRINT_OUTPUT;
var OutFile: text;

procedure DELAY;
var Count: integer;
begin
for Count := 1 to 2000 do
end; {Delay}

begin
rewrite (OutFile, '.printer'); {Declare the printer}
{as a file.}
writeln ('This is a test.'); {Output goes to the screen.}
DELAY;
writeln (OutFile, 'This is a test.'); {Output goes to}
{the printer.}
DELAY;
writeln ('This goes to the screen.');
DELAY;
writeln (OutFile, 'This goes to the printer.');
close (Outfile) {Close the file ".printer" and end.}
end. {Print_Output}

The Apple III can have as many as ten files open for input and output at one
time; "OutFile" is only one. Additional files can be declared with additional
REWRITE statements.

To simply list a program to the printer, go to the Filer and transfer the text
file to .PRINTER (for the Apple III) or to PRINTER: (for the Apple II and
Apple IIe).

Since Pascal treats output as a file, both of these examples work with both
Apple II and Apple III Pascal.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL191.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 292 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL192.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple III: Specifications (Discontinued 9/85)

Header: Apple III: Specifications (Discontinued 9/85)

Article Created: 14 March 1991

Video Display
-------------
Text and graphics may be displayed simultaneously. Using graphics commands
you can display either of two screen buffers.

Graphics modes:
* 280 x 192, 16 colors (with some limitations)
* 280 x 192, monochromatic; -140 x 192, 16 colors
* 560 x 192, monochromatic
* All Apple II modes (in emulation)

Text modes:
* 80-column, 24-line monochromatic
* 40-column, 24-line, 16-color foreground and background
* 40-column, 24-line monochromatic

All text modes have a software-definable 128-character set (uppercase and

lowercase) with normal or inverse display.

Central Processing Unit (CPU)

-----------------------------
The custom-designed microprocessor circuitry of the Apple III uses the
6502B as its major component. Other circuitry provides extended
addressing capability, relocatable stack, zero page, and memory mapping.
* Type: 6502B
* Clock Speed: 1.4 MHz average; 1.8 MHz max
* Operations per Second (8-bit): up to 750,000
* Data Bus: two 8-bit formats, combined for extended addressing
* Address Bus: 19 bits
* Address Range: 262,144 bytes (256K)
* Registers:
Accumulator (A); Index Registers (X,Y): Stack Pointer (S); Program
Counter (PC); Environmental Register (E); Bank (B); Zero Page (Z);
Processor Status (P)

Memory
------
* 256K dynamic RAM
* 4K ROM (initialization and self-test diagnostics)

SOS (Sophisticated Operating System)

------------------------------------
SOS handles all system I/0 and can be configured to handle standard or
custom I/0 devices and peripherals by adding or deleting "device drivers."
All languages and application programs access data through the SOS file
system.

Keyboard
--------
* 61 keys on main keyboard
* 13 keys on numeric keypad
* Full 128-Character, ASCII encoded
* All keys have automatic repeat
* Four directional-arrow keys with two-speed repeat
* Two user-definable Apple keys
* Seven other special keys: Shift, Control, Alpha Lock, Tab, Escape,

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 293 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Return, Enter.

Storage Devices
---------------
* One built-in 5.25-inch, floppy-disk drive, 140K (143,360 bytes) per
diskette
* You can connect three additional drives by daisy-chain cable (total:
560K on-line storage)
* You can add up to four ProFile hard-disk drives (5MB each) with plug-in
interface cards

Video Output
------------
* RCA phono connector for NTSC monochromatic composite video
* DB-15 connector for:
* NTSC-color composite video
* NTSC monochromatic composite video
* RGB color video
* Composite sync signal
* Power-supply voltages
* Color signals appear as 16-level grey scale on monochromatic displays

Audio Output
------------
* Built-in two-inch speaker, miniature phono jack on back panel
* Driven by 6-bit D/A converter or fixed frequency "beep" generator

Serial (Printer/Modem) Port

---------------------------
* RS-232C compatible, DB-25 female connector
* Software-selectable baud rate and duplex mode
* You can use one port for the Silentype printer.

Expansion Ports
---------------
* Four 50-pin expansion slots (fully buffered, with interrupt and DMA
priority structure)
* Joystick/Silentype Ports: Two DB-9 connectors

Languages Available
-------------------
* Apple Business BASIC
* Apple Ill Pascal
* Apple III COBOL

Emulation Mode
--------------
This mode provides hardware emulation of 48K Apple II Plus. It can run most
Apple II programs, with the exception of Pascal and FORTRAN, without
modification.

Electrical Specifications
-------------------------
Plug the Apple III's power cord into a three-wire 110-120 VAC outlet. The
Apple III meets the following agency regulations:
* UL 114, Office Appliances and Business Equipment
* CSA 22.2, No. 154-Data Processing Equipment

Physical Specifications
-----------------------
* Height: 4.8 in. (12.20 cm)
* Depth: 18.2 in. (46.22 cm)
* Width: 17.5 in. (44.45 cm)
* Weight: 26 lb. (11.8 kg)
Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: SPECSHT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 294 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

### END OF FILE A2TIL192.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 295 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL193.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple LaserWriter Printers: Models Supporting Apple II (5/96)

Header: Apple LaserWriter Printers: Models Supporting Apple II (5/96)

Article Created: 8 May 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article contains a list of LaserWriter models supporting the Apple II

computer series.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

In order for an Apple LaserWriter to work with an Apple II system, the

LaserWriter hardware needs to support Diablo (straight text) mode. Diablo
mode allows the printer to understand text data from the Apple II and convert
that data into a printed page. The Apple LaserWriters supporting hardware
Diablo mode are the:

LaserWriter (original model) LaserWriter Plus

LaserWriter IINT
LaserWriter IINTX
Personal Laserwriter NT

To put the LaserWriter hardware in Diablo (straight text) mode, do the

following:

Begin_Table

+=========================+====================================+
| Model | What to do for Diabo mode |
+=========================+====================================+
| LaserWriter | Change dial on back of LaserWriter |
| | to SPECIAL |
+-------------------------+------------------------------------+
| LaserWriter Plus | Change dial on back of LaserWriter |
| | to SPECIAL |
+-------------------------+------------------------------------+
| LaserWriter IINT | Dipswitch 1 = UP |
| | Dipswitch 2 = Down |
+-------------------------+------------------------------------+
| LaserWriter IINTX | Dipswitch 2 = UP |
| | Dipswitch 3 = UP |
| | ALL Others = DOWN |
+-------------------------+------------------------------------+
| Personal LaserWriter NT | Change pinwheel dial to Setting 3 |
+-------------------------+------------------------------------+

End_Table
Copyright 1996, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL193.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 296 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL194.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple Logo II: Specifications (Discontinued)

Header: Apple Logo II: Specifications (Discontinued)

Order #: D2D0100

--Technical Specifications

Operating System: DOS; for use with Logo II, Logo DOS files can be
converted to ProDOS files with the CONVERT program on the ProDOS User's
Disk or the II System Utilities Disk

--Package
1. Disk: Apple Logo Master
2. Disk: Apple Logo Backup
3. Manual: An Introduction to Programming through Turtle Graphics
4. Manual: Apple Logo Reference

--System Configuration

1. Apple II Plus, IIe or IIc personal computer

2. Apple II disk drive with controller
3. Apple Language Card
4. Video Display: television or monitor
5. Recommended: ImageWriter or other compatible printer; color display;
AppleMouse
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL194.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 297 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL195.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple Pascal 1.3: Startup Slot

Header: Apple Pascal 1.3: Startup Slot

This article last reviewed: 21 January 1991

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

What is the memory location for the slot number of the drive that Apple
Pascal starts up from? How can I change that information or location so the
computer will think it was booted from the RAM disk (to which I've already
copied the appropriate system files)?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The internals of Apple II Pascal are proprietary and confidential and we

cannot divulge such information.

However, it is possible to completely load Apple II Pascal into an Apple II

RAM Expansion card and start up from it. Here's how:

1) Once you have started Apple Pascal and you are at the command line, type
F(ile.

2) At the second command line, type V(ols. Write down the volume number
with 2048 blocks. This is your RAM Expansion Card volume number.

3) Format the RAM Expansion Card. Type Q(uit and then X(ecute.
This will prompt you for a file name. Type "Formatter" and press Return.
Formatter will ask you for a volume to format: type the volume number
you wrote down in step 2, and press Return.
4) Do a wild card copy of all the files on Volume 4 to the volume
number of your RAM Expansion Card. Type F(ile then T(rans.
When you're asked "Transfer What File?", type "#4:=" and press Return.
At the "to where?" prompt, type your RAM Expansion Card volume number
followed by ":=" and press Return.

5) When the copying is finished, make your RAM Expansion Card the startup
volume. Type Q(uit followed by another Q and Y. Finally, type
Control-Reset.

6) At the Applesoft BASIC prompt, type "PR#" followed by the slot number of
your RAM Expansion Card. Pascal should start up.

Apple Pascal supports a maximum of 128K RAM for system memory use, and the
remaining RAM may be used as a RAM disk only.
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL195.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 298 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL196.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple Products: Dates Introduced and Discontinued (2/97)

Header: Apple Products: Dates Introduced and Discontinued (2/97)

Article Created: 20 November 1992

Article Reviewed/Updated: 25 February 1997

TOPIC ------------------------------------------------------------

This article lists the approximate date of introduction and, where

applicable, the date when the model was discontinued for various Apple
products. Dates which are missing from the table will be added as they occur.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Begin_Table

COMPUTER SYSTEMS
================

Apple II Series Introduced Discontinued

--------------- -------------- --------------
Apple II August 1978 December 1982
Apple II+ June 1979 June 1983
Apple IIc April 1984 September 1988
Apple IIc Plus September 1988 November 1990
Apple IIe January 1983 March 1985
Apple IIe Enhanced March 1985 November 1993
Apple IIGS September 1986 December 1992

Apple III Series Introduced Discontinued

---------------- -------------- --------------
Apple III May 1980 September 1985
Apple III+ December 1983 September 1985

Lisa Introduced Discontinued

---- -------------- --------------
Lisa 2 January 1984 January 1985
Lisa 2/5 January 1984 January 1985
Lisa 2/10 January 1984 January 1985

Macintosh Introduced Discontinued

--------- -------------- --------------
Mac 128K January 1984 October 1985
Mac 512K September 1984 April 1986
Mac 512Ke April 1986 August 1986
Mac Plus January 1986 October 1990
Macintosh Classic October 1990 October 1991
Macintosh Classic II October 1991 September 1993
Macintosh Color Classic February 1993 May 1994
Macintosh LC November 1990 March 1992
Macintosh LC II March 1992 March 1993
Macintosh LC III February 1993 February 1994
Macintosh LC 475 October 1993
Macintosh LC 520 June 1993 February 1995
Macintosh LC 550 February 1994 April 1995
Macintosh LC 575 February 1994 April 1995
Macintosh LC 580 April 1995
Macintosh LC 630 July 1994 April 1995
Macintosh LC 630
DOS Compatible April 1995 April 1996
Macintosh Portable September 1989 January 1991

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 299 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Macintosh SE March 1987 October 1990

Macintosh SE/30 January 1989 October 1990
Macintosh SE FDHD August 1989 October 1990
Macintosh TV October 1993
Macintosh XL January 1985 August 1986

Macintosh II Introduced Discontinued

------------ -------------- --------------
Macintosh II March 1987 January 1990
Macintosh IIx October 1988 October 1990
Macintosh IIcx March 1989 March 1991
Macintosh IIci September 1989 February 1993
Macintosh IIfx March 1990 April 1992
Macintosh IIsi October 1990 March 1993
Macintosh IIvx October 1992 October 1993

Centris Introduced Discontinued

------- -------------- --------------
Macintosh Centris 610 February 1993 October 1993
Macintosh Centris 650 February 1993 October 1993
Macintosh Centris 660AV August 1993 October 1993

Quadra Introduced Discontinued

------ -------------- --------------
Quadra 605 October 1993 October 1994
Quadra 610 October 1993 May 1994
Quadra 630 July 1994 April 1995
Quadra 650 October 1993 September 1994
Quadra 660AV October 1993 September 1994
Quadra 700 October 1991 March 1993
Quadra 800 February 1993 March 1994
Quadra 840AV August 1993 July 1994
Quadra 900 October 1991 May 1992
Quadra 950 May 1992 October 1995

Power Macintosh Introduced Discontinued

--------------- -------------- --------------
Power Macintosh 4400/160 November 1996
(Europe only)
Power Macintosh 4400/200 February 1997
Power Macintosh 5200/75 LC April 1995 April 1996
Power Macintosh 5260/100 April 1996
Power Macintosh 5260/120 October 1996
Power Macintosh 5300/100 LC September 1995
Power Macintosh 5400/120 April 1996
Power Macintosh 5400/180 October 1996
Power Macintosh 5500/225 February 1997
Power Macintosh 6400/200 October 1996
Power Macintosh 6500/225 February 1997
Power Macintosh 6500/250 February 1997
Power Macintosh 6100/60 March 1994 January 1995
Power Macintosh 6100/60AV March 1994 January 1995
Power Macintosh 6100/66 January 1995 October 1995
Power Macintosh 6100/66AV January 1995 April 1995
Power Macintosh 6100/66
DOS Compatible January 1995
Power Macintosh 7100/66 March 1994 January 1995
Power Macintosh 7100/66AV March 1994 January 1995
Power Macintosh 7100/80 January 1995 January 1996
Power Macintosh 7100/80AV January 1995 August 1995
Power Macintosh 7200/75 August 1995 March 1996
Power Macintosh 7200/90 August 1995
Power Macintosh 7200/120 April 1996
Power Macintosh 7200/120 April 1996 February 1997
PC Compatible
Power Macintosh 7300/180 February 1997

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 300 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Power Macintosh 7300/200 February 1997

Power Macintosh 7500/100 August 1995
Power Macintosh 7600/120 April 1996
Power Macintosh 7600/200 November 1997
Power Macintosh 8100/80 March 1994 January 1995
Power Macintosh 8100/80AV March 1994 January 1995
Power Macintosh 8100/100 January 1995 October 1995
Power Macintosh 8100/100AV January 1995 August 1995
Power Macintosh 8100/110 November 1994 August 1995
Power Macintosh 8200/100 April 1996
Power Macintosh 8200/120 April 1996
Power Macintosh 8500/120 August 1995
Power Macintosh 8500/132 April 1996
Power Macintosh 8500/150 April 1996
Power Macintosh 8500/180 August 1996
Power Macintosh 8600/200 February 1997
Power Macintosh 9500/120 June 1995 May 1996
Power Macintosh 9500/132 June 1995 July 1996
Power Macintosh 9500/150 April 1996 August 1996
Power Macintosh 9500/200 August 1996
Power Macintosh 9500/180MP August 1996
Power Macintosh 9600/200 February 1997
Power Macintosh 9600/200MP February 1997

PowerBook Introduced Discontinued

--------- -------------- --------------
PowerBook 100 October 1991 July 1992
PowerBook 140 October 1991 August 1992
PowerBook 145 August 1992 June 1993
PowerBook 145b June 1993 July 1994
PowerBook 150 July 1994 October 1995
PowerBook 160 October 1992 August 1993
PowerBook 165 August 1993 July 1994
PowerBook 165c February 1993 December 1993
PowerBook 170 October 1991 October 1992
PowerBook 180 October 1992 May 1994
PowerBook 180c June 1993 March 1994
PowerBook 190/66 August 1995
PowerBook 190cs/66 August 1995 September 1996*
PowerBook 520 May 1994 June 1995
PowerBook 520c May 1994 September 1995
PowerBook 540 May 1994 October 1994
PowerBook 540c May 1994 August 1995
PowerBook 550c May 1995
(Available in Japan Only)
PowerBook 1400cs/117 October 1996
PowerBook 1400c/117 October 1996 February 1997
PowerBook 1400c/133 October 1996
PowerBook 3400c/180 February 1997
PowerBook 3400c/200 February 1997
PowerBook 3400c/240 February 1997
PowerBook 5300/100 August 1995 August 1996
PowerBook 5300c/100 August 1995 September 1996**
PowerBook 5300ce/117 August 1995 September 1996
PowerBook 5300cs/100 August 1995 August 1996
PowerBook Duo 210 October 1992 October 1993
PowerBook Duo 230 October 1992 July 1994
PowerBook Duo 250 October 1993 May 1994
PowerBook Duo 270c October 1993 May 1994
PowerBook Duo 280 May 1994 November 1994
PowerBook Duo 280c May 1994 January 1996
PowerBook Duo 2300c/100 August 1995

NOTE:
* The PowerBook 190cs 8/500 configuration was discontinued 9/96,
the 4/500 configuration was not.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 301 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

** The PowerBook 5300c 8/500 configuration was discontinued 9/96,

the 16/750 configuration was not.

PowerBook Docking Solutions Introduced Discontinued

--------------------------- -------------- --------------
PowerBook Duo MiniDock October 1992 August 1995
PowerBook Duo Dock October 1992 July 1995
PowerBook Duo Dock II May 1994 May 1995
PowerBook Duo Dock Plus May 1995

Performa Introduced Discontinued

--------- -------------- --------------
Performa 200 October 1992 April 1993
Performa 400 October 1992 April 1993
Performa 405 April 1993
Performa 410 October 1993
Performa 430 April 1993
Performa 450 April 1993
Performa 460 October 1993
Performa 466 October 1993
Performa 467 October 1993
Performa 475 October 1993
Performa 476 October 1993
Performa 550 October 1993
Performa 560 January 1994
Performa 575 April 1994
Performa 577 April 1994
Performa 578 April 1994
Performa 580 May 1995
Performa 588 April 1995
Performa 600 October 1992 October 1993
Performa 630 July 1994
Performa 630CD July 1994
Performa 631 July 1995
Performa 635 July 1994
Performa 635CD July 1994
Performa 636 July 1994
Performa 637CD July 1994
Performa 638CD July 1994
Performa 640
DOS Compatible May 1995
Performa 5200CD July 1995
Performa 5210 May 1995
Performa 5215 July 1995
Performa 5220 May 1995
Performa 5300 October 1995
Performa 6110 September 1994
Performa 6112 September 1994
Performa 6115 September 1994
Performa 6116 July 1995
Performa 6117 September 1994
Performa 6118 September 1994
Performa 6200 July 1995
Performa 6205 August 1995
Performa 6214 August 1995
Performa 6216 July 1995
Performa 6218 July 1995
Performa 6220 July 1995
Performa 6290 January 1996
Performa 6230 July 1995
Performa 6300 October 1995
Performa 6320 April 1996 September 1996
Performa 6400 August 1996
Performa 6360/160 October 1996

Apple Servers Introduced Discontinued

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 302 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

------------- --------------- --------------

Network Server 500/132 April 1996
Network Server 700/150 April 1996
Network Server 700/200 September 1996
Workgroup Server 60 July 1993 October 1993
Workgroup Server 80 March 1993 October 1994
Workgroup Server 95 March 1993 April 1995
Workgroup Server 6150/60 April 1994 April 1995
Workgroup Server 6150/66 April 1995 October 1995
Workgroup Server 7250/120 Feb 1996
Workgroup Server 8150/80 April 1994
Workgroup Server 8150/110 April 1995
Workgroup Server 8550/132 September 1996
Workgroup Server 8550/200 September 1996
Workgroup Server 8550/132 April 1996
Workgroup Server 9150/80 April 1994 October 1994
Workgroup Server 9150/120 April 1995

PRINTERS
========

ImageWriters Introduced Discontinued

------------ -------------- --------------
ImageWriter 15" April 1984 September 1987
ImageWriter I June 1984 December 1985
ImageWriter II September 1985
ImageWriter LQ August 1987 December 1990

LaserWriters Introduced Discontinued

------------ -------------- --------------
Color LaserWriter 12/600 June 1995
LaserWriter March 1985 February 1988
LaserWriter 12/640 PS June 1996
LaserWriter 16/600 PS September 1994
LaserWriter Plus January 1986 February 1988
LaserWriter IISC January 1988 July 1990
LaserWriter IINT January 1988 October 1991
LaserWriter IINTX January 1988 October 1991
LaserWriter IIf October 1991 May 1993
LaserWriter IIg October 1991 October 1993
LaserWriter Pro 600 January 1993 October 1993
LaserWriter Pro 630 January 1993 September 1994
LaserWriter Pro 810 October 1993 November 1994
LaserWriter Select 300 February 1993 January 1995
LaserWriter Select 310 February 1993 January 1994
LaserWriter Select 360 October 1993 April 1996
Personal LaserWriter LS March 1991 May 1993
Personal LaserWriter NT July 1990 1994
Personal LaserWriter NTR March 1992 September 1993
Personal LaserWriter SC June 1990 September 1993
Personal LaserWriter 300 June 1993 1994
Personal LaserWriter 320 October 1993 September 1995

StyleWriters Introduced Discontinued

------------ -------------- --------------
Color StyleWriter 1500 February 1996
Color StyleWriter 2200 June 1995
Color StyleWriter 2400 September 1994
Color StyleWriter 2500 February 1996
Color StyleWriter Pro February 1994 December 1995
Portable StyleWriter June 1993 May 1995
StyleWriter March 1991 January 1993
StyleWriter 1200 April 1995
StyleWriter II January 1993 April 1995

Other Printers Introduced Discontinued

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 303 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

-------------- -------------- --------------

Apple Color Printer January 1993 February 1994
Apple Daisy Wheel Printer May 1980 September 1986
Apple Dot Matrix Printer May 1980 December 1985
Scribe April 1984 August 1986
Silentype January 1980 June 1984

OTHER PRODUCTS
==============

Scanners Introduced Discontinued

------------ -------------- --------------
Apple Scanner August 1988 September 1991
Apple OneScanner September 1991 June 1994
Apple Color OneScanner January 1993
Apple Color OneScanner 600/27 March 1996
Apple Color OneScanner 1200/30 September 1996

Digital Cameras Introduced Discontinued

--------------- -------------- --------------
QuickTake 100 February 1994
QuickTake 150 March 1995
QuickTake 200 February 1997

Monitors Introduced Discontinued

------------ -------------- --------------
AppleColor High-Res RGB March 1987 December 1992
AppleColor RGB September 1986 January 1993
AppleVision 1710 January 1996
AppleVision 1710AV August 1995
Apple AudioVision 14 August 1993 October 1995
Apple Basic Color February 1993 October 1993
Apple Color Plus Display October 1993
Apple High-Res Mono March 1989 February 1991
Apple Multiple Scan 14 August 1995 February 1997
Apple Multiple Scan 15 July 1994 February 1997
Apple Multiple Scan 17 March 1994
Apple Multiple Scan 20 March 1994
Macintosh 12-inch Mono December 1990 October 1993
Macintosh 12-inch RGB October 1990 March 1993
Macintosh 16-inch Color October 1991 April 1994
Macintosh 21-inch Color October 1991 March 1994
Macintosh Color 14 Display December 1992
Macintosh Portrait Display March 1989 December 1992
Macintosh Two-Page Mono March 1989 December 1992
Performa Display September 1992 July 1994
Performa Plus Display September 1992

Modems Introduced Discontinued

------------ -------------- --------------
Apple Personal Modem September 1985 December 1990
Apple Modem 2400 July 1989 December 1992
PowerBook Data/Fax Modem October 1991 November 1993
PowerBook Express Modem October 1992
PowerBook Express Modem II October 1992
(Available in Europe Only)

PIE Introduced Discontinued

------------ -------------- --------------
Apple MessagePad August 1993 March 1994
Apple MessagePad 100 March 1994 January 1995
Apple MessagePad 110 March 1994 January 1995
Apple MessagePad 120 January 1995
Apple MessagePad 130 March 1996
Apple MessagePad 2000 February 1997

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 304 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Apple eMate 300 February 1997

End_Table

Article Change History:

25 Feb 1997 - Added discontinued date for 5300ce.
24 Feb 1997 - Corrected name of a PowerBook 5300 model.
18 Feb 1997 - Added new PowerBook Computer and MessagePads.
Copyright 1992-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: review,ktable,newton

### END OF FILE A2TIL196.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 305 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL197.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple Software and Hardware Diagnostic Part Numbers (9/95)

Header: Apple Software and Hardware Diagnostic Part Numbers (9/95)

Article Created: 20 December 1985

Article Reviewed/Updated: 7 September 1995

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

The article contains the most recent part numbers for all Apple diagnostics.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Begin_Table

PRODUCT P/N REV DESCRIPTION

-------------- ----------------------------------------------

APPLE TECHSTEP: Available Accessories

Z077-8668 Power Adapter, Apple TechStep, Europe
X077-8668 Power Adapter, Apple TechStep, Australia
JA077-8668 Power Adapter, Apple TechStep, Japan
B077-8668 Power Adapter, Apple TechStep, U.K.
699-0578 Carrying Case, Apple TechStep
590-4512 Cable, Stereo, Apple TechStep
590-4501 Cable, ADB, 2-meter
590-0623 Cable, SCSI, Apple TechStep
077-8405 Cable Wrap Kit, Apple TechStep
590-0552 Cable, Mini-Din 8, 2-Meter
077-8668 Power Adapter, Apple TechStep, U.S.

Service Parts Available for the Apple TechStep

661-0703 Assy, TechStep w/o Port or ROM Packs

076-0574 Port Pack, Apple TechStep
661-0150 ROM Pack, CPU Tests, Vol. 1, v1.01
661-0157 ROM Pack, SCSI HD Tests, v1.0
661-0147 ROM Pack, CPU Tests, Vol. 2, v1.0
661-0148 ROM Pack, CPU Tests, Vol. 3, v1.0
661-0149 ROM Pack, CPU Tests, Vol. 4, v1.0

APPLE II FAMILY DIAGNOSTICS STARTER KIT

077-8313 Apple II Diagnostics and Updates--REQUIRED
(includes starter kit and one year of updates)

CONTENTS OF APPLE II FAMILY DIAGNOSTICS STARTER KIT

077-0100 B Apple II Product Diagnostic, (5.25)
077-0217 A Apple II Peripheral Diskette, (5.25)
077-0232 E Apple IIe,IIc Diagnostic 4.0, (5.25)
077-0233 H Apple IIe,IIc,IIc Plus,IIGS, IIGS 1MB
Diagnostic 4.1, (3.5)
077-0234 F Apple IIGS, IIGS 1MB Diagnostic 4.1, (3.5)
077-0274 C Apple II Hard Disk Test 1.0 and
SCSI Card Test 2.1 (5.25)
077-0316 A Apple II Video Overlay Card Diagnostic, 1.0 (5.25)
077-0340 C Apple II Hard Disk Test 1.0 and
SCSI Card Test 2.1 (3.5)
077-8148 A Apple IIc Loopback Cable
077-8219 C SCSI Loopback Test Card

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 306 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

077-8324 A Apple 5.25 Floppy Drive Test Assembly,

Version 1.0 (replaces 077-8216)
590-0552 A Cable, APM/ImageWriter II to
Apple IIGS/Macintosh Plus
661-91097 A Apple IIe 80 Col/64K Card
686-0027 A Profile Limited Data Recovery
Program 2.0, (5.25)

NOTE: Subscriptions are Non-Refundable.

APPLE II FAMILY DIAGNOSTIC RENEWAL

011-7077 Renewal, Apple II Family Diagnostic
Updates--REQUIRED

The Apple II Family diagnostics included in this package cover the

following products:

CPUs: Apple II, Apple II+, Apple IIe, Apple IIc, Apple IIc Plus,
Apple IIGS.

Monitors: Monitor II, Monitor IIc, Monitor ///, AppleColor Monitor 100,
AppleColor Composite Monitor, ColorMonitor IIe/IIc, Apple
Monochrome Monitor, AppleColor RGB Monitor, Flat Panel Display.

Drives: ProFile, Disk II, Disk ///, DuoDisk, UniDisk-Apple 5.25 Drive,
Disk IIc, UniDisk 3.5, Apple 3.5, Hard Disk 20SC.

Printers: Daisy Wheel Printer, Dot Matrix Printer, ImageWriter,

ImageWriter II, Scribe, Silentype.

Other: Apple II Memory Expansion Card, Apple II SCSI Card, Apple IIGS
Memory Expansion Card, Apple II Workstation Card, Apple IIc
Memory Expansion Card, Apple II Keyboards and Mice.

MACINTOSH FAMILY DIAGNOSTICS STARTER KIT

077-8312 Macintosh Diagnostics and Updates--REQUIRED
(Includes starter kit and one year of updates)
NOTE: This part number replaced 632-0582 as
of November 14, 1988

CONTENTS OF MACINTOSH FAMILY DIAGNOSTICS STARTER KIT

073-0301 Macintosh Family Diagnostics Reference Guide
073-0326 MacTest Pro Diagnostics User Guide
073-0368 MacTest Pro Diagnostics Reference Guide
077-0370 MacTest Pro-Application & Modules Nonbootable Disk
077-0070 MacTest Pro-Macintosh CPU Tests, Vol. 1A
077-0071 MacTest Pro-Macintosh CPU Tests, Vol. 1B
077-0371 MacTest Pro-Macintosh CPU Tests, Vol. 2
077-4221 MacTest Pro-Macintosh CPU Tests, Vol. 3
077-0372 MacTest Pro-PowerBook Tests, Vol. 1
077-0400 MacTest Pro-PowerBook Duo Tests, Vol. 1
077-0082 MacTest Pro-Power Macintosh CPU Tests, Vol. 1
077-0083 MacTest Pro-Power Macintosh Upgrade Card Tests
077-0220 MacTest 7.0
077-0243 MacTest SE
077-0244 MacTest II/IIx
077-0251 MacTest SE/30
077-0270 MacTest IIcx/IIci
077-0329 MacTest Portable
077-0359 MacTest MP
077-0360 MacTest CL
077-0258 Macintosh Peripherals Tests, Vol. 1
077-0323 Macintosh Peripherals Tests Vol. 2
077-0363 Macintosh Peripherals Test, Vol.3
077-0268 Macintosh Hard Disk Test

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 307 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

077-0362 Macintosh 16"/21" Color Display Patterns

077-0322 Connect Test
077-0328 Modem Test
077-0242 NodeCheck
072-8220 AppleCAT LaserWriter Quick Reference
077-0247 AppleCAT LaserWriter Test
077-8209 AppleCAT LaserWriter Test Adapter Cable
077-8319 LaserWriter II Test Connector
689-0045 Using Your ImageWriter LQ
590-0552 Cable, APM/ImageWriter II to Apple IIGS and Mac Plus
678-5064 CD Rom Test Disc
678-5059 Caddy - Compact Disc
077-8219 SCSI Loopback Test Card
690-8132 Inter*Poll, Network Administrator's Utility
077-8129 DB9 Serial Port Plug (Set of 2)
590-0169 DB9m to Din 25m Cable
590-0553 MINI DIN 8M to DB9F Adapter Cable
077-0673 Blank 800K Diskette
077-0674 Blank 1.4 Diskette

MACINTOSH FAMILY DIAGNOSTIC RENEWAL

011-7091 Renewal, Macintosh Family Diagnostic
Updates--REQUIRED

The Macintosh Family diagnostics included in this package cover the

following products:

CPUs: Macintosh, Macintosh Plus, SE, SE/30, Macintosh Classic/Classic II

Color Classic, Macintosh II/IIx/fx/IIcx/IIci/IIsi/IIvx/IIvi/IIvm
Macintosh LC, LC II, LC III, LC 475, LC 520, LC 550, LC 575,
Performa Series, Macintosh Quadra 605, 610, 650, 660AV, 700, 800,
840AV, 900, 950, Macintosh Centris 610, 650, 660AV,
Apple Workgroup Server 60/80/95, PowerBook 100/140/145/145B/160/
PowerBook Duo 210, 230, 250, 270c, Macintosh Portable,
Apple Macintosh TV, Power Macintosh 6100/60, 6100/60AV, 7100/66,
7100/66 AV, 8100/80, 8100/80 AV

Diskette
Drives: Macintosh 800K, Apple 3.5, Apple PC 5.25, 1.4MB SuperDrive

SCSI
Drives: Hard Disk 20, Hard Disk 20SC, 40SC, 80SC, 160SC, 400SC, 500SC, 1 GB;
DDS-DC Drive, AppleCD SC, AppleCD SC Plus, AppleCD 150, AppleCD 300

Comm/
Network: LocalTalk, EtherTalk Card, AppleFax Modem, Portable Data Modem 2400,
Apple Data Modem 2400, Ethernet NB Card, Int'l XP 2400,
PowerBook FAX/Data Modem, Macintosh Express Modem

Printers: LaserWriter, LaserWriter Plus, LaserWriter II, ImageWriter LQ

Scanners: Apple Scanner, Apple OneScanner

Displays: 12-inch RGB displays; 12-inch Monochrome display; High Res

Monochrome
Monitor; High Res RGB Monitor; Macintosh 13-inch Color Display;
Portrait Display; 16-inch Color Display; Two-Page Monochrome
Display;
21-inch Color Display; Macintosh SE/30 Display; Macintosh Classic
Display; Macintosh Classic II Display; Color Compact Macintosh
Displays; Macintosh Portable Display; PowerBook Displays,
14" AudioVision Display, Basic Color Display

Video
Cards: Macintosh II Video Card, Macintosh II Display Card 8*24;

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 308 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8*24 GC Card, 2-Page Monochrome Display Video Card, Portrait Display

Video Card, Monochrome Video Card, High Res RGB Video Card,
4*8 Video Card, Apple High Performance Video Card, Apple AV Card

Other
Cards: Mac SE PC Drive Card, Macintosh II PC Drive Card, Mac IIci Cache
Card, Apple IIe Card, Workgroup Server PDS Card, Power Macintosh
Upgrade Card

STARTER KIT HARDWARE DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS SOLD SEPARATELY:

Apple II Family:
077-0325 A Apple 5.25 Floppy Drive Test Reference Diskette

Apple IIe:
077-8219 C SCSI Loopback Test Card

Apple IIc:
077-8148 A Apple IIc Loopback Cable

Apple IIGS:
077-0317 A Apple II Video Overlay Card
Diagnostic; 1.0 (3.5)
077-8219 C SCSI Loopback Test Card
590-0552 A Cable, APM/ImageWriter II to
Apple IIGS/Mac Plus
Macintosh Family:
076-8354 A SIMM Removal Tool

Macintosh Plus:
077-8129 A DB 9 serial port plug (set of 2)--REQUIRED
077-8219 C SCSI Loopback Test Card
590-0552 A Cable, APM/ImageWriter to Apple IIGS and Mac Plus

Macintosh SE & SE/30:

077-8219 C SCSI Loopback Test Card
077-8265 A MINI DIN 8 Serial Loopback Plug
590-0551 A DB9M to MINI DIN 8M Cable
590-0553 B MINI DIN 8M to DB9F Adapter Cable

Macintosh II/IIx/IIfx:
076-0341 A IWM/SWIM IC Extraction Tool
077-8219 C SCSI Loopback Test Card
077-8264 A Macintosh II BUS Master Card
077-8265 A MINI DIN 8 Serial Loopback Plug
590-0551 A DB9M to MINI DIN 8M Cable
590-0553 B MINI DIN 8M to DB9F Adapter Cable

Macintosh IIcx/IIci:
076-0341 A IWM/SWIM IC Extraction Tool
077-8219 C SCSI Loopback Test Card
077-8265 A MINI DIN 8 Serial Loopback Plug
590-0551 A DB9M to MINI DIN 8M Cable
590-0553 B MINI DIN 8M to DB9F Adapter Cable

Macintosh Portable:
590-0552 A Cable, APM, ImageWriter to Apple IIGS/Mac Plus

AppleColor Hi-Res RGB Monitor:

126-6605 A 330 F, 25V, Jitter Adjustment

AppleCD Products:
678-5064 A CD ROM Test Disc 2.0

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 309 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

LaserWriter/LaswerWriter Plus:
076-8354 A SIMM Removal Tool
077-8209 A AppleCAT LaserWriter Test Adapter Cable

LaserWriter II:
076-8354 A SIMM Removal Tool
077-8319 A LaserWriter II Test Connector

HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS NOT INCLUDED IN STARTER KITS:

NOTE: The following tools listed as required are NOT included in the
Diagnostic Starter Kits and Updates. Although not included, they are
REQUIRED for support of the product listed.

Apple IIe:
890-5124 Loopback Plug, Communications Protocol Card

Apple III:
077-0009 A Clock Calibration Kit--REQUIRED
077-0013 B Apple/// Diagnostic Diskette--REQUIRED

Apple III Plus:

077-0032 A Apple/// Plus Dealer Diagnostic Diskette--REQUIRED

LISA: 077-8043 A Video Align Graticule, Lisa 1.0

077-8102 A Lisa Test for Lisa 1.0
077-8124 C Lisa 2/Macintosh XL Diag. 3.0--REQUIRED
077-8169 A Video Align Graticule for Mac XL/Lisa 2.0--REQUIRED

Macintosh XL:
077-0206 A Screen Mod. Kit Diagnostic 1.0--REQUIRED

Mac Plus:
077-0135 @ Macintosh Voltage Test Cable
077-8222 A SCSI Loopback Card to Mouse Port Cable

Macintosh II/IIx/IIfx/IIcx/IIci:
077-0104 A Twinax Cable w/DB 15 Connector
077-0105 A Twinax T-Connector
077-0106 A Twinax Terminator
077-0107 A Coax Cable
077-0109 A Token Ring Adaptor Cable
077-0256 * EtherTalk: Terminator Kit
077-0257 * EtherTalk: Thin Net Test Cable

Cluster Controller:
077-8156 A DataLine Monitor ROM Pack-Utilities
077-8157 A DataLine Monitor ROM Pack-SNA
077-8158 A DataLine Monitor ROM Pack-BSC

AppleLine:
970-0879 A Loopback Plug--REQUIRED

LaserWriter/Plus:
076-0121 A Power Checker, Laser--REQUIRED

LaserWriter II:
076-0121 A Power Checker, Laser--REQUIRED

Color Plotter:
686-0020 A Apple Plotter Interface Test

Apple Scanner:
077-8300 Apple Scanner Service Test Chart

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 310 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

End_Table

@ Recommended for Stocking

* These tools are required only if you support the EtherTalk Card

Article Change History:

07 Sep 1995 - Made minor corrections.
04 May 1995 - Corrected minor problem; reformatted.
27 Jun 1994 - Updated information, revised formatting.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1988-95 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL197.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 311 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL198.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple Writer II (ProDOS): Parallel printer interface problems

Header: Apple Writer II (ProDOS): Parallel printer interface problems

With parallel printer interfaces, the ProDOS version of AppleWriter II has

problems somewhat like those in AppleWorks 1.1. Apple Dealers have a patch
which upgrades the Apple Writer II software to version 2.1. This upgrade
fixes the problems with parallel printer interfaces.

The problems are less obvious with Apple Writer than with AppleWorks because
Apple Writer doesn't send as many control codes and formatting commands as
AppleWorks.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL198.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 312 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL199.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple Writer II under DOS 3.3: Printer codes from all Apples
Header: Apple Writer II under DOS 3.3: Printer codes from all Apples

Many printers have special features that the computer signals by sending
command codes. To send codes to a printer from Apple Writer II (DOS 3.3), you
must insert the codes into the Apple Writer file you want printed. The manual
of the printer may list the codes by several names: decimal, hexadecimal,
teletype abbreviations (SOH, ETX, DC1, DC3, etc.), standard keys, and
combinations of the above.

Using the chart "ASCII characters, values, and keystrokes", you have to
translate from the name of the code in the printer manual into the name of the
corresponding keystroke or keystrokes on the keyboards of the Apple II, Apple
II Plus, Apple IIe, Enhanced Apple IIe, or Apple IIc.

Some keystrokes put so-called control characters into the Apple Writer file.
These control characters are not part of the conventional English character
set; while screen shows them, the printer intercepts and does not print them,
instead recognizing them as signals to turn special functions on and off or to
change printer settings.

NOTE: In the descriptions of the keystrokes, the characters greater than and
less than, < and >, are used to contain one keystroke, which can mean
that you must simultaneously hold down the control key, the shift key,
or both as you press the other key.

With these considerations in mind, here is a list of codes and methods for
inserting them in an Apple Writer II file.

Null (ASCII value 0):

II and II Plus: <CTRL-V><CTRL-SHIFT-P><CTRL-V>

All other Apples: <CTRL-SHIFT-2>

Control-A through Control-Z (ASCII decimal values 01 through 26):

Example: Control-Z (ASCII decimal value 26): <CTRL-V><CTRL-Z><CTRL-V>

Exception: Control-V (ASCII decimal value 22) can't be entered.

See "Missing Keys" below.

Escape (ASCII value 27):

Some keystroke sequences start with or include the ESCAPE character.

On Apple II without shift key modification:

If the printer manual shows the code as an escape followed by an upper

case letter: <CTRL-V><ESC><ESC><ESC><CTRL-V>

If the printer manual shows the code as an escape followed by a non-

alphabetic character or lowercase letter: <CTRL-V><ESC><ESC><CTRL-V>
On Apple II with shift key modification: <CTRL-V><ESC><CTRL-V>

Missing keys:

To produce uppercase a-z, press the ESC key first, otherwise Apple Writer II
under DOS 3.3 enters the a-z keystroke as lowercase.

The Apple II and Apple II Plus don't have some keys: underline, backward

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 313 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

slash,
brackets, braces, vertical line, open single quote, tilde, or delete. You
can't
enter a Control-V in Apple Writer. To use these and other characters in Apple
Writer, it is necessary to create an Apple Writer glossary file from a BASIC
program.
For example, to insert the ASCII value 22 (Control-V) into an Apple Writer
file, follow these steps:

1. Start up the DOS System Master.

2. Write and save the following program:

1 REM APPLE WRITER II GLOSSARY CREATION

10 D$=CHR$(4)
20 PRINT D$;"OPEN CVGLOSS"
30 PRINT D$;"WRITE CVGLOSS"
40 PRINT "V";CHR$(22)
41 REM USE LINE 40 AS A TEMPLATE FOR OTHER NEEDED CODES
42 REM CHOOSE A DIFFERENT GLOSSARY ENTRY FOR EACH CODE
43 REM PRINT "V";CHR$(22) V=ASCII 22 (CONTROL-V)
44 REM PRINT "W";CHR$(31) W=ASCII 31 (CONTROL-UNDERLINE)
45 REM PRINT "X";CHR$(128) X=ASCII 128 (CONTROL-@ WITH THE HIGH BIT SET)
46 REM PRINT "Y";CHR$( ) Y=AND SO ON
50 PRINT D$;"CLOSE CVGLOSS"

3. Run the program, thus creating a file called CVGLOSS.

4. Start up the Apple Writer diskette.

5. Press CTRL-Q and select the option to Load a Glossary File.

6. Remove the Apple Writer diskette and insert the diskette containing
CVGLOSS.

7. Enter the name CVGLOSS at the "Enter File Name" prompt.

8. Return to Apple Writer and enter your text.

9. At any point where you need to enter a Control-V, type CTRL-G for the
glossary function and enter V (uppercase).

10. This procedure should imbed the ASCII 22 in your text. Once CVGLOSS has
been created, you can reuse it whenever necessary by following steps 5
through 9 each time you start up Apple Writer.

There's already a glossary file on the Apple Writer II diskette. This file is
named SPECIAL and contains key definitions for the keys \, ^, ~, _, |, [, ],
{,
}, ESC-D, and ESC-U.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL199.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 314 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL200.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple Writer II: DOS Version--Printing With Parallel Printers

Header: Apple Writer II: DOS Version--Printing With Parallel Printers

Apple Writer may not work properly with some parallel interface
cards. Often the interface requires a CTRL-I sequence if it is to print
wider than 40 columns. This is easy in Apple Writer II. All you need to do is
insert the

<CTRL-V><CTRL-I><CTRL-V> 132N

at the start of each file. You will have to use the CTRL-V before and
after the CTRL-I to enter it into the file. Please refer to page 51 of the
Apple Writer manual for more details.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL200.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 315 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL201.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple Writer II: DOS Version--Recovering "Lost" Text Files

Header: Apple Writer II: DOS Version--Recovering "Lost" Text Files

At times you run the risk of saving a short text file over a text file of
greater length. You might, for instance, save the empty Apple Writer editor
workspace with the same name of a valuable document. This prevents the system
accessing the original contents of the file. While the data is still on the
diskette, you have made it unaccessable to the system. This program accesses
the data so that the system may recover your original file. This program has
been tested on Apple Writer II and Apple Writer IIe files. It works with
standard DOS Text files, signified by a T in the left margin of a catalog
listing. This program does not operate with the ProDOS version of
Apple Writer.

10 TEXT : NORMAL : HOME

20 INPUT "ENTER THE FILE NAME TO BE READ ";F$
30 INPUT "FIRST BYTE TO READ ";C
40 ONERR GOTO 200
50 D$ = CHR$(4)
60 PRINT D$;"OPEN "F$",L1"
70 PRINT D$;"OPEN NEW";F$
80 B$ = ""
90 PRINT D$;"READ "F$",R";C
100 GET A$
110 C = C + 1
120 IF (ASC (A$) = 13) GOTO 170
130 B$ = B$ + A$
140 PRINT
150 IF (LEN (B$) > 254) GOTO 170
160 GOTO 90
170 PRINT : PRINT D$;"WRITE NEW";F$
180 PRINT B$
190 GOTO 80 200 PRINT : PRINT D$;"CLOSE ";F$
210 PRINT D$;"CLOSE NEW";F$
220 END

1. Type in the program and save it on your DOS disk. Run it.

2. After the program requests the name of the file that is to be

recovered, type in the name giving slot and drive specifications in
necessary--e.g., MYFILE, S6, D2.

3. Next the program prompts you for the first byte that you want to read
from the file. You type in a number which should be:

a. an integer between 1 and 32768

b. the size, in bytes, of the file that was accidentally saved plus 1.

To find the size of this accidentally saved file, [L]oad it under

Apple Writer. The size of the file is displayed on the data line after
the length entry Len:. Add one to this count and type in the result.

4. Once you have typed in your information, give the program time to run and
write the entire file. To read part of the file and the write the new
file, the program may go back to the drive several times, so please be
patient. The cursor will come back to the screen when the program is
finished.
Apple Technical Communications

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 316 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL201.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 317 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL202.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple Writer II: DOS Version--Sup-R-Term and Super Serial Card
Header: Apple Writer II: DOS Version--Sup-R-Term and Super Serial Card

Apple Writer may not print with these cards unless you set the following
switches on the Super Serial Card to:

SW2-3 off
SW2-4 off

This sets the line width to 132 columns and disables the echo to the 40 column
Apple video output.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL202.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 318 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL203.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple Writer II: Specifications (Discontinued)

Header: Apple Writer II: Specifications (Discontinued)

Article Created: 14 March 1991

Format
------
16-sector disks

Operating System Environment/Language

-------------------------------------
Apple DOS 3.3 based. Written in machine language, usable with Integer BASIC
or Applesoft BASIC.

Display
-------
Up to 24 lines of 40 or 80 characters.

Storage
-------
Up to 27,000 characters per file, 56 pages of text per disk
Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL203.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 319 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL204.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple Writer IIe under DOS 3.3: Printer codes from all Apples
Header: Apple Writer IIe under DOS 3.3: Printer codes from all Apples

Many printers have special features that the computer signals by sending
command codes. To send codes to a printer from Apple Writer IIe under DOS
3.3,
you must insert the codes into the Apple Writer file you want printed. The
manual of the printer may list the codes by several names: decimal,
hexadecimal, teletype abbreviations (SOH, ETX, DC1, DC3, etc.), standard keys,
and combinations of the above.

Using the chart "ASCII characters, values, and keystrokes", you have to
translate from the name of the code in the printer manual into the name of the
corresponding keystroke or keystrokes on the keyboard of the Apple IIe,
Enhanced Apple IIe, or Apple IIc.

Some keystrokes put so-called control characters into the Apple Writer file.
These control characters are not part of the conventional English character
set; while screen shows them, the printer intercepts and does not print them,
instead recognizing them as signals to turn special functions on and off or to
change printer settings.

NOTE: In the descriptions of the keystrokes, the characters greater than and
less than, < and >, are used to contain one keystroke, which can mean
that:
1. You must simultaneously hold down the control key, the shift key, or
both as you press the other key, or
2. You must press a special key, such as ESC or RETURN.

With these considerations in mind, here is a list of codes and methods for
inserting them in an Apple Writer file.

Null (ASCII value 0):

The following patch is for Apple Writer IIe under DOS 3.3. The patch allows
you
to enter NULs (CTRL-@) when in CTRL-V mode. The only side-effect is that the
DELETE key doesn't work for correcting a filename entered from the keyboard
for
the DOS COMMANDS or ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu; instead, just use the left
arrow
key.

--Boot the DOS 3.3 System Master diskette.

--Remove the System Master diskette, insert the Apple Writer IIe under DOS 3.3
diskette and type the following commands.

BLOAD OBJ.APWRTIIE
CALL -151
1CE1:EA EA EA EA
3EBA:EA EA EA EA
3D0G
UNLOCK OBJ.APWRTIIE
BSAVE OBJ.APWRTIIE,A$1900,L$2F58
LOCK OBJ.APWRTIIE
BLOAD OBJ.APWRTIIF
CALL -151
1D81:EA EA EA EA
4033:EA EA EA EA
3D0G

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 320 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

UNLOCK OBJ.APWRTIIF
BSAVE OBJ.APWRTIIF,A$1900,L$30D1
LOCK OBJ.APWRTIIF

If you don't want to do this to your Apple Writer IIe diskette, refer below to
the Applesoft BASIC solution.

Control-A through Control-Z (ASCII decimal values 01 through 26):

Example: Control-Z (ASCII decimal value 26): <CTRL-V><CTRL-Z><CTRL-V>

Exception: Control-V (ASCII decimal value 22) can't be entered.

See "Missing Characters" below.
Escape (ASCII value 27): <CTRL-V><ESC><CTRL-V>

Other Control characters: These can be entered in the manner of Control-A

through Control-Z.

Missing Characters:

You can't directly enter a Control-V in Apple Writer. To use these and other
characters in Apple Writer, it is necessary to use an Apple Writer glossary
file.

Apple Writer doesn't send a Null character.

Applesoft BASIC can be used to send a Null character to your printer.

1. Create your Apple Writer document as usual, but substitute a unique

character in each place that you want a Null character.

2. Type <CTRL-P> to display the Print/Programs Command menu.

3. Type PD8, Apple Writer's code for Print to Disk on an Apple II.

4. Type NP to begin printing.

5. To the Apple Writer prompt for a file name, do not enter the same name with
which the file is already saved. Enter a unique name, and note it down.

6. After the printing to disk is finished, exit Apple Writer and boot up a
ProDOS diskette.

7. Run the following program:

100 HOME
110 PRINT TAB(10);APPLE WRITER TO PRINTER"
120 VTAB 5
130 INPUT "NAME OF APPLE WRITER FILE PRINTED TO DISK: ";F$
140 IF F$="" THEN 900
145 VTAB 12
146 INPUT "CHARACTER TO REPLACE: ";X$
147 IF X$="" THEN 145
150 VTAB 10
160 INPUT "PRINTER SLOT #: ";S$
170 IF S$="" THEN 900
180 S=VAL$(S$); IF S < 1 OR S > 7 OR INT(S) <> S THEN 150
190 D$=CHR$(4)
200 ONERR GOTO 800
210 PRINT D$;"UNLOCK";F$
220 POKE 216,0
230 VTAB 12: PRINT SPC(75)
240 PRINT
250 PRINT D$;"PR#";S
260 PRINT CHR$(9);"132N"
270 PRINT D$;"OPEN";F$280 ONERR GOTO 400

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 321 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

290 PRINT D$;"READ";F$ 300 A$=""

310 GET C$
315 IF C$=CHR$(12) THEN 310
320 IF C$=CHR$(13) THEN 350
330 IF C$=X$ THEN C$=CHR$(0)
340 A$=A$+C$:GOTO 310
350 PRINT A$
390 GOTO 300
400 POKE 216,0
410 PRINT D$;"CLOSE"
420 PRINT D$;"PR#0"
430 VTAB 15
440 PRINT TAB(5);"FILE ";F$;" HAS BEEN PRINTED."
450 GOTO 900
800 POKE 216,0
810 VTAB 12
820 PRINT CHR$(7);"I CAN'T FIND THE FILE ";F$;"."
830 INPUT "";Z$
840 GOTO 100
900 END
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL204.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 322 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL205.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple Writer IIe under ProDOS: Printer codes from all Apples
Header: Apple Writer IIe under ProDOS: Printer codes from all Apples

Many printers have special features that the computer signals by sending
command codes. To send codes to a printer from Apple Writer IIe (version 2.1)
under ProDOS, you must insert the codes into the Apple Writer file you want
printed. The manual of the printer may list the codes by several names:
decimal, hexadecimal, teletype abbreviations (SOH, ETX, DC1, DC3, etc.),
standard keys, and combinations of the above.

Using the chart "ASCII characters, values, and keystrokes", you have to
translate from the name of the code in the printer manual into the name of the
corresponding keystroke or keystrokes on the keyboards of the Apple IIe,
Enhanced Apple IIe, or Apple IIc.

Some keystrokes put so-called control characters into the Apple Writer file.
These control characters are not part of the conventional English character
set; while screen shows them, the printer intercepts and does not print them,
instead recognizing them as signals to turn special functions on and off or to
change printer settings.

NOTE: In the descriptions of the keystrokes, the characters greater than and
less than, < and >, are used to contain one keystroke, which can mean that:

1. You must simultaneously hold down the control key, the shift key, or
both as you press the other key, or

2. You must press a special key, such as ESC or RETURN.

With these considerations in mind, here is a list of codes and methods for
inserting them in an Apple Writer file.

Null (ASCII value 0):

Because Apple Writer IIe (version 2.1) under ProDOS uses the null
character
to mark the end of a file, Apple Writer does not allow a null to be inserted
into the file. The inserted null would effectively delete any text after it.

Apple Writer does send a null in the place of a Control-Underline

character:
<CTRL-V><CTRL-UNDERLINE><CTRL-V>

Control-A through Control-Z (ASCII decimal values 01 through 26):

Example: Control-Z (ASCII decimal value 26): <CTRL-V><CTRL-Z><CTRL-V>

Exception: Control-V (ASCII decimal value 22) can't be entered.

See "Missing Characters" below.

Escape (ASCII value 27): <CTRL-V><ESC><CTRL-V>

Other Control characters: These can be entered in the manner of Control-A

through Control-Z.

Missing Characters:

In typing a file, there is no way to put a Control-V into the text.

During printing, Apple Writer doesn't send a Control-Underline as such.

Applesoft BASIC can be used to send a Control-V or Control-Underline to your

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 323 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

printer.

1. Create your Apple Writer document as usual, but substitute unique

characters
in each place that you want a Control-V or Control-Underline character.

2. Type <CTRL-P> to display the Print/Programs Command menu. 3. Type PD8,

Apple Writer's code for Print to Disk on an Apple II.

4. Type NP to begin printing.

5. To the Apple Writer prompt for a file name, do not enter the same name with
which the file is already saved. Enter a unique name, and note it down.

6. After the printing to disk is finished, exit Apple Writer and boot up a
ProDOS diskette.

7. Run the following program, using the following forms of line 330:

Control-V
330 IF C$=X$ THEN C$=CHR$(22)

Control-Underline
330 IF C$=X$ THEN C$=CHR$(31)

100 HOME
110 PRINT TAB(10);APPLE WRITER TO PRINTER"
120 VTAB 5
130 INPUT "NAME OF APPLE WRITER FILE PRINTED TO DISK: ";F$
140 IF F$="" THEN 900
145 VTAB 12
146 INPUT "CHARACTER TO REPLACE: ";X$
147 IF X$="" THEN 145
150 VTAB 10
160 INPUT "PRINTER SLOT #: ";S$
170 IF S$="" THEN 900
180 S=VAL$(S$); IF S < 1 OR S > 7 OR INT(S) <> S THEN 150
190 D$=CHR$(4)
200 ONERR GOTO 800
210 PRINT D$;"UNLOCK";F$
220 POKE 216,0
230 VTAB 12: PRINT SPC(75)
240 PRINT
250 PRINT D$;"PR#";S
260 PRINT CHR$(9);"132N"
270 PRINT D$;"OPEN";F$280 ONERR GOTO 400
290 PRINT D$;"READ";F$ 300 A$=""
310 GET C$
315 IF C$=CHR$(12) THEN 310
320 IF C$=CHR$(13) THEN 350
330 IF C$=X$ THEN C$=CHR$( ): REM Substitute ASCII value for unique character
340 A$=A$+C$:GOTO 310
350 PRINT A$
390 GOTO 300
400 POKE 216,0
410 PRINT D$;"CLOSE"
420 PRINT D$;"PR#0"
430 VTAB 15
440 PRINT TAB(5);"FILE ";F$;" HAS BEEN PRINTED."
450 GOTO 900
800 POKE 216,0
810 VTAB 12
820 PRINT CHR$(7);"I CAN'T FIND THE FILE ";F$;"."
830 INPUT "";Z$
840 GOTO 100
900 END

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 324 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL205.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 325 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL206.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Apple Writer IIe: DOS version--Patch for the IIc

Header: Apple Writer IIe: DOS version--Patch for the IIc

Following is the Apple Writer II Utility Program which updates, for running on
an Apple IIc, the DOS 3.3 version of Apple Writer for the IIe only.

To use this patch on your system, start by capturing the BASIC code listed
below, using MacTerminal and Access II (DOS 3.3).

Remember to capture ONLY the BASIC code portion of this message. As an

alternative, you could capture the entire message and then edit out the
unwanted portions with a text editor. Save the file as a standard DOS 3.3
text
file with the name PATCH.TEXT. Type the following from the keyboard:

EXEC PATCH.TEXT

You will see several "]"s scroll by at this point. When this stops and the
cursor returns, type:

SAVE PATCH APPLEWRITER IIE

RUN PATCH APPLEWRITER IIE

Insert your Apple Writer II master disk and press the Return key. You only
need to update your Apple Writer disk once.

After updating your Apple Writer IIe disk, mouse characters will appear on the
screen, but only when capital letters are shown in inverse--for example, a
capitalized file name appearing on the data line, or when the blinking cursor
moves over a capital letter.

NOTE: The utility program does not convert Apple Writer to run under ProDOS.

100 TEXT : SPEED= 255

105 ONERR GOTO 500
110 D$ = CHR$(4): REMCTRL-D
115 BEL$ = CHR$(7): REMBELL
120 CR$ = CHR$(13): REMRETURN
125 ESC$ = CHR$(27): REMESCAPE
130 NORMAL : HOME
135 PRINT "APPLEWRITER II UTILITY PROGRAM"
140 VTAB 4: PRINT "USE THIS PROGRAM TO UPDATE YOUR"
145 PRINT "DOS 3.3 APPLEWRITER II FOR USE"
150 PRINT "ON AN APPLE IIC COMPUTER."
155 VTAB 10: PRINT "INSERT YOUR APPLEWRITER II MASTER DISK"
160 PRINT "INTO THE DISK DRIVE AND PRESS 'RETURN' ";
165 GET A$: IF (A$ < > CR$) AND (A$ < > ESC$) GOTO 165
170 IF (A$ = ESC$) THEN HOME : END
175 PRINT
200 HOME : VTAB 12: PRINT "CAREFULLY UPDATING YOUR DISK......."
205 PRINT D$;"UNLOCK OBJ.APWRTIIE"
210 PRINT D$;"BLOAD OBJ.APWRTIIE"
215 GOSUB 300
220 HOME : VTAB 12: PRINT "CAREFULLY UPDATING YOUR DISK......."
225 PRINT D$;"BSAVE OBJ.APWRTIIE, A$1900, L$2F58"
230 PRINT D$;"LOCK OBJ.APWRTIIE"
235 PRINT D$;"UNLOCK OBJ.APWRTIIF"
240 PRINT D$;"BLOAD OBJ.APWRTIIF"
245 GOSUB 300
250 PRINT D$;"BSAVE OBJ.APWRTIIF, A$1900, L$30D1"

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 326 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

255 PRINT D$;"LOCK OBJ.APWRTIIF"

260 HOME : VTAB 12: PRINT "YOUR DISK IS NOW UPDATED."
265 NEW
300 HTAB 11
305 FOR I = 1 TO 10
310 READ AD$,VA$
315 A$ = AD$: GOSUB 400:DA = C
320 A$ = VA$: GOSUB 400:DV = C
325 PRINT ".";
330 POKE DA,DV
335 NEXT I: PRINT
340 RETURN
400 C = 0
405 FOR X = LEN (A$) TO 1 STEP - 1
410 B$ = MID$ (A$,X,1)
415 IF B$ = "A" THEN K = 10: GOTO 450
420 IF B$ = "B" THEN K = 11: GOTO 450
425 IF B$ = "C" THEN K = 12: GOTO 450
430 IF B$ = "D" THEN K = 13: GOTO 450
435 IF B$ = "E" THEN K = 14: GOTO 450
440 IF B$ = "F" THEN K = 15: GOTO 450
445 K = VAL (B$)
450 C = C + 16 ^ ( LEN (A$) - X) * K
455 NEXT X
460 RETURN
500 HOME : VTAB 11: PRINT BEL$
505 IF ( PEEK (222) < > 4) GOTO 515
510 PRINT "YOUR DISK MUST NOT": PRINT "BE WRITE PROTECTED!":
GOTO 520
515 PRINT "I/O ERROR!": RESTORE
520 FOR D = 0 TO 1000: NEXT : REMDELAY
520 GOTO 130
600 REMDATA IS IN FORMAT OF HEX ADDRESS FOLLOWED
601 REMBY THE NEW VALUE
605 DATA2EC0,F2,2ED4,FA,2EB7,F6,2E98,EC,2E94,F5
610 DATA417F,ED,4185,EC,418B,F0,4191,F4,4197,E6
615 DATA3017,F2,302B,FA,300E,F6,2FEF,EC,2FEB,F5
620 DATA42F8,ED,42FE,EC,4304,F0,430A,F4,4310,E6
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL206.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 327 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL207.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleColor Composite Monitor IIe: Description (Discontinued)

Header: AppleColor Composite Monitor IIe: Description (Discontinued)

Article Created: 26 May 1992

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes the AppleColor Composite Monitor IIe.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The AppleColor Composite Monitor IIe allows users to add color capabilities
to their Apple IIe systems.

Features
--------
* Displays high-resolution color graphics, 80-column text in monochrome, or
color graphics with text in a 40-column format.

* Can work with composite (NTSC) video output instead of RGB output, so
users simply plug the monitor into the video jack of their Apple IIe,
Apple II Plus, Apple II, or Apple IIc computer. No need for special cards
or
adaptors.

* The 13-inch screen provides a large display area for easy viewing.

The monitor provides higher resolution than standard video or television

screens. It provides a cost-effective solution for users who require color
display and 80-column text, and is compatible with all Apple software.

Order Number
------------
* AppleColor Composite Monitor IIe
A2M6021
Copyright 1992-1994, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: specsht

### END OF FILE A2TIL207.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 328 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL208.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleColor Composite Monitors: Compatible With Both IIGS and IIe
Header: AppleColor Composite Monitors: Compatible With Both IIGS and IIe

Article Created: 6 December 1991

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

There are two AppleColor Composite Monitors shown on the Apple II Products
price sheets:

- AppleColor Composite Monitor (IIGS) (part number A2M6020)

- AppleColor Composite Monitor IIe (part number A2M6021)

What are the differences? Are both compatible with both the Apple IIGS and
the Apple IIe?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Both composite monitors work with either computer. The main difference is in
the outside designs to better match the case of the computer with which the
particular monitor is associated.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL208.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 329 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL209.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleColor Monitor 100: Making it compatible with the Apple IIGS
Header: AppleColor Monitor 100: Making it compatible with the Apple IIGS

This article last reviewed: 9 November 1988

According to the Apple II Compatibility Guide (P/N A2F2204), the

AppleColor Monitor 100 is not compatible with the Apple IIGS. For the
many owners of the AppleColor Monitor 100 who are upgrading their IIe's
to the Apple IIGS, but who want to avoid having to purchase a new
monitor, there is a workaround.

Inside the AppleColor Monitor 100 on the main PC board, almost directly
under the neck of the CRT, there is a slide switch labeled "16 color/8
color". To make the AppleColor Monitor 100 work with the Apple IIGS,
set the switch to the 8 color position, and use the cable provided with
the Color Monitor 100 (svc part # 590-0194-A) to connect it to the the
Apple IIGS. This configuration makes all colors available.

Apple Computer, Inc. takes no responsibility for any damages incurred,

real or implied, that may result from this change.
Copyright 1988 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL209.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 330 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL210.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleLine: How To Use With an Apple IIe or Apple IIc (10/94)
Header: AppleLine: How To Use With an Apple IIe or Apple IIc (10/94)

Article Created: 04 November 1987

Article Reviewed/Updated: 12 October 1994

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

The following information has only been partially verified for the 3274-2.2
ROMs. Though this setup should work with the newer ROMs, this has not been
confirmed.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Hardware Configuration:

Apple IIe
Super Serial Card in Slot 2. The jumper block should be set to terminal.
Straight thru cable - 590-0037
or
Apple IIc
Apple IIc-ImageWriter/Scribe printer cable.

Gender changer - 590-0214

Appleline - 699-0239 with version 2.2 of the ROMs.
Appleline wall mounting power supply - 970-0950
(optional - Loop Back Connector - 970-0879)

Software Configuration:

ProDOS 1.1.1
Apple Access II v 1.1
Set Access II as follows:
Terminal Characteristics
"Set ANSI Mode"
"Do NOT Send LF After CR" - for Supervisor mode
or
"Send LF After CR" - for 'On-Line' mode
"7 Bits per Character"
"Enable XON/XOFF"
"Normal Video"
"Full Duplex"
"No Wraparound"
Set Speed - "2400 baud" Set Parity - "Even"

Appleline Configuration:

Terminal Type................."VT100"
Baud Rate....................."2400"
Parity........................"Even"
Autobaud......................"Enabled"
Speed Indicator..............."Disabled"
Modem type...................."Local Connect"
Auto Logoff..................."Disabled"
Special Terminal Capability..."None"
24/25 Line Automatic Toggle..."Disabled"

Notes

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 331 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

-----
1- Set Access II for 2400 baud. 4800 & 9600 seem to overrun it.

2- The autobaud sequence is OpenApple-B Return (OA-B Return).

3- If you use 8 bits per character, set parity to None in Access II and on
the Appleline.

For more information on VT-100 keypad sequences, see Apple Access II

(030-0923-A, copyright 1983), Appendix i, pp 165-166.

4 - The mapping for an Apple IIe or IIc running Access II to IBM 3278 Keys is
as follows (not checked):
3278 Key Press
-------- -----
PF1 Esc 1
PF2 Esc 2
PF3 Esc 3
PF4 Esc 4
PF5 Esc 5

PF6 Esc 6
PF7 Esc 7
PF8 Esc 8
PF9 Esc 9
PF10 Esc 0

PF11 Esc - (minus)

PF12 Esc =
PF13 Esc !
PF14 Esc @
PF15 Esc #

PF16 Esc $
PF17 Esc %
PF18 Esc ^
PF19 Esc &
PF20 Esc *

PF21 Esc (
PF22 Esc )
PF23 Esc _ (underscore)
PF24 Esc +

* NEW LINE OA-Return

ENTER Return
TAB Tab
BACK-TAB Control-OA-K
HOME Control-\

LEFT CURSOR Left-Arrow or Control-H

RIGHT CURSOR Right-Arrow or Control-U
DOWN CURSOR Down-Arrow or Control-J
UP CURSOR Up-Arrow or Control-K

PA1 Esc [
* PA2 Esc ]
* DUP Control-OA-U
* FM Control-Y
ATTN Control-A

* SYS REQ Control-B

* CURSR SEL Control-D
CLEAR Control-E
ERASE INPUT Control-L

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 332 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

ERASE EOF Control-F

* PRINT Control-P
* IDENT Control-V
* TEST Control-T
RESET Control-R
a DEV CNCL Control-R

INSERT Control-]
b DELETE Delete

* NOT TESTED

- According to the documentation (See Appleline Users Manual, Appleline

Part II: Guide to Lisa, Chapter 2, p65) Control-X should give a DEV CNCL
function, but where DEV CNCL is needed (according to the systems types
there) Control-R works. This is the same code as is used for the RESET
function.

- According to the documentation (See Appleline Users Manual, Appleline

Part II: Guide to Lisa, Chapter 2, p65) Control-underscore should work.
Instead it locks Appleline.

Article Change History:

12 Oct 1994 - Reviewed for technical accuracy.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1987-94 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL210.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 333 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL211.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleLink for Apple II: Not ProDOS-Based

Header: AppleLink for Apple II: Not ProDOS-Based

This article last reviewed: 10 September 1987

AppleLink for the Apple II is written in UCSD Pascal, using an operating

system that is not entirely compatible with ProDOS. AppleLink is
ProDOS-compatible, and you can load and save ProDOS files, but you can't
install AppleLink on a ProDOS hard disk.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL211.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 334 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL212.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleShare & Apple IIGS: "Cannot Load Descriptor File" Error
Header: AppleShare & Apple IIGS: "Cannot Load Descriptor File" Error

This article last reviewed: 25 February 1991

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I have a problem trying to install an Apple IIGS workstation on an

AppleShare network.

On my Macintosh SE/30 file server, I've installed System 6.0.5, AppleShare,

and Apple II network software. On my Apple IIGS, I made an "AppleShare on
3.5" startup disk, started it up, logged on, and installed Network Server
Startup on the file server. After starting the Apple IIGS up from the
network and setting the startup application to the Finder, I got the error
message, "CANNOT LOAD DESCRIPTOR FILE $0001." I've re-installed everything
and the problem persists.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

This sounds like an AppleShare server access privileges problem. Set the
System Icons privileges to see files and folders for everyone and make sure
that this change is made for all enclosed folders.
Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL212.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 335 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL213.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleShare 3.0: Memory and Apple II Limits (11/94)

Header: AppleShare 3.0: Memory and Apple II Limits (11/94)

Article Created: 18 October 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 11 November 1994

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

1) To run under System 7, AppleShare 3.0 needs 4MB RAM. Does this include
having the Print Serving option running as well?

2) Is 5MB enough to run AFS 3.0, APS 3.0, AppleTalk Internet Router and
support for Apple II users?

3) I saw something on a limitation of 20 some Apple II users -- is this a

simultaneous log-on limit, or can I assign only 20 users the ability to
log on from an Apple II?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

1) The 4MB requirement for AppleShare 3.0 includes concurrent operation of

both file and print services. This includes Apple II access.

2) On a 5MB Macintosh IIci system you would also be able to install the
Apple Internet Router, although for performance considerations it would
be better to have the Apple Internet Router reside on a dedicated
Macintosh. High traffic involving one of the applications can severely
impact the performance of the other.

3) Although it is possible to define up to 8,192 users/groups (including

the ability to log on from an Apple II), we would recommend not more
than 2,000 users/groups. As the number of users/groups grows beyond
2000 and approaches 8000, it can take significantly longer to start up
because it takes longer for AppleShare 3.0 to read through so many
names. It doesn't affect server running performance or the amount of
RAM required. The limitations regarding the number of users, Macintosh
and Apple II alike, that can sign on concurrently is defined in the
AppleShare 3.0 File Server Preferences. AppleShare 3.0 can accommodate
up to 120 connections at one time.

If you plan to have Apple IIGS systems start up over the network,
experience has shown that the length of time it takes to have more
than 20 Apple IIGS systems do so may exceed the customers expectations.
This will not be a problem if the Apple II systems are starting locally
and then logging on to the file server.

Article Change History:

11 Nov 1994 - Reviewed for technical accuracy.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1991-94, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL213.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 336 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL214.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleShare File Server: Allowing Apple II Network Startup

Header: AppleShare File Server: Allowing Apple II Network Startup

Article Created: 5 June 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article tells how to set up your AppleShare File Server software so
that Apple IIGS and Apple IIe systems can start up over the network.

An earlier version of this article appeared in the June 1990 "TechBeat" and
in the "Apple II Tech Bulletin" for February-March 1990. Since then, new
versions of the Apple IIGS and Macintosh operating systems have been
released, requiring updated documentation.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Assuming the hardware is already set up, the installation process should
take from one to two hours. This article assumes you are installing
AppleShare on a newer Macintosh running System 6.0.7. Note: If you are
installing on one of the older Macintosh computers, for example an SE/30,
System 6.0.5 would be an acceptable replacement for System 6.0.7.

This article also applies to those with existing AppleShare File Servers.
Where necessary, we will explain what material to skip over.

Besides Macintosh system software, you need the AppleShare File Server
software (version 2.0.1), Apple part number M0548/B. Finally, you need
Apple IIGS System Software Update Version 5.0, Apple part number A0013LL/A.
(This version is now shipping with version 5.0.4 in the box.)

Note that IIGS System 5.0.4 is a three-disk set. The third disk, a
Macintosh disk called "Apple II Setup", is essential. You will need to buy
at least one IIGS System 5.0 Software Update, because this third disk does
not ship with new IIGS systems. Table 1 lists the disks required. You also
need one blank 800K disk.

Note: For future reference, if a new version of IIGS system software is

released, use the complete three-disk set from that system instead of
version 5.0.4.

Table 1: Required Disks

Disk Name Format Comment

System Startup 6.0.7 Mac 1.44MB

System Additions 6.0.7 Mac 1.44MB
Network Products Installer 6.0.7 Mac 1.44MB

AppleShare File Server 2.0.1 Installer Mac 800K Part of A'Share 2.0.1.
AppleShare File Server 2.0.1 Admin Mac 800K Part of A'Share 2.0.1.
Apple II Setup 2.0.1 Mac 800K Part of A'Share 2.0.1.
-->Obsolete disk!

/System.Disk ProDOS 800K Part of IIGS System 5.0.4.

/System.Tools ProDOS 800K Part of IIGS System 5.0.4.
Apple II Setup 2.1.3 Mac 800K Part of IIGS System 5.0.4.
-->New version.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 337 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

1. Setting up the AppleShare File Server

----------------------------------------
Follow these steps to set up the AppleShare File Server:

1) If you have an existing server, start up from the Network Products

Installer disk and install "Apple II Setup (v2.0.1)". (Others should
skip to the next paragraph.)

2) When the Installer prompts you for the "Apple II Setup" disk, insert
the Apple II Setup version 2.1.3 disk that came with IIGS System
Software 5.0.4.

Do not insert the obsolete Apple II Setup disk that comes in the box with
AppleShare 2.0.1. For those with an existing file server, proceed to
Section 2, "Preparing AppleShare for Apple II Users".

If you haven't set up your server yet, here is how to do it:

1) Boot the Macintosh with the System Startup disk

2) Launch HDSC Setup and initialize the hard disk. When giving the hard
disk a name, use a short name that fits ProDOS conventions. The name
must begin with a letter (A to Z) and contain nothing but letters,
numerals and periods. No spaces. Lower case is permitted. For
this example, we will name the server volume "A2".

3) After the hard disk has been initialized, quit HDSC Setup and launch
the Installer. Click "Easy Install".

4) When the installation is complete, quit the Installer.

5) Double-click on the hard disk icon and open the System Folder.

6) Drag "Easy Access," and any printer drivers you don't need, to the
Trash. You can also delete MultiFinder. If you won't be doing any
printing from the file server, you can throw away Backgrounder and
PrintMonitor.

7) When you are done, select "Empty Trash" from the Special menu and close
all open windows. Then select "Shut Down" from the Special menu.

With the cleanup out of the way, it's time to install the software:

1) After the Macintosh ejects the System Startup disk, restart from the
Network Products Installer disk.

2) Launch the Installer and select "AppleShare File Server (v2.0.1)" and
holding down the Shift key, select "Apple II Setup (v2.0.1)".

3) Click Install. The Installer will prompt you for the "AppleShare
File Server" disk (that's the AppleShare Installer disk), and shortly
thereafter, the "AppleShare Administration" disk.

4) When it prompts you for the "Apple II Setup" disk, insert the Apple II
Setup version 2.1.3 disk that came with IIGS System Software 5.0.4.

Important: Do not insert the obsolete Apple II Setup disk that comes in
the box with AppleShare 2.0.1

5) When the Installer is finished, quit and restart the Macintosh, letting
it start up from the hard drive.

6) The hard drive isn't an AppleShare File Server yet, so you must set
it up. Open the System Folder on the hard drive and double-click

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 338 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

"AppleShare Admin".

7) When asked if you want to "Prepare volume 'A2' for use with
AppleShare?", click OK. You'll be asked to give the file server a name,
for example, "Apple II Forever".

8) Next, the system will prompt you for a Users and Groups file. Open
the Server Folder and click "New". Create users and groups according to
your needs and preferences, starting with the Administrator.

9) When you are done, select "Save Users and Groups as " from the File menu
and save the Users and Groups in the Server folder.

2. Preparing AppleShare for Apple II Users

------------------------------------------
Here's how to prepare AppleShare for Apple II Users:

1) If you haven't done so, get into the AppleShare Admin program. (There is
no need to shut down your server to do this.)

2) Under the Server menu select "Server Info" and click on the check box
marked "Apple II Features".

3) Click "Save". Quit the AppleShare Admin program.

4) If you were updating an existing file server, shut down the server
and restart. Others can merely select "Restart" from the Special menu
to restart the Macintosh. It will come up as an AppleShare File Server.

If you want the file server to support network startup only for Apple IIe
users, the server is now ready to start them up over the network, once you
set the access privileges on the volume. Users must be able to "See Files,
See Folders" to start up.

To set the access privileges, follow these steps:

1) Get into AppleShare Admin and select "Volume List" from the Volume menu.

2) Double-click the server volume.

3) Set the access to "See Files, See Folders" and apply the changes to
all enclosed folders -- unless you have an existing file server, in
which case you will probably need to assign access by folder.

Apple IIe users need "See Files, See Folders" access to the top level
of the server startup volume. Whether you set these changes for the
Administrator only, all users, or just the particular groups, depends
on how you have planned your server.

If you want IIGS users to be able to start up over the network, you should
continue with the next section, which tells you how to install IIGS system
software onto the server, over the network. This step is required only if
the IIGS users will be starting up over the network. If the IIGS
workstations have hard drives, you should set them up to start up GS/OS on
their hard drives, and install AppleShare. This way, they can mount server
volumes on the desktop, just like Macintosh users.

3. Installing IIGS System Software over the Network

---------------------------------------------------
Make sure you have the AppleShare File Server and the Apple IIGS connected
via LocalTalk or similar network cabling. The IIGS should have a minimum of
1MB of RAM and one Apple 3.5 Drive. (You'll save time if you equip the
IIGS with two Apple 3.5 Drives.)

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 339 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

When you turn on the IIGS, hold down the Control Open-Apple Escape keys to
get into the text Control Panel. If you have defined a RAM disk, make sure
you leave the system with at least 1MB of memory. Under Slots, ensure that
the Startup Slot is set to 5, and that Slot 5 is set to "SmartPort" and
Slot 7 to "AppleTalk" or "Built-In AppleTalk". Slot 1 should be set to
"Your Card", or on a ROM 03 IIGS to "Built-In AppleTalk". Exit from the
Control Panel and turn off the computer.

Be sure you have the original (unmodified) System.Disk and System.Tools

diskettes. Lock both diskettes to prevent accidental deleting of critical
files. You will also need one blank 800K disk to use as an AppleShare
startup disk. Follow these steps:

1) Insert the System.Disk and power on the IIGS.

2) When the Finder desktop appears, insert the blank disk and initialize
it. Call it "AppleShare".

3) Launch the Installer from System.Tools. If you have two drives, eject
the System.Disk. If you have one drive, eject the System.Tools disk.

4) Insert the blank "AppleShare" disk you just initialized and click the
"Disk" button until its name appears.

5) Select the installer script entitled "AppleShare on 3.5 Disk" and

click Install. Before installing, the system will display an alert
message explaining not to install this on your only copy of the system
disk. Click "Perform This Update" to continue. Some disk swapping will
be required.

6) When the installation is complete, make sure the AppleShare startup

disk you just created is in drive 1, and restart. To save time, you can
hold down the Control Open-Apple Reset keys rather than quitting to the
Finder and doing a Shutdown.

7) When the Finder desktop is on the screen, use the mouse to select
the graphic Control Panel under the Apple menu. If it isn't already
highlighted, click on AppleShare.

8) Select the file server and connect using the Administrator name and
password. Then select the AppleShare File Server volume and mount it.
Close the graphic Control Panel.

9) Run the Installer on System.Tools. Click the "Disk" button until the
file server name appears -- in our example, "A2".

Here is how to install some files over the network onto the file server
volume:

1) Select the following scripts: Server Network Startup, Server Quick

Logoff and optional scripts.

For optional scripts, select anything that IIGS systems staring over
the network will require. For instance, if you need access to a network
printer, like a LaserWriter or an AppleTalk ImageWriter, install those
scripts.

2) Select the optional scripts you need by holding down the Open Apple key
when you click on them.

Caution: do not try to install "Latest System Files" or "Latest System

Files (No Finder)", or IIGS users will not be able to start up over the
network. Note: There was an error in the original version of this
article that indicated you should install the "Latest System Files (No
Finder)" script. It was corrected in a subsequent issue of "TechBeat."

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 340 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

When you click "Install", the system installs the IIGS system software
over the network. To show network activities, double arrows at the top
left of the screen will flash. The installation may take some time.

3) Before you run off to grab a coffee, wait for the alert message
telling you to "install this update only on a file server's startup
volume". Click "Perform This Update" to continue.

4) When the installation is complete, hold down the Control Open-Apple

Escape keys to enter the text Control Panel.

5) Under Slots, set the startup slot to 7. The next time you start up the
IIGS, it will be over the network. First, however, you have to set up
the server for IIGS users. See section 4 below.

4. Setting up the File Server for IIGS Users

--------------------------------------------
Follow these steps:

1) Leaving the file server running, get into the AppleShare Admin program.

2) Use the Shift-click method to highlight all the IIGS users you want to
start up over the network.

3) Select "Set Startup" under the Apple II menu.

4) To have IIGS users start up into the Finder, select "Finder" under the
System folder. You can also select a default network printer if one is
available, and if you installed the drivers for them in section 3. Note
that any printers to be selected must be powered up and visible over
the network.

For Apple IIe users, you can set the startup application to be any ProDOS 8
application (file type SYS). Apple IIe systems that will start up over the
network must be equipped with AppleShare Workstation cards and 128K of RAM.
They must also be enhanced. (If you will be running Aristotle Admin, you'll
need an Apple II Memory Expansion card with at least 256K of RAM. IIGS
users who want to run Aristotle Admin need to define a RAM disk with 256K
of RAM.) IIGS users can also start up to any ProDOS 8, ProDOS-16, or GS/OS
application.

When you have finished setting up the startup information for your Apple II
users, all that remains is setting the access privileges:

1) Under the "Volumes" menu, select "Volume List", double-click on the

server volume, and a dialog box will be displayed.

2) Set the access privileges so that everyone can "See Files, See
Folders", and apply changes to all enclosed folders, unless you have an
existing server.

In such a case, you should not apply changes to enclosed folders, as

there may be folders you do not want IIGS users to have access to. IIGS
users need "See Files, See Folders" access to the top level of the
server startup volume, the System Folder, and all folders within it.
They will also need the same access to the Icons folder, which holds
IIGS Finder icons. Users may experience errors if they don't have
sufficient access for various operations. If you find some IIGS
software that needs write access to a particular folder, you should
lock that folder so that adventurous users can't throw it away.

3) When you are finished setting up access privileges, quit from the
AppleShare Admin program.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 341 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

5. Booting over the Network

---------------------------
You should now be able to start up over the network with a IIGS or a IIe. A
IIGS starting up over the network displays several different screens during
the startup process. You can verify you installed the correct version of
the Apple II Setup on your file server by watching the "Starting up over
the network" screen. It should say "2.1.3 GS.OS" at the top right if you
used version 2.1.3, which comes with IIGS System 5.0.4.

After a few moments, the system prompts the user for a user name or allow
guest access, if it is enabled. Be sure to test server logon as a normal
user, and not just as the Administrator. That way you can uncover any
access privilege problems. If you ever see an error message, take note of
any error codes and compare them to the list in the back of the "ProDOS
Technical Reference Manual" or in the "Apple IIGS GS/OS Reference." Two of
the most common errors are listed in the Appendix at the end of this
article. You'll find that most errors are easily explainable unless you
mixed up software versions during installation.

You have now completed the installation of software to allow IIGS and IIe
users to start up over the network.

Appendix: Common Errors

-----------------------
Cannot load file Start.GS.OS
Error = $0046
This is the message you get if you failed to follow Step 3 correctly. It
is a ProDOS file system error $46, which means "Path not found". The GS/OS
files the system requires to start up could not be found on the file server.
If you have multiple file-server volumes, verify you installed the IIGS System
Software over the network onto the server startup volume.

Unable to load descriptors

Error was $004E
This message denotes an access privileges problem. It is a ProDOS file
system $4E error. This means the user had insufficient access privileges
to complete the required operation, or, possibly, the file was locked. Most
likely, you haven't given the user who experienced the error "See Files,
See Folders" access to the top level of the server startup volume, the
System folder, and all folders within it.
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL214.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 342 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL215.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleShare Network: How to Check for ProDOS Files

Header: AppleShare Network: How to Check for ProDOS Files

This article last reviewed: 22 May 1990

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I have Apple IIGS systems and Apple IIe systems on an AppleShare

2.0.1 network. When the Apple IIGS starts up, it shows ProDOS 1.8 and GS/OS,
yet when the Apple IIe systems start up, they show ProDOS 1.4.

I have an application (MECC Communikeys) that apparently doesn't work

correctly
with ProDOS 1.4. (One Apple IIe works OK, but the other Apple IIe systems
lock
the entire network.)

Where is ProDOS 1.4 coming from? I've checked for P* and P16 and even copied
them from one folder to another.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

When setting up an AppleShare File Server for an Apple IIe and Apple IIGS
environment, two copies of P8 are installed. One copy is installed when the
server is updated with the Apple II Setup Disk for the AppleShare File Server
(a Macintosh disk). This copy is placed in the Server Folder. Another copy
is
installed when GS/OS is loaded from an Apple IIGS using the GS/OS SYSTEM.DISK
and SYSTEM.TOOLS (Apple IIGS disks). This copy is at the root level of the
server.

It appears that an early version of the Apple II Setup Disk was used on the
server. Earlier versions of that disk contained earlier versions of P8.
Reinstalling the Apple II setup should provide the current version of ProDOS.
Use the Apple II Setup Disk marked:

"Version 2.1; For use with Apple IIGS System Software 5.0".

How did you check for the ProDOS files? Was the check done from an
Apple IIGS? Was the check done from a Macintosh on the network? Was
checking done on the server from within the Admin application? Was the server
restarted with a floppy disk and then checked for these files?

If the check was from a Apple IIGS workstation, the Server Folder is not
visible. This is where one of the ProDOS files resides, and you would find
only one of the ProDOS files.

If you checked from a Macintosh on the network, the result would be the same
as
when checking from an Apple IIGS workstation. There is no Server Folder
available.

If checking was done on the server from within the Admin application, you
will see the Server Folder, but you cannot open that folder and review its
contents.

If the server was started up from a floppy disk and then the check was
done, a second P8 file will be visible in the Server Folder.
Copyright 1990 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 343 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

### END OF FILE A2TIL215.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 344 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL216.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleShare: Apple II Practical Node Limits

Header: AppleShare: Apple II Practical Node Limits

This article last reviewed: 28 February 1990

TOPIC -----------------------------------------

How many Apple IIs can be started up from an Macintosh SE/30 AppleShare File
Server? Theoretically, 50 nodes can be logged on to an AppleShare file server
at a time, but what is the practical limit? I've never seen an Apple II
network larger than about 30 nodes, so I can't really estimate the degradation
in performance. Do you know of any sites running 40 or more Apple IIe or
Apple
IIGS systems off of one file server?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------

With 1MB RAM, a Macintosh SE/30 allows 25 Apple II workstations to start up

from the server at the same time. With 2MB RAM, the limit is increased to 50
Apple II workstations.

The practical limit for booting depends on the user's situation. For example,
20 Apple IIGS systems starting up at same time from the same server takes
approximately 10 minutes, whereas 20 Apple IIe systems take about 4 minutes.
The reason is that the Apple IIGS has more than 120K to load across the
network, compared to about 20K for the Apple IIe.

The practical limit for workstations logged on to one server depends on the
amount of activity taking place on the network. With low traffic, 50 users
logged on at one time may be acceptable. As traffic becomes heavier, it is
probable that the practical maximum number of active users will decrease.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL216.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 345 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL217.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleShare: How To Keep Apple II & Macintosh Software Separate

Header: AppleShare: How To Keep Apple II & Macintosh Software Separate

This article last reviewed: 12 December 1989

TOPIC ---------------------------------------------

I want to use a utility (that is: Disk Tools, DiskTop or ResEdit) to make
Apple
II folders (that is: Aristotle, system, and users) invisible to Macintosh
users. I want to prevent the users from going into a folder and trashing its
contents. I could "lock" them, but if they don't know they are out there it
works better in the long run.

Is this process safe?

DISCUSSION ----------------------------------------

The problem with making those files invisible to Macintosh users is that they
will also be invisible to Apple IIGS users -- the Apple IIGS users will have
no
convenient way to launch Applesoft BASIC.

We recommend locking them. This prevents those without adequate AppleShare

privileges from removing, renaming, or replacing them.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL217.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 346 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL218.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleShare: Leave LaserWriters on for Apple II Workstations

Header: AppleShare: Leave LaserWriters on for Apple II Workstations

Article Created: 13 August 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Is there a way to download the ImageWriter emulation to a LaserWriter for

an Apple IIGS on an AppleShare network at the time the servers are turned
on each morning?

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

That would be a nice enhancement for AppleShare, but presently there is no

way to do this. We suggest you download the emulator and leave the printer
on. This won't seriously affect the life of the printer.
Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL218.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 347 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL219.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleShare: Problems Using Chooser with Apple II Computers

Header: AppleShare: Problems Using Chooser with Apple II Computers

Article Created: 14 June 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I recently set up an AppleShare Network with Apple II and Macintosh

computers. All seemed well except for a small item on the Apple II side.

Using Aristotle, everything works fine except the Chooser.

When trying to use Chooser, the window opens to show the application just
short of finishing. The Chooser then stops with a message that it cannot load
or open:

/System/System.Setup/ATInit

How can I repair the above file without reinstalling the entire AppleShare
network?

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

If you're using Apple IIGS computers, you don't need to use the Chooser
anymore. Select printers with the Control Panel.

If you're using Apple IIe computers, be sure you use the AppleShare Apple
II Setup Disk 2.1.1 or greater when setting up your server.
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL219.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 348 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL220.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleSingle/AppleDouble Formats: Developer's Note (9/94)

Header: AppleSingle/AppleDouble Formats: Developer's Note (9/94)

Article Created: 21 September 1994

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article contains the text from AppleSingle/AppleDouble Formats for

Foreign Files Developer s Note.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in

a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, mechanical,
electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without prior written
permission of Apple Computer, Inc. Printed in the United States of America.

Apple, the Apple logo, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and ProDOS are registered
trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
Finder is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
MacWrite is a registered trademark of Claris Corporation.
MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
NFS is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
UNIX is a registered trademark of AT&T Bell Laboratories.

Chapter 1: Choosing AppleSingle or AppleDouble

Terminology

Chapter 2: AppleSingle file header

Magic number
Version number
Filler
Number of entries
Entry descriptors
Predefined entry IDs
File layout
Filename conventions
ProDOS
MS-DOS
UNIX and NFS
Usage

Chapter 3: Filename conventions

ProDOS
MS-DOS
UNIX and NFS
Usage

Appendix

Preface
-------
This document describes version 2 of the AppleSingle/AppleDouble file formats.

To compare this version with version 1 of the AppleSingle/AppleDouble file

formats, refer to Appendix B of the A/UX Toolbox: Macintosh ROM Interface
manual.

You can also find a description of version 1 in the Apple II File Type Notes
for file types $E0.0001-AppleSingle and $E0.0002/$E0.0003-AppleDouble. These

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 349 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

File Type Notes are available through Apple Developer Technical Support.

Chapter 1: About AppleSingle/AppleDouble Formats

------------------------------------------------

When a file is exchanged between file systems that do not support the same
file attributes, some of the file s attributes are lost. Apple Computer has
developed two file formats, called AppleSingle and AppleDouble, that allow
files to maintain their file attributes on foreign file systems that do not
support the same attributes.

The AppleSingle and AppleDouble formats were initially developed to store

Macintosh files on file systems that do not support the Macintosh file
structure. However, these formats can also be used to represent almost any
kind of file on almost any file system. They assume only that the file
systems used allow you to create a file as a set of contiguous bytes.

The AppleSingle/AppleDouble file format is not tied to a single home file

system. A file is stored as a heterogeneous collection of data and
attributes, which are interpreted as needed by the application reading the
file.

The AppleSingle or AppleDouble format can be used

* as a standard format for transferring files among differing, or

heterogeneous, computers.
* as a standard format for transferring files within a single computer.

- Choosing AppleSingle or AppleDouble -

The AppleSingle and AppleDouble formats are alike in that they use the same
components to represent a file on a foreign system: data, resources, and
attributes. The difference between the two formats is that the AppleSingle
format stores these components in a single foreign file, and the AppleDouble
format stores these components in two foreign files one for the data, the
other for the resources and attributes.

Applications may use either AppleSingle or AppleDouble when they create files
on foreign file systems; however, they must understand both formats.

To find out which format is appropriate for you, examine your application. If
the AppleSingle format is used, home file system data cannot be moved or
deleted inconsistently; however, the AppleSingle format is harder to update.
The AppleDouble format is easier to modify but one of the two AppleDouble
files can be moved or deleted inconsistently.

If you are building an AppleTalk Filing Protocol (AFP) server (or any other
server that supports the Macintosh computer), then you may want to use one of
these formats as your application s internal or external file storage format.
The choice is yours. It doesn t matter which format is used within your
application, but it is suggested that you use one of these formats as your
external storage format so that files can be shared by other applications
running on the same machine as your application.

- Terminology -

The following terms are relevant to the discussion of AppleSingle and

AppleDouble file formats.
A Macintosh file has two forks: the resource fork and the data fork. The
resource fork contains data used by an application, such as menus, fonts, and
icons. An executable file s code is also stored in the resource fork. The
data fork contains data specific to an application.

The home file system is the primary file system for which the file s contents
were created. The home file system is not necessarily the file system in
which the file was created. For example, if a program running on a UNIX

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 350 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

system creates a file that holds a MacWrite document, the file s home file
system is the Macintosh file system not the UNIX file system because the
file s contents are formatted for a Macintosh application.

In contrast to the home file system is the foreign file system, which is the
other file system that stores or processes the created file. In the previous
example, the UNIX file system is the foreign file system.

Chapter 2: The AppleSingle Format

---------------------------------

In the AppleSingle format, a file s contents and attributes are stored in a

single file in the foreign file system. For example, both forks of a
Macintosh file, the Finder information, and an associated comment are
arranged in a single file with a simple structure.

An AppleSingle file consists of a header followed by one or more data

entries. The header consists of several fixed fields and a list of entry
descriptors, each pointing to a data entry. Each entry is optional and may or
may not appear in the file.

- AppleSingle file header -

Table 2-1 describes the contents of an AppleSingle file header.

Table 2-1: AppleSingle file header

Field Length
----- ------
Magic number 4 bytes
Version number 4 bytes
Filler 16 bytes
Number of entries 2 bytes
Entry descriptor for each entry:
Entry ID 4 bytes
Offset 4 bytes
Length 4 bytes

Byte ordering in the file header fields follows MC68000 conventions, most
significant byte first. The fields in the header file follow the conventions
described in the following sections.

Magic number

This field, modeled after the UNIX magic number feature, specifies the file s
format. Apple has defined the magic number for the AppleSingle format as
$00051600 or 0x00051600.

Version number

This field denotes the version of AppleSingle format in the event the format
evolves (more fields may be added to the header). The version described in
this developer s note is version $00020000 or 0x00020000.

Filler

This field is all zeros ($00 or 0x00).

Number of entries

This field specifies how many different entries are included in the file. It
is an unsigned 16-bit number. If the number of entries is any number other
than 0, then that number of entry descriptors immediately follows the number
of entries field.

Entry descriptors

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 351 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

The entry descriptors are made up of the following three fields:

* Entry ID, an unsigned 32-bit number, defines what the entry is. Entry
IDs range from 1 to $FFFFFFFF. Entry ID 0 is invalid.
* Offset, an unsigned 32-bit number, shows the offset from the beginning
of the file to the beginning of the entry s data.
* Length, an unsigned 32-bit number, shows the length of the data in
bytes. The length can be 0.

Predefined entry IDs

Apple has defined a set of entry IDs and their values as follows:

Data Fork 1 Data fork

Resource Fork 2 Resource fork
Real Name 3 File s name as created on home file system
Comment 4 Standard Macintosh comment
Icon, B&W 5 Standard Macintosh black and white icon
Icon, Color 6 Macintosh color icon
File Dates Info 8 File creation date, modification date, and so on
Finder Info 9 Standard Macintosh Finder information
Macintosh File Info 10 Macintosh file information, attributes, and so on
ProDOS File Info 11 ProDOS file information, attributes, and so on
MS-DOS File Info 12 MS-DOS file information, attributes, and so on
Short Name 13 AFP short name
AFP File Info 14 AFP file information, attributes, and so on
Directory ID 15 AFP directory ID

Apple reserves the range of entry IDs from 1 to $7FFFFFFF. The rest of the
range is available for applications to define their own entries. Apple does
not arbitrate the use of the rest of the range.

Applications reading an AppleSingle or AppleDouble file interpret the entry

IDs that are relevant to their home file system and treat the other entries
as opaque data. For example, a Macintosh client application will understand
entry IDs 1 through 6 and 8 through 10. A ProDOS client application reading
the same file will read entry ID 11 instead of entry IDs 9 and 10.

Entry IDs 1, 3, and 8 are typically created for all files; entry ID 2 only
for Macintosh and ProDOS files; entry IDs 4, 5, 6, 9, and 10 only for
Macintosh files; entry ID 11 only for ProDOS files; entry ID 12 only for MS-
DOS files; and entry IDs 13, 14, and 15 only by AFP servers.

Macintosh Icon entries do not appear in most files because they are typically
stored as a bundle in the application file s resource fork.

The File Dates Info entry (ID=8) consists of the file creation, modification,
backup and access times (see Figure 2-1), stored as a signed number of
seconds before or after 12:00 a.m. (midnight), January 1, 2000 Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT). In other words, the start of the year 2000 GMT corresponds to a
date-time of 0. Applications must convert to their native date and time
conventions. When initially created, a file s backup time and any unknown
entries are set to $80000000 or 0x80000000, the earliest reasonable time.

The Macintosh Finder Info entry (ID=9) consists of 16 bytes of Finder Info
followed by 16 bytes of extended Finder Info; that is, the field ioFlFndrInfo
followed by ioFlXFndrInfo, as returned by the Macintosh PBGetCatInfo call.
(The PBGetCatInfo and the internal structures of ioFlFndrInfo and
ioFlXFndrInfo are described in Inside Macintosh.)

Newly created files have 0s in all Finder Info subfields. If you are creating
an AppleSingle or AppleDouble file, you may assign 0 to any subfield whose
value is unknown (most subfields are undefined if the file does not reside on
a valid hierarchical file system [HFS] volume), but you may want to set the
fdType and fdCreator subfields.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 352 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

One additional field must be set in the directory Finder Info entry. Whenever
the Finder encounters a new ("inited" bit clear) directory, it initializes
the frView field of the directory Finder Info to a value indicating how the
contents of the directory should be viewed when opened (by icon, by small
icon, and so on). Zero is not a legal value. This is not a problem as long as
the client has write permission for the directory.

The Finder will place a legal value into the frView field when it initializes
the directory. However, if the directory permissions deny making changes, the
initial value will remain unchanged and cause the Finder to display things
strangely. Consequently, it is appropriate to set the frView field when the
Finder Info is assigned to a new host directory. For example:

#define closedView 256 /* Normal view - icon, spatial */

/* ... */
dirFinderInfo.frView = closedView;

This results in the traditional "view by icon" display when the Finder first
opens the window for that directory.

The Macintosh File Info entry (ID=10) is 32 bits that stores the locked and
protected bit. Macintosh file times are stored in entry ID 8.

The ProDOS File Info entry (ID=11) consists of the file access, file type,
and file auxiliary type. ProDOS file times are stored in entry ID 8.

The Access word may be used directly in ProDOS 16 or GS/OS calls; only the
low byte is significant to ProDOS 8. The File Type word is the file type of
the original file; only the low byte is significant to ProDOS 8. The
Auxiliary Type long word is the auxiliary type of the original file; only the
low word is significant to ProDOS 8.

UNIX file times are stored in entry ID 8.

The MS-DOS File Info entry (ID=12) is 16 bits that stores the MS-DOS
attributes. MS-DOS file times are stored in entry ID 8.

The Short Name entry (ID=13) is the AFP short name. AFP servers must keep a
mapping of short names for all foreign files. This short name is stored in
entry ID 13.

If entry ID 13 does not exist, an AFP server derives a short name and creates
this entry. When they derive short names, AFP servers must ensure that the
derived names are unique within the directory. In order to ensure that short
names for new foreign files don t conflict with existing short names, the
following convention is used: AFP servers start all derived names with the
character "!" ($21 or 0x21). AFP clients are not allowed to access foreign
files that begin with this character (!). Except for this restriction on
foreign AFP servers, the short name algorithm remains flexible.

The AFP File Info entry (ID=14) is the AFP attributes word, as shown in
Figure 2-5. AFP servers should set the BackupNeeded bit whenever a file is
modified, or if the AppleSingle/AppleDouble foreign file s modification time
is later than the modification time in entry ID 8.

The Directory entry (ID=15) is the AFP directory ID. AFP servers keep the 4-
byte directory ID in this entry. This ID is assigned when a directory is
created, or when a directory AppleDouble header file without an ID entry is
found. The next unused ID is kept in the volume root info file, %RootInfo, in
the volume root directory. The %RootInfo file is an AppleDouble header file
with entries 3, 4, 8, 9, and 15 (Real Name, Comment, Volume Dates, Finder
Info, and Next File ID). It must be locked when it is updated.

- File layout -

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 353 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

The entry data follows all of the entry descriptors. The data in each entry
must be in a single, contiguous block. You can leave holes in the file for
later expansion of data. For example, even if a file s comment field is only
10 bytes long, you can place the offset of the next field 200 bytes beyond
the offset of the comment field, leaving room for the comment to grow to its
maximum length of 200 bytes.

The entries can appear in any order, but you can maximize the efficiency of
file access by following these conventions:

* Put the data fork entry at the end of the file. The data fork is the
most commonly extended entry, and it is easier to increase its length if
it is the last entry in the file.
* Put the entries that are most often read, such as Finder Info, File
Dates Info, and Macintosh File Info, as close as possible to the header,
to increase the probability that a read of the first block or two will
retrieve these entries.
* Allocate the resource fork entry in blocks of 4 kilobytes (K) in order
to minimize reorganization of AppleSingle files during updates to the
resource fork.

- Filename conventions -

AppleSingle name derivations for some of the file systems of interest are
defined in the following sections.

ProDOS

To generate the AppleSingle filename, use character substitution or deletion

to remove illegal characters, and use truncation, if necessary, to reduce the
length of the name to the maximum filename length of 15 characters.

MS-DOS

To generate the AppleSingle filename, use character substitution or deletion

to remove illegal characters, and use truncation, if necessary, to reduce the
length of the name to 8 characters. Then add the MS-DOS extension that is
most appropriate to the file (for example, .TXT for a pure text file).

UNIX and NFS

AppleSingle naming conventions for UNIX and the Network File System (NFS) are
essentially the same; they vary only according to the capabilities of the
foreign file system. The creating application must use the naming convention
that is the most complete subset of the foreign file system, and the naming
convention must be constant across a single foreign file system volume.

There are three naming conventions:

* 8-bit
* 7-bit ASCII
* 7-bit alphanumeric

With the 8-bit naming convention, the foreign file system can store at least
93 character filenames consisting of all 8-bit characters except slash ($2f
or 0x2f), null ($00 or 0x00), and percent ($25 or 0x25). The slash, null, and
percent characters are replaced by a percent character, followed by the two-
character hexadecimal code of the escaped character. For example, the home
file system name Ca ada return - 20% becomes Ca ada return - 20%25.

With the 7-bit ASCII naming convention, the foreign file system can store at
least 93 character filenames consisting of all 7-bit ASCII characters except
slash ($2f or 0x2f), null ($00 or 0x00), and percent ($25 or 0x25). The
slash, null, and percent characters are replaced by a percent character,
followed by the two- character hexadecimal code of the escaped character. In
addition, all extended 8- bit characters ($80 $ff or 0x80 0xff) are

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 354 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

replaced by a percent character, followed by the two-character hexadecimal

code of the escaped character. For example, the home file system name Ca ada
return - 20% becomes Ca%96ada return - 20%25.

With the 7-bit alphanumeric naming convention, the foreign file system can
store at least 93 character filenames consisting of all 7-bit alphanumeric
characters except slash ($2f or 0x2f), null ($00 or 0x00), and percent ($25
or 0x25). The slash, null, and percent characters are replaced by a percent
character, followed by the two-character hexadecimal code of the escaped
character. In addition, all nonalphanumeric characters except underscore ($5f
or 0x5f) and the last period ($2e or 0x2e) are replaced by a percent
character, followed by the two-character hexadecimal code of the escaped
character. For example, the home file system name Ca ada return - 20% becomes
Ca%96ada%20return%20%2d%2020%25.

Since expanding characters into "%" followed by two hexadecimal digits can
result in long filenames, some foreign systems may not be able to store
complete 31-character filenames. Behavior under these conditions is not
defined here.

- Usage -

AppleSingle files must be locked during access to ensure data integrity.

Applications that access AppleSingle files ignore all unknown entries, yet
preserve the unknown entries when moving or copying files.

The Real Name entry is associated with file storage. File server applications
typically use the reverse mapping of the foreign filename when they present
names to the client. Servers do not create or read a Real Name entry.

When the home file system name is renamed, the foreign filename must be
renamed according to the filename conventions described in the previous
sections.

Chapter 3: The AppleDouble Format

---------------------------------

The AppleDouble format uses two files to store data, resources, and
attributes. The AppleDouble Data file contains the data fork and the
AppleDouble Header file contains the resource fork.

The AppleDouble Data file contains the standard Macintosh data fork with no
additional header. The AppleDouble Header file has exactly the same format as
the AppleSingle file, except that it does not contain a data fork entry. The
magic number in the AppleDouble Header file differs from the magic number in
the AppleSingle Header file so that an application can tell whether it needs
to look in another file for the data fork. The magic number for the
AppleDouble format is $00051607 or 0x00051607.

The entries in the AppleDouble Header file can appear in any order; however,
since the resource fork is the entry that is most commonly extended (after
the data fork), Apple recommends that the resource fork entry be placed last
in the file. The data fork is easily extended because it resides by itself in
the AppleDouble Data file.

It is possible to create a new type of entry in the AppleDouble Header file

that points to the AppleDouble Data file to make it easy to find. For
example, an application-defined entry might hold the name of the AppleDouble
Data file. Some foreign file systems might provide a feature that allows a
more permanent pointer to be created one that would not require the pointer
to be updated if the AppleDouble Data file were renamed.

- Filename conventions -

The following sections present a standard for deriving the AppleDouble Data

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 355 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

and AppleDouble Header filenames from the file s Real Name. Because filename
syntax differs in the various file systems, the standard varies by file
system.

Knowing the AppleDouble name derivations for some of the file systems of
interest will allow applications running on foreign file systems and users to
see which files are AppleDouble pairs. Users who know the derivation can
rename or move the files while preserving the connection between the two.
However, there is no guaranteed way to prevent one file in the pair from
being inconsistently renamed, moved, or deleted.

ProDOS

To generate the AppleDouble Data filename, use character substitution or

deletion to remove illegal characters, and use truncation, if necessary, to
reduce the length of the name to 13 characters, two characters less than the
maximum filename length.

To generate the AppleDouble Header filename, prefix the AppleDouble Data

filename with the characters uppercase-R period (R.).

MS-DOS

To generate the AppleDouble Data filename, use character substitution or

deletion to remove illegal characters, and use truncation, if necessary, to
reduce the length of the name to eight characters. Then add the MS-DOS
extension that is most appropriate to the file (for example, .TXT for a pure
text file).

To generate the AppleDouble Header filename, add the extension .ADF (for
AppleDouble file) to the eight-character filename.

UNIX and NFS

AppleSingle/AppleDouble naming conventions for UNIX and NFS are essentially

the same; they vary only according to the capabilities of the foreign file
system. The creating application must use the naming convention that is the
most complete subset of the foreign file system, and the naming convention
must be constant across a single foreign file system volume.

There are three naming conventions:

* 8-bit
* 7-bit ASCII
* 7-bit alphanumeric

With the 8-bit naming convention, the foreign file system can store at least
93 character filenames consisting of all 8-bit characters except slash ($2f
or 0x2f), null ($00 or 0x00), and percent ($25 or 0x25). The slash, null, and
percent characters are replaced by a percent character, followed by the two-
character hexadecimal code of the escaped character. For example, the home
file system name Ca ada return - 20% becomes Ca ada return - 20%25.

With the 7-bit ASCII naming convention, the foreign file system can store at
least 93 character filenames consisting of all 7-bit ASCII characters except
slash ($2f or 0x2f), null ($00 or 0x00), and percent ($25 or 0x25). The
slash, null, and percent characters are replaced by a percent character,
followed by the two- character hexadecimal code of the escaped character. In
addition, all extended 8- bit characters ($80 $ff or 0x80 0xff) are
replaced by a percent character, followed by the two-character hexadecimal
code of the escaped character. For example, the home file system name Ca ada
return - 20% becomes Ca%96ada return - 20%25.

With the 7-bit alphanumeric naming convention, the foreign file system can
store at least 93 character filenames consisting of all 7-bit alphanumeric
characters except slash ($2f or 0x2f), null ($00 or 0x00), and percent ($25

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 356 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

or 0x25). The slash, null, and percent characters are replaced by a percent
character, followed by the two-character hexadecimal code of the escaped
character. In addition, all nonalphanumeric characters except underscore ($5f
or 0x5f) and the last period ($2e or 0x2e) are replaced by a percent
character, followed by the two-character hexadecimal code of the escaped
character. For example, the home file system name Ca ada return - 20% becomes
Ca%96ada%20return%20%2d%2020%25.

To generate the AppleDouble Header filename, prefix the AppleDouble Data

filename with the percent character (%). Conflicts between AppleDouble Header
files and AppleSingle or data files that begin with "%," are resolved by the
file s magic number.

Since expanding characters into "%" followed by two hexadecimal digits can
result in long filenames, some foreign systems may not be able to store
complete 31-character filenames. Behavior under these conditions is not
defined here.

- Usage -

AppleDouble Header files must be locked during access to ensure data

integrity.

Applications that access AppleDouble files ignore all unknown entries, yet
preserve them when moving or copying files.

Directories are stored as AppleDouble files if they are created by the

application.

The Real Name entry is associated with file storage. File server applications
typically use the reverse mapping of the foreign filename when they present
names to the client. Servers do not create or read a Real Name entry.

When renaming the home file system name, the foreign filename must be renamed
according to the filename conventions described in the previous sections.

Applications should not create AppleDouble Header files for preexisting

foreign directories or files unless this is necessary to store AppleDouble
entries.

Appendix: Updating Version 1 AppleSingle/AppleDouble Files

----------------------------------------------------------

Applications should create AppleSingle/AppleDouble files using the version 2

format and naming conventions described in this document. Applications should
understand version 1 ($00010000 or 0x0010000) format and naming conventions
but should not create new files in the version 1 format.

You can update version 1 files to version 2 files by performing the following
steps:

* Overwrite the version number and filler fields in the AppleSingle or

AppleDouble file header.
* Replace the File Info entry (ID=7) in the version 1 file with the File
Dates Info entry (ID=8) and one of the following entry IDs: Macintosh
File Info (ID=10), ProDOS File Info (ID=11), or MS-DOS File Info
(ID=12).

Support Information Services

Copyright 1994, Apple Computer, Inc
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL220.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 357 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL221.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft BASIC: Advancing to Next Line After a ProDOS Call

Header: Applesoft BASIC: Advancing to Next Line After a ProDOS Call

This article last reviewed: 5 February 1988

When you add a function to ProDOS and call the function from BASIC, you
don't then return to the BASIC program that called the routine: at that
point, you are BASIC. If the added function is more than one word (as
specified in the ProDOS Technical Reference Manual), the pointer that
should automatically take you to the start of the next line is not updated
properly.

You must make a call to Applesoft to go to the end of the current line,
which automatically sets the pointer to the start of the next line.

There is a specific call in Applesoft to make this happen. In the Tech

Info Library, search on:
Applesoft and internals

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL221.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 358 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL222.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft BASIC: Displaying and printing text in 80 columns

Header: Applesoft BASIC: Displaying and printing text in 80 columns

The Apple II permits input and output to only one device at a time, including
the 80-Column Text Card in slot 3.

Here is a BASIC program that will send information to the printer, and then
to the screen.

10 D$ = CHR$(4)
20 PRINT D$;"PR#1" : REM Turn on the printer in slot 1
30 PRINT "This sentence will be sent to the printer. Make it a long sentence,
so we can see if the printer uses 80 columns."
40 PRINT D$;"PR#3" : REM Turn off the printer; return to 80 column screen
50 PRINT "This sentence will appear on the screen."
60 END

If you find that the printer doesn't use 80 columns, then the interface card
in the Apple IIe is set for 40 columns. Check the manual for that card, and
change the DIP switches for 80 columns.

Use these techniques within any Applesoft BASIC program to turn a printer on
and off, and still maintain disk drive access.

This short program shows how to print lines longer than 80 characters without
overprinting. An explanation follows the listing.

10 D$=CHR$(4)
20 PRINT D$;"PR#1"
30 PRINT CHR$(9);"80N"
40 PRINT CHR$(9);"C"
50 LIST
60 S2$ = "We get a lot of calls regarding a problem with the Imagewriter I
and the Imagewriter II overprinting when using the PRINT command from
AppleSoft BASIC with lines that are longer than 80 characters. Here is a
workable solution."
70 PRINT D$;"PR#3"

In the statement PRINT CHR$(9); "80N", (which sends Control-I 80N) the number
80 sets the printer card so that it sends a carriage return after sending 80
characters to the printer. The choice of the number, 60, 72, 80, or 132, to
name a few options, depends on how you want to use the features of the
printer and its interface card. This works for an Apple Super Serial Card,
Apple Parallel Interface Card, and other popular interface cards.

After sending Control-I 80N to set the SSC to end its lines at 80 columns,
it's still necessary to tell the SSC when that Control-I 80N command should
work. That's what Control-I C does: it tells the SSC to issue a carriage
return on column overflow.

Column overflow occurs when the SSC detects it has reached the end of the
column as set by switches 2-3 and 2-4 or by Control-I 80N. The addition of a
line like line 40 should correct similar overstriking problems, especially
with listings of BASIC programs. If you run this program, it will correctly
print S2$ on an Imagewriter or an ImageWriter II.

On an Apple IIGS, the Control-I C would need to be a Control-I CE.

Keywords:

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 359 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

### END OF FILE A2TIL222.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 360 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL223.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft BASIC: Making a text file from a program file

Header: Applesoft BASIC: Making a text file from a program file

To transfer a program in Applesoft BASIC from the Apple II family of

computers to another computer, you must first make a text file from the
program. Adapt to your own situation this example:

Assume that your BASIC program begins with line number 10 and ends with line
number 30000. Add these lines to the beginning of the program:

1 PRINT CHR$(4);"OPEN TEXTFILE"

2 PRINT CHR$(4);"WRITE TEXTFILE"
3 LIST 10-30000
4 PRINT CHR$(4);"CLOSE"
5 END

Save the program with the new lines added, then run the program.

This will work in DOS 3.3 or ProDOS, so long as either was used to boot the
disk, and so long as there is disk space available to write the program file.

If your program has used lines 1-5, put the new lines at the end, as lines
30001-5 for example, and then type RUN 30001.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL223.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 361 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL224.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft BASIC: Moving a Listing to a Macintosh and Back

Header: Applesoft BASIC: Moving a Listing to a Macintosh and Back

Article Created: 25 January 1991

Article Last Reviewed: 11 August 1992
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC ---------------------------------------------

I would like to use a Macintosh word processor to edit Applesoft BASIC

files from the Apple II environment. Is there a translator to take
"tokenized" Applesoft BASIC files and have them appear on the Macintosh?
The tokens (PRINT, DISPLAY...) don't seem to get translated when files are
moved to the Macintosh. The original version of Passport (Apple File
Exchange) had that capability.

DISCUSSION ----------------------------------------

We don't know of an AFE Translator for Applesoft BASIC files to Macintosh

text files. You can get around this limitation by "printing" the Applesoft
program files to a disk file before the AFE conversion. After editing on
the Macintosh, transfer the files back to the Apple II. Then, EXEC each
file to make it an Applesoft file. To do this, add the following code to
the existing Applesoft program:

1 D$ = CHR$(4)
2 PRINT D$; "OPEN PGM.LIST"
3 PRINT D$; "LIST"
4 GOTO 32766
.
.
add the existing Applesoft program here
.
.
32766 PRINT D$; "CLOSE PGM.LIST"

The entire Applesoft program will be saved in a text filed called

"PGM.LIST" and can be converted to a Macintosh format for editing.

After editing is complete, transfer the file back to Apple II text format
using the file name "EDITED.FILE". Use the EXEC command to turn the text
listing into an Applesoft program in memory.

] EXEC EDITED.FILE

Be sure to SAVE the program to disk or the EXEC step will have to be
repeated each time the user wants to run the program.
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL224.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 362 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL225.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft Firmware Card: Options

Header: Applesoft Firmware Card: Options

The Applesoft firmware card was designed to supply floating point BASIC to
Apple II owners. There are two options on the card that the user may select.

1. Most obviously, the position of the switch on the rear of the card is used
immediately after a system reset to force the selection of one of two banks of
ROMs: the firmware card or the motherboard. If the switch is up then the
system will default to Applesoft, otherwise the system will default to Integer
BASIC.

2. Software, by accessing address $C080, can select Integer BASIC, or, by

accessing address $C081, Applesoft.

Unfortunately for systems with Auto Start ROM, every time DOS gets control
immediately after a reset, DOS forces a load of the version of BASIC DOS last
used, regardless of the position of the switch.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL225.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 363 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL226.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Commas and printing

Header: Applesoft: Commas and printing

The following information applies to the Apple II Plus with a 40-column

screen.

The third comma tab field is only available if there is nothing beyond column
23. The first character in the third comma field can print outside the text
window.

HTAB can force the cursor outside the text window which can kill a program on
the next PRINT statement.

VTAB ignores the text window. VTABbing below the text window will cause all
output to be on one line. VTABbing above the text window will scroll into the
window but the area above the window won't scroll.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL226.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 364 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL227.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Dotted Vertical Lines in High-Res

Header: Applesoft: Dotted Vertical Lines in High-Res

The Apple HIRES screen, unable to display all colors at all locations,
displays colored vertical or near vertical lines as dashed lines, or not at
all. Refer to your Apple II Reference Manual for a more thorough
explanation.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL227.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 365 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL228.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--Device I/O Routines

Header: Applesoft: Internals--Device I/O Routines

INLIN D52C
Input a line of text without sending out a prompt from the current input
device into the input buffer, BUF. INLIN uses GDBUF to strip off the most
significant bit on all input characters.

INLIN+2 D52E
Input a line of text prompting with the character in X from the current input
device into the input buffer, BUF. INLIN uses GDBUF to strip off the most
significant bit on all input characters.

GDBUFS D539
Puts a zero at the end of the input buffer, BUF, and masks off the msb on all
bytes. On entry: X = the end of the input line.
On exit:

A = 0
X = FF
Y = 1

INCHR D553
Get one character from the current input device in A and mask off the MSB.
INCHR uses the main Apple input routines and supports normal handshaking.

STROUT DB3A
Print string pointed to by Y,A. The string must end with a null or a quote.

STRPRT DB3D
Print a string whose descriptor is pointed to by FACMO,FACLO.

OUTDO DB5C
Print the character in A. INVERSE, FLASH, and NORMAL in effect.

CRDO DAFB
Print a carriage return.

OUTSPC DB57
Print a space.

OUTQST DB5A
Print a question mark.

INPRT ED19
Print " IN " and the current line number from CURLIN. Uses LINPRT.

LINPRT ED24
Prints the 2 byte unsigned number in X,A.

PRNTFAC ED2E
Prints the current value of FAC. FAC is destroyed. Uses FOUT and STROUT.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL228.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 366 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL229.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--Error Processor Routines

Header: Applesoft: Internals--Error Processor Routines

ERROR D412
Checks ERRFLG and jumps to HNDLERR if ONERR is active. Otherwise it prints
<cr> "?" <error message pointed to by X> "ERROR". If this is during program
execution then it also prints" IN " and the CURLIN.

HANDLERR F2E9
Saves CURLIN in ERRLIN, TXTPTR in ERRPOS, X in ERRNUM, and REMSTK in ERRSTK.
X contains the error code. See the Applesoft Reference Manual page 136 for
the value of X for a given error.

RESUME F317
Restores CURLIN from ERRLIN and TXTPTR from ERRPOS and transfers ERRSTK into
the 6502 stack pointer.

ISCNTC D858
Checks the Apple keyboard for a CTRL-C ($83). Executes the BREAK routine
if there is a CTRL-C.

CHKNUM DD6A
Make sure FAC is numeric. See CHKVAL.

CHKSTR DD6C
Make sure FAC is a string. See CHKVAL.

CHKVAL DD6D
Takes the result of the most recent FAC operation and check this result for a
string or numeric variable. A TYPE MISMATCH ERROR results if FAC and C don't
agree.
On entry:
C set checks for strings
C clear checks for numerics.

ERRDIR E306
Causes ILLEGAL DIRECT ERROR if the program isn't running. X is modified.

ISLETC E07D
Checks A for an ASCII letter ("A" to "Z"). On exit C set if A is a letter.

PARCHK DEB2
Checks for "(", evaluates a formula, and checks for ")". Uses CHKOPN and
FRMEVL then falls into CHKCLS.

CHKCLS DEB8
Checks at TXTPTR for ")". Uses SYNCHR.

CHKOPN DEBB
Checks at TXTPTR for "(". Uses SYNCHR.

CHKCOM DEBE
Checks at TXTPTR for ",". Uses SYNCHR.

SYNCHR DECO
Checks at TXTPTR for the character in A. TXTPTR is not modified. Normally
exits through CHRGET. Exits with SYNTAX ERROR if they don't match.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 367 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

### END OF FILE A2TIL229.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 368 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL230.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

Header: Applesoft: Internals--Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

FLOATING POINT REGISTER MOVE ROUTINES

MOVFM EAF9
Moves the number in memory Y,A points to into FAC. On exit A and Z reflect
FACEXP.

MOV2F EB1E
Pack FAC and temporarily moves it into register 2. On exit A and Z reflect
FACEXP.

MOV1F EB21
Pack FAC and moves it temporarily into register 1. On exit A and Z reflect
FACEXP.

MOVML EB23
Pack FAC and move it into zero page area starting at X. On exit A and Z
reflect FACEXP.

MOVMF EB2B
Pack FAC and move it into memory pointed to by Y,X. On exit A and Z reflect
FACEXP.

MOVFA EB53
Move ARG into FAC. On exit A and Z reflect FACEXP.

MOVAF EB63
Move FAC into ARG. On exit A and Z reflect FACEXP.

CONUPK E9E3
Load ARG from memory pointed to by Y,A. On exit A and Z reflect
FACEXP.

SUMMARY OF MOVES:

FAC => (Y,A) EB2B MOVMF

FAC => (0,X) EB23 MOVML
FAC => TEMP1 EB21 MOV1F
FAC => TEMP2 EB1E MOV2F
FAC => ARG EB63 MOVAF

ARG => FAC EB53 MOVFA

(Y,A) => FAC EAF9 MOVFM

(Y,A) => ARG E9E3 CONUPK

FLOATING POINT OPERATORS

The following routines require that A and Z reflect FACEXP. Even though FAC
move routines set up A and Z, a LDA $9D will insure their proper values.

FMULT E97F
Multiply the FAC by the number in memory pointed to by Y,A.

FMULTT E982
Multipy FAC and ARG. On entry A and Z must reflect FACEXP.

FDIV EA66
Divide the number in memory pointed to by Y,A by FAC.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 369 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

FDIVT EA69
Divide ARG by FAC. On entry A and Z must reflect FACEXP.

FADD E7BE
Add the number Y,A points to in memory to FAC.

FADDT E7C1
Add FAC and ARG. On entry A and Z must reflect FACEXP.

FSUB E7A7
Subtract FAC from the number Y,A points to in memory.

FSUBT E7AA
Subtract FAC from ARG. On entry A and Z must reflect FACEXP.

TRANSCENDENTAL OPERATORS

FPWRT EE97
Raise ARG to the FAC power. On entry A and Z must reflect the value of
FACEXP.

SQR EE8D
Takes the square root of FAC

LOG E941
Log base e of FAC

EXP EF09
Raise e to the FAC power

COS EFEA
Returns the cosine of the FAC in radians.

SIN EFF1
Returns the sine of the FAC in radians.

TAN F03A
Returns the tangent of the FAC in radians.

ATN F09E
Returns the inverse-tangent of the FAC in radians.

OTHER OPERATORS

SGN EB90
Modifies the value of the FAC depending on its value on entry. On exit:

FAC = 1 if FAC was greater than 0

FAC = 0 if FAC was equal to 0
FAC = -1 if FAC was less than 0

ABS EBAF
Absolute value of FAC. If FAC is less than 0 then FAC = -FAC.

INT EC23
Greatest integer value of FAC. Uses QINT and floats the result.

RND EFAE
Form a pseudo-random number in FAC and update RND at 00C9.

SIGN EB82
Set A according to the value of FAC. On exit:

A = 1 if FAC is positive
A = 0 if FAC = 0

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 370 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

A = FF if FAC is negative

FCOMP EBB2
Compare FAC and a packed number in memory pointed to by Y,A. On exit:

A = 1 if (Y,A) < FAC

A = 0 if (Y,A) = FAC
A = FF if (Y,A) > FAC

NEGOP EED0
FAC = -FAC

FADDH E7A0
Add 1/2 to FAC

DIV10 EA55
Divide FAC by 10. Returns positive numbers only.

MUL10 EA39
Multiply FAC by 10. Works for both positive and negative numbers.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL230.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 371 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL231.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--Floating Point Math Package (3 of 3)

Header: Applesoft: Internals--Floating Point Math Package (3 of 3)

LOWER LEVEL INTERFACE ROUTINES

FOUT ED34
FOUT creates an ASCII string in FBUFFR equivalent to the value of FAC. On
exit Y,A points to the string, which ends with an ASCII null. FAC is
scrambled. Use STROUT to print the number.

SNGFLT E301
SNGFLT converts the unsigned number in Y to a floating point number in FAC.

GIVAYF E2F2
GIVAYF converts the unsigned number in Y,A to a floating point number in FAC.

FLOAT EB93
FLOAT converts the signed number in A to a floating point number in FAC.

CONINT E6FB
CONINT converts FAC into a single byte integer in X and FACLO. CONINT
normally exits through CHRGET unless FAC is greater than 255 or less than 0,
when it exits via ILLEGAL QUANTITY ERROR.

AYINT E10C
If FAC is less than +32767 and greater than -32767, then execute QINT.
Otherwise AYINT exits via ILLEGAL QUANTITY ERROR.

QINT EBF2
Quick greatest integer function. Leaves INT(FAC) in FACHO,MO,LO signed.
QINT assumes that the absolute value of the FAC is less than 8388608 (2^23rd
power).

GETADR E752
GETADR converts the number in FAC to a 2 byte, unsigned integer in LINNUM.
When FAC is greater than 65535 or less than -65535, GETADR exits via ILLEGAL
QUANTITY ERROR.

GETNUM E746
GETNUM fetches a 2 byte number, a comma and an unsigned, single byte number
from TXTPTR. The first number is stored in LINNUM, while the second is
returned to the X register. On entry TXTPTR points to the first character of
the formula for the first number. GETNUM uses FRNUM, GETADR, CHKCOM and
GETBYT.

COMBYTE E74C
COMBYTE checks for a comma, then fetches an unsigned, single byte number
returned in X. On entry TXTPTR points to the comma. COMBYTE uses CHKCOM and
GETBYT.

FRMEVL DD7B
FRMEVL evaluates the formula at TXTPTR using CHRGET, then leaves the result
in FAC. On entry, TXTPTR points to the first character of the formula, while
on exit points to the terminator. "A" does not contain the terminator. The
format of the temporary result on the stack is:

The address of the operator routine.

The floating point temporary result.
The precedence of the operator.

FRMEVL, the main subroutine for the commands that use formulas, works for

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 372 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

both strings and numbers. If the formula is a string literal, FRMEVL gobbles
the opening quote, then executes STRLIT and ST2TXT.

FRMNUM DD67
FRMNUM evaluates the formula at TXTPTR, puts it in FAC, then makes sure the
result is numeric. On entry TXTPTR points to the first character of the
formula. FRMNUM exits through TYPE MISMATCH ERROR if the result is a string.

FIN EC4A
FIN inputs a floating point number into FAC from CHRGET. FIN assumes the
6502 registers and A were set up by the CHRGET that fetched the first digit.
FIN only operates on numeric constants, not formulas.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL231.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 373 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL232.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--Floating Point Math Package (1 of 3)

Header: Applesoft: Internals--Floating Point Math Package (1 of 3)

Applesoft's floating point package provides a 9 digit scientific package for

evaluating numeric equations. It supports trigonometric functions with
arguments in radians, exponents and logarithms to base e.

ABBREVIATIONS

msb: most significant bit or byte

lsb: least significant bit or byte
eol: end of line token ($00)

A: the 6502 accumulator

X: the 6502 X register
Y: the 6502 Y register
Z: the zero flag of the 6502 status register
C: the carry flag of the 6502 status register

A,X is a 16 bit number where A has the msb and X the lsb.

(Y,A) is the number or string whose address is in Y and A, with the

msb in Y and the lsb in A.

FAC: the floating point accumulator

ARG: the ARGument register

REAL NUMBER FORMAT

The real number format used throughout Applesoft is: the exponent is a single
byte signed number (EXP) in excess of $80 form (the signed value has $80
added to it); the mantissa is 4 bytes (HO,MOH,MO,LO); the binary point is
to the right of the most significant bit. Since in binary floating point
notation the msb is always 1, the number's sign replaces the msb when the
number is stored in memory in packed form. The sign, though, is kept in a
separate byte (SGN) when only bit 7 is significant. If the exponent is zero,
the number is zero, although the mantissa isn't necessarily zero.

Examples:

EXP HO MOH MO LO SGN

Packed format
-10 84 A0 00 00 00
10 84 20 00 00 00

FAC format
-10 84 A0 00 00 00 FF
10 84 A0 00 00 00 00

Arithmetic routine calling conventions for single argument functions (e.g.,

SGN, ABS or INT):

On entry the argument is in the FAC.

On exit the result is in the FAC.

Arithmetic routine calling conventions for two argument functions (e.g., FADD
and FSUB):

On entry the first argument is in the ARG.

On entry the second argument is in the FAC.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 374 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

On exit the result is in the FAC.

FLOATING POINT REGISTERS

NOTE: The TEMP locations may be used for other things when not used by the
floating point math package.

FAC ARG TEMP1 TEMP2 TEMP3 RND

EXP 9D A5 93 98 8A C9
HO 9E A6 94 99 8B CA
MOH 9F A7 95 9A 8C CB
MO A0 A8 96 9B 8D CC
LO A1 A9 97 9C 8E CD
SGN A2 AA (packed format)

FLOATING POINT CONSTANTS

The following addresses point to useful numbers; they're packed and suitable
for use by most of the arithimetic routines including CONUPK and MOVMF.

RND 00C9
-32768 E0FE
1 E913
SQR (1/2) E92D
SQR (2) E932
-1/2 E937
LN (2) E93C
10 EA50
1000000000 ED14
1/2 EE64
LOG (2) base e EEDB
pi/2 F063
pi*2 F06B
1/4 F070
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL232.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 375 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL233.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--High resolution graphics routines

Header: Applesoft: Internals--High resolution graphics routines

NOTE: Regardless of which screen is being displayed, HPAG (location $E6)

determines onto which screen the software draws graphics. ($20 for HGR, $40
for HGR2)

HGR2 F3D8
Initialize and clear page 2 High-Res.

HGR F3E2
Initialize and clear page 1 High-Res.

HCLR F3F2
Clear the current High-Res screen to black.

BKGND F3F6
Clear the current High-Res screen to last plotted color.

HPOSN F411
Positions the High-Res cursor without plotting. HPAG determines which page
the cursor is pointed at.
On entry:
Horizontal = Y,X
Vertical = A

HPLOT F457
Call HPOSN then try to plot a dot at the High-Res cursor's position. The dot
may not be plotted if plotting non-white at a complementary color X
coordinate.

HLIN F53A
Draws a line from the last plotted point or line destination to the coordinate
in the 6502 registers.
On entry:
Horizontal = X,A
Vertical = Y

HFIND F5CB
Convert the High-Res cursor's position to X-Y coordinates. HFIND allows the
user to tell where on the screen the a shape table left the cursor.
On exit:
$E0 = horizontal lsb
$E1 = horizontal msb
$E2 = vertical

DRAW F601
Draw the shape pointed to by Y,X using the current HCOLOR starting at the
current High-Res cursor position. On entry A = rotation factor.

XDRAW F65D
Draw the shape pointed to by Y,X by starting at the current High-Res cursor
position inverting the existing color of the dots the shape draws over. On
entry A = rotation factor.

SETHCOL F6EC
Set the High-Res color to X. X must be less than 8.

SHLOAD F775
Loads a shape table into memory from tape above MEMSIZ (HIMEM) and sets the
pointer at $E8.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 376 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL233.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 377 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL234.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--Index to Routines (1 of 4)

Header: Applesoft: Internals--Index to Routines (1 of 4)

The following two lists combine all the routines in the INTERNALS series of
Apple Tech Notes. The first list is arranged alphabetically by the name of
the routine. The second list is arranged in order of increasing address.

ALPHABETIC LIST
Name Address
------- -------
ABS EBAF
ADDON D998
ARG A5-AA
ATN F09E
AYINT E10C
BKGND F3F6
BLTU D393
CHKCLS DEB8
CHKCOM DEBE
CHKNUM DD6A
CHKOPN DEBB
CHKSTR DD6C
CHKVAL DD6D
CHRGET 00B1
CHRGOT 00B7
CLEARC D66C
COMBYTE E74C
CONINT E6FB
CONT D898
CONUPK E9E3
COS EFEA
CRDO DAFB
DATA D995
DATAN D9A3
DIV10 EA55
DRAW F601
ERRDIR E306
ERROR D412
EXP EF09
FAC 9D-A2
FADD E7BE
FADDH E7A0
FADDT E7C1
FCOMP EBB2
FDIV EA66
FIDVT EA69
FIN EC4A
FLOAT EB93
FMULT E97F
FMULTT E982
FNDLIN D61A
FOUT ED34
FPWRT EE97
FREFAC E600
FRESTR E5FD
FRETMP E604
FRETMS E635
FRMEVL DD7B
FRMNUM DD67
FSUB E7A7
FSUBT E7AA

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 378 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

GARBAG E484
GDBUFS D539
GETADR E752
GETARYPT F7D9
GETBYT E6F8
GETNUM E746
GETSPA E452
GETSPT DA7B
GIVAYF E2F2
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL234.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 379 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL235.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--Index to Routines (2 of 4)

Header: Applesoft: Internals--Index to Routines (2 of 4)

ALPHABETIC LIST (continued)

Name Address
-------- -------
GOTO D93E
GTBYTC E6F5
HANDLERR F2E9
HCLR F3F2
HFIND F5CB
HFNS F6B9
HGR F3E2
HGR2 F3D8
HLIN F53A
HPLOT F457
HPOSN F411
INCHR D553
INLIN D52C
INLIN+2 D52E
INPRT ED19
INT EC23
ISCNTC D858
ISLETC E07D
LET DA46
LINGET DA0C
LINPRT ED24
LOG E941
MOV1F EB21
MOV2F EB1E
MOVAF EB63
MOVFA EB53
MOVFM EAF9
MOVINS E5D4
MOVMF EB2B
MOVML EB23
MOVSTR E5E2
MUL10 EA39
NEGOP EED0
NEWSTT D7D2
OUTDO DB5C
OUTQST DB5A
OUTSPC DB57
PARCHK DEB2
PLOTFNS F1EC
PRNTFAC ED2E
PTRGET DFE3
PUTNEW E42A
QINT EBF2
REASON D3E3
REMN D9A6
RESTOR D849
RESUME F317
RND C9-CD
RND EFAE
RUN D566
SCRTCH D64B
SETHCOL F6EC
SGN EB90
SHLOAD F775
SIGN EB82

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 380 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

SIN EFF1
SNGFLT E301
SQR EE8D
STKINI D683
STRINI E3D5
STRLIT E3E7
STRLT2 E3ED
STROUT DB3A
STRPRT DB3D
STRSPA E3DD
STRTXT DE81
STXTPT D697
SYNCHR DEC0
TAN F03A
TEMP1 93-97
TEMP2 98-9C
TEMP3 8A-8E
XDRAW F65D
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL235.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 381 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL236.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--Index to Routines (3 of 4)

Header: Applesoft: Internals--Index to Routines (3 of 4)

Numeric list by Address

Addr. Name
----- -------
00B1 CHRGET
00B7 CHRGOT
8A-8E TEMP3
98-9C TEMP2
9D-A2 FAC
A5-AA ARG
C9-CD RND
D393 BLTU
D3E3 REASON
D412 ERROR
D52C INLIN
D52E INLIN+2
D539 GDBUFS
D553 INCHR
D566 RUN
D61A FNDLIN
D64B SCRTCH
D66C CLEARC
D683 STKINI
D697 STXTPT
D7D2 NEWSTT
D849 RESTOR
D858 ISCNTC
D898 CONT
D93E GOTO
D995 DATA
D998 ADDON
D9A3 DATAN
D9A6 REMN
DA0C LINGET
DA46 LET
DA7B GETSPT
DAFB CRDO
DB3A STROUT
DB3D STRPRT
DB57 OUTSPC
DB5A OUTQST
DB5C OUTDO
DD67 FRMNUM
DD6A CHKNUM
DD6C CHKSTR
DD6D CHKVAL
DD7B FRMEVL
DE81 STRTXT
DEB2 PARCHK
DEB8 CHKCLS
DEBB CHKOPN
DEBE CHKCOM
DEC0 SYNCHR
DFE3 PTRGET
E07D ISLETC
E10C AYINT
E2F2 GIVAYF
E301 SNGFLT
E306 ERRDIR

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 382 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

E3D5 STRINI
E3DD STRSPA
E3E7 STRLIT
E3ED STRLT2
E42A PUTNEW
E452 GETSPA
E484 GARBAG
E5D4 MOVINS
E5E2 MOVSTR
E5FD FRESTR
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL236.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 383 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL237.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--Index to routines (4 of 4)

Header: Applesoft: Internals--Index to routines (4 of 4)

Numeric list by Address (continued)

Addr. Name
----- --------
E600 FREFAC
E604 FRETMP
E635 FRETMS
E6F5 GTBYTC
E6F8 GETBYT
E6FB CONINT
E746 GETNUM
E74C COMBYTE
E752 GETADR
E7A0 FADDH
E7A7 FSUB
E7AA FSUBT
E7BE FADD
E7C1 FADDT
E941 LOG
E97F FMULT
E982 FMULTT
E9E3 CONUPK
EA39 MUL10
EA55 DIV10
EA66 FDIV
EA69 FIDVT
EAF9 MOVFM
EB1E MOV2F
EB21 MOV1F
EB23 MOVML
EB2B MOVMF
EB53 MOVFA
EB63 MOVAF
EB82 SIGN
EB90 SGN
EB93 FLOAT
EBAF ABS
EBB2 FCOMP
EBF2 QINT
EC23 INT
EC4A FIN
ED19 INPRT
ED24 LINPRT
ED2E PRNTFAC
ED34 FOUT
EE8D SQR
EE97 FPWRT
EED0 NEGOP
EF09 EXP
EFAE RND
EFEA COS
EFF1 SIN
F03A TAN
F09E ATN
F1EC PLOTFNS
F2E9 HANDLERR
F317 RESUME
F3D8 HGR2

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 384 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

F3E2 HGR
F3F2 HCLR
F3F6 BKGND
F411 HPOSN
F457 HPLOT
F53A HLIN
F5CB HFIND
F601 DRAW
F65D XDRAW
F6B9 HFNS
F6EC SETHCOL
F775 SHLOAD
F7D9 GETARYPT
93-97 TEMP1
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL237.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 385 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL238.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--Introduction (1 of 2)

Header: Applesoft: Internals--Introduction (1 of 2)

The following six notes, first published in The Apple Orchard (March 1980)
are written for experienced 6502 machine language programmers who wish to use
the Applesoft ROM subroutines. The addresses given are for an Apple II+
with an Applesoft firmware card, or Applesoft loaded into a Language Card.
Consult your Applesoft Reference manual for more information.

Take special note of CHRGET, the heart of Applesoft. When Applesoft wants
the next character of an instruction, it points TXTPTR at the program or
input buffer, and JSRs to CHRGET. TXTPTR is temporarily set to the last used
DATA statement when Applesoft READS DATA.

ABBREVIATIONS

msb: most significant bit or byte

lsb: least significant bit or byte
eol: end of line token ($00)

A: the 6502 accumulator

X: the 6502 X register
Y: the 6502 Y register
Z: the zero flag of the 6502 status register
C: the carry flag of the 6502 status register

A,X is a 16 bit number where A has the msb and X the lsb.

(Y,A) is the number or string whose address is in Y and A, with the msb in
Y and lsb in A.

FAC the floating point accumulator ARG the ARGument register

Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL238.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 386 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL239.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--Introduction (1 of 2)

Header: Applesoft: Internals--Introduction (1 of 2)

The following six notes, first published in The Apple Orchard (March 1980)
are written for experienced 6502 machine language programmers who wish to use
the Applesoft ROM subroutines. The addresses given are for an Apple II+
with an Applesoft firmware card, or Applesoft loaded into a Language Card.
Consult your Applesoft Reference manual for more information.

Take special note of CHRGET, the heart of Applesoft. When Applesoft wants
the next character of an instruction, it points TXTPTR at the program or
input buffer, and JSRs to CHRGET. TXTPTR is temporarily set to the last used
DATA statement when Applesoft READS DATA.

ABBREVIATIONS

msb: most significant bit or byte

lsb: least significant bit or byte
eol: end of line token ($00)

A: the 6502 accumulator

X: the 6502 X register
Y: the 6502 Y register
Z: the zero flag of the 6502 status register
C: the carry flag of the 6502 status register

A,X is a 16 bit number where A has the msb and X the lsb.

(Y,A) is the number or string whose address is in Y and A, with the msb in
Y and lsb in A.

FAC the floating point accumulator ARG the ARGument register

Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL239.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 387 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL240.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--Miscellaneous Routines

Header: Applesoft: Internals--Miscellaneous Routines

PTRGET DFE3
Read a variable name from CHRGET and find it in memory. On entry TXTPTR
points to the first character of the variable name. On exit the address to the
value of the variable is in VARPNT and Y,A. If PTRGET can't find a simple
variable it creates one. If it can't find an array it creates one dimensioned
from 0 to 10 and sets all elements equal to zero.

GETARYPT F7D9
Read a variable name from CHRGET and find it in memory. On entry TXTPTR
points to the first character of the variable name. This routine leaves LOWTR
pointing to the name of the variable array. If the array can't be found the
result is an OUT OF DATA ERROR.

FNDLIN D61A
Searches the program for the line whose number is in LINNUM.
On exit:
C set LOWTR points to the link field of the desired line.
C clear then not found. LOWTR points to the next higher line.

DATA D995
Move TXTPTR to the end of the statement. Looks for the ":" or eol (0).

DATAN D9A3
Calculate the offset in Y from TXTPTR to the next ":" or eol (0).

REMN D9A6
Calculate the offset in Y from TXTPTR to the next eol (0).

ADDON D998
Add Y to TXTPTR.

SCRTCH D64B
The "NEW" command. Clears the program, variables, and stack.

CLEARC D66C
The "CLEAR" command. Clears the variables and stack.

STKINI D683
Clears the stack.

RESTOR D849
Sets the DATA pointer, DATPTR, to the beginning of the program.

STXTPT D697
Set TXTPTR to the beginning of the program.

BLTU D393
Block transfer makes room by moving everything forward.
On entry:
Y,A and HIGHDS = destination of high address + 1
LOWTR = lowest address to be moved
HIGHTR = highest address to be moved + 1
On exit:
LOWTR is unchanged
HIGHTR = LOWTR - $100
HIGHDS = lowest address transfered - $100

REASON D3E3

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 388 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Makes sure there's enough room in memory for another variable. Checks to be
sure that the address Y,A is less than FRETOP. May cause garbage collection.
Causes "OUT OF MEMORY ERROR" if there's no room.

GARBAG E484
Move all currently used strings up in memory as far as possible. This
maximizes the free memory area for more strings or numeric variables.

CONT D898
Moves OLDTXT and OLDLIN into TXTPTR and CURLIN.

NEWSTT D7D2
Execute a new statement. On entry TXTPTR points to the ":" preceding the
statement or the zero at the end of the previous line. Use NEWSTT to restart
the program with CONT. THIS ROUTINE DOES NOT RETURN.

RUN D566
Run the program in memory. THIS ROUTINE DOES NOT RETURN.

GOTO D93E
Uses LINGET and FNDLIN to update TXTPTR. GOTO assumes that the 6502 registers
and A have been set up by the CHRGET that fetched the first digit.

LET DA46
Uses CHRGET to get address of the variable, "=", evaluate the formula, and
store it. On entry TXTPTR points to the first character of the variable
name.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL240.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 389 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL241.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--Page Zero Memory Map (1 of 2)

Header: Applesoft: Internals--Page Zero Memory Map (1 of 2)

00-02 START Initialize low RAM memory

03-05 RDYJSR Jumps to STROUT
06,07 ADRAYI Address of AYINT subroutine
08,09 ADRGAY Address of GIVAYF subroutine
0A-0C USRPOK Vector for USR() function
0D CHARAC String delimiter
0E ENDCHR String delimiter
0F COUNT General purpose counter
10 DIMFLG Flag to permit arrays
11 VALTYP Variable type indicator. 0=numeric, 1=string
12 INTFLG Variable type indicator. 1=integer, 0=real
13 GARBFL Flag to signal the need for garbage collection
14 SUBFLG Flag to permit array variables.
15 INPFLG Determines if this is INPUT or READ
16 TANSGN Used for the sign during TAN() function
1A,1B SHAPE High-Res shape pointer
1C HCOLOR1 High-Res running color mask
1D COUNTH High-Res counter
26,27 HBAS High-Res base address pointer
2C H2
2D V2
45 ERROV
50,51 LINNUM 16 bit integer work area
53,54 LASTPT Pointer to last used string temporary
55-5D TEMPST Temporary string descriptor storage area
5E,5F INDEX General purpose index
60,61 INDEX2 General purpose index
62-66 RES Multiply or divide result (HO,MOH,MO,LO)
67,68 TEXTAB Pointer to start of the program text
69,6A VARTAB Pointer to start of simple variable space
6B,6C ARYTAB Pointer to start of array variable space
6D,6E STREND Pointer to end of storage in use
6F,70 FRETOP Pointer to top of string free space
71,72 FRESPC Pointer to new string
73,74 MEMSIZ Pointer to top of memory
75,76 CURLIN Current line number
77,78 OLDLIN Old line number, set up by ctrl-C, STOP, or END
79,7A OLDTXT Old text pointer
7B,7C DATLIN Line number where data for next READ comes from
7D,7E DATPTR Pointer to data for next READ
7F,80 INPPTR Pointer to where input is coming from
81,82 VARNAM Storage area for a variable's name
83,84 VARPNT Pointer to a variable in memory
85,86 FORPNT Variable pointer for FOR and LET
87,88 OPPTR Pointer to current formula operation in OPTAB
89 OPMASK Mask created by current operator
8A,8B DEFPNT Pointer used in function definition
8C,8D DSCPNT Pointer to a string descriptor
8E TEMPF3 Temporary pointer
8F FOUR6 Constant for garbage collection
90-92 JMPER Internal vector
93 TEMPF1 Temporary pointer
94,95 ARRYPT Pointer into an array
94,95 HIGHDS Destination of highest element in BLT.
96,97 HIGHTR Source of highest element to move in BLT.
98 TEMPF2
99,9A LOWDS Location of last byte transferred into in BLT.
9B,9C LOWTR Last thing to move in BLT. See BLTU.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 390 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9D-9F DSCTMP Temporary string descriptor

9D-A2 FAC Floating point accumulator.
(EXP,HO,MOH,MO,LO,SGN)
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL241.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 391 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL242.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--Page Zero Memory Map (2 of 2)

Header: Applesoft: Internals--Page Zero Memory Map (2 of 2)

A3 SNGFLG Sign of FAC. Set up by FIN.

A4 BITS
A5-AA ARG Floating point argument (EXP,HO,MOH,MO,LO,SGN)
AB,AC STRNG1 Pointer to a string or descriptor
AD,AE FBUFPT Pointer into FBUFFER for FOUT
AF,B0 PRGEND Pointer to the end of the program text
B1-C8 CHRGET Character fetcher
C9-CD RNDX Random number seed
D0,D1 DX High-Res delta-X for shape and HLIN
D2 DY High-Res delta-Y for shape and HLIN
D3 QDRNT High-Res rotation quadrant
D4,D5 E High-Res error for HLIN
D6 RNONLY Run only flag
D8 ERRFLG Flag set by ONERR GOTO
DA,DB ERRLIN The line number where the error occured
DC,DD ERRPOS Where in memory did the error occur
DE ERRNUM Which error occured
DF ERRSTK 6502 stack pointer from REMSTK after an error
E0,E1 XO High-Res prior X coordinate save
E2 YO High-Res prior Y coordinate save
E4 HCOLOR High-Res color byte for HPLOT, HPOSN
E5 HNDX High-Res horizontal offset save
E6 HPAG High-Res page ($20 = HGR1, $40 = HGR2)
E7 SCALE High-Res scale for SHAPE
E8,E9 SHAPX High-Res start of shape table
EA COLLSN High-Res collision counter
F0 FIRST
F1 SPDBYT Controls delay between printed characters
F2 TRFLAG Controls TRACE mode.
F3 ORMASK Controls masking for INVERSE on video output.
F4-F7 ERRTO Points to the GOTO part of ONERR statement
F8 REMSTK 6502 Stack pointer save area.
F9 ROTBYT High-Res rotation factor for SHAPE
100-10F FBUFFR Buffer for FOUT
200-2F0 BUF Input buffer
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL242.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 392 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL243.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--String Utilities (1 of 2)

Header: Applesoft: Internals--String Utilities (1 of 2)

Applesoft strings have two parts: the descriptor and the ASCII string. Your
string descriptor contains the length of the string along with the address of
the strings first character. Refer to page 137 of the Applesoft Reference
Manual for additional information on the string components. During most
Applesoft routines the descriptor is left in memory, while a two byte pointer
to the descriptor is kept in the FAC. The pointer is the address of the
descriptor; therefore, the actual string could be anywhere in memory. The
statement 10 A$ = "HI" leaves a descriptor pointing to the program text.

STRINI E3D5

STRINI obtains space for creating a string whose descriptor is pointed to by

FACMO/FACLO; it also creates a descriptor for it in DSCTMP. On entry A =
length of the string, while FACMO/FACLO point to the string descriptor.
STRINI uses GETSPA to force garbage collection when there isn't sufficient
room; GETSPA exits with an "OUT OF MEMORY ERROR" when garbage collection
free up enough room. GETSPA moves FRESPC and FRETOP down, making room to
store the string. STRINI returns with the descriptor of the new string in
DSCTMP and the original pointer in DSCPNT.

STRSPA E3DD

STRSPA obtains space for the creation of a string A bytes long, then creates
a descriptor for it in DSCTMP. STRSPA uses GETSPA to force garbage
collection when there isn't enough room. If garbage collection is unable to
make sufficient room, GETSPA exits with an "OUT OF MEMORY" error. GETSPA
moves FRESPC and FRETOP down enough to store the string, then returns A
unchanged with the new descriptor in DCSTMP.

GETSPT DA7B

GETSPT moves the descriptor pointed to by FACMO/FACLO into the memory pointed
to by FORPNT. GETSPT also moves the string's text up to FRETOP if it isn't
in the program's text. GETSPT frees up the string if it was a temporary
string. GETSPT uses GETSPA to initiate garbage collection, or alternatively
"OUT OF MEMORY" error when the garbage collection dosen't free up sufficient
room.

MOVINS E5D4

Moves the string whose descriptor is pointed to by STRNG1 to memory pointed

to by FRESPA.

MOVSTR E5E2

MOVSTR moves the string pointed to by Y,X with a length of A to memory

pointed to by FRESPA.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL243.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 393 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL244.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--String Utilities (2 of 2)

Header: Applesoft: Internals--String Utilities (2 of 2)

STRTXT DE81
Build a temporary descriptor for a string literal of which the first character
is pointed to by TXTPTR plus C and which ends with a quote. FACMO,FACLO points
to the resulting temporary descriptor. Skip leading quotes before calling
STRLIT. On exit, STRNG2 points to the character after the string literal.

STRLIT E3E7
Build a temporary descriptor for a string literal of which the first character
is pointed to by Y,A and which ends with a quote. FACMO,FACLO points to the
resulting temporary descriptor.
Skip leading quotes before calling STRLIT. On exit, STRNG2 points to the character after
the string literal.

STRLT2 E3ED
Take a string literal of which the first character is pointed to by Y,A and
build a temporary descriptor for it pointed to by FACMO,FACLO. Save in CHARAC
and ENDCHR the characters other than zero that terminate the string. Skip
leading quotes before calling STRLIT2. On exit, STRNG2 points to the
character after the string literal.

PUTNEW E42A
Move the descriptor in DSCTMP to a temporary descriptor, put a pointer to the
descriptor in FACMO,FACLO, and flag the result as a string.

GETSPA E452
Get A bytes of memory below HIMEM for a string.
GETSPA forces garbage collection to make room in memory when necessary and
exits with an "OUT OF MEMORY ERROR" if garbage collection can't make enough
room.
GETSPA moves FRESPC and FRETOP down enough to store the string. On entry, A
equals the number of characters. GETSPA returns with A unchanged and pointer
to the space in FRESPC, FRETOP, and Y,X.

FRESTR E5FD
Make sure that the last FAC result was a string and free up the temporary
string result. Check the descriptor for a temporary status allocated by
PUTNEW. On exit, the address of the string is in INDEX and Y,X. The length of
the string is in A. Uses FRETMP.

FREFAC E600
Free up the temporary string pointed to by FACMO,FACLO. Check the descriptor
for a temporary status allocated by PUTNEW. On exit the address of the string
is in INDEX and Y,X. The length of the string is in A. Uses FRETMP.

FRETMP E604
Free up a temporary string. On entry the pointer to the descriptor is in Y,A.
Checks the descriptor for a temporary status allocated by PUTNEW. If so, the
temporary is freed up by updating TEMPPT. If a temp is freed up, a further
check tests the string's location for the lowest in memory. If so, that area
of memory is freed up by updating FRETOP. On exit the address of the string
is in INDEX and Y,X. The length of the string is in A.

FRETMS E635
Free the temporary descriptor without freeing up the string. On entry Y,A
point to the descriptor to be freed. On exit Z is set if anything was freed.
Apple Tech Notes

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 394 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL244.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 395 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL245.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--TXTPTR routines (2 of 2)

Header: Applesoft: Internals--TXTPTR routines (2 of 2)

CHRGET 00B1

CHRGET increments TXTPTR. Use CHRGOT to get the character. TXTPTR now
points at:

CHRGOT 00B7

CHRGOT loads A from TXTPTR and sets certain 6502 status flags. X and Y are
not changed. On exit:

A = the character currently pointed at by TXTPTR

Z is set if A is ":" or eol ($3A or $00)
C is clear if A is an ASCII number("0" to "9").

LINGET DA0C

LINGET read a line number (integer 0 to 63999) from TXTPTR into LINNUM.
LINGET assumes the 6502 registers and A have been set up by the JSR to CHRGET
that fetched the first digit. LINGET normally exits through CHARGET, which
fetches the character after the last digit. When the number is greater than
63999, LINGET exits via SYNTAX ERROR. LINNUM is zero when there is no number
at TXTPTR.

GTBYTC E6F5

GTBYTC causes JSR to CHRGET to gobble a character, then evaluates the formula
at TXTPTR, and then it returns a single byte integer in X and FACLO. On
entry TXTPTR points to the first character of the formula. GTBYTC normally
exits through CHRGET. If FAC is greater than 255 or less than 0, it exits
through ILLEGAL QUANTITY ERROR.

GETBYT E6F8

GETBYT evaluates the formula at TXTPTR besides returning a single byte

integer in X and FACLO. On entry, TXTPTR points to the first character of
the formula. GETBYT normally exits through CHRGET. When FAC is greater than
255 or less than 0, it exits through ILLEGAL QUANTITY ERROR.

PLOTFNS F1EC

PLOTFNS gets two LORES plotting coordinates separated by a comma from TXTPTR
(0-47,0-47). TXTPTR when entered, points to the first number of the formula.
PLOTFNS puts the first number in FIRST and the second number in H2 and V2.

HFNS F6B9

HGNS gets HIRES plotting coordinates (0-279,0-191) from TXTPTR. TXTPTR

points to the first character of the formula for the first number upon entry.
HFNS leaves the 6502 registers set up for HPOSN. When exiting:

A = vertical coordinate
X = lsb of horizontal coordinate
Y = msb of vertical coordinate
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 396 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

### END OF FILE A2TIL245.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 397 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL246.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--Where to find routines (1 of 2)

Header: Applesoft: Internals--Where to find routines (1 of 2)

The following list combines all the routines in the INTERNALS series
of Apple Tech Notes with the title of the AppleLink article where the routine
description appears. The list is arranged alphabetically by the name
of the routine.

Name Address Applesoft: Internals--Title

------ --------- ------------------------------------------------

ABS EBAF Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

ADDON D998 Miscellaneous Routines

ARG A5-AA Introduction (1 of 2)

Floating Point Math Package (1 of 3)

Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

ATN F09E Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

AYINT E10C Floating Point Math Package (3 of 3)

BKGND F3F6 High Resolution Graphics Routines

BLTU D393 Miscellaneous Routines

CHKCLS DEB8 Error Processor Routines

CHKCOM DEBE Floating Point Math Package (3 of 3)

Error Processor Routines

CHKNUM DD6A Error Processor Routines

CHKOPN DEBB Error Processor Routines

CHKSTR DD6C Error Processor Routines

CHKVAL DD6D Error Processor Routines

CHRGET 00B1 TXTPTR Routines (2 of 3)

Floating Point Math Package (3 of 3)

CHRGOT 00B7 TXTPTR Routines (2 of 3)

CLEARC D66C Miscellaneous Routines

COMBYTE E74C Floating Point Math Package (3 of 3)

CONINT E6FB Floating Point Math Package (3 of 3)

CONT D898 Miscellaneous Routines

CONUPK E9E3 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

COS EFEA Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 398 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

CRDO DAFB Device I/O Routines

DATA D995 Miscellaneous Routines

DATAN D9A3 Miscellaneous Routines

DIV10 EA55 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

DRAW F601 High Resolution Graphics Routines

ERRDIR E306 Error Processor Routines

ERROR D412 Error Processor Routines

EXP EF09 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

FAC 9D-A2 Introduction (1 of 2)

Floating Point Math Package (1 of 3)

Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

Floating Point Math Package (3 of 3)

FADD E7BE Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

FADDH E7A0 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

FADDT E7C1 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

FCOMP EBB2 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

FDIV EA66 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

FIDVT EA69 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

FIN EC4A Floating Point Math Package (3 of 3)

FLOAT EB93 Floating Point Math Package (3 of 3)

FMULT E97F Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

FMULTT E982 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

FNDLIN D61A Miscellaneous Routines

FOUT ED34 Floating Point Math Package (3 of 3)

FPWRT EE97 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

FREFAC E600 String Utilities (2 of 2)

FRESTR E5FD String Utilities (2 of 2)

FRETMP E604 String Utilities (2 of 2)

FRETMS E635 String Utilities (2 of 2)

FRMEVL DD7B Floating Point Math Package (3 of 3)

FSUB E7A7 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

FSUBT E7AA Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

GARBAG E484 Miscellaneous Routines

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 399 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

GDBUFS D539 Device I/O Routines

GETADR E752 Floating Point Math Package (3 of 3)

GETARYPT F7D9 Miscellaneous Routines

GETBYT E6F8 TXTPTR Routines (2 of 3)

GETNUM E746 Floating Point Math Package (3 of 3)

GETSPA E452 String Utilities (2 of 2)

GETSPT DA7B String Utilities (1 of 2)

GIVAYF E2F2 Floating Point Math Package (3 of 3)

Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL246.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 400 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL247.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Internals--Where to find routines (2 of 2)

Header: Applesoft: Internals--Where to find routines (2 of 2)

The following is a continuation of the list combining all the routines in the
INTERNALS series of Apple Tech Notes with the title of the AppleLink article
where the routine description appears. The list is arranged alphabetically by
the name of the routine.

Name Address Applesoft: Internals--Title

------ --------- ------------------------------------------------

GOTO D93E Miscellaneous Routines

GTBYTC E6F5 TXTPTR Routines (2 of 3)

HANDLERR F2E9 Error Processor Routines

HCLR F3F2 High Resolution Graphics Routines

HFIND F5CB High Resolution Graphics Routines

HFNS F6B9 TXTPTR Routines (2 of 3)

HGR F3E2 High Resolution Graphics Routines

HGR2 F3D8 High Resolution Graphics Routines

HLIN F53A High Resolution Graphics Routines

HPLOT F457 High Resolution Graphics Routines

HPOSN F411 High Resolution Graphics Routines

INCHR D553 Device I/O Routines

INLIN D52C Device I/O Routines

INLIN+2 D52E Device I/O Routines

INPRT ED19 Device I/O Routines

INT EC23 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

ISCNTC D858 Error Processor Routines

ISLETC E07D Error Processor Routines

LET DA46 Miscellaneous Routines

LINGET DA0C TXTPTR Routines (2 of 3)

LINPRT ED24 Device I/O Routines

LOG E941 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

MOV1F EB21 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

MOV2F EB1E Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

MOVAF EB63 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 401 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

MOVFA EB53 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

MOVFM EAF9 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

MOVINS E5D4 String Utilities (1 of 2)

MOVMF EB2B Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

MOVML EB23 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

MOVSTR E5E2 String Utilities (1 of 2)

MUL10 EA39 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

NEGOP EED0 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

NEWSTT D7D2 Miscellaneous Routines

OUTDO DB5C Device I/O Routines

OUTQST DB5A Device I/O Routines

OUTSPC DB57 Device I/O Routines

PARCHK DEB2 Error Processor Routines

PLOTFNS F1EC TXTPTR Routines (2 of 3)

PRNTFAC ED2E Device I/O Routines

PTRGET DFE3 Miscellaneous Routines

PUTNEW E42A String Utilities (2 of 2)

QINT EBF2 Floating Point Math Package (3 of 3)

REASON D3E3 Miscellaneous Routines

REMN D9A6 Miscellaneous Routines

RESTOR D849 Miscellaneous Routines

RESUME F317 Error Processor Routines

RND C9-CD Floating Point Math Package (1 of 3)

Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

RND EFAE Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

RUN D566 Miscellaneous Routines

SCRTCH D64B Miscellaneous Routines

SETHCOL F6EC High Resolution Graphics Routines

SGN EB90 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

SHLOAD F775 High Resolution Graphics Routines

SIGN EB82 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

SIN EFF1 Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

SNGFLT E301 Floating Point Math Package (3 of 3)

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 402 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

SQR EE8D Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

STKINI D683 Miscellaneous Routines

STRINI E3D5 String Utilities (1 of 2)

STRLIT E3E7 String Utilities (2 of 2)

STRLT2 E3ED String Utilities (2 of 2)

STROUT DB3A Device I/O Routines

STRPRT DB3D Device I/O Routines

STRSPA E3DD String Utilities (1 of 2)

STRTXT DE81 String Utilities (2 of 2)

STXTPT D697 Miscellaneous Routines

SYNCHR DEC0 Error Processor Routines

TAN F03A Floating Point Math Package (2 of 3)

TEMP1 93-97 Floating Point Math Package (1 of 3)

TEMP2 98-9C Floating Point Math Package (1 of 3)

TEMP3 8A-8E Floating Point Math Package (1 of 3)

XDRAW F65D High Resolution Graphics Routines

Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL247.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 403 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL248.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: PEEKs, POKEs, and CALLs

Header: Applesoft: PEEKs, POKEs, and CALLs

To make Applesoft programs read data from memory, write data to memory, or
pass control to machine language programs, programmers use Applesoft's PEEK,
POKE, and CALL statements. Here is an explanation of each statement's
function.

PEEK makes a program read a memory location. The format of the statement is
PEEK (<memory location>) where <memory location> is a positive integer from 0
to 65535. Programmers use PEEK most commonly with a variable: X% = PEEK
(2048) assigns the value located at 2048 to the integer variable X%.

POKE makes a program write a value to a memory location. The format of the
statement is POKE <memory location>,<value> where <memory location> is a
positive integer from 0 to 65535 and <value> is a positive integer from 0 to
255. Programmers use POKE most commonly to write data directly to memory:
POKE 2048,128 assigns the value 128 to the memory location 2048.

CALL makes a program pass control to a machine language routine at some

memory location. The format of the statement is CALL <memory location> where
<memory location> is a positive or negative integer from -32768 to 32767 or a
positive integer from 0 to 65535 (note that the signed integers from -32768
to 32767 represent exactly the same memory locations as the positive integers
from 0 to 65535). Programmers use CALL most commonly used to invoke routines
built into the Apple II's ROM. For example, the statement CALL -936 invokes
the routine which clears the screen and homes the cursor (just like using
Applesoft's HOME statement).

To change the screen display or make sounds and other special effects on the
Apple II, Apple II Plus, Apple IIe, Apple IIc and Apple IIGS, Applesoft
accesses various memory locations. Each particular CPU's reference manual
includes a memory map where you can find the segments of memory used by text,
graphics, Applesoft, the monitor and peripheral cards.

Apple-published memory locations remain the same for most members of the
Apple II family; other internal locations may change. Therefore, to assure
that your programs will work properly on all Apple II family computers, do
not use entry points other than those printed in the Apple manuals.

Locations used to communicate with interface cards may be found in the

manuals for those devices. For example, memory locations used by the Apple
80-column card are found in the 80-Column Text Card Manual and the Extended
80-Column Text Card Supplement.

Many computer and book stores sell books with listings of Applesoft, monitor
ROM, DOS 3.3 and ProDOS memory locations. You may find the following
publications useful:

--What's Where in the Apple by William Luebbert; Micro Ink.

--Beneath Apple DOS by Don Wirth and Pieter Lechner; Quality Software.
--Beneath Apple ProDOS by Don Wirth and Pieter Lechner; Quality Software.
--The Apple Almanac by Eric Goez and Williams Sanders; Datamost, Inc.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL248.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 404 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL249.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applesoft: Stopping the Apple IIe cursor from blinking

Header: Applesoft: Stopping the Apple IIe cursor from blinking

You prefer a solid non-flashing cursor over the flashing "checkerboard" that
the Apple IIe normally provides? If you have Apple's 80-column Text Card just
type PR#3, then ESC-4. The system will have the eighty column cursor (a solid
non-flashing blank) and will be in 40-column mode.

If you do not have a Text Card, fear not; just type

POKE 49162,0: PRINT CHR$(4);"PR#3"

and you can get the same effect.

You can use this next sample routine as the startup program on a diskette or
the startup routine in an Applesoft program. Line 14 determines whether it is
on an Apple IIe or an Apple II. If, by the time Line 16 executes, no Apple
Text Card is detected in the system, then Line 18 enables the 80-column
firmware.

[NOTE: The firmware is enabled by the monitor during Cold Boot (i.e.,
power-on startup or OPEN-APPLE-CTRL-RESET) if there is a Text Card
installed].

Line 18 activates the firmware now that it is enabled. The 80-column firmware
maintains a mode status byte in RAM at location 1275 ($04FB). Bit 7 of this
byte determines whether Lowercase Restrict mode is active or not. Line 28
guarantees that this bit is set to enable the mode. Lowercase Restrict mode
is normally only available in direct mode typing Escape-R and cannot be done
othEW ise in a program.

10 TEXT : SPEED= 255

12 D$ = CHR$(4): REM CTRL-D
14 IF NOT ( PEEK (64435) = 6) GOTO 30: REM NOT APPLE IIE
16 IF NOT ( PEEK (49162) < 128) GOTO 20:
REM TEXT CARD INSTALLED
18 POKE 49162,0: REM ENABLE 80-COLUMN FIRMWARE
20 PRINT D$;"PR#3": PRINT : REM ACTIVATE FIRMWARE
22 PRINT CHR$(17): REM SWITCH TO 40-COLUMN MODE
24 MB = 1275: REM 80-COLUMN FIRMWARE MODE BYTE ($04FB)
26 MS = PEEK (MB): REM READ CURRENT MODE STATUS
28 IF (MS < 128) THEN POKE MB,MS + 128:
REM SET BIT-7 TO ENABLE LOWER CASE RESTRICT MODE
30 NORMAL : HOME
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL249.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 405 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL250.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleTalk Printing: Apple IIe Workstation Card Slot

Header: AppleTalk Printing: Apple IIe Workstation Card Slot

Article Created: 14 May 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I want to connect a Macintosh II and an Apple IIe to an ImageWriter II over

AppleTalk.

A Workstation card was installed in the Apple IIe, the necessary LocalTalk
cables were used, SW-4 was switched for AppleTalk, and AppleTalk was
selected in the Chooser. This did not work.

I then installed AppleShare into the Macintosh II. The Macintosh now
prints, but the Apple IIe does not. Instead, it gives the message "No boot
server -- trying other slots".

What am I doing wrong?

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

The Workstation card must be installed in a higher-numbered slot than the

disk interface card, otherwise the Apple IIe will try to start up over the
network.

* If you WANT the Apple IIe to start up over the network, you must also
install the Apple II Setup on the Macintosh II file server. This is a
separate disk (AppleShare File Server Apple II Setup Disk). You would
also need to copy Chooser.II to the server.

* If you DON'T want the Apple IIe to start up from the server, but
rather to print to the ImageWriter II, then move the workstation card to
a lower-numbered slot than the disk interface card and boot your
workstation disk and run Chooser.II.

One other problem might be that you are running Chooser.II, getting a
connection, and then inserting your application disk and restarting. This
doesn't work. You have to run Chooser.II from the application disk or
launch the application by pathname after running Chooser.II from the
workstation disk.
Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL250.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 406 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL251.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleTalk Remote Access: Using w/ Apple IIe Emulation (11/94)

Header: AppleTalk Remote Access: Using w/ Apple IIe Emulation (11/94)

Article Created: 5 November 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 28 November 1994

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Can I use AppleTalk Remote Access (ARA) in Apple II emulation mode on a

Macintosh LC with an Apple IIe Card?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Yes. You must establish the connection before going into emulation mode.
Once established, you can access network services via the Apple II control
panel.

Article Change History:

28 November 1994 - Updated and reviewed

Support Information Services

Copyright 1991-94, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL251.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 407 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL252.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleTalk: Cable TV/Broadband Network Connectivity

Header: AppleTalk: Cable TV/Broadband Network Connectivity

This article last reviewed: 15 November 1990

TOPIC ---------------------------------------------

Can AppleTalk operate over cable TV wires? If so, how?

Since cable TV mainly uses coax-type cable, how do I make the connection? If
it needs to be done serially (connection to the cable), would a Hayes
InterBridge-type product be able to do this?

For home use, the only thing I can think of is using Liaison (if asynchronous
is still the way to go) in the Macintosh.

Can any of the solutions work with Apple II computers? This is needed for
home
use to connect to a ANS network to a school.

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------

It is possible to have Ethernet channels running on a broadband network,

which is typically used in cable TV installations. It is important that
the group responsible for the cable be intimately involved in this process
since this is not a plug-and-play situation. There are a number of
different alternatives possible once you have the hardware and software
support for Ethernet in place on the cable network.

Usually, you would connect routers, such as the AppleTalk Internet Router, to
the Ethernet drops from the broadband, and all of the other Macintoshes are
connected to the Internet via routers. The routers then would be the only
Macintoshes required to have Ethernet boards. You also could use FastPaths,
GatorBoxes, or Macintoshes running Liaison as the routers.

Network Resources also offers several products that allow Macintosh users to
connect to broadband. Their MultiGate 2000 hardware router connects LocalTalk
to broadband, as if connecting a LocalTalk network to Ethernet via a router.
Their MultiGate Bridge connects any combination of broadband, Ethernet, and
fiber optics. These solutions do not require running Ethernet on broadband.
For more information on their products, search on "Network Resources and
broadband" in the Technical Info Library.

A Hayes InterBridge would not be a solution because it is a

LocalTalk-to-LocalTalk bridge, and you need an Ethernet connection.

For the asynchronous connection, Liaison definitely seems a good choice since
it also has the other capabilities mentioned above.

On the Apple II front, we are not aware of anything that will provide remote,
serial AppleTalk access similar to what is available for the Macintosh.

We strongly suggest that you get assistance from a network consultant

capable of assisting you in all phases of this type of setup. You should
also be aware that anyone doing this will need full approval from whomever
owns and operates the cable system.
Copyright 1989, 1990 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL252.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 408 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL253.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleWorks 2.0: Features

Header: AppleWorks 2.0: Features

The designers of AppleWorks have changed features in version 1.3 with

AppleWorks 2.0:

1. File size limits

When a one megabyte Apple Memory Expansion card (or its Apple IIGS or IIc
equivalent) is installed, AppleWorks 2.0 has the capacity for the following
file sizes:

-- Database records: 6350 (instead of 1350)

6350 is the maximum number of records that can be placed in the AppleWorks
data base with only 1 field identified with 1 character and having entries of
only 1 character. Using an Apple II with a 1 megabyte memory board, you can
add 6350 records. You will find there is still plenty of memory available,
but AppleWorks will tell you the data base has reached the maximum number of
records permitted.

On the other hand, on a data base pushed to the maximum of 30 fields, each
with a length of 20 characters and filled by 17, you will find that you will
run out of desktop memory before the data base reaches the maximum record
count.

-- Word processor lines: 7250 (instead of 2250)

-- Spread sheet rows:10K (instead of 1.55K)

2. Automatic RAMDisk pre-load

When an Apple Memory Expansion card (or its Apple IIGS or IIc equivalent) is
installed, AppleWorks 2.0 will automatically pre-load into the RAMDisk as a
part of the boot process. This pre-loading takes only about 30 seconds and
may be halted by pressing the ESC key.

All AppleWorks files except the SEG.PR file are loaded into the RAM card on
startup. The SEG.PR file contains only printer data, and, because of its
small size, it would be one of the first files to be removed from memory if
a file needed that space.

One possible way around this is from the Control Panel:

Set aside 192K for a RAMDisk in the memory expansion area. Copy AppleWorks
into the RAMDisk with System Utilties. Then go into BASIC, and run
APLWORKS.SYSTEM from the RAMDisk. Appleworks will load itself into memory
while recognizing the RAMDisk. Now, when the program requires the SEG.PR
file, the program, retaining the fact that it started up from the RAMDisk,
goes there to find the SEG.PR file.

3. New Spreadsheet feature: Cut/Copy & Paste:

After a cell has been cut or copied to the clipboard, the user will be able
to paste from the clipboard either the value, the formula, or both.

4. New file save feature:

If there is not enough room on a disk to save a file that already exists on
the disk, then AppleWorks first allows the user to delete the original file
from the disk. With AppleWorks' capability to create larger files, this

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 409 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

feature will become important.

5. Enhancements and fixes:

a. Word Processor:

- Removed code that made the word processor take 13 seconds to

process a carriage return in the middle of the first paragraph
of a 2000 line document.

- Inserted extra code to make ESC and some OPEN-APPLE keystrokes

work faster on large documents.

b. Spreadsheet:

- The routine to display spreadsheet rows was changed; it should

now work faster on rows that have lots of filled cells.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL253.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 410 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL254.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleWorks 2.0: Problems Printing to Networked ImageWriter

Header: AppleWorks 2.0: Problems Printing to Networked ImageWriter

This article last reviewed: 29 August 1989

TOPIC--------------------------------------------------

I have an AppleShare network, including Apple IIe, Apple IIGS, and Macintosh
systems, with AppleWorks 2.0 running from the server. I cannot print to the
LocalTalk ImageWriter II using AppleWorks, but can print to it from a
Macintosh.

DISCUSSION--------------------------------------------------

The difficulty in printing concerns the version of AppleWorks being run from
the server. The ability to print from Applesoft indicates that the hardware
is
properly configured. AppleWorks 2.0 is not licensed for, nor designed for,
running from an AppleShare server. For a version of AppleWorks licensed and
designed for running from a server, use AppleWorks version 2.1N. Be sure, in
AppleShare Admin under the Apple II menu, to set the user's account to the
desired printer. The alternative would be to run AppleWorks 2.0 from a local
disk.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL254.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 411 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL255.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleWorks on 5.25-Inch Disks: Printing to LaserWriter

Header: AppleWorks on 5.25-Inch Disks: Printing to LaserWriter

This article last reviewed: 1 May 1989

This article describes how to put together three 5.25-inch disks for
printing to a LaserWriter from an Apple II with AppleWorks (releases 2.0 and
later). This makes the AppleWorks-LaserWriter connection available when
only one or two 5.25-inch disk drives reside on the Apple II system.

Overview
--------
The process requires these three disks:

- The IWEM.BOOT Disk

- The APPLEWORKS Startup Disk

- The APPLEWORKS Program Disk

Have these disks handy to go through the process described below. The rest
of the article describes what to do with each disk, beginning with the
IWEM.BOOT disk. The article concludes with listings of the catalogs of the
three disks.

The IWEM.BOOT Disk

------------------
For AppleWorks to print to a LaserWriter, you need to download the
ImageWriter Emulator (IWEM) to the LaserWriter. To do this, you need the
disk labeled: IWEM.BOOT. Follow these steps:

1) Start up the Apple II with the IWEM.BOOT disk. This leaves the user at
the Applesoft BASIC prompt.

2) At the prompt, type:

-CHOOSER.II
3) Select "LaserWriter" in the top left scroll box.

4) In the lower left scroll box, select the zone of the desired LaserWriter.

5) In the top right scroll box, select the name of the desired LaserWriter.
Once you select the LaserWriter in the third box, CHOOSER.II checks for
the presence of IWEM. If not already downloaded, it will be downloaded.

6) Quit from CHOOSER.II.

This procedure needs to be used each time the LaserWriter is powered off and
back on. The power cycle causes IWEM to be purged. Occasionally, the IWEM
may be corrupted by other printing sessions, like a Macintosh printing
session. If an Apple II workstation attempts to print to the IWEM with no
results, try downloading the IWEM again.

The APPLEWORKS Startup Disk

---------------------------
With the IWEM downloaded, the next step is to start up with the APPLEWORKS
startup disk and set the desired printer as the default printer for the
user. With the disk configured as below, on startup, the Applesoft prompt

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 412 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

appears. Follow these steps:

1) At the prompt, type:

-CHOOSER.II

This time, CHOOSER.II is used only to select the printer for use by
AppleWorks. The APPLEWORKS startup disk assumes the IWEM is downloaded.

2) Select the same choices that were selected in the IWEM.BOOT section.
The selection is written to the APPLEWORKS startup disk. Unless the
printer is moved, renamed, or an alternate printer is desired, you do not
need to run CHOOSER.II again during future AppleWorks sessions.

3) Quit CHOOSER.II.

This presents the following request:

ENTER PREFIX (PRESS "RETURN" TO ACCEPT) 4) In response, type:

/APPLEWORKS/

and press RETURN. This displays the request:

ENTER PATHNAME OF NEXT APPLICATION

5) In response, type:

APLWORKS

and press RETURN. This runs the AppleWorks application. AppleWorks

requests the APPLEWORKS program disk.

The APPLEWORKS Program Disk

---------------------------
Continue the process by following these instructions:

1) Insert the APPLEWORKS program disk. Then press the space bar and RETURN.
@L
2) Once in AppleWorks, select:

#5: Other Activities.

3) Then select:

#7: Specify information about your printer(s)

4) Then select:

#2: Add a printer (maximum of 3)

5) Next select:

#2: Apple ImageWriter

6) Give this ImageWriter driver a name to represent it as the LaserWriter on

the network (like "Network LaserWriter").

7) Designate the correct slot -- the slot the Workstation Card is in on an

Apple IIe or slot 7 on an Apple IIGS.

8) The default settings on the next screen are correct, therefore, ESCAPE
back to the Main Menu. From this point, everything (including control
codes for underlining, bold-facing, and so on) functions as though
AppleWorks is printing to an ImageWriter.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 413 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Changes To Be Made
------------------
Beyond configuring the disks with the following files, one filename needs
to be changed. On the APPLEWORKS startup disk, APLWORKS.SYSTEM needs to be
changed to APLWORKS. Leaving the .SYSTEM off allows BASIC.SYSTEM to be the
startup application, thus, allowing CHOOSER.II to be run, following startup
with the APPLEWORKS startup disk and before running APLWORKS.

There are 21 blocks available on the APPLEWORKS startup disk. It may be

possible to create a small menu program to "front end" the APPLEWORKS disk.
The menu program is not covered in this document.

The three disk configurations follow:

IWEM.BOOT
---------
PRODOS
CHOOSER.II
CHOOSER5.OVR
IWEM
CHOOSER4.OVR
CHOOSER3.OVR
MTXABS.0
CHOOSER2.OVR
CHOOSER1.OVR
CHOOSER.0
ATINIT
BASIC.SYSTEM

12 Files Listed, 262 Blocks Used, 18 Available

APPLEWORKS (startup disk)

----------
PRODOS
APLWORKS
SEG.00
SEG.RM
SEG.XM
SEG.EL
CHOOSER.II
CHOOSER5.OVR
CHOOSER4.OVR
CHOOSER3.OVR
CHOOSER2.OVR
CHOOSER1.OVR
CHOOSER.0
MTXABS.0
ATINIT
BASIC.SYSTEM

16 Files Listed, 259 Blocks Used, 21 Available

APPLEWORKS (program disk)

----------
SEG.M0
SEG.M1
SEG.PR

3 Files Listed, 279 Blocks Used, 1 Available

Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL255.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 414 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL256.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleWorks to LocalTalk ImageWriter: Printing Problems

Header: AppleWorks to LocalTalk ImageWriter: Printing Problems

This article last reviewed: 6 June 1989

Some users have complained of an inability to print either from an Apple

IIe or from an Apple IIGS across an LocalTalk network to an ImageWriter II
when using AppleWorks. All reported being able to print from BASIC using
PR#7. Although the networks could have rather different configurations and
software, these facts were the same.

The difficulty in printing concerns the version of AppleWorks being run

from the server. The ability to print from Applesoft indicates that the
hardware is properly configured. AppleWorks 2.0 is not licensed for, nor
designed for, running from an AppleShare server. For a version of
AppleWorks licensed and designed for running from a server, use AppleWorks
version 2.1N. Be sure, in AppleShare Admin under the Apple II menu, to set
the user's account to the desired printer. The alternative would be to run
AppleWorks 2.0 from a local disk.

The printing procedure is the same whether you start across the network or
you startup locally. However, the network version of AppleWorks is
required, if it is to be run from the server. Here is some background
information, relative to this inquiry.

- Aristotle has no effect on the ability to print from AppleWorks.

- The location of ATINIT differs when on a server (as compared to a local

disk). On the server, ATINIT should be in the folder assigned to the user.
For example: ProDOS.SERVER/USERS/(_user's name_)/SETUP/ATINIT.

- The name of the System.APPS subdirectory is not critical, as long as a

consistent name is used throughout the network.

- The WWSS file is not necessary for the operation of AppleWorks.

Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL256.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 415 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL257.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleWorks: Creating database documents from text with tabs

Header: AppleWorks: Creating database documents from text with tabs

Some database programs export text files that have fields separated by tabs
and records by carriage returns. AppleWorks imports a database file from a
text file when all fields and records are separated by carriage returns. To
convert the tabbed export format to the format AppleWorks imports, you must
use a word processing application or a programming language, such as BASIC or
Pascal, whether or not you have to transfer the data from the Macintosh.

Using a word processing application, open the document and change the tabs to
carriage returns with a replace command. Most applications have special codes
for the tab and carriage return, such as ^t and ^p in MicroSoft Word. Save
the changes as a text file, which AppleWorks should accept.

For using a programming language, take this example in Applesoft BASIC under
ProDOS.

10 ONERR GOTO 130

20 O$="<OLD FILE NAME>"
30 N$="<NEW FILE NAME>"
40 D$=CHR$(4)
50 PRINT D$"OPEN"O$
60 PRINT D$"OPEN"N$
70 PRINT D$"READ"O$
80 GET A$
90 PRINT D$"WRITE"N$
100 IF A$=CHR$(9) THEN A$=CHR$(13)
110 PRINT A$;
120 GOTO 70
130 PRINT D$"CLOSE"
140 END

This program should be saved, along with the exported text file, to a ProDOS
disk; save the program with a name such as "TAB2CR". After substituting
appropriate names in lines 20 and 30, run the program. AppleWorks should
accept the output file.

Here is a MacPascal program that could convert the export file of a Macintosh
application such as MacWorks.

program Convert;
type
text = file of char;

var
infile, outfile : text;
c : char;

begin
{an example pathname could be 'HD:MS Works:ExportFile'}
open(infile, 'export file pathname');
open(outfile, 'AppleWorks format file pathname');
while not (eof(infile)) do
begin
read(infile, c);
if ord(c) = 9 then
begin
c := chr(13);
end;
write(c); {echo to screen}

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 416 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

write(outfile, c);
end;
close(infile);
close(outfile);
end.

Substitute appropriate names for "export file pathname" and "AppleWorks

format file pathname". After transferring the output file to the Apple II
(with MS Works or MacTerminal), save the captured file as a text file.
AppleWorks should accept the captured file.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL257.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 417 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL258.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleWorks: Desktop size on the Apple IIGS

Header: AppleWorks: Desktop size on the Apple IIGS

For desktop storage, AppleWorks 2.0 on an Apple IIGS will only use memory
found on the Apple IIGS logic board and Memory Expansion Card. When this card
is not present and AppleWorks 2.0 is booted from the Apple IIGS System Disk,
the Apple IIGS Tools, using a large portion of available logic board RAM,
leave only 13K for the AppleWorks desktop. The message "WARNING! Desktop is
full. Action not completed. Press space bar to continue." appears when the
user attempts to create a word processor file from scratch. If you make a
second attempt to create a word processor file, AppleWorks will complete the
task.

AppleWorks' users should be aware of this situation before using AppleWorks

2.0 and the Apple IIGS System Disk files on an Apple IIGS without an Apple
IIGS Memory Expansion Card installed.

If AppleWorks 2.0 is booted from the AppleWorks Startup Disk, an Apple IIGS
1M Expansion Card will permit up to 1149K on AppleWorks' desktop. Factors
that affect the size of AppleWorks' desktop are:

memory available on the Apple IIGS Memory Expansion Card

memory occupied by the Apple IIGS RAM disk
the availability of the Apple IIGS desktop
other AppleWorks auxiliary programs that are loaded into the Apple IIGS
the method used to start up AppleWorks.

You may create a disk that will allow AppleWorks and the Apple IIGS Desktop
to be used effectively on the same disk:

1. Make a new copy of your AppleWorks 2.0 master disk.

2. Remove the file "PRODOS" from the new AppleWorks disk.

3. Copy the file called "P8" from the System folder on the Apple IIGS
System Disk onto the new AppleWorks disk. Rename the copied file
"PRODOS". The disk is now bootable for starting up the Apple IIGS.

If you wish to add the desktop:

1. Locate the folder "DESKTOP" on the Apple IIGS System Disk.

Copy the contents of this folder onto the root directory of the new
AppleWorks disk.

2. On new the AppleWorks disk, rename the file "APLWORKS.SYSTEM"

"APPLEWORKS" and "DESKTOP1" "DESK1.SYSTEM".

3. Start your Apple IIGS with the modified AppleWorks disk.

Once the desktop appears, double click on the "APPLEWORKS" icon
to run the AppleWorks program. Using this disk on an Apple IIGS
with 256K memory provides 124K of AppleWorks' desktop space.

AppleWorks versions 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 can be used on an Apple IIGS, an Apple
IIc, or an Apple IIe with either 64K or 128K memory. AppleWorks' desktop size
on an Apple IIGS will vary with the version of AppleWorks in use. Because
AppleWorks 1.3 and earlier versions do not recognize the newer features of
the Apple IIGS, the user can obtain only a 55K AppleWorks desktop, even
though the computer may have from 256K to 1.25M of memory on the logic board
and in the Memory Expansion Slot. However, if the Apple IIGS has an Apple II
Memory Expansion Card in one of its seven slots, AppleWorks 1.3 does
recognize it and uses the Memory Expansion Card to increase the desktop

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 418 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

size.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL258.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 419 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL259.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleWorks: Installing it on a ProFile or UniDisk 3.5

Header: AppleWorks: Installing it on a ProFile or UniDisk 3.5

Briefly, these procedures require you to:

1. Install PRODOS and BASIC.SYSTEM on the ProFile or UniDisk 3.5.

This can be done using the ProDOS User's Disk and instructions in the
ProDOS User's Manual.

2. Copy all the files on the AppleWorks Startup and Program disk into a
subdirectory named AppleWorks on the ProFile or UniDisk 3.5.

After this you will be able to boot and run AppleWorks from the ProFile
or UniDisk 3.5.

I. Equipment Needed:

A. Apple IIe or Enhanced IIe

B. ProFile Hard Disk ( 5 or 10 Meg) with Apple II ProFile interface

card or UniDisk 3.5 with UniDisk 3.5 interface card

-- Put the ProFile or UniDisk 3.5 interface card in slot 7 of an

Enhanced IIe if, when you turn on the Enhanced IIe, you want it
to boot from the ProFile or UniDisk 3.5 instead of the floppy
disk drive

C. ProDOS User's Disk

D. AppleWorks Startup and Program disk

II. Installation Procedure:

A. Boot the ProDOS User's Disk.

B. Format the ProFilewith the volume name /PROFILE or Format the

UniDisk 3.5 with the volume name /UNI.

C. Use the File handling commands on the ProDOS User's disk to:

1. Copy the files PRODOS and BASIC.SYSTEM to the ProFile or

UniDisk 3.5.

2. Create a subdirectory called APPLEWORKS on the ProFile or

UniDisk 3.5

3. Copy all the files on the AppleWorks Startup and Program disks
into the APPLEWORKS subdirectory you just created.

4. Remove the files PRODOS and BASIC.SYSTEM only from the

subdirectory named APPLEWORKS.

-- You already put PRODOS and BASIC.SYSTEM on the root

directory of the ProFile or UniDisk 3.5 in step C1.

D. Exit the ProDOS User's disk into Applesoft BASIC.

You need to create a program called STARTUP on the ProFile or

UniDisk 3.5. This program will command AppleWorks to run from the
ProFile or UniDisk 3.5 when you boot from the ProFile or UniDisk

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 420 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

3.5.

E. Type PR#n, where n is the number of the slot of the ProFile or

UniDisk 3.5 interface card, e. g., PR#7 in the case of the Enhanced
IIe in item IB above.

F. You should now have the ] symbol on the screen. Type in the
following program for the ProFile:

10 TEXT : HOME
20 PRINT CHR$(4);"PREFIX /PROFILE/APPLEWORKS"
30 PRINT CHR$(4);"-APL.WORKS.SYSTEM"
40 END

For a UniDisk 3.5, type in the following program:

10 TEXT : HOME
20 PRINT CHR$(4);"PREFIX /UNI/APPLEWORKS"
30 PRINT CHR$(4);"-APL.WORKS.SYSTEM"
40 END

G. Save this program on the ProFile or UniDisk 3.5 as STARTUP,

i.e. SAVE /PROFILE/STARTUP or SAVE /UNI/STARTUP.

H. Type PR#n using the same number for n as you did in step E above.

-- AppleWorks should now boot from the ProFile or UniDisk 3.5.

I. To set up AppleWorks for use with the ProFile or UniDisk 3.5:

1. In AppleWorks, choose 5. "Other Activities."

2. Then choose 1. "Select standard location of data disk."

3. Type /PROFILE/APPLEWORKS or /UNI/APPLEWORKS.

Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL259.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 421 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL260.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleWorks: Problems Printing to LocalTalk ImageWriter

Header: AppleWorks: Problems Printing to LocalTalk ImageWriter

This article last reviewed: 29 August 1989

TOPIC--------------------------------------------------

AppleShare was recently installed at a client school. I am having problems

printing from AppleWorks on the Apple IIe's to a LocalTalk Imagewriter.
Here is some background:

- There are no problems accessing the file server.

- The LocalTalk ImageWriter was set as the default printer for Apple II users.

- The AppleShare Print Spooler is NOT on the file server.

- LocalTalk Cards were placed in Slot 7 of the IIe's.

- I added a printer in AppleWorks configured to print to Slot 7.

- If I run CHOOSER.II the printer shows up. If I reselect the printer I

still have the same problems.

When I print from AppleWorks I get NOTHING. If I go to BASIC I can type

PR#7 and talk to the printer. How can I print to the LocalTalk'd ImageWriter
from AppleWorks?

DISCUSSION--------------------------------------------------

We cannot get the results you describe. With the Workstation card in slot
7, a networked ImageWriter, a slot 7 ImageWriter selected in AppleWorks,
and AppleWorks 2.0 running, we can print across the network with no
difficulties.

Our configurations have included all combinations of:

- AppleWorks version 2.0, with an ImageWriter assigned to slot 7

- ProDOS 8 versions 1.4 and 1.6

- Apple IIe, enhanced, with the Workstation card in slot 7

- ImageWriter II with AppleTalk option

- Chooser II version 1.2

- AppleShare II Workstation versions 1.0 and 1.1

In all cases the document printed without need for special actions.

Our boot disk contained

- ProDOS
- ATINIT
- Selector.System
- Sys.Apps (a sub-directory containing:)
- Basic.System
- Logoff
- Logon

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 422 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

- Chooser (a sub-directory containing:)

- Chooser.II
- Chooser5.OVR
- IWEM
- Chooser4.OVR
- Chooser3.OVR
- MTXABS.0
- Chooser2.OVR
- Chooser1.OVR
- Chooser.0
- Namer (a sub-directory containing:)
- Namer.II
- Namer.0
- MTXABS.0
- Access ( a sub-directory containing:)
- Access
- Priv.0
- MTXABS.0
- Priv1.OVR
- Priv2.OVR
- Priv3.OVR
- Priv4.OVR
- AWORKS (a sub-directory containing:)
- Aplworks.System
- SEG.00
- WWSS
- SEG.M0
- SEG.EL
- SEG.XM
- SEG.RM
- SEG.M1
- SEG.PR

Our procedure followed these steps:

1) Boot with the above configured disk.

2) The selector window will be displayed; select and run Chooser II.

3) Press the Down cursor key to highlight "AppleTalk ImageWriter II".

4) Press Return to select. The name of the networked ImageWriter should appear
in the to right scroll box. If the name does not appear:

a) Press the Tab key three times. You are now in the scroll box allowing
you to chose between LocalTalk and Serial. Highlight LocalTalk and
press
Return.

b) Press Tab twice. You are now in the top left window. Highlight
'AppleTalk ImageWriter II'. Press Return. The name of the networked
ImageWriter should now appear.

5) Press Tab twice. Use the Down cursor key to highlight the name of the
networked ImageWriter. Press Return to select.

6) Press Open-Apple-Q to exit Chooser II.

7) Run AppleWorks.

8) Select Other Activities, Printer Information.

9) Verify a printer is designated as an ImageWriter in Slot 7. If no

ImageWriter is set for slot 7, then do these three steps:

a) Delete a printer if all three printers are currently defined

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 423 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

b) Add a printer. Use ImageWriter. Set for Slot 7.

c) Give a name that indicates it is a network printer,i.e., "Network IW
II".

10) Return to your document. Press Open-Apple-P to access the printer

routines.

11) Answer the "Print from?" question. (In our test, we answered from
beginning)

12) Answer "Where...to print the file?" question with the network printer.

13) Answer "How many copies?" question.

14) On pressing Return after answering the last question, AppleWorks will send
the document over the network to the ImageWriter. There was a slight delay
between the screen refresh and the printing.

If you have any further questions about this sequence of events please Link
TECH.COMM with details of what is taking place.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL260.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 424 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL261.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleWorks: RamWorks Card Needs Larger Memory Capacity (9/95)

Header: AppleWorks: RamWorks Card Needs Larger Memory Capacity (9/95)

Article Created: 5 December 1985

Article Reviewed/Updated: 19 September 1995

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes how to interface Catalyst With An Apple II, AppleWorks
& RamWorks IIe 80-column Card.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

This technical note describes the procedure to correctly interface the above
products to allow larger memory capacities with the AppleWorks application.

What You Need

=============
Before you begin, be sure you have the following:

1. ProDOS users disk.

2. Desktop Expander disk from Applied Engineering.
3. AppleWorks startup and program disks.
4. Catalyst disk.

Procedure
=========

Step 1
------
Boot the Desktop Expander disk and follow the instructions. This will modify
your AppleWorks disk so that it can use the additional memory of the Ramworks
board IIe card.

Step 2
------
Create a subdirectory on your hard disk using Apple's ProDOS Users disk
called "/PROFILE/AW"

Step 3
------
Copy all of the files from the AppleWorks Startup and Program disks to the
subdirectory you just created.

Step 4
------
Once the files have been copied, start up your Catalyst disk and select the
Catalyst Editor.

Step 5
------
Move the cursor to the point where you wish to add your AppleWorks program
and press"A".

Step 6
------
Type "APPLEWORKS" for the program name.

Step 7

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 425 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

------
Type "AW/APLWORKS.SYSTEM" for the interpreter pathname.

Step 8
------
Type "AW" for the initial prefix.

Step 9
------
Press RETURN for the program path.

Step 10
-------
You will be asked if all items are correct. Answer "Y" and press ESCAPE to
exit to the main menu.

Step 11
-------
Enter "U" to update the INTERPS2E file.

Step 12
-------
Exit to the Catalyst main menu by entering "Q".

When you select the AppleWorks program from the main menu you will notice
that you now have 101K available for data storage.

NOTE: Apple Computer Inc. is not responsible for the contents of this article.

Article Change History:

19 Sep 1995 - Reformatted to meet current standards.

Support Information Services

Quark Tech Support

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL261.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 426 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL262.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleWorks: Standard and Custom Printer Interfaces (1 of 2)

Header: AppleWorks: Standard and Custom Printer Interfaces (1 of 2)

Versions of AppleWorks earlier than version 1.2 don't allow you to run
Appleworks using any other interface card but the Apple Super Serial card. If
you wish to use a different interface card, you must upgrade to
1.2 or later versions.

For a new owner of an Apple IIe with AppleWorks, dealers should include
onlythose interface cards that work. The Silentype has its own interface
card. Asidefrom that, there are two interface cards, the Apple II Parallel
Interface Card (A2B0021) and the Apple Super Serial Card (A2B0044), that work
correctly with all of the printers on AppleWorks' Add a Printer list:

1. Apple Printers
a. Dot Matrix Printer (DMP). AppleWorks is set up for the Apple DMP.
If you have any other printer, you must set up AppleWorks for it.
b. Daisy Wheel Printer (DWP)
c. Imagewriter
d. Scribe
2. Epson (tm) Printer Series: MX, MX with Graftrax+, RX, and FX
3. Qume (r) Sprint 5 and Sprint 11

For new owners of a IIc, dealers should make sure that the customer's printer
is compatible with a IIc running AppleWorks.

For a IIe owner considering AppleWorks, make sure the owner has a
configuration compatible with AppleWorks. If the owner doesn't have such a
configuration, the owner's only recourse to buy an interface card that is
compatible.

--> Using AppleWorks with cards and printers not on the standard list

If you're using a card or a printer not on AppleWorks' standard list, you must
add a custom printer to your AppleWorks configuration and specify the
characteristics of the card or printer.

To choose the following options, type the number and press the RETURN key.

1. From AppleWorks' main menu, choose "5. Other Activities".

2. From the "Other Activities" menu, choose "7. Specify information about
your printer(s)".

3. From the "Printer Information" menu, choose "2. Add a printer".

4. From the "Add a Printer" menu, choose "12. Custom printer".

a. Enter the name you wish to use for the printer.
b. Press RETURN.
c. Apple IIe: Choose the slot of the printer's interface card.
Apple IIc: Choose the port of the printer.
d. Press RETURN.

5. Press the ESC key: now the printer has been added to AppleWorks.

6. Now you must give AppleWorks what the printer needs to perform,
specifying
requirments for:

1. a line feed after each carriage return,

2. a top-of-page command,

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 427 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

3. stopping at the end of each page,

4. platen width,
5. interface card settings, and
6. codes for special functions of the printer.

Items 1 to 4 are self-explanatory and can readily be changed to meet the

requirements of different jobs. You can do this from the "Printer
Information" menu, choosing the printer you named under "Add a Printer".

7. With the Apple IIe, choose "5. Interface Cards". Now AppleWorks asks for
a code to send to the printer interface card to prepare the card for
sending data to the printer. Consult the table below for the
appropriate keystrokes. (Note that [CTRL- ] and the character in the
bracket means that you must hold the CTRL key down while you type the
character; do not type the brackets.)

Interface card Code string

Apple Parallel Card (2PIC) [CTRL-I]80N

Apple Super Serial Card [CTRL-I]80N
Apple Centronix Parallel Card [CTRL-I]255N
Grappler Plus [CTRL-I]0N
Microtek RV-611C [CTRL-I]255N
Pkaso [CTRL-I]0N
MPC AP Graph and Graphwriter [CTRL-I]255N

If your card isn't on this chart, look in the card manual; it should have
the code string.
It's important to note that, although some printer manuals give code
strings in the form of keystrokes, some other manuals give code strings
in
numerical form, either decimal (0 to 9) or hexadecimal (0 to F).
AppleWorks won't accept a code string simply typed in as one of these
numbers; you must use a keystroke or combination of keystrokes to send
the
number from the keyboard to AppleWorks. Look up the decimal or
hexidecimal
form of the number in an Apple II ASCII chart; the appropriate keystrokes
are on the right.

Suppose, for example, the manual states that the decimal code string
09464878 initializes the card. On an Apple II ASCII chart, 09 is
[CTRL-I], 46 is the eight key, 48 is the zero key, and 78 is capital N;
altogether, that's [CTRL-I]80N. To put this into AppleWorks you would:

1. Choose "5. Interface Card"

2. Hold down the CTRL key and type I,

3. Type 80

4. Hold down the SHIFT key and type N

5. Hold down the SHIFT key and type 6; this ends the string with the
carat or '^' AppleWorks requires.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL262.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 428 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL263.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleWorks: Using it on the Apple II UniDisk 3.5

Header: AppleWorks: Using it on the Apple II UniDisk 3.5

To catalog a disk in a Unidisk 3.5 on an Apple IIc with system utilities 2.1,
you may choose 4 options on the menu screen:

1. built-in drive
2. external disk 3.5 #1
3. external disk IIc
4. Prodos Pathname

When choosing to format a disk, of course, the first 3 options are present.

Users of AppleWorks versions previous to version 1.3 may be confused by the

menu screen shown when they choose to catalog a disk or change current disk:

1. Drive 1
2. Drive 2
3. Profile or other ProDOS directory

Choose option 3 to use the Unidisk 3.5 with AppleWorks before version 1.3. In
these earlier versions, you can refer to the UniDisk 3.5 only by its pathname,
such as /appleworks/business.

Refer to page 9 the pamphlet "Using AppleWorks on the Apple II Unidisk 3.5"
for
further explanations of how to load, save and list data files with Appleworks
and the 3.5 disk.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL263.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 429 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL264.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: AppleWorks: Using it on the Apple II and Apple II Plus

Header: AppleWorks: Using it on the Apple II and Apple II Plus

Videx makes 80-column boards and patch program disks that allow Appleworks to
operate on an Apple II or II Plus.

A Videx card gives a normal Apple II or Apple II Plus the ability to run
AppleWorks. The AppleWorks diskettes must also be modified with a special
patch program in order to run on the Apple II or II Plus.

There are some technical considerations, though:

a. The user must have purchased the Videx Ultraterm Card or the Videoterm
Card with the Inverse Option chip.

b. The shift key modification must also be in place; if it isn't, you can
perform the modification yourself by referring to the manual.

c. The program requires AppleWorks 1.3 to utilize the Apple RAM card.
Titan and Legend RAM cards are supported with AppleWorks versions
1.1 and 1.2.

Videx Inc.
1105 NE Circle Blvd.
Corvallis, OR 97330
503 / 758-0521@

Applied Engineering, best known for its RamWorks board for the Apple IIe,
also makes "RamFactor", a memory board for the Apple II, Apple II Plus,
IIe, and Apple IIGS.

RamFactor comes with a set of patch disks for AppleWorks versions 1.2 and
1.3 and another set for 2.0. Patch disks from Videx are not required.

Technical requirements for an Apple II Plus are:

a. 64K main memory in either:

1. 48K + 16K language card
or
2. Applied Engineering Transwarp Accelerator

b. 80 column card with inverse video capability

c. Shift key wire from keyboard to main board (a common modification)

d. RamFactor board with at least 256K (minimum configuration)

e. One or more disk drives.

Such an Apple II Plus system has no trouble running AppleWorks 1.3.

The following key substitutions apply:

Apple II Plus AppleWorks

Escape Open Apple

Control-J Up
Control-K Down
Apple Technical Communications

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 430 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL264.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 431 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL265.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Applied Engineering (6/95)

Header: Applied Engineering (6/95)

Article Created: 3 December 1988

Article Reviewed/Updated: 6 June 1995

Applied Engineering
-------------------
3210 Beltline Rd.
Dallas, TX 75234

Company Profile:
Applied Engineering went out of business in May 1994. They made hardware,
specializing in Apple II & Macintosh peripheral boards. Tech support for some
of their products is now being handled by a few separate companies.

Accelerators
============
Brainstorm Products
Provides support for Applied Engineering accelerators and related software
only.

Apple II Related Products

=========================
ABC Direct
** FOR SCHOOLS OR BUSINESSES ONLY. NO INDIVIDUALS PLEASE **
Provides support for the Applied Engineering products for the Apple II series
(including the DOS compatibility card). Also has a repair service available
for any Applied Engineering product based on an hourly fee.

Parallel Printer Interface Cards

================================
Orange Micro, Inc.
Offer solutions to many problems with Applied Engineering parallel printer
interface cards (similar to their own Grappler boards).

The Tech Info Library article titled "Locating Vendor Information" can help
you search for a particular vendor's address and phone number.

Article Change History:

06 Jun 1995 - Added information about Orange Micro, Inc.
10 Feb 1995 - Added reference to Locating Vendor Info article.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1989-95, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3pty

### END OF FILE A2TIL265.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 432 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL266.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Beagle Brothers Inc.

Header: Beagle Brothers Inc.

Article Created: 02/12/88

Article Reviewed: 07/06/93
Article Updated: 07/06/93

Wordperfect Corp
------------------

1555 N. Technology Wy.

Orem, UT 84057

800-321-4566

801-228-5377 Fax

Company Profile:
Formerly Beagle Brothers Inc., Macintosh software, includes
products such as Flash Escape and Beagle Works. Quality Computers (formerly
Beagle Bros. Inc.), Apple II software, specializing primarily in Apple II
tools.

Quality Computers
20200 9 Mile Rd.
P.O. Box 665
St. Clair Shores, MI 48080
313-774-7200
800-443-6697
800-777-3642
Fax: 313-774-2698

Article Change History: 07/06/93 Phone number added

Copyright 1988-93, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL266.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 433 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL267.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Blyth Software

Header: Blyth Software

Article Created: 08/13/87

Article Reviewed: 07/06/93
Article Updated: 08/21/91

Blyth Software, Inc.

--------------------

1065 E. Hillsdale
Suite 300
Foster City, CA 94404

800-346-6647

415-571-0222

415-571-1132 Fax

AppleLink: D0102

Company Profile:
Software, specializing in Macintosh and Apple II databases.
Copyright 1989-93, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL267.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 434 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL268.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Business Technology Manufacturing, Inc.

Header: Business Technology Manufacturing, Inc.

Article Created: 03/27/90

Article Reviewed: 07/06/93
Article Updated: 11/09/92

Business Technology Manufacturing, Inc.

------------------------------------------

42-20 235th St.

Douglaston, NY 11363

718-229-8080

Company Profile:
Hardware, specializing in a hands-free phone dialer system that directly
connects the"real world" of telephones and telemarketing to the Macintosh and
programs used with a telephone or headset. Enlarging monitors for Mac Classic
(B&W) and Apple II (color), custom videowork, rack mount cases for all
machines
Copyright 1990-93, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL268.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 435 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL269.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Changes in Word Juggler for the Apple II (vers. 2.7 or greater)
Header: Changes in Word Juggler for the Apple II (vers. 2.7 or greater)

Word Juggler for the Apple II (version 2.7 or greater) differs from the older
versions in two primary ways; by the elimination of the hardware modification
and the addition of a number of enhancements to the program. The following
list is a summary of all of the changes.

Enhancements to the program

New HELP feature

While editing a document, Open-Apple "?" will display a list of topics that,
when selected, explain the various features of Word Juggler. Note that this
replaces the old HELP command key (CONTROL V).

40 / 80 column support
Word Juggler for the Apple II will work in 40 columns on both the Apple IIe
and the Apple IIc. When used on the Apple IIe, Word Juggler will use the 80
column card in the auxiliary slot if it is available. When used on the Apple
IIc, Word Juggler checks the 40/80 column switch when the program is booted,
and then reacts accordingly.

When used in the 40 column mode, Word Juggler changes in a few minor ways:

o The main menu changes slightly.

o The file name does not appear on the status line.

Main menu changes

o Purge is now Delete.
o Define Prefix is now Prefix.

Printer cards
o When used on the Apple IIc, the printer card is permanently set to Super
Serial to accommodate the two ports on the Apple IIc.
o When used on the Apple IIc, the printer card must be used in Slot 1 or
2.

MOVE and COPY commands

Word Juggler now allows you to use the FIND and ^ FIND commands when prompted
to "Move cursor to start (or end ) of block and press space", in addition to
the normal cursor movement keys.

FIND and ^ FIND commands

Hitting RETURN when prompted with "Find what?" will find the next occurrence
of the string that was last searched for.

Titles and Page variables

The TEXT LINE/COL command now allows greater flexibility in choosing where on
the page a title or page number can appear. In addition to specifying the
absolute column number, titles or page numbers may appear on the left or right
margin, centered between the margins, or alternating between the margins
(which is useful when printing manuals)

Changes in the keystrokes

Because there is no keyboard enhancer included with Word Juggler version 2.7,
some of the keystrokes had to be altered.

o The Open Apple key is used to access the editing commands

(instead of the CONTROL key used in the older versions).

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 436 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

o The "overstrike" feature is no longer available.

Cursor Movement
Used to be: Now is:

o Previous Page SHIFT Up-Arrow Open-Apple Up-Arrow

Previous Word SHIFT Left-Arrow Open-Apple Left-Arrow
Next Word SHIFT Right-Arrow Open-Apple Right-Arrow
Next Page SHIFT Down-Arrow
Open-Apple Down-Arrow

o Beginning of Document CONTROL SHIFT Up-Arrow Open-Apple E

Beginning of Line CONTROL SHIFT Left-Arrow Open-Apple S
End of Line CONTROL SHIFT Right-Arrow Open-Apple D
End of Document CONTROL SHIFT Down-Arrow Open-Apple X

o Straight Up CONTROL Up-Arrow Open-Apple CONTROL E

Straight Left CONTROL Left-Arrow Open-Apple CONTROL S
Straight Right CONTROL Right-Arrow Open-Apple CONTROL D
Straight Down CONTROL Down-Arrow Open-Apple CONTROL X

o Start of next line CONTROL RETURN Open-Apple RETURN

o Tab Set (and Clear) SHIFT (and CONTROL) TAB Open-Apple TAB
o Tab Inserting Spaces SHIFT CONTROL TAB Open-Apple Space

Printout Formatting Commands

The following commands not labeled on the command strip are now different:

Used to be: Now is:

o Else ESCAPE CONTROL = ESCAPE E

o 15 Pitch ESCAPE CONTROL 4 ESCAPE F
o Ragged Left ESCAPE CONTROL 2 ESCAPE R
o Triple Space ESCAPE CONTROL 7 ESCAPE T

Margin Settings
Both the Top Margin and the Left Margin commands are now counted from "0"
instead of "1".

Printout Enhancement Commands and Special Functions

Printout enhancements (such as bold and underline) and special functions (such
as Lexicheck and Terminus) are now accessed with the Solid-Apple key instead
of the Open-Apple key. Additionally, Print Form has changed from Open-Apple
"." to Solid-Apple "2".

Variables are also entered with the Solid-Apple key.

Using Word Juggler with the Keyboard Enhancer

If you have a keyboard enhancer already installed and prefer to use the old
commands, simply create a document called "OLD.COMMANDS" on the Word Juggler
diskette and reboot. (It doesn't matter what is in this document, it just
needs to be on the diskette.) This will allow Word Juggler to function almost
the same as the earlier versions, while still having access to all of the
program enhancements.

The functions that will behave differently are:

o Help will still be accessed as Open-Apple "?".

o Margins are still counted from "0" instead of from "1".
o Print Form will change from Open-Apple "." to Open-Apple "2".

New features of Word Juggler 2.8

o Print to Disk option - Allows incorporation of Word Juggler files with

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 437 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

other program applications including terminal communications while retaining

the original format of the document. This feature may be accessed by pressing
Closed-Apple "9".

o Built in Terminal Program - A scaled down telecommunication package based

on Quark's TERMINUS program. This option is able to transmit and receive
documents with as much ease as you would expect from a true telecommunications
product. It will not, however, support any of TERMINUS' advanced transmission
modes such as binary or compressed options.

The package allows you to define 4 Protocols, as opposed to Terminus' 16

Protocols. Furthermore, the Protocols support only two macros each, (the
autodial and logon macros) while Terminus' Protocols can support up to 28
user-definable macros each.

NOTE: Apple Computer Inc. is not responsible for the contents of this
article.

Quark Technical Support

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL269.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 438 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL270.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Color Plotter Model 410: Specifications (Discontinued)

Header: Color Plotter Model 410: Specifications (Discontinued)

I. Technical Specifications

1. Pens:

a. Maximum active: 4 in head, software selectable

b. Tips:
1. Porous plastic for paper
2. Fiber for transparency

c. 8 colors: black, red, green, blue, violet, orange, gold, brown

d. Liquid ink

e. Velocity:
1. Each axis: Pen up or down, max. 10 cm/sec (3.94 in./sec)
2. Programmable: 1 to 10 cm/sec in 1 cm/sec increments
3. Both axes driven to 45 degree line: Max. 14.12 cm/sec
(5.56 in./sec)

2. Plot:

a. Maximum: X axis: 391.8 mm (15.4 in.); X axis: 257 mm (10.1)

b. Minimum width: 115 mm (4.6 in.)

c. Resolution: Smallest addressible step size: 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)

d. Repeatability:
1. With one pen: 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
2. Between pens: 0.4 mm (0.016 in.)

e. Method: X-axis paper motion with Y-axis pen motion

f. Driving method: Stepper motors

g. Relative position accuracy: + 1% + 0.3 mm

3. Media:

a. Paper or Apple Plotter Transparency Film

b. 9 software-selectable sizes:

a. Vertical
--Inches
1. 8.5 x 11 ANSI Size A
2. 11 x 17 ANSI Size B
--Millimeters
3. 297 x 420 DIN/JIS A3
4. 210 x 297 DIN/JIS A4
5. 250 x 353 DIN/JIS B4
6. 176 x 250 DIN/JIS B5

b. Horizontal
--Inches
1. 11 x 8.5 ANSI Size A
--Millimeters

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 439 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

2. 297 x 210 DIN/JIS A4

3. 250 x 176 DIN/JIS B5

c. Thickness:

mm in.

1. Maximum: 0.05 0.002

2. Minimum: 0.8 0.031

4. Seven Language font sets

a. English (U.S.)
b. English (U.K.)
c. German
d. French
e. Italian
f. Swedish
g. Spanish

5. Front panel controls:

a. Operate/Free (LED and switch)

b. Remote/Local (LED and switch)

c. Pen Select (switch - local mode only)

d. Pen Up/Down (switch - local mode only)

e. Pen Movement (switches - up, down, left, right)

f. Clear (switch - Free mode only)

g. Self test (switch - Free mode only)

6. Power requirements:

a. 103.5-126.5 V 57-63 Hz

b. 200-250 V 48-52 Hz

-- 33 watts maximum consumption

7. Interface:

a. RS-232C asynchronous serial ASCII

b. Hardware handshaking

c. Switch-selectable baud rates:

75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 4800, or 9600

d. Data format: 7 or 8 bit (switch selectable)

e. Stop Bit: None, 1 1.5 or 2 (switch selectable)

f. Parity: None, odd, or even

8. FCC Certification: Class B computing device

9. Physical

mm in.

Height: 122 4.8

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 440 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Width: 412 16.2

Depth: 300 11.8

kg lb.

Net: 6 13.2
Shipping: 10 22

10. Environmental requirements

a. Temperature

Degrees
Fahrenheit Celsius

1. Operating: 41 to 104 5 to 40
2. Storage: -4 to 149 -20 to 65

b. Humidity: 20 to 80% relative humidity at 40 degrees Celsius

II. System Configuration

1. Computer: Apple II Plus, Apple IIe, Apple IIc, Apple III

a. For Apple II Plus and IIe:

--disk drive
--Super Serial Card

2. Video display

3. Apple Business Graphics users must have a driver installed with

a PIK (Printer Interface Kit) disk.
Copyright 1986, 1992, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL270.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 441 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL271.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ColorMonitor IIc, ColorMonitor IIe: Specs (Discontinued)

Header: ColorMonitor IIc, ColorMonitor IIe: Specs (Discontinued)

I. Technical Specifications

A. Picture Tube

1. 14-inch diagonal (13 inch view)

2. Dot pitch: 0.52mm
3. High contrast (black matrix)

B. Input Signal:

1. Composite (NTSC) only

2. Synchronous negative
-- 1.0 +/- 0.5-volts peak to peak
-- internally terminated with 75 ohm resistor.
3. Input connector: RCA (phono) jack

C. User Controls:

1. Front:
-- Power switch
-- High resolution (white only) button
-- Brightness
-- Contrast
-- Color (hue intensity)
-- Tint
2. Rear:
-- Vertical size
-- Vertical hold
-- Horizontal hold
3. Side: Power switch of ColorMonitor IIc

D. Scanning Frequencies

Horizontal Scan Vertical Scan

1. NTSC/60 15.734 kHz 60 Hz

2. NTSC/50-PAL/50 15.659 kHz 50 Hz

E. Color Reference Frequency

1. NTSC/60 Hz: 3.579545 MHz

2. NTSC/50 Hz: 3.562456 MHz
3. PAL/50 Hz: 4.433618 MHz

F. Video Bandwidth

Text Video Graphics Video

(Monochrome) (Color)

1. NTSC 8.0 MHz 3.0 MHz

2. PAL 8.0 MHz 3.8 MHz

G. Physical Dimensions:

1. Weight: 27.56 lbs (12.5kg) maximum

inches centimeters
IIe/IIc IIe/IIc

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 442 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

2. Width: 14.4/13.4 36.7/34.0

3. Height: 12.4 31.5
4. Depth: 14.4 36.5

H. Power Consumption:

1. 50 watts normal at 120VAC

2. 75 watts maximum
3. Fuse Protection:
-- The monitor contains internal power line fuse protection.
This fuse should be replaced with the same type by a
qualified service technican.

I. Input Voltage

Model Operating Range Power Frequency

1. 120v 108-132 50-60 Hz
2. 220v 198-242 50-60 Hz
3. 240v 216-264 50-60 Hz

NOTE: Input voltage is not adjustable within the monitor.

J. Environment:
Degrees
Fahrenheit Celsius
1. Operating: 41 to 86 5 to 30
2. Storage: -31 to 140 -35 to 60

II. System Configuration

A. ColorMonitor IIe:

1. Apple II
2. Apple II Plus
3. Apple IIe

B. ColorMonitor IIc: Apple IIc

Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL271.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 443 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL272.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: COMMAND.COM: A General Description

Header: COMMAND.COM: A General Description

This article last reviewed: 9/1/87

COMMAND.COM is a command interpreter for the ProDOS operating system. When

used in place of BASIC.SYSTEM, it gives an Enhanced Apple IIe, Apple IIc,
or Apple IIgs some of the power of the MS-DOS operating system.

- You can refer to disks by simple abbreviations such as A: or B:, rather

than having to use ProDOS pathnames (you can still use pathnames if you
prefer).

- You can run application software by simply typing the name of the program,
without using RUN, BRUN, or "-" (you can still use "-" if you like). To
change directories (setting the PREFIX under BASIC.SYSTEM), you can type
PREFIX pathname, PRE pathname, CHDIR pathname, CD pathname, or just the
pathname.

- COMMAND.COM adds the he MS-DOS pathing concept to ProDOS. A path is the

name of a directory that COMMAND.COM will search when you type the command
to run a file. Normally, only the PREFIX directory is searched, but with
COMMAND.COM, you can specify up to four additional directories. This
allows you to run programs stored on other directories, such as a general
utility directory.

COMMAND.COM lets you set up four environments: CP/M, MS-DOS, ProDOS, and
UNIX. You can configure for the environment that you are most comfortable
with.

COMMAND.COM includes 100 commands. Some are internal, such as the DELETE and
COPY commands. Others are external files that are read in from disk before
execution. COMMAND.COM, like MS-DOS allows a virtually unlimited number of
commands stored as files on disk.

You can use wild cards with commands: for example, typing Copy * B: would
copy all files on the current directory to disk B:. You don't need to know
the name of the current disk or the disk to be copied to; COMMAND.COM
handles that automatically.

COMMAND.COM supports both I/O re-direction and piping. I/O re-direction

sends the output of a command to a device other than the one normally used.
The TYPE command normally displays the contents of a text file on the screen.
With I/O re-direction, the text could be sent to a printer or to another file.

Piping is used to make the output of one command the input to another. For
example, the CATALOG command could 'pipe' the catalog of disk files to the
SORT command, which would alphabetize the catalog before displaying
it.

COMMAND.COM even lets you create commands that don't exist in your operating
system -- for example, a command that MOVEs a file from one location to
another: not just copying it, but also deleting the original. The MOVE
command would be created by combining the COPY, UNLOCK, and DELETE commands.
Variables can also be used to assign short (one or two character) names that
when typed will run an application program. An example might be typing AW to
prefix to the AppleWorks directory and run the file APLWORKS.SYSTEM.

COMMAND.COM includes the following commands:

- Convert any type of file, including AppleWorks Word Processor files,

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 444 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

into plain text files.

- Search all directories on a 3.5" disk or hard disk for any file.
- Display all files on a specific disk.
- Search and replace in a variety of formats.
- A picture display command that automatically recognizes all Apple II
picture types, including GS pictures.

COMMAND.COM. also supports MS-DOS-style BATCH files. BATCH files are the
perfect solution for handling many complex tasks easily and automatically.
Running a system application does not effect the BATCH file. One example
cited in the manual: a BATCH file can be used to run an application and
track elapsed time. At the end of the month, the user can print the text
file created by this BATCH file to generate billing information for work
done for clients.

COMMAND.COM also includes a full-featured line-oriented text editor.

COMMAND.COM will be available in September 1987 from PinPoint Publishing.

Copyright Apple Computer, Inc. 1987
Keywords: specsht

### END OF FILE A2TIL272.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 445 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL273.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Communications Interface: Directly controlling the 6850 ACIA

Header: Communications Interface: Directly controlling the 6850 ACIA

This applies to the Apple II, II+, and IIe.

The Communications Interface Card uses an ACIA (Asynchronous Communications

Interface Adapter) to automatically perform the serial transfers with an
external device. The ACIA contains 4 registers that control data flow between
the Apple and the external device. There are two pairs of registers and each
pair has a single address in the Apple. In the following discussion, all
addresses will be calculated for slot 2. The addresses can be converted to
another slot with the following formula.

New Address = Old Address + (New Slot - 2) * 16

So, $C0AE in slot 2 becomes $C09E for slot 1.

The status/control register is at $C0AE. Reading from $C0AE yields the status
of the ACIA, and writing to $C0AE modifies the Operation of the ACIA (baud
rate, data bits, stop bits, parity). The tables below are a summary of what
the registers control. Refer to the Motorola Semiconductors Data Sheet for
the
MC6850 for complete details.

READ FROM STATUS REGISTER ($C0AE)

0 Receive Data Register Full

1 Transmit Data Register Empty
2 -Data Carrier Detect
3 -Clear to Send
4 Framing Error
5 Receiver Overrun
6 Parity Error
7 Interrupt Request

WRITE TO CONTROL REGISTER ($C0AE)

0-1 Baud Rate

0 - Unstable at about 1200 baud
1 - 300 baud
2 - 110 baud
3 - Reset the ACIA

2-4 Word Control Bits

0 - 7 bits + Even Parity + 2 Stop Bits
1 - 7 bits + Odd Parity + 2 Stop Bits
2 - 7 bits + Even Parity + 1 Stop Bit
3 - 7 bits + Odd Parity + 1 Stop Bit
4 - 8 bits + 2 Stop Bits
5 - 8 bits + 1 Stop Bit
6 - 8 bits + Even Parity + 1 Stop Bits
7 - 8 bits + Odd Parity + 1 Stop Bits

5-6 Transmitter Control Bits

0 - -RTS = low, Transmitting Interrupt Disabled
1 - -RTS = low, Transmitting Interrupt Enabled
2 - -RTS = high, Transmitting Interrupt Disabled
3 - -RTS = low, Transmits a Break level on the Transmit Data Output.
Transmitting Interrupt Disabled

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 446 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

7 Receive Interrupt Enable Bit

0 - No interrupts from receiver section of ACIA
1 - Interrupt on:
Receive Data Register Full,
Overrun, or
A low to high transition on Data Carrier Detect

The data register is located at $C0AF. A read from $C0AF yields the data that
has been recieved from the external device. A write to $C0AF buffers the data
and initiates its transmission. Writing or reading to the data register
automatically resets the ACIA status.

An Apple II will lose data whenever it is forced to ignore the Communications

Interface to either process the incoming data or write it to an I/O device
like
a disk drive or printer.

This problem is solved by buffering the incoming data. You can do this by:

1) Requesting fixed size blocks of data from the remote machine - Reading in
all of one block and processing it before requesting the next one.

2) Writing a program to control the data flow from the remote device with XON
(control S) and XOFF (control Q). The strategy is to recieve data until
the program's memory buffer is almost full and transmit an XOFF to halt
the data flow. Process the data and transmit an XON to resume the
transfer. Not all external devices understand XON/XOFF handshaking.
Be sure to check your device.

When attempting to use a remote terminal from Applesoft, the output appear on
one line of the terminal's screen. To avoid this problem, use the
Communications Card Print routine on page 28 of the Communications Interface
Card manual. If you are using DOS 3.2 or later you must modify this routine
with a POKE 845,110 before saving it to disk.

Modifying the default parameter settings on the Communications card is

described on page 27 of the Communications Interface Manual. But please note
that the PR#s and IN#s commands do not initialize the interface, they only
reset the I/O vectors. It's the first character through the interface that
loads the default parameters. So be sure to PRINT or INPUT at least one
character before doing the POKEs.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL273.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 447 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL274.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Daisy Wheel Printer: Specifications (Discontinued)

Header: Daisy Wheel Printer: Specifications (Discontinued)

Article Created: 20 February 1986

I. Technical Specifications

A. Print Speed: 40 characters per second (average)

B. Interface: Asynchronous Serial (RS-232C) OCITT-V-24

C. Forms: Single sheet or continuous forms

-- Maximum width: 15 inches (38.1 cm)

D. Fonts: 130-character "daisy" print wheels in various alphanumeric type

styles, including: Courier 10 pitch, Prestige Elite 12 pitch,
Gothic 15 pitch, and Executive/Boldface in English, French,
German, and many other languages.

E. Character Spacing in characters per inch (CPI):

1. 10
2. 12
3. 15
4. Proportional spacing

-- Maximum 198 characters per line

F. Command set:

-- ASCII

-- space, backspace, carriage return, line feed, horizontal tab,

form feed, end-of-text, acknowlegde, XON/XOFF

G. Special Mode Commands:

-- Graphics mode, forward and backward print mode, program mode

for hammer intensity and ribbon movement

H. Weight and Dimensions:

pounds kilograms
1. Weight: 37.0 16.8

inches centimeters
2. Width: 23.22 59.0
3. Height: 6.87 17.5
4. Depth: 14.84 37.7

II. System Configuration

A. Lisa system

B. Apple III system

C. Apple IIe or Apple II Plus system

-- with Apple II Super Serial Interface Card installed

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 448 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

III. Features

A. Snap-in ribbon cartridge

B. Switch-selectable features:

-- horizontal and vertical formatting

-- forms length selection
-- automatic form feed
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL274.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 449 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL275.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: DAP (Drive Acceptance Program) Documentation

Header: DAP (Drive Acceptance Program) Documentation

This article last reviewed: 15 December, 1987

NOTE: The DAP (Drive Acceptance Program) is an obsolete diagnostic. It

has been replaced with the Apple 5.25 Inch Drive Diagnostic. Refer to the
Disk Drives Technical Procedures for complete information on the current
Apple 5.25 Inch Drive Diagnostic.

The following article describes how the DAP works and what it is designed
to do. For a description of how to run the DAP test or what to replace if
a failure occurs, search on "HTS and GTS and the disk drive product name".

TEST SEQUENCE AND DESCRIPTION

1. WRITE PROTECT TEST (the digit 1 appears above the selected drive) -

When the right arrow key is detected, several things happen on the screen.
The diskette icon is erased, the drive door icon flashes to a closed
position, and the IN.USE lamp icon lights as the first test begins. The
digit "1" appears above the drive to indicate the test step.

The write protect test reads and saves a copy of sector 5 on track 16 of
the test diskette. This helps prevent accidental data loss if the wrong
diskette is accidentally inserted. The write-protect test does not bother
with the write-protect switch since this may differ in various drives and
controllers. Rather, it attempts to write a sector and then reads the
sector back. If the read detects the data pattern written, the drive is
failed in step one. In the case of failure (i.e. the write is successful)
the original sector is re-written to the diskette. If writing does occur,
the big "X" fail sign is overlayed on the drive image. This same
indication is used for failure of any of the remaining tests.

2. WRITE AND READ TEST -

A. SPEED (The digit 2 appears): The first write test makes 16 D-SPEED
passes over track 30. The test is self-adjusting, allowing a variance of
+- 26 WOZ counts for Apple II+, IIe and IIc systems, and +- 10 WOZ counts
for the Apple III in emulation mode. (If the test fails at the beginning of
the test, the drive circuitry may be unable to read/write.)

B. WRITE AND VERIFY TRACKS 31,32,33 (The digit 3 appears): The write test
writes patterns to all sectors of tracks 31,32,33 and then attempts to read
the track. After each read it compares the read data pattern to the pattern
written to verify a good write and read.

3. DYSAN DDD DISKETTE TESTS -

A. SPIN ECCENTRICITY (spindle wobble, collet problems; displays digit 4):

Tests tracks 21 and 24. An even amount of error has been encoded on each of
these DDD tracks. A properly centered head should read each sector with
equal ease or difficulty. Irregularity here generally indicates collet
problems or possibly spindle wobble. The program allows for some errors.
If the test shows more failures than the limit allows, the user will be
prompted to re-insert the DDD. On Disk II and Disk III drives it is best
if the DDD is "double clamped". Failure here can also indicate excess noise

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 450 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

from nearby equipment or a worn DDD diskette.

B. RADIAL ALIGNMENT (head properly centers on track; displays digit 5):

This test reads tracks 0, 5, 16, 19, 30 and 32. Each of these tracks has
been encoded with errors which are progressively further from the center
track (by one mil) with each sector. A properly aligned drive will have a
diminishing ability to read sectors and a perfectly positioned head will be
unable to read the sectors furthest away from the center of the track.
(Since the Digital Diagnostic Diskette checks alignment at six locations, it
is possible that the error will not be detected with the Disk Alignment Aid.)

C. HYSTERISIS (physical slope in arm motion; displays digit 6): This test
calibrates the drive, reads tracks 5 and 30, goes to track 34 and then reads
tracks 30 and 5. A properly adjusted and functioning drive will not develop
more than +- 2 mils of error on reads when the head moves from the opposite
direction. Errors discovered here are due to physical slop or wear in the
hardware. Failure of this test can often indicate that the guide rails need
cleaning.

D. AZIMUTH (ability of head to detect data with 21-42 minutes of error in

the angle of data placement; displays digit 7): This test calibrates and
moves to track 34. This track has been encoded with data written with
angular error which alternates direction with each sector and increases from
21 to 42 minutes of error. The inability to read this data indicates a faulty
head. In most cases all sectors are read easily by the heads in Apple drives.
Copyright 1988 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: hts

### END OF FILE A2TIL275.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 451 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL276.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: DART 1.5.3: Version Change History (12/94)

Header: DART 1.5.3: Version Change History (12/94)

Article Created: 18 March 1993

Article Reviewed/Updated: 23 December 1994

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article details the version change history for last three versions of
DART, as well to where to locate a copy of DART.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

What Is DART?
-------------
DART (Disk Archive/Retrieval Tool) is an application that enables you to
duplicate Macintosh, Lisa, Apple II, or MS-DOS disks, save disk images, and
create disks from image files. DART 1.5 can read disk image files in DART,
DiskMaker, or Disk Copy format. DART 1.5 image files are compressed,
approaching a reduction in size comparable to that obtained by using a
commercial compression utility. DART 1.5 is System 7.0 "savvy", and
implements a custom Apple event mechanism to automate the conversion of older
DART or Disk Copy files to 1.5 format. The conversion process can be run by
"remote control" (even across a network!) using the accompanying HyperCard
stack. (For more information, please refer to the DART User Manual.)

What's New in version 1.5.3

---------------------------
* Compatibility with Centris 660AV, Quadra 660AV, and Quadra 840AV.

* Compatibility with Apple Event Manager 1.0.1 (a component of

AppleScript).

Note: A -64 error occurs launching DART 1.5.3 on a Power Macintosh, but
if you click OK, DART continues and everything works as expected.

What's New in version 1.5.2

---------------------------
* Compatibility with new Macintosh Quadra 800 and Centris machines.

* Under certain circumstances, it was possible for DART to open a

corrupted Disk Copy file and create an identically corrupted disk (or
image file) from it. Checksums on source disk images are now verified
correctly, and DART will always display a warning message if the
expected and actual checksum values don't match. (Note that while a
damaged Disk Copy file can no longer be converted to DART format, it's
still possible to make a disk from it and potentially salvage the data
on that disk.)

* Fixed a minor (but annoying) display glitch in "Multiple Copies" mode

where a portion of the Status message would sometimes be "hidden"
underneath the progress bar.

What's New in version 1.5.1

---------------------------
* Compatibility with A/UX 3.0.

* Under System 7, you can now drop a floppy disk onto DART to create an
image file.

* The default filename in Save dialogs is now filled in with the volume

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 452 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

name of the source disk (if a source has been selected.)

* Volumes can now be mounted in the Finder when DART is running in the
background.

* Fixed a bug which could occasionally cause a bus error on certain

machines. The error would occur either immediately on launch, or after
the about box was dismissed.

* Fixed a bug which could cause DART to refuse to format a blank 1.4M
floppy disk (or a 1.4M floppy formatted as 800K) when "Format Disk" was
checked.

Where To Locate DART

--------------------

These articles can help you locate the software update mentioned here:

* "Where To Find Apple Software Updates"

Lists online services for "free" Apple software updates.

* "Obtaining Apple Product Support in the USA"

Lists 800 numbers and online services for software updates, Apple
support information, and a subset of the Apple Tech. Info. Library.

Article Change History:

23 Dec 1994 - Added Power Macintosh note.
27 Sep 1994 - Reviewed.
06 Oct 1993 - Updated with info on DART 1.5.3, and revised title.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1993-94, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: ksts

### END OF FILE A2TIL276.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 453 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL277.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: DART: Utility for Duplicating Floppy Disks (10/93)

Header: DART: Utility for Duplicating Floppy Disks (10/93)

Article Created: 13 August 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 6 October 1993

TOPIC-------------------------------------------------------------

Is there a Macintosh utility program for duplicating Macintosh, Lisa,

Apple II or MS-DOS 3.5-inch floppy disks?

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

DART (Disk Archive/Retrieval Tool) is an application that enables you to

duplicate Macintosh, Lisa, Apple II, or MS-DOS disks, save disk images, and
create disks from image files. DART 1.5 can read disk image files in DART,
DiskMaker, or Disk Copy format. DART 1.5 image files are compressed,
approaching a reduction in size comparable to that obtained by using a
commercial compression utility. DART 1.5 is System 7.0 "savvy", and implements
a custom Apple event mechanism to automate the conversion of older DART or
Disk
Copy files to 1.5 format. The conversion process can be run by "remote
control" (even across a network!) using an accompanying HyperCard stack.
(For more information, please refer to the DART User Manual.)

Features of DART 1.5

--------------------
* Data compression: more disk images can be archived in the same amount of
space.
* Data checksumming for reliable disk duplication.
* Can read Disk Copy image files.
* Requires only 224K of RAM to run.
* Stack utility enables you to batch-convert DART 1.4 or Disk Copy files.
* Apple events support ("required" AE suite and custom 'cnvt' event.)
* System 7 "drag-and-drop" disk image creation.
* 32-bit clean.
* A/UX compatible.
* Color icons and balloon help.

Where to Obtain DART

--------------------
The current version of DART may be downloaded from two locations on AppleLink:

1) The Apple SW Updates board. Use the following AppleLink path:

Software Sampler
Apple SW Updates
Macintosh
Utilities

2) On the AppleLink version of the Tech Info Library, posted as an enclosure

to the article: "DART 1.5.3: Version Change History (10/93)"

Article Change History:

6 October 1993 - Added new description and features information.
Copyright 199193, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL277.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 454 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL278.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Disk II: Specifications (Discontinued)

Header: Disk II: Specifications (Discontinued)

This article last reviewed: 16 August 1985

I. Technical Specifications

A. Format

1. Sectoring: Soft (hard-sectored disks may be used)

2. Recording Surfaces: 1

3. Tracks per surface: 35

4. Sectors per track: 16

5. Bytes per sector: 256

B. Capacity

1. Formatted data capacity: 140K

a. 16 sector
b. Under: Pascal, DOS 3.3, and ProDOS

2. Available data capacity:

a. 16 sector
b. 137K under Pascal
c. 124K under DOS 3.3 and ProDOS

C. Characteristics

1. Head movement time:

a. 25 milliseconds track to track
b. 600 milliseconds across all tracks

2. Head load time: 50 milliseconds

3. Average rotational delay: 100 milliseconds

D. Packaging

1. Controller: Printed circuit board that plugs into one of the

expansion slots.
a. Drives per controller: 2

2. Drive dimensions:
inches centimeters
a. Height: 3.25 8.3
b. Width: 5.75 14.6
d. Depth: 8.0 20.3
pounds kilograms
e. Weight: 3.0 1.36

3. Power source for drives: Apple system power supply

II. System Configuration

A. Apple II, II Plus, IIe, or Enhanced IIe

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 455 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

1. Recommended minimum memory: 32K

2. Controller card
Copyright 1988 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL278.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 456 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL279.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: DOS 3.3 6502 editor assembler: PR slot command

Header: DOS 3.3 6502 editor assembler: PR slot command

There is a .PR# slot# command in the DOS 3.3 6502 editor assembler of the DOS
tool kit. If you use this command you get not a file listing, but a dump of
the buffer that starts with data entered by the user or LOADed from a text
file. After this part of the buffer has been printed, the dump continues with
the garbage in the buffer beyond the last intelligible character to the end of
the allowable buffer. This produces numerous @ signs or other characters
depending on the contents of buffer memory after power-up and is a normal part
of a Print or List of the assembly program to a printer using .PR# slot# from
the editor.

Try it yourself.

1. Boot the DOS 3.3 6502 editor/assembler

2. LOAD a large source code file
3. List it to see what it looks like
4. Type NEW to clear the buffer
5. LOAD a smaller source code file
6. Type .PR#1 to send the DOS command to activate the printer
7. Type L to list the buffer to the printer

Notice that the last part of the first file follows the last line of the
second file. Also notice that such a listing does not match the screen output
when using the List or Print commands but instead follows the input format.

To obtain a listing with the same format as displayed on the screen using
Print or List commands you must append ',@' to the ASM command. This
assembles the file without generating an OBJect code file (see page 56 of the
editor/assembler manual). To speed this process when using an Imagewriter and
Super Serial Card on an Apple II+ or Apple IIe, do the following.

1. Set the Imagewriter print style to ultracondensed (17cpi)

2. Set the baud rate of printer and card to 9600
3. Send the output of the assembly to the printer using PR#

Notice that there is no period (.) preceeding the PR# command in this case.
This is because you are not using the DOS command version but rather the
editor/assembler PR# command. See the editor/assembler manual for the format
of the PR# command on page 60 and a discussion on pages 60 and 61.

With an Imagewriter at 9600 baud, the above three steps reduce the listing
time by 41% when comparing the default type style to the ultracondensed
style.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL279.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 457 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL280.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: DOS 3.3: INTBASIC and FPBASIC on the master diskette

Header: DOS 3.3: INTBASIC and FPBASIC on the master diskette

The INTBASIC and FPBASIC files on the master diskette load automatically into
your Language Card if you have one. Since these files are written to operate
specifically in the memory space of the Language Card, they don't work
anywhere else.

To use Applesoft with your Apple II (which has Integer BASIC built in), you
need either the Applesoft Firmware Card or the Language Card installed into
your system.

Apple II+s have Applesoft built in; therefore, your system needs the
Integer BASIC firmware card or a language card to use Integer BASIC.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL280.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 458 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL281.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Dot Matrix Printer (DMP): Printer codes

Header: Dot Matrix Printer (DMP): Printer codes

The following are the printer codes used by the Apple Dot Matrix Printer
(DMP).

Ascii Hex Decimal Resulting Printer Action

----- --- ------- ------------------------

Esc n 1B 6E 27 110 9 Characters Per Inch (cpi)

Esc N 1B 4E 27 78 10 cpi

Esc E 1B 45 27 69 12 cpi

Esc q 1B 71 27 113 15 cpi

Esc Q 1B 51 27 81 17 cpi

Esc P 1B 50 27 80 Proportional-1

Esc p 1B 70 27 112 Proportional-2

Esc A 1B 41 27 65 6 Lines per inch (1/6-inch Line Feed)

Esc B 1B 42 27 66 8 Lines per inch (1/8-inch Line Feed)

DC1 11 17 Select printer (online)

DC3 13 19 Deselect printer (offline)

Esc > 1B 3E 27 62 UniDirectional print

Esc < 1B 3C 27 60 Bidirectional print

Esc ! 1B 21 27 33 Bold print

Esc " 1B 22 27 34 Deselect Bold print

SO 0E 14 Select Elongated characters (Headline

mode)

SI 0F 15 Deselect Elongated characters

Esc X 1B 58 27 88 Start Underline

Esc Y 1B 59 27 89 Stop underline

For additional information or information on graphics, please see the Apple

Dot Matrix Printer manual, Apple service part number 030-0607, and see the
media exchange listing for price.

Apple II Keystrokes:

DC1: Control-Q
DC3: Control-S
SO: Control-N
SI: Control-O
Esc: Escape key
Apple Technical Communications

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 459 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL281.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 460 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL282.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Double-Density Versus High-Density Disks

Header: Double-Density Versus High-Density Disks

Article Created: 25 May 89

Article Last Reviewed: 22 August 1991
Article Last Updated: 22 August 1991

TOPIC ------------------------------------------------------------

This article gives the specifications for the 800K floppy disks and the
1.4MB floppy disks. It also describes why you should not drill a hole in a
double-density disk and format it as a high-density disk.

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

The table below compares the formatted capacity of the different media:

800K Disk 1.4MB Disk

1600 sectors 2880 sectors
--------- ----------
Bytes/Sector 512 512
Sectors/Track 8-12 18
Tracks/Side 80 80
Bytes/Side 409,600 737,280
Bytes/Disk 819,200 1,474,560

The Apple SuperDrive (formerly Apple FDHD) can read and write to any of the
major 3.5-inch disk formats, including Macintosh (GCR 400K, 800K, and MFM
1.44MB), Apple II (800K), and MS-DOS and OS/2 (MFM 720 and 1.44MB). GCR
stands for "Group Code Recording" and MFM stands for "Modified Frequency
Modulation".

When the SuperDrive writes 400K/800K disks in GCR mode, the motor
speed is variable, and the disk surface is divided into five zones to allow
a constant recording density as the head moves from the outer edge to the
center. When using high-density media, data is written in MFM mode, and
the drive speed is constant for each track.

The table that follows compares the speed of the different disk structures:

Tracks 800K Disk 1.4MB Disk

------ --------- ----------
00-15 394/12 300/18
16-31 429/11 300/18
32-47 472/10 300/18
48-63 525/9 300/18
64-79 590/8 300/18

Revolutions Per Minute/Sectors Per Track

GCR and MFM only affect how the data is written to the disk. GCR and MFM
do not care how the tracks and sectors are laid out on the disk. They also
have no effect on the directory structure. GCR and MFM deal with how the
bits are recorded on the surface of the media.

The MFM Method

--------------
MFM was originally recommended by Shugart Associates for double-density,
floppy drives and was used in a small number of systems. IBM was the first
major vendor to use MFM, and now Apple also provides MFM support for the

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 461 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Apple SuperDrive. MFM uses a transition pulse to write data to drive

media. There are two locations for the transition pulse: the data boundary
or the cell boundary. A transition occurs at a cell boundary only when two
zero bits occur next to each other. This encoding method guarantees that no
more than two-bit cells can occur without a transition and is, thus,
self-clocking.

The GCR Method

--------------
GCR is a method that Apple has used to record information since the Apple
II Disk Controller. Each group of four bits is translated into a 5-bit
code (the Run-Length code). A translation table is used to find this 5-bit
code. This 5-bit code seems to increase data bits by 20%. However, the
5-bit codes never contain more than two consecutive zeros, and GCR writes
the data in NRZI format. When a 1 occurs in the data stream, a transition
occurs on the data boundary. Thus, GCR is guaranteed to be self-clocking.
You also save the cell boundary transitions required for MFM. Thus, GCR is
more efficient than MFM and is widely used in high-density disks and tape
recordings. The disadvantage of GCR is the relatively high complexity of
the encoding and decoding logic.

High-Density vs Double-Density Disks

------------------------------------
High-density disks are physically different and tested to a different
specification than double-density disks. In this case, high-density disks
are of higher quality than double-density disks. The high-density disks
have a special, thin, recording surface that allows the higher data rates
used in MFM. The 800K or 400K disk may not be sensitive enough to properly
pick up and align the magnetic particles when the SuperDrive writes in MFM.
This could cause corruption of the stored data and may result in errors.
Thus, it is unreliable, unsupported, and not suggested.
Copyright 1990, 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL282.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 462 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL283.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Dow Jones News & Quotes Reporter: Specifications

Header: Dow Jones News & Quotes Reporter: Specifications

Order #: A2D0030

--Technical Specifications

--Format: 16-sector disks.

--Language: Written in Pascal.
--Dow Jones Access: Minimum 15-minute tape delay; exchanges include NYSE,
AMEX, Midwest, Pacific, Composite, and OTC NASDAQ.
--Dow Jones Toll-Free Information: (800) 257-5114; in New Jersey, call
(609) 452-1511.

--Package

1. Dow Jones News & Quotes Reporter master disk;

2. Dow Jones News & Quotes Reporter backup disk;
3. instruction manual;
4. Dow Jones News/Retrieval operating guide and symbol directory.
5. Dow Jones News/Retrieval contract and password information sheet.
6. One free hour of connect time, to be used during nonprime-time hours,
within 30 days of the date of purchase of the Dow Jones News & Quotes
Reporter package.

--System Configuration

1. Apple II or Apple II Plus, with a minimum of 48K of memory, or Apple

IIe
2. disk drive, such as Apple Disk II
3. video display device, such as Monitor II
4. a recommended modem, either a D.C. Hayes MicroModem or a Novation Apple
Cat modem
NOTE: The Apple modems, in conjunction with the Super Serial Card,
will not support the Auto-dial necessary for the Auto-Log-on
feature of the Dow Jones Reporter. One of the recommended
modems must be used for this feature.

5. standard working telephone;

6. printer with appropriate interface card (optional).

NOTE: This product is no longer supported by Apple Computer,Inc.

Apple Technical Communications

Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL283.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 463 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL284.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: DuoDisk Problem/Cure: Copy Protected Disk Damaged During Boot

Header: DuoDisk Problem/Cure: Copy Protected Disk Damaged During Boot

This article last reviewed: 24 February 1988

PROBLEM DESCRIPTION: When inserting a copy protected

application or game into the DuoDisk and starting up the
Apple II, II+, or IIe system, the disk fails to boot. The disk
may be damaged in the process.

CAUSE: If capacitors C29 and C30 are present on the

analog PCB, they can allow unintential writing to the disk. This
problem can be triggered by certain copy protection schemes.

CURE: Clip off the capacitors C29 and C30 at locations B1 and
A1 on the Duodisk Analog PCB.

If the above cure doesn't solve the problem, search on HTS and GTS
and the product name to obtain the general troubleshooting
procedure for the product.
Copyright 1988, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: hts

### END OF FILE A2TIL284.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 464 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL285.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Educational Resources (5/93)

Header: Educational Resources (5/93)

Article Created: 05/06/93

Article Reviewed: 07/08/93
Article Updated:

Educational Resources
------------------------

1550 Executive Drive

Elgin, IL 60123

800-624-2926

708-888-8499 Fax

Company Profile:
Specializing in software and hardware for the Apple II.
Copyright 1993, Apple Computer, Inc
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL285.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 465 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL286.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Electrical Specifications: Apple Peripherals (2 of 2) (9/96)

Header: Electrical Specifications: Apple Peripherals (2 of 2) (9/96)

Article Created: 05 September 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article provides the electrical specifications for Apple peripherals,

including printers, monitors, scanners, drives, modems, and so on. For
information about other Apple hardware, see the Tech Info Library article,
"Electrical Specifications: Apple Computers (1 of 2)".

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The following Apple products are manufactured for use in the USA. In
determining whether a particular product can be used internationally, there
are three classes, depending on whether a product accepts a range in voltage,
frequency or both (for more specific information, see the article, "Using
U.S. Apple Equipment Internationally"):

1) Universal
------------
These products can be used internationally out of the box. Some of Apple's
products are self-configuring devices or "universal" within a certain range.
They can accept a range in both voltage and frequency, and only require a
plug adapter for the specific locale.

Example: The Quadra 800 accepts between 100-125 and 200-240 volts, 47-63 Hz.

2) Frequency Independent
------------------------
These products can be used internationally with a voltage transformer.
Generally they are geared for U.S. 120 volt current, but are flexible as to
the frequency they accept (for example, 47-63 Hz), and are known as
"frequency independent." These products need a stepdown isolation transformer
to adapt the voltage, and will handle the different frequency on their own.

Example: The U.S. Performa 200 accepts 120 volts, 47-63 Hz.

3) Frequency Dependent
----------------------
These products generally cannot be used internationally. These are products
that can work only within a narrow range in frequency; they are "frequency
dependent." Transformers only transform voltage, so if the product requires a
certain frequency, there's no practical way to convert both voltage and
frequency.

These products can ONLY be used internationally in countries with the same
frequency as the country for which the product was manufactured. Further, a
voltage transformer will be required if the destination country has a voltage
different from the home country.

Example: The U.S. Apple Color OneScanner accepts 108-132 volts, 58-62 Hz.

NOTE:
Computers with power outlets for peripherals do not condition the current as
it passes through. So, for example, a monitor requiring 120v-60Hz current
could not be used in a 220v-50Hz environment even if the computer from which
it gets its power is able to accept the local current.

The AC output of a Macintosh II is as follows: the monitor receptacle is

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 466 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

rated for 3 amps steady state, 40 amps peak power. The power supply is fused
for 6 amps to include the Macintosh II and monitor.

The amperage on the back of the computer is what should be used to calculate
load on a circuit. Typical circuits in businesses and houses are 15 Amps
(some are 20, but rarer, and an electric dryer is usually 30, an electric
range may have DUAL 30 Amp circuits wired together). With that capacity, you
could have the following configuration (from the back of the CPU):

CPU 5 Amps
Monitor 3 Amps
LaserWriter 7 Amps
Total: 15 Amps

Most of the time, the CPU will draw only 1-1.5 Amps, the Monitor about .5-1
Amp, and the LaserWriter about 2 Amps. The difference is sometimes referred
to as Nominal (high) versus Actual draw.

These following values are accurate regardless of peripherals used with each
device. For example, a Macintosh II with an EtherTalk NB Card, an 8-bit video
card, and HD40 SC draws a maximum of 230 watts and 6 amps from the power
outlet it is plugged into.

Begin_Table

+========+
|PRINTERS|
+========+

==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
LaserWriter Printers | Watts*| Amps** |BTU/hr**| Volts |Hertz
==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
LaserWriter |760 |6.3 |2599.2 |115 |60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
LaserWriter II |900 |7.5 |3078 |90-126 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
LaserWriter IISC |900 |7.5 |3078 |90-126 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
LaserWriter IINT/NTX |900 |7.5 |3078 |90-126 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
LaserWriter IIg/IIf |900 |7.5 |3078 |90-126 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Personal LaserWriter SC |600 |5 |2052 |110-115 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Personal LaserWriter LS |600 |5 |2052 |110-115 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Personal LaserWriter NT |600 |5 |2052 |110-115 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Personal LaserWriter NTR |600 |5 |2052 |110-115 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Personal LaserWriter 300 |360 |3.00 |1231 |100-115 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Personal LaserWriter 320 |120 |1.0 |410.4 |100-115 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
LaserWriter Pro 600 |560 |4.67 |1915 |90-110 |58-62
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
LaserWriter Pro 630 |560 |4.67 |1915 |90-110 |58-62
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
LaserWriter Pro 810 |560 |4.67 |1915 |90-110 |58-62
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
LaserWriter Select 300 |450 |3.75 |1539 |110-115 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
LaserWriter Select 310 |450 |3.75 |1539 |110-115 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
LaserWriter Select 360 |450 |3.75 |1539 |110-115 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 467 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

LaserWriter 4/600 |450 |3.75 |1539 |110-115 |50-60

------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
LaserWriter 16/600 PS |790 |6.8 |2701 |100-120 |58-62
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Clr LaserWriter 12/600 PS |1100 |9.2 |3762 |100-120 |50-60

==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Other Printers | Watts*| Amps** |BTU/hr**| Volts |Hertz
==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Dot Matrix Printer |180 |1.5 |615.6 |100-115 |60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Daisy Wheel Printer |150 |1.25 |513 |120 |60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Color Plotter |33 |.28 |112.9 |120 |48-63
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Scribe |60 |.5 |205.2 |120 |60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
ImageWriter |180 |1.5 |615.6 |120 |60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
ImageWriter II |180 |1.5 |615.6 |120 |60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
ImageWriter LQ |180 |1.5 |615.6 |120 |60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
StyleWriter |23 |.19 |78.7 |110-120 |48-62
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
StyleWriter II |19.5 |.16 |67 |100-120 |48-62
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
StyleWriter 1200 |19.5 |.16 |67 |100-120 |48-62
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
StyleWriter 1500 |19.5 |.16 |67 |100-120 |48-62
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Portable StyleWriter |23 |0.19 |79 |100-115 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Color StyleWriter 2200 |31.5 |1.0 |107 |120 |60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Color StyleWriter 2400 |45 |.38 |154 |100-120 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Color StyleWriter 2500 |45 |.38 |154 |100-120 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Color StyleWriter Pro |28 |.23 |95.8 |90-132 | 50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Apple Color Printer |30 |.25 |103 |120 |60

+=================+
|OTHER PERIPHERALS|
+=================+

==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Disk Drives | Watts*| Amps** |BTU/hr**| Volts |Hertz
==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
ProFile |120 |1 |410.4 |110 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Hard Disk 20 |30 |.25 |102.6 |85-125/ |47-64
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Apple HD20/40/80/160 SC |30 |.25 |102.6 |85-125/ |47-64
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Apple External160/230/500 |40 |.33 |136.8 |85-125/ |47-64
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
HD40 SC Tape Backup |15 |.125 |51.3 |85-125/ |47-64
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
AppleCD SC |40 |.33 |136.8 |120 |47-64
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 468 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

AppleCD SC Plus |40 |.33 |136.8 |100-125/ |50-60

| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
AppleCD 150 |30 |.25 |102.6 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
AppleCD 300 |33 |.28 |112.9 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
AppleCD 600e |33 |.28 |112.9 |100-125/ |50/60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Apple PowerCD |15 |.125 |51.3 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |

==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Scanners | Watts*| Amps** |BTU/hr**| Volts |Hertz
==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Apple Scanner |65 |.54 |222.3 |120 |58-62
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Apple OneScanner |45 |.38 |153.9 |120 |58-62
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Apple Color OneScanner |45 |.38 |153.9 |120 |58-62

==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Modems | Watts*| Amps** |BTU/hr**| Volts |Hertz
==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
AppleFax Modem |10 |.08 |34.2 |120 |60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Apple DataModem 2400 |7 |.06 |23.9 |110 |60

+========+
|MONITORS|
+========+

==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Apple II Monitors | Watts*| Amps** |BTU/hr**| Volts |Hertz
==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Color Monitor 100 |70 |.58 |239.4 |117 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Color Monitor IIe |48 |.4 |164.2 |108-132 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Color Monitor IIc |48 |.4 |164.2 |108-132 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Monitor II |45 |.38 |153.9 |115 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Monitor IIc |35 |.29 |119.7 |115 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Monitor III |30 |.25 |102.6 |115 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
AppleColor RGB |90 |.75 |307.8 |108-132 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
AppleColor Monitor |75 |.6 |256.5 |108-132 |50-60

==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Macintosh Monitors | Watts*| Amps** |BTU/hr**| Volts |Hertz
==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
12-Inch Monochrome Display |30 |.25 |102.6 |90-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
12-Inch RGB Display |90 |.75 |307.8 |110 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Performa Display |85 |.71 |290.7 |100-125 |57-63
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Performa Plus Display |85 |.71 |290.7 |100-125 |57-63
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 469 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Apple Hi-Res Monochrome |40 |.33 |136.8 |100-125/ |50-60

| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
AppleColor Hi-Res RGB |160 |1.3 |547.2 |85-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
14-Inch Color Display |55 |.46 |188.1 |90-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Portrait Display |75 |.6 |256.5 |90-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
16-Inch Color Display |130 |1.18 |445 |90-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Two-Page Mono. Monitor |95 |.8 |324.9 |90-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
21-Inch Color Display |165 |1.38 |564.3 |120 |47-63
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Apple Basic Color Monitor |70 |.58 |240 |100-125 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
AudioVision 14 Display (US) |55 |.46 |188.1 |100-125 |47-63
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
AudioVision 14 Display (INT) |101 |.46 |350.1 |200-240 | 50
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Apple Color Plus Display |70 |.58 |240 |100-125 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Multiple Scan 14 Dis. (US) |80 |.66 |273.6 |100-125 |57-63
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Multiple Scan 14 Dis. (INT) |80 |.33 |1.14 |200-240 |43-53
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Multiple Scan 15 Display |90 |.75 |307.8 |100-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Multiple Scan 17 Display |150 |1.25 |513 |100-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Multiple Scan 20 Display |180 |1.38 |615.6 |100-125/ |47-63
(Rev A) | | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Multiple Scan 20 Display |165 |1.38 |564.3 |100-125/ |47-63
(Rev B) | | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
AppleVision 1710AV |130 |1.8/ |445 |100-120/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
AppleVision 1710 |130 |1.8/ |445 |100-120/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Multiple Scan 1705 Display |100 |n/a |342 |100-125/ | 47-63
| | | |200-240 |

End_Table

Additional Information
----------------------
"Current leakage" is the amount of current that is passed to earth ground.
The current leakage of all Apple equipment meets the following specifications:

- As specified by the UL standard for Apple equipment distributed in the

United States, the current leakage will be less than 5.0 milliamperes.

- As specified by the IEC 380 & 950 standards for Apple equipment distributed
in France and most of Europe, the current leakage will be less than 3.5

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 470 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

milliamperes.

The PowerBook 500 series AC adapter has two separate outputs, VBatt and
Vmain. The VBatt supply is used for charging the batteries while the VMain
supply provides power for the PowerBook. Power from VBatt is automatically
diverted to power the PowerBook if additional power is needed.

* Amps calculated based on efficiency of power supply, except for Macintosh

PowerBooks (amps calculated at 7.5 volts) and Macintosh Duos (amps calculated
at 24 volts).

** The BTU calculation is Watts X 3.42 = BTU/hour.

The BTU ratings for the Macintosh systems take into account any hard disk or
expansion card(s) that may be installed internally.

Copyright 1996, Apple Computer, Inc.

Keywords: supt,hts,cnfg

### END OF FILE A2TIL286.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 471 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL287.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Electrical Specifications: Apple Computers (1 of 2) (2/97)

Header: Electrical Specifications: Apple Computers (1 of 2) (2/97)

Article Created: 21 September 1984

Article Reviewed/Updated: 24 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article provides the electrical specifications for Apple computers. For
information about other Apple hardware, see the Tech Info Library article,
"Electrical Specifications: Apple Peripherals (2 of 2)".

NOTE: This article has been revised and combines two previous articles
titled, "Electrical Specifications of Most Apple Hardware" and "BTU Ratings
for Most Apple Hardware".

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The following Apple products are manufactured for use in the USA. In
determining whether a particular product can be used internationally, there
are three classes, depending on whether a product accepts a range in voltage,
frequency or both (for more specific information, see the article, "Using
U.S. Apple Equipment Internationally"):

1) Universal
------------
These products can be used internationally out of the box. Some of Apple's
products are self-configuring devices or "universal" within a certain range.
They can accept a range in both voltage and frequency, and only require a
plug adapter for the specific locale.

Example: The Quadra 800 accepts between 100-125 and 200-240 volts, 47-63 Hz.

2) Frequency Independent
------------------------
These products can be used internationally with a voltage transformer.
Generally they are geared for U.S. 120 volt current, but are flexible as to
the frequency they accept (for example, 47-63 Hz), and are known as
"frequency independent." These products need a stepdown isolation transformer
to adapt the voltage, and will handle the different frequency on their own.

Example: The U.S. Performa 200 accepts 120 volts, 47-63 Hz.

3) Frequency Dependent
----------------------
These products generally cannot be used internationally. These are products
that can work only within a narrow range in frequency; they are "frequency
dependent." Transformers only transform voltage, so if the product requires a
certain frequency, there's no practical way to convert both voltage and
frequency.

These products can ONLY be used internationally in countries with the same
frequency as the country for which the product was manufactured. Further, a
voltage transformer will be required if the destination country has a voltage
different from the home country.

Example: The U.S. Apple Color OneScanner accepts 108-132 volts, 58-62 Hz.

NOTE:
Computers with power outlets for peripherals do not condition the current as
it passes through. So, for example, a monitor requiring 120v-60Hz current

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 472 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

could not be used in a 220v-50Hz environment even if the computer from which
it gets its power is able to accept the local current.

The AC output of a Macintosh II is as follows: the monitor receptacle is

rated for 3 amps steady state, 40 amps peak power. The power supply is fused
for 6 amps to include the Macintosh II and monitor.

The amperage on the back of the computer is what should be used to calculate
load on a circuit. Typical circuits in businesses and houses are 15 Amps
(some are 20, but rarer, and an electric dryer is usually 30, an electric
range may have DUAL 30 Amp circuits wired together). With that capacity, you
could have the following configuration (from the back of the CPU):

CPU 5 Amps
Monitor 3 Amps
LaserWriter 7 Amps
Total: 15 Amps

Most of the time, the CPU will draw only 1-1.5 Amps, the Monitor about .5-1
Amp, and the LaserWriter about 2 Amps. The difference is sometimes referred
to as Nominal (high) versus Actual draw.

These following values are accurate regardless of peripherals used with each
device. For example, a Macintosh II with an EtherTalk NB Card, an 8-bit video
card, and HD40 SC draws a maximum of 230 watts and 6 amps from the power
outlet it is plugged into.

Begin_Table

+=========+
|COMPUTERS|
+=========+

==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Apple II and Apple III | Watts*| Amps** |BTU/hr**| Volts |Hertz
==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Apple II |60 |.5 |205.2 |107-132 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Apple II Plus |60 |.5 |205.2 |107-132 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Apple III |100 |.83 |342 |107-132 |60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Apple III Plus |100 |.83 |342 |107-132 |60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Apple IIe |60 |.5 |205.2 |95-127 |60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Apple IIc |25 |.2 |85.5 |105-129 |60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Apple IIc Plus |60 |.5 |205.2 |90-130 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Apple IIGS |60 |.5 |205.2 |107-132 |50-60

==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Compact Macintosh & XL | Watts*| Amps** |BTU/hr**| Volts |Hertz
==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Lisa (Macintosh XL) |150 |1.25 |513 |120 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh 128K |60 |.5 |205.2 |105-125 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh 512K, 512Ke |60 |.5 |205.2 |105-125 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh Plus |60 |.5 |205.2 |105-125 |50-60
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh SE |100 |.83 |342 |90-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 473 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Macintosh SE/30 |75 |.63 |256.5 |120-125/ |48-62

| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh Classic |76 |.63 |260 |120 |47-63
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh Classic II |76 |.63 |260 |120 |47-63
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh Color Classic |100 |.83 |342 |90-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |

==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Macintosh II Computers | Watts*| Amps** |BTU/hr**| Volts |Hertz
==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Macintosh II |230 |1.9 |786.6 |90-125/ |48-62
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh IIx |230 |1.9 |786.6 |90-125/ |48-62
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh IIcx |159 |1.3 |543.8 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh IIci |159 |1.3 |543.8 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh IIfx |230 |1.9 |786.6 |100-125/ |48-62
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh IIsi |160 |1.33 |547.2 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh IIvx |230 |1.9 |786.6 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |

==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Macintosh LC Computers | Watts*| Amps** |BTU/hr**| Volts |Hertz
==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Macintosh LC |50 |.42 |171 |90-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh LC II |50 |.42 |171 |90-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh LC III |50 |.42 |171 100-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh LC 475 |30 |.25 |102.6 |100-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh LC 520 |40 |.5 |136.80 |90-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh LC 550 |40 |.5 |136.80 |90-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh LC 575 |40 |.5 |136.80 |90-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh LC 580 |40 |.5 |136.80 |90-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh LC 630 family |45 |1.25 |153.9 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Macintosh TV |60 |.5 |205.2 |90-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 474 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Macintosh Performa | Watts*| Amps** |BTU/hr**| Volts |Hertz
==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Performa 200 |76 |.63 |260 |120 |47-63
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Performa 400,405,430,450 |50 |.42 |171 |90-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Performa 460, 466, 467 |50 |.42 |171 |90-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Performa 475 & 476 |50 |.25 |171 |100-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Performa 550 & 560 |40 |.5 |136.8 |90-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Performa 575,577,578,580 |40 |.5 |136.8 |90-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Performa 600 |230 |1.9 |786.6 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Performa 630 Series |45 |1.25 |153.9 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Performa 6100 Series |210 |1.7 |718.2 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Performa 5200 Series |125 |4.0 |427.5 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Performa 5300 Series |125 |4.0 |427.5 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Performa 6200 Series |55 |1.25 |188.1 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Performa 6300 Series |55 |1.25 |188.1 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Performa 6400 Series |220 |3.00 |752.40 |100-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Performa 6360 Series |150 |5.00 |513.00 |100-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----

==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Macintosh Quadra | Watts*| Amps** |BTU/hr**| Volts |Hertz
==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Quadra 605 |30 |.44 |102.6 |100-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Centris 610 |86 |1.70 |294.12 |100-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Quadra 610 |210 |1.70 |718.20 |100-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Quadra 630 family |45 |1.25 |153.9 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Quadra/Centris 650 |230 |1.9 |787 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 475 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Quadra/Centris 660AV |86 |1.70 |294.12 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Quadra 700 |50 |1.9 |171 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Quadra 800 |200 |9 |684 |100-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Quadra 840AV |200 |9 |684 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Quadra 900 |303 |10 |1036.26 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Quadra 950 |303 |10 |1036.26 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |

==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Power Macintosh | Watts*| Amps** |BTU/hr**| Volts |Hertz
==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Power Macintosh 4400/200 |150 |3.0 |513 |110/220 |47-63
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Power Macintosh 5200/75 |125 |4.0 |427.50 |100-125 |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Power Macintosh 5260/100 |125 |4.0 |427.50 |100-125 |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Power Macintosh 5300/100 |125 |4.0 |427.50 |100-125 |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Power Macintosh 5400 Series |220 |4.0 |752.40 |100-125 |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Power Macintosh 5500 Series |220 |4.0 |752.40 |100-125 |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Power Macintosh 6400 Series |220 |3.00 |752.40 |100-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Power Macintosh 6500 Series |220 |3.0 |752.40 |100-125/ |47-63
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Power Macintosh 6100 Series |210 |1.7 |718.20 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Power Macintosh 7100 Series |230 |1.9 |786.60 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Power Macintosh 8100 Series |200 |9.0 |684 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Power Macintosh 7200 Series |150 |3.0 |513 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Power Macintosh 7300 Series |150 |3.0 |513 |100-130/ |50-60
| | | |200-270 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Power Macintosh 7500 Series |150 |3.0 |513 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Power Macintosh 7600 Series |150 |3.0 |513 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 476 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Power Macintosh 8500 Series |225 |9.0 |769.50 |100-125/ |50-60

| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Power Macintosh 8600 Series |560 |n/a |1915.2 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Power Macintosh 9500 Series |225 |9.0 |769.50 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Power Macintosh 9600 Series |560 |n/a |1915.2 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----

==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Apple Workgroup Servers | Watts*| Amps** |BTU/hr**| Volts |Hertz
==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Workgroup Server 60 |86 |1.70 |294.12 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Workgroup Server 80 |200 |9.00 |684 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Workgroup Server 95 |303 |10.00 |1036.26 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Workgroup Server 6150 |210 |1.7 |718.20 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Workgroup Server 8150 |200 |9.0 |684 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Workgroup Server 9150 |303 |10 |1036.26 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Workgroup Server 7250 |150 |3.0 |513 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Workgroup Server 8550 |225 |9.0 |769.50 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Network Server 500 |325 |7.0 |1111.50 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Network Server 700 |425 |7.0 |1453.50 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |

==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Portable Macintosh | Watts*| Amps** |BTU/hr**| Volts |Hertz
==============================+=======+========+========+=========+=====
Macintosh Portable |5 |.125 |.3 |70-125/ |48-62
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook 100 |17 |2 |58.14 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook 140 |17 |2 |58.14 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook 145,145B |17 |2 |58.14 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook 150 |17 |2 |58.14 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook 160 |17 |2 |58.14 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 477 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook 165c |24 |3.2 |82.1 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook 170 |17 |2 |58.14 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook 180 |17 |2 |58.14 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook 180c |24 |3.2 |82.1 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook 190 Series |45 |1.88 |153.9 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook Duo 210 |25 |1.04 |85.5 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook Duo 230 |25 |1.04 |85.5 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook Duo 250 |25 |1.04 |85.5 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook Duo 270c |25 |1.04 |85.5 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook Duo 280 |25 |1.04 |85.5 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook Duo 280c |36 |1.5 |123.1 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook Duo 2300 |36 |1.5 |123.1 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook 520/520c |40 VBatt 1.0 | 137 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook 540/540c |40 VBatt 1.0 | 137 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
PowerBook 5300 |45 |1.88 |153.9 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Duo Dock |87 |4.2 |297 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Duo Dock II |87 |4.2 |297 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |
------------------------------+-------+--------+--------+---------+-----
Duo Dock Plus |87 |4.2 |297 |100-125/ |50-60
| | | |200-240 |

End_Table

Additional Information
----------------------
"Current leakage" is the amount of current that is passed to earth ground.
The current leakage of all Apple equipment meets the following specifications:

- As specified by the UL standard for Apple equipment distributed in the

United States, the current leakage will be less than 5.0 milliamperes.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 478 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

- As specified by the IEC 380 & 950 standards for Apple equipment distributed
in France and most of Europe, the current leakage will be less than 3.5
milliamperes.

The PowerBook 500 series AC adapter has two separate outputs, VBatt and
Vmain. The VBatt supply is used for charging the batteries while the VMain
supply provides power for the PowerBook. Power from VBatt is automatically
diverted to power the PowerBook if additional power is needed.

* Amps calculated based on efficiency of power supply, except for Macintosh

PowerBooks (amps calculated at 7.5 volts) and Macintosh Duos (amps calculated
at 24 volts).

** The BTU calculation is Watts X 3.42 = BTU/hour.

The BTU ratings for the Macintosh systems take into account any hard disk or
expansion card(s) that may be installed internally.

Article Change History:

24 Feb 1997 - Added new computers.
05 Dec 1996 - Added 6360.
05 Sep 1996 - Updated, re-formated, split into separate articles.

Copyright 1984-97, Apple Computer, Inc.

Keywords: review,ktable,ktop20

### END OF FILE A2TIL287.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 479 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL288.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Electronic Learning Systems, Inc.

Header: Electronic Learning Systems, Inc.

Article Created: 09/29/90

Article Reviewed: 07/08/93
Article Updated: 07/08/93

Electronic Learning Systems, Inc.

-----------------------------------

4131 N.W. 28th ln.

Suite 3A
Gainesville, FL 32606

800-443-7971 (Orders)

904-375-0558 (Tech. Support)

(For Fax call this number first) 904-375-0558

904-375-5679 Fax

AppleLink: ELS

Company Profile:
Software, specializing in individual and network educational products for the
Apple II family, Macintosh Development, security software

Article Change History: 07/08/93 New Product Information Added, Name

Information Added
Copyright 1990-93, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL288.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 480 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL289.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: European Apple II: No Color With U.S. Monitor (2/97)

Header: European Apple II: No Color With U.S. Monitor (2/97)

Article Created: 01 July 1988

Article Reviewed/Updated: 17 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article discusses the problem of the European Apple II not producing
color when used with a U.S. Apple Color Monitor.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

A European Apple II produces either PAL or SECAM video output, both of which
are compatible with European television standards. However, these signals are
incompatible with the NTSC signal required for U.S. monitors. The signal is
close enough in video content to be resolved in black and white, but the
frequency of the color burst is incorrect for an NTSC monitor.

Using a European Apple II system in North America, you can get an acceptable
color display from your European monitor, although there may be some problems
due to the different line frequency in North America.

Article Change History:

17 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1988-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL289.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 481 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL290.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Extended 80-Column RGB Card: Color Monitor 100 Pinouts (11/96)
Header: Extended 80-Column RGB Card: Color Monitor 100 Pinouts (11/96)

Article Created: 19 April 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 14 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Does the Extended 80-column card work in the Apple II or Apple II Plus? If
not, is there any way to upgrade an Apple II or Apple II Plus to 80-Column?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The 80-Column Card and Extended 80-Column Card work only in the Apple IIe;
they cannot be used in any other computer.

Our databases do not show an 80-column interface for the Apple II or Apple II
Plus. There were once several on the market, but the demand for this type of
card has almost disappeared. You might still be able to find these 80-column
cards through some of the computer remarketing companies, or where use
computer equipment is sold.

An alternative is to purchase an Apple IIe or Apple IIGS computer. You need

to to contact computer remarketing companies, or look where use computer
equipment is sold.

Article Change History:

14 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1986-95, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL290.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 482 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL291.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: FORTRAN Language Reference Manual: Errata

Header: FORTRAN Language Reference Manual: Errata

This applies to the Apple II, Apple II+, Apple IIe, and Apple IIc.

Page inside cover

The number A2D0032 is for the diskette, not the manual. The correct number
for the manual is A2L0032 030-0118-00.

Page ix
The page number for the Appendices should be 135 instead of 134.

Page xi
The top paragraph should be deleted because the information is presented on
page x.

Page 156
In a multi-drive system, it isn't necessary to duplicate the system files on
FORT2:. Here is a configuration for Apple FORTRAN diskettes that leaves you
with over 130 blocks of storage on FORT1:, which remains the boot diskette,
and allows you to write-protect FORT2: to prevent you from accidentally
crashing the diskette that has the uncopyable FORTRAN SYSTEM.COMPILER .

FORT1: FORT2:
------ ------
SYSTEM.APPLE SYSTEM.COMPILER
SYSTEM.PASCAL SYSTEM.FILER
SYSTEM.MISCINFO SYSTEM.EDITOR
SYSTEM.LIBRARY SYSTEM.LINKER
SYSTEM.STARTUP SYSTEM.CHARSET
FORTMOD.CODE
FORTLIB.CODE
SYSTEM.LIBRARY

The copy of SYSTEM.LIBRARY on FORT2: is a copy of the original that came on

FORT1:. There is a little room left on FORT2: which makes a good place to
archive it. The SYSTEM.STARTUP program is generated from Pascal and contains
the following commands:

PROGRAM LIBLINK;
USES APPLESTUFF;
BEGIN
END.

After compiling the program in Pascal, use the Filer to Transfer the codefile
to FORT1: with the file name SYSTEM.STARTUP
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL291.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 483 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL292.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: FORTRAN: FORT2 Copy protection

Header: FORTRAN: FORT2 Copy protection

This applies to the Apple II, Apple II+, Apple IIe, and Apple IIc.

The Apple FORTRAN compiler is protected and cannot be copied. A Bad Block
scan of the FORT2: diskette will show blocks 30, 31, and 32 as bad. Any
attempt to "fix" these blocks will ruin the FORT2: diskette. See your local
service center if your FORT2: diskette doesn't work.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL292.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 484 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL293.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: FORTRAN: Using FORTRAN 1.0 with Pascal 1.2

Header: FORTRAN: Using FORTRAN 1.0 with Pascal 1.2

Many Apple II FORTRAN programers have purchased or upgraded their operating

system. They have discovered that the new system, the current version of
Pascal 1.2, rejects the FORTRAN compiler because it has the wrong version
number.

Change the version ID in the FORTRAN Compiler the easy way. Use this program,
FORTRANFIX, to modify an Apple II FORTRAN Compiler so that it can be run under
Apple II Pascal 1.2 without getting a version error.

Load this entire file into the Pascal Editor. These paragraphs will
substitute for the 1K header the editor expects to see at the beginning of a
text file. Make NO changes. Quit the editor by choosing "U(pdate the work
file and leave". Select "R(un" from the main command line. FORTRAN users, be
sure to do this using your Pascal system and not your FORTRAN system.

When the program prompts you, place your FORT2: diskette in drive 1. Upon
completion, the FORTRAN compiler will be accepted by the Pascal 1.2 system.

program FORTRAN_FIX;
type Byte = 0..255;
Seg_Info = packed record
Mach_Type: 0..9;
Filler: 0..1;
Major_Revision: 0..7;
end;

var Num : integer;

ch : char;
Buffer: packed array [0..511] of byte;
F : file;
Trix : record case boolean of
true : (Temp: packed array [0..0] of Byte);
false: (SI : Seg_Info);
end;

procedure RESET_FILE (File_Name: string);

begin
{$I-}
reset (F, File_Name);
{$I+}
if (IORESULT <> 0) then begin
Num:= IORESULT;
writeln (chr (7));
writeln ('I/O ERROR #', Num, ' in opening ', File_Name);
exit (program)
end
end; {Reset_File}

procedure READ_BLOCK (Block_Num: integer);

var Block_Xfer: integer;
begin
{$I-}
Block_Xfer:= BLOCKREAD (F, Buffer, 1, Block_Num);
{$I+}
if (IORESULT <> 0) then begin
Num:= IORESULT;
writeln (chr (7));
writeln ('I/O ERROR #', Num, ' in reading from file.');

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 485 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

exit (program)
end
end; {Read_Block}

procedure WRITE_BLOCK (Block_Num: integer);

var Block_Xfer: integer;
begin
{$I-}
Block_Xfer:= BLOCKWRITE (F, Buffer, 1, Block_Num);
{$I+}
if (IORESULT <> 0) then begin
Num:= IORESULT;
writeln (chr (7));
writeln ('I/O ERROR #', Num, ' in writing to file.');
exit (program)
end
end; {Write_Block}

begin {Main Program}

writeln (chr(12)); {Erase screen}
writeln ('FORTRANFIX');
writeln;
writeln ('Copyright 1984 Apple Computer, Inc.');
writeln;
writeln;
write ('This program will modify an Apple II');
writeln (' FORTRAN compiler so that it can');
write ('be run under Apple II Pascal 1.2');
writeln (' without getting a version error.');
write ('This program expects the FORTRAN compiler');
writeln (' to be named SYSTEM.COMPILER.');
repeat
gotoxy (0,10);
write (chr(11)); {Erase to end of screen}
writeln ('Put the disk with SYSTEM.COMPILER in drive 1.');
write ('Press RETURN when ready, ESC to exit program. ');
read (ch);
if (ch = chr(27)) then begin
write (chr(12)); {Erase screen}
exit (program)
end;
readln;
RESET_FILE ('#4:SYSTEM.COMPILER');
READ_BLOCK (0);

Trix.Temp [0]:= Buffer [259];

Trix.SI.Major_Revision:= 5;
Buffer [259]:= Trix.Temp [0];

WRITE_BLOCK (0);
close (F, lock);
writeln;
writeln;
writeln;
write ('MODIFICATION COMPLETE - Press RETURN to continue.');
readln
until false
end. {FORTRAN_Fix}
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL293.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 486 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL294.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: FORTRAN: Using WCHAR from FORTRAN

Header: FORTRAN: Using WCHAR from FORTRAN

This applies to the Apple II, Apple II+, Apple IIe, and Apple IIc.
The Turtlegraphics WCHAR procedure, which writes a single character on the
high-res screen, will often give a "Value Range Error" (S#20, P#17, I#11) when
called from FORTRAN. WCHAR does not check the high byte of the character word
passed before calling the DRAWHBLOCK routine, so if the high byte contains a
value, WCHAR will choke by trying to access an index beyond the end of
SYSTEM.CHARSET.

This error will occur when passing a single character from a character array,
but not from a single character "string". For example,

CHARACTER CH(10)
READ (*,100) CH(1)
CALL WCHAR (CH(1))

will result in a "Value Range Error". However,

CHARACTER*1 CH
READ (*,100) CH
CALL WCHAR (CH)

will work correctly. To prevent the error in the first example, replace the
call statement with

CALL WCHAR (CHAR (ICHAR ( CH(1))))

which will convert the character to a integer, and then back to a character
before calling WCHAR.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL294.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 487 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL295.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: GS BASIC: Features and Editing Commands

Header: GS BASIC: Features and Editing Commands

This article last reviewed: 15 October 1987

ToolBox Primitives
------------------
GS BASIC includes primitives (built-in, low-level commands) that let the
user interact with the ToolBox routines. Whereas most other ToolBox routines
are implemented in external libraries that need to be explicitly called up,
these commands -- Eventdef, Menudef, and Taskpoll -- are included in GS BASIC
itself because they bind the ToolBox and BASIC line numbers.

Eventdef. The structure of Macintosh-like programs, as implemented by the

Apple II GS and its ToolBox routines, requires that programs be event-driven.
This means that the heart of a program is a main loop that constantly
monitors what events -- mouse clicks, keyboard presses, window update events,
network activity, and so on -- have taken place. Eventdef associates BASIC
line numbers with these events: whenever one of these events occurs, GS BASIC
starts running the instructions specified in a table set up by the programmer
and maintained by Eventdef.

Menudef. One of the places a mouse click can occur is in the menu bar. When
this happens, a menu is displayed, letting the user select a menu item. The
user specifies that a certain function is to be performed. Like Eventdef,
Menudef associates BASIC line numbers with menu items, so that when a menu
item is selected, GS BASIC can easily determine what statements to run, and
run them.

Taskpoll. Programs shouldn't start fielding events and responding to them

until all the ToolBox libraries are loaded and the tables that Menudef and
Eventdef maintain are initialized. The Taskpoll command lets the programmer
turn off the interrupting feature of GS BASIC and turn them on when ready
for them.

Procedures and Functions

------------------------
The most convenient structure of of any program is a procedure, function, or
subroutine. In most BASICs, including Applesoft, subroutines are implemented
in a very straightforward fashion. GS BASIC provides a more powerful way to
specify and call procedures.

Applesoft lets programmers call subroutines with the GOSUB xxx command, where
xxx is the line number to which control branches. Statements are then
executed until a RETURN command is executed, at which time the program
returns to the line that called the subroutines, and continues from there.

GS BASIC allows programmers to define specific procedures that are called

with the PROC command. The PROC command performs the same functions as
Applesoft's GOSUB, and lets the programmer pass local parameters as well.

Editing Commands
----------------
GS BASIC has a more powerful line editor than Applesoft's. Access it by
typing EDIT linnum[-linnum]

CONTROL-D delete character to the left of cursor; moves line to left

CONTROL-F delete character under the cursor; moves line left
CONTROL-X delete entire line
CONTROL-Y delete line to left and under cursor

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 488 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

CONTROL-E toggle insert mode

RETURN accept entire line (even characters to right of cursor)
DELETE same as CONTROL-D

GS BASIC Commands
-----------------
_ (underscore) ERRLIN LOG( SCALB(
ABS( ERROR LOG1( SCALE(
AND ERRTOOL LOG2( SECONDS@
ANU( ERRTXT$( LOGB%( SET
APPEND EVENTDEF MENUDEF SGN(
AS EXCEPTION MID$( SHOWDIGITS
ASC( EXEC MOD SIN(
ASSIGN EXEVENT@( NEGATE( SPACE$(
ATN( EXFN NEW SPC(
AUTO EXP( NEXT SQR(
AUXID@ EXP1( NORMAL SRC
BASIC@( EXP2( NOT STEP
BDF FILE( NOTRACE STOP
BREAK FILTYP( OFF STR$(
BTN( FILTYP= ON SUB$(
CALL FIX( OPEN SWAP
CALL% FN OR TAB(
CAT FOR OPUTPUT TAN(
CATALOG FRE OUTREC TASKPOLL
CHAIN FREMEM( PDL( TASKREC%(
CHR$( GET PEEK( TASKREC@(
CLEAR GOSUB PERFORM TEN(
CLOSE GOTO PFX$( TEXT
COMPI( GRAF PI TEXTPORT
CONT HEX$( POKE THEN
CONV( HLIST PREFIX TIME$
CONV@( HOME PREFIX$ TIME(
CONV#( HPOS PRINT TIMER
CONV$( IF PROC TO
CONV%( IMAGE PROGNAM$ TRACE
CONV&( INDENT PUT TXT
COPY INIT QUIT TYPE
COS( INPUT R.STACK%( TYP(
CREATE INSTR( R.STACK@( UBOUND(
DATA INT( R.STACK&( UCASE$(
DATE$ INVERSE RANDOMIZE UIR(
DATE( INVOKE READ UNLOCK
DEF JOYX( REC( UNTIL
DEL JOYY( RELATION( UPDATE
DELETE KBD REM USING
DIM LEFT$( REMDR VAL(
DIR LEN( RENAME VAR(
DIV LET REP$( VAR$(
DO LIBFIND RESTORE VARPTR(
EDIT LIBRARY RESUME VARPTR$(
ELSE LIST RETURN VOLUMES
END LISTTAB RIGHT$( VPOS
EOF LOAD RND( WHILE
EOFMARK( LOCAL ROUND( WRITE
ERASE LOCATE RUN XOR
ERR LOCK SAVE

Toolbox Definition Files (TDFs)

-------------------------------
QuickDraw ADB Desk Dialog
Event Font Intmath LineEdit
List Loader Locater Memory
Menu MiscTool NoteSyn Print
QDAux Scheduler Scrap StdFile
Text Window Control

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 489 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Built-in Constants and Reserved Variables

-----------------------------------------
PI to 20 digits
LISTTAB number of spaces between line number and first statement
INDENT controls indenting of FOR...NEXT and WHILE...UNTIL loops
OUTREC maximum line length
VPOS vertical cursor position
HPOS horizontal cursor position
FRE amount of memory available
SHOWDIGITS specifies the number of digits to display for REAL numbers
KBD holds value of last key pressed
ERR contains error number
ERRLIN contains line where error occurred

Variable Specifications
-----------------------
Real: (+ or - 1.7E38) (less than 1.5E-45 equals 0)
Double real: (+ or - 1.7E308) (less than 5.0E-324 equals 0)
Integer: (%) (2 bytes) (-32768 to 32767)
Double integer: (@) (4 bytes) (-2147483648 to 2147483647)
Long integer: (&) (8 bytes) (-9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807)
String: ($) 255 characters
Arrays: (!)

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL295.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 490 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL296.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: GS/OS 5.0: "No Finder" Printing Fix

Header: GS/OS 5.0: "No Finder" Printing Fix

This article last reviewed: 12 December 1989

TOPIC ---------------------------------------------

This article discusses a workaround for the problem of a GS/OS 5.0 startup
disk
without Finder, and its inability to retain default printer information.

DISCUSSION ----------------------------------------

The GS/OS 5.0 AppleShare startup disk without Finder is not capable of
retaining default printer information. The startup printer selection made in
the Apple II menu of AppleShare Administration is not used. Thus, if the disk
is created as described in the manuals, the user must run the Chooser each
time
they restart the system to set a default printer.

Here is a workaround for this problem:

1) Copy the entire Chooser folder from the Apple IIGS workstation disk (or
from the server) onto the startup disk. The file IWEM is not required
if you are not printing to a LaserWriter.

2) Copy the file called ATINIT from the server onto the startup disk.

3) Set the Control Panel to either Scan or Startup Slot 5, then restart
using this new disk.

4) Go into BASIC on the server, launch Chooser.II, and set the default
printer settings. That printer will remain "selected" until someone
runs Chooser.II to change it.

5) If you want the Chooser to be accessed from Aristotle, create an

application that accesses the floppy disk copy of the Chooser, rather
than the server-based version. The floppy disks must have a common
volume name as well as pathname if this method is to be used.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL296.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 491 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL297.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: GS/OS 5.0.2: "File Not Found" Error

Header: GS/OS 5.0.2: "File Not Found" Error

This article last reviewed: 7 March 1990

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I work at an Apple IIGS (1MB RAM) that is on a network with Macintosh SE/30
with 4MB RAM and HD80 SC File Server.

After updating the GS/OS system files on the server via the Apple IIGS
Installer, updating Aristotle likewise, and reinstalling the Apple II Setup
disk, I received the following error message:

Sorry, system error $0046 occurred while loading the start FST file.

I checked all access privileges, and they are not a problem. Can you help?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The $0046 error is a "file not found" error. There are two ways this can
happen when starting up from the network.

1) The Icons folder and the System folder need privileges set to the Bulletin
Board item found in the GS/OS Icon Info menu item. If these folders are
set
otherwise, GS/OS cannot "find" the files inside these two folders.

2) There is a file missing or misplaced on the server volume that the

Apple IIGS requires for startup. Usually reinstalling GS/OS onto the
server
resolves the problem.
Copyright 1990 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL297.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 492 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL298.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: GS/OS 5.0.2: Solves "No Finder" Printing Problem

Header: GS/OS 5.0.2: Solves "No Finder" Printing Problem

This article last revieId: 4 January 1990

TOPIC ---------------------------------------------

I have a problem on my Apple IIGS lab (LocalTalk and GS/OS 5.0 with the
current
version of Aristotle) when I start from Aristotle on disk, bypassing the
Finder. I log on and run Chooser.II from Aristotle to choose an ImageWriter.
When I try to print from AppleWorks or various MECC applications nothing
happens.

For the lab to function in an orderly manner, students need to start from disk
and be able to choose a printer. Do you have an workaround? Also, just what
file is it that holds the name of the chosen printer?

DISCUSSION ----------------------------------------

Upgrading to GS/OS 5.0.2 resolves this issue. This version of GS/OS, when
used
with the "No Finder" startup disk, defaults to the user's assigned printer set
in the AppleShare Admin program.

When using GS/OS 5.0.2, you needn't use Chooser.II to make network printer
choices. If you use a Finder startup disk, the Control Panel provides the
printer choice via the various printer Control Panel devices. With a "No
Finder" startup disk, the printer choice is made in AppleShare Admin's Apple
II
menu. When starting up across the network, the printer choice is also made in
the AppleShare Admin program.

However, if students must dynamically change the printer they use, Chooser.II
is required in the "No Finder" and network startup procedures. When running
Chooser.II from the server, the printer selection is stored in the ATINIT file
located in "USERS/(user's logon name)/ATINIT" on the server. This overrides
the
choice in the AppleShare Admin setup during this signon. After the user signs
off and back on in these two startup procedures, the default printer will be
the one set in the AppleShare Admin setup.

Should the desired results be "one student assigned to one printer," then
GS/OS
5.0.2 smoothly handles this situation by using the AppleShare Admin setup
during a "No Finder" startup.
Copyright 1990 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL298.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 493 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL299.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: GS/OS 6.0.1: How It Differs from 6.0 (6/93)

Header: GS/OS 6.0.1: How It Differs from 6.0 (6/93)

Article Created: 28 June 1993

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This is a summary of the visible changes in GS/OS 6.0.1 compared to 6.0.

There have been many bugs fixed and many features added that aren't
immediately visible. This document helps identify those features or
changes.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

FINDER (SEE ALSO FINDER HELP)

-----------------------------
You can now click in Name, Size, Kind, or Last Modified at the top of a
list-view window to change the view.

To rename an icon, you must now click on its name rather than the icon.

The File Copy Alternatives dialog has been removed. Holding down the Option
key now always forces a copy rather than a move.

Dragging certain system-related files to the System folder icon on the boot
volume now does "magic routing" much like the Macintosh Finder. Note that
this only works when using the folder icon; dragging into a window works as
before. The kinds of files that are properly placed in their own folders
within the System folder are: Control Panels, Desk Accessories, Drivers,
FSTs, Tools, Fonts, Sounds, INITs, and Finder Extensions. Other files are
just placed in the System folder.

The Finder now creates the FinderExtras folder for you.

If you open the Icon Info window on an Apple SCSI device, the SCSI ID number
appears on the Where card.

The Finder's Clipboard window handles text, pictures, and sounds. If you
copy a sound to the Clipboard (using the Sound control panel, for example),
you can click on the Speaker icon on the Clipboard to hear the sound. Teach
has the same Clipboard window.

EXTENSIONS
----------
EasyMount isn't just for servers anymore. It now handles aliases to any
disk, folder, or application. In other words, you don't need to drag the
icon onto the desktop anymore -- just keep an alias of it on the desktop.
Select the icon of the item you want to alias and choose "Make Alias " from
the Extras menu. EasyMount will ask you where to save the alias. Later,
double-clicking the alias opens the real item, disks and folders are opened,
and applications (ProDOS 8 or GS/OS) are launched. The Installer
automatically installs EasyMount in your System.Setup folder.

CONTROL PANELS
--------------
DC Printer Control Panel
------------------------
This was a change in System 6.0 but not documented: The DC Printer will let
you choose LaserWriter, which is potentially useful for "printing" to

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 494 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

PostScript files.

Monitor Control Panel

---------------------
The new checkbox "Smoother Mouse Cursor" sets a new Battery RAM location.
It kills the cursor flicker that's especially noticeable with a Video
Overlay card or an accelerator.

SetStart Control Panel

----------------------
The new checkbox "Show icons during startup" provides a way to set the
Battery RAM location that disables the display of the startup icons. The
Battery RAM location has been there since System 6.0, but there was no
Apple-provided way to change it.

The new checkbox "Enable programmer CDAs" provides a way to set the Battery
RAM location that allows Visit Monitor and Memory Peeker to show up in the
CDA menu. Both ROM 1 and ROM 3 Apple IIGS computers now check this
location. This checkbox doesn't show up if the ROM 3 Control Panel disable
jumper is present.

STARTUP
-------
During startup, if you have a lot of icons, they no longer keep recycling
the bottom row of the screen. They now "wrap up" to the row above.

If you use a Vulcan internal hard drive, you no longer need to copy the
Vulcan driver onto the Install disk when installing new system software.
You can still use the Vulcan driver for enhanced performance, but you can
successfully install without it.

If your ROM 3 Apple IIGS has 8 Megabytes of RAM, the computer fails to
create a RAM disk (RAM5) of any size. In this case, System 6.0.1 creates
RAM5 and then restarts the system. When you turn on the computer, you will
hear an extra beep at the "Apple IIGS ... ROM Version 3" screen.

DRIVERS
-------
The RAM5 RAM disk has a new driver. The Installer automatically installs it
if you have the RAM disk enabled when you do an Easy Update. The driver
greatly enhances the disk's performance. It also allows you to have a RAM5
disk in GS/OS (but not in ProDOS 8) even when slot 5 is switched to "Your
card." On a ROM 1, you must have the Minimum and Maximum sizes set to the
same value; otherwise you'll see a message during startup and it won't use
the new driver.

The Apple II Memory Expansion Card has a new optional format. If you have a
full megabyte of memory on the card, it lets you format it as either 1,024K
or 800K. The 800K option blocks out the remaining 224K, but allows faster
block copies to and from other 800K disks.

FILE SYSTEM TRANSLATORS (FSTs)

------------------------------
The MS-DOS FST is new. To use it, you need a drive that can read MFM disks,
such as the Apple SuperDrive with an Apple II SuperDrive Controller Card.

This version is read-only -- it doesn't let you make changes to MS-DOS

disks.

PRODOS 8
--------
The Thunderclock year table in ProDOS 8 has been updated for the years
1993-1998. There's also a Clock.Patch file on the SystemTools2 disk that
you may use to update ProDOS 8 (renamed to ProDOS) to include future year
groups.
Copyright 1993, Apple Computer, Inc.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 495 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL299.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 496 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL300.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: GS/OS: How To See OS Info at Startup

Header: GS/OS: How To See OS Info at Startup

This article last reviewed: 3 November 1989

TOPIC ---------------------------------------------

I have a lab of 16 Apple IIGS systems, running AppleShare 2.0.1 and the GS/OS
5.0 software with the Apple II setup from the GS/OS 5.0 disks. They are
exhibiting some strange behavior when starting up over the network. When about
half of the systems are started up, they get a list-type screen that says:

Welcome to the World of the Apple IIGS

and then a list of the network program segments that are loading. They get
this instead of the Welcome to the Apple IIGS GRAPHIC SCREEN and the
"thermometer". DISCUSSION ----------------------------------------

The purpose of this screen is to provide operating system information to the

operator. A list of installed GS/OS drivers is displayed as they are loaded.

This alternate screen is normal and is generated by pressing the space bar as
GS/OS begins to load--whether starting up from a local disk or over the
network. The screen will not appear unless someone presses the space bar
sometime during the initial stages of booting the Apple IIGS.

If an Apple IIGS displays the alternate screen even when the space bar hasn't
been pressed, there may be a hardware malfunction, and the unit should be
serviced.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL300.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 497 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL301.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: GS/OS: How To Use It With A ProFile

Header: GS/OS: How To Use It With A ProFile

This article last reviewed: 22 December 1988

This article shows you how to use GS/OS with a ProFile hard disk drive.
Before beginning, make sure that:

- The ProFile Interface Card has the 341-0299 ROM. (See Tech Info
Library article "GS/OS: Needs Latest ROM Revision To Work With
ProFile" for further information.)

- The ProFile Interface Card has been modified for use with the Apple
IIGS. (See Tech Info Library article "Apple II ProFile Interface
Card Modification for the Apple IIGS" for further information.)

NOTE: The Partition and Zero option of the Advance Disk Utility does
not work with the ProFile; it works with SCSI drives only.

Procedure for Using GS/OS With a ProFile

----------------------------------------

Follow these steps:

1. Select a slot for the ProFile Interface Card (this

procedure uses slot 7).

2. Install the ProFile Interface Card and turn on the Apple IIGS.

3. Press Apple-Control-Esc to enter the Control Panel. In the Control

Panel, under the SLOTS item:

a. Set SLOT 7 to "Your Card".

b. Set STARTUP SLOT to "5".
c. Press Return, Esc, Return to exit from the Control Panel.

4. Turn the computer off.

5. Insert the Apple IIGS System Disk in the first 3.5-inch drive and the
System Tools disk in the second 3.5-inch drive (if available).

6. Turn the computer on.

7. After the system starts up, the SYSTEM.DISK, SYSTEM.TOOLS, and ProFile
appear on the desktop.

NOTE: If the ProFile was not formatted for ProDOS, GS/OS asks if the
volume should be initialized.

To initialize:

a. Select "Initialize".
b. Name the volume.

This should take only a few seconds.

8. Open the System Tools disk and run the Installer program.

NOTE for single-drive systems: Eject the System Disk and insert the
System Tools disk. The Installer program prompts you with

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 498 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Eject/Insert dialog boxes.

a. A list of items to install appears.

b. Select "Install System Files".
c. Use the "Volume" button to bring the ProFile disk name to the top
right of the screen.
d. Select "Install".

The Installer program copies the System files from SYSTEM.DISK and
SYSTEM.TOOLS disks to the ProFile. Old System files are replaced,
but Desk Accessories, Fonts, and other files in "SYSTEM FOLDER" are not
deleted.

9. To add other items, such as the SCSI card or 5.25-inch drive:

a. Select the item.

b. Click Install.

10. Install a printer driver:

a. Select the item.

b. Click Install.

11. Set the Control Panel to start up from slot 7.

12. Restart the system using the ProFile.

The ProFile is now set up for use with GS/OS.

NOTE: If you copy applications to the ProFile, copy only the program
and data files. Do NOT copy the System Folder from the application
disks.

Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL301.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 499 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL302.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: GS/OS: Needs Latest ROM Revision To Work With ProFile

Header: GS/OS: Needs Latest ROM Revision To Work With ProFile

This article last reviewed: 11 November 1988

When using GS/OS under Apple IIGS System Disk 4.0 with a 5MB ProFile, be
sure you are using the latest ProFile ROM revision.

A 5MB ProFile needs the 341-0299 ROM revision to work correctly with
GS/OS.

If you have problems formatting, or receive a message stating that your drive
appears to be damaged, you need the new ROM.

(NOTE: This ROM is a service part, and is located on the Apple II price
pages.)
Copyright 1988 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL302.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 500 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL303.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: GS/OS: SCSI and ProFile Card Compatibility

Header: GS/OS: SCSI and ProFile Card Compatibility

This article last reviewed: 24 April 1989

If you are using GS/OS version 4.0, you must have the latest versions of
the ProFile and SCSI Interface Cards as well. Recent testing results show
that GS/OS version 4.0 is compatible with revision C of the SCSI and
ProFile cards.

You can determine if you have the required version of these cards by the
ROM part number that is installed in the card.

SCSI Interface Card

-------------------
ROM part number 341-0437 rev. A is the latest ROM for the SCSI Interface
Card. When this ROM is installed, it brings the revision of the card up to
rev. C. This configuration is compatible with version 4.0 of GS/OS.

ProFile Interface Card

----------------------
ROM part number 341-0299 rev. B is the latest ROM for the ProFile Interface
Card. When this ROM is installed, it brings the revision of the card up to
rev. C. This configuration is compatible with version 4.0 of GS/OS.

As of the date of this article, all service ROM inventory is the latest
version, and all ProFile and SCSI Interface Cards shipped by service are
the rev. C configuration, which is compatible with all Apple II computers.

Apple IIGS
----------
The Apple IIGS requires ROM version 01 to run GS/OS 4.0. To determine if you
have the correct version boot the Apple IIGS, at the bottom of the screen
should be displayed a copyright line and "ROM Version 01". Contact your dealer
for the free upgrade.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL303.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 501 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL304.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Hard Disk 20SC: How to Connect to an Apple IIe/IIGS

Header: Hard Disk 20SC: How to Connect to an Apple IIe/IIGS

Article Created: 25 June 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

What do I need to connect an Apple HD20 SC to an Apple IIe or Apple IIGS?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Apple sells a High-Speed SCSI Card for the Apple II to use a SCSI hard
drive. The part number for the card is A0220LL/A. You also need SCSI
cables.
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL304.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 502 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL305.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: HD-20SC: What You'll Need to Format It With an Apple II

Header: HD-20SC: What You'll Need to Format It With an Apple II

This article last reviewed: 19 January 1988

To format an HD-20SC drive using an Apple II, it's usually best to use System
Disk 3.0. System Utilities 2.1.1 can be used for this purpose only with some
versions of the Apple IIe, as described below.

- Apple IIGS: requires System Disk 3.0. (System Utilities 2.1.1 won't do it.)

- Unenhanced Apple IIe: is not compatible with System Disk 3.0. (Use System
Utilities 2.1.1.)

- Apple IIe (Platinum) with Rev C logic board: use System Disk 3.0 to format
an HD-20SC. (System Utilities 2.1.1 won't do it.)
@L
- Apple IIe (Platinum) with Rev E logic board: it's advisable to use System
Disk 3.0. System Utilities 2.1.1 can be used, but you'll see flashing
garbage on the screen that will make it look like the system has crashed.
Copyright 1990 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL305.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 503 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL306.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Hearlihy and Co. (USA)

Header: Hearlihy and Co. (USA)

Article Created: 08/09/91

Article Reviewed: 07/09/93
Article Updated: 04/03/92

Hearlihy and Co. (USA)

------------------------

714 W. Columbia Street

Springfield, OH 45504

800-622-1000

513-324-2260 Fax

Company Profile:
Hardware and software, including drafting and plotter supplies, and software
for the Macintosh, Apple II, and IBM PC computers, specializing in integrating
technology into industrial education.

Mailing Address
P.O. Box 8690
Springfield, OH 45501
Copyright 1991-93, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL306.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 504 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL307.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: High Speed Serial Interface Card: Settings (11/96)

Header: High Speed Serial Interface Card: Settings (11/96)

Article Created: 21 September 84

Article Reviewed/Updated: 19 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

The Apple II Serial Interface Card (A2B0008), also known as the High Speed
Serial Interface Card, is primarily used with serial letter-quality printers
like the Qume, Diablo, and NEC Spinwriter series.

The following explains the functions of the various DIP switches and PROMs on
the High Speed Serial Interface Card. This card has been discontinued and is
no longer available from Apple.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Baud Rate - Switches 1,2 and 3

------------------------------

DIP Switch Baud Rate

1 2 3

ON ON ON 110
OFF ON ON 134.5
ON OFF ON 300
OFF OFF ON 1200
ON ON OFF 2400
OFF ON OFF 4800
ON OFF OFF 9600
OFF OFF OFF 19200

The settings of DIP switch levers 1, 2, and 3 determine the rate at which
bits may be transmitted to the external device: 300 baud is 300 bits per
second.

Carriage Return Delay - Switch 4

--------------------------------

DIP Switch Carriage Return Delay

4

ON Enabled
OFF Disabled

If switch 4 if Off (Delay Enabled), the Serial Interface waits briefly

(approximately 1/4 second) after transmitting a carriage return before
resuming transmission of further characters, allowing the printer's carriage
to return. If you are transmitting to an external TV screen, this delay is
probably unnecessary, so lever 4 may be turned On (Delay Disabled).

Line Width plus Apple Video - Switches 5 and 6

----------------------------------------------

DIP Switch Line Width (characters Apple Video

5 6 per Line)

ON ON 40 Enabled

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 505 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

OFF ON 72 Disabled
ON OFF 80 Disabled
OFF OFF 132 Disabled

After a carriage return, the settings of switches 5 and 6 determine the

maximum number of characters that can be transmitted before the Serial
Interface forces another carriage return to be sent. Characters are displayed
on the screen only if line width is set to 40 characters per line (levers 5
and 6 On). After initialization, the line width can be changed from 40
characters per line, but the display on the screen will not correspond to the
display on the external device, since transmitted carriage returns are not
accompanied on the screen by line feeds.

Line Feed - Switch 7

--------------------

DIP Switch Line Feed

7

ON Disabled
OFF Enabled

If switch 7 is Off (Line Feed Enabled), the Serial Interface transmits a

line feed after each carriage return. If the external device automatically
supplies its own line feed after each carriage return received, you can set
lever seven to On (Line Feed Disabled) to avoid unwanted double-spacing.

Important Information
=====================

Permanent Defaults
------------------
During each initialiation, five remaining operating parameters are set to
permanent default values:

1. Parity defaults to diabled (no parity bit).

2. Checksum defaults to disabled (no checksum character).

3. Lower-Case defaults to disabled (converts all incoming lower-case

characters
to upper-case).

4. Number of Data Bits defaults to 9 (8 data bits plus one start bit).

5. Number of Stop Bits defaults to 2.

After initialization, these five parameters can only be changed by software

commands.

Hardware Handshaking Flow Control

---------------------------------
This card does not have any hardware handshaking flow control. It can
therefore only be used at slow baud rates. Additional information on flow
control can be found in the Tech Info Library article titled "Flow Control
Protocols (XOn/XOff or DTR)".

P7-04 PROM
----------
Early versions of the High Speed Serial Card would not work with certain
cards in the next higher numbered peripheral slot. The P7-04 PROM solves this
problem.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 506 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

P8A PROM
--------
After a program sends output to a printer, and before the P8A PROM allows the
Apple to continue executing the program, the P8A sends an ASCII ETX (CTRL-C)
to the printer at the end of each line and waits for the printer to send back
an ASCII ACK (CTRL-F). So the P8A can send the ASCII ETX, make sure pins 2 &
3 on the interface connector are connected straight across; also make sure
the printer can send the ACK. If the pins and the printer do not meet these
conditions, then the computer stops running the program after the first line
sent to the printer. Neither the original PROM, called the P8 (Apple part#
341-0018), or the basic card provided handshaking capabilities.

The PROM P8A should be installed in place of the existing PROM P8 when using
Qume compatible printers. Be aware that switch 4 has a different function
with this setup and must be in the OFF position.

The P8A prom uses location $3C as a temporary memory register. Many of the
monitor commands cannot be used with any printer because of this conflict.

PROM 8A Printer Support

------------------------
Printers that support the P8A are:

Anderson Jacobson 832 (send <ESC>!W to set the AJ's mode, page 3-30)
Qume Sprint 5
NEC Spinwriter

DB-25 Connector Pinout

----------------------
DB-25 Connector Signal Name

2...............Receive Data (Rx)

3...............Transmit Data (Tx)
7...............Signal Ground
12...............Current Loop Data In (Return)
13...............Current Loop Data In
23...............Current Loop Data Out

Current Loop
------------
The High Speed Serial Interface has a 20ma current loop. It has an active
send loop and a passive receive loop.

Page 8 of the card's manual tells how to connect to an 33ASR teletype. This
may not work with other 20ma devices. It assumes that the device has a
passive send and receive loop.

If the other device has its own active send loop then connect it as follows:

Connect pin 23 to Printer +

Connect pin 7 to Printer -
Connect pin 12 to Keyboard +
Connect pin 13 to Keyboard -

Article Change History:

19 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1984-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL307.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 507 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL308.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: High-Density Diskettes: Which Drives Support Them (10/94)

Header: High-Density Diskettes: Which Drives Support Them (10/94)

Article Created: 16 November 1987

Article Reviewed/Updated: 18 October 1994

TOPIC ------------------------------------------------------------

In what Apple floppy disk drives can I use high-density diskettes?

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

High-density diskettes (1.44MB only) are suitable for use in Apple SuperDrive
(formerly Apple FDHD).

High-density diskettes are NOT suitable for use with:

- Macintosh 400K drives
- Macintosh 800K drives
- Apple II 3.5-inch drives

High-density diskettes are physically different from double-density diskettes

and are tested to a different specification. The coating on a high-density
diskette is thinner for higher data-packing density. Use in 400K or 800K
drives is unreliable and can cause data loss.

Article Change History:

18 Oct 1994 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1988-94, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL308.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 508 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL309.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: IEEE-488 Interface Card: Product Description (11/96)

Header: IEEE-488 Interface Card: Product Description (11/96)

Article Created: 05 August 1996

Article Reviewed/Updated: 14 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes the Apple IEEE-488 Interface Card. This card has been
discontinued and is no longer available from Apple.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Technical Specifications
========================

As a Listener/Talker/Controller, the Apple IEEE-488 Interface card provides a

fully compatible subset of the IEEE-488 standard. (Its only limitation is
that it cannot pass control to another IEEE-488 controller.)

The interface card can also function as a device on the IEEE-4888 bus. With a
user-defined program, the card can be used to attach non-IEEE-488-compatible
instruments to the bus.

General Purpose Instrument Bus Commands

---------------------------------------
WRITE Write Data Out
WRITECNT Write Data Out with Count
READ Read Data In
READCNT Read Data In with Count
XFER Transfer Data
TRIGR Group Execute Trigger
CLRAL Clear All Devices
CLEAR Clear Selected Devices
REMAL Remote Enable All
LLKAL Local Lockout All Devices
LOCAL Local Mode All Devices
LOCDV Local Mode Selected Devices
SRQD Service Requested
SPOOL Serial Poll
PPOLL Parallel Poll
PPENB Parallel Poll Enable
PPDIS Parallel Poll Disable
PPDIS Parallel Poll Disable
PPUAL Parallel Poll Unconfigure All Devices
DEVICE Controller Device Number
LINEFEED Line Feed Control
EOS End of String Character
SCREEN Screen Control
ABORT Clear All Interfaces
UNTALK Universal Untalk

Device Capabilitie
------------------
SH1, AH1, T3, L1, DC1, DT1, C1, C2, C3, C4, C25.

Operating Life
--------------

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 509 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

To increase operating life, devices on the bus not in use should be turned
off. However, proper operation of the bus requires some of the devices be
turned on. The rule of thumb is the computer plus at least half of the
devices connected to it must be powered on.

Software
--------
The following software is supported by on-board, ROM-based firmware and
signal protocol on the bus is handled by the resident software. 1. BASIC
2. Assembly macro commands
3. Pascal and FORTRAN through assembly language routines

Maximum Devices
---------------
Per card: 14

Maximum cards
-------------
Per computer: 7

Package
=======

Apple IEEE-488 Interface Card terminates in standard IEEE-488 socket.

Back-panel bracket connects to Apple case ground (for low RFI systems)

Instruction manual includes GPIB connections, listener addresses, talker

addresses, secondary addresses, and control codes.

System Configuration
====================

Apple II or Apple II Plus with a minimum of 32K RAM and available expansion
slot.

Apple IIe system with an available expansion slot.

Article Change History:

14 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1985-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL309.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 510 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL310.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: IIGS Memory Expansion Card: Description (11/96)

Header: IIGS Memory Expansion Card: Description (11/96)

Article Created: 31 May 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 19 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes the Apple IIGS Memory Expansion Card.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Overview
--------
The Apple IIGS Memory Expansion Card gives your computer the internal memory
needed to run sophisticated applications, and gives complete access to the
advanced capabilities of the Apple IIGS.

Although the 256K of RAM resident in the computer already lets you keep large
documents and many applications close at hand, the Memory Expansion Card will
hold even larger files and programs, further reducing time-consuming disk
access.

The Apple IIGS Memory Expansion Card adds up to a full megabyte (1MB) of RAM
to the computer, in 256K increments. This means the total RAM in your system
can be as high as 1.25MB with ROM 01, or 2MB with ROM 03. You can configure
and install the card yourself, and increase its capacity at any time.

System Requirements
-------------------
To use the Apple IIGS Memory Expansion Card, you need an Apple IIGS or an
Apple IIe with the Apple IIGS Upgrade installed. (This card is not compatible
with other computers in the Apple II family.)

Technical Specifications
------------------------
Electrical:
Voltage requirements: 4.75 to 5.25 volts DC Power consumption

Operation: 200 milliamps in 256K configuration

600 milliamps in 1MB configuration

Standby: 140 milliamps in 256K configuration

370 milliamps in 1MB configuration.

Environmental requirements
--------------------------

- Ambient temperature: 50 to 104 degrees F (10 to 40 degrees C)

- Relative humidity: 10% to 95% (non condensing)

Article Change History:

19 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1991-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: specsht

### END OF FILE A2TIL310.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 511 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL311.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ImageWriter Carriage Assembly stops or vibrates

Header: ImageWriter Carriage Assembly stops or vibrates

This article last reviewed: 28 March 1988

PROBLEM DESCRIPTION #1: The ImageWriter printer carriage

assembly freezes or grinds when connected to a Macintosh or Apple
II Super Serial card.

BEFORE YOU START: Familiarize yourself with the ImageWriter

Technical Procedures.

CAUSE: One or more of the carriage drive transistors is

defective or one or more of the insulators is cracked or broken.

CURE: Remove the string of carriage transistors from the

ImageWriter referencing the technical procedures if needed. Check
to make sure that none of the insulators is missing. Each
transistor should have a mylar insulator between it and the
printer chassis. An insulator for the screw should also be
present. Install new insulators if any are missing or cracked.
Reassemble the printer and run the printer self-test.

In the event that all insulators are in good condition then

replace the string of carriage transistors. ALWAYS REMEMBER TO
REINSTALL ALL INSULATORS WHEN THE CARRIAGE TRANSISTORS ARE
REPLACED. REMEMBER THAT THE PRINTER WILL EXHIBIT THE SAME
SYMPTOMS IF THE INSULATORS ARE MISSING. (A TRANSISTOR SHORTED TO
GROUND.)

Run an extensive self test on the printer. Sometimes the CPU

board will cause transistor(s) to fail again. In the event that
this occurs, replace the CPU board and the transistor assembly.

PROBLEM DESCRIPTION #2: The Carriage Assembly stops or vibrates

when powered on and the printer IS NOT connected to a computer.

CAUSE: Occasionally, one of the transistor wires is cold-soldered

to the transistor itself.

CURE: Replace the string of carriage transistors.

Copyright 1988, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: hts

### END OF FILE A2TIL311.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 512 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL312.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ImageWriter I: Settings for All Apples (4/94)

Header: ImageWriter I: Settings for All Apples (4/94)

Article Reviewed/Updated: 25 April 1994

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article gives the proper settings for all Apple computers connected to
an ImageWriter I printer.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Apple II Family with Super Serial Card:

Interface:

The Super Serial Card

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ON X X X ON X X
SW1 SW2
OFF X X X X OFF X X X X X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Jumper block points to terminal.

Cables:

Internal cable from Super Serial Card to back of

machine: 590-0021
Serial Cable from back of machine to printer: 590-0037

Printer Settings*:

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SW 1: X X
X X X X X X
OPEN

SW 2: 4 3 2 1
X X
X X
OPEN

Apple III and III+:

Interface:

Use .Printer Driver and set first byte in Device

Configuration Block to 0E and use printer switch
settings A.(9600 Baud) Or leave the settings in the
Device Configuration Block at the Default values and use
printer settings B. (1200 Baud)

Cables:

Modem Eliminator 590-0029

Straight Through Cable 590-0037

Printer Settings*:

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 513 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

A & B SETTING
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SW 1: X X
X X X X X X
OPEN
A SETTING
SW 2: 4 3 2 1
X X
X X
OPEN
B SETTING:
SW 2: 4 3 2 1
X
X X X
OPEN

Macintosh:

Cables:

Accessory Kit Cable 590-0169

Printer Settings*:

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SW 1: X
X X X X X X X
OPEN

SW 2: 4 3 2 1
X X
X X
OPEN

To Build your own cable:

Mac 1 3 5 7 9
| | | | |
Printer 1 7 3 20 2

Lisa:

Cables:

Modem Eliminator 590-0029

Straight Through Cable 590-0037

Printer Settings*:

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SW 1: X X
X X X X X X
OPEN

SW 2: 4 3 2 1
X X
X X
OPEN

Make sure the preferences are set. Power off the Lisa
so they are saved.

* The diagrams of these switches are presented as seen from the front
of the Imagewriter I printer. The switches are toggle switches;
X marks the toggle.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 514 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Article Change History:

25 April 1994 - Corrected Macintosh settings.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1987-1994, Apple Computer, Inc
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL312.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 515 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL313.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ImageWriter II: Connector cables for all Apples

Header: ImageWriter II: Connector cables for all Apples

With certain adjustments in software, the cable with order number A2C0311
can
perform the same function as the cable with order number A9C0313.

But the cables themselves are different, with different pinouts, and the
A2C0311 cable has about eleven intended functions while the A9C0313
cable has
three. To keep the differences clear, keep this in mind:

1. The A2C0311 cable is primarily intended to connect the Apple II family

to
a Personal Modem.

2. The A9C0313 cable is only intended to connect the Apple II family to an

ImageWriter II.

You can avoid confusing these cables by using them only for the primary
intended functions specified below.

I. Apple IIe Modem-8 Cable

A. Number:
1. Order: A2C0311
2. Part: 590-0331-B

B. Configurations:

1. Primary - from Personal Modem to:

a. Apple II
b. Apple II Plus
c. Apple IIe
2. Secondary - from ImageWriter II or Personal Modem to:
a. Apple III
b. Macintosh XL
c. Lisa
3. Switching:
a. From Apple Super Serial Card to ImageWriter II
-- SSC jumper block pointing to "TERMINAL"
b. From Apple Super Serial Card to Personal Modem
-- SSC jumper block pointing to "MODEM"

II. Apple IIe Printer-8 Cable

A. Number:
1. Order: A9C0313
2. Part: 590-0335-A

B. Configurations:

1. From ImageWriter II to:

a. Apple II
b. Apple II Plus
c. Apple IIe

III. Macintosh Peripheral-8 Cable

A. Number:
1. Order: M0185

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 516 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

2. Part: 590-0332-B

B. Configurations:

1. From Macintosh to ImageWriter II or Personal Modem.

IV. Apple IIc Peripheral-8 Cable

A. Number:
1. Order: A2C4312
2. Part: 590-0333-B

B. Configurations:

1. From Apple IIc to ImageWriter II or Personal Modem.

Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL313.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 517 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL314.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ImageWriter II: Description

Header: ImageWriter II: Description

Article Created: 26 May 1992

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes the ImageWriter II printer.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The ImageWriter II printer is an entry-level, dot-matrix printer. It

offers fast drafts, sharp graphics, near-letter-quality output, easy paper
handling, and color printing.

Features
--------
* Three printing speeds
* Fast draft
* Mid-speed correspondence mode
* Near-letter-quality mode
* Color printing in six colors with one change of ribbon
* Printing on cut-sheet or continuous paper, including labels
* Push-button paper loading for single sheets

The ImageWriter II can be expanded by these options:

* Sheet feeder option
* 32K Memory option increases buffer space so that you can use Apple IIe,
IIc, or IIGS computer while the ImageWriter II prints
* LocalTalk option allows sharing the printer on any AppleTalk network.

The mini circular-8 connector and cable, available as a separate item,

connects the ImageWriter II to Apple CPUs. The Apple II, II Plus, and IIe
require a Super Serial Card to connect with an ImageWriter II.
The ImageWriter II color printing feature requires an ImageWriter II Color
Ribbon and color-compatible software.

Order Number
------------
ImageWriter II Printer C0090LL/A
Copyright 1992, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: specsht

### END OF FILE A2TIL314.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 518 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL315.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ImageWriter II: IBM 3287 printer emulation

Header: ImageWriter II: IBM 3287 printer emulation

This article last reviewed: 4 June 1986

ImageWriter II's make good replacements for the IBM 3287 dot matrix printers
commonly used with the IBM 3270 family of terminal devices. The IBM 3278
terminals can be replaced with an AppleLine-Macintosh-MacTerminal combination,
and you can replace the IBM 3287 printers with this simple and cost effective
configuration:

Equipment Vendor Number

------------------------ ------ --------
IRMAprint DCA * PC3287-S
ImageWriter II Printer Apple A9M0310
Apple II Printer 8 cable Apple A9C0313

--> Installation Diagram

IBM 3274/6 --> Coax cable --> IRMAprint --> Printer 8 cable --> ImageWriter II

This solution proves to be a good value because it provides better print

quality and speed than the IBM 3287 or similar printers such as Telex.
* DCA is a registered trademark of Digital Communications Association, Inc.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL315.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 519 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL316.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Imagewriter LQ: Connector Cables for Apple Computers (3/95)

Header: Imagewriter LQ: Connector Cables for Apple Computers (3/95)

Article Created: 16 April 1993

Article Reviewed/Updated: 14 March 1995

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

What cables does the ImageWriter LQ use to connect to all Apple computers?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The ImageWriter LQ connects to Apple computers with the following cables:

Note that the cables are listed with their Finished Goods part number
followed by their Apple Service part number, where available, in parentheses.

Apple Cable P/N Computer

--------------- --------
M0196 (590-0551) Macintosh 512 and 512K (Macintosh 128K is not
compatible with the ImageWriter LQ printer driver)

M0197 (590-0552) All other Macintosh computers, PowerBook MiniDock,

or M2068 - LocalTalk PowerBook Duo Dock, and Apple IIGS
connector

A9C0314 (590-0556) Apple II, Apple II Plus, and Apple IIe

(w/Super Serial Card
jumper set to Terminal)
or A2C0312 (590-0555)
(w/Super Serial Card
jumper set to Modem)

A2C4313 (590-0554) Apple IIc

M0197 (590-0552) Apple IIc Plus

Article Change History:

14 Mar 1995 - Corrected wording of MiniDock.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1993-95, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL316.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 520 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL317.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ImageWriter: Guide to Apple II Errata

Header: ImageWriter: Guide to Apple II Errata

Page 21 of the Imagewriter User's Manual, Guide to the Apple II, has an error.
The end of line 340 of the program listing is

PRINT CHR$ B$;

it should be:

PRINT B$;

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL317.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 521 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL318.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Innovative Systems

Header: Innovative Systems

Article Created: 22 July 1993

Article Reviewed/Updated: 22 July 1993

Innovative Systems
------------------

P.O. Box 444

Severn, MD 21144-0444

301-987-8688

AppleLink: D2695

Company Profile:
Hardware, specializing in an arithmetic co-processor card for the Apple II.
Copyright 1988-93, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL318.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 522 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL319.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Instant Pascal is Compatible with Apple IIe Card

Header: Instant Pascal is Compatible with Apple IIe Card

Article Created: 13 August 1991

Article Last Reviewed: 3 June 1992
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Can you use Instant Pascal on the Apple IIe Card and Macintosh LC?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

We tested Instant Pascal and found it was compatible with the Apple IIe
Card in the Macintosh LC. Even on the Apple II, Instant Pascal displays
poorly on RGB monitors. This condition also appears on the Apple IIe
Card/Macintosh LC combination. We suggest black-and-white display for
best results.
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL319.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 523 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL320.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Instant Pascal: Transferring files to and from Apple II Pascal

Header: Instant Pascal: Transferring files to and from Apple II Pascal

To transfer source code files from Instant Pascal (IP) to Apple II Pascal, you
can make use of AppleWorks to massage the IP file type. Follow these steps:

1. Boot AppleWorks and load the IP source file into the word processor as
"an
ASCII file from disk."
2. Still using AppleWorks, print the file back to disk as an ASCII file.
3. Boot System Utilities 2.1 and copy the "printed" file from the ProDOS
disk
to an Apple II Pascal disk.

To transfer source code from Apple II Pascal to Instant Pascal, follow these
steps:

1. Boot System Utilities 2.1.

2. Put the Apple II Pascal disk in one drive.

3. Put a ProDOS formatted disk in a second drive.

4. Select the Copy Files option from the System Utilities menu and copy the
source code files from the Pascal disk to the ProDOS disk.

-- Note that System Utilities 2.1 supports file copying between two
differently formatted disks.

5. The source file on the ProDOS disk will be recognized by Instant Pascal
as
a "Text" file, but you can open it into the Program window. If you save
the file under Instant Pascal, it becomes an "IP" type file.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL320.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 524 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL321.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Instant Pascal: Using the Apple DMP

Header: Instant Pascal: Using the Apple DMP

If the Apple II is equipped with an Apple Parallel Interface card, printing

text to a DMP will work fine. Graphic output requires an Imagewriter,
Imagewriter II, or Scribe Printer. Text output is also supported on Okidata
and Epson printers.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL321.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 525 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL322.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Integer BASIC Firmware Card: Switch Options (2/97)

Header: Integer BASIC Firmware Card: Switch Options (2/97)

Integer BASIC Firmware Card: Switch Options (2/97)

Article Created: 21 September 1984

Article Reviewed/Updated: 12 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Listed below are the two options the user may select when using the Integer
BASIC firmware card.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The Integer BASIC firmware card was designed to supply Integer BASIC to Apple
II+ owners. Both hardware and software can be used to supply Interger BASIC
to the Apple II+.

Hardware
@L --------
The position of the switch on the rear of the card is used immediately after
a system reset to force the selection of one of two banks of ROMs: the
firmware card or the motherboard. If the switch is up then the system will
default to Integer BASIC, otherwise the system will default to Applesoft.

Software
--------
By accessing address $C080, can select Integer BASIC, or, by accessing
address $C081, Applesoft.

NOTE: For systems with Auto Start ROM, every time DOS gets control
immediately after a reset, DOS forces a load of the version of BASIC DOS last
used, regardless of the position of the switch.

Article Change History:

12 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1984-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL322.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 526 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL323.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Inter%Poll: How to Identify Active Apple II Systems

Header: Inter%Poll: How to Identify Active Apple II Systems

This article last reviewed: 17 March 1989

Certain requirements must be met before Inter*Poll can identify an Apple II

on a network:

Apple IIGS
----------
For an Apple IIGS to appear in the "Device List" window of Inter*Poll, you
must:

1. Select "Built-in AppleTalk" from the Control Panel. At the same time,
set the port that the network is connected to, generally the Printer
port, to "Your Card".

2. Shut down and restart the system.

3. Run Inter*Poll on the Macintosh, or have it running and checking the

network. The Apple IIGS should show up in the Device List window.

Apple IIe
---------

1. Install Apple II WorkStation card in slot 7 of Apple IIe and connect

LocalTalk port to network.

2. Start up system and log into a ProDOS server on the network. Once the
system gets past the Password screen, the device shows up in the Device
List window of Inter-Poll.

The important requirements are:

- Having Built-in AppleTalk selected in the Control Panel of the Apple IIGS

- Having the proper port set to "Your Card" on the Apple IIGS

- Being past the Password screen on an Apple IIe with WorkStation Card.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL323.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 527 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL324.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Joystick: You'll Need an Adapter for Use with the Apple II
Header: Joystick: You'll Need an Adapter for Use with the Apple II

This article last reviewed: 19 January 1988

The packaging for the Apple Joystick (part number A2M2012) states that the
Joystick works on the Apple II Plus. In fact, it will not without an adapter
plug. Apple no longer supplies that adapter, but there is one available from
Southern California Research Group.

Southern California Research Group also supplies adaptors that let you
simultaneously connect two joysticks to an Apple II+, Apple IIe, or Apple
IIGS (but not to an Apple IIc). If a given software package is specifically
written for two Joysticks, it will say so on the box.

For more information, search the library under Southern California Research
Group.
Copyright 1988 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL324.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 528 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL325.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Language Card: Loading Integer BASIC (2/97)

Header: Language Card: Loading Integer BASIC (2/97)

Language Card: Loading Integer BASIC (2/97)

Article Created: 21 September 1984

Article Reviewed/Updated: 12 February 1997

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes how Integer BASIC is loaded into the Language card.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

When you boot an Apple II with the BASICS diskette or the DOS 3.3 System
Master Diskette, Integer BASIC and the Programmer's Aid #1 are loaded into
the Language Card. The code between Integer BASIC and the Programmer's Aid
#1 ($D800 - $DFFF) is loaded with a completely useless part of Applesoft.

This applies to the Apple II and Apple II+.

Article Change History:

12 Feb 1997 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1984-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL325.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 529 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL326.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: LaserWriter: Connecting to Apple II or Apple III

Header: LaserWriter: Connecting to Apple II or Apple III

This article last reviewed: 17 February 1988

A LaserWriter, mode switch set to Special (Diablo 630 emulation), can be

connected to an Apple III or to an Apple II with Super Serial Card (SSC).

from Apple III or SSC to LaserWriter

-----------------------------------------------
DB-25 connector DB-25 connector

signal - pin wiring pin - signal

Tx 2 <-> 3 Rx (Receive Data)

Rx 3 <-> 2 Tx (Transmit Data)
Signal Ground 7 <-> 7 Signal Ground

Apple II DIP Switch Settings (with SSC in DTE)

----------------------------------------------
Switch block 1 Switch block 2
1 off 1 on
2 off 2 off
3 off 3 off
4 on 4 off
5 off 5 off
6 on 6 off
7 on 7 off

The above setting result in:

9600 baud, printer mode
normal CTS
8 data bits, 1 stop bit
no delay after CR
132 characters/line
no line feed after CR
interrupts off
normal CTS

Apple III Driver

----------------
Use the standard .PRINTER driver, which uses the built-in serial (RS-232C)
port. The five parameters to set in the driver configuration block are:
byte 1 (data rate) 0E = 9600 baud
byte 2 (data format) 00 = 8 bit, no parity
byte 3 (CR delay) 00 = no delay
byte 4 (LF delay) 00 = no delay
byte 5 (FF delay) 00 = no delay

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL326.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 530 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL327.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: LaserWriter: Shared by Macintosh, Apple IIe, and IBM PC

Header: LaserWriter: Shared by Macintosh, Apple IIe, and IBM PC

Article Created: 4 April 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I want to connect Macintosh, Apple IIe, and IBM PC, so they can share a
LaserWriter IINT. Can this be done? (No file sharing is required.)

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

The AppleTalk LaserWriters were designed to be shared.

* Any Macintosh has AppleTalk built in.

* An Apple II needs the Apple II Workstation card and software to enable

access to a networked printer.

* An IBM PC needs a LocalTalk PC Card and AppleShare PC to get onto the

LocalTalk network to communicate with the LaserWriter.
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL327.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 531 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL328.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Logo II: How to print procedures

Header: Logo II: How to print procedures

To print procedures using Apple Logo II (128K), type

DRIBBLE 1

which enables the system to print procedures/variables after you type one of
the following commands:

PO (name)
POALL
PON (name)
PONS
POPS
POT (name)
POTS

(For information on the above commands, see the Logo II reference manual.)

To disable this printing, type:

NODRIBBLE
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL328.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 532 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL329.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Macintosh 512K/512Ke: Cable Compatibility (7/95)

Header: Macintosh 512K/512Ke: Cable Compatibility (7/95)

Article Created: 27 September 1994

Article Reviewed/Updated: 06 July 1995

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article provides cable compatibility information for Apple computer

systems and a variety of Apple peripherals.

The left column lists the peripherals, the right column lists the cable
required to connect one of the following computers to it; Macintosh 512K and
the 512Ke.

Part numbers which begin with a letter are the finished goods part number,
the seven digit numbers are the service part numbers.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Peripheral Cable part number

---------- -----------------
AppleFax Modem N/A

Apple Personal Modem M0196/590-0551

Apple Data Modem 2400

Apple Modem 300 M0170/590-0197

Apple Modem 1200

Apple ImageWriter II or II/L M0196/590-0551 (smoke), LocalTalk

Apple ImageWriter LQ optional

Apple ImageWriter Printer 590-0169

Apple ImageWriter 15"

LaserWriter, Plus, IInt, IIntx, IIf, IIg LocalTalk

LaserWriter Pro 600/630/810
Personal LaserWriter NT, NTR

Personal LaserWriter LS N/A

StyleWriter & StyleWriter II
Color StyleWriter/Color StyleWriter Pro

Apple LaserWriter IIsc N/A

Personal LaserWriter SC
AppleCD SC
Apple Hard Disk 20/40/80
Apple Tape Backup 40SC
Apple Scanner
Apple Color OneScanner
Apple Color Printer

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 533 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Article Change History:

06 Jul 1995 - Updated Cable information for ImageWriter I

Support Information Services

Copyright 1994, Apple Computer, Inc
Keywords: ktable,cabinfo,review

### END OF FILE A2TIL329.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 534 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL330.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Macintosh PC Exchange: Troubleshooting Overview (7/96)

Header: Macintosh PC Exchange: Troubleshooting Overview (7/96)

Article Created: 17 November 1993

Article Reviewed/Updated: 01 July 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Macintosh PC Exchange is a control panel that lets you format, read, or write
DOS-format floppy disks in a Macintosh computer.

Formatting a disk prepares the disk to receive data. PC and Macintosh

computers format disks differently. The term "DOS" describes disks formatted
using DOS, Windows, or OS/2. Macintosh PC Exchange doesn't provide data
translation.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

REQUIREMENTS
============

Be sure you have the proper software and hardware to use Macintosh PC
Exchange:

* System software version 7.0 or later

* An Apple SuperDrive (formerly called FDHD), or equivalent third-party

drive that reads DOS high-density disks

* At least 3 MB of random access memory (RAM)

WORKING WITH DOS DISKS

======================

After you install Macintosh PC Exchange in your Control Panels folder and
restart your computer, DOS-format disks appear directly on your Macintosh
desktop when you insert them into the floppy disk drive.

Formatting Disks
----------------
Formatting erases all data on a disk. Be sure the disk you want to format
doesn t contain information you need. Click on the disk icon once to select
it, and then choose Erase Disk from the Special menu. A format pop-up menu
includes these options:

* Standard Macintosh format

Formats high-density disks at 1440K, and low-density disks at 800K.

* PC-DOS format

Formats high-density disks at 1440K, and low-density disks at 720K.

* Apple II ProDOS disks

Formats 400K, 800K, or 1.4MB 3.5 inch Apple II ProDOS disks.

Unreadable Disks
----------------
When you insert a floppy disk into a Macintosh, you may see a message saying
the disk isn t readable, and asking whether to initialize it. This might

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 535 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

happen for the following reasons:

* In the past, many DOS users formatted low-density disks for use as
high-density disks. On a DOS computer, always format standard
double-sided disks in the 720K capacity, and high-density disks in
the 1440K capacity. The Macintosh doesn t recognize an improperly
formatted disk.

* An unreadable disk might be damaged. Don t try to repair a DOS-format

disk with a Macintosh repair utility program. This may destroy
information on the disk. If the disk requires repair, use a disk
repair utility on a DOS computer.

* If a disk has never been used, you just need to initialize it.

* If you don t see more than one disk format choice, your computer
needs an Apple SuperDrive. You can t use Macintosh PC Exchange in a
Macintosh SE or a Macintosh II computer without a SuperDrive upgrade.
You can t use Macintosh PC Exchange on a Macintosh Plus computer.

* Macintosh PC Exchange might not be properly installed. The PC Exchange

icon must be in the Control Panels folder, and you must restart the
computer after installation. Read the installation instructions in
the Macintosh PC Exchange User s Guide.

Extension (INIT) Conflicts

--------------------------
The Macintosh loads system extensions, often called INITs, into system memory
when the computer starts up. When they aren t compatible with other software
on your computer, you have an INIT conflict. Here are some typical symptoms
of INIT conflicts:

* System won t accept a correctly formatted DOS disk.

* System freezes when you insert a correctly formatted DOS disk.

* You can t open the Macintosh PC Exchange control panel to make changes.

If you suspect an INIT conflict, call the Apple Fax Info System at 1-800-505-
0171 and order fax document number 20242 for instructions.

WORKING WITH DOS DOCUMENTS

==========================

DOS Documents Won't Open

------------------------
Sometimes you might double-click a document s icon, and see a message saying
that the application program couldn t be found. An MS-DOS or Windows document
may not open when you double-click the icon for the following reasons:

* The Macintosh doesn't know which application program to launch. You

can follow the steps in the "Opening a Document from within a
Program" section. You can also follow the instructions under
"Assigning Document Type."

* You may be trying to access the document over a network. PC Exchange

assignments don t work for documents over a network. Assignments work
only for documents on DOS-format floppy disks and documents copied from
DOS-format floppy disks.

* The disks currently available on your computer don't have the

application. Find the disk that contains the application, and copy
the application to your hard disk.

Sometimes the application program launches, but the document doesn't open.
Here are some reasons this may happen:

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 536 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

* The application program may not be able to open DOS documents when
you double-click the icon. Follow the instructions in the "Opening a
Document from within a Program" section.

* The document may have been assigned a document type that the program
can't open. Follow the instructions in the "Assigning Document Type"
section to change the document type. Refer to the table in the
"Assigning Macintosh Programs to DOS Documents" section of the
"Macintosh PC Exchange User's Guide" to find types that a program can
open.

Incorrect Document Format

-------------------------
Sometimes you can open a document, but find the format is wrong. It may
contain incorrect characters and strange codes. This can happen when an
application program recognizes the document s type, but doesn t interpret the
document s file format (the way the information in the document is encoded).

Check the application s documentation for document opening and saving

procedures with different file formats, or open the document with another
program.

You can also try assigning a different document type. Follow the instructions
"Assigning Document Type" section of this article. Refer to "the table
in the "Assigning Macintosh Programs to DOS Documents" section of the
Macintosh PC Exchange User s Guide" to find types that a program can open.

Opening a Document from within a Program

----------------------------------------
To open a document using an application program, follow these steps:

1) Launch a Macintosh application.

2) Choose the Open command from the File menu.

3) In the dialog scroll box, select the DOS document and click Open.

Here's why the document you want may not be listed in the directory dialog
box when you choose Open in an application program:

* The program can't recognize the document type assigned to the

document. Try to open the document with another application program.
Or reassign a document type following the instructions in the
"Assigning Document Type" section to change the document type. Refer
to the table in the "Assigning Macintosh Programs to DOS Documents"
section of the "Macintosh PC Exchange User's Guide" to find types
that a program can open.

* You may be trying to access the document over a network. PC Exchange

assignments don't work for documents over a network. Assignments
work only for documents on DOS-format floppy disks and documents
copied from DOS-format floppy disks.

Assigning Document Type

-----------------------
The Macintosh PC Exchange control panel lets you map file types. A three-
letter DOS suffix maps to a corresponding document type on the Macintosh.
Here's how to designate a specific Macintosh application for opening MS-DOS
documents:

1) Choose Control Panels from the Apple menu.

2) Double-click the PC Exchange control panel to open it.

3) Click on Add.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 537 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

4) In the DOS Suffix box, type a period and the three-letter DOS suffix
(for example, .TXT). The suffix is required. There is an error in the
manual which states that a suffix is NOT required. This is incorrect.

5) In the lower part of the dialog box, select the Macintosh

application.

6) Choose a document type from the Document Type pop-up menu (for
example, TEXT).

7) Click OK.

Once you make this assignment, you can double-click the icon of the DOS
document to open it.

When assigning document types, you must specify the type of document the
application supports. If you re unsure of which document type to use, TEXT is
the safest.

Once you ve made assignments, documents appear on the disk with the icon
representing application and document type. Documents with an unassigned DOS
suffix appear as generic DOS documents.

So that all network users are consistent, make a master list of assignments
on one Macintosh. Also, place a copy of the PC Exchange Preferences file in
the Preferences folder, within the System Folder, of each licensed user s
Macintosh.

WORKING WITH MACINTOSH DOCUMENTS

================================

Document Types
--------------
Choose Save from the File menu to save documents onto a DOS-format disk. When
saving documents created or modified on the Macintosh, be sure to save the
document in a file format that the DOS application can read. Refer to the
application s documentation to find out what file formats the program can
open, import, and save.

The Macintosh also creates two new files for each document, to keep track of
such things as the location of icons and windows. You ll need to leave about
5K of extra disk space for each document to accommodate these files.

Document Name Length

--------------------
While the Macintosh supports document names up to 31 characters long, DOS
supports up to eight characters plus a three-character suffix. Macintosh PC
Exchange truncates a longer name used on the Macintosh when saved to a DOS
disk. To preview what the shorter name looks like:

1) Click on the file to highlight it.

2) Choose Get Info from the File menu.

3) Click on the document name in the Info dialog box. This switches
between the Macintosh and DOS (truncated) version of the name.

If this procedure doesn't work, make sure the File Sharing Extension is in
the Extensions folder.

Non-English Word Processors

---------------------------
When you create a document with a non-English word processor on the
Macintosh, the special accent characters (diacritical marks) may change when
you open the document on a DOS computer. DOS computers may not support all

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 538 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

characters displayed on a Macintosh.

This article is one of many available through the Apple Fax center. For a
complete list of available fax documents, search the Tech Info Library for
Apple Fax Document Index or call the Apple Fax line at 1-800-505-0171 and
select document number 20000 (Apple Fax - Document Index - Product Support
Literature). The Apple Fax center is available free of charge 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.

Article Change History:

01 Jul 1996 - Added Fax Doc Word
13 Oct 1994 - Added keyword; made several technical corrections.
28 Sep 1994 - Reviewed for technical accuracy.
29 Apr 1994 - Indicated that a suffix is required for DOS files.
09 Feb 1994 - Added more troubleshooting information and retitled.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1993-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: supt,kfax, kalley

### END OF FILE A2TIL330.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 539 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL331.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Macintosh, Apple II: Specifications of Plastic Enclosures (4/94)

Header: Macintosh, Apple II: Specifications of Plastic Enclosures (4/94)

Article Created: 22 June 1989

Article Reviewed/Updated: 1 April 1994

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

What kind of materials are the plastic enclosures for Macintosh computers
made of?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Macintosh cases, mouse devices, and keyboard enclosures through the Macintosh
SE are made of Cycolac ABS grade KJC plastic.

Macintosh plastic cases, mouse devices, and keyboard enclosures after the
Macintosh SE are made of either
* Cycolac ABS grade KJC plastic, rated at 94V-2, or
* Cycolac ABS grade KJW plastic, rated at 94V-0.

The keyboards listed below use unreinforced polyester for the keycaps.
The polyester makes the sublimation printing of the legends possible.

There is more than one vendor of polyester: the Apple Standard and Extended
keyboards use Celanese Celanex 2000-2 resin.

Vendor information on Asian manufacturers' plastic is not available.

* the Apple Standard and Extended Keyboards

* the Macintosh Plus keyboard
* some Apple IIGS keyboards
* all Apple IIc keyboards
* possibly some Apple IIe keyboards

Other keyboards have ABS keycaps; these keycaps are double-shot to put
the legends in a different color plastic.

Information on the plastic used in later keyboards is not available at

this time.

Article Change History

----------------------
1 April 1994 - Reviewed for technical accuracy.
8 July 1992 - Reviewed and retitled for accuracy.
Copyright 1989-94, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: specsht

### END OF FILE A2TIL331.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 540 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL332.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: MacPeak SCSI Drive: How to Use with an Apple IIGS

Header: MacPeak SCSI Drive: How to Use with an Apple IIGS

This article last reviewed: 23 May 1989

Some people have had problems formatting a MacPeak external SCSI drive
(normally for the Macintosh) from an Apple IIGS. One user, who had this
problem, was working with an Apple IIGS with 1MB RAM, 3.5-inch and
5.25-inch floppy disk drives, and an Apple II SCSI card in slot 5.

The Apple IIGS recognizes the drive, but the format routine quits after
running for about the same time it takes to format a ProDOS floppy and then
crashes. A conflict between the SCSI card and the 3.5-inch drive causes
this problem.

The 3.5-inch drive plugs into the SmartPort. The SmartPort is slot 5. To
use the SCSI card in slot 5, you need to set slot 5 in the Control Panel to
"Your Card". When the Control Panel is set in this way, the SmartPort is
disabled, and the 3.5-inch drive is also disabled.

To use both the 3.5-inch drive and the SCSI drive on the Apple IIGS, place
the SCSI card in a slot other than slot 3 (the 80-column display), slot 4
(the mouse connection), slot 5 (the SmartPort), or slot 6 (the 5.25-inch
drive location). This leaves slots 1, 2, and 7 available. Slot 1 is often
used for a printer, slot 2 is often used for a modem, and slot 7 is used
for AppleTalk. Choose slot 1 if no printer is attached, slot 2 if no modem
is attached, or slot 7 if AppleTalk is not in use. No matter which slot you
choose, you must set the Control Panel to "Your Card" for that slot.

If, after reassigning slots, there is still difficulty formatting the

MacPeak drive, there would appear to be an incompatibility between the SCSI
card and the MacPeak drive. (MacPeak indicated that they do not support
the use of their drives on the Apple II SCSI card.)
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL332.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 541 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL333.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Manx Software Systems

Header: Manx Software Systems

Article Created: 02/13/88

Article Reviewed: 07/13/93
Article Updated: 07/13/93

Manx Software Systems

-------------------------

P.O. Box 980

Freehold, NJ 07728

800-221-0440

908-308-3322 Fax

AppleLink: D0545

Company Profile:
Software, specializing primarily in Apple II and Macintosh development
systems.
Copyright 1989-93, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL333.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 542 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL334.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Monitor III: Repair Tips

Header: Monitor III: Repair Tips

This article last reviewed: 7 November 1988

A typical problem reported on the Monitor III is "no video". In these cases,
adjusting either the contrast or brightness controls on the monitor solves the
problem. With an Apple II or II+, the problem lies in the computer's video
adjustment potentiometer, K14 on the main logic board. It is often adjusted
too low.

Before you send a Monitor III in for exchange, make sure that the monitor has
the problem and not:
1. the video cable or
2. too low of an adjustment of the video signal by the video adjustment
potentiometer, K14 on the main logic board.
Copyright 1988 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL334.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 543 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL335.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Motorola CDX268: Terminal Emulation for Macintosh or Apple II

Header: Motorola CDX268: Terminal Emulation for Macintosh or Apple II

This article last reviewed: 26 May 1989

Emulating a Motorola CDX268 terminal on a Macintosh or Apple II is easy. The

CDX286 is what was once, affectionately, called a "glass TTY". It's a very
basic terminal that you can configure for baud rate, data and stop bits, and
parity. The port can be configured for either RS-232 or RS-422. It requires
no
strange or out-of-the-ordinary protocols. All of this means that almost any
terminal emulation program for the Macintosh or Apple II can be set up to act
like a CDX268.

To do the emulation, set it up CDX286 in TTy mode and connect the appropriate
cable to the built-in serial port. The cable, like your configuration,
depends
on what you're connecting to.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL335.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 544 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL336.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Mouse Compatibility: Macintosh Plus and Apple II Computers

Header: Mouse Compatibility: Macintosh Plus and Apple II Computers

Article Created: 19 November 1990

Article Last Reviewed: 27 July 1992
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

My official Apple mouse works on my Macintosh Plus, but not on my Apple II

computer. What does this mean?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

There are two vendors for the mouse that works with the Macintosh Plus and
Apple II line. If you switch mice between systems, the mouse may not
work.

One vendor's mouse works with both lines, and the other works only with
the Macintosh Plus:

- The mouse identified as "Made in the US" works on both computers.

- The other is identified as "Made in Japan".

All service stock is of the compatible version (P/N 661-0400).

Copyright 1990 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL336.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 545 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL337.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: MousePaint: Printing

Header: MousePaint: Printing

Article Created: 23 October 1984

Article Last Reviewed: 11 April 1991
Article Last Updated: 11 April 1991

MousePaint was designed as a black and white program, not a color program.
While MousePaint will output to the Scribe in color, the quality is poor.
The current version of MousePaint prints directly to Apple dot matrix
printers only.

Meanwhile, for printing to third party printers such as Epson or Okidata,

here are some indirect methods.

NOTE: All procedures reviewed here use the ProDOS /USERS.DISK that comes with
the ProDOS supplied with Disk II's or with the ProDOS User's Kit.

1. Using an intelligent graphics interface: Grappler, Pkaso, or other.

A. Save the picture by selecting the "Put a copy in..." command from the
MousePaint File menu. This will create a standard binary picture file
on a ProDOS-formatted data disk.
B. Leave Paint.
C. Start up Applesoft BASIC using the ProDOS /USERS.DISK. BASIC is an
option on the main ProDOS menu.
D. Now you must instruct your Apple to load the graphcs image and to tell
the interface to dump it to the printer. Most graphics interfaces come
with examples of programs that do this. Enter and save one of these on
your ProDOS data disk.
Sales Tip: Enter the programs for the intelligent interfaces you support.
Make sure they run under ProDOS and give them to your customers.

2. Using a "snapshot" interface.

Some cards, e.g., the "PRINT IT" interface, will print the screen when a
button is pressed. Because you would print the Paint palette if you did a
MousePaint screen dump, you should save the graphic as above and start up
BASIC from the ProDOS /USERS.DISK. Then give these direct commands to your
Apple:

HGR:POKE -16302,0
BLOAD picturename, A$2000

Then press the interface's button to dump the picture.

3. Making your Apple do the work.

This works if you have a graphics printing program that works with your
printer, e.g., Printographer, Zoom Grafix, Apple LOGO Tool Kit and so on.
Most of these programs run under DOS 3.3.

A. Follow the instructions above to store a binary file on your ProDOS data
disk.
B. Start up the ProDOS /USERS.DISK.
C. Now you must convert the binary file over to DOS 3.3 format using the
CONVERT option on the ProDOS menu. Follow the instructions in the
ProDOS manual for doing this conversion. (See our article on using the
ProDOS CONVERT program for more information).
D. After the file is converted to DOS 3.3, it may be loaded and dumped by

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 546 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

your DOS 3.3 graphics program.

Of course, once these programs are published under ProDOS, you will not
need to convert the binary file before using the graphics program.

To dump graphics, Apple IIc users can also employ the Imagewriter Tool Kit,
Revision B, which works under ProDOS.
Copyright 1984, 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL337.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 547 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL338.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: MouseText: Display for Characters "F" and "G"

Header: MouseText: Display for Characters "F" and "G"

Article Created: 29 April 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

What should the MouseText ROM display for characters "F" and "G"?

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

The "F" in MouseText is the character used to represent a carriage return,

sort of like this:

|
|
<----|

The "G" displays four horizontal bars, an Apple II representation of an active

(or foremost) window. It looks like this:

________
________
________
(this space is intentional)
________

You'll find a list of MouseText characters in the Apple IIe Owner's Manual
(platinum), page 133.
Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL338.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 548 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL339.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Moving Apple II DOS 3.3 Data to Macintosh

Header: Moving Apple II DOS 3.3 Data to Macintosh

This article last reviewed: 21 April 1988

If you wish to run Apple II DOS 3.3 files on a Macintosh (512Ke or newer),
you must do the following:

1. If the Apple II Plus is the only Apple II available (NOTE: if an

Apple IIe is available, see below), then you need:

- a minimum of 64K in the Apple II Plus

- one 5.25" drive
- one 3.5" drive
- the program "Convert" from a ProDOS System Disk, V1.0, on a bootable
3.5" disk
- the collected data on a 5.25" disk

and

- one Macintosh (512Ke, Plus, SE, or II)

- two disk drives (two 800K floppies or one 800K floppy and a hard
drive)
- Apple File Exchange (on one of the floppies or on the the hard
drive).

Once these items are together, follow these steps:

a. Insert the ProDOS disk in the 3.5" drive and the data disk in the
5.25" drive.

b. Run "Convert".

c. Transfer the data ("Convert" defaults to 5.25" --> 3.5").

d. Eject the 3.5" disk, which now has the data converted to ProDOS
format.

e. Launch Apple File Exchange on the Macintosh.

f. Insert the ProDOS 3.5" disk in the Macintosh drive. (AFE displays
its disk in one window and the ProDOS disk in another.)

g. Select the data file from the ProDOS disk, and click the transfer
button.

2. If there is an Apple IIe available, you need:

- a minimum of 128K in the Apple IIe

- one 5.25" drive
- one 3.5" drive
- System Utilities 3.0 on a bootable 3.5" disk
- the collected data on a 5.25" disk

and

- one Macintosh (512Ke, Plus, SE, or II)

- two disk drives (two 800K floppies or one 800K floppy and a hard
drive)

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 549 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

- Apple File Exchange (on one of the floppies or on the the hard drive).

Once these items are together, follow these steps:

a. Insert the ProDOS disk in the 3.5" drive and the data disk in the
5.25" drive.

b. Run System Utilities (labeled SYSUTIL.SYSTEM).

c. Copy the data file from the 5.25" disk to the 3.5" disk using "Copy
Files".

d. Eject the 3.5" disk, which now has the data converted to ProDOS
format.

e. Launch Apple File Exchange on the Macintosh.

f. Insert the ProDOS 3.5" disk in the Macintosh drive. (AFE displays
its disk in one window and the ProDOS disk in another.)

g. Select the data file from the ProDOS disk, and click the transfer
button.

Using either method, the data from the test instrument is now a Macintosh
text file. Once in the Macintosh text file format, it can be loaded into
a variety of Macintosh applications.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL339.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 550 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL340.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Nite Owl Productions (5/93)

Header: Nite Owl Productions (5/93)

Article Created: 6 May 1993

Article Reviewed/Updated: 14 July 1993

Nite Owl Productions

----------------------

5734 Lamar Street

Mission, KS 66202

913-362-9898

913-362-5798 Fax

Company Profile:
Specializing in software, shareware, accessories for the Apple II, and
Macintosh and GS batteries
Copyright 1993, Apple Computer, Inc
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL340.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 551 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL341.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Parallel Interface Card: 3rd Party Printers (11/96)

Header: Parallel Interface Card: 3rd Party Printers (11/96)

Article Created: 06 February 86

Article Reviewed/Updated: 19 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article discusses connecting the Parallel Interface card to different

3rd party printers.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Epson FX 80
===========

General Settings
----------------
Parallel Interface
8 Data Bits
Linefeeds required

Epson DIP switches

------------------
Switch Bank 1 Switch bank 2

1 OFF 1 ON
2 OFF (see notes) 2 ON
3 OFF (see notes) 3 OFF
4 OFF 4 OFF (see notes)
5 OFF (see notes)
6 ON
7 ON
8 ON

Bank 1
------
Switch 2 is set for open zero character; for slashed zero, turn switch 2 on.
Switch 3 is set for continuous paper; for cut sheet, turn switch 3 on.
Switch 5 is set for normal density printing at power on; for emphasized
printing, turn switch 5 on.

Bank 2
------
Switch 4 is set for computer generated carriage return linefeed; for carriage
return only, turn switch 4 on.

Parallel Interface
------------------
All switches on the Apple interface card need to be set to factory default
settings.

Cable Pinouts
-------------

Apple II Parallel Epson

CABLE SHIELD ---- 1
5 -------------------- 14

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 552 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

6 -------------------- 13
8 -------------------- 12
11 -------------------- 9
12 -------------------- 15
13 -------------------- 16
22 -------------------- 11
23 -------------------- 10
15 -------------------- 3
16 -------------------- 22
4 -------------------- 7
7 -------------------- REMOVE PIN

Centronics 702 or 703

=====================
The Centronics printer interface was originally designed to be used with the
Centronics microP-1 printer. That printer required a control character to set
it into 80-column mode. The firmware on the Centronics printer interface,
PROM P9-00, sends a $1D when ever it receives the <CTRL-I>80N command. This
control character is part of a VFU command on a Centronics 702 or 703 and
usually deselects the printer. The fix is to send a re-select code, but since
the deselected printer doesn't return the Apple's handshake, the reselect
will have to be POKEd to the interface, as follows:

100 FOR J = 1 TO 5
110 POKE -16256 + 16 * SL, 17
120 NEXT

Comrex CR-1 P
=============
Card COMREX CR-1 P

5----------------- DB0------2
6----------------- DB1------3
8----------------- DB2------4
11-----------------DB5------7
12-----------------DB6------8
13-----------------DB7------9
15-----------------STB------1
16-----------------ACK------10
22-----------------DB3------5
23-----------------DB4------6
24-----------------SG------ 16

Dip Switch settings

-------------------
For Parallel card: All down except 4,5
For Comrex: all down except 8

Article Change History:

19 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1986-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL341.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 553 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL342.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Parallel Interface Card: Product Description (11/96)

Header: Parallel Interface Card: Product Description (11/96)

Article Created: 24 October 85

Article Reviewed/Updated: 19 November 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes the Apple II Parallel Interface card and includes
other related information.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

DB-25 Connector Pinout

----------------------
DB-25
Connector Signal Name

1..............Data In, Bit 0

2..............Signal Ground
3..............Data In, Bit 2
4..............Signal Ground
5..............Data Out, Bit 0
6..............Data Out, Bit 1
7..............Blocked
8..............Data Out, Bit 2
11..............Data Out, Bit 5
12..............Data Out, Bit 6
13..............Data Out, Bit 7
14..............Data In, Bit 4
15..............Strobe Out
16..............Acknowledge In
17..............Data In, Bit 1
18..............Data In, Bit 7
19..............Data In, Bit 5
20..............Signal Ground
21..............Data In, Bit 6
22..............Data Out, Bit 3
23..............Data Out, Bit 4
24..............Signal Ground
25..............Data In, Bit 3

Switch Settings
===============

Strobe Length
-------------
1 microsecond -> SW1-1:Off, SW1-2:Off, SW1-3:Off
3 microseconds -> SW1-1:On, SW1-2:Off, SW1-3:Off
5 microseconds -> SW1-1:Off, SW1-2:On, SW1-3:Off
7 microseconds -> SW1-1:On, SW1-2:On, SW1-3:Off
9 microseconds -> SW1-1:Off, SW1-2:Off, SW1-3:On
11 microseconds -> SW1-1:On, SW1-2:Off, SW1-3:On
13 microseconds -> SW1-1:Off, SW1-2:On, SW1-3:On
15 microseconds -> SW1-1:On, SW1-2:On, SW1-3:On

Strobe Polarity
---------------

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 554 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Positive -> SW1-4:Off

Negative -> SW1-4:On
Ack Polarity
------------
Positive -> SW1-5:Off
Negative -> SW1-5:On

Firmware Select
---------------
Parallel (LF) -> SW1-6:Off
Centronics (No LF) -> SW1-6:On

Interrupts
----------
Disable -> SW1-7:Off
Enable -> SW1-7:On

Interrupts should be enabled for the Apple III and disabled for the Apple II.

Switch Setting Explanations

---------------------------
Different peripherals (non-Apple printers, etc.) may use I/O signals that
have different duration and polarity. The STROBE LENGTH, STROBE POLARITY, and
ACK POLARITY switch settings on the Parallel Interface Card (2PIC) give you
the flexibility to communicate with these other devices. For the I/O signal
characteristics of the device you are connecting with, read its manual.

Controlling Bit 8
-----------------
The following program enables you to control bit 8, used by some printers to
select expanded or normal print mode or to enable alternate or graphics
character sets. DOS 3.2 or DOS 3.3 is required to use this routine, which
also works in the Apple III in Emulation mode.

Determine which slot your interface card is in and the corresponding slot
code from the table. Replace "<slot>" with the slot number and "<code>" with
the code when typing in the program.

slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
code C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7

Enter the monitor with Call -155 and type:

3B0:A9 <slot>
:20 95 FE
:A9 80
:20 ED FD
:A9 C5
:85 36
:A9 03
:85 37
:4C EA 03
:29 7F
:0D CD 03
:4C 02 <code>
:80

To check your typing, type: 3B0L

Compare your listing to the one below configured for slot 1.

03B0- A9 01 LDA #$01

03B2- 20 95 FE JSR $FE95

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 555 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

03B5- A9 80 LDA #$80

03B7- 20 ED FD JSR $FDED
03BA- A9 C5 LDA #$C5
03BC- 85 36 STA $36
03BE- A9 03 LDA #$03
03C0- 85 37 STA $37
03C2- 4C EA 03 JMP $03EA
03C5- 29 7F AND #$7F
03C7- 0D CD 03 ORA $03CD
03CA- 4C 02 C1 JMP $C102
03CD- 80 ???

Enter 3D0G to return to Basic.

Save the driver to disk by typing: BSAVE CEN 730, A$3B0, L$1E

Load the driver and initialize the interface before using the printer. From
command mode, type:

BLOAD CEN 730

Call 944

Or from a program: 100 Print D$;"BLOAD CEN 730" : Call 944, assuming that D$
is a CTRL-D.

To switch back to the video monitor for output type: PR#0

or in a program enter: 200 Print D$;"PR#0"

To reconnect the printer, all that is required is: Call 954, or from a
program: 300 Call 954

To set normal print mode, type POKE 973,0; type POKE 973,128 to set the
expanded print mode POKE.

Cable Pinouts
-------------
Here is a sample pinout for an Apple II parallel card to a parallel printer.

20-Pin Amphenol
DIL Connector Connector
(Female) (Male)
1 ---------- 14
2 ---------- 10
8 ---------- 1
10 ---------- 2
11 ---------- 3
12 ---------- 4
13 ---------- 5
14 ---------- 6
15 ---------- 7
16 ---------- 8
17 ---------- 9
20 ---------- 16

Article Change History:

19 Nov 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1988-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: HTS,CNFG

### END OF FILE A2TIL342.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 556 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL343.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Pascal 1.2 128K Development System: Using it with a QC Hard Disk
Header: Pascal 1.2 128K Development System: Using it with a QC Hard Disk

If you are fortunate enough to own the Pascal 1.2 development system you can
access all features of it from your QC hard disk. The 128K development version
is REQUIRED.

It is assumed that you are familiar with the Pascal development system and the
workings of the Apple II Pascal Software supplied with your QC hard disk.

PROCEDURE

1. Create a development version of the Apple Pascal II software disk using

the
procedure on page 1-4 of the Quark Hard Disk Drive Pascal II Users Manual. In
addition to these steps, it is necessary to convert the software from a 64K
development version to a 128K development version. To do this place the APPLE3
Pascal disk in the disk drive and T(ransfer "APPLE3:128K.APPLE" and
"APPLE3:128K.PASCAL" to "QUARK:SYSTEM.APPLE" and "QUARK:SYSTEM.PASCAL" on the
Apple II Pascal software disk. When asked to remove old files, answer "Y".
2. Make a copy of the APPLE1 disk and convert this disk to a 128K development
version by T(ransfering APPLE3:128K.APPLE and APPLE3:128K.PASCAL to
APPLE1:SYSTEM.APPLE and APPLE1:SYSTEM.PASCAL. When asked to remove old files
answer "Y".
3. Boot the newly modified Apple IIPascal Software disk.
4. From the main menu select the VOLUME MANAGER.
5. Select CREATE VOLUMES and make a PASCAL II volume on your QC hard disk
that
is 800 blocks in size. Mount this volume with Read/Write access by pressing
RETURN at the prompt "OK to allow unrestricted access to this volume?".
6. Return to the VOLUME MANAGER main menu and select EDIT CURRENT MOUNTS.
7. Set up the newly created Pascal II volume to currently mount on
unit #5. Mount this volume with Read/Write access by pressing RETURN at the
prompt "Mount with Read/Write access?".
8. Return to the VOLUME MANAGER main menu and select QUIT.
9. Select RENAME VOLUME and change the volume name to anything you wish.
10. Return to the Pascal QC Hard Disk Utilities menu and select QUIT TO
PASCAL.
11. Insert the 128K APPLE1 in the disk drive and select F(iler.
12. Select T(ransfer. Copy the entire contents of APPLE0, APPLE1, APPLE2, and
APPLE3 to "#5:=". Certain files, particularly SYSTEM.APPLE and SYSTEM.PASCAL
and SYSTEM.COMPILER are duplicated throughout these disks. When asked to
remove
old files, answer "N".
13. Place the APPLE3 disk in the disk drive. T(ransfer the files
"APPLE3:128K.APPLE" and APPLE3:128K.PASCAL" to "#5:SYSTEM.APPLE" and
#5:SYSTEM.PASCAL". When asked to remove old files, answer "Y".
14. Insert the Apple II Pascal Software disk in the disk drive and T(ransfer
"QUARK:=" to "#5:=". When asked to remove old files answer "N".

FINISHING UP

1. Boot the Apple II Pascal Software disk and select VOLUME MANAGER.
2. Select EDIT CURRENT MOUNTS. Mount your Pascal II volume on unit #4 by
selecting "1" and pressing RETURN. Respond to the prompt "Mount which volume?"
by typing the name of your Pascal II volume and pressing RETURN. Mount this
volume with Read/Write access by pressing RETURN at the prompt "Mount with
Read/Write access?".
3. Return to the VOLUME MANAGER main menu and select EDIT AUTOMATIC MOUNTS.
4. Auto mount your Pascal II volume on unit #4 by selecting "1". Respond to
the prompt "Mount which volume?" by typing the name of your Pascal II volume

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 557 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

and pressing RETURN. Mount this volume with Read/Write access by pressing
RETURN at the prompt "Mount with Read/Write access?".
5. Reboot the Apple IIPascal Software disk. You will notice that after the
initial boot, all files are being accessed from the QC hard disk. Surprise....
You will be able to access both Apple II Pascal Software files from your hard
disk and by quitting to Pascal, will be able to access all Pascal development
tools without rebooting.

NOTE: Apple Computer Inc. is not responsible for the contents of this
article.
Quark Tech Support

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL343.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 558 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL344.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Pascal 1.3: Compatible With IIGS RAM Disk, 3.5" Disk
Header: Pascal 1.3: Compatible With IIGS RAM Disk, 3.5" Disk

This article last reviewed: 1 December 1987

Pascal 1.3 for the Apple II can be loaded into the RAM disk of an Apple IIGS.
Set your RAM size, and it will be formatted when you start up Pascal.

Pascal 1.3 supports 3.5" disk drives. (In fact, it's now distributed on a
3.5" disk in addition to the 5.25" disks.)

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL344.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 559 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL345.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Pascal 1.3: Using it on a Hard Disk 20SC

Header: Pascal 1.3: Using it on a Hard Disk 20SC

When using Apple Pascal 1.3 (as well as versions 1.0, 1.1, and 1.2) on an
Apple II, you cannot use the Hard Disk 20SC as a volume: since Pascal stores
the volume size as a signed integer, it cannot work with volumes larger than
32767 blocks. (The HD 20SC has 39165.) The Hard Disk 20SC can be formatted
from Apple Pascal, but when you attempt to use the Pascal FILER to copy files
to the drive, you get a "NO ROOM ON VOLUME" message. Furthermore, Apple
Pascal only supports 77 files per directory, so even if you could use the
Hard Disk 20SC, you would run out of directory space before you could even
come close to running out of disk space.

The directory limitation applies to 5 meg and 10 meg ProFile drives as well.
You can use a ProFile hard drive with Pascal 1.3, but you cannot "share" the
drive with ProDos: you must dedicate the entire hard drive to a maximum of 77
Pascal files.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL345.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 560 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL346.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Pascal 1.3: Using UNITSTATUS

Header: Pascal 1.3: Using UNITSTATUS

The Pascal 1.3 operating system on all Apple systems does not detect
characters with the device REMIN:. For example, when an Apple IIc with the
3.5" ROM runs the sample program from volume III, page 191 of the Apple II
Pascal 1.3 Workbench Manual, the characters from the modem port
(i.e. REMIN:) are not detected.

In previous versions of Pascal, the programmer was requested to use the

Applestuff function RemStatus instead of UNITSTATUS when he wanted to use
REMIN: and REMOUT:. RemStatus was not included with Pascal 1.3.

To employ REMIN: and REMOUT: with Pascal 1.3, use the Library program to
replace the 1.3 APPLESTUFF with the 1.2 APPLESTUFF, following the procedure
on pages 216-222 of chapter 8 of the Pascal 1.3 manual, volume II.

After that procedure, the following function and types will be available:

TYPE RStatus = (RStatBusy, RStatReady, RStatOffline);

RSChannel = (RSOutput, RSInput);

FUNCTION RemStatus (channel: RSChannel):RstatType;

Use this function instead of UNITSTATUS.

Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL346.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 561 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL347.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Pascal II: Using Library Name Files

Header: Pascal II: Using Library Name Files

Many people have trouble using Library Name Files in Apple II Pascal
(v.1.2 and 1.3 ). Here is a short explanation on what library name
files are, and how they are used in Pascal.

Library Name files, which contain the names of libraries to be used when
running a program, are designed for very large applications, or for
multiple program applications that need to use the same libraries.

With small applications, when you want to use a library other than the
system library, you can link your libraries ( as regular units )
directly into your program. For larger applications, however, this is
impracticable, since each re-compilation makes linking more difficult
and cumbersome. The solution for larger applications is to create
Program Libraries which allow you to build your own set of intrinsic
units without having to place them in the system library. (Intrinsic
units have the same root name as the program, but have the suffix '.LIB'
on the end; e.g., a program named TRYIT.CODE becomes TRYIT.LIB). What
Library Name files do is allow you to handle up to five Program Library
files for each program.

To use Library Name files, write your library code and program code in
the standard way. Each library unit MUST be an intrinsic unit. When
writing your program you must remember to use the "$U ..." option to
tell the compiler where to find your libraries interface (program
library names are used only at execution time.). After compiling your
library units, don't forget to use the LIBRARY program to place a
library header in the file. Now, just compile your program and create
your library name file. When you execute, your program will find its
units even though you did not have to link them in.

Here are three sample files that illustrate the process:

Main program source code [TRYIT.TEXT]:

PROGRAM USEWALLY;

USES {$U WALLY.LIB} WALLY;

BEGIN
DOWALLY;
END.

Wally, library unit source code [WALLY.TEXT]:

UNIT WALLY;

INTRINSIC CODE 17 DATA 18

INTERFACE

VAR WALLSTR:STRING[80];

PROCEDURE DOWALLY;

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 562 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

IMPLEMENTATION

PROCEDURE DOWALLY;

BEGIN
WRITELN('WELL WALLY WORKS WELL I THINK');
END;

BEGIN

END.

Library name file [TRYIT.LIB]:

LIBRARY FILES:

WALLY.LIB

$$

To build this program, you must compile the library unit first, then use
LIBRARY to turn it into a library (with the proper header). Finally,
compile the main program ( TRYIT.TEXT) and then run it to be sure that
it works.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL347.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 563 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL348.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: PC Transporter: IIGS Driver Not Available For AppleShare

Header: PC Transporter: IIGS Driver Not Available For AppleShare

Article Created: 16 September 1988

Article Last Reviewed: 27 January 1992
Article Last Updated: 27 January 1992

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

Can I use PC Transporter with an AppleShare File Server?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Applied Engineering's PC Transporter, the MS-DOS card for the Apple II

family, can theoretically work with the AppleShare File Server.
Specifically, you can use the server as drive "D" when using the MS-DOS
software, as well as Apple IIGS mode.

However, such a driver that can access the AppleTalk resources of the Apple
IIGS doesn't currently exist. Development of the driver is typically the
responsibility of the card's manufacturer.

On AppleLink, you can find contact information for the various vendors by
clicking the Library Index button to view the folder structure in the Tech
Info Library. An alphabetic listing of vendors is in the Third Party
Company Directory folder.
Copyright 1988, 1989, 1992 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL348.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 564 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL349.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Performa: Running Apple II Software (3/93)

Header: Performa: Running Apple II Software (3/93)

Article Created: 24 March 1993

Article Change History

----------------------
06/22/93 - REWROTE
* With more complete information.

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I would like information on running Apple II software on my Performa 430. Do I

need a card? Where do I install it? Where do I get it, and the necessary
supporting software?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The Apple IIe Card is an accessory card that lets you run Apple IIe programs
on several Macintosh models. At this writing, those models were Performa 400,
405, 430, and 450; Macintosh LC, LC II, and LC III; and Macintosh Color
Classic. When the Macintosh is in the Apple IIe mode, it performs just
like an Apple IIe Computer. You can start up and use Apple IIe software
applications just as you would on an Apple IIe.

Features of the Apple IIe Card:

* Runs virtually all Apple IIe applications -- more than 10,000 programs.

* Applesoft BASIC programming language is built in. The Apple IIe Card
supports ProDOS, DOS 3.3, and Apple II Pascal operating systems.

* The Macintosh hard drive may be partitioned for the ProDOS operating system
to allow mass storage of Apple IIe programs and files.

* The Macintosh's internal SuperDrive can be used with ProDOS-formatted

disks. ProDOS disks appear on the Macintosh desktop to allow easy transfer
of files to the hard drive.

* Allows connection of one UniDisk 3.5 disk drive and two Apple 5.25 disk
drives through the Apple IIe Card's connection cable. This cable also allows
the attachment of an Apple IIe joystick.

* Can print from Apple IIe applications to any printer that the Macintosh can
select.

You can purchase the Apple IIe Card at your Local Apple Dealer. Also, the
Local Apple Service Provider can install the card. You can find the Local
Apple Dealer/Service Provider by calling (800) 538-9696. You can also
purchase the Apple IIe Card from the Apple Catalog (800) 795-1000.

If you need help with the Apple IIe Card, then you can call the Apple
Assistance Center at (800) SOS-APPL Extension 555.

Here is what you need to order:

* Apple IIe Card (Product Number M0444/D,Catalog Number B1043)

Optional Items:

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 565 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

* Apple 5.25 Drive (Product Number A9M0107, Catalog Number B1024)

* Joystick II (Product Number A2M2012, Catalog Number B1360)
Copyright 1993, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL349.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 566 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL350.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Practical Computer Technologies (5/93)

Header: Practical Computer Technologies (5/93)

Article Created: 6 May 1993

Article Reviewed/Updated: 15 July 1993

Practical Computer Technologies

-------------------------------

5407 Port Royal Road

Springfield, VA 22151

Phone: 703-321-3003

Fax: 703-321-3053

Company Profile:
Specializing in consignment and resale of a wide assortment of Macintosh and
Apple II software and hardware.
Copyright 1993, Apple Computer, Inc
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL350.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 567 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL351.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Preowned Electronics

Header: Preowned Electronics

Article Created: 3 June 91

Article Reviewed: 15 July 1993

Preowned Electronics
--------------------

205 Burlington Road

Bedford, MA 01730

800-274-5343

617-275-4600

617-275-4848 Fax

Company Profile:
Hardware, specializing in used Apple II equipment and discontinued Macintosh
equipment
Copyright 1991-93, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL351.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 568 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL352.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Problem using Apple II parallel cable with UPIC

Header: Problem using Apple II parallel cable with UPIC

You may have problems using Pascal III with the Apple II Parallel Printer
Interface cable, since Pascal requires different error handshaking than the
cable is able to support. Rewire the cable to the pin specifications on page
16 of the Universal Parallel Interface Card manual.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL352.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 569 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL353.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ProDOS 8: Finding Volume Size using Assembly Language

Header: ProDOS 8: Finding Volume Size using Assembly Language

This article last reviewed: 8 March 1989

You can determine the number of blocks on a ProDOS-compatible device from

assembly language.

On a ProDOS volume, the total number of blocks available is stored on block

2, bytes $29 and $2A. The number is in low byte/high byte format: for
example, an 800K floppy will have $40 at byte $29 and $06 at byte $2A.

Byte $2A contains the first two digits and byte $29 contains the last two
digits. $0640 is equal to 1600 decimal, which is the total number of blocks
on an 800K ProDOS disk.

If you need to determine the number of blocks on a device from the

hardware, that information can be obtained regardless of whether or not
block 2 is intact.

Check memory locations $Cs01, $Cs03, $Cs05 (s = slot number) for $20, $00,
and $03, respectively. If these values are found, then the card in the slot
is a disk controller.

Check memory location $CsFF. If the value is $00 or $FF, assume that an
Apple Disk II disk controller card is installed ($00 is 16-sector, $FF is
13-sector).

Otherwise, check memory location $Cs07. If the value does not equal $00,
the device is not a SmartPort device, and the total number of blocks for
the drive are stored at memory locations $CsFC and $CsFD in
low-byte/high-byte order.

If the total number of blocks is 0, contact the card manufacturer for

details on how to determine the number of blocks.

(NOTE: We do not know of any disk controller that does not store the total
number of blocks at memory locations $CsFC and $CsFD.)

If the value at memory location $Cs07 is $00, the drive is a SmartPort

device. To find the number of blocks on the drive, you must make SmartPort
status call $03 (get DIB). This call is documented in the "Apple IIGS
Firmware Reference Manual" (Apple # 030-3121-A) on pages 114 through 125,
with the most specific information starting on page 121.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL353.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 570 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL354.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ProDOS 8: How To Find Disk, Controller, and Block Information

Header: ProDOS 8: How To Find Disk, Controller, and Block Information

This article last reviewed: 29 March 1989

This article describes how to find disk information, by making calls to

significant memory locations.

Is the Card a Disk Controller?

------------------------------
Check memory locations $Cs01, $Cs03, $Cs05 (s = slot number) for $20, $00,
and $03, respectively. If these values are found, then the card in the
slot is a disk controller.

Apple Disk II Disk Controller and Disk Capacity?

------------------------------------------------
Check memory location $CsFF. If the value is $00 or $FF, assume that an
Apple Disk II disk controller card is installed ($00 is 16-sector, $FF is
13-sector).

SmartPort Device and Number of Blocks?

--------------------------------------
If the device is not an Apple Disk II disk controller card, check memory
location $Cs07. If the value does not equal $00, the device is not a
SmartPort device, and the total number of blocks for the drive are stored
at memory locations $CsFC and $CsFD in low-byte/high-byte order.

If the total number of blocks is 0, contact the card manufacturer for

details on how to determine the number of blocks. (Note: We do not know of
any disk controller that does not store the total number of blocks at
memory locations $CsFC and $CsFD.)

If the value at memory location $Cs07 is $00, the drive is a SmartPort

device. To find the number of blocks on the drive, you must make SmartPort
status call $03 (get DIB). This call is documented in the "Apple IIGS
Firmware Reference Manual" on pages 114 through 125 with the most specific
information starting on page 121.
Copyright 1989 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL354.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 571 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL355.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ProDOS Applications Need "Chooser II" To Select A Printer

Header: ProDOS Applications Need "Chooser II" To Select A Printer

This article last reviewed: 13 September 1988

Some users running AppleShare networks have had problems getting the ProDOS
applications to print.

To get a ProDOS application to print correctly, you need to run the "Chooser
II" program, which is in the AppleTalk folder on Apple II Workstation disk.
This program allows you to select a printer.

(NOTE: If the printer selected is a LaserWriter, the ImageWriter emulator is

downloaded immediately. "Chooser II" can run from either the server or the
work-station. Ensure that the application is printing to slot 7. If printing
to
a LaserWriter, set up the program for printing to an ImageWriter.)
Copyright 1988 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL355.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 572 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL356.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ProDOS Assembler Tools: Startup Sequence

Header: ProDOS Assembler Tools: Startup Sequence

This article last reviewed: 22 October 1987

The ProDOS Assembler Tools disk doesn't start up exactly as described on page
15 of the manual. When an Apple II starts up, it looks for a file named
PRODOS. After it finds and loads PRODOS, it runs the first file on the disk
that has the suffix .SYSTEM in its name. On the ProDOS Assembler Tools disk,
the first such file is BASIC.SYSTEM, but the one needed is EDASM.SYSTEM.
Here's how to change the name of BASIC.SYSTEM so that EDASM.SYSTEM gets
loaded first:

1. Make a copy of the ProDOS Assembler Tools disk.

2. Start up from the new disk.

3. When the Applesoft ] prompt appears, type the following, pressing Return
after each line:

] UNLOCK BASIC.SYSTEM
] RENAME BASIC.SYSTEM,BASIC.SYS

4. Either restart the system, or type the following to start the assembler:

] -EDASM.SYSTEM

This tells BASIC.SYSTEM to load and run EDASM.SYSTEM. ProDOS Assembler

Tools now starts up, as described in the manual.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL356.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 573 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL357.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ProDOS Assembler Tools: Technical product description

Header: ProDOS Assembler Tools: Technical product description

The ProDOS Assembler Tools is designed for programmers who want to write
assembly-language programs for the Apple II, II+, IIc, IIe or IIe enhanced.
All
five of these computers are based on the 6502 microprocessor, whose command
set
is supported by the Assembler Tools. Before you attempt using the Tools, we
recommend that you be fairly familiar with BASIC or Pascal on the Apple
computer system and that you read one or more books on 6502 assembly-language
programming.

The ProDOS Assembler Tools include four programming tools that will help you
create and execute assembly-language programs to run on any Apple II computer.
These tools are the Editor, the Assembler, the Bugbyter debugger, and the
Relocating Loader:

--Use the EDITOR to create and modify program source files and to store
them on disk. You can also use the Editor to edit ProDOS EXEC files and
BASIC program source files.

--Use the ASSEMBLER to generate an executable program.

--Use the BUGBYTER debugger to test and verify the execution of your
programs. Also use the Bugbyter to help you locate and fix any errors
that might creep into your programs.

Further details can be found in the ProDOS Assembler Tools User's Manual.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords: specsht

### END OF FILE A2TIL357.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 574 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL358.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ProDOS Can't Handle Disk Volumes Larger Than 32MB

Header: ProDOS Can't Handle Disk Volumes Larger Than 32MB

This article last reviewed: 5 February 1988

Current versions of ProDOS can't handle more than 32MB of storage on a

hard disk volume.

If you connect a Hard Disk 40SC or Hard Disk 80SC to an Apple II, you
must partition the hard disk -- that is, divide it into separate volumes.
Each volume is then counted as one SCSI device.

Apple does not supply the software that does the partitioning and currently
does not know of any other source for such software.

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL358.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 575 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL359.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ProDos GS/OS, and Instant Pascal: Launching and Quitting

Header: ProDos GS/OS, and Instant Pascal: Launching and Quitting

This article last reviewed: 7 March 1990

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

We have an AppleTalk network system and have discovered some strange behavior
with certain applications on the Apple II.

Using current software, there are three shell programs (besides BASIC)
available for AppleTalk network system users. They are Aristotle, the Finder,
and Let's Share. We have found that some applications work perfectly when
launched from one of the shells, but not when launched from another. Also,
when quitting, some return to the shell from which they were launched, while
others return directly to the File Server Log-On screen.

Here are some examples:

- Mavis Beacon Teaches Typing (Software Toolworks) works fine when launched
from Aristotle or the Finder, but not from Let's Share.

- Medley (Milliken) always returns the user to the Log-On screen on quitting.

Some applications seem to return the user to the shell from which they were
launched, while others return the user to the server-defined startup
application. (I have no concrete examples of this, but here's an
illustration)

- The user logs on and goes to Aristotle, his startup application. He

launches
the Finder from Aristotle and from there launches "Application X". On
quitting Application X, he is returned to the Finder, and on quitting the
Finder (Special Menu, Shut Down, Return to Launching Application), he is
returned to Aristotle.

- The user repeats the above process to get to the Finder, but this time
launches "Application Y". On quitting Application Y, he is returned
directly
to Aristotle, even though he launched Application Y from the Finder.

Do you have any clues about these differences? Do some of these shells leave
memory in a different state than others when they launch applications? Are
there any standards for this sort of thing? Is Let's Share a known offender,
or does it follow whatever rules there are? Is there a standard GS/OS or
ProDOS 16 Quit call? Is everyone not implementing it correctly?

Here's a related question:

I have tried putting ProDOS applications that reside on floppy disks into
Aristotle menus. If I put the disk in the drive and choose the menu item, the
application launches properly and, on quitting, seems to return the user to
Aristotle without a hitch. However, a colleague reports that when doing this
with Instant Pascal, the server connection is dropped somewhere, so quitting
fails. Do some applications disable network listeners or trash the memory
where
network files resides? Is there any way to tell what might work in this
fashion and what might not?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 576 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

The behavior is determined by which operating system the application is

written
under: GS/OS or ProDOS 8.

The ProDOS 8 quit command is quite simple and does not have the ability to put
the name of the application to return to on the return stack. ProDOS
applications "quit to" the program named Start in the GS/OS volume. As
shipped, this is the Finder. However, if the startup program has been set in
the AppleShare Admin application, the Finder may not be the "start" program
any
longer. Whatever is set in Admin is the application to which the ProDOS 8
programs return.

GS/OS applications have the ability to put the name of the program to which
one
returns onto the return stack. If properly written, quitting a GS/OS
application returns the user to the same application that launched the GS/OS
program just quit.

For your examples:

- We defer to Russ Systems about all Let's Share issues.

- We are still trying to work a variety of issues out with Medley. We will
add
this one to the list to investigate.

- With Aristotle (ProDOS 8) as the Admin set startup application, launching

the
Finder (GS/OS), then launching "Application X" (apparently, a GS/OS
application from the behavior described), and quitting "Application X", it
would be correct to finish at the Finder, if "Application X" is, indeed, a
GS/OS application. Quitting the Finder (GS/OS) would then return to the
application that launched it, Aristotle.

- In the next example, instead of launching "Application X", the user launches
"Application Y" (apparently, a ProDOS 8 application from the behavior
described), then quits "Application Y", and finishes in Aristotle. This
would be the correct behavior for a ProDOS 8 "Application Y".

Instant Pascal has several issues associated with it. The primary issue is
that it is neither a ProDOS nor a GS/OS application. Instant Pascal has its
own operating system with its own input/output routines. These I/O routines
know nothing about the network. It is, thus, totally logical that Instant
Pascal disregards all network activities. The only solution is to rewrite the
Instant Pascal operating system. It is unlikely that this solution will ever
be considered.
Copyright 1990 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL359.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 577 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL360.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ProDOS: Converting Files from 5.25-inch Disks to Macintosh

Header: ProDOS: Converting Files from 5.25-inch Disks to Macintosh

Article Created: 14 June 1991

Article Last Reviewed:
Article Last Updated:

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

I'm trying to transfer files from 5.25-inch ProDOS disk to Macintosh SE

3.5-inch disks using a 5.25 drive with a Macintosh SE Bus Controller Card.
This works fine with IBM disks, but AFE won't read ProDOS disks (or even
give me the option select to select a ProDOS driver).

DISCUSSION -------------------------------------------------------

The Apple PC 5.25 Drive for the Macintosh SE can see MS-DOS files, but not
ProDOS files.

Use the utilities on the Apple II to do a file copy from a 5.25-inch to

3.5-inch, then open the file in the Macintosh SE and convert it using Apple
File Exchange with your Apple SuperDrive (formerly Apple FDHD).
Copyright 1991 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL360.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 578 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL361.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ProDOS: Limited to 32 megabyte access on HD40SC and HD80SC

Header: ProDOS: Limited to 32 megabyte access on HD40SC and HD80SC

This article last reviewed: 2 March 1987

A limitation of ProDOS prevents the Apple II from accessing more than 32

megabytes of storage space on an Apple Hard Disk 40SC or Apple Hard Disk
80SC. Those drives can be connected to an Apple II with an Apple II SCSI
card.
Copyright 1990 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL361.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 579 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL362.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ProDOS: Product Overview

Header: ProDOS: Product Overview

ProDOS is Apple's new disk operating system for the Apple IIe and II+. It is
now included with Apple's Disk II drives with controller and the DuoDisk.

Apple designed ProDOS as a transition from DOS 3.3 and for the greater
sophistication and enhanced capabilities demanded by more professional
applications. ProDOS provides compatibility between the Apple III and the
Apple II line of computers, since ProDOS and SOS share similar file naming
conventions and file formats.

ProDOS requires a 64K Apple II+ or IIe, with Applesoft in ROM. Integer BASIC
is not supported. Listed below are some of the features of ProDOS.

--Hierarchical file system similar to SOS.

--Up to 51 files in a volume directory; the number of files in subdirectories

is limited only by the space on the disk.

--20 different file types; 10 are user-defineable.

--Up to 8 files may be open at one time.

--A defined, usable machine language interface.

--Interrupts up to 4 levels are supported and processed sequentially.

--Compatibility between files created on an Apple III.

--Fast transfer speed to and from disk; about 8K per second from Disk II.

--All disk devices supported by Apple will work automatically.

--Direct block access.

--Enhanced BASIC command structure.

--Easier Assembly Language program development and maintenance.

--Up to 32 megabytes per volume, 16 megabytes per file.

--Multiple logical volumes per physical volume.

--Pseudo disk emulator using the Apple Extended Text Card, enabling fast file
access and graphics screen switching.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL362.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 580 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL363.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ProDOS: Using /RAM and Double High-Resolution Graphics

Header: ProDOS: Using /RAM and Double High-Resolution Graphics

Whenever ProDOS is booted, it checks the environment; if ProDOS finds a 128K

Apple II system, it configures the auxiliary 64K memory bank as a RAM disk
named /RAM. This "disk" is catalogued as slot 3, drive 2, since it's
comprised of memory on the 80-column card in slot 3.

If you plan to use this auxiliary memory for high-res graphics, you must
protect yourself from /RAM. To construct a space for protecting high-res
pages in auxiliary memory while maintaining /RAM as an online storage device,
perform the following two steps:

1. Save a "dummy" 8K file as the first entry in /RAM; this file

will always be saved at $2000 to $3FFF.

2. Immediately afterwards, save a second "dummy" 8K file to

/RAM; this file will be saved at $4000 to $5FFF.

--> IMPORTANT NOTES:

1. There is no formula for determining where the blocks of /RAM

physically reside in memory.

2. The logical blocks in /RAM are not physically contiguous.

3. There is no guaranteed way to protect any other fixed

portions of auxiliary memory by means of the "dummy" file
method.

If you wish to protect all auxiliary memory not reserved for use by Apple, you
must disconnect /RAM. The following three areas of the system global page are
of interest to anyone who wishes to disconnect /RAM:

$BF10-$BF2F contains the disk device driver addresses.

$BF31 contains the number of devices minus one.
$BF32-$BF3F contains the list of disk device numbers.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL363.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 581 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL364.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ProFile Formatting Error #21

Header: ProFile Formatting Error #21

This article last reviewed: 29 March 1988

PROBLEM DESCRIPTION: Error #21 is generated when the ProFile is

formatted using the Apple III System Utilities.

BEFORE YOU START: Familiarize yourself with the Apple III Owners
Guide and ProFile Owners Manual.

CAUSE: Software damage has occured.

CURE: Use the following procedure:

1. Format the ProFile using the Apple III Systems Utilities and
define the volume name as HVRMHGL. Another volume name can be
defined once the ProFile has been formatted.

Proceed to Step 2 if you again receive the error #21.

2. Format the ProFile using an Apple II/IIe with the ProDos

utilities. Reconnect the ProFile to the Apple III once the
ProFile has been successfully formatted and perform Step 1.

Use the ProFile troubleshooting procedure (documented in ProFile

Technical Procedures) if both Steps 1 and 2 fail to produce
satisfactory results.
Copyright 1988, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: hts

### END OF FILE A2TIL364.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 582 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL365.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ProFile Hard Drive: Specifications (Discontinued)

Header: ProFile Hard Drive: Specifications (Discontinued)

This article last reviewed: 10 May 1985

Model A9M0005 5 Megabyte (Discontinued)

A9M0100 10 Megabyte (Discontinued)

I. Technical Specifications

1. Data Storage Characteristics:

A9M0100 A9M0005

Data Capacity (formatted)

in megabytes: 10 5
Data Surfaces: 4 4
Heads per Surface: 1 1
Track Spacing per inch: 345 254
Tracks per Surface: 306 152
Sectors per Track: 16 16
Sectors per Surface: 4896 2432
Block Size
in bytes: 512 512
5.25" Floppy Equivalence: 70 35

2. Drive Characteristics:

Average Seek Time

in milliseconds: 85 180
Data Transfer Rate
in megabits/sec: 5 5
Rotational Start-up Time
in seconds: 20 20
Drive Ready to Operate
in seconds: 120 60
Rotational Speed
in RPMs +/- 1%: 3600 3600
Mean Time Between Failure:
in hours: 10,000 10,000

--Winchester technology

3. Interface:

a. Type: 8-bit parallel

b. Connector: DB-25
c. Drives per Interface: 1

4. Power Requirements:

a. U.S.: 110 VAC, 35 Watts

b. Europe: 230 VAC
c. Drive power source internal to the ProFile.

5. Environmental Requirements

a. Temperature
--Operating: 50 to 104 degrees F (10 to 40 degrees C)
--Storage: -7.6 to 176 degrees F (-22 to 80 degrees C)

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 583 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

b. Humidity
--Operating: 20 to 80% noncondensing.
--Storage: 1 to 95%

6. Physical Characteristics

inches centimeters
Height: 4.39 11.15
Width: 17.28 43.89
Depth: 8.81 22.38

pounds kilograms
Weight: 11 5

II. Package

With the 5 Megabyte or 10 Megabyte ProFile package:

1. Apple ProFile hard-disk drive
2. Apple ProFile Accessory Kit including:
a. ProFile interface cable
b. System-specific ProFile owner's manual
c. Warranty and product registration
d. User Input Report
3. Included in the Apple II Accessory Kit:
a. Catalyst II software
b. Apple II SOS Driver and Utilities software
c. Backup II software
d. Apple II ProFile Interface Card
4. Included in the Apple III Accessory Kit:
a. Catalyst 2.0 software
b. Pascal ProFile Manager software
c. Backup III software
d. Apple III ProFile Interface Card

III. System Configuration

--Either ProFile may be used the following Apple personal computers:

1. IIe
a. RAM: Minimum of 64 kilobytes
b. Operating System: ProDOS Pascal 1.2
c. Interface Cards:
-- The difference bewteen the 5Mb and 10Mb ProFile
Interface cards is the ROM at location C6. The ROM is
341-027 for the 5Mb Card and 341-0299-B for the 10 Mb.

2. Apple III

3. Macintosh XL

NOTE: The Macintosh XL containing a built-in 10-megabyte hard disk requires a

Parallel Interface Card (Order A6BB101, obsolete).

Features

Controller automatically scans for error conditions, relocating marginal data

blocks elsewhere on the hard disk, if necessary.
Copyright 1988 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL365.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 584 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL366.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ProFile: Formatting Compatibility (10/94)

Header: ProFile: Formatting Compatibility (10/94)

Article Created: 09 July 1985

Article Reviewed/Updated: 18 October 1994

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

For what operating systems is the Apple ProFile compatible?

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

ProFiles can be formatted for two main types of operating systems:

1. the Lisa Operating System for the Lisa

or

2. ProDOS for the Apple II, and SOS for the Apple III.

ProFiles are formatted at the factory with the Apple III SOS format and
contain the Apple III System Utilities program. This format is completely
compatible with the Apple II ProDOS format, and so can be used on either the
Apple II or Apple III; additionally, these ProFiles can be used without
difficulty on the Macintosh XL (running Lisa or Macintosh software).

Once a ProFile has been formatted by Lisa software, it will not be able to
work any longer on an Apple II or III.

ProFiles don't need any special software to function with these systems other
than the respective system formatters which accompany each system's operating
system utilities, regardless of what system it was used on previously.

NOTES:

1. The Pascal ProFile Manager will not format a ProFile; the ProFile must
already be formatted with ProDOS.

2. If you're unable to initialize a Profile for use with an Apple II or

Apple III after it's been used with a Macintosh XL, check with a Level
II service center: the ProFile may need reformatting.

Article Change History:

18 Oct 1994 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1988-94, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL366.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 585 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL367.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Quality Computers (11/94)

Header: Quality Computers (11/94)

Article Created: 6 May 1993

Article Reviewed/Updated: 11 November 1994

Quality Computers
-----------------

P.O. Box 665

St. Clair Shores, MI 48080-0665

Phone: 800-890-8263
313-774-7740

Fax: 313-774-2698

Company Profile:

Specializing in software, accessories, and support for the Apple II family.

Publications include "II alive", a magazine devoted to the Apple II, and a
magazine and catalog for educators, called "Enhance".
Copyright 1993-94, Apple Computer, Inc
Keywords: 3pty

### END OF FILE A2TIL367.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 586 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL368.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Quark QC Hard Disk: Specifications (Discontinued)

Header: Quark QC Hard Disk: Specifications (Discontinued)

This article last reviewed: 15 January 1988

Performance
Capacity 10.3 & 21.0 Megabytes Formatted
Access Time
Track to Track 16.4 mSec
Average 85 mSec
maximum 175 mSec
Average Latency 8.37 mSec
Startup time(typical) 12 Sec

Functional
Rotational Speed 3600 RPM
Recording Density 9036 & 9827 BPI
Track Density 360 & 588 TPI
Cylinders 306
Read/Write Heads 4
Disks 2

Domestic Power Supply 115 VAC 60Hz 0.45 Amps.

European Power Supply 230 VAC 50Hz <0.25 Amps.

Environmental Limits
Ambient Temperature
Operating +50 to +115 Degrees F
+10 to +46 Degrees C
Non-Operating -40 to +140 Degrees F
-40 to +60 Degrees C
Relative Humidity
Operating 8% to 80% non-condensing
Non-Operating 1% to 95%
Altitude Limit 10,000 ft(3048m) above sea level.
Shock Non Operating 30g Maximum

Dimensions
Height 3.85 in (97.79mm)
Width 14.5 in (368.3mm)
Depth 8.5 in (215.9mm)
Weight 11.0 lbs (approx. 50 kg)

Perfomance Comparison
Data based on reading (2000 blocks QC, 200 blocks DiskII, 800 blocks Macintosh
400K internal drive) in sequence from the disks.
Apple IIc
Internal disk drive 16.4 blocks per second
QC hard disk 25.7 blocks per second
Apple II and III
Disk II, III and Duodisk 16.4 blocks per second
Profile 41.3 blocks per second
QC hard disk 55.6 blocks per second
Macintosh 2.0 System
Macintosh 400K 29 blocks per second
QC hard disk 45 blocks per second

NOTE: Apple Computer, Inc. is not responsible for the contents of this
article.
Quark Technical Support

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 587 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL368.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 588 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL369.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Queue, Inc.

Header: Queue, Inc.

Article Created:
Article Reviewed/Updated: 16 July 1993

Queue, Inc.
-----------

338 Commerce Dr.

Fairfield, CT 06430

203-335-0908

800-232-2224

Fax: 203-336-2481

Company Profile:
Queue, Inc., software, specializing in educational programs for the Macintosh,
Apple II and IBM PCs.
Copyright 1989-93, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL369.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 589 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL370.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: QuickFile IIe and QuickFile III File Sharing

Header: QuickFile IIe and QuickFile III File Sharing

QuickFile III and QuickFile IIe can share the same files if you format your
data diskettes with QuickFile IIe or the Apple II Pascal system. Both
QuickFile IIe at home and QuickFile III at the office will recognize the
disk.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL370.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 590 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL371.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Reading ProDOS Diskettes on a Power Macintosh (9/94)

Header: Reading ProDOS Diskettes on a Power Macintosh (9/94)

Article Created: 29 September 1994

TOPIC ---------------------------------------------------------

I am trying to read ProDOS disks from my Apple II on my Power Macintosh, but

I am getting the message, "This disk is Unreadable, do you want to
initialize?". I thought that my Power Macintosh floppy drive is supposed to
be able to read ProDOS disks. How can I read these disks?

DISCUSSION ----------------------------------------------------

Power Macintosh users that would like to read ProDOS disks have the following
solutions:

1) Install Macintosh PC Exchange 2.0 or later.

Macintosh PC Exchange software version 1.0.4 or 1.0.5 was included with

System Software 7.1.2 for Power Macintosh. Macintosh PC Exchange
allows users to easily read, write, and format PC-compatible disks.
However, these versions of Macintosh PC Exchange do NOT allow users to
read, write, or format ProDOS disks. In June, 1994, Apple announced
Macintosh PC Exchange 2.0. In addition to formatting, reading, and
writing DOS, and OS/2 disks, Macintosh PC Exchange 2.0 can format and
use DOS formatted SCSI hard disks and removable media, such as
Bernoulli and SyQuest cartridges and floptical drives. It can also
format and use Apple II ProDOS floppy disks.

2) Upgrade to Macintosh System Software 7.5.

When System Software 7.5 was announced in July, 1994, Macintosh PC

Exchange 2.0 was integrated into the system software.

3) Apple File Exchange Utility version 7.0.

Macintosh users have been able to read DOS and ProDOS disks using the
Apple File Exchange utility since Macintosh System Software 6.0 shipped
in 1988. Apple File Exchange has been part of the Macintosh System
Software through System 7 Pro. Since Macintosh PC Exchange 2.0
provides users the ability to read, write and format PC-compatible and
ProDOS disks, Apple has discontinued development of Apple File
Exchange. Although Apple File Exchange 7.0 may work with the Power
Macintosh series, it was not fully tested by Apple and is therefore not
supported on PowerPC processor based Macintosh systems.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1994, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: kppc,ksts

### END OF FILE A2TIL371.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 591 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL372.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Redmond Cable Corporation (5/93)

Header: Redmond Cable Corporation (5/93)

Article Created: 6 May 1993

Article Reviewed/Updated: 16 July 1993

Redmond Cable Corporation

-----------------------------

17371 NE 67th Ct Ste 81

Suite A1
Redmond, WA 98052

206-882-2009

206- 883-1430 Fax

Company Profile:
Specializing in Apple II, Macintosh, and custom cables.
Copyright 1993, Apple Computer, Inc
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL372.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 592 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL373.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Resource Central (5/93)

Header: Resource Central (5/93)

Article Created: 6 May 1993

Article Reviewed/Updated: 16 July 1993

Resource Central
----------------

P.O. Box 11250

Overland Park, KS 66207

Phone: 913-469-6502

Fax: 913-469-6507

Company Profile:
Specializing in technical manuals and books, software, and some hardware for
the Apple II, aquired all of APDA's Apple II equipment and utilities
Copyright 1993, Apple Computer, Inc
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL373.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 593 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL374.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Roger Wagner Publishing, Inc.

Header: Roger Wagner Publishing, Inc.

Article Created: 27 March 1990

Article Reviewed/Updated: 26 February 1996

Roger Wagner Publishing, Inc.

------------------------------

1050 Pioneer Way

Suite P
El Cajon, CA 92020

Technical Support: 619-442-0522

Sales & General Information: 800-HYPERSTUDIO

Fax: 619-442-0525

Internet Address: [email protected]

Special Information for Schools: 800-448-4797

Company Profile:
Software, specializing in Apple II family products and hypermedia.
Copyright 1990-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL374.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 594 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL375.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: School Office Software Systems

Header: School Office Software Systems

Article Created: 6 December 1989

Article Last Reviewed: 9 April 1992
Article Last Updated:

School Office Software Systems, hardware and software, specializing in

phone-dialing products for the Apple II family.

School Office Software Systems

3408 Dover Road
Durham, NC 27707
919-493-3366
800-368-4162
Copyright 1989, 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL375.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 595 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL376.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Scribe Printer: Specifications (Discontinued)

Header: Scribe Printer: Specifications (Discontinued)

I. Technical Specifications

A. Print Speed:

1. Letter mode: 50 cps at 10 cpi

2. Draft mode: 80 cps at 10 cpi
3. Speed selection
a. front-panel switch
b. software command

B. Print Method: Non-impact matrix printer

C. Character Format:

1. Letter Mode: 12(H) x 15(V) matrix alphanumberics and symbols

2. Draft Mode: 9(H) x 14(V) matrix alphanumberics and symbols
3. Superscripts/Subscrtipts: 9(H) x 14(V) matrix

D. Character Set:

1. 96 ASCII characters
2. 24 European characters

E. Character Pitch:

1. Letter mode: 10 cpi

2. Draft mode:
a. 10 cpi
b. 17 cpi

F. Line Spacing: 6 lpi (line per inch) plus n/144 in.

G. Line-Feed Rate:

1. 100 msec (at 6 lpi)

2. 180 msec for manual line feed

H. Graphics Densities: Variable

-- Maximum dots Per Lines: 1280

I. Resolution: Up to 160 by 144 dots per inch

J. Paper:

1. Width: 3.5 in. to 10 in. max

2. Thickness: .003 in. to .07 in. (equivalent to 15 to 25 bond)
3. Formats:
a. single cut sheet
b. fanfold continuous
c. paperback transparencies
d. mailing labels
-- adjustable pin-feed tractors for labels
4. Supply: Compact paper supply tray fits under printer

K. Ribbon:

1. Type: single-pass, disposable cassette

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 596 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

2. Colors: black or three color

3. Life: 85,000 characters (average 40-50 pages)
4. Dimensions: 5/16 in. x 273 yd.

L. Interface:

1. Type: RS-232-C (serial)

2. Buffer: 1 line, currrent print mode
3. Baud Rate: 1200 or 9600
4. Apple systems:
a. Apple II
b. Apple II Plus
c. Apple IIe
d. Apple IIc

M. Electrical:

1. Input Power:
a. 115 V 60 Hz
b. 230 V 50 Hz
2. Power Consumption:
a. Standby: 20 Watts maximum
b. Printing: 60 Watts maximum

N. Physical Dimensions

1. Width: 14.5 in.

2. Height: 6.12 in. (with paper tray)
3. Depth: 12.4 in.
4. Weight: 14.1 lb.

O. Environmental:

1. Storage Temperatures: -4 to 104 degrees F (-20 to 40 degrees C)

2. Storage Humidity: 20 to 80%

II. Features:

A. Cable and power cord connect to the side of the Scribe, well out of
the paper path.
Copyright 1986, 1992, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL376.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 597 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL377.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: SCSI Hard Disk Drives: Interleave Information (11/94)

Header: SCSI Hard Disk Drives: Interleave Information (11/94)

Article Created: 2 March 1987

Article Reviewed/Updated: 09 November 1994

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article pertains to the interleave of Apple external SCSI hard drives of
all sizes.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

To initilaize a SCSI hard disk drive you want to use on a Macintosh:

1. Always use Apple HD SC Setup.

2. Always initialize from the type of Macintosh the drive will be connected
to. For example, if you wish to connect a Apple HD40 SC to a Macintosh
Plus, initialize that hard disk with a Macintosh Plus.

If you want more than one type of Macintosh to access the SCSI hard disk,
always initialize it from the slowest system for the best average
performance. You must do this because, with Apple HD SC Setup, different
types of Macintosh computers require a SCSI hard disk with a different
interleave.

Computer Interleave relative speed

Macintosh II and later 1:1 fast

Macintosh SE 2:1 medium
Macintosh Plus 3:1 slow

Apple II 3:1 slow

Interleave is the ratio of consecutive sectors a CPU can read from or write
to. This means that a Macintosh II is fast enough to read from or write to
every consecutive sector, a Macintosh SE can only read every other sector,
and the Macintosh Plus is only fast enough to read one in every three
sectors. An Apple II also has an interleave of 3:1. The Apple II can support
a 3:1 interleave because the SCSI card has a 8K RAM buffer enabling it to
buffer data until the CPU is ready for it.

Delays occur when you connect a "slower" Macintosh to a hard disk initialized
on a "faster" Macintosh. For example, a hard disk intialized from a Macintosh
II has more data on every consecutive sector than a Macintosh Plus can
consecutively read, necessitating a full revolution of the platter before the
Macintosh Plus can access the sectors it knows it missed. There's a delay of
the revolution of only one or two sectors when a "fast" Macintosh accesses a
hard disk intialized from a "slower" Macintosh.

For the change in interleave ratio between the Macintosh Plus and the
Macintosh SE, there are three reasons: improved performance, hardware
handshaking, and changes in SCSI firmware. First, the Macintosh SE performs
more quickly, even though it uses the Macintosh Plus' 68000 processor running
at the same speed. The Macintosh SE has a change in hardware design that
allows the video circuitry 1 long word access to the RAM for every 3 made by
the processor, as opposed to the 1 video access for every 1 made by the
processor on previous Macintoshes. Next, hardware handshaking was
implemented, allowing cleaner and faster communication between the Macintosh

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 598 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

SE and the drive. Finally, the SCSI firmware was cleaned up and optimized for
the SE. Previous bugs and patches caused the SCSI driver to not perform as
quickly as it should.

Article Change History:

09 Nov 1994 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1990-94 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL377.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 599 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL378.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Shreve Systems (5/93)

Header: Shreve Systems (5/93)

Article Created: 6 May 1993

Article Reviewed/Updated: 19 July 1993

Shreve Systems
1200 Marshall Street
Shreveport, LA 71101

318-424-9791

800-227-3971

Fax: 318-424-9771

Company Profile:
Specializing in Apple II hardware such as power supplies, logic boards, and
cases.
Copyright 1993, Apple Computer, Inc
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL378.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 600 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL379.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: So What Software

Header: So What Software

Article Created: 18 September 1989

Article Reviewed/Updated: 19 July 1993

So What Software
----------------

10211 Slater Ave.

Suite 102
Fountain Valley, CA 92708

714-963-3392

714-964-4298 Fax

AppleLink: D1462

Company Profile:
Software, specializing in tools for the Apple II familyline.
Copyright 1989-93, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL379.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 601 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL380.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: SoftCard III (CP/M): Moving Files from Apple II CP/M

Header: SoftCard III (CP/M): Moving Files from Apple II CP/M

Application software often uses direct cursor addressing, enabling you to

access specific portions of your display screen. Since a variety of
computers use CP/M software, the program diskette itself, or an accompanying
utility diskette, often contains a menu allowing to you conveniently
configure the software for your system. The item you select from the menu
informs the system to send the appropriate command to your system to achieve
the desired screen effect.

Many CP/M programs for sale work with the Apple II CP/M systems; however,
since the Apple III is relative newcomer to the CP/M world, applications
may have to be formatted to operate with it. To format an Apple II CP/M
program onto an Apple III diskette:

1. Boot with the Apple III "CP/M Master" Diskette.

2. When you see the prompt A>: type "COPY".
3. When the copy program prompts you with a "*": remove the Master
Diskette from you disk drive: insert the Apple II diskette.
4. Place a blank diskette into drive 2.
5. Next type: "B:=A:/S/V".
6. When advised that the operation is complete, and asked if you want
another operation: insert the Apple III CP/M Master Diskette into
drive 1: type "N".
7. When you see the input prompt A>: type "PIP".
8. Upon prompted with a "*": type "B:DRIVER.SOS=A:". (This will transfer
a copy of the driver file to the new diskette).

The resultant copy will be an Apple III system diskette containing all the
Apple II files.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL380.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 602 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL381.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Softcard III: Diskette compatibility with Apple II CP/M

Header: Softcard III: Diskette compatibility with Apple II CP/M

The diskette organization used in the Apple II Softcard CP/M and the
Apple III Softcard CP/M are identical. This means that files generated on
either system is readable by the other. However, the Softcard III CP/M
System File does not work correctly on an Apple II, and visa-versa.

Some programs were designed with specific hardware in mind and may not work
correctly on the Apple III. Several examples are MBASIC, GBASIC, and FORTRAN
supplied by Microsoft.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL381.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 603 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL382.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: SoftSpoken, Inc.

Header: SoftSpoken, Inc.

Article Created: 30 May 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 19 July 1993

SoftSpoken, Inc.
-----------------

P.O. Box 18343

Raleigh, NC 27619

919-870-5694

Fax: 919-870-5696

Company Profile:
Specializing in Crossworks, and an Apple II to IBM PC data exchange utility.
Copyright 1991-93, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL382.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 604 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL383.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Southern California Research Group

Header: Southern California Research Group

Article Created: 26 January 1988

Article Reviewed/Updated: 19 July 1993

Southern California Research Group

----------------------------------

P. O. Box 593
Moorpark, CA 93020

805-529-2082

Company Profile:
Hardware, specializing primarily in Apple II adapters and connectors.
Copyright 1988-93, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL383.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 605 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL384.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Sun Remarketing, Inc. (11/96)

Header: Sun Remarketing, Inc. (11/96)

Article Created: 29 September 1987

Article Reviewed/Updated: 15 November 1996

Sun Remarketing
---------------
P.O. Box 4059
Logan, UT 84323-4059
801-755-3300

800-821-3221 (Sales, Ordering & Product Info)

1-900-SUN-SRVC (Out of warranty technical support)

Fax: 801-755-3360

AppleLink: SUNREM

Internet: WWW URL: http://www.sunrem.com

Company Profile:
Hardware, software, and manuals. Sun Remarketing specializes in the sale,
service, and support of current and obsolete Apple* and Macintosh products.
Sun Remarketing sales and support many third-party software and hardware
solutions for the Apple* and Macintosh products.

*Apple products include Apple ///, Apple II, Apple IIe, and Apple IIc.
Copyright 1990-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3pty

### END OF FILE A2TIL384.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 606 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL385.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Super Serial Card: Accessing it through Machine Language

Header: Super Serial Card: Accessing it through Machine Language

Although Apple's Super Serial Card can be used from Applesoft Basic, it is
often desirable to use machine language to increase the speed with which
characters are sent and received. The assembler program below illustrates a
method of communicating with another Apple computer through the Super Serial
Card. You may use this routine as a starting point for your own program.

On page 291 of the Apple IIe Reference manual and on pages 261 to 265 of the
Apple IIc Reference Manual there are listsof the registers and entry points
used by routines resident in the Super Serial Card. The equates in the program
below use these locations, as well as input/output hooks found in the Apple II
family of computers.

The initialization routine (INIT) stores the address of the Super Serial
Card's
initialization routine in CSW (the Apple II monitor character output hook).
This activates the card for output by jumping to COUT. Following this, DOS or
Prodos hooks are reinstalled.

The OUTput routine checks the 6551 status port bit 4. If this is equal to
zero,
the previous character has not yet been sent, so we must check the status byte
again until that register is clear. When the value in bit 4 becomes one, the
6551 is ready to send another character. To accomplish this, simply store the
data in the transmit register (TDREG) of the chip.

Bit 3 of the status port is checked by the INput routine. If this bit is zero,
the program either loops continuously or returns to the calling program,
depending on the state of the return flag found in location $FF. If bit 3 is
one, a character is waiting at the input port, and the character is then read
from the read register (RDREG) of the 6551.

The DEMO portion of this program calls the INIT routine, and sends each letter
of the alphabet to the connected device. After each character is sent, the
program waits to see if a response has been received from the external device.
If a character is waiting, the program ends.

1 * Super Serial Card - Demo of accessing it through machine language

10
**************************************************************************
11 ORG $2000
12 COUT EQU $FDED ; CHARACTER OUT IN MONITOR
13 CSWL EQU $36 ; OUTPUT HOOK
14 CSWH EQU $37
15 WAIT EQU $FCA8 ; MONITOR ROUTINE TO WAIT
16 ;
17 ; SSC EQUATES
18 ;
19 DIPSW1 EQU $C081 ; +N0 DIPSWITCH BLOCK 1
20 DIPSW2 EQU $C082 ; +N0 DIPSWITCH BLOCK 2
21 TDREG EQU $C088 ; +N0 6551 DATA REGISTER
22 RDREG EQU $C088 ; +N0 6551 DATA REGISTER
23 STATUS EQU $C089 ; +N0 6551 STATUS REGISTER
24 RESET EQU $C089 ; +N0 6551 SOFTWARE RESET
25 COMMAND EQU $C08A ; +N0 6551 COMMAND REG
26 CONTROL EQU $C08B ; +N0 6551 CONTROL REG
27 ;
28 START JMP DEMO ; SKIP AROUND ALL THE SUBROUTINES
29 ;

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 607 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

30 ; USE THE SSC FIRMWARE TO INITIALIZE THE 6551.

31 ;
32 INIT LDA CSWL ; STORE THE CURRENT CSW
33 PHA ; SO THAT WE DO NOT DISCONNECT
34 LDA CSWH ; DOS OR PRODOS
35 PHA
36 LDA #$00 ; STORE $Cs00 IN CSW
37 STA CSWL
38 STX CSWH ; THIS ALREADY CONTAINS $Cs
39 LDA #$00
40 JSR COUT ; JUMP TO COUT TO INIT THE CARD
41 PLA
42 STA CSWH ; RESTORE THE DOS OR PRODOS
43 PLA ; HOOKS AND THEN RETURN
44 STA CSWL
45 RTS
46 ;
47 ; OUTPUT A CHARACTER TO 6551
48 ;
49 OUT PHA ; STORE DATA ON STACK
50 OLP LDA STATUS,Y ; CHECK BIT 4 OF STATUS BYTE
51 AND #$10 ; TO SEE IF IT'S OK TO SEND
52 BEQ OLP ; CHARACTER WAITING TO GO OUT
53 PLA ; GET DATA BACK FROM STACK
54 STA TDREG,Y ; AND OUTPUT THE CHARACTER
55 RTS
56 ;
57 ; INPUT A CHARACTER FROM 6551
58 ;
59 IN LDA STATUS,Y
60 AND #$08 ; BIT 3 OF STATUS
61 BEQ INTST ; NO CHAR WAITING TO BE RECEIVED
62 LDA RDREG,Y ; GET THE INPUT FROM 6551
63 RTS
64 INTST LDA $FF ; CHECK RETURN FLAG
65 BNE IN ; IF NOT 0 THEN WAIT FOR INPUT
66 RTS ; IF ZERO, DON'T WAIT
67 ;
68 ; BEGIN THE DEMO PROGRAM
69 ;
70 DEMO LDY #$10 ; Y CONTAINS $s0 - DEMO USES SLOT 1
71 LDX #$C1 ; LOAD X WITH $Cs
72 JSR INIT ; INIT THE CARD
73 LDA #$FF ; SET RETURN FLAG FOR INPUT
74 STA $FF ; FF MEANS WAIT FOR CHAR
75 JSR IN ; INPUT A CHARACTER - SEE ABOVE
76 OLOOP LDX #$41 ; OUTPUT THE ASCII CODES
77 OLP1 TXA ; FROM A-Z TO THE SSC. IT WILL STOP
78 JSR OUT ; WHEN THE SSC RECEIVES A CHAR.
79 LDA #$80 ; DELAY BETWEEN CHARACTERS
80 JSR WAIT ; TO ALLOW TIME FOR INPUT.
81 LDA #$00
82 STA $FF ; RETURN IF NO CHARS WAITING
83 JSR IN ; CHECK FOR A CHARACTER
84 BNE ALLDONE ; THEY SENT SOMETHING - WE END
85 INX
86 CPX #$5B ; THE LETTER 'Z'
87 BNE OLP1
88 LDA #$0D
89 JSR OUT ; SEND A CARRIAGE RETURN
90 JMP OLOOP ; BEGIN THE ALPHABET AGAIN
91 ALLDONE RTS ; END ROUTINE
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 608 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

### END OF FILE A2TIL385.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 609 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL386.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Super Serial Card: Description (12/96)

Header: Super Serial Card: Description (12/96)

Article Created: 15 July 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 16 December 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes the Super Serial Interface Card.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

Overview
--------
The Apple II Super Serial Card provides a configurable RS 232 interface,
allowing an Apple II, Apple II Plus, or Apple IIe computer to exchange data
with other computers, modems, printers, terminals, and accessories employing
a bidirectional RS-232-C interface in serial format (one bit at a time).

The Super Serial Card features an on-board switch allowing the operation of a
printer, modem, or other serial device. This switch also eliminates the need
for special connection cables such as modem eliminators.

System Requirements
-------------------
To use the Apple II Super Serial Card, you need:
* an Apple II, Apple II Plus, or Apple IIe computer system with an available
expansion slot; and
* a printer, modem, or other serial device.

Technical Specifications
------------------------
* Single Level: EIA RS-232-C
* Connector Type: DB-25 socket
* On-Board ROM: 2K x 8 bit (2316 or equivalent)
* ACIA: S6551 or equivalent
* Baud Rate Selection: via on-board DIP switches (default) or via software
commands
* Data word format: 1 start bit, 1 or 2 stop bits, 7 or 8 data bits; odd,
even, or no parity
* Available baud rates: 50, 79, 110, 134.6, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800,
2400, 3400, 9600, 19200
* RS-232-C Signals Supported: RTS (Request to Send), CTS (Clear to Send),
DTR (Data Terminal Ready), DSR (Data Set Ready), DCD (Data Carrier Detect),
RXD (Receive Data), TXD (Transmit Data), (SG) Signal Ground.

Internal Cable Pinout

---------------------
10 Pin 25 Pin
Connector Connector Signal Name

pin 1 pin 1 Frame Ground

pin 2 pin 2 Transmit Data
pin 3 pin 3 Receive Data
pin 4 pin 4 Request to Send (RTS)
pin 5 pin 5 Clear to Send (CTS)
pin 6 pin 6 Data Set Ready (DSR)
pin 7 pin 19 Secondary CTS

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 610 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

pin 8 pin 7 Signal Ground

pin 9 pin 20 Data Terminal Ready
pin 10 pin 8 Data Carrier Detect

Pin Explanation
---------------
FRAME GROUND: Provides electrical connection to give both devices connected a
common frame ground. Usually tied to Signal Ground inside the cabinet of one
of the devices.

TRANSMIT DATA: This pin conveys serial data sent from the Super Serial card.
This is one of the pins that may need to be crossed over if the peripheral
device is a DTE. The MODEM/TERM plug can perform this crossover.

RECEIVE DATA: This pin receives serial data sent from the device the Super
Serial card connects the computer to. This is one of the pins that may need
to be crossed over if the peripheral device is a DTE. The MODEM/TERM plug can
perform this crossover.

REQUEST TO SEND (RTS): This signal is used by the computer to ask the
peripheral device if it is ready to receive computer data. Often a device
such as a printer will ignore this signal (will not have a pin connected to
it) because the signals primary use is to control half duplex modems.

CLEAR TO SEND (CTS): This pin receives the peripheral's ready to receive data
response to an RTS from the computer. Again this pin is used most often by
modems.

DATA SET READY (DSR): This pin receives the signal generated by the
peripheral that indicates that the peripheral is turned on and ready to
communicate. This is one of the pins that may need to be crossed over if the
peripheral device is a DTE. The MODEM/TERM plug can perform this crossover.

SECONDARY CTS: Some modems can transmit and receive on two channels (that is
two separate communications on the same line). The Secondary CTS pin would be
used to receive the peripheral's ready to receive data response to an RTS for
the second channel from the computer.

SIGNAL GROUND: When this pin is connected between two RS232 devices it
provides a common electrical level that the devices can reference the RS232
signals to.

DATA TERMINAL READY: This pin becomes active when the computer and SSC are
ready to go on line. This is one of the pins that may need to be crossed over
if the peripheral device is a DTE. The MODEM/TERM plug can perform this
crossover. Also this pin can be used for flow control protocol handshaking.

DATA CARRIER DETECT: This pin receives the signal generated by a modem when
it senses a carrier on the telephone line. The SSC would then respond by
telling the computer that data was going to be coming from the modem.

Jumper Block
------------
The jumper block has two positions, Terminal and Modem. The jumper block
eliminates the need for special connection cables such as modem eliminators.

Switches
--------
The fourteen switches, split into two banks named SW1 and SW2, are diagonally
opposite the slot contacts. Holding the card so that the switches are at the
top left, the two banks are arranged like this:

SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 611 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

ON ON
OFF OFF

The markings SW1, SW2, ON, and OFF may not appear exactly as shown. If the
lever on a switch is pointing towards the top of the card, the switch's
contact is closed and the switch is ON. Use a sharp but soft point, like a
pencil point, to move the levers.

Switch 1
1 2 3 4
Baud Rate:
50 On On On Off
75 On On Off On
110 On On Off Off
135 On Off On On
150 On Off On Off
300 On Off Off On
600 On Off Off Off
1200 Off On On On
1800 Off On On Off
2400 Off On Off On
3600 Off On Off Off
4800 Off Off On On
7200 Off Off On Off
9600 Off Off Off On
19200 Off Off Off Off

Switch 2
5 6
Auto linefeed after CR:
Enabled On
Disabled Off
Passage of interrupts from ACIA to CPU:
Enabled On
Disabled Off

Mode Switches
-------------
The setting of the Mode switches (SW1 5 and 6) determines the function of the
remaining switches in one of two modes, Communications mode or Printer Mode.
Printer Mode includes two modes for printer PROM emulation.

Switch 1
5 6
Mode:
Communications On On
Printer Off On
SIC P8 Emulation On Off
SIC P8A Emulation Off Off

Communications Mode
-------------------
The remaining switches have the following functions:

Switches SW1-7 and SW2-7

SW1 7 SW2 7
Protocol:
RS-232C On Off

Switches SW2-1, SW2-2, SW2-3, SW2-4

SW2 1 2 3 4
Data format:

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 612 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8 data/1 stop On On
7 data/1 stop On Off
8 data/2 stop Off On
7 data/2 stop Off Off

Parity:
None N/A On
Odd On Off
Even Off Off

Printer and Printer PROM Emulation Mode

---------------------------------------
The remaining switches have the following functions:

Switches SW1-7 and SW2-7

SW1 7 SW2 7
Protocol:
Normal Clear to Send (RS-232C) On Off
Secondary Clear to Send Off On

Switches SW2-1, SW2-2, SW2-3, SW2-4

SW2 1 2 3 4
Data format:
8 data/1 stop On
8 data/2 stop Off
Delay after carriage return:
32 milliseconds On
None Off
Line Width (Printer mode has no parity):
40 On On
72 On Off
80 On Off
132 Off Off

Important Information
---------------------
There is a problem with using the Super Serial Card (SSC) terminal firmware
at 1200 baud on an unenhanced IIe. The IIe 80-column card can't keep up with
the data stream and eventually loses characters. Avoid this problem with
faster, more sophisticated programs that can handle interrupts, such as
Access II or third party terminal software. The proper terminal software also
will allow use of the Extended Text Card with a modem at 1200 baud.

Article Change History:

16 Dec 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1991-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL386.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 613 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL387.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Super Serial Card: Using with Machine Language (12/96)

Header: Super Serial Card: Using with Machine Language (12/96)

Article Created: 22 September 89

Article Reviewed/Updated: 16 December 1996

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

This article describes assembly language addressing methods for the 6502 and
6551 microprocessors thruogh the Super Serial Card.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The 6502 does a false read to the current page. This is inherent in the 6502
design. A false read occurs during a read to memory. The 6502 will hold the
target address + 1 line open after it accesses the target address. This does
not alter the contents of the address but can affect a memory-mapped I/O
device that is toggled by the address line.

The false read does not affect the Super Serial Card as none of the card's
functions are set when the address line is held open by the false read.
However, for good programming to an I/O device, where false reads could
toggle a function, you should use the indirect indexed-addressing mode with
the address for your indirect accesses in the zero page.

The following example is available in the Tech Info Library and uses the
absolute, indirect-addressing method; it has been modified here as an example
of indirect, indexed-addressing. The program uses zero-page addresses $FA and
$FB, because these are generally unused by both DOS and BASIC. See pages 74
and 75 of the "Apple II Reference Manual" for a map of the zero-page
locations.

Super Serial Card: Accessing It Through Machine Language

--------------------------------------------------------
Although Apple's Super Serial Card can be used from Applesoft BASIC, it is
often desirable to use machine language to increase the speed with which
characters are sent and received. The assembler program below illustrates a
method of communicating with another computer through the Super Serial Card.
You may use this routine as a starting point for your own program.

On page 291 of the "Apple IIe Reference Manual" and on pages 261 to 265 of
the Apple IIc Reference Manual, there are lists of the registers and entry
points used by routines resident in the Super Serial Card. The equates in the
program below use these locations, as well as input/output hooks found in the
Apple II family of computers.

The initialization routine (INIT) stores the address of the Super Serial
Card's initialization routine in CSW (the Apple II monitor character output
hook). This activates the card for output by jumping to COUT. Following this,
DOS or ProDOS hooks are reinstalled.

The OUTput routine checks the 6551 status port bit 4. If this is equal to
zero, the previous character has not yet been sent, so we must check the
status byte again until that register is clear. When the value in bit 4
becomes one, the 6551 is ready to send another character. To do this, store
the data in the transmit register (TDREG) of the chip.

Bit 3 of the status port is checked by the INput routine. If this bit is
zero, the program either loops continuously or returns to the calling
program, depending on the state of the return flag found in location $FF. If
bit 3 is one, a character is waiting at the input port, and the character is

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 614 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

then read from the read register (RDREG) of the 6551.

The DEMO portion of this program calls the INIT routine, and sends each
letter of the alphabet to the connected device. After each character is sent,
the program waits to see if a response has been received from the external
device. If a character is waiting, the program ends.

Assembly Language Source Code Demo

----------------------------------

Here is a demo of accessing the Super Serial Card with Assembly Language.

ORG $2000
COUT EQU $FDED ; CHARACTER OUT IN MONITOR
CSWL EQU $36 ; OUTPUT HOOK
CSWH EQU $37
WAIT EQU $FCA8 ; MONITOR ROUTINE TO WAIT
BASELO EQU $FA ; ZERO PAGE INDEX ADDRESS FOR INDIRECT ADDRESSING
BASEHI EQU $FB ; THE TARGET ADDRESS IS STORED IN FA AND FB
IO EQU $C0 ; IO PAGE HIBYTE ADDRESS THIS GOES IN BASEHI
;
; SSC EQUATES
;

DIPSW1 EQU $81 ; +N0 DIPSWITCH BLOCK 1

DIPSW2 EQU $82 ; +N0 DIPSWITCH BLOCK 2
TDREG EQU $88 ; +N0 6551 DATA REGISTER
RDREG EQU $88 ; +N0 6551 DATA REGISTER
STATUS EQU $89 ; +N0 6551 STATUS REGISTER
RESET EQU $89 ; +N0 6551 SOFTWARE RESET
COMMAND EQU $8A ; +N0 6551 COMMAND REG
CONTROL EQU $8B ; +N0 6551 CONTROL REG
;
START JMP DEMO ; SKIP AROUND ALL THE SUBROUTINES
;
; USE THE SSC FIRMWARE TO INITIALIZE THE 6551.
;
INIT LDA CSWL ; STORE THE CURRENT CSW
PHA ; SO THAT WE DO NOT DISCONNECT
LDA CSWH ; DOS OR ProDOS
PHA
LDA #$00 ; STORE $Cs00 IN CSW
STA CSWL
STX CSWH ; THIS ALREADY CONTAINS $Cs
LDA #$00
JSR COUT ; JUMP TO COUT TO INIT THE CARD
PLA
STA CSWH ; RESTORE THE DOS OR ProDOS
PLA ; HOOKS AND THEN RETURN
STA CSWL
RTS
;
; OUTPUT A CHARACTER TO 6551
;
OUT PHA ; STORE DATA ON STACK
LDA #STATUS ; GET THE STATUS ADDRESS
STA BASELO ; SET UP THE INDIRECT INDEXED ACCESS
OLP LDA (BASELO),Y ; CHECK BIT 4 OF STATUS BYTE
AND #$10 ; TO SEE IF IT'S OK TO SEND
BEQ OLP ; CHARACTER WAITING TO GO OUT
LDA #TDREG ; ADDRESS FOR TRANSMIT
STA BASELO ; SET UP THE INDIRECT INDEXED ACCESS
PLA ; GET DATA BACK FROM STACK
STA (BASELO),Y ; AND OUTPUT THE CHARACTER

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 615 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

RTS
;
; INPUT A CHARACTER FROM 6551
;
IN LDA #STATUS ; GET THE STATUS ADDRESS
STA BASELO ; SET UP THE INDIRECT INDEXED ACCESS
LDA (BASELO),Y ; CHECK STATUS
AND #$08 ; BIT 3 OF STATUS
BEQ INTST ; NO CHAR WAITING TO BE RECEIVED
LDA #RDREG ; GET THE READ ADDRESS
STA BASELO ; SET UP THE INDIRECT INDEXED ACCESS
LDA (BASELO),Y ; GET THE INPUT FROM 6551
RTS
INTST LDA $FF ; CHECK RETURN FLAG
BNE IN ; IF NOT 0 THEN WAIT FOR INPUT

RTS ; IF ZERO, DON'T WAIT

;
; BEGIN THE DEMO PROGRAM
;
DEMO LDY #$10 ; Y CONTAINS $s0 - DEMO USES SLOT 1
LDX #$C1 ; LOAD X WITH $Cs
JSR INIT ; INIT THE CARD
LDA #IO ; HIBYTE ADDRESS C0 FOR IO ACCESS
STA BASEHI ; STORE IT IN ZERO PAGE AS HIBYTE OF ADDRESS
LDA #$FF ; SET RETURN FLAG FOR INPUT
STA $FF ; FF MEANS WAIT FOR CHAR
JSR IN ; INPUT A CHARACTER - SEE ABOVE
OLOOP LDX #$41 ; OUTPUT THE ASCII CODES
OLP1 TXA ; FROM A-Z TO THE SSC. IT WILL STOP
JSR OUT ; WHEN THE SSC RECEIVES A CHAR.
LDA #$80 ; DELAY BETWEEN CHARACTERS
JSR WAIT ; TO ALLOW TIME FOR INPUT.
LDA #$00
STA $FF ; RETURN IF NO CHARS WAITING
JSR IN ; CHECK FOR A CHARACTER
BNE ALLDONE ; THEY SENT SOMETHING - WE END
INX
CPX #$5B ; THE LETTER 'Z'
BNE OLP1
LDA #$0D
JSR OUT ; SEND A CARRIAGE RETURN
JMP OLOOP ; BEGIN THE ALPHABET AGAIN
ALLDONE RTS ; END ROUTINE

Article Change History:

16 Dec 1996 - Reviewed for technical accuracy, revised formatting.
Copyright 1989-96, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL387.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 616 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL388.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: System 7 Pro: Read Me Incorrect About Apple IIe Card SW (10/93)
Header: System 7 Pro: Read Me Incorrect About Apple IIe Card SW (10/93)

Article Created: 20 October 1993

TOPIC -----------------------------------------------------------

The information about how to obtain Apple IIe Card Software in the Read
Me file for System 7 Pro is incorrect. This article explains the best
ways to obtain this software.

DISCUSSION ------------------------------------------------------

The Read Me file that is installed when updating to System 7 Pro reads
as follows:

"APPLE IIe CARD SOFTWARE FOR THE MACINTOSH LC II

To use the Apple IIe Card with System 7 Pro on a Macintosh LC II, you
need version 2.2 of Apple IIe Card Software. You should upgrade to
version 2.2 only if you are using your LC II with System 7 Pro. Apple
IIe Card Software 2.2 may also be used with the original Macintosh LC,
but it is not required.

You can obtain the upgrade package from an authorized Apple Reseller.
In the United States, you can call the Apple Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-776-2333 to request Apple IIe Card Software version 2.2. The
new software is also available on AppleLink (AppleLink path: Apple
Products: Apple II: Apple II Product Information: Apple IIe Card)."

These instructions aren't correct.

Contact an Apple Reseller to purchase the IIe software update, or

download it from AppleLink. You can all the Apple Referral Center at
1-800-538-9696 to locate a reseller near you to purchase Apple part
M1222LL/C, Apple IIe card Software Update.

Apple IIe Card (2.2.1) software is available for customers on AppleLink

using the following path:

Software Sampler
Apple SW Updates
Macintosh
Peripheral Software
Apple IIe Card (2.2.1)
Copyright 1993, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: SUPT

### END OF FILE A2TIL388.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 617 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL389.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Temporal Acuity Products, Inc.

Header: Temporal Acuity Products, Inc.

Article Created: 3 December 1988

Article Change History

----------------------
11/30/92 - UPDATED
* To reflect changes in company information.

Temporal Acuity Products, Inc., software, music education: harmonic, melodic,

rythmic dictation, and ear-training software for the Apple II product line.

Temporal Acuity Products, Inc.

Building 1
Suite 200
300 120th Ave. N.E.
Bellevue, WA 98005
206-462-1007
800-426-2673
Fax: 206-462-1057
AppleLink: D1089
Copyright 1988, 1991, 1992, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL389.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 618 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL390.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: The Apple II Cassette Interface (2 of 2)

Header: The Apple II Cassette Interface (2 of 2)

For reading data, the cassette recorder uses a more complicated input circuit
consisting of a 741 operational amplifier configured as a zero crossing
detector. Zero crossing detection means that whenever the voltage at the input
jack goes from positive to negative (or negative to positive) the output of
the amplifier switches from a 1 to a 0 (or 0 to 1). The detector is accessed
by any read to address $C060. The sign bit (most significant bit) of the byte
read reflects the detector status. The read routines continually EXCLUSIVE
ORs this bit with the value most recently read to detect a change in state.
The amount of time required to change state indicates the incoming frequency
which then is used to determine if a one or a zero has been received. After
detecting the first zero crossing at the start of the header, the read routine
uses HEADR to generate a 3.5 delay, and then the read routine waits for the
sync bit. After HEADR generates the synchronous bit, the read routine reads
the data and puts it in the specified memory range.

In using the cassette interface to either read or write, all you need do is
specify an address range and execute the read or write subroutine. The
address range is stored in four bytes, two for the first address to be saved
and two for the last to be saved. In both cases the least significant byte is
first.

Commanding the cassette interface:

1. from the monitor:

If the start is $800 and the end is $9FF, then
800.9FFW will write the data to the cassette and
800.9FFR will retrieve it.

2. from machine language:

Again, if the start is $800 and the end is $9FF then store the address
range,

LDA #$00
STA $3C starting address low
LDA #$08
STA $3D starting address high
LDA #$FF
STA $3E ending address low
LDA #$09
STA $3F ending address high
JSR $FEDC write to block to tape

The JSR $FEDC will write to the cassette; JSR $FEFD will read from the
cassette.

3. from BASIC:
First set up the address range. If S = the start and E = the end then from
integer BASIC,

POKE 60,S MOD 256

POKE 61,S / 256
POKE 62,E MOD 256
POKE 63,E / 256

4. from APPLESOFT,

POKE 60,S - INT(S / 256) * 256

POKE 61,S / 256

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 619 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

POKE 62,E - INT(E / 256) * 256

POKE 63,E / 256

Then, to write out to cassette, use CALL -307; to read in from the
cassette,
use CALL -259.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL390.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 620 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL391.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: The Apple II Cassette Interface (1 of 2)

Header: The Apple II Cassette Interface (1 of 2)

This note is about the cassette interface built into the Apple II and
Apple II+, subroutines. An assumption made here is that the cassette
recorder is in the proper mode, play or record, when the read and write
routines are executed. Note also that the timing is approximate and may
vary from one Apple to another.

A record is a block of binary data. This data may be a BASIC or APPLESOFT

program, a machine language program, or just binary data. Records representing
BASIC or APPLESOFT programs are really two records, the length of the program
and the actual program. A record consists of a header, synchronous bit, the
actual data, and a checksum byte for error detection.

Monitor record format

+--------+-+-----------------------+-+
| HEADER |S| DATA |C|
+--------+-+-----------------------+-+

BASIC program record format

+--------+-+----+-+--------+-+----------------+-+
| HEADER |S| LB |C| HEADER |S| PROGRAM |C|
+--------+-+----+-+--------+-+----------------+-+

Key: S = SYNC bit

C = CHECKSUM byte
LB = BASIC program length

The header consists of 10 seconds of 770 Hz tone, (1 cycle equals 1300

microseconds). This gives enough time for the cassette motor to attain speed
and the plastic tape leader to go by. A subroutine called HEADR generates a
shortened header between the BASIC length bytes and the BASIC program itself.
The length of the header tone is controlled by the value of the accumulator on
entry to the subroutine. This can vary from 0.2 seconds to 40 seconds. On
entry the X register should be 0 and the carry flag should be set. HEADR also
generates a synchronous bit at the end of the tone. HEADR resides at
hexadecimal address $FCC9, or decimal address -882.

The last cycle of header tone and SYNC bit

---+ +-------------+ +-----+

| | | | |
+-------------+ +----+ |

| 1300 microseconds | 200| 250 |

header tone | synchronous bit |

The synchronous bit, generated by HEADR, is one half cycle of 2500 Hz, (200
microseconds) and one half cycle of 2000 Hz, (250 microseconds). It is used to
signal the end of the header tone and the start of the data.

The data is recorded on the tape with a low starting address and a high ending
address. Each byte of data is shifted out most significant bit first, least
significant bit last. A zero bit is made up of one cycle of 2 kHz, (250
microseconds per half cycle) and a one bit is one cycle of 1 kHz, (500
microseconds per half cycle). This works out to 2000 baud for zeros only and
1000 baud for ones, or an average of 1500 baud.

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 621 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

A zero bit and a one bit

+-----+ +----------+ +
| | | | |
+ +-----+ +----------+

| 500 usec | 1000 usec |

The checksum byte is written on the tape at the end of the data block. All
during reading or writing each data byte is EXCLUSIVE OR-ed with the checksum
byte. If the checksum computed during a read agrees with the checksum that was
written out, then the data is probably good. This method will detect an odd
number of errors for any of the eight bits of the byte.

In writing data, the cassette output uses quite simple circuitry, a flip-flop
connected through a voltage divider to the jack on the back panel of the
Apple. Any time the address $C020 is accessed this flip-flop changes state.
Accessing the flip-flop once every 500 microseconds generates a 1000 Hz
tone.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL391.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 622 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL392.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: The ByteWorks, Inc.

Header: The ByteWorks, Inc.

Article Created: 11/06/92

Article Reviewed: 07/06/93
Article Updated:

The ByteWorks Inc.

--------------------

4700 Irving Blvd., NW, Suite 207

Albuquerque, NM 87114

(505) 898-8183

AppleLink: X0108

Company Profile:
Software, specializing in development tools for Apple II computers.
Copyright 1992-93, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL392.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 623 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL393.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Thirdware Computer Products

Header: Thirdware Computer Products

Article Created: 23 April 1991

Article Last Reviewed: 13 April 1992
Article Last Updated:

Thirdware Computer Products, hardware/software, specializing in Apple II

graphics utility and printer interface products.

Thirdware Computer Products

3300 Corporate Ave., Building 116
Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33331
305-389-9009
800-446-5987
Fax: 305-389-9066
Copyright 1991, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL393.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 624 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL394.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: ThunderWare
Header: ThunderWare

Article Created: 2 June 1987

Article Reviewed/Updated: 25 July 1994

ThunderWare, software and hardware, specializing in scanners and clock

cards for Apple II and Macintosh.

ThunderWare
21 Orinda Way
Orinda, CA 94563
510-254-6581
800-628-0693 (Orders only)
Fax: 510-254-3047
AppleLink: D0079

Article Change History:

25 Jul 1994 - Updated order phone number.

Support Information Services

Copyright 1989-94 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL394.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 625 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL395.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Tulin Technology

Header: Tulin Technology

Article Created: 9 August 1991

Article Reviewed/Updated: 20 July 1993

Tulin Technology
-----------------

2156H O'Toole Avenue

San Jose, CA 95131

408-432-9025
408-432-9057

Fax: 408-943-0782

Company Profile:
Hardware and software, specializing in storage subsystems for the Macintosh
and Apple II computers.
Copyright 1991-93, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: 3PTY

### END OF FILE A2TIL395.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 626 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL396.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: UniDisk: Specifications (Discontinued)

Header: UniDisk: Specifications (Discontinued)

This article last reviewed: 9 July 1985

I. Technical Specifications

1. Recording Media

a. Disk diameter: 5.25 inches

b. Recording surfaces: 1
c. Tracks per surface: 35

2. Capacities

a. Formatted data capacity: 140 kilobytes, 16 sectors

1. ProDOS: 137 KB
2. Pascal: 137 KB
3. DOS 3.3: 124 KB

3. Characteristics

a. Seek/settle time (track to track): 30 milliseconds maximum

b. Drive-motor start time: 0.5 seconds maximum
c. Mechanism same as drive for Duodisk, IIc drive, and Disk IIc

4. Power Consumption

a. +12 VDC with a tolerance of 0.6 V (plus or minus)

1. Maximum ripple 120mV peak to peak
2. 0.8 A typical
3. 1.6 A maximum
b. -12 VDC with a tolerance of 0.6 V (plus or minus)
1. Maximum ripple 120mV peak to peak
2. 0.01 A typical
3. 0.02 A maximum
c. +5 VDC with a tolerance of 0.25 V (plus or minus)
1. Maximum ripple 120mV peak to peak
2. 0.2 A typical
3. 0.4 A maximum

5. Head positioning: Adjusted to a tolerance of 0.002 inches (plus or

minus) maximum deviation from ideal on track

6. Environmental Characteristics

a. Operating temperature:
1. 50 to 115 degrees Fahrenheit
2. 10 to 46 degrees Celsius
b. Operating humidity: 20% to 80% (noncondensing)
c. Maximum wet bulb:
1. 85 degrees Fahrenheit
2. 29.4 degrees Celsius

7. Drive Dimensions

inches millimeters
a. Length 8.50 216.0
b. Width 6.37 162.0
c. Height 3.13 79.6

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 627 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

pounds kilograms
d. Weight 4.62 2.1

8. Connection

For each controller card connected to a Unidisk, a second Unidisk

drive can be "daisy chained" or connected to the back of the
first.

II. System Configuration

1. Controller Card and

a. Apple II
b. Apple II Plus
c. Apple IIe
d. Apple IIGS

III. Package

1. Order number:
a. A9M0104: Unidisk drive with controller card
b. A9M0105: Unidisk drive
Copyright 1988 Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: SPECSHT

### END OF FILE A2TIL396.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 628 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL397.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: UPIC: Interfacing the Epson MX-80 Printer

Header: UPIC: Interfacing the Epson MX-80 Printer

* Table 2-2, which was to appear on page 10 of the Universal Parallel

Interface Card manual, was left out. Refer to the identical
table 4-2 on page 19.

* The Epson printer does not work properly with an Apple II parallel
interface cable. Wire the cable as specified in table 2-1 on page 8.

* The UPIC switch must be set to Auto.

* The SOS driver configuration block must be set to the values in table 4-2
on page 19 for the Epson MX-80.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL397.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 629 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL398.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: UPIC: Interfacing the OKIDATA 83A printer

Header: UPIC: Interfacing the OKIDATA 83A printer

To connect an Okidata 83A printer to an Apple III Universal Parallel Inteface

Card using an Apple II parallel cable, make the following adjustments:

DCB : 00 00 40 00 5A

Printer : All switches off

Jumper set to B
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL398.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 630 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL399.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: US Apple SW Updates Available Online (03/97)

Header: US Apple SW Updates Available Online (03/97)

Article Created: 19 September 1994

Article Reviewed/Updated: 05 March 1997

TOPIC --------------------------------------------------------------

This document serves as an index to the Domestic Apple Software Updates areas
located on, AppleLink, America Online and the Internet. The first part of
this article: Article Change History, lists the most recent changes to the
Software Updates. The second part is an alphabetical list of the software
updates, along with the current location.

Please search the Apple Tech Info Library using the string "Apple Software
Updates" for a current list of online services to which Apple Software
Updates are posted. (You can also use the special keyword: kol to search for
this information and other on line related information in the Apple Tech Info
Library.)

DISCUSSION ----------------------------------------------------------

- Article Change History:

3-Mar-97 - Add QTEASY16.EXE AND QTPLUG16.EXE (Quicktime for Win 3.1)

3-Mar-97 - Add QTEASY32.EXE AND QTPLUG32.EXE (Quicktime for Win 95)
28-Feb-97 - Add Macsbug 6.5.4 Info
28-Feb-97 - Add CD-ROM Software 5.3.2
28-Feb-97 - Add WBOFF.EXE
28-Feb-97 - Add Cyberdog 1.2.1 (3 disks/Net Install) Delete Cyberdog 1.2
25-Feb-97 - Add Fax Cover Pages 1.2.
23-Feb-97 - Add CFM-68k 4.0b1.sea
13-Feb-97 - Add 7.5.5 SCSI Server Update
11-Feb-97 - Add MRJ 1.0 and NCI 1.0b5 (Mac and DOS-Win)
07-Feb-97 - Add PB 1400 PMU Updater 1.0.1
01-Feb-97 - Add QuickTIme Plug-in 1.1

Key to Location Abbreviations:

------------------------------
AIISP - Apple II Supplemental
ARA - Apple Remote Access OPS - Other Printing Software
CTB - Comm Toolbox OSS - Other System Software
D-P - Display-Peripherial OLS - Older System Software
LWS - LaserWriter OT - Open Transport
MP - MessagePad
N-C - Networking-Communications PSU - PowerBook System Update
NCU - Newton Connection Utilities PSW - Printing Software for Windows
NSU - Newton System Updates PTG - Printing
ONC - Other Networking-Communications QTW - QuickTime for Windows
ONU - Other Newton Updates SYS - System
OPB - Other PowerBook Software SPE - Speech

The Alphabetical List of USA Apple Software Updates:

----------------------------------------------------
040 VM Update 1.0 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
32-Bit System Enabler 1.0.3 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
5xxx-6xxx Tester 1.0 - Macintosh/Utilities
630 SCSI Update 1.0 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
6360-64xx-54xx Update 1.0 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 631 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

7.5.5 SCSI Server Update - Macintosh/N-C/Apple Share

8*24 GC Software 7.0.1 - Macintosh/D-P
950 Color Addition 1.0 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
About PlainTalk 1.4.1 - Macintosh/SYS/Speech /PlainTalk 1.4.1
Adobe Acrobat Reader 2.1 - Macintosh/Utilities
ADSP 1.5.1 - Macintosh/N-C/Comm Toolbox
AMK Spinning Cursor Bug Fix - Macintosh/Utilities
APD 1.1.3 Update - Macintosh/Utilities
Apple CD-ROM 5.0.4 - Macintosh/D-P
Apple Color Printer 1.0 - Macintosh/PTG/Other Printing
Apple Color SW Pro CMM 1.0 - Macintosh/PTG/Other Printing
Apple DocViewer 1.1.1 - Macintosh/Utilities
Apple Event Manager 1.0.3 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
Apple Guide Authoring Kit Offer - Macintosh/Utilities
Apple HD SC Setup 7.3.5 - Macintosh/Utilities
Apple II SCSI Utilities - Apple II/Apple II Supplemental
Apple II Startup Disk 2.2 - Macintosh/N-C/AppleShare
Apple II System Disk 3.2 - Apple II/Apple II Supplemental
Apple II Video Overlay Card - Apple II/Apple II Supplemental
Apple IIGS CD Setup 5.1 - Apple II/Apple II Supplemental
Apple IIGS System 6.0.1 - Apple II/Apple IIGS System 6.0.1
Apple Internet Router 3.0.1 Patch - Macintosh/N-C/Network Software Installer
Apple LAN Utility 1.0b4 - Macintosh/Unsupported
Apple Memory Guide 1.3 - Macintosh/Utilities
Apple Menu Options 1.02 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
Apple Modem Tool 1.5.3 - Macintosh/N-C/Comm Toolbox
Apple Printer Utility 2.1.1 - Macintosh/PTG/LaserWriter
Apple Remote Access 2.0.1 Info - Macintosh/N-C/ARA
Apple Spec 11-96 - Macintosh/Utilities
Apple Spec App - Macintosh/Utilities
Apple System Profiler 1.0.1 - Macintosh/Utilities
ApplePhone 1.0.1 - Macintosh/Unsupported
AppleScan 1.0.2 - Macintosh/D-P
AppleSearch 1.0.1 Patch - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
AppleSearch 1.5.1 Patch - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
AppleShare 3.0.3 Patch - Macintosh/N-C/AppleShare
AppleShare 4.2.1 to 4.2.2 - Macintosh/Updater Net-Comm/AppleShare
AppleShare 4.2 Upgrade Info - Macintosh/N-C/AppleShare
AppleShare Setup 1.0.1 - Macintosh/Utilities
AppleShare Tune-Up 4.0.1 - Macintosh/N-C/AppleShare
AppleTalk ADSP Tool 1.0 - Macintosh/N-C/Comm Toolbox
AppleTalk Image Writer 7.0.1 - Macintosh/PTG/Other Printing
AppleVision Fix 1.1 - Macintosh/D-P
AppleVision Fix 1.1 - Macintosh/SYS/System 7.5 Update 2.0
AppleVision Fix 1.1 Info - Macintosh/SYS/Older SYS/For System 7.5.2 and 7.5.3
AppleVision Software 1.0.2 - Macintosh/D-P
ARA 1.0 Client Enabler - Macintosh/N-C/ARA/Other ARA Software
ARA 1.0 Original Scripts - Macintosh/N-C/ARA/ARA 1.0 Original Scripts
ARA 1.0 User Scripts - Macintosh/N-C/ARA/ARA 1.0 User Scripts
ARA 2.0 Original Scripts - Macintosh/N-C/ARA/ARA 2.0 Original Scripts
ARA 2.0 User Scripts - Macintosh/N-C/ARA/ARA 2.0 User Scripts
ARA Client 2.1 Updater - Macintosh/N-C/ARA/ARA Updates
ARA MP Server 2.1 Patches - Macintosh/N-C/ARA/ARA Updates
ARA PS 2.1 Updater - Macintosh/N-C/ARA/ARA Updates
AS Custom Settings 1.0 - Macintosh/Unsupported
ASFU Fixer 1.0.1 - Macintosh/PTG/Other Printing
Assistant Toolbox 1.0.1d1 - Macintosh/Unsupported
At Ease 2.0.3 Update - Macintosh/SYS/At Ease
At Ease 4.0.1 Updater - Macintosh/SYS/At Ease
At Ease Update 1.0 - Macintosh/SYS/At Ease
At Ease WG 3.0.3 Updater - Macintosh/SYS/At Ease
At Ease 3 CDROM Prefs Patch - Macintosh/SYS/At Ease
At Ease-IDE Utility Disk 1.0 - Macintosh/SYS/At Ease
Audio Volume 1.1 Installer - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
AudioVision Installer 1.0.2 - Macintosh/D-P
AV Serial Extension 1.0 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 632 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Avid Cinema 1.1 Update Macintosh - D-P

AWS 95 Tune-Up 1.0 - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
AWS 95 Tune-Up 2.0 - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
Backgrounder 1.3 - Macintosh/PTG/Other Printing
Backlight Control 1.0 - Macintosh/Utilities
Basic Color Monitor (1.0) - Macintosh/D-P
Basic Connectivity Set 1.1.1 - Macintosh/N-C/Comm Toolbox
Battery Tools 2.0 - Macintosh/PowerBook/Other PB SW
Cache Switch 7.0.1 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
CD-ROM Software 5.1.7 - Macintosh/D-P
CD-ROM Software 5.3.2 - Macintosh/D-P
CFM-68k 4.0b1 - Macintosh/Unsupported
Chinese Lang. Kit Updater - Macintosh/SYS/Language Kits
Chooser 7.3 - Macintosh/PTG/Other Printing
CISMAIL.EXE - Newton/For DOS-Windows/ONU
CIS Mail 2.0 v.1.0.2 - Newton/For MacOS/ONU
Color Classic Update 1.0 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
Color Laser Writer 8.3.2 - Macintosh/PTG/LaserWriter
Color SW Pro 1.5.2 - Macintosh/PTG/Other Printing
Color SW Pro GX 1.0 - Macintosh/SYS/QuickDraw GX
Color SW Pro GX `.0 - Macintosh/PTG/OPS
Color SW 1500 2.2.1 (3.sea disks & NetInst.sea) - Macintosh/PTG/OPS
Color SW 2500 2.2.1 (4.sea disks & NetInst.sea) - Macintosh/PTG/OPS
Colorsync 2.0 Plug-ins - Macintosh/Utilities
ColorSync 2.1.1 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
Compatibility Checker 2.0 - Macintosh/SYS/Older SYS/For System 7.1.x
Cyberdog 1.2.1 - Macintosh/SYS/Net-Comm/Cyberdog
CPU Energy Saver 1.0.6 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
DART 1.5.2 - Macintosh/Utilities
Desktop Printing 2.0.1 - Macintosh/PTG/Other Printing
Direct Dialup 1.1.1 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
Direct Dialup Mail 1.1.2 - Macintosh/SYS/PowerTalk
Disk Copy 4.2 - Macintosh/Utilities
Disk First Aid 7.2.2 - Macintosh/Utilities
Disk Image Mounter 1.0.1 - Macintosh/Utilities
Display Card 24AC 1.2 - Macintosh/D-P
Display Software 2.0.2 - Macintosh/D-P
Document Converter 1.0.4 - Macintosh/Utilities
DOS Compatibility 1.5 - DOS-Windows/DOS and PC Compatibility SW
Drive Firmware Update 1.2 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
Drive Setup 1.0.5 - Macintosh/Utilities
Drive Setup 1.2 - Macintosh/Utilities
Duo Battery Patch 1.0 - Macintosh/PowerBook/Other PB SW
EM Sound Update 1.0 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
English Speech Recognition - Macintosh/SYS/Speech /PlainTalk 1.4.1
English Text-to-Speech - Macintosh/SYS/Speech /PlainTalk 1.4.1
Ethernet Built-In 1.0.2 - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
Express Modem 1.5.5 - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
Finder Scripting Ext 1.2 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
Font Extension 3 1.0.4 - Macintosh/SYS/Language Kits
Fontsize Patch 1.1 - Macintosh/SYS/Language Kits
Geoport-EM 3.1.1 Update/Macintosh/N-C/Apple Telecom
GeoPort/Express Modem 3.0 Updater/Macintosh/N-C/Apple Telecom
GlobalFax 2.5.2P Update - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
GrayShare Update 1.0 - Macintosh/PTG/Other Printing
Graphics Accelerator 1.0.7 - Macintosh/Unsupported
GX 1.1.3 Net Install - Macintosh/SYS/QuickDraw GX
HC 2.3 Color Stack Repair.sea - Macintosh/Utilities
HC 2.3.5 Stacks.sea - Macintosh/Utilities
HC 2.3.5 Update Installer - Macintosh/Utilities
HC 2.3.5 Updater - Macintosh/Utilities
HCIIGS 1.1 - Apple II/HyperCard IIGS 1.1
HideEworld - Newton/For MacOS/ONU
HyperCard Player 2.3.5 - Macintosh/Utilities
HyperMover.IIGS - Apple II/HyperCard IIGS
HyperMover.Mac - Apple II/HyperCard IIGS

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 633 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

HyperScan 2.0.1 - Macintosh/D-P

Ignore Dialtone 1.0.fc1 - Macintosh/Unsupported
ImageWriter 7.0.1 - Macintosh/PTG/Other Printing
IMF & DT Disk Images - Macintosh/SYS/System Enablers
Intelligent Battery Update 1.0.3 - Macintosh/PowerBook/Other PB SW
Internal HD Format 1.3 - Macintosh/Utilities
Internet Router 3.0.1 Patch - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
Invisible AWS 95 Fix (elap) - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
IP Gateway 1.0.1 Patch - Macintosh/N-C
IP Gateway 1.0.1 Patch - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
ISO 9660 File Access 5.0.2 - Macintosh/D-P
ISO 9660 File Access 5.0.2 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
JLK Info - Macintosh/SYS/Language Kits
LT & LW Bridge 2.1/Macintosh/N-C/Other N-C
Laser Prep 7.1.2 - Macintosh/PTG/LaserWriter
Laser Prep 7.2 - Macintosh/PTG/LaserWriter
LaserWriter 300 1.2 - Macintosh/PTG/LaserWriter
LaserWriter 8.2.3f - Macintosh/PTG/LaserWriter
LaserWriter 3.0.8 for Windows 3.1 (LW Win 3.1 3.0.8) - DOS & Windows/PTG
LaserWriter 4.1 for Windows 95 (LW Win 95 4.2) - DOS & Windows/PTG
LaserWriter 8.4.1 - Macintosh/PTG/LaserWriter
LaserWriter Fax Tuneup 1.0 - Macintosh/PTG/LaserWriter
LaserWriter Printing Software 8.3.2 - Macintosh/PTG/LaserWriter
LaserWriter Printing Software 8.3.4 - Macintosh/PTG/LaserWriter
LaserWriter Pro 810 For Windows - DOS & Windows/PTG
LaserWriter Pro Energy Star Software - Macintosh/PTG/LaserWriter
LaserWriter Select 310 7.0.1 - Macintosh/PTG/LaserWriter
LQ AppleTalk ImageWriter 7.0.1 - Macintosh/PTG/Other Printing
LaserWriter SW for Windows 1.0.2 - DOS & Windows/PTG (older version,.sea file)
Location Manager 1.0 Macintosh/PowerBook/Other PB SW
LW Select 310 For Windows - DOS & Windows/PTG (.sea and .exe file formats)
LWSW102.zip (LW SW for Windows 1.0.2) - DOS & Windows/PTG (older version, zip
file)
Mac Drag and Drop 1.1 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
MacDNS 1.0.3 - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
Macintosh Basics 5.0.3 - Macintosh/Utilities
Macintosh Tutorial - Macintosh/Utilities
Macitnosh Easy Open 1.1.1 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
MacPPP 2.5 - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
MacsBug 6.5.3 - Macintosh/Utilities
Macbug 6.5.4 Info - Macintosh/Utilities
MacTCP 2.0.4 Update - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
MacTCP 2.0.6 Update - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
MacTCP Ping 2.0.2 - Macintosh/Unsupported
MacTCP Token Ring Extension 1.0 - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
MacX25 1.2 Patch - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
MailLink for PowerTalk INET - Macintosh/SYS/PowerTalk
MailLink for PowerTalk MS - Macintosh/SYS/PowerTalk
MailLink for PowerTalk QM - Macintosh/SYS/PowerTalk
MANUAL.PDF - Newton/For DOS-Windows/ONU
MegaPhone 1.0.2 - Macintosh/N-C/Other N-C
MegaPhone 1.0.3P - Macintosh/N-C/ON-C
MegaPhone Manual 2.0- Macintosh/N-C/Other N-C Mercury ATandT GW 1.0C - Macintosh/Unsupported
Mercury Envoy GW 1.0C - Macintosh/Unsupported
Mercury MCI Mail GW 1.0C - Macintosh/Unsupported
Mexican Spanish TTS - Macintosh/SYS/Speech /PlainTalk 1.4.1
MIDI Management Tools 2.0.2 - Macintosh/Unsupported
MODE32 7.5 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
Modem Enabler 1.0 - Newton/For MacOS/Other Newton Updates
MDMENBLR.ZIP- Newton/For DOS-Windows/MP System Updates
Modem Script Generator 1.0a1 - Macintosh/Unsupported
Monitor Energy Saver 1.0 - Macintosh/D-P
Monitor Energy Saver 1.1 - Macintosh/D-P
Mount IDE Drive 1.0 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
Mouse Basics 4.5 - Macintosh/Utilities
MoviePlayer 2.5- Macintosh/Utilities

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 634 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

MovieShop 1.2.1 - Macintosh/Unsupported

MP 100 1.3.415333 - Newton/For MacOS/MP System Updates
MP 110 1.3.45333 - Newton/For MacOS/MP System Updates
MP 120 2.0.516263 - Newton/For MacOS/MP System Updates
MP 120 Tour and Handwriting - Newton/For MacOS/ONU
MP 130 2.0.526205 - Newton/For MacOS/MP System Updates
MP345333.EXE - Newton/For DOS-Windows/MP System Updates
MP415333.EXE - Newton/For DOS-Windows/MP System Updates
MP445333.EXE - Newton/For DOS-Windows/MP System Updates
MP516263.ZIP - Newton/For DOS-Windows/MP System Updates
MP526205.ZIP - Newton/For DOS-Windows/MP System Updates
MRJ 1.0 - Macintosh/System/Java
NBU101EN.ZIP - Newton/For DOS-Windows/ONU
NBU User's Guide - Newton/For MacOS/ONU
NTK 1.5.2b2 Updater - Newton/For MacOS/ONU
Network Access Disk 7.5 - Macintosh/Utilities
Network Asst. 2.0.1 Updater - - Macintosh/SYS/At Ease
Network Launch Fix 1.0.2 - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
Network Software Installer 1.4.4 - Macintosh/N-C/Network Software Installer
Network Software Installer ZM-1.4.5 - Macintosh/N-C/Network Software Installer
Network Software Installer ZM-1.5 - Macintosh/N-C/Network Software Installer
Network Software Installer ZM-1.5.1 - Macintosh/N-C/Network Software Installer
NCU 1.0b5 - Newton/For MacOS/Unsupported
NCU.10B5 - Newton/For DOS-Windows/Unsupported
Newton System Update 1.0.5 - Newton/For MacOS/MP System Updates
Newton System Update 1.1.1 - Newton/For MacOS/MP System Updates
NewtonMail Modules 1.0.1 - Newton/For MacOS/MP System Updates
Ofoto Update 2.0.2 Information - Macintosh/D-P
Open Transport 1.0.8 - Macintosh/N-C/OT
Open Transport Manual - Macintosh/N-C/OT
OpenDoc 1.1 - Macintosh/SYS/OpenDoc
OT 1.1 Manual - Macintosh/SYS/System 7.5 Update 2.0
OT 1.1.1 - Macintosh Macintosh - N-C/Open Transport
OT 1.1.1 Extras - Macintosh - N-C/Open Transport
OT 1.1.2 - Macintosh Macintosh - N-C/Open Transport
OT 1.1.2 Extras - Macintosh - N-C/Open Transport
OT PPP 1.0 Macintosh - N-C/Open Transport
OT PPP 1.0 Manual - Macintosh - N-C/Open Transport
OT PPP 1.0 Net Install - Macintosh - N-C/Open Transport
OPS Info (read me) - Macintosh/PTG/Other Printing
PANTONE for AppleVision - Macintosh/Unsupported
PANTONE for Color LW - Macintosh/PTG/LaserWriter
PANTONE for Color LW (12/600).exe - DOS & Windows - DOS & Windows/PTG
PB 1400 HD Updater 1.0 - Macintosh/PowerBook/PB 1400
PB 1400 PMU Updater 1.0.1 - Macintosh/PowerBook/PB 1400
PB 1400 Floppy Update 1.0.2 - Macintosh/PowerBook/PB 1400
PB 2300c Update 1.0 - Macintosh/PowerBook/Other PB SW
PC Card Software 2.0 - Macintosh/PowerBook/Other PB SW
PC Net Exchange 1.0.1 - Macintosh/N-C/AppleShare
PC Setup 1.0.2 - DOS & Windows/DOS and PC Compatibility SW (For Quadra 610
DOS Compatible)
PC Setup DIMM Patch - Macintosh/Unsupported
PS Fax Cover Page Utilities - Macintosh/Unsupported
Personal LW NTR For Windows - DOS & Windows/PTG
Personal LW SC 7.0.1 - Macintosh/PTG/LaserWriter
PhotoFlash 2.0 to 2.0.1 Updater - Macintosh/D-P
PlainTalk 1.2.1 - Macintosh/SYS/Speech /PlainTalk 1.2.1
PlainTalk 1.3 - Macintosh/SYS/Speech /PlainTalk 1.3.1
PlainTalk User Guide 1.2.1 - Macintosh/SYS/Speech /PlainTalk 1.2.1
PlainTalk User Guide 1.3 - Macintosh/SYS/Speech /PlainTalk 1.3.1
Portable Control Panel 1.3 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
Portable StyleWriter 1.0.1 - Macintosh/PTG/Other Printing
Power Macintosh 7500/8500 Disk Tools - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
Power Macintosh 7500/8500 Install 1 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
Power Macintosh AV Update 1.0-Bootable Disk - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
Power Macintosh AV Update 1.0-Extension Only - Macintosh/SYS/Other System

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 635 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

PowerBook 150 Enabler 1.1. - Macintosh/SYS/System Enablers

PowerBook 500 Series 1.0.2 - Macintosh/SYS/System Enablers
PowerBook 5300 SW Update - Macintosh/PowerBook/PB 5300 SW Update
PowerBook Duo Enabler 1.0 - Macintosh/SYS/System Enablers
PowerBook Duo Enabler 2.0 - Macintosh/SYS/System Enablers
PowerCD Setup 1.0.1 - Macintosh/D-P
PowerPC Enabler 1.0.2 - Macintosh/SYS/System Enablers
PowerPC Enabler 1.1.1 - Macintosh/SYS/System Enablers
PowerPC Interrupt Extension - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
PowerTalk Gateways - Macintosh/SYS/PowerTalk
PowerTalk Guided Tour 1.1 - Macintosh/SYS/PowerTalk
PowerTalk Info - Macintosh/SYS/PowerTalk
PowerTalk Manager 1.5 - Macintosh/SYS/PowerTalk
PowerTalk PPC 1.0.2 - Macintosh/SYS/PowerTalk
PowerTalk PPC 1.0.2 France - Macintosh/SYS/PowerTalk
PowerTalk Solutions Guide - Macintosh/SYS/PowerTalk
PPC Upgrade Enabler 1.0.1 - Macintosh/SYS/System Enablers
Print Monitor 7.0.1 - Macintosh/PTG/LaserWriter
Printer Share 1.1.2 - Macintosh/PTG/Other Printing
PrintMonitor 7.1 - Macintosh/PTG/LaserWriter
PrintMonitor 7.1.2 - Macintosh/PTG/Other Printing
PT 1.1.6 - Macintosh/SYS/PowerTalk
PT 1.2.3 - Macintosh/SYS/PowerTalk
PT Mail Folders 1.5 - Macintosh/Unsupported
PT Mail Reader 1.1 - Macintosh/SYS/PowerTalk
QDGX Spooler Patch 1.0.2 - Macintosh/Unsupported
QTEASY16.EXE- DOS-Windows/QT
QTPLUG16.EXE- DOS-Windows/QT
QTEASY32.EXE- DOS-Windows/QT
QTPLUG32.EXE- DOS-Windows/QT
QD3D1523.ZIP - DOS-Windows/QuickDraw 3D
QuickDraw 3D 1.0.6 - Macintosh/SYS/QuickDraw GX
QuickDraw GX 1.1.3 - Macintosh/SYS/QuickDraw GX
QuickKeys Test Drive - Macintosh/SYS/Speech /PlainTalk 1.3.1
QuickKeys Test Drive 1.2.1 - Macintosh/SYS/Speech /PlainTalk 1.2.1
QuickTake for Power Mac 1.0 Macintosh/Display-Peripheral
QuickTime 2.1 - Macintosh/SYS/QuickTime
QuickTime 2.1.1 for Windows 3.1 - DOS & Windows/QTW
QuickTime 2.1.1 for Windows 95 - DOS & Windows/QTW
QuickTime 2.5 - Macintosh/SYS/QuickTime
QuickTime 2.5 Extras - Macintosh/SYS/QuickTime
QuickTime MPEG 1.0 - Macintosh/SYS/QuickTime
QuickTIme Plug-in 1.1 - Macintosh/SYS/QuickTime
QuickTime TV 1.0.4b19 - Macintosh/Unsupported
Rename Rescue 1.0 - Macintosh/SYS/Older SYS/For System 7.0.x
Scanner 2.0 (system extension) - Macintosh/D-P
Scanner 3.0 (system extension) - Macintosh/D-P
Screen 1.0.6 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
Security Info - Macintosh/N-C/ARA/Other ARA Software
Serial Switch 1.1 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
Serial Tool 1.0.2 - Macintosh/N-C/Comm Toolbox
SerialDMA 2.0.2 - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
Server Remote Control v1.0 - Macintosh/Utilities
Shrinkit1.1 - Apple II/Apple II Supplemental
SimpleSound 1.0 - Macintosh/Utilities
SimpleText 1.3 - Macintosh/Utilities
Slow SCSI Extension - Macintosh/Unsupported
SNA*ps 3270 1.1.2 Patch - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
Sound Manager 3.1 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
SpoolLauncher 2.1.1 - Macintosh/PTG/Other Printing
SpoolMaster 2.1.1a - Macintosh/PTG/Other Printing
SSW 6.0.3 - Macintosh/SYS/Older SYS/For System 6.0.x
SSW 6.0.5 - Macintosh/SYS/Older SYS/For System 6.0.x
SSW 6.0.8 - Macintosh/SYS/Older SYS/For System 6.0.x
SSW 7.0 - Macintosh/SYS/Older SYS/For System 7.0.x
SSW 7.0.1 - Macintosh/SYS/Older SYS/For System 7.0.x

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 636 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

System 7 Tune-up 1.1.1 - Macintosh/SYS/Older SYS/For System 7.0.x

System 7.5 Update 2.0 (14 Disks) - Macintosh/SYS/System 7.5 Update 2.0
Sys75 Upd2.0 Custom Install - Macintosh/Unsupported
System 7.5.3 Rev 2 - Macintosh/SYS/Older SYS/For System 7.5.2 and 7.5.3
System 7.5.5 Update - Macintosh/SYS/System 7.5.5 Update
System Enabler 001 (1.0.1) - Macintosh/SYS/System Enablers
System Enabler 003 (1.1) - Macintosh/SYS/System Enablers
System Enabler 040 (1.1) - Macintosh/SYS/System Enablers
System Enabler 065 (1.2) - Macintosh/SYS/System Enablers
System Enabler 088 (1.2) - Macintosh/SYS/System Enablers
System Enabler 131 (1.0.3) - Macintosh/SYS/System Enablers
System Enabler 401 (1.0.5) - Macintosh/SYS/System Enablers
System Enabler 403 (1.0.2) - Macintosh/SYS/System Enablers
System Enabler 404 (1.0) - Macintosh/SYS/System Enablers
System Enabler 405 (1.0) - Macintosh/SYS/System Enablers
System Enabler 406 1.0 - Macintosh/SYS/System Enablers
System Update 3.0 800K Disk - Macintosh/SYS/Older SYS/For System 7.1.x
System Update 3.0.1 1.4MB Disk -Macintosh/SYS/Older SYS/For System 7.1.x
Telecom 2.3.3 - Macintosh/N-C/Apple Telecom
Telecom 2.3.3 PC Card Modem - Macintosh/N-C/Apple Telecom
Telephone Manager (2.0) - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
Telephone Manager 1.1.1 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
Text Tool (1.0.1) - Macintosh/N-C/Comm Toolbox
TextEditor (1.3a1) - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
The Namer (7.0) - Macintosh/PTG/Other Printing
Thread Manager 2.0.1 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
TOUR_HWI.ZIP - Newton/For DOS-Windows/ONU
Trackpad Climate COntrol - Macintosh/PowerBook/Other PB SW
TTY Tool (1.0.1) - Macintosh/N-C/Comm Toolbox
TTYFont (1.0) - Macintosh/N-C/Comm Toolbox
TV Setup 1.0.2 - Macintosh/SYS/Other System
Update 2.0 Late Breaking Tips - Macintosh/SYS/System 7.5 Update 2.0
Video Monitor 1.0.1 - Macintosh/Unsupported
Video SW Install 1.5.1 - Macintosh/D-P
VideoSync 1.0 - Macintosh/Unsupported
VideoSynchII - Macintosh/Unsupported
VT102 Tool (1.0.2) - Macintosh/N-C/Comm Toolbox
VT102Font (1.0.1) - Macintosh/N-C/Comm Toolbox
Windows NPI 2.0 - Newton/For MacOS/ONU
WBOFF.EXE - Macintosh/Unsupported
WINNP12.EXE - Newton/For DOS-Windows/ONU
WGS Not Supported with System 7.5.5/Macintosh/SYS/System 7.5.5 Update
WorldScript Updater 1.1 - Macintosh/SYS/Language Kits
X11 Server Update For A/UX 3.0 - Macintosh/N-C/ONC
XMODEM Tool (1.1) - Macintosh/N-C/Comm Toolbox
ZM-AppleShare WS 3.6.5 - Macintosh/N-C/AppleShare
ZyXEL Modem Scripts - Macintosh/Unsupported/User Contributed CCLs
Copyright 1994-97, Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords: kol,kinter,ktop20,kalley,ktoptil

### END OF FILE A2TIL399.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 637 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL400.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Using DOS 3.3 with Catalyst 2.1 (1 of 5)

Header: Using DOS 3.3 with Catalyst 2.1 (1 of 5)

CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
OVERVIEW
DOS 3.3 BASIC and its associated Volume Manager (both supplied on your
Catalyst
diskette VERSION 2.1) may be used to access your DOS BASIC programs directly
from your hard disk and have access to "DOS 3.3 volumes" on the hard disk.

The DOS 3.3 Volume Manager is used to create standard ProDOS files which
appear
as DOS 3.3 volumes to DOS 3.3 BASIC. To access these files, they must be
"mounted" and formatted as a floppy diskette within your hard disk. All
accesses to the hard disk on which you mounted the ProDOS file are then made
to
that file.

The Volume Manager also allows you to create a file (named MOUNTS3.3) which
tells DOS 3.3 which slot/drive pair to run the startup program (HELLO) from,
what ProDOS files to mount on selected slot/drive pairs, and whether or not to
reserve room for DOS when you initialize a file or diskette.

When DOS 3.3 is selected from the Catalyst menu, it reads the MOUNTS3.3 file
from the directory specified by the current ProDOS prefix. If no MOUNTS3.3
file is found, the following assumptions are made:

- DOS 3.3 will look for its startup program on slot 6, drive 1. If a HELLO
program is not found there, you will receive an I/O error.
- No hard disk DOS volumes will be mounted for access.
- The INIT command will reserve room for DOS when you initialize a file or
diskette.

The instructions below explain how to install DOS 3.3 BASIC and its associated
Volume Manager on your hard disk through the Catalyst Editor program. The
Volume Manager may then be used to create volumes on the hard disk for use by
DOS 3.3, and to create the MOUNTS3.3 file to enable access to those volumes.

RESTRICTIONS:

1. Catalyst version 2.1 is necessary in order to use the DOS 3.3 option.
2. Copy protected DOS 3.3 programs can not be used.
3. ProDOS files (disk volumes) no larger than 800 sectors (200K) can be
created, thus DOS program applications requiring more than 800 sectors can not
be used.
INSTALLATION
To install DOS 3.3 BASIC and its associated Volume Manager under Catalyst,
perform the following procedure:

1. Select the Catalyst Editor from the Catalyst menu.

2. When the Catalyst Editor main menu comes up, select the "Install program"
option.
3. From the list of Program manufacturers, select the entry for "Apple
Computer, Inc.".
4. Select the entry for "DOS 3.3 BASIC" from the list of Apple programs.
5. You are then prompted to insert the boot diskette of the program to
install in the disk drive. Insert the Catalyst PROGRAM diskette in the disk
drive, and then press the space bar.
6. DOS 3.3 BASIC and its associated Volume Manager (MAKE.MOUNTS) will then
be

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 638 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

copied from your Catalyst PROGRAM diskette to the CATALYST2E subdirectory on

your hard disk. You are then returned to the Catalyst Editor main menu.
7. Enter "E" to Edit the Catalyst menu.
8. Using the up and down arrow keys, position the inverse bar over the
"DOS 3.3 BASIC" entry which now appears on your menu. Type "A" to Add a
program entry.
9. Enter "DOS Volume Manager" for the menu Display name.
10. Enter "CATALYST2E/BASIC." for the Interpreter path.
11. Press RETURN for the Initial prefix.
12. Enter "CATALYST2E/MAKE.MOUNTS" for the Program path.
13. If all the above has been entered correctly, press RETURN when asked "Is
all this correct?". Otherwise, enter "NO" and fix the incorrect entry.
14. Press ESCAPE to return to the Catalyst Editor main menu. Enter "U" to
Update the INTERPS2E file.
15. Enter "Q" to Quit from the Catalyst Editor.

NOTE: Since the ProDOS Prefix for the DOS 3.3 BASIC entry is automatically
set to "CATALYST2E" by the above installation process, DOS will expect its
MOUNTS3.3 file to be in that subdirectory.

NOTE: Apple Computer Inc. is not responsible for the contents of this
article.
Quark Technical Support

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL400.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 639 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL401.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Using DOS 3.3 with Catalyst 2.1 (2 of 5)

Header: Using DOS 3.3 with Catalyst 2.1 (2 of 5)

CHAPTER 2
THE DOS 3.3 VOLUME MANAGER
If you have performed the above installation procedure, you may select the
DOS 3.3 Volume Manager program directly from your Catalyst menu.
Alternatively, you may select ProDOS BASIC and execute the program named
MAKE.MOUNTS on your Catalyst diskette by typing "RUN /volume name of your hard
disk/CATALYST2E/MAKE.MOUNTS".
1. Catalog
The first entry on the DOS Volume Manager main menu allows you to obtain a
standard catalog of files on your hard disk or a floppy diskette. You are
prompted to enter the pathname of the directory for which the catalog is to be
displayed. In order to freeze the display, press CONTROL "S". Pressing CONTROL
"S" again will allow the display to continue.

2. Create DOS 3.3 Volume

The second entry on the DOS Volume Manager main menu allows you to create a
ProDOS file which can be used as a DOS 3.3 volume. When you select the
"Create
DOS 3.3 Volume" option, you are asked to enter the pathname of the new DOS 3.3
volume. Any standard ProDOS pathname may be entered such as
"/P/CATALYST2E/DOS".

Next you are requested to enter the size of the volume. Volume size is
specified in units of "sectors", where one sector is equivalent to 256 bytes
or
characters of storage.

The size you specify will depend on what you intend to use the volume for and
how much room is left on your hard disk. Volumes must be at least 288 sectors
(72K) in size, and may be no larger than 800 sectors (200K). The size you
specify will be automatically rounded up to the nearest multiple of 16 sectors
(4K). A standard floppy diskette contains 560 sectors (140K).

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION CONCERNING CREATING DOS 3.3 VOLUMES

Once the DOS 3.3 volume has been created and the size has been specified, you
must mount it using the Edit Mounts option within Edit mount file for DOS
3.3 application described in part 4 of this chapter in order to grant access
to it.

Last but not least, you must initialize the DOS 3.3 volume in order to be able
to store information to it. In order to do this, select DOS 3.3 BASIC from the
Catalyst main menu. at the prompt "]" type INIT HELLO. The DOS 3.3 volume that
you have previously mounted will be initialized for DOS 3.3.
3. Delete DOS 3.3 Volume
The third entry on the DOS Volume Manager main menu allows you to selectively
remove previously defined DOS 3.3 volumes from your hard disk. All storage
associated with a DOS 3.3 volume is released when IT is deleted. The freed
storage is then available for use by any subsequent volume definitions.

Actually, you may delete any ProDOS file, not just DOS 3.3 volumes. When you
select the "Delete DOS 3.3 Volume" option, you are asked to enter the pathname
of the volume to delete. Any standard ProDOS pathname may be entered.

Note that deleting a DOS 3.3 volume does not remove it from any place where it
may have been mounted. Your system may still contain a MOUNTS3.3 file with a
reference to the deleted volume. Such a reference will be ignored, however.
4. Edit Mount File for DOS 3.3 Application

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 640 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

The fourth entry on the DOS Volume Manager main menu is used to create a new
or
edit an existing MOUNTS3.3 file for DOS 3.3 BASIC.

NOTE: Apple Computer Inc. is not responsible for the contents of this
article.
Quark Technical Support

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL401.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 641 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL402.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Using DOS 3.3 with Catalyst 2.1 (3 of 5)

Header: Using DOS 3.3 with Catalyst 2.1 (3 of 5)

CHAPTER 2a

When DOS 3.3 BASIC is run, it reads the MOUNTS3.3 file from the directory
specified by the current ProDOS prefix, and uses that information to determine
on which slot/drive pair to look for its startup program (HELLO), what ProDOS
files (DOS 3.3 volumes) to mount on selected slot/drive pairs, and whether or
not to reserve room for DOS when you initialize a file or diskette.

When you select the "Edit Mount File for DOS 3.3 Application" option, you are
asked to enter the name of the subdirectory containing your MOUNTS3.3 file.
When you installed DOS 3.3 a MOUNTS3.3 file was created for you in the
CATALYST2E subdirectory. If no MOUNTS3.3 file is found in another subdirectory
you specify, you are asked if one should be created. If you enter a negative
response, you are returned to the DOS Volume Manager main menu.

If the MOUNTS3.3 file is found (or if you request a new file should be
created), you are presented with a display listing some of the file's
attributes, including its location, the slot/drive which will be used to find
the startup program (HELLO), and whether or not tracks will be reserved for
DOS
when you initialize diskettes or ProDOS volumes.

Also shown is a menu of options which allow you to set the HELLO program
location, change the DOS track allocation for diskettes or DOS 3.3 volumes,
and
edit the mounts for your MOUNTS3.3 file. Pressing ESCAPE at this menu will
return you to the DOS Volume Manager main menu.

If you select the "Edit mounts" option instead, you are presented with a list
of all slot and drive combinations, and the DOS 3.3 volume currently
associated
with each pair.
You may mount DOS 3.3 volumes in any location except those slot/drive pairs
occupied by a floppy diskette controller card which are noted with a "Disk II"
entry. NOTE: The MOUNTS3.3 file can only work with one startup program
(HELLO) located on a slot/drive pair at a time. You may, however, mount up to
12 DOS 3.3 volumes under it for access. In order to run a HELLO program from
another mounted DOS 3.3 volume, you must select the SET HELLO PROGRAM LOCATION
from the EDIT MOUNTS FILE FOR DOS 3.3. APPLICATION menu.

To edit the entry for a particular slot/drive pair, simply select the desired
entry when asked, "Edit which mount?". You will then be asked for the "New
mount file path". If you don't want any DOS 3.3 volume mounted on the
selected
slot/drive pair, simply press RETURN. Otherwise, enter the pathname for the
DOS 3.3 volume you wish to mount. You will be warned if the name of the
DOS 3.3 volume you supply cannot be found.

When you are finished editing the mounts, press ESCAPE and you will be
returned
to the menu of options for editing your MOUNTS3.3 file. If no further changes
are desired, press ESCAPE again, and you are returned to the DOS Volume
Manager
main menu.
5. Quit
The last entry on the DOS Volume Manager main menu is used to exit the
program.
To return to the Catalyst menu, type "BYE".

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 642 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

NOTE: Apple Computer Inc. is not responsible for the contents of this
article.
Quark Technical Support

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL402.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 643 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL403.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Using DOS 3.3 with Catalyst 2.1 (4 of 5)

Header: Using DOS 3.3 with Catalyst 2.1 (4 of 5)

CHAPTER 3
COPYING DOS 3.3 APPLICATIONS TO THE HARD DISK

Many DOS 3.3 applications can be used with this system provided that the
entire
application can be installed in 800 sectors or less and it is not copy
protected. A quick and easy way to copy applications to the hard disk is to
first copy the Apple II File Developer (FID) program to a DOS volume on the
hard disk, and then execute the program. To do this, perform the following
procedure.

1. Select the DOS 3.3 Volume Manager from the Catalyst menu.

2. Select Create DOS 3.3 Volume from the menu and create a DOS 3.3 volume
under the CATALYST2E subdirectory that is 800 sectors in size. This will give
you enough room to copy the rest of the Apple System Master files to the
volume
if you wish. For this example we will use a pathname of /P/CATALYST2E/DOS.
Remember that the only MOUNTS3.3 file that exists at this time that can be
associated with the new DOS 3.3 volume is located in the subdirectory
CATALYST2E. If you wish to locate the DOS 3.3 volume elsewhere, you will have
to create a MOUNTS3.3 file for that location by using the Edit Mount File for
DOS 3.3 Application option.

3. Once the DOS 3.3 volume has been created, press ESCAPE to return to the DOS
3.3 Volume Manager menu. It is now necessary to edit the MOUNTS 3.3 file for
the newly created volume. Select Edit Mount File for DOS 3.3 Application from
the menu. You will be asked for the subdirectory containing the MOUNTS3.3
file.
Type /P/CATALYST2E and press RETURN.

4. For this exercise, we will mount the DOS 3.3 volume on slot 5, drive 1.
Select EDIT MOUNTS from the menu. A list of all slot/drive pairs will be
displayed. Select number 9 (slot 5, drive 1) from the menu and enter
/P/CATALYST2E/DOS which is the pathname of the DOS 3.3 volume you have
created.
The volume will be mounted.

5. Press ESCAPE to return to the Edit Mount File for DOS 3.3 Application
menu. If you will notice, the BASIC startup program is being run from slot 6,
drive 1. Since your newly created DOS 3.3 volume is mounted on slot 5, drive
1,
you will have to change this. Select Set HELLO Program Location from the
menu and change the slot/drive location to Slot 5, Drive 1.
6. Escape back to the DOS 3.3 Volume Manager menu and select QUIT.

7. At the "]" prompt, type INIT HELLO. The DOS 3.3 volume that you created and
mounted will now be formatted for DOS 3.3. To prove this, type CATALOG. A
listing with the file HELLO will be displayed.

8. Place your Apple SYSTEM MASTER disk in drive 1. Type CATALOG S6,D1" and
press RETURN. Press RETURN until you arrrive at the bottom of the catalog. At
the prompt"]" type "BRUN FID" and press RETURN.

9. Select COPY FILES. At the prompt SOURCE SLOT? type "6", for DRIVE?
type "1". For DESTINATION SLOT? type "5". For DRIVE? type "1". For
FILENAME? type "FID".

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 644 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

10. The copy program FID will be copied to your hard disk. You may now access
it from the hard disk by selecting DOS 3.3 from the Catalyst main menu and at
the prompt "]" type "BRUN FID". You may now copy ANY non copy protected DOS
3.3
application to your DOS 3.3 volume.
In order to access DOS 3.3 applications from your hard disk, you may do one of
two things:
A.
1. Select DOS 3.3 BASIC from your Catalyst menu.
2. At the BASIC prompt "]" type CATALOG.
3. Run the application as you would from a floppy disk. ie."] RUN filename".

B.You may create a Catalyst menu entry for each DOS 3.3 application.

NOTE: Apple Computer Inc. is not responsible for the contents of this
article.
Quark Technical Support

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL403.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 645 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL404.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Using DOS 3.3 with Catalyst 2.1 (5 of 5)

Header: Using DOS 3.3 with Catalyst 2.1 (5 of 5)

CHAPTER 4
MAKING CATALYST ENTRIES FOR DOS APPLICATIONS
You may now wish to make Catalyst menu entries for your individual DOS BASIC
applications.

Each application which appears in your Catalyst menu must have an associated
MOUNTS3.3 file describing the volumes to be mounted for that application
(including the volume on which the application resides).

To make the Catalyst menu entry for your DOS BASIC application, perform the
following procedure:

1. Select the Catalyst Editor from the Catalyst menu.

2. When the Catalyst Editor main menu comes up, select the "Edit Catalyst
menu" option.
3. Using the up and down arrow keys, position the inverse bar over the menu
entry you wish your program entry to precede. Type "A" to Add a program
entry.
4. Enter the menu Display name for your application.
5. Enter "CATALYST2E/DOS3.3" for the Interpreter path.
6. Enter the prefix where the MOUNTS3.3 file for your application resides.
7. Press RETURN for P rogram path.
8. If all the above has bee n entered correctly, press RETURN when asked "Is
all this correct?". Otherwise, enter "NO" and fix the incorrect entry.
9. Press ESCAPE to return to the Catalyst Editor main menu. Enter "U" to
Update the INTERPS2E file.
10. Enter "Q" to Quit from the Catalyst Editor.

Note that the above Catalyst menu entry will simply execute the DOS 3.3 BASIC
interpreter, passing it a specific prefix for a MOUNTS3.3 file.

The MOUNTS3.3 file referenced should be set up to mount the DOS 3.3 volume on
which your application resides, and reference it as the startup volume. Since
DOS always expects its startup program to be named HELLO, your application
should have this name as well.

For example, if you wish to run the application CHECKBOOK from Catalyst, first
copy the file to the DOS 3.3 volume you created using FID. From the BASIC
prompt "]" type "RENAME CHECKBOOK,HELLO".

NOTE: Binary files are excluded from the above discussion. In order to run a
binary application, boot DOS 3.3 from the Catalyst menu and at the BASIC
prompt
"]" type BRUN filename.

NOTE: Apple Computer Inc. is not responsible for the contents of this
article.
Quark Technical Support

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL404.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 646 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL405.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Using the Old Monitor with the Apple Language Card
Header: Using the Old Monitor with the Apple Language Card

This applies to the Apple II and Apple II+.

The Apple Language Card gives you all the advantages of the Auto Start ROM
whether you have an Apple II or Apple II+. This is because there is an
Auto Start ROM on the Language Card that is used instead of the F8 ROM on the
main board. There is no way to disable this ROM if you want to use the old
monitor in an Apple II. However, there are still two ways to use the old
monitor with the Language Card.

1. Replace the Auto Start ROM on the Language Card with an old monitor ROM.
In this case, you lose the Auto Start ROM's features when you are in the BASIC
that is resident on the main board. The BASIC that is loaded into the
Language Card will still be working out of an image of the Auto Start ROM that
was loaded with the BASIC. For example, Applesoft would use the old monitor
and Integer BASIC would use the Auto start ROM.

2. This method will give you the old monitor while in the BASIC that's in the
Language Card but the BASIC on the main board will still access the Auto Start
ROM. All you need do is load an image of the old monitor into the Language
Card yourself. This is a two step process.

The hard part is to get an image of the old monitor into a DOS binary file.
First, boot DOS 3.3 on an Apple II without a Language Card. Then type:

INT
BSAVE OLDMON, A$F800, L$800

Now all you need is a program or subroutine to load the monitor into the card.
The following program fragment must be in Integer BASIC if you have an Apple
II or Applesoft if you have an Apple II+. It can be added to the HELLO or
APPLESOFT program on the DOS 3.3 Master diskette.

10 D$ = "": REM CONTROL D

20 A = PEEK ( -16255): A = PEEK ( -16255)
30 PRINT D$;"BLOAD OLDMON"
40 A = PEEK ( -16254)

The old monitor will stay there until you re-boot or reload the Language
card.
Apple Tech Notes

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL405.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 647 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL406.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: Word Juggler for the Apple II Print To Disk Option

Header: Word Juggler for the Apple II Print To Disk Option

The print to disk option in Word Juggler sends the formatted image of your
document to a diskette file just as it would appear on your screen when you
use the DISPLAY DOCUMENT feature. This print file is a standard ProDOS text
file. Although the actual Word Juggler formatting commands (CENTER, JUSTIFY,
etc.) are not written to this file, your text will appear formatted to their
specifications.

This feature is accessed from the TEXT ENTRY MODE of Word Juggler with the
command Solid-Apple "9". When selected, you will be presented with four
prompts:

First page to print? - Enter the starting number to appear in your file.
Press RETURN if you wish to start with page 1. Note that in this context,
page number does not refer to the page numbers that appear on the output, but
rather to the sequential number of the page.

Last page to print? - Enter the last page to appear in your file. Press
RETURN if you wish to print to the end of the document.

Remove control codes from output? - If you answer "Y" (or press RETURN) to
this question, the file sent to disk will not contain any printer escape code
sequences. This is necessary if you wish to transmit the document using a
telecommunications package. The escape codes may be interpreted by another
computer in a variety of different ways causing errors in transmission or
reception.

If you answer "N" to this question, all printer escape sequences will be saved
to disk in addition to the text. This will allow you to print the file with
all printer enhancements included, such as bold and underline.

Pathname? - Enter the name of the file to hold the format

NOTE: Apple Computer Inc. is not responsible for the contents of this
article.
Quark Technical Support

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL406.TXT

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 648 of 649
 APPLE II COMPUTER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

#####################################################################
### FILE: A2TIL407.TXT
#####################################################################

Description: WPL: How to make AUTOLETTER use surnames

Header: WPL: How to make AUTOLETTER use surnames

Make these modifications to the WPL program Autoletter on page 96 of the

AppleWriter III manual as follows:

BEFORE
------
L .D1/ADDRS!<(X)>!<!N
PGO FOUND
PGO QUIT
FOUND PLS .D1/ADDRS!<(X)>! !N=$A

AFTER
-----
L .D1/ADDRS!<(X)>!@!N
PGO FOUND
PGO QUIT
FOUND PLS .D1/ADDRS!@(X)@!<!N=$A

Then modify your address file as below:

BEFORE AFTER
------ -----
<1>John Smith <1>John Smith
1234 Elm Street 1234 Elm Street
Anytown, USA 12345 Anytown, USA 12345
<2>Jane Doe @1@Mr. Smith<2>Jane Doe
5678 Main Ave. 5678 Main Ave.
Nowhere, Indiana 98765 Nowhere, Indiana 98765
< @2@Ms Doe<

There are other methods of achieving the desired result, but this one is easy
and it affords the flexibility of using a different "dear" name than the first
line of the address (i.e., Company Name on the first line of the address).

This method also works quite well with Apple Writer II & IIe. For the file
name
path .D1/ADDRS, substitute ADDRS,D1 for DOS or simply ADDRS for ProDOS.
Apple Technical Communications

Keywords:

### END OF FILE A2TIL407.TXT

F I N I S

Apple II Computer Family Articles -- Apple Technical Info Library (TIL)

March 1997 -- Page 649 of 649